Pc350 Manual de Operacion y Mantenimiento - Ing

SEN01983-04
HYDRAULIC PC300 -8
EXCAVATOR
PC300LC -8
PC350 -8
PC350LC -8
PC300- 60001
PC300LC- 60001
SERIAL NUMBERS and up
PC350- 60001
PC350LC- 60001
SEN01985-04
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8
Machine model Serial number

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC300LC-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
00 Index and foreword 1

Index
Composition of shop manual .......................................................................................................................... 2

Table of contents ............................................................................................................................................. 4
PC300, 350-8 1
SEN01985-04 00 Index and foreword
Composition of shop manual 1

The contents of this shop manual are shown together with Form No. in a list.
Note 1: Always keep the latest version of this manual in accordance with this list and utilize accordingly.
The marks shown to the right of Form No. denote the following:
Q: New issue (to be filed additionally) q: Revision (to be replaced for each Form No.)
Note 2: This shop manual can be supplied for each Form No.
Note 3: To file this shop manual in the special binder for management, handle it as follows:
• Place a divider on the top of each section in the file after matching the Tub No. with No. indicated
next to each Section Name shown in the table below:
• File overview and other materials in sections in the order shown below and utilize them accord-
ingly.
Section Title Form Number
Shop Manual, contents binder, binder label and tabs SEN01983-04
00 Index and foreword SEN01984-04

Index SEN01985-04 q
Foreword and general information SEN01986-01 q
01 Specification SEN01987-01
Specification and technical data SEN01988-01
10 Structure, function and maintenance standard SEN01989-01

Engine and cooling system SEN01990-00
Power train SEN01991-00
Undercarriage and frame SEN01992-00
Hydraulic system, Part 1 SEN01993-00
Work equipment SEN01996-01
Cab and its attachments SEN01997-00
Electrical system SEN01998-00
20 Standard value table SEN01999-01

Standard service value table SEN02624-01 q
30 Testing and adjusting SEN02000-01

Testing and adjusting, Part 1 SEN02625-01 q
40 Troubleshooting SEN02001-01
Failure code table and fuse locations SEN02627-01 q
General information on troubleshooting SEN02628-01 q
Troubleshooting by failure code (Display of code), Part 1 SEN02629-01 q
Troubleshooting of electrical system (E-mode) SEN02632-01 q
Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system (H-mode) SEN02633-01 q
2 PC300, 350-8
Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode) SEN02634-01 q
50 Disassembly and assembly SEN02002-00

General information on disassembly and assembly SEN02635-00
Hydraulic system SEN02639-00
90 Diagrams and drawings SEN02003-01

Hydraulic diagrams and drawings SEN02004-00
Electrical diagrams and drawings SEN02005-01
PC300, 350-8 3
Table of contents 1
00 Index and foreword
Index SEN01985-04
Composition of shop manual ................................................................................................... 2
Table of contents...................................................................................................................... 4
Foreword and general information SEN01986-01

Safety notice................................................................................................................................ 2
How to read the shop manual ..................................................................................................... 7
Explanation of terms for maintenance standard.......................................................................... 9
Handling of electric equipment and hydraulic component........................................................... 11
Handling of connectors newly used for engines.......................................................................... 20
How to read electric wire code .................................................................................................... 23
Precautions when carrying out operation .................................................................................... 26
Method of disassembling and connecting push-pull type coupler ............................................... 29
Standard tightening torque table ................................................................................................. 32
Conversion table ......................................................................................................................... 36
01 Specification
Specification and technical data SEN01988-01
Specification dimension drawings ............................................................................................... 2
Dimensions.................................................................................................................................. 2
Working ranges ........................................................................................................................... 3
Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 4
Weight table ................................................................................................................................ 10
Table of fuel, coolant and lubricants ............................................................................................ 12
10 Structure, function and maintenance standard

Engine related parts .................................................................................................................... 2
Radiator, oil cooler and aftercooler.............................................................................................. 3
Power train .................................................................................................................................. 2
Swing circle ................................................................................................................................. 3
Swing machinery ......................................................................................................................... 4
Final drive.................................................................................................................................... 6
Sprocket ...................................................................................................................................... 8
Track frame and recoil spring ...................................................................................................... 2
Idler ............................................................................................................................................. 4
Carrier roller ................................................................................................................................ 6
Track roller................................................................................................................................... 7
Track shoe................................................................................................................................... 8
Hydraulic equipment layout drawing ........................................................................................... 2
Hydraulic tank and filter............................................................................................................... 4
Hydraulic pump ........................................................................................................................... 6
Control valve ............................................................................................................................... 2
CLSS ........................................................................................................................................... 14
Outline of CLSS........................................................................................................................... 14
Basic principle ............................................................................................................................. 15
Functions and operation by valve................................................................................................ 18
Hydraulic circuit diagram and the name of valves....................................................................... 18
Unload valve................................................................................................................................ 20
4 PC300, 350-8
Introduction of LS pressure ......................................................................................................... 22

LS bypass plug............................................................................................................................ 23
Pressure compensation valve ..................................................................................................... 24
Pressure compensation valve inner shuttle valve ....................................................................... 27
Boom regeneration circuit ........................................................................................................... 29
Arm regeneration circuit .............................................................................................................. 31
Merge-divider valve..................................................................................................................... 33
LS select valve ............................................................................................................................ 35
Self pressure reducing valve....................................................................................................... 36
Travel junction valve.................................................................................................................... 39
Travel PPC shuttle valve ............................................................................................................. 41
Boom drift prevention valve......................................................................................................... 43
Arm drift prevention valve ........................................................................................................... 46
Quick return valve ....................................................................................................................... 50
Lift check valve............................................................................................................................ 52
Main relief valve .......................................................................................................................... 53
2-stage safety-suction valve........................................................................................................ 54
Variable pressure compensation valve ....................................................................................... 56
Attachment circuit selector valve................................................................................................. 58
Hydraulic drift prevention valve ................................................................................................... 60
Valve control................................................................................................................................ 2
PPC valve ................................................................................................................................... 4
Solenoid valve............................................................................................................................. 26
PPC accumulator ........................................................................................................................ 28
Return oil filter ............................................................................................................................. 29
Center swivel joint ....................................................................................................................... 30
Travel motor ................................................................................................................................ 31
Swing motor ................................................................................................................................ 43
Hydraulic cylinder........................................................................................................................ 52
Work equipment .......................................................................................................................... 2
Dimensions of components ......................................................................................................... 4
Air conditioner piping................................................................................................................... 2
Engine control ............................................................................................................................. 2
Electronic control system ............................................................................................................ 11
Monitor system............................................................................................................................ 36
Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 63
KOMTRAX terminal system ........................................................................................................ 66
20 Standard value table

Standard service value table SEN02624-01
Standard value table for engine related parts.............................................................................. 2
Standard value table for chassis related parts ............................................................................ 3
30 Testing and adjusting

Testing and adjusting, Part 1 SEN02625-01
Tools for testing, adjusting and troubleshooting .......................................................................... 3
Testing engine speed .................................................................................................................. 7
Testing air boost pressure ........................................................................................................... 8
Testing exhaust gas color............................................................................................................ 9
Adjusting valve clearance ........................................................................................................... 11
Testing compression pressure .................................................................................................... 13
Testing blow-by pressure ............................................................................................................ 17
PC300, 350-8 5
Testing engine oil pressure.......................................................................................................... 18

Testing fuel pressure ................................................................................................................... 19
Handling during cylinder cut-out operation.................................................................................. 23
Handling during no injection cranking operation ......................................................................... 23
Testing fuel return rate and leakage ............................................................................................ 24
Bleeding air from fuel circuit ........................................................................................................ 26
Checking fuel circuit for leakage ................................................................................................. 27
Testing and adjusting air compressor belt tension ...................................................................... 28
Replacing fan belt........................................................................................................................ 29
Replacing alternator belt ............................................................................................................. 30
Testing clearance in swing circle bearings .................................................................................. 31
Testing and adjusting track shoe tension .................................................................................... 32
Testing and adjusting oil pressure in work equipment, swing and travel circuit .......................... 33
Testing and adjusting control circuit oil pressure......................................................................... 37
Testing and adjusting pump PC control circuit oil pressure......................................................... 38
Testing and adjusting pump LS control circuit oil pressure ......................................................... 41
Testing solenoid valve output pressure ....................................................................................... 46
Testing PPC valve output pressure ............................................................................................. 50
Adjusting play of work equipment and swing PPC valves........................................................... 51
Inspecting locations of hydraulic drift of work equipment ............................................................ 52
Releasing remaining pressure in hydraulic circuit ....................................................................... 54
Testing oil leakage amount.......................................................................................................... 54
Bleeding air from various parts.................................................................................................... 57
Diode inspection procedures....................................................................................................... 59
Special functions of machine monitor.......................................................................................... 2
Handling voltage circuit of engine controller................................................................................ 2
Preparation work for troubleshooting of electrical system ........................................................... 3
Procedure for testing diodes ....................................................................................................... 7
Pm clinic service.......................................................................................................................... 8
40 Troubleshooting
Failure code table and fuse locations SEN02627-01
Failure codes table ...................................................................................................................... 2
Fuse locations ............................................................................................................................. 5
General information on troubleshooting SEN02628-01
Points to remember when troubleshooting .................................................................................. 2
Sequence of events in troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 3
Checks before troubleshooting.................................................................................................... 4
Classification and troubleshooting steps ..................................................................................... 5
Information in troubleshooting table ............................................................................................ 6
Connection table for connector pin numbers............................................................................... 11
T- branch box and T- branch adapter table ................................................................................. 47
Troubleshooting by failure code (Display of code), Part 1 SEN02629-01
Failure code [A000N1] Eng. Hi Out of Std................................................................................... 3
Failure code [AA10NX] Air cleaner Clogging .............................................................................. 4
Failure code [AB00KE] Charge Voltage Low............................................................................... 6
Failure code [B@BAZG] Eng Oil Press. Low .............................................................................. 8
Failure code [B@BAZK] Eng Oil Level Low ................................................................................ 10
Failure code [B@BCNS] Eng. Water Overheat ........................................................................... 12
Failure code [B@BCZK] Eng Water Level Low ........................................................................... 14
Failure code [B@HANS] Hydr Oil Overheat................................................................................ 16
Failure code [CA111] EMC Critical Internal Failure ..................................................................... 17
Failure code [CA115] Eng Ne and Bkup Speed Sens Error ........................................................ 17
Failure code [CA122] Chg Air Press Sensor High Error.............................................................. 18
Failure code [CA123] Chg Air Press Sensor Low Error .............................................................. 20
6 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [CA131] Throttle Sensor High Error ....................................................................... 22

Failure code [CA132] Throttle Sensor Low Error ........................................................................ 24
Failure code [CA144] Coolant Temp Sens High Error................................................................. 26
Failure code [CA145] Coolant Temp Sens Low Error ................................................................. 28
Failure code [CA153] Chg Air Temp Sensor High Error.............................................................. 30
Failure code [CA154] Chg Air Temp Sensor Low Error............................................................... 32
Failure code [CA187] Sens Supply 2 Volt Low Error................................................................... 34
Failure code [CA221] Ambient Press Sens High Error ............................................................... 36
Failure code [CA222] Ambient Press Sens Low Error ................................................................ 38
Failure code [CA227] Sens Supply 2 Volt High Error.................................................................. 40
Failure code [CA234] Eng Overspeed ........................................................................................ 41
Failure code [CA238] Ne Speed Sens Supply Volt Error ............................................................ 42
Failure code [CA271] IMV/PCV1 Short Error .............................................................................. 43
Failure code [CA272] IMV/PCV1 Open Error.............................................................................. 44
Failure code [CA322] Inj #1 Open/Short Error ............................................................................ 46
Failure code [CA342] Calibration Code Incompatibility ............................................................... 3
Failure code [CA351] Injectors Drive Circuit Error ...................................................................... 4
Failure code [CA352] Sens Supply 1 Volt Low Error................................................................... 6
Failure code [CA386] Sens Supply 1 Volt High Error.................................................................. 8
Failure code [CA428] Water in Fuel Sensor High Error .............................................................. 10
Failure code [CA429] Water in Fuel Sensor Low Error ............................................................... 12
Failure code [CA441] Battery Voltage Low Error ........................................................................ 14
Failure code [CA442] Battery Voltage High Error........................................................................ 16
Failure code [CA449] Rail Press Very High Error ....................................................................... 18
Failure code [CA451] Rail Press Sensor High Error ................................................................... 22
Failure code [CA452] Rail Press Sensor Low Error .................................................................... 24
Failure code [CA553] Rail Press High Error................................................................................ 26
Failure code [CA559] Rail Press Low Error ................................................................................ 27
Failure code [CA689] Eng Ne Speed Sensor Error..................................................................... 29
Failure code [CA731] Eng Bkup Speed Sens Phase Error ......................................................... 31
Failure code [CA757] All Persistent Data Lost Error ................................................................... 32
Failure code [CA778] Eng Bkup Speed Sensor Error ................................................................. 34
Failure code [CA1633] KOMNET Datalink Timeout Error ........................................................... 36
Failure code [CA2185] Throt Sens Sup Volt High Error .............................................................. 38
Failure code [CA2186] Throt Sens Sup Volt Low Error............................................................... 39
Failure code [CA2249] Rail Press Very Low Error ...................................................................... 40
Failure code [CA2265] Electric Lift Pump High Error .................................................................. 42
Failure code [CA2266] Electric Lift Pump Low Error ................................................................... 44
Failure code [CA2555] Grid Htr Relay Volt High Error ................................................................ 46
Failure code [CA2556] Grid Htr Relay Volt Low Error ................................................................. 48
Failure code [D110KB] Battery Relay Drive S/C ......................................................................... 50
Failure code [D196KA] Service Return Relay Disc. .................................................................... 52
Failure code [D196KB] Service Return Relay S/C ...................................................................... 54
Failure code [DA25KP] 5V sensor 1 power abnormality ............................................................. 56
Failure code [DA2RMC] Pump Comm. Abnormality ................................................................... 60
Failure code [DA2SKQ] Model Selection Abnormality ................................................................ 62
Failure code [DAFRMC] CAN discon (Monitor detected) ............................................................ 4
Failure code [DHPAMA] F Pump Press Sensor Abnormality ...................................................... 6
Failure code [DHPBMA] R Pump Press Sensor Abnormality ..................................................... 8
Failure code [DHS3MA] Arm Curl PPC Sen. Abnormality .......................................................... 10
Failure code [DHS4MA] Bucket Curl PPC Press Sensor Abnormality ........................................ 12
PC300, 350-8 7
Failure code [DW43KA] Travel Speed Sol. Disc. ........................................................................ 14

Failure code [DW43KB] Travel Speed Sol. S/C .......................................................................... 16
Failure code [DW45KA] Swing Brake Sol. Disc. ......................................................................... 18
Failure code [DW45KB] Swing Brake Sol. S/C ........................................................................... 22
Failure code [DW91KA] Travel Junction Sol. Disc. ..................................................................... 24
Failure code [DW91KB] Travel Junction Sol. S/C ....................................................................... 26
Failure code [DWJ0KA] Merge-divider Sol. Disc......................................................................... 28
Failure code [DWJ0KB] Merge-divider Sol. S/C.......................................................................... 30
Failure code [DWK0KA] 2-stage Relief Sol. Disc. ....................................................................... 32
Failure code [DWK0KB] 2-stage Relief Sol. S/C ......................................................................... 34
Failure code [DXA0KA] PC-EPC Sol. Disc.................................................................................. 36
Failure code [DXA0KB] PC-EPC Sol. S/C................................................................................... 38
Failure code [DXE0KA] LS-EPC Sol. Disc. ................................................................................. 40
Failure code [DXE0KB] LS-EPC Sol. S/C ................................................................................... 42
Failure code [DXE4KA] Service Current EPC Disc. .................................................................... 44
Failure code [DXE4KB] Service Current EPC S/C ...................................................................... 45
Failure code [DY20KA] Wiper Working Abnormality ................................................................... 46
Failure code [DY20MA] Wiper Parking Abnormality.................................................................... 48
Failure code [DY2CKB] Washer Drive Short ............................................................................... 50
Failure code [DY2DKB] Wiper Drive (For) Short ......................................................................... 52
Failure code [DY2EKB] Wiper Drive (Rev) Short ........................................................................ 54
Troubleshooting of electrical system (E-mode) SEN02632-01
Before carrying out troubleshooting of electrical system............................................................. 4
Information contained in troubleshooting table............................................................................ 6
E-1 Engine does not start............................................................................................................ 7
E-2 Auto-decelerator does not operate ....................................................................................... 10
E-3 Automatic warming-up system does not operate.................................................................. 12
E-4 Preheater does not operate .................................................................................................. 14
E-5 All work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism do not move .......................................... 16
E-6 Power maximizing function does not operate ....................................................................... 18
E-7 Machine monitor does not display at all................................................................................ 20
E-8 Machine monitor does not display some items..................................................................... 22
E-9 Contents of display by machine monitor are different from applicable machine................... 22
E-10 Fuel level monitor was lighted in red while engine running ................................................ 23
E-11 Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally .......................................... 24
E-12 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not indicate normally .............................................. 26
E-13 Fuel level gauge does not indicate normally....................................................................... 27
E-14 Swing lock monitor does not indicate normally................................................................... 28
E-15 When monitor switch is operated, monitor displays nothing............................................... 30
E-16 Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate........................................................ 32
E-17 Machine push-up function does not operate normally ........................................................ 36
E-18 Monitoring function fails to display “boom raise” normally .................................................. 38
E-19 Monitoring function fails to display “boom lower” normally ................................................. 40
E-20 Monitoring function fails to display “arm IN” normally ......................................................... 42
E-21 Monitoring function fails to display “arm OUT” normally ..................................................... 44
E-22 Monitoring function fails to display “bucket CURL” normally .............................................. 46
E-23 Monitoring function fails to display “bucket DUMP” normally.............................................. 48
E-24 Monitoring function fails to display “swing” normally........................................................... 50
E-25 Monitoring function fails to display “travel” normally ........................................................... 52
E-26 Monitoring function fails to display “travel differential pressure” normally .......................... 54
E-27 Monitoring function fails to display “service” normally ........................................................ 56
E-28 KOMTRAX system does not operate normally ................................................................... 58
E-29 Air conditioner does not operate......................................................................................... 60
E-30 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding .................................................... 62
E-31 Horn does not sound .......................................................................................................... 64
Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system (H-mode) SEN02633-01
System chart for hydraulic and mechanical system .................................................................... 4
Information contained in troubleshooting table............................................................................ 6
8 PC300, 350-8
H-1 All work equipment lack power, or travel and swing speeds are slow .................................. 8
H-2 Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls........................................................................ 10
H-3 No work equipment, swing or travel move ........................................................................... 11
H-4 Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump ......................................................... 11
H-5 Auto-decelerator does not work ........................................................................................... 12
H-6 Fine control mode does not function or responds slow ........................................................ 12
H-7 Boom moves slowly or lacks power ..................................................................................... 13
H-8 Arm moves slowly or lacks power ........................................................................................ 14
H-9 Bucket moves slowly or lacks power.................................................................................... 15
H-10 Work equipment does not move in its single operation ...................................................... 15
H-11 Work equipment has a bit too fast hydraulic drift................................................................ 16
H-12 Work equipment has big time lag ....................................................................................... 18
H-13 Other work equipment moves when relieving single circuit................................................ 18
H-14 Power max. switch does not operate ................................................................................. 19
H-15 In compound operation, work equipment with larger load moves slowly ........................... 19
H-16 In swing + boom RAISE operation, boom moves slowly .................................................... 20
H-17 In swing + travel operation, travel speed drops sharply ..................................................... 20
H-18 Machine swerves in travel .................................................................................................. 21
H-19 Machine travels slowly ....................................................................................................... 22
H-20 Machine cannot be easily steered or lacks power.............................................................. 23
H-21 Travel speed does not shift, or it is too slow or fast............................................................ 24
H-22 Track shoe does not turn (on one side only) ...................................................................... 25
H-23 Machine does not swing..................................................................................................... 26
H-24 Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow............................................................ 28
H-25 Excessive overrun when stopping swing............................................................................ 30
H-26 There is big shock when stopping swing............................................................................ 31
H-27 Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging. ............................................. 31
H-28 Swing hydraulic drift is too big ............................................................................................ 32
Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode) SEN02634-01
Method of using troubleshooting chart ........................................................................................ 3
S-1 Starting performance is poor ................................................................................................ 6
S-2 Engine does not start............................................................................................................ 7
S-3 Engine does not pick up smoothly........................................................................................ 10
S-4 Engine stops during operations ............................................................................................ 11
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly .......................................................................................... 12
S-6 Engine lacks output (or lacks power).................................................................................... 13
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion) ................................................................ 14
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) .................................................... 15
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly ....................................................................................... 16
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive........................................................................................... 17
S-11 Oil is in coolant (or coolant spurts back or coolant level goes down) ................................. 18
S-12 Oil pressure drops .............................................................................................................. 19
S-13 Oil level rises (Entry of coolant or fuel) ............................................................................... 20
S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheating) ....................................................... 21
S-15 Abnormal noise is made ..................................................................................................... 22
S-16 Vibration is excessive ......................................................................................................... 23
50 Disassembly and assembly

General information on disassembly and assembly SEN02635-00
How to read this manual ............................................................................................................. 2
Coating materials list................................................................................................................... 4
Special tools list........................................................................................................................... 7
Sketches of special tools............................................................................................................. 11
Removal and installation of fuel supply pump assembly............................................................. 2
Removal and installation of engine front seal ............................................................................. 5
Removal and installation of engine rear seal .............................................................................. 7
PC300, 350-8 9
Removal and installation of cylinder head assembly................................................................... 12

Removal and installation of radiator assembly............................................................................ 24
Removal and installation of hydraulic oil cooler assembly .......................................................... 26
Removal and installation of aftercooler assembly ....................................................................... 28
Removal and installation of engine and hydraulic pump assembly ............................................. 29
Removal and installation of final drive assembly......................................................................... 2
Disassembly and assembly of final drive assembly .................................................................... 3
Removal and installation of swing motor and swing machinery assembly .................................. 11
Disassembly and assembly of swing motor and swing machinery assembly ............................. 12
Removal and installation of swing circle assembly ..................................................................... 19
Disassembly and assembly of carrier roller................................................................................. 2
Disassembly and assembly of track roller assembly................................................................... 3
Disassembly and assembly of idler assembly............................................................................. 4
Disassembly and assembly of recoil spring ................................................................................ 7
Removal and installation of sprocket........................................................................................... 9
Expansion and installation of track shoe assembly ..................................................................... 10
Removal and installation of revolving frame assembly ............................................................... 11
Removal and installation of counterweight assembly.................................................................. 13
Hydraulic system SEN02639-00
Removal and installation of center swivel joint assembly............................................................ 2
Disassembly and assembly of center swivel joint assembly ....................................................... 4
Removal and installation of hydraulic tank assembly .................................................................. 5
Removal and installation of control valve assembly .................................................................... 7
Disassembly and assembly of control valve assembly ............................................................... 10
Removal and installation of hydraulic pump assembly................................................................ 12
Removal and installation of oil seal in hydraulic pump input shaft .............................................. 14
Disassembly and assembly of work equipment PPC valve assembly ........................................ 15
Disassembly and assembly of travel PPC valve assembly ......................................................... 16
Disassembly and assembly of hydraulic cylinder assembly........................................................ 17
Removal and installation of work equipment assembly............................................................... 2
Removal and installation of operator's cab assembly ................................................................. 2
Removal and installation of operator cab glass (stuck glass) ..................................................... 5
Removal and installation of front window assembly .................................................................... 15
Removal and installation of floor frame assembly ....................................................................... 22
Removal and installation of air conditioner unit assembly........................................................... 2
Removal and installation of KOMTRAX communication modem assembly ................................ 5
Removal and installation of monitor assembly ............................................................................ 6
Removal and installation of pump controller assembly ............................................................... 8
Removal and installation of engine controller.............................................................................. 10
90 Diagrams and drawings

Hydraulic diagrams and drawings SEN02004-00
Hydraulic circuit diagram ............................................................................................................. 3
Electrical diagrams and drawings SEN02005-01
Electrical circuit diagram ............................................................................................................. 3
Connector arrangement diagram ................................................................................................ 5
10 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 11
SEN01985-04
PC300, 350(LC)-8 Hydraulic excavator
Form No. SEN01985-04
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 05-08 (01)
12
SEN01986-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
00 Index and foreword 1

Foreword and general information
Safety notice ................................................................................................................................................... 2
How to read the shop manual ......................................................................................................................... 7
Explanation of terms for maintenance standard ............................................................................................. 9
Handling of electric equipment and hydraulic component .............................................................................11
Handling of connectors newly used for engines ........................................................................................... 20
How to read electric wire code...................................................................................................................... 23
Precautions when carrying out operation...................................................................................................... 26
Method of disassembling and connecting push-pull type coupler................................................................. 29
Standard tightening torque table ................................................................................................................... 32
Conversion table ........................................................................................................................................... 36
PC300, 350-8 1
Safety notice 1
(Rev. 2008/02)
Important safety notice
Proper service and repair are extremely important for safe machine operation. The service and repair
techniques recommended by Komatsu and described in this manual are both effective and safe.
Some of these techniques require the use of tools specially designed by Komatsu for the specific
purpose.
To prevent injury to workers, the symbol k is used to mark safety precautions in this manual. The
cautions accompanying these symbols should always be followed carefully. If any dangerous situa-
tion arises or may possibly arise, first consider safety, and take the necessary actions to deal with
the situation.
1. General precautions 7) If welding repairs are needed, always

k Mistakes in operation are extremely have a trained and experienced welder
dangerous. Read the Operation and carry out the work. When carrying out
Maintenance Manual carefully before w elding work, alw ays wear welding
operating the machine. In addition, gloves, apron, shielding goggles, cap and
read this manual and understand its other clothes suited for welding work.
contents before starting the work. 8) Before starting work, warm up your body
1) Before carrying out any greasing or thoroughly to start work under good condi-
repairs, read all the safety plates stuck to tion.
the machine. For the locations of the 9) Avoid continuing work for long hours and
safety plates and detailed explanation of take rests at proper intervals to keep your
precautions, see the Operation and Main- body in good condition. Take rests in
tenance Manual. specified safe places.
2) Decide a place in the repair workshop to
keep tools and removed parts. Always Safety points
keep the tools and parts in their correct
places. Always keep the work area clean 1 Good arrangement
and make sure that there is no dirt, water, 2 Correct work clothes
or oil on the floor. Smoke only in the areas 3 Following work standard
provided for smoking. Never smoke while
working. 4 Making and checking signs
3) When carrying out any operation, always Prohibition of operation and handling by
5
wear safety shoes and helmet. Do not unlicensed workers
wear loose work clothes, or clothes with 6 Safety check before starting work
buttons missing.
Wearing protective goggles
q Always wear safety glasses when hit- 7
(for cleaning or grinding work)
ting parts with a hammer.
q Always wear safety glasses when Wearing shielding goggles and protectors
8
grinding parts with a grinder, etc. (for welding work)
4) When carrying out any operation with 2 or 9 Good physical condition and preparation
more workers, always agree on the oper- Precautions against work which you are
ating procedure before starting. Always 10
not used to or you are used to too much
inform your fellow workers before starting
any step of the operation. Before starting
work, hang UNDER REPAIR warning
signs in the operator's compartment.
5) Only qualified workers must carry out work
and operation which require license or
qualification.
6) Keep all tools in good condition, learn the
correct way to use them, and use the
proper ones of them. Before starting work,
thoroughly check the tools, machine, fork-
lift, service car, etc.
2 PC300, 350-8
2. Preparations for work 6) When removing a cover which is under

1) Before adding oil or making any repairs, internal pressure or under pressure from a
park the machine on a hard and level spring, always leave 2 bolts in diagonal
ground, and apply the parking brake and positions. Loosen those bolts gradually
block the wheels or tracks to prevent the and alternately to release the pressure,
machine from moving. and then remove the cover.
2) Before starting work, lower the work 7) When removing components, be careful
equipment (blade, ripper, bucket, etc.) to not to break or damage the electrical wir-
the ground. If this is not possible, insert ing. Damaged wiring may cause electrical
the lock pin or use blocks to prevent the fires.
work equipment from falling. In addition, 8) When removing piping, stop the fuel or oil
be sure to lock all the control levers and from spilling out. If any fuel or oil drips
hang warning signs on them. onto the floor, wipe it up immediately. Fuel
3) When disassembling or assembling, sup- or oil on the floor can cause you to slip
port the machine with blocks, jacks, or and can even start fires.
stands before starting work. 9) As a general rule, do not use gasoline to
4) Remove all mud and oil from the steps or wash parts. Do not use it to clean electri-
other places used to get on and off the cal parts, in particular.
machine. Always use the handrails, lad- 10) Be sure to assemble all parts again in their
ders or steps when getting on or off the original places. Replace any damaged
m a c h i n e . N e v e r j u m p o n o r o ff t h e parts and parts which must not be reused
machine. If it is impossible to use the with new parts. When installing hoses and
handrails, ladders or steps, use a stand to wires, be sure that they will not be dam-
provide safe footing. aged by contact with other parts when the
machine is operated.
3. Precautions during work 11) When installing high pressure hoses,
1) Before disconnecting or removing compo- make sure that they are not twisted. Dam-
nents of the oil, water, or air circuits, first aged tubes are dangerous, so be
release the pressure completely from the extremely careful when installing tubes for
circuit. When removing the oil filler cap, a high pressure circuits. In addition, check
drain plug, or an oil pressure pickup plug, t h a t c o n n e c t i n g pa r ts a r e c o r r e c t l y
loosen it slowly to prevent the oil from installed.
spurting out. 12) When assembling or installing parts,
2) The coolant and oil in the circuits are hot always tighten them to the specified
when the engine is stopped, so be careful torques. When installing protective parts
not to get scalded. Wait for the oil and such as guards, or parts which vibrate vio-
coolant to cool before carrying out any lently or rotate at high speed, be particu-
work on the oil or water circuits. larly careful to check that they are
3) Before starting work, stop the engine. installed correctly.
When working on or around a rotating 13) When aligning 2 holes, never insert your
part, in particular, stop the engine. When fingers or hand. Be careful not to get your
checking the machine without stopping fingers caught in a hole.
the engine (measuring oil pressure, 14) When measuring hydraulic pressure,
revolving speed, temperature, etc.), take check that the measuring tools are cor-
extreme care not to get rolled or caught in rectly assembled.
rotating parts or moving parts. 15) Take care when removing or installing the
4) Before starting work, remove the leads tracks of track-type machines. When
from the battery. Always remove the lead removing the track, the track separates
from the negative (–) terminal first. suddenly, so never let anyone stand at
5) When raising a heavy component (heavier either end of the track.
than 25 kg), use a hoist or crane. Before 16) If the engine is operated for a long time in
starting work, check that the slings (wire a place which is not ventilated well, you
ropes, chains, and hooks) are free from may suffer from gas poisoning. Accord-
damage. Always use slings which have ingly, open the windows and doors to ven-
ample capacity and install them to proper tilate well.
places. Operate the hoist or crane slowly
to prevent the component from hitting any
other part. Do not work with any part still
raised by the hoist or crane.
PC300, 350-8 3
4. Precautions for sling work and making

signs
1) Only one appointed worker must make
signs and co-workers must communicate
with each other frequently. The appointed
sign maker must make specified signs
clearly at a place where he is well seen
from the operator's seat and where he can
see the working condition easily. The sign
maker must always stand in front of the
load and guide the operator safely.
q Do not stand under the load.
q Do not step on the load.
2) Check the slings before starting sling
work.
8) When installing wire ropes to an angular
3) Keep putting on gloves during sling work.
load, apply pads to protect the wire ropes.
(Put on leather gloves, if available.)
If the load is slippery, apply proper mate-
4) Measure the weight of the load by the eye
rial to prevent the wire rope from slipping.
and check its center of gravity.
9) Use the specified eyebolts and fix wire
5) Use proper sling according to the weight
ropes, chains, etc. to them with shackles,
of the load and method of slinging. If too
etc.
thick wire ropes are used to sling a light
10) Apply wire ropes to the middle portion of
load, the load may slip and fall.
the hook.
6) Do not sling a load with 1 wire rope alone.
q Slinging near the tip of the hook may
If it is slung so, it may rotate and may slip
cause the rope to slip off the hook
out of the rope. Install 2 or more wire
during hoisting. The hook has the
ropes symmetrically.
k Slinging with 1 rope may cause
maximum strength at the middle por-
tion.
turning of the load during hoisting,
untwisting of the rope, or slipping
of the rope from its original wind-
ing position on the load, which can
result in a dangerous accident.
7) Limit the hanging angle to 60°, as a rule.
Do not sling a heavy load with ropes form-
ing a wide hanging angle from the hook.
When hoisting a load with 2 or more
ropes, the force subjected to each rope
will increase with the hanging angle. The
table below shows the variation of allow-
able load in kN {kg} when hoisting is made
with 2 ropes, each of which is allowed to
sling up to 9.8 kN {1,000 kg} vertically, at
various hanging angles. When the 2 ropes 11) Do not use twisted or kinked wire ropes.
sling a load vertically, up to 19.6 kN {2,000 12) When lifting up a load, observe the follow-
kg} of total weight can be suspended. ing.
This weight is reduced to 9.8 kN {1,000 q Wind in the crane slowly until wire
kg} when the 2 ropes make a hanging ropes are stretched. When settling
angle of 120°. If the 2 ropes sling a 19.6 the wire ropes with the hand, do not
kN {2,000 kg} load at a lifting angle of grasp them but press them from
150°, each of them is subjected to a force above. If you grasp them, your fingers
as large as 39.2 kN {4,000 kg}. may be caught.
q After the wire ropes are stretched,
stop the crane and check the condi-
tion of the slung load, wire ropes, and
pads.
4 PC300, 350-8
q If the load is unstable or the wire rope 13) If the hoist stops because of a power fail-
or chains are twisted, lower the load ure, turn the power switch OFF. When
and lift it up again. turning on a switch which was turned OFF
q Do not lift up the load slantingly. by the electric shock prevention earth
13) When lifting down a load, observe the fol- leakage breaker, check that the devices
lowing. related to that switch are not in operation
q When lifting down a load, stop it tem- state.
porarily at 30 cm above the floor, and 14) If you find an obstacle around the hoist,
then lower it slowly. stop the operation.
q Check that the load is stable, and 15) After finishing the work, stop the hoist at
then remove the sling. the specified position and raise the hook
q Remove kinks and dirt from the wire to at least 2 m above the floor. Do not
ropes and chains used for the sling leave the sling installed to the hook.
work, and put them in the specified
place. 7. Selecting wire ropes
1) Select adequate ropes depending on the
5. Precautions for using mobile crane weight of parts to be hoisted, referring to
a Read the Operation and Maintenance the table below.
Manual of the crane carefully in advance
and operate the crane safely. Wire ropes
(Standard “Z” twist ropes without galvanizing)
6. Precautions for using overhead hoist crane (JIS G3525, No. 6, Type 6X37-A)
k When raising a heavy part (heavier Nominal
Allowable load
than 25 kg), use a hoist, etc. In Disas- diameter of rope
sembly and assembly, the weight of a mm kN ton
part heavier than 25 kg is indicated 10 8.8 0.9
after the mark of 4. 12 12.7 1.3
1) Before starting work, inspect the wire 14 17.3 1.7
ropes, brake, clutch, controller, rails, over 16 22.6 2.3
wind stop device, electric shock preven- 18 28.6 2.9
tion earth leakage breaker, crane collision 20 35.3 3.6
prevention device, and power application
25 55.3 5.6
warning lamp, and check safety.
30 79.6 8.1
2) Observe the signs for sling work.
40 141.6 14.4
3) Operate the hoist at a safe place.
4) Check the direction indicator plates (east, 50 221.6 22.6
west, south, and north) and the directions 60 318.3 32.4
of the control buttons without fail.
5) Do not sling a load slantingly. Do not move a The allowable load is one-sixth of the
the crane while the slung load is swinging. breaking strength of the rope used
6) Do not raise or lower a load while the (Safety coefficient: 6).
crane is moving longitudinally or laterally.
7) Do not drag a sling.
8) When lifting up a load, stop it just after it
leaves the ground and check safety, and
then lift it up.
9) Consider the travel route in advance and
lift up a load to a safe height.
10) Place the control switch on a position
where it will not be an obstacle to work
and passage.
11) After operating the hoist, do not swing the
control switch.
12) Remember the position of the main switch
so that you can turn off the power immedi-
ately in an emergency.
PC300, 350-8 5
8. Precautions for disconnecting and con- a Example of O-ring (Fitted to every joint of
necting hoses and tubes in air conditioner hoses and tubes)
circuit
1) Disconnection
k For the environment, the air condi-
tioner of this machine uses the
refrigerant (air conditioner gas:
R134a) which has fewer factors of
the depletion of the ozone layer.
However, it does not mean that you
may discharge the refrigerant into
the atmosphere as it is. Be sure to
recover the refrigerant when dis-
connecting the refrigerant gas cir-
cuit and then reuse it.
a Ask professional traders for collecting a For tightening torque, see the precautions for
and filling operation of refrigerant installation in each section of "Disassembly
(R134a). and assembly".
a Never release the refrigerant (R134a)
to the atmosphere.
k If the refrigerant gas gets in your
eyes or contacts your skin, you
may lose your sight and your skin
may be frozen. Accordingly, put
on safety glasses, safety gloves
and safety clothes when recover-
ing or adding the refrigerant.
Refrigerant gas must be recovered
and added by a qualified person.
2) Connection
1] When installing the air conditioner cir-
cuit hoses and tubes, take care that
dirt, dust, water, etc. will not enter
them.
2] When connecting the air conditioner
hoses and tubes, check that O-rings
(1) are fitted to their joints.
3] Check that each O-ring is not dam-
aged or deteriorated.
4] When connecting the refrigerant pip-
ing, apply compressor oil for refriger-
ant (R134a) (DENSO: ND-OIL8,
VA L E O T H E R M A L S Y S T E M S :
ZXL100PG (equivalent to PAG46))
to its O-rings.
6 PC300, 350-8
How to read the shop manual 1
q Some attachments and optional parts in this shop manual may not be delivered to certain areas. If one
of them is required, consult KOMATSU distributors.
q Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice.
q Shop manuals are divided into the “Chassis volume” and “Engine volume”. For the engine unit, see the
engine volume of the engine model mounted on the machine.
1. Composition of shop manual

This shop manual contains the necessary technical information for services performed in a workshop.
For ease of understanding, the manual is divided into the following sections.
00. Index and foreword

This section explains the shop manuals list, table of contents, safety, and basic information.
01. Specification
This section explains the specifications of the machine.
10. Structure, function and maintenance standard

This section explains the structure, function, and maintenance standard values of each component.
The structure and function sub-section explains the structure and function of each component. It
serves not only to give an understanding of the structure, but also serves as reference material for
troubleshooting. The maintenance standard sub-section explains the criteria and remedies for dis-
assembly and service.
20. Standard value table

This section explains the standard values for new machine and judgement criteria for testing,
adjusting, and troubleshooting. This standard value table is used to check the standard values in
testing and adjusting and to judge parts in troubleshooting.
30. Testing and adjusting

This section explains measuring instruments and measuring methods for testing and adjusting, and
method of adjusting each part. The standard values and judgement criteria for testing and adjusting
are explained in Testing and adjusting.
40. Troubleshooting
This section explains how to find out failed parts and how to repair them. The troubleshooting is
divided by failure modes. The “S mode” of the troubleshooting related to the engine may be also
explained in the Chassis volume and Engine volume. In this case, see the Chassis volume.
50. Disassembly and assembly

This section explains the special tools and procedures for removing, installing, disassembling, and
assembling each component, as well as precautions for them. In addition, tightening torque and
quantity and weight of coating material, oil, grease, and coolant necessary for the work are also
explained.
90. Diagrams and drawings (chassis volume)/Repair and replacement of parts (engine volume)
q Chassis volume
This section gives hydraulic circuit diagrams and electrical circuit diagrams.
q Engine volume
This section explains the method of reproducing, repairing, and replacing parts.
2. Revision and distribution

Any additions, revisions, or other change of notices will be sent to KOMATSU distributors. Get the most
up-to-date information before you start any work.
PC300, 350-8 7
3. Filing method
File by the brochures in the correct order of the form number printed in the shop manual composition
table.
q Revised edition mark

When a manual is revised, the ones and tens digits of the form number of each brochure is
increased by 1. (Example: 00, 01, 02 …)
q Revisions
Revised brochures are shown in the shop manual composition table.
4. Symbols
Important safety and quality portions are marked with the following symbols so that the shop manual will
be used practically.
Symbol Item Remarks
k Safety Special safety precautions are necessary when performing work.
Special technical precautions or other precautions for preserving stan-

a Caution
dards are necessary when performing work.
4
Weight of parts of component or parts. Caution necessary when
Weight
selecting hoisting wire, or when working posture is important, etc.
3
Tightening Places that require special attention for tightening torque during
torque assembly.
2 Coat Places to be coated with adhesives, etc. during assembly.
5
Oil, coolant Places where oil, etc. must be added, and capacity.
6
Drain Places where oil, etc. must be drained, and quantity to be drained.
5. Units
In this shop manual, the units are indicated with International System of units (SI). For reference, con-
ventionally used Gravitational System of units is indicated in parentheses { }.
8 PC300, 350-8
Explanation of terms for maintenance standard 1

The maintenance standard chapter explains the criteria for replacing or reusing products and parts in the
machine maintenance work. The following terms are used to explain the criteria.
1. Standard size and tolerance

q To be accurate, the finishing size of parts
is a little different from one to another.
q To specify a finishing size of a part, a tem-
porary standard size is set and an allow-
able difference from that size is indicated.
q The above size set temporarily is called
the “standard size” and the range of differ-
ence from the standard size is called the
“tolerance”.
q The tolerance with the symbols of + or – is
indicated on the right side of the standard
size.
Example:
Standard size Tolerance
–0.022
120
–0.126
a The tolerance may be indicated in the text

and a table as [standard size (upper limit
of tolerance/lower limit of tolerance)].
Example) 120 (–0.022/–0.126)
q Usually, the size of a hole and the size of

the shaft to be fitted to that hole are indi-
cated by the same standard size and dif-
ferent tolerances of the hole and shaft.
The tightness of fit is decided by the toler-
ance.
q Indication of size of rotating shaft and hole
and relationship drawing of them
Example:
Tolerance
Standard size
Shaft Hole
–0.030 +0.046
60
–0.076 +0
PC300, 350-8 9
2. Standard clearance and standard value 5. Clearance limit

q The clearance made when new parts are q Parts can be used until the clearance
assembled is called the “standard clear- between them is increased to a certain
ance“, which is indicated by the range limit. The limit at which those parts cannot
from the minimum clearance to the maxi- be used is called the “clearance limit”.
mum clearance. q If the clearance between the parts
q When some parts are repaired, the clear- exceeds the clearance limit, they must be
ance is generally adjusted to the standard replaced or repaired.
clearance.
q A value of performance and function of 6. Interference limit
new products or equivalent is called the q The allowable maximum interference
“standard value“, which is indicated by a between the hole of a part and the shaft of
range or a target value. another part to be assembled is called the
q When some parts are repaired, the value “interference limit”.
of performance/function is set to the stan- q The interference limit shows the repair
dard value. limit of the part of smaller tolerance.
q If the interference between the parts
3. Standard interference exceeds the interference limit, they must
q When the diameter of a hole of a part be replaced or repaired.
shown in the given standard size and tol-
erance table is smaller than that of the
mating shaft, the difference between those
diameters is called the “interference”.
q The range (A – B) from the difference (A)
between the minimum size of the shaft
and the maximum size of the hole to the
difference (B) between the maximum size
of the shaft and the minimum size of the
hole is the “standard interference”.
q After repairing or replacing some parts,
measure the size of their hole and shaft
and check that the interference is in the
standard range.
4. Repair limit and allowable value or allow-

able dimension
q The size of a part changes because of
wear and deformation while it is used. The
limit of changed size is called the “repair
limit”.
q If a part is worn to the repair limit, it must
be replaced or repaired.
q The performance and function of a prod-
uct lowers while it is used. A value which
the product can be used without causing a
problem is called the “allowable value” or
“allowable dimension”.
q If a product is worn to the allowable value,
it must be checked or repaired. Since the
permissible value is estimated from vari-
ous tests or experiences in most cases,
however, it must be judged after consider-
ing the operating condition and customer's
requirement.
10 PC300, 350-8
Handling of electric equipment and hydraulic component 1

To maintain the performance of the machine over a long period, and to prevent failures or other troubles
before they occur, correct “operation“, “maintenance and inspection“, “troubleshooting“, and “repairs” must
be carried out. This section deals particularly with correct repair procedures for mechatronics and is aimed at
improving the quality of repairs. For this purpose, it gives sections on “Handling electric equipment” and
“Handling hydraulic equipment” (particularly gear oil and hydraulic oil).
Points to remember when handling electric

equipment
1. Handling wiring harnesses and connectors
Wiring harnesses consist of wiring connecting
one component to another component, con-
nectors used for connecting and disconnecting
one wire from another wire, and protectors or
tubes used for protecting the wiring.
Compared with other electrical components fit-
ted in boxes or cases, wiring harnesses are
more likely to be affected by the direct effects
of rain, water, heat, or vibration. Furthermore,
during inspection and repair operations, they
are frequently removed and installed again, so
they are likely to suffer deformation or damage.
For this reason, it is necessary to be extremely
careful when handling wiring harnesses.
2. Main failures occurring in wiring harness

1) Defective contact of connectors (defec-
tive contact between male and female)
Problems with defective contact are likely
to occur because the male connector is
not properly inserted into the female con-
nector, or because one or both of the con-
nectors is deformed or the position is not
correctly aligned, or because there is cor-
rosion or oxidization of the contact sur-
faces. The corroded or oxidized contact
surfaces may become shiny again (and
contact may become normal) by connect-
ing and disconnecting the connector about
10 times.
2) Defective crimping or soldering of connec-

tors
The pins of the male and female connec-
tors are in contact at the crimped terminal
or soldered portion, but if there is exces-
sive force brought to bear on the wiring,
the plating at the joint will peel and cause
improper connection or breakage.
PC300, 350-8 11
3) Disconnections in wiring
If the wiring is held and the connectors are
pulled apart, or components are lifted with
a crane with the wiring still connected, or a
heavy object hits the wiring, the crimping
of the connector may separate, or the sol-
dering may be damaged, or the wiring
may be broken.
4) High-pressure water entering connector

The connector is designed to make it diffi-
cult for water to enter (drip-proof struc-
ture), but if high-pressure water is sprayed
directly on the connector, water may enter
the connector, depending on the direction
of the water jet. Accordingly, take care not
to splash water over the connector. The
connector is designed to prevent water
from entering, but at the same time, if
water does enter, it is difficult for it to be
drained. Therefore, if water should get into
the connector, the pins will be short-cir-
cuited by the water, so if any water gets in,
immediately dry the connector or take
other appropriate action before passing
electricity through it.
5) Oil or dirt stuck to connector

If oil or grease are stuck to the connector
and an oil film is formed on the mating sur-
face between the male and female pins,
the oil will not let the electricity pass, so
there will be defective contact. If there is
oil or grease stuck to the connector, wipe it
off with a dry cloth or blow it dry with com-
pressed air and spray it with a contact
restorer.
a When wiping the mating portion of the
connector, be careful not to use
excessive force or deform the pins.
a If there is oil or water in the com-
pressed air, the contacts will become
even dirtier, so remove the oil and
water from the compressed air com-
pletely before cleaning with com-
pressed air.
12 PC300, 350-8
3. Removing, installing, and drying connec-

tors and wiring harnesses
1) Disconnecting connectors
1] Hold the connectors when discon-
necting.
When disconnecting the connectors,
hold the connectors. For connectors
held by a screw, loosen the screw
fully, then hold the male and female
connectors in each hand and pull
apart. For connectors which have a
lock stopper, press down the stopper
with your thumb and pull the connec-
tors apart.
a Never pull with one hand.
2] When removing from clips

q Both of the connector and clip have
stoppers, which are engaged with
each other when the connector is
installed.
q When removing a connector from a

clip, pull the connector in a parallel
direction to the clip for removing stop-
pers.
a If the connector is twisted up and
down or to the left or right, the
housing may break.
3] Action to take after removing connec-

tors
After removing any connector, cover it
with a vinyl bag to prevent any dust,
dirt, oil, or water from getting in the
connector portion.
a If the machine is left disassem-
bled for a long time, it is particu-
larly easy for improper contact to
occur, so always cover the con-
nector.
PC300, 350-8 13
2) Connecting connectors
1] Check the connector visually.
Check that there is no oil, dirt, or
water stuck to the connector pins
(mating portion).
Check that there is no deformation,
defective contact, corrosion, or dam-
age to the connector pins.
Check that there is no damage or
breakage to the outside of the con-
nector.
a If there is any oil, water, or dirt
stuck to the connector, wipe it off
with a dry cloth. If any water has
got inside the connector, warm
the inside of the wiring with a
dryer, but be careful not to make
it too hot as this will cause short
circuits.
a If there is any damage or break-
age, replace the connector.
2] Fix the connector securely.
Align the position of the connector
correctly, and then insert it securely.
For connectors with the lock stopper,
push in the connector until the stop-
per clicks into position.
3] Correct any protrusion of the boot and
any misalignment of the wiring har-
ness.
For connectors fitted with boots, cor-
rect any protrusion of the boot. In
addition, if the wiring harness is mis-
aligned, or the clamp is out of posi-
tion, adjust it to its correct position.
a If the connector cannot be cor-
rected easily, remove the clamp
and adjust the position.
q If the connector clamp has been
removed, be sure to return it to
its original position. Check also
that there are no loose clamps.
14 PC300, 350-8
3) Heavy duty wire connector (DT 8-pole, 12- q Disconnection q Connection (Example of
pole) incomplete setting of (a))
Disconnection (Left of figure)
While pressing both sides of locks (a)
and (b), pull out female connector (2).
Connection (Right of figure)
1] Push in female connector (2) horizon-
tally until the lock clicks.
Arrow: 1)
2] Since locks (a) and (b) may not be set
completely, push in female connector
(2) while moving it up and down until
the locks are set normally.
Arrow: 1), 2), 3)
a Right of figure: Lock (a) is pulled
down (not set completely) and
lock (b) is set completely.
(1): Male connector
(2): Female connector
(a), (b): Locks
PC300, 350-8 15
4) Drying wiring harness

If there is any oil or dirt on the wiring har-
ness, wipe it off with a dry cloth. Avoid
washing it in water or using steam. If the
connector must be washed in water, do
not use high-pressure water or steam
directly on the wiring harness. If water
gets directly on the connector, do as fol-
lows.
1] Disconnect the connector and wipe
off the water with a dry cloth.
a If the connector is blown dry with
compressed air, there is the risk
that oil in the air may cause
defective contact, so remove all
oil and water from the com-
pressed air before blowing with
air.
2] Dry the inside of the connector with a
dryer.
If water gets inside the connector, use
a dryer to dry the connector.
a Hot air from the dryer can be
used, but regulate the time that
the hot air is used in order not to
make the connector or related
parts too hot, as this will cause
deformation or damage to the
connector.
3] Carry out a continuity test on the con-
nector.
After drying, leave the wiring harness
disconnected and carry out a continu-
ity test to check for any short circuits
between pins caused by water.
a After completely drying the con-
n e c t o r, b l o w i t w i t h c o n ta c t
restorer and reassemble.
16 PC300, 350-8
4. Handling controller
1) The controller contains a microcomputer
and electronic control circuits. These con-
trol all of the electronic circuits on the
machine, so be extremely careful when
handling the controller.
2) Do not place objects on top of the control-
ler.
3) Cover the control connectors with tape or
a vinyl bag. Never touch the connector
contacts with your hand.
4) During rainy weather, do not leave the
controller in a place where it is exposed to
rain.
5) Do not place the controller on oil, water, or
soil, or in any hot place, even for a short
time. (Place it on a suitable dry stand).
6) Precautions when carrying out arc welding
When carrying out arc welding on the
body, disconnect all wiring harness con-
nectors connected to the controller. Fit an
arc welding ground close to the welding
point.
5. Points to remember when troubleshooting

electric circuits
1) Always turn the power OFF before discon-
necting or connecting connectors.
2) Before carrying out troubleshooting, check
that all the related connectors are properly
inserted.
a Disconnect and connect the related
connectors several times to check.
3) Always connect any disconnected con-
nectors before going on to the next step.
a If the power is turned ON with the
connectors still disconnected, unnec-
essary abnormality displays will be
generated.
4) When carrying out troubleshooting of cir-
cuits (measuring the voltage, resistance,
continuity, or current), move the related
wiring and connectors several times and
check that there is no change in the read-
ing of the tester.
a If there is any change, there is proba-
bly defective contact in that circuit.
PC300, 350-8 17
Points to remember when handling hydraulic equipment

With the increase in pressure and precision of hydraulic equipment, the most common cause of failure is dirt
(foreign material) in the hydraulic circuit. When adding hydraulic oil, or when disassembling or assembling
hydraulic equipment, it is necessary to be particularly careful.
1. Be careful of the operating environment.

Avoid adding hydraulic oil, replacing filters, or
repairing the machine in rain or high winds, or
places where there is a lot of dust.
2. Disassembly and maintenance work in the

field
If disassembly or maintenance work is carried
out on hydraulic equipment in the field, there is
danger of dust entering the equipment. It is
also difficult to check the performance after
repairs, so it is desirable to use unit exchange.
Disassembly and maintenance of hydraulic
equipment should be carried out in a specially
prepared dustproof workshop, and the perfor-
mance should be checked with special test
equipment.
3. Sealing openings
After any piping or equipment is removed, the
openings should be sealed with caps, tapes, or
vinyl bags to prevent any dirt or dust from
entering. If the opening is left open or is
blocked with a rag, there is danger of dirt
entering or of the surrounding area being
made dirty by leaking oil so never do this. Do
not simply drain oil out onto the ground, but
collect it and ask the customer to dispose of it,
or take it back with you for disposal.
4. Do not let any dirt or dust get in during

refilling operations
Be careful not to let any dirt or dust get in when
refilling with hydraulic oil. Always keep the oil
filler and the area around it clean, and also use
clean pumps and oil containers. If an oil clean-
ing device is used, it is possible to filter out the
dirt that has collected during storage, so this is
an even more effective method.
18 PC300, 350-8
5. Change hydraulic oil when the temperature

is high
When hydraulic oil or other oil is warm, it flows
easily. In addition, the sludge can also be
drained out easily from the circuit together with
the oil, so it is best to change the oil when it is
still warm. When changing the oil, as much as
possible of the old hydraulic oil must be
drained out. (Drain the oil from the hydraulic
tank; also drain the oil from the filter and from
the drain plug in the circuit.) If any old oil is left,
the contaminants and sludge in it will mix with
the new oil and will shorten the life of the
hydraulic oil.
6. Flushing operations
After disassembling and assembling the equip-
ment, or changing the oil, use flushing oil to
remove the contaminants, sludge, and old oil
from the hydraulic circuit. Normally, flushing is
carried out twice: primary flushing is carried
out with flushing oil, and secondary flushing is
carried out with the specified hydraulic oil.
7. Cleaning operations
After repairing the hydraulic equipment (pump,
control valve, etc.) or when running the
machine, carry out oil cleaning to remove the
sludge or contaminants in the hydraulic oil cir-
cuit. The oil cleaning equipment is used to
remove the ultra fine (about 3 m) particles that
the filter built in the hydraulic equipment can-
not remove, so it is an extremely effective
device.
PC300, 350-8 19
Handling of connectors newly used for engines 1

a Mainly, following engines are object for follow- 2. Pull lock type (PACKARD-2)
ing connectors. q 95 – 170, 12V140 engine
q 95E-5 q Various temperature sensors
q 107E-1 Example)
q 114E-3 Intake air temperature sensor in
q 125E-5 intake manifold: TIM
q 140E-5 Fuel temperature sensor: TFUEL
q 170E-5 Oil temperature sensor: TOIL
q 12V140E-3 Coolant temperature sensor: TWTR,
etc.
1. Slide lock type Disconnect the connector by pulling lock
(FRAMATOME-3, FRAMATOME-2) (B) (on the wiring harness side) of connec-
q 95 – 170, 12V140 engines tor (2) outward.
q Various pressure sensors and NE
speed sensor
Examples)
Intake air pressure in intake manifold:
PIM (125, 170, 12V140 engines)
Oil pressure sensor: POIL
(125, 170, 12V140 engines)
Oil pressure switch
(95, 107, 114 engines)
Ne speed sensor of flywheel housing:
NE (95 – 170, 12V140 engines)
Ambient pressure sensor: PAMB
(125, 170, 12V140 engines)
Disconnect connector (1) according to the fol-

lowing procedure.
1) Slide lock (L1) to the right.
2) While pressing lock (L2), pull out connec-
tor (1) toward you.
a Even if lock (L2) is pressed, connec-
tor (1) cannot be pulled out toward
you, if part A does not float. In this
case, float part A with a small screw-
driver while press lock (L2), and then
pull out connector (1) toward you.
20 PC300, 350-8
3. Push lock type

q 95, 107, 114 engines
Example)
Fuel pressure sensor in common rail
(BOSCH-03)
Disconnect connector (3) according to the fol-

lowing procedure.
1) While pressing lock (C), pull out connector
(3) in the direction of the arrow.
q 114 engine
q 107, 114 engine

Example)
Intake air pressure/temperature sensor in
intake manifold
(SUMITOMO-04)
3) While pressing lock (D), pull out connector

(4) in the direction of the arrow.
q 107 engine
a If the lock is on the underside, use

flat-head screwdriver [1] since you
cannot insert your fingers.
2) While pressing up lock (C) of the connec-
tor with flat-head screwdriver [1], pull out
connector (3) in the direction of the arrow.
PC300, 350-8 21
q 95, 125 – 170, 12V140 engine 4. Turn-housing type (Round green connector)
4) While pressing lock (E) of the connector, q 140 engine
pull out connector (5) in the direction of Example)
the arrow. Intake air pressure sensor in intake mani-
fold (CANNON-04): PIM etc.
Example)
Fuel pressure in common rail: PFUEL etc. 1) Disconnect connector (6) according to the
(AMP-3) following procedure.
1] Turn housing (H1) in the direction of
the arrow.
a When connector is unlocked,
housing (H1) becomes heavy to
turn.
2] Pull out housing (H1) in the direction
of the arrow.
a Housing (H1) is left on the wiring har-
ness side.
Example)
Injection pressure control valve of fuel
supply pump: PCV (SUMITOMO-2)
2) Connect the connector according to the

following procedure.
1] Insert the connector to the end, while
setting its groove.
2] Turn housing (H1) in the direction of
the arrow until it “clicks”.
Example)
Speed sensor of fuel supply pump:
G (SUMITOMO-3)
a Pull the connector straight up.
22 PC300, 350-8
How to read electric wire code 1

a The information about the wires unique to each machine model is described in Troubleshooting section,
Relational information of troubleshooting.
In the electric circuit diagram, the material, thickness, and color of each electric wire are indicated by sym-
bols. The electric wire code is helpful in understanding the electric circuit diagram.
Example: AEX 0.85 L - - - Indicates blue, heat-resistant, low-voltage wire for automobile, having nomi-
nal No. of 0.85
Indicates color of wire by color code.
Color codes are shown in Table 3.
Indicates size of wire by nominal No.

Size (Nominal No.) is shown in Table 2.
Indicates type of wire by symbol.

Type, symbol, and material of wire are shown in Table 1.
(Since AV and AVS are classified by size (nominal No.), they are not indi-
cated.)
1. Type, symbol, and material

AV and AVS are different in only thickness and outside diameter of the cover. AEX is similar to AV in
thickness and outside diameter of AEX and different from AV and AVS in material of the cover.
(Table 1)
Using
Sym-
Type Material temperature Example of use
bol
range (°C)
Low-voltage Conduc- Annealed copper for elec-
General wiring
wire for AV tor tric appliance
(Nominal No. 5 and above)
automobile Insulator Soft polyvinyl chloride
Thin-cover Conduc- Annealed copper for elec- –30 to +60
low-voltage tor tric appliance General wiring
AVS
wire for (Nominal No. 3 and below)
Insulator Soft polyvinyl chloride
automobile
Heat-resis- Conduc- Annealed copper for elec-
General wiring in extremely
tant low-volt- tor tric appliance
AEX –50 to +110 cold district, wiring at high-tem-
age wire for Heat-resistant crosslinked
Insulator perature place
automobile polyethylene
PC300, 350-8 23
2. Dimensions
(Table 2)
Nominal No. 0.5f (0.5) 0.75f (0.85) 1.25f (1.25) 2f 2 3f 3 5
Number of
strands/Diam- 20/0.18 7/0.32 30/0.18 11/0.32 50/0.18 16/0.32 37/0.26 26/0.32 58/0.26 41/0.32 65/0.32
eter of strand
Conductor
Sectional
0.51 0.56 0.76 0.88 1.27 1.29 1.96 2.09 3.08 3.30 5.23
area (mm2)
d (approx.) 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.9 1.9 2.3 2.4 3.0
AVS Standard 2.0 2.2 2.5 2.9 2.9 3.5 3.6 –
Cov-
AV Standard – – – – – – – 4.6
er D
AEX Standard 2.0 2.2 2.7 3.0 3.1 – 3.8 4.6
Nominal No. 8 15 20 30 40 50 60 85 100

Number of
strands/Diam- 50/0.45 84/0.45 41/0.80 70/0.80 85/0.80 108/0.80 127/0.80 169/0.80 217/0.80
eter of strand
Conductor
Sectional
7.95 13.36 20.61 35.19 42.73 54.29 63.84 84.96 109.1
area (mm2)
d (approx.) 3.7 4.8 6.0 8.0 8.6 9.8 10.4 12.0 13.6
AVS Standard – – – – – – – – –
Cov-
AV Standard 5.5 7.0 8.2 10.8 11.4 13.0 13.6 16.0 17.6
er D
AEX Standard 5.3 7.0 8.2 10.8 11.4 13.0 13.6 16.0 17.6
“f” of nominal No. denotes flexible”.
24 PC300, 350-8
3. Color codes table
(Table 3)
Color Code Color of wire Color Code Color of wire
B Black LgW Light green & White
Br Brown LgY Light green & Yellow
BrB Brown & Black LR Blue & Red
BrR Brown & Red LW Blue & White
BrW Brown & White LY Blue & Yellow
BrY Brown & Yellow O Orange
Ch Charcoal P Pink
Dg Dark green R Red
G Green RB Red & Black
GB Green & Black RG Red & Green
GL Green & Blue RL Red & Blue
Gr Gray RW Red & White
GR Green & Red RY Red & Yellow
GW Green & White Sb Sky Blue
GY Green & Yellow Y Yellow
L Blue YB Yellow & Black
LB Blue & Black YG Yellow &Green
Lg Light green YL Yellow & Blue
LgB Light green & Black YR Yellow & Red
LgR Light green & Red YW Yellow & White
Remarks: In a color code consisting of 2 colors, the first color is the color of the background and
the second color is the color of the marking.
Example: “GW” means that the background is Green and marking is White.
4. Types of circuits and color codes
(Table 4)
Type of wire AVS or AV AEX
Charge R WG – – – – R –
Ground B – – – – – B –
Start R – – – – – R –
Light RW RB RY RG RL – D –
Instrument Y YR YB YG YL YW Y Gr
Signal G GW GR GY GB GL G Br
L LW LR LY LB – L –
Type of
Br BrW BrR BrY BrB – – –
circuit
Lg LgR LgY LgB LgW – – –
O – – – – – – –
Others Gr – – – – – – –
P – – – – – – –
Sb – – – – – – –
Dg – – – – – – –
Ch – – – – – – –
PC300, 350-8 25
Precautions when carrying out operation 1

[When carrying out removal or installation (disassembly or assembly) of units, be sure to follow the general
precautions given below when carrying out the operation.]
1. Precautions when carrying out removal work

q If the coolant contains antifreeze, dispose of it correctly.
q After disconnecting hoses or tubes, cover them or fit plugs to prevent dirt or dust from entering.
q When draining oil, prepare a container of adequate size to catch the oil.
q Confirm the match marks showing the installation position, and make match marks in the necessary
places before removal to prevent any mistake when assembling.
q To prevent any excessive force from being applied to the wiring, always hold the connectors when dis-
connecting the connectors. Do not pull the wires.
q Fit wires and hoses with tags to show their installation position to prevent any mistake when installing.
q Check the number and thickness of the shims, and keep in a safe place.
q When raising components, be sure to use lifting equipment of ample strength.
q When using forcing screws to remove any components, tighten the forcing screws uniformly in turn.
q Before removing any unit, clean the surrounding area and fit a cover to prevent any dust or dirt from
entering after removal.
a Precautions when handling piping during disassembly
Fit the following plugs into the piping after disconnecting it during disassembly operations.
1) Face seal type hoses and tubes
Nominal
Plug (nut end) Sleeve nut (elbow end)
number
02 07376-70210 02789-20210
03 07376-70315 02789-20315
04 07376-70422 02789-20422
05 07376-70522 02789-20522
06 07376-70628 02789-20628
10 07376-71034 07221-21034
12 07376-71234 07221-21234
2) Split flange type hoses and tubes

Nominal
Flange (hose end) Sleeve head (tube end) Split flange
number
04 07379-00400 07378-10400 07371-30400
05 07379-00500 07378-10500 07371-30500
3) If the part is not under hydraulic pressure, the following corks can be used.
Nominal Dimensions
Part Number
number D d L
06 07049-00608 6 5 8
08 07049-00811 8 6.5 11
10 07049-01012 10 8.5 12
12 07049-01215 12 10 15
14 07049-01418 14 11.5 18
16 07049-01620 16 13.5 20
18 07049-01822 18 15 22
20 07049-02025 20 17 25
22 07049-02228 22 18.5 28
24 07049-02430 24 20 30
27 07049-02734 27 22.5 34
26 PC300, 350-8
2. Precautions when carrying out installation work

q Tighten all bolts and nuts (sleeve nuts) to the specified (KES) torque.
q Install the hoses without twisting or interference and fix them with intermediate clamps, if there are any.
q Replace all gaskets, O-rings, cotter pins, and lock plates with new parts.
q Bend the cotter pins and lock plates securely.
q When coating with adhesive, clean the part and remove all oil and grease, then coat the threaded por-
tion with 2 – 3 drops of adhesive.
q When coating with gasket sealant, clean the surface and remove all oil and grease, check that there is
no dirt or damage, then coat uniformly with gasket sealant.
q Clean all parts, and correct any damage, dents, burrs, or rust.
q Coat rotating parts and sliding parts with engine oil.
q When press fitting parts, coat the surface with anti-friction compound (LM-P).
q After fitting snap rings, check that the snap ring is fitted securely in the ring groove.
q When connecting wiring connectors, clean the connector to remove all oil, dirt, or water, then connect
securely.
q When using eyebolts, check that there is no deformation or deterioration, screw them in fully, and align
the direction of the hook.
q When tightening split flanges, tighten uniformly in turn to prevent excessive tightening on one side.
a When operating the hydraulic cylinders for the first time after reassembling cylinders, pumps and other
hydraulic equipment removed for repair, always bleed the air as follows:
1) Start the engine and run at low idle.
2) Operate the work equipment control lever to operate the hydraulic cylinder 4 – 5 times, stopping the
cylinder 100 mm from the end of its stroke.
3) Next, operate the hydraulic cylinder 3 – 4 times to the end of its stroke.
4) After doing this, run the engine at normal speed.
a When using the machine for the first time after repair or long storage, follow the same procedure.
3. Precautions when completing the operation

1) Refilling with coolant, oil and grease
q If the coolant has been drained, tighten the drain valve, and add coolant to the specified level.
Run the engine to circulate the coolant through the system. Then check the coolant level
again.
q If the hydraulic equipment has been removed and installed again, add engine oil to the speci-
fied level. Run the engine to circulate the oil through the system. Then check the oil level
again.
q If the piping or hydraulic equipment have been removed, always bleed the air from the system
after reassembling the parts.
a For details, see Testing and adjusting, “Bleeding air”.
q Add the specified amount of grease (molybdenum disulphide grease) to the work equipment
parts.
2) Checking cylinder head and manifolds for looseness
Check the cylinder head and intake and exhaust manifold for looseness.
If any part is loosened, retighten it.
q For the tightening torque, see “Disassembly and assembly”.
3) Checking engine piping for damage and looseness
Intake and exhaust system
Check the piping for damage, the mounting bolts and nuts for looseness, and the joints for air
suction and exhaust gas leakage.
If any part is loosened or damaged, retighten or repair it.
Cooling system
Check the piping for damage, the mounting bolts and nuts for looseness, and the joints for
coolant leakage.
Fuel system
Check the piping for damage, the mounting bolts and nuts for looseness, and the joints for fuel
leakage.
PC300, 350-8 27
4) Checking muffler and exhaust pipe for damage and looseness

1] Visually check the muffler, exhaust pipe and their mounting parts for a crack and damage.
If any part is damaged, replace it.
2] Check the mounting bolts and nuts of the muffler, exhaust pipe and their mounting parts for
looseness.
If any bolt or nut is loosened, retighten it.
5) Checking muffler function
Check the muffler for abnormal sound and sound different from that of a new muffler.
If any abnormal sound is heard, repair the muffler, referring to “Troubleshooting” and “Disassembly
and assembly”.
28 PC300, 350-8
Method of disassembling and connecting push-pull type coupler 1

k Before carrying out the following work, loosen the oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank gradually to
release the residual pressure from the hydraulic tank.
k Even if the residual pressure is released from the hydraulic tank, some hydraulic oil flows out
when the hose is disconnected. Accordingly, prepare an oil receiving container.
Type 1
1. Disconnection
1) Hold adapter (1) and push hose joint (2)
into mating adapter (3). (Fig. 1)
a The adapter can be pushed in about
3.5 mm.
a Do not hold rubber cap portion (4).
2) After hose joint (2) is pushed into adapter
(3), press rubber cap portion (4) against
adapter (3) until it clicks. (Fig. 2)
3) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and pull
it out. (Fig. 3)
a Since some hydraulic oil flows out,
prepare an oil receiving container.
2. Connection
1) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and
insert it in mating adapter (3), aligning
them with each other. (Fig. 4)
a Do not hold rubber cap portion (4).
2) After inserting the hose in the mating
adapter perfectly, pull it back to check its
connecting condition. (Fig. 5)
a When the hose is pulled back, the
rubber cap portion moves toward the
hose about 3.5 mm. This does not
indicate abnormality, however.
PC300, 350-8 29
Type 2
1. Disconnection
1) Hold the tightening portion and push body
(7) straight until sliding prevention ring (6)
contacts contact surface (a) of the hexag-
onal portion at the male end. (Fig. 6)
2) While holding the condition of Step 1), turn
lever (8) to the right (clockwise). (Fig. 7)
3) While holding the condition of Steps 1)
and 2), pull out whole body (7) to discon-
nect it. (Fig. 8)
2. Connection
q Hold the tightening portion and push body
contacts contact surface (a) of the hexag-
30 PC300, 350-8
Type 3
1. Disconnection
1) Hold the tightening portion and push body
contacts contact surface (b) of the hexag-
2) While holding the condition of Step 1),
push cover (10) straight until it contacts
contact surface (b) of the hexagonal por-
tion at the male end. (Fig. 11)
3) While holding the condition of Steps 1)
and 2), pull out whole body (9) to discon-
nect it. (Fig. 12)
2. Connection
q Hold the tightening portion and push body
(9) straight until the sliding prevention ring
contacts contact surface (b) of the hexag-
PC300, 350-8 31
Standard tightening torque table 1

1. Table of tightening torques for bolts and nuts
a Unless there are special instructions, tighten metric nuts and bolts to the torque below.
a The following table corresponds to the bolts in Fig. A.
Thread diameter of bolt Width across flats Tightening torque

mm mm Nm kgm
6 10 11.8 – 14.7 1.2 – 1.5
8 13 27 – 34 2.8 – 3.5
10 17 59 – 74 6.0 – 7.5
12 19 98 – 123 10.0 – 12.5
14 22 157 – 196 16 – 20
16 24 245 – 309 25 – 31.5
18 27 343 – 427 35 – 43.5
20 30 490 – 608 50 – 62
22 32 662 – 829 67.5 – 84.5
24 36 824 – 1,030 84 – 105
27 41 1,180 – 1,470 120 – 150
30 46 1,520 – 1,910 155 – 195
33 50 1,960 – 2,450 200 – 250
36 55 2,450 – 3,040 250 – 310
39 60 2,890 – 3,630 295 – 370
a The following table corresponds to the bolts in Fig. B.

mm mm Nm kgm
6 10 5.9 – 9.8 0.6 – 1.0
8 13 13.7 – 23.5 1.4 – 2.4
10 14 34.3 – 46.1 3.5 – 4.7
12 27 74.5 – 90.2 7.6 – 9.2
a Fig. A a Fig. B
32 PC300, 350-8
2. Table of tightening torques for split flange bolts

a Unless there are special instructions, tighten split flange bolts to the torque below.

mm mm Nm kgm
10 14 59 – 74 6.0 – 7.5
12 17 98 – 123 10.0 – 12.5
16 22 235 – 285 23.5 – 29.5
3. Table of tightening torques for O-ring boss piping joints

a Unless there are special instructions, tighten O-ring boss piping joints to the torque below.
Thread diameter Width across flats Tightening torque Nm {kgm}

Nominal No.
mm mm Range Target
02 14 35 – 63 { 3.5 – 6.5} 44 { 4.5}
03,04 20 Varies depending 84 – 132 { 8.5 – 13.5} 103 {10.5}
05,06 24 on type of connec- 128 – 186 {13.0 – 19.0} 157 {16.0}
10,12 33 tor. 363 – 480 {37.0 – 49.0} 422 {43.0}
14 42 746 – 1,010 {76.0 – 103} 883 {90.0}
4. Table of tightening torques for O-ring boss plugs

a Unless there are special instructions, tighten O-ring boss plugs to the torque below.
Nominal Thread diameter Width across flats Tightening torque Nm {kgm}

No. mm mm Range Target
08 8 14 5.88 – 8.82 {0.6 – 0.9} 7.35 {0.75}
10 10 17 9.81 – 12.74 {1.0 – 1.3} 11.27 {1.15}
12 12 19 14.7 – 19.6 {1.5 – 2.0} 17.64 {1.8}
14 14 22 19.6 – 24.5 {2.0 – 2.5} 22.54 {2.3}
16 16 24 24.5 – 34.3 {2.5 – 3.5} 29.4 {3.0}
18 18 27 34.3 – 44.1 {3.5 – 4.5} 39.2 {4.0}
20 20 30 44.1 – 53.9 {4.5 – 5.5} 49.0 {5.0}
24 24 32 58.8 – 78.4 {6.0 – 8.0} 68.6 {7.0}
30 30 32 93.1 – 122.5 { 9.5 – 12.5} 107.8 {11.0}
33 33 – 107.8 – 147.0 {11.0 – 15.0} 127.4 {13.0}
36 36 36 127.4 – 176.4 {13.0 – 18.0} 151.9 {15.5}
42 42 – 181.3 – 240.1 {18.5 – 24.5} 210.7 {21.5}
52 52 – 274.4 – 367.5 {28.0 – 37.5} 323.4 {33.0}
PC300, 350-8 33
5. Table of tightening torques for hoses (taper seal type and face seal type)
a Unless there are special instructions, tighten the hoses (taper seal type and face seal type) to the
torque below.
a Apply the following torque when the threads are coated (wet) with engine oil.
Tightening torque Nm {kgm} Taper seal Face seal

Nominal Width Nominal No. –
No. of across Thread
Thread size Number of
hose flats Range Target diameter (mm)
(mm) threads, type of
(Reference)
thread
34 – 54 { 3.5 – 5.5} – 9/16-18UN 14.3
02 19 44 { 4.5}
34 – 63 { 3.5 – 6.5} 14 – –
22 54 – 93 { 5.5 – 9.5} 74 { 7.5} – 11/16-16UN 17.5
03
24 59 – 98 { 6.0 – 10.0} 78 { 8.0} 18 – –
04 27 84 – 132 { 8.5 – 13.5} 103 {10.5} 22 13/16-16UN 20.6
05 32 128 – 186 {13.0 – 19.0} 157 {16.0} 24 1-14UNS 25.4
06 36 177 – 245 {18.0 – 25.0} 216 {22.0} 30 1-3/16-12UN 30.2
(10) 41 177 – 245 {18.0 – 25.0} 216 {22.0} 33 – –
(12) 46 197 – 294 {20.0 – 30.0} 245 {25.0} 36 – –
(14) 55 246 – 343 {25.0 – 35.0} 294 {30.0} 42 – –
6. Table of tightening torques for face seal joints

a Tighten the face seal joints (sleeve nut type) made of plated steel pipes for low pressure service to
be used for engines etc. to the torque shown in the following table.
a Apply the following torque to the face seal joint while their threaded parts are coated with engine oil
(wetted).
Outer Width Tightening torque Nm {kgm} Face seal

diameter across Nominal No. – Thread diameter
of pipe flats Range Target Number of threads, (mm)
(mm) (mm) type of thread (Reference)
8 19 14 – 16 {1.4 – 1.6} 15 {1.5} 9/16-18UN 14.3
10 22 24 – 27 {2.4 – 2.7} 25.5 {2.6} 11/16-16UN 17.5
12 24 (27) 43 – 47 {4.4 – 4.8} 45 {4.6} 13/16-16UN 20.6
15 (16) 30 (32) 60 – 68 {6.1 – 6.8} 64 {6.5} 1-14UN 25.4
22 (20) 36 90 – 95 {9.2 – 9.7} 92.5 {9.4} 1-3/16-12UN 30.2
Reference: The face seal joints of the dimensions in ( ) are also used, depending on the specification.
7. Table of tightening torques for 102, 107 and 114 engine series (Bolts and nuts)
a Unless there are special instructions, tighten the metric bolts and nuts of the 102, 107 and 114
engine series to the torque below.
Tightening torque
Thread size
Bolts and nuts
mm Nm kgm
6 10 ± 2 1.02 ± 0.20
8 24 ± 4 2.45 ± 0.41
10 43 ± 6 4.38 ± 0.61
12 77 ± 12 7.85 ± 1.22
14 — —
34 PC300, 350-8
8. Table of tightening torques for 102, 107 and 114 engine series (Eye joints)
a Unless there are special instructions, tighten the metric eye joints of the 102, 107 and 114 engine
series to the torque below.
Thread size Tightening torque

mm Nm kgm
6 8±2 0.81 ± 0.20
8 10 ± 2 1.02 ± 0.20
10 12 ± 2 1.22 ± 0.20
12 24 ± 4 2.45 ± 0.41
14 36 ± 5 3.67 ± 0.51
9. Table of tightening torques for 102, 107 and 114 engine series (Taper screws)
a Unless there are special instructions, tighten the taper screws (unit: inch) of the 102, 107 and 114
engine series to the torque below.
Thread size Tightening torque

inch Nm kgm
1/16 3±1 0.31 ± 0.10
1/8 8±2 0.81 ± 0.20
1/4 12 ± 2 1.22 ± 0.20
3/8 15 ± 2 1.53 ± 0.20
1/2 24 ± 4 2.45 ± 0.41
3/4 36 ± 5 3.67 ± 0.51
1 60 ± 9 6.12 ± 0.92
PC300, 350-8 35
Conversion table 1
Method of using the conversion table
The conversion table in this section is provided to enable simple conversion of figures. For details of the
method of using the conversion table, see the example given below.
Example: Method of using the conversion table to convert from millimeters to inches
1. Convert 55 mm into inches.

1) Locate the number 50 in the vertical column at the left side, take this as (A), and then draw a hori-
zontal line from (A).
2) Locate the number 5 in the row across the top, take this as (B), then draw a perpendicular line down
from (B).
3) Take the point where the 2 lines cross as (C). This point (C) gives the value when converting from
millimeters to inches. Therefore, 55 mm = 2.165 inches.
2. Convert 550 mm into inches.

1) The number 550 does not appear in the table, so divide it by 10 (move the decimal point one place
to the left) to convert it to 55 mm.
2) Carry out the same procedure as above to convert 55 mm to 2.165 inches.
3) The original value (550 mm) was divided by 10, so multiply 2.165 inches by 10 (move the decimal
point one place to the right) to return to the original value. This gives 550 mm = 21.65 inches.
Millimeters to inches (B)

1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
(C)
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
(A)
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898
36 PC300, 350-8
Millimeters to inches
1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898
Kilogram to pound
1 kg = 2.2046 lb
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 2.20 4.41 6.61 8.82 11.02 13.23 15.43 17.64 19.84
10 22.05 24.25 26.46 28.66 30.86 33.07 35.27 37.48 39.68 41.89
20 44.09 46.30 48.50 50.71 51.91 55.12 57.32 59.53 61.73 63.93
30 66.14 68.34 70.55 72.75 74.96 77.16 79.37 81.57 83.78 85.98
40 88.18 90.39 92.59 94.80 97.00 99.21 101.41 103.62 105.82 108.03
50 110.23 112.44 114.64 116.85 119.05 121.25 123.46 125.66 127.87 130.07
60 132.28 134.48 136.69 138.89 141.10 143.30 145.51 147.71 149.91 152.12
70 154.32 156.53 158.73 160.94 163.14 165.35 167.55 169.76 171.96 174.17
80 176.37 178.57 180.78 182.98 185.19 187.39 189.60 191.80 194.01 196.21
90 198.42 200.62 202.83 205.03 207.24 209.44 211.64 213.85 216.05 218.26
Liters to U.S. Gallons

1 l = 0.2642 U.S.Gal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.264 0.528 0.793 1.057 1.321 1.585 1.849 2.113 2.378
10 2.642 2.906 3.170 3.434 3.698 3.963 4.227 4.491 4.755 5.019
20 5.283 5.548 5.812 6.076 6.340 6.604 6.869 7.133 7.397 7.661
30 7.925 8.189 8.454 8.718 8.982 9.246 9.510 9.774 10.039 10.303
40 10.567 10.831 11.095 11.359 11.624 11.888 12.152 12.416 12.680 12.944
50 13.209 13.473 13.737 14.001 14.265 14.529 14.795 15.058 15.322 15.586
60 15.850 16.115 16.379 16.643 16.907 17.171 17.435 17.700 17.964 18.228
70 18.492 18.756 19.020 19.285 19.549 19.813 20.077 20.341 20.605 20.870
80 21.134 21.398 21.662 21.926 22.190 22.455 22.719 22.983 23.247 23.511
90 23.775 24.040 24.304 24.568 24.832 25.096 25.361 25.625 25.889 26.153
PC300, 350-8 37
Liters to U.K. Gallons

1 l = 0.21997 U.K.Gal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.220 0.440 0.660 0.880 1.100 1.320 1.540 1.760 1.980
10 2.200 2.420 2.640 2.860 3.080 3.300 3.520 3.740 3.950 4.179
20 4.399 4.619 4.839 5.059 5.279 5.499 5.719 5.939 6.159 6.379
30 6.599 6.819 7.039 7.259 7.479 7.699 7.919 8.139 8.359 8.579
40 8.799 9.019 9.239 9.459 9.679 9.899 10.119 10.339 10.559 10.778
50 10.998 11.281 11.438 11.658 11.878 12.098 12.318 12.528 12.758 12.978
60 13.198 13.418 13.638 13.858 14.078 14.298 14.518 14.738 14.958 15.178
70 15.398 15.618 15.838 16.058 16.278 16.498 16.718 16.938 17.158 17.378
80 17.598 17.818 18.037 18.257 18.477 18.697 18.917 19.137 19.357 19.577
90 19.797 20.017 20.237 20.457 20.677 20.897 21.117 21.337 21.557 21.777
kgm to ft.lb
1 kgm = 7.233 ft.lb
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 7.2 14.5 21.7 28.9 36.2 43.4 50.6 57.9 65.1
10 72.3 79.6 86.8 94.0 101.3 108.5 115.7 123.0 130.2 137.4
20 144.7 151.9 159.1 166.4 173.6 180.8 188.1 195.3 202.5 209.8
30 217.0 224.2 231.5 238.7 245.9 253.2 260.4 267.6 274.9 282.1
40 289.3 296.6 303.8 311.0 318.3 325.5 332.7 340.0 347.2 354.4
50 361.7 368.9 376.1 383.4 390.6 397.8 405.1 412.3 419.5 426.8
60 434.0 441.2 448.5 455.7 462.9 470.2 477.4 484.6 491.8 499.1
70 506.3 513.5 520.8 528.0 535.2 542.5 549.7 556.9 564.2 571.4
80 578.6 585.9 593.1 600.3 607.6 614.8 622.0 629.3 636.5 643.7
90 651.0 658.2 665.4 672.7 679.9 687.1 694.4 701.6 708.8 716.1
100 723.3 730.5 737.8 745.0 752.2 759.5 766.7 773.9 781.2 788.4
110 795.6 802.9 810.1 817.3 824.6 831.8 839.0 846.3 853.5 860.7
120 868.0 875.2 882.4 889.7 896.9 904.1 911.4 918.6 925.8 933.1
130 940.3 947.5 954.8 962.0 969.2 976.5 983.7 990.9 998.2 1005.4
140 1012.6 1019.9 1027.1 1034.3 1041.5 1048.8 1056.0 1063.2 1070.5 1077.7
150 1084.9 1092.2 1099.4 1106.6 1113.9 1121.1 1128.3 1135.6 1142.8 1150.0
160 1157.3 1164.5 1171.7 1179.0 1186.2 1193.4 1200.7 1207.9 1215.1 1222.4
170 1129.6 1236.8 1244.1 1251.3 1258.5 1265.8 1273.0 1280.1 1287.5 1294.7
180 1301.9 1309.2 1316.4 1323.6 1330.9 1338.1 1345.3 1352.6 1359.8 1367.0
190 1374.3 1381.5 1388.7 1396.0 1403.2 1410.4 1417.7 1424.9 1432.1 1439.4
38 PC300, 350-8
kg/cm2 to lb/in2
1 kg/cm2 = 14.2233 lb/in2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 71.1 85.3 99.6 113.8 128.0
10 142.2 156.5 170.7 184.9 199.1 213.4 227.6 241.8 256.0 270.2
20 284.5 298.7 312.9 327.1 341.4 355.6 369.8 384.0 398.3 412.5
30 426.7 440.9 455.1 469.4 483.6 497.8 512.0 526.3 540.5 554.7
40 568.9 583.2 597.4 611.6 625.8 640.1 654.3 668.5 682.7 696.9
50 711.2 725.4 739.6 753.8 768.1 782.3 796.5 810.7 825.0 839.2
60 853.4 867.6 881.8 896.1 910.3 924.5 938.7 953.0 967.2 981.4
70 995.6 1,010 1,024 1,038 1,053 1,067 1,081 1,095 1,109 1,124
80 1,138 1,152 1,166 1,181 1,195 1,209 1,223 1,237 1,252 1,266
90 1,280 1,294 1,309 1,323 1,337 1,351 1,365 1,380 1,394 1,408
100 1,422 1,437 1,451 1,465 1,479 1,493 1,508 1,522 1,536 1,550
110 1,565 1,579 1,593 1,607 1,621 1,636 1,650 1,664 1,678 1,693
120 1,707 1,721 1,735 1,749 1,764 1,778 1,792 1,806 1,821 1,835
130 1,849 1,863 1,877 1,892 1,906 1,920 1,934 1,949 1,963 1,977
140 1,991 2,005 2,020 2,034 2,048 2,062 2,077 2,091 2,105 2,119
150 2,134 2,148 2,162 2,176 2,190 2,205 2,219 2,233 2,247 2,262
160 2,276 2,290 2,304 2,318 2,333 2,347 2,361 2,375 2,389 2,404
170 2,418 2,432 2,446 2,460 2,475 2,489 2,503 2,518 2,532 2,546
180 2,560 2,574 2,589 2,603 2,617 2,631 2,646 2,660 2,674 2,688
190 2,702 2,717 2,731 2,745 2,759 2,773 2,788 2,802 2,816 2,830
200 2,845 2,859 2,873 2,887 2,901 2,916 2,930 2,944 2,958 2,973
210 2,987 3,001 3,015 3,030 3,044 3,058 3,072 3,086 3,101 3,115
220 3,129 3,143 3,158 3,172 3,186 3,200 3,214 3,229 3,243 3,257
230 3,271 3,286 3,300 3,314 3,328 3,343 3,357 3,371 3,385 3,399
240 3,414 3,428 3,442 3,456 3,470 3,485 3,499 3,513 3,527 3,542
PC300, 350-8 39
Temperature
Fahrenheit-Centigrade conversion: A simple way to convert a Fahrenheit temperature reading into a Centi-
grade temperature reading or vice versa is to enter the accompanying table in the center (boldface column)
of figures. These figures refer to the temperature in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade degrees.
When convert from Fahrenheit to Centigrade degrees, consider the center column to be a table of Fahren-
heit temperatures and read the corresponding Centigrade temperature in the column at the left.
When convert from Centigrade to Fahrenheit degrees, consider the center column to be a table of Centi-
grade values, and read the corresponding Fahrenheit temperature on the right.
1°C = 33.8°F
°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
–40.4 –40 –40.0 –11.7 11 51.8 7.8 46 114.8 27.2 81 177.8
–37.2 –35 –31.0 –11.1 12 53.6 8.3 47 116.6 27.8 82 179.6
–34.4 –30 –22.0 –10.6 13 55.4 8.9 48 118.4 28.3 83 181.4
–31.7 –25 –13.0 –10.0 14 57.2 9.4 49 120.2 28.9 84 183.2
–28.9 –20 –4.0 –9.4 15 59.0 10.0 50 122.0 29.4 85 185.0
–28.3 –19 –2.2 –8.9 16 60.8 10.6 51 123.8 30.0 86 186.8

–27.8 –18 –0.4 –8.3 17 62.6 11.1 52 125.6 30.6 87 188.6
–27.2 –17 1.4 –7.8 18 64.4 11.7 53 127.4 31.1 88 190.4
–26.7 –16 3.2 –7.2 19 66.2 12.2 54 129.2 31.7 89 192.2
–26.1 –15 5.0 –6.7 20 68.0 12.8 55 131.0 32.2 90 194.0
–25.6 –14 6.8 –6.1 21 69.8 13.3 56 132.8 32.8 91 195.8

–25.0 –13 8.6 –5.6 22 71.6 13.9 57 134.6 33.3 92 197.6
–24.4 –12 10.4 –5.0 23 73.4 14.4 58 136.4 33.9 93 199.4
–23.9 –11 12.2 –4.4 24 75.2 15.0 59 138.2 34.4 94 201.2
–23.3 –10 14.0 –3.9 25 77.0 15.6 60 140.0 35.0 95 203.0
–22.8 –9 15.8 –3.3 26 78.8 16.1 61 141.8 35.6 96 204.8

–22.2 –8 17.6 –2.8 27 80.6 16.7 62 143.6 36.1 97 206.6
–21.7 –7 19.4 –2.2 28 82.4 17.2 63 145.4 36.7 98 208.4
–21.1 –6 21.2 –1.7 29 84.2 17.8 64 147.2 37.2 99 210.2
–20.6 –5 23.0 –1.1 30 86.0 18.3 65 149.0 37.8 100 212.0
–20.0 –4 24.8 –0.6 31 87.8 18.9 66 150.8 40.6 105 221.0

–19.4 –3 26.6 0 32 89.6 19.4 67 152.6 43.3 110 230.0
–18.9 –2 28.4 0.6 33 91.4 20.0 68 154.4 46.1 115 239.0
–18.3 –1 30.2 1.1 34 93.2 20.6 69 156.2 48.9 120 248.0
–17.8 0 32.0 1.7 35 95.0 21.1 70 158.0 51.7 125 257.0
–17.2 1 33.8 2.2 36 96.8 21.7 71 159.8 54.4 130 266.0

–16.7 2 35.6 2.8 37 98.6 22.2 72 161.6 57.2 135 275.0
–16.1 3 37.4 3.3 38 100.4 22.8 73 163.4 60.0 140 284.0
–15.6 4 39.2 3.9 39 102.2 23.3 74 165.2 62.7 145 293.0
–15.0 5 41.0 4.4 40 104.0 23.9 75 167.0 65.6 150 302.0
–14.4 6 42.8 5.0 41 105.8 24.4 76 168.8 68.3 155 311.0

–13.9 7 44.6 5.6 42 107.6 25.0 77 170.6 71.1 160 320.0
–13.3 8 46.4 6.1 43 109.4 25.6 78 172.4 73.9 165 329.0
–12.8 9 48.2 6.7 44 111.2 26.1 79 174.2 76.7 170 338.0
–12.2 10 50.0 7.2 45 113.0 26.7 80 176.0 79.4 175 347.0
40 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 41
SEN01986-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
42
SEN01988-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
01 Specification 1
Specification and technical data
Specification dimension drawings................................................................................................................... 2
Specifications.................................................................................................................................................. 4
Weight table.................................................................................................................................................. 10
Table of fuel, coolant and lubricants ............................................................................................................. 12
PC300, 350-8 1
SEN01988-01 01 Specification
Specification dimension drawings 1

Dimensions 1
Item Unit PC300-8 PC300LC-8 PC350-8 PC350LC-8

A Overall length mm 11,140 11,140 11,140 11,140
B Overall height mm 3,250 3,250 3,250 3,250
C Overall width mm 3,190 3,190 3,190 3,190
D Shoe width mm 600 600 600 600
E Cab height mm 3,110 3,110 3,110 3,110
F Tail swing radius mm 3,450 3,450 3,450 3,450
G Overall track length mm 4,625 4,955 4,625 4,955
Length of track on
H mm 3,700 4,030 3,700 4,030
ground
J Min. ground clearance mm 498 498 498 498
2 PC300, 350-8
1
1
Working ranges 1
Item Unit PC300-8 PC300LC-8 PC350-8 PC350LC-8

A Max. digging reach mm 11,100 11,100 11,100 11,100
B Max. digging depth mm 7,380 7,380 7,380 7,380
C Max. digging height mm 10,100 10,100 10,100 10,100
Max. vertical wall
D mm 6,400 6,400 6,400 6,400
digging depth
Max. dumping
E mm 7,050 7,050 7,050 7,050
height
F Min. dumping height mm 2,640 2,640 2,640 2,640
Max. reach at
G mm 10,920 10,920 10,920 10,920
ground level
PC300, 350-8 3
Specifications 1
PC300-8, PC300LC-8
Machine model PC300-8 PC300LC-8

Serial number 60001 and up
Bucket capacity m 3
1.4 1.4
Operating weight kg 31,100 31,600
Max. digging depth mm 7,380 7,380
Max. vertical wall digging
Working range
mm 6,400 6,400
depth
Max. digging radius mm 11,100 11,100
Max. reach at ground level mm 10,920 10,920
Max. digging height mm 10,100 10,100
Performance
Max. dumping height mm 7,050 7,050

Max. digging force
211.8 {21,600} 211.8 {21,600}
(When power max. function is kN {kg}
(226.5 {23,100}) (226.5 {23,100})
turned on)
Swing speed rpm 9.5 9.5
Swing operation max. slope angle deg. 21 21
Travel speed km/h Lo: 3.2 Mi: 4.5 Hi: 5.5 Lo: 3.2 Mi: 4.5 Hi: 5.5
Gradeability deg. 35 35
Ground pressure kPa{kg/cm } 2
62.9 {0.64} 59.0 {0.60}
Overall length mm 11,140 11,140
Overall width mm 3,190 3,190
Overall crawler width mm 3,190 3,190
Overall height (During transporta-
mm 3,250 3,250
tion)
Machine body overall height mm 3,110 3,110
Ground clearance of upper struc-
mm 1,185 1,185
ture bottom
Dimensions
Min. ground clearance mm 498 498

Tail swing radius mm 3,450 3,450
Work equipment minimum swing
mm 4,310 4,310
radius
Top height at minimum swing
mm 8,520 8,520
radius of work equipment
Length of track on ground mm 3,700 4,030
Track gauge mm 2,590 2,590
Cab height mm 3,110 3,110
Width of standard shoe mm 600 600
4 PC300, 350-8

Model SAA6D114E
4-cycle, water-cooled in-line, direct injection with
Type
turbocharger and air-cooled aftercooler
Number of cylinders – bore x
mm 6-114x135
stroke
Piston displacement l {cc} 8.27 {8,270}
kW/rpm
Flywheel horsepower 183.9/1,980 {250/1,980}
{HP/rpm}
Performance
Engine
Nm/rpm
Max. torque 1,108/1,450 {113/1,450}
{kgm/rpm}
High idle under no load rpm 2,050
Low idle under no load rpm 1,000
g/kWh
Min. fuel consumption ratio 205 {151}
{g/HPh}
Starting motor 24 V, 7.5 kW
Alternator 24 V, 60 A
Battery 12 V, 126 Ah x 2
Radiator type Aluminum wave type, 4 rows
Carrier roller Two on one side
Undercarriage
Track roller 7 on one side 8 on one side

Assembly-type triple Assembly-type triple
Track shoe grosser grosser
45 on one side 48 on one side
PC300, 350-8 5

Type and numbers HPV125+125, Variable displacement piston type: 2
Hydraulic motor Control valve Hydraulic pump
Delivery l/min 267.5 x 2
MPa
Set pressure 37.8 {380}
{kg/cm2}
Type and numbers 6-spool + 1-spool type: 1
Operating method Hydraulic
Travel motor HMV160ADT-2, piston type: 2

Hydraulic system
(with brake valve and parking brake)

KMF230ABE-5, piston type: 1
Swing motor
(with safety valve, shaft brake and reverse prevention
valve)
Boom (*1) Arm (*1) (*2) Bucket
Double acting Double acting Double acting
Hydraulic cylinder
Type
piston piston piston
Cylinder inner diameter mm 140 160 140
Piston rod diameter mm 100 110 100
Stroke mm 1,480 1,825 1,285
Max. pin-to-pin distance mm 3,525 4,255 3,155
Min. pin-to-pin distance mm 2,045 2,430 1,870
Hydraulic tank Box-shaped, closed type
Hydraulic oil filter Tank return side
Hydraulic oil cooler CF40-1 (Air-cooling type)
*1: Cushion is provided on head side
*2: Cushion is provided on bottom side
6 PC300, 350-8
PC350-8, PC350LC-8

Bucket capacity m 3
1.4 1.4
Operating weight kg 32,600 33,660
Max. digging depth mm 7,380 7,380
Max. vertical wall digging
Working range
mm 6,400 6,400
depth
Max. digging radius mm 11,100 11,100
Max. reach at ground level mm 10,920 10,920
Max. digging height mm 10,100 10,100
Performance
Max. dumping height mm 7,050 7,050

Max. digging force
212.8 {21,700} 212.8 {21,700}
(When power max. function is kN {kg}
(227.5 {23,200}) (227.5 {23,200})
turned on)
Swing speed rpm 9.5 9.5
Swing operation max. slope angle deg. 18 18
Travel speed km/h Lo: 3.2 Mi: 4.5 Hi: 5.5 Lo: 3.2 Mi: 4.5 Hi: 5.5
Gradeability deg. 35 35
Ground pressure kPa{kg/cm } 2
65.9 {0.67} 62.9 {0.64}
Overall length mm 11,140 11,140
Overall width mm 3,190 3,190
Overall crawler width mm 3,190 3,190
Overall height (During transporta-
mm 3,250 3,250
tion)
Machine body overall height mm 3,110 3,110
Ground clearance of upper struc-
mm 1,185 1,185
ture bottom
Dimensions
Min. ground clearance mm 498 498

Tail swing radius mm 3,450 3,450
Work equipment minimum swing
mm 4,310 4,310
radius
Top height at minimum swing
mm 8,520 8,520
radius of work equipment
Length of track on ground mm 3,700 4,030
Track gauge mm 2,590 2,590
Cab height mm 3,110 3,110
Width of standard shoe mm 600 600
PC300, 350-8 7

Model SAA6D114E
4-cycle, water-cooled in-line, direct injection with
Type
turbocharger and air-cooled aftercooler
Number of cylinders – bore x
mm 6-114x135
stroke
Piston displacement l {cc} 8.27 {8,270}
kW/rpm
Flywheel horsepower 183.9/1,950 {250/1,950}
{HP/rpm}
Performance
Engine
Nm/rpm
Max. torque 1,108/1,450 {113/1,450}
{kgm/rpm}
High idle under no load rpm 2,050
Low idle under no load rpm 1,000
g/kWh
Min. fuel consumption ratio 205 {151}
{g/HPh}
Starting motor 24 V, 7.5 kW
Alternator 24 V, 60 A
Battery 12 V, 126 Ah x 2
Radiator type Aluminum wave type, 4 rows
Carrier roller Two on one side
Undercarriage
Track roller 7 on one side 8 on one side

Assembly-type triple Assembly-type triple
Track shoe grosser grosser
45 on one side 48 on one side
8 PC300, 350-8

Type and numbers HPV125+125, Variable displacement piston type: 2
Hydraulic motor Control valve Hydraulic pump
Delivery l/min 267.5 x 2
MPa
Set pressure 37.8 {380}
{kg/cm2}
Type and numbers 6-spool + 1-spool type 1
Operating method Hydraulic
Travel motor HMV160ADT-2, piston type: 2

Hydraulic system
(with brake valve and parking brake)

KMF230ABE-5, piston type: 1
Swing motor
(with safety valve, shaft brake and reverse prevention
valve)
Boom (*1) Arm (*1) (*2) Bucket
Double acting Double acting Double acting
Hydraulic cylinder
Type
piston piston piston
Cylinder inner diameter mm 140 160 140
Piston rod diameter mm 100 110 110
Stroke mm 1,480 1,825 1,825
Max. pin-to-pin distance mm 3,525 4,255 3,155
Min. pin-to-pin distance mm 2,045 2,430 1,870
Hydraulic tank Box-shaped, closed type
Hydraulic oil filter Tank return side
Hydraulic oil cooler CF40-1 (Air-cooling type)
*1: Cushion is provided on head side
*2: Cushion is provided on bottom side
PC300, 350-8 9
Weight table 1
k This weight table is prepared for your reference when handling or transporting the components.
PC300-8, PC300LC-8
Unit: kg
Engine assembly 1,148 1,148
q Engine 865 865
q Damper 14.3 14.3
q Hydraulic pump 178 178
Radiator and oil cooler assembly 153 153
Hydraulic tank and filter assembly (Not including
176 176
hydraulic oil)
Fuel tank and filter assembly (Not including fuel) 238 238
Revolving frame 2,723 2,723
Cab 570 570
Operator seat 35 35
Counterweight 5,480 5,480
Swing machinery 442 442
Control valve 242 242
Swing motor 88 88
Travel motor 164 x 2 164 x 2
Center swivel joint 29.9 29.9
Track frame assembly 7,311 7,979
q Track frame 3,879 4,441
q Swing circle 487 487
q Idler 169 x 2 169 x 2
q Idler cushion 287.5 x 2 287.5 x 2
q Carrier roller 28 x 4 28 x 4
q Track roller 52.2 x 14 52.2 x 16
q Final drive (including travel motor) 583 x 2 583 x 2
Track shoe assembly
q Standard triple shoe (600 mm) 3,470 3,700
q Wide triple shoe (800 mm) 4,380 4,680
q Load liner (Rubber pad type) (600 mm) – –
Boom assembly 2,290 2,290
Arm assembly 1,105 1,105
Bucket assembly 1,015 1,015
Boom cylinder assembly 254 x 2 254 x 2
Arm cylinder assembly 382 382
Bucket cylinder assembly 228 228
Link (large) assembly 316 316
Link (small) assembly – –
Boom pin 76 + 15 x 2 + 56 + 17 + 42 76 + 15 x 2 + 56 + 17 + 42
Arm pin 13 + 17 13 + 17
Bucket pin 30 x 2 30 x 2
Link pin 27 x 2 27 x 2
10 PC300, 350-8
PC350-8, PC350LC-8
Unit: kg
Engine assembly 1,148 1,148
q Engine 865 865
q Damper 14.3 14.3
q Hydraulic pump 178 178
Radiator and oil cooler assembly 153 153
Hydraulic tank and filter assembly (Not including
176 176
hydraulic oil)
Fuel tank assembly (Not including fuel) 238 238
Revolving frame 2,828 2,828
Cab 570 570
Operator seat 35 35
Counterweight 6,380 6,380
Swing machinery 442 442
Control valve 242 242
Swing motor 88 88
Travel motor 164 x 2 164 x 2
Center swivel joint 29.9 29.9
Track frame assembly 7,538 8,183
q Track frame 4,074 4,602
q Swing circle 487 487
q Idler 169 x 2 169 x 2
q Idler cushion 287.5 x 2 287.5 x 2
q Carrier roller 28 x 4 28 x 4
q Track roller (double frame) 57.5 x 6 57.5 x 8
q Track roller (single frame) 52.2 x 8 52.2 x 8
q Final drive (including travel motor) 583 x 2 583 x 2
Track shoe assembly
q Wide triple shoe (800 mm) – –
q Load liner (Rubber pad type) (600 mm) – –
Boom assembly 2,450 2,450
Arm assembly 1,211 1,211
Bucket assembly 1,508 1,508
Boom cylinder assembly 254 x 2 254 x 2
Arm cylinder assembly 382 382
Bucket cylinder assembly 228 228
Link (large) assembly 316 316
Link (small) assembly – –
Boom pin 76 + 15x2 + 56 + 17 + 42 76 + 15x2 + 56 + 17 + 42
Arm pin 13 + 17 13 + 17
Bucket pin 30 x 2 30 x 2
Link pin 27 x 2 27 x 2
PC300, 350-8 11
Table of fuel, coolant and lubricants 1

a For details of the notes (Notes 1, Note 2...) in the table, see Operation and Maintenance Manual.
12 PC300, 350-8
Unit: l
PC300/300LC-8, PC350/350LC-8
Reservoir
Specified (l) Refill (l)
Engine oil pan 40 35
Swing machinery case 16.5 16.5
Final drive case (each) 9 9
Damper case 1.3 1.3
Hydraulic system 365 188
Fuel tank 605 —
Cooling system 32 —
PC300, 350-8 13
SEN01988-01
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
14
SEN01990-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
10 Structure, function and

maintenance standard 1
Engine and cooling system
Engine related parts ....................................................................................................................................... 2
Radiator, oil cooler and aftercooler................................................................................................................. 3
PC300, 350-8 1
SEN01990-00 10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Engine related parts 1
1. Drive plate Outline

2. Torsion spring A wet type damper assembly is used.
3. Stopper pin Oil capacity: 1.3 l
4. Friction plate
5. Damper assembly
6. Muffler
7. Rear engine mount
8. Front engine mount
2 PC300, 350-8
Radiator, oil cooler and aftercooler 1
1. Reservoir tank 6. Aftercooler

2. Radiator 7. Radiator inlet hose
3. Radiator cap 8. Radiator outlet hose
4. Oil cooler 9. Shroud
5. Guard
Specifications
Radiator: Aluminum wave type, 4th row
Oil cooler: CF40-1
PC300, 350-8 3
SEN01990-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
4
SEN01991-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Power train
Power train...................................................................................................................................................... 2
Swing circle..................................................................................................................................................... 3
Swing machinery............................................................................................................................................. 4
Final drive ....................................................................................................................................................... 6
Sprocket .......................................................................................................................................................... 8
PC300, 350-8 1
Power train 1
1. Idler
2. Center swivel joint
3. Control valve
4. Final drive
5. Travel motor (HMV160ADT-2)
6. Engine (SAA6D114E)
7. Hydraulic pump (HPV125+125)
8. Travel speed solenoid valve
9. Swing brake solenoid valve
10. Swing machinery
11. Swing motor (HMF230ABE-5)
12. Swing circle
2 PC300, 350-8
Swing circle 1
1. Swing circle inner race (No. of teeth: 90)

2. Ball
3. Swing circle outer race
a. Inner race soft zone “S“ position
b. Outer race soft zone “S“ position
Specifications
Reduction ratio: –90/13 = –6.923
Amount of grease: 33 l (G2-LI)
Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Axial clearance of bearing (when Standard clearance Clearance limit
4 mounted on chassis)
Replace
0.5 – 1.6 3.2
PC300, 350-8 3
Swing machinery 1
4 PC300, 350-8
1. Swing pinion (No. of teeth: 13) 8. No. 1 planetary carrier

2. Cover 9. No. 1 planetary gear
3. Plate 10. Swing motor
4. No. 2 planetary carrier 11. Oil level gauge
5. Ring gear 12. No. 1 sun gear
6. No.2 planetary gear 13. Case
7. No.2 sun gear 14. Drain plug
Specifications
Reduction ratio: ((19+68)/19) x ((24+68)/24) = 17.553
Unit: mm
Backlash between swing motor Standard clearance Clearance limit
15 shaft and No. 1 sun gear 0.18 – 0.28 –
Backlash between No. 1 sun gear
16 and No.1 planetary gear
0.15 – 0.51 1.00
Backlash between No. 1 planetary

17 gear and ring gear
0.17 – 0.60 1.10

18 carrier and No. 2 sun gear
0.40 – 0.75 1.20

0.16 – 0.55 1.00 Replace

0.17 – 0.60 1.10

21 carrier and swing pinion
0.07 – 0.23 –
Backlash between swing pinion and

22 swing circle
0 – 1.21 2.00
Clearance between plate and No. 2

23 planetary carrier
0.57 – 1.09 –
Standard size Repair limit Reapply hard

Wear of swing pinion surface con-
24 tacting with oil seal 0 chrome plating or
145 -0.100 – replace
PC300, 350-8 5
Final drive 1
1. Level plug 8. Cover

2. Drain plug 9. Ring gear (No. of teeth: 97)
3. No.1 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 42) 10. Hub
4. No.1 sun gear (No. of teeth: 11) 11. Sprocket
5. No. 2 sun gear (No. of teeth: 19) 12. Floating seal
6. No.1 planetary carrier 13. Travel motor
7. No. 2 planetary carrier 14. No. 2 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 38)
Specifications
Reduction ratio: –((11+97)/11) x ((19+97)/19) = –58.943
6 PC300, 350-8
Unit: mm
Backlash between No. 1 sun gear Standard clearance Clearance limit
15 and No.1 planetary gear 0.12 – 0.44 0.9
0.18 – 0.62 1.2

17 carrier and motor
0.06 – 0.25 –
Replace
0.15 – 0.51 1.00

0.19 – 0.66 1.3

20 carrier and No. 2 sun gear
0.39 – 0.80 1.6
21 Amount of wear on sprocket tooth Repair limit: 6 Build-up welding

Standard size Repair limit for rebuilding or
22 Width of sprocket tooth replace
87 84
PC300, 350-8 7
Sprocket 1
Unit: mm
Standard size Repair limit
1 Wear of tooth tip
336.5 324.5
Build-up welding
2 Thickness of tooth root 20 14
for rebuilding or
3 Width of tooth 87 84 replace
Repair limit: 6 (measure with the full-size drawing of sprocket tooth
4 Wear of tooth shape
shape)
8 PC300, 350-8
Full-size drawing of sprocket tooth shape
a The above drawing is reduced to 62%. Enlarge it to 160% to return it to the full scale and make a copy
on an OHP sheet.
PC300, 350-8 9
SEN01991-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
10
SEN01992-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8
Machine model Serial No.

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Undercarriage and frame
Track frame and recoil spring.......................................................................................................................... 2
Idler ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Carrier roller .................................................................................................................................................... 6
Track roller ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
Track shoe ...................................................................................................................................................... 8
PC300, 350-8 1
Track frame and recoil spring 1

a The following drawing indicates PC300-8.
1. Idler q The dimensions and the number of track roll-

2. Track frame ers depend on the model, but the basic struc-
3. Carrier roller ture is not different.
4. Final drive q Number of track rollers
5. Track roller
6. Track shoe Model Q'ty (one side)
7. Center guard PC300, 350-8 7
8. Front guard PC300LC-8,
8
PC350LC-8
2 PC300, 350-8
Standard shoe
Models
PC300-8 PC350-8 PC300LC-8 PC350LC-8
Item
Shoe width (triple shoe) (mm) 600 600 600 600
Link pitch (mm) 216 216 216 216
No. of shoes (one side) 45 45 48 48
Unit: mm
Standard size Tolerance Rapair limit
Track +2
Vertical width of idler 123 127
9 guide
frame –1
Idler sup- Build-up welding
120 ±0.5 118
port for rebuilding or
replace
Track +3
266 271
Horizontal width of idler frame –1
10 guide Idler sup-
261 — 259
port
Standard size Rapair limit
Free length x Installation Installation Installation
Free length
11 Recoil spring O.D. length load load Replace
208.7 kN 167.0 kN
811 x 261 655 —
{21,290 kg} {17,030 kg}
PC300, 350-8 3
Idler 1
4 PC300, 350-8
Unit: mm
1 Outside diameter of protrusion
635 —
2 Outside diameter of tread 590 578
Build-up welding for
3 Difference of tread 22.5 28.5 rebuilding or
4 Thickness of tread — — replace
5 Total width 190 —

6 Width of tread 44 50
Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
Clearance between shaft and bush- size Shaft Hole clearance limit
7 ing –0.225 +0.130 0.201 –
80 —
–0.325 –0.024 0.455
Standard Tolerance Standard Interference
Interference between idler and size Shaft Hole interference limit Replace bushing
8 bushing +0.087 –0.027 0.064 –
87.6 —
+0.037 –0.079 0.166
Clearance between bushing and Standard size Clearance limit
9 support
(Sum of clearance at both sides) 0.68 – 1.22 —
PC300, 350-8 5
Carrier roller 1
Unit: mm
1 Outside diameter of flange
179 —
3 Width of tread 50.3 —
4 Thickness of tread 32 25
5 Width of flange 19 —
Clearance between shaft and bush- size Shaft Hole clearance limit Replace
6 ing –0.250 +0.074 0.250 –
54 —
–0.280 +0.040 0.354
Interference between roller and size Shaft Hole interference limit
7 bushing +0.117 +0.030 0.057 –
61 —
+0.087 +0.040 0.117
Standard clearance Clearance limit
8 Axial clearance of roller
0.5 – 0.7 —
6 PC300, 350-8
Track roller 1
Unit: mm
1 Outside diameter of outer flange
216 —
Outside diameter of inner flange
2 (Double flange)
210 —

4 Thickness of tread 54 48 Build-up welding
5 Overal width 250 — for rebuilding or
replace
Single flange 49
6 Width of tread —
Double flange 47.7
Single flange
7 Width of flange 27 —
Double flange
Width of inner frange
8 (Double frame)
98 —
Clearance between bushing and

9 collar 0.44 – 0.97 —
(Sum of clearance at both sides)
Clearance between shaft and size Shaft Hole clearance limit
10 bushing –0.250 +0.186 0.186 – Replace bushing
65 —
–0.350 –0.064 0.536
Interference between roller and size Shaft Hole interference limit
11 bushing +0.108 –0.006 0.014 –
72 —
+0.008 –0.036 0.144
PC300, 350-8 7
Track shoe 1
a P portion shows the link of bushing press fitting end.
Unit: mm
1 Link pitch
216.3 219.3 Reverse or
Standard size Repair limit replace
2 Outside diameter of bushing
66.9 61.9
3 Thickness of bushing metal 10.8 5.8 Adjust or replace
4 Link height
116 107
Repair or replace
Thickness of link metal (bushing
5 press-fitting portion)
30.7 21.7
8 PC300, 350-8
Unit: mm
6 178.4
7 Shoe bolt pitch 140.4 Replace
8 76.2
Inside
9 width
102
Overall
10 Link
width
47.8 Repair or replace
Tread
11 width
42.6
12 Protrusion of pin 4.2

13 Protrusion of regular bushing 5.25
14 Overall length of pin 242
Adjust or replace
15 Overall length of bushing 148.4
Standard size Reverse
16 Thickness of spacer
10.8 5.8
17 Bushing 98 – 264.6 kN {10 – 27 ton}
Regular
18 pin
147 – 362.6 kN {15 – 37 ton}
Press-fitting force —
19 Master
98 – 215.6 kN {10 – 22 ton}
(*) pin
Tightening torque
Retightening angle (deg.)
a. Regu- (Nm {kgm})
lar link 393±39
Triple grouser shoe 120±10
20 Shoe bolt {40±4} Retighten
Tightening torque Lower limit torque
b. Master Retightening angle (deg.)
(Nm {kgm}) (Nm {kgm})
link
— — —
Tolerance Standard interfer-
Standard size
Interference between bushing and Shaft Hole ence
21 link +0.464 +0.074
66.5 0.350 – 0.464
+0.424 +0.074
Interference between regular pin +0.235 –0.188
22 and link
44.6
+0.085 –0.250
0.273 – 0.485
Tolerance
Standard size Standard clearance
Clearance between regular pin and Shaft Hole
23 bushing +0.235 +0.915
44.6 0.180 – 0.830 Adjust or replace
+0.085 +0.415
Tolerance Standard interfer-
Standard size
24 Interference between master pin Shaft Hole ence
(*) and link +0.03 –0.188
44.6 0.188 – 0.280
+0.03 –0.250
Tolerance
Standard size Standard clearance
25 Clearance between master pin and Shaft Hole
(*) bushing +0.050 +0.915
44.3 0.365 – 0.965
–0.050 +0.415
* Dry type track link
PC300, 350-8 9
Triple grouser shoe
Unit: mm
1 Height 36 24
(*) 30 18
2 Thickness 11
32
3
(*) 29
Length of base
26
4
(*) 24 Build-up welding
24 for rebuilding or
5 replace
(*) 22
18
6 Length at tip
(*) 16
18
7
(*) 22
8 Thickness 47 35
(*) 41 29
*: PC300-8, PC350-8, PC350LC-8: 600 mm width shoe
10 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 11
SEN01992-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
12
SEN01993-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Hydraulic system, Part 1
Hydraulic equipment layout drawing ............................................................................................................... 2
Hydraulic tank and filter .................................................................................................................................. 4
Hydraulic pump ............................................................................................................................................... 6
PC300, 350-8 1
Hydraulic equipment layout

drawing 1
1. Bucket cylinder
2. Arm cylinder
3. Boom cylinder
4. Swing motor
5. Control valve
6. Oil cooler
7. Hydraulic filter
8. Hydraulic pump
9. L.H. travel motor
10. Hydraulic tank
11. Multi-pattern selector valve
12. L.H. PPC valve
13. Work equipment lock lever (electric type)
14. Center swivel joint
15. R.H. PPC valve
16. Travel PPC valve
17. Attachment circuit selector valve
18. Hydraulic drift prevention valve
19. Accumulator
20. Solenoid valve assembly
20A. PPC lock solenoid
20B. Travel junction solenoid
20C. Pump merge-divider solenoid
20D. Travel speed solenoid
20E. Swing brake solenoid
20F. Machine push-up solenoid
20G. 2-stage relief solenoid
2 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 3
Hydraulic tank and filter 1
1. Oil filler cap Specifications

2. Bypass valve Tank capacity: 275 l
3. Strainer Amount of oil inside tank: 188 l
4. Filter element
5. Sight gauge Safety valve
6. Hydraulic tank Relief cracking pressure:
16.7 ± 6.9 kPa {0.17 ± 0.07 kg/cm2}
Suction cracking pressure:
0 – 0.49 kPa {0 – 0.005 kg/cm2}
Bypass valve set pressure:
150 ± 30 kPa {1.5 ± 0.3 kg/cm2}
4 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 5
Hydraulic pump 1
Type: HPV125+125
6 PC300, 350-8
Outline
q This pump consists of 2 variable capacity
swash plate piston pumps, PC valve, LS valve,
EPC valve and variable volume valve.
BMP: Breather fitting port

IM: PC mode selector current
ISIG: LS set pressure selector current
OCP: Oil level detection port
PAF: Front pump delivery port
PAR: Rear pump delivery port
PBF: Front pump pressure input port
PBR: Rear pump pressure input port
PD1F: Case drain port
PD1R: Air breeder
PD2F: Drain plug
PD2R: Drain plug
PENF: Front control pressure detection port
PENR: Rear control pressure detection port
PEPC: EPC basic pressure port
PEPB: EPC basic pressure detection port
PFC: Front pump delivery pressure detection port
PLSC: LS set selector pressure detection port
PLSF: Front load pressure input port
PLSFC: Front load pressure detection port
PLSR: Rear load pressure input port
PLSRC: Rear load pressure detection port
PM: PC mode selector pressure detection port
PRC: Rear pump delivery pressure detection port
PS: Pump suction port
1. Front pump
2. Rear pump
3. LS valve
4. PC valve
5. LS-EPC valve
6. PC-EPC valve
7. Variable volume valve
PC300, 350-8 7
1. Front shaft 8. Valve plate

2. Cradle 9. End cap
3. Front case 10. Rear shaft
4. Rocker cam 11. Rear case
5. Shoe 12. Servo piston
6. Piston 13. PC valve
7. Cylinder block
8 PC300, 350-8
Function
q The pump converts the engine rotation trans-
mitted to the shaft to oil pressure and delivers
pressurized oil corresponding to the load.
q It is possible to change the discharge amount
by changing the swash plate angle.
Structure
q Cylinder block (7) is supported to shaft (1) by q Piston (6) carries out relative movement in the
spline (14). axial direction inside each cylinder chamber of
q Shaft (1) is supported by front and rear bear- cylinder block (7).
ings (15). q Cylinder block (7) seals the pressurized oil to
q Tip of piston (6) is shaped as a concave ball valve plate (8) and carries out relative rotation.
and shoe (5) is caulked to it to form one unit. q This surface is designed so that the oil pres-
q Piston (6) and shoe (5) constitute the spherical sure balance is maintained at a suitable level.
bearing. q The oil inside each cylinder chamber of cylin-
q Rocker cam (4) has flat surface (A), and shoe der block (7) is suctioned and discharged
(5) is always pressed against this surface while through valve plate (8).
sliding in a circular movement.
q Rocker cam (4) conducts high pressure oil to
cylinder surface (B) with cradle (2), which is
secured to the case, and forms a static pres-
sure bearing when it slides.
PC300, 350-8 9
Operation of pump
q Cylinder block (7) rotates together with shaft q As center line (X) of rocker cam (4) matches
(1), and shoe (5) slides on flat surface (A). the axial direction of cylinder block (7) (swash
q When this happens, rocker cam (4) moves plate angle (a) = 0), the difference between
along cylindrical surface (B), so angle (a) volumes (E) and (F) inside cylinder block (7)
between center line (X) of rocker cam (4) and becomes 0.
the ax ial di rec tio n of cy li nder b loc k (7) q Suction and discharge of pressurized oil is not
changes. carried out in this state. Namely pumping
q (a) is named the swash plate angle. action is not performed. (Actually, however, the
swash plate angle is not set to 0)
q With center line (X) of rocker cam (4) at a

swash plate angle (a) in relation to the axial
direction of cylinder block (7), flat surface (A)
acts as a cam in relation to shoe (5).
q In this way, piston (6) slides on the inside of
cylinder block (7), so a difference between vol-
umes (E) and (F) is created inside cylinder
block (7).
q A single piston (6) sucks and discharges the oil
by the amount (F) – (E).
q As cylinder block (7) rotates and the volume of
chamber (E) becomes smaller, the pressurized
oil is discharged.
q On the other hand, the volume of chamber (F)
grows larger and, in this process, the oil is suc-
tioned.
10 PC300, 350-8
Control of discharge amount

q If the swash plate angle (a) becomes larger,
the difference between volumes (E) and (F)
b ec o me s l ar g er a nd pu m p d el i v e r y ( Q )
increases.
q Servo piston (12) is used for changing swash
plate angle (a).
q Servo piston (12) carries out linear reciprocal
movement according to the signal pressure
from the PC and LS valves.
q This linear movement is transmitted to rocker
cam (4) via slider (13).
q Being supported by cradle (2) on the cylindrical
surface, rocker cam (4) slides on the surface
while continuing revolving movement.
q Space of the pressure receiving area of servo
piston (12) are not identical on the left side and
right side. Main pump discharge pressure (self
pressure) (PP) is always brought to the pres-
sure chamber of the small diameter piston
side.
q Output pressure (PEN) of the LS valve is
brought to the chamber receiving the pressure
at the large diameter piston end.
q The relationship in the size of pressure (PP) at
the small diameter piston end and pressure
(PEN) at the large diameter piston end, and
the ratio between the area receiving the pres-
sure of the small diameter piston and the large
diameter piston controls the movement of
servo piston (12).
PC300, 350-8 11
1. LS valve
PA: Pump port 1. Sleeve

PDP: Drain port 2. Piston
PLP: LS control pressure output port 3. Spool
PLS: LS pressure input port 4. Spring
PP: Pump port 5. Seat
PPL: Control pressure input port 6. Sleeve
PSIG: LS mode selector pilot port 7. Plug
8. Locknut
Function Front pump

q The LS (load sensing) valve detects the load
and controls the discharge amount.
q This valve controls main pump delivery (Q)
according to differential pressure (EPLS)[= PP
– LS], called the LS differential pressure (the
difference between main pump pressure PP
and control valve outlet port pressure PLS).
q Main pump pressure (PP), pressure (PLS)
(called the LS pressure) coming from the con-
trol valve output, and pressure (PSIG) (called
the LS selector pressure) from the proportional
solenoid valve enter this valve.
q The relationship between the LS differential
pressure between the main pump pressure
(PP) and LS pressure (PLS) (EPLS) [= (PP) – Rear pump
(PLS)] and the pump delivery (Q) changes as
shown in the diagram according to LS selector
current (ISIG) of the LS-EPC valve.
q If (ISIG) changes from 0 to 1A, setting force
the spring changes, too. As the result, the
specified median of the pump delivery volume
switching point changes as shown in the dia-
gram. As for the front pump side, it will change
in the range of 0.98 to 2.45 MPa {in the range
of 10 to 25 kg/cm2] and as for the rear pump
side, it will change in the range of 1.08 to 2.55
MPa {in the range of 11 to 26 kg/cm2}.
12 PC300, 350-8
Operation
1) When the control valve is situated at neutral
q The LS valve is a 3-way selector valve, with q Spool (6) is pushed to the right, and port (C)
pressure (PLS) (LS pressure) from the outlet and port (D) will be connected.
port of the control valve brought to spring q Pump pressure (PP) is conducted to the larger
chamber (B), and main pump discharge pres- diameter end from the port (K).
sure (PP) brought to port (H) of sleeve (8). q The same pump pressure (PP) is conducted to
q Magnitude of the force resulting from this LS the smaller diameter end from the port (J).
pressure (PLS), force of spring (4) and the q According to the difference in the areas on
pump delivery pressure (self pressure) (PP) servo piston (12), the pressure moves in such
determine the position of spool (6). that the swash plate angle may be minimized.
q However, magnitude of the output pressure
(PSIG) (called the LS selector pressure) of the
EPC valve for the LS valve entering port (G)
also changes the position of spool (6). (Setting
force of the spring is changed)
q Before the engine is started, servo piston (12) is
pushed to the right. (See the figure)
q If the control lever is at the neutral position
when the engine is started, LS pressure (PLS)
will be set to 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}. (It is intercon-
nected to the drain circuit via the control valve
spool)
PC300, 350-8 13
2) Action for the direction of maximizing the pump delivery
q When the difference between the main pump q If the output pressure of the EPC valve for the
pressure (PP) and LS pressure (PLS), in other LS valve enters port (G), rightward force is
words, LS differential pressure (EPLS) generated on piston (7).
becomes smaller (for example, when the area q If piston (7) is pushed to the right, setting force
of opening of the control valve becomes larger of spring (4) is weakened, changing the LS dif-
and pump pressure PP drops), spool (6) is ferential pressure (EPLS) [Difference between
pushed to the left by the combined force of LS oil pressures (PLS) and (PP)] when ports (D)
pressure (PLS) and the force of spring (4). and (E) of spool (6) are connected.
q When spool (6) moves, port (D) and port (E)
are interconnected and connected to the PC
valve.
q The PC valve is connected to the drain port, so
the pressure across circuits (D) and (K)
becomes drain pressure (PT). (The operation
of the PC valve is explained later.)
q The pressure at the large diameter end of
servo piston (12) becomes drain pressure
(PT), and pump pressure (PP) enters port (J)
at the small diameter end, so servo piston (12)
is pushed to the left side. Therefore, the swash
plate is moved in the direction to make the dis-
charge amount larger.
14 PC300, 350-8
3) Action for the direction of minimizing the pump delivery
q When LS differential pressure (EPLS)

becomes larger (for example, when the area of
opening of the control valve becomes smaller
and pump pressure (PP) rises) because of the
rightward move (it reduces discharge amount)
of servo piston (12), pump pressure (PP)
pushes spool (6) to the right.
q When spool (6) moves, main pump pressure
(PP) flows from port (C) to port (D) and from
port (K), it enters the large diameter end of the
piston.
q Main pump pressure (PP) also enters port (J)
of the small diameter end of the piston, but
because of the difference in area between the
large diameter end and the small diameter end
on servo piston (12), it is pushed to the right.
As the result, servo piston (12) moves into the
direction of reducing the swash plate angle.
q As LS selector pressure (PSIG) is input to port
(G), setting force of spring (4) is reduced.
PC300, 350-8 15
4) When servo piston is balanced
q Let us take the area receiving the pressure at q Force of spring (4) is adjusted in such that the
the large diameter end of the piston as (A1), position of the balanced stop of this spool (6)
the area receiving the pressure at the small may be determined when (PP) – (PLS) = 2.45
diameter end as (A0), and the pressure flowing MPa {25 kg/cm2} on the front pump side and
into the large diameter end of the piston as (PP) – (PLS) = 2.55 MPa {26 kg/cm2} on the
(PEN). rear pump side at the median of the specified
q If the main pump pressure (PP) of the LS valve value.
and the combined force of spring (4) and LS q If (PSIG) [Output pressure of LS-EPC valve, 0
pressure (PLS) are balanced, and the relation- to 2.9 MPa {0 to 30 kg/cm2}] is input to port (G),
ship is (A0) x (PP) = (A1) x (PEN), servo piston the position of the balanced stop is changed.
(12) will stop in that position. The front pump side will be moved in the range
q And the swash plate of the pump will be held in of (PP) –(PLS) = 2.45 to 0.98 MPa {25 to 0 kg/
an intermediate position. [Spool (6) will be cm2} and the rear pump will be moved in the
stopped at a position where the distance of the range of (PP) – (PLS) = 2.55 to 1.08 MPa {26
opening from port (D) to port (E) and the dis- to 11 kg/cm2} in proportion to (PSIG) pressure.
tance from port (C) to port (D) is almost the
same.]
q At this point, the relationship between the pres-
sure receiving areas across servo piston (12)
is (A0) : (A1) = 3 : 5, so the pressure applied
across the piston when it is balanced becomes
(PP) : (PEN) C 5 : 3.
16 PC300, 350-8
2. PC valve
PA: Pump port 1. Plug

PA2: Pump pressure pilot port 2. Servo piston assembly
PDP: Drain port 3. Pin
PM: Mode selector pressure pilot port 4. Spool
PPL: Control pressure output port (to LS valve) 5. Retainer
6. Seat
7. Cover
8. Wiring
Function
q When the pump discharge pressure (PP1) q If the engine speed goes below the specified
(self-pressure) and (PP2) (other pump pres- value because of increased load, the controller
sure) are high, the PC valve controls the pump sends a command current to PC-EPC valve
so that the volume of oil beyond the discharge solenoid in order to reduce the slope angle in
pressure-based specific flowrate may not be proportion to reduction in the engine speed.
conducted however you may increase the con-
trol valve stroke. Namely it is intended at con-
trolling the horse power for the pumps so that it
may not exceed the engine hose power.
q If the pump discharge pressure increases due
to increased load during operation, this valve
decreases the pump delivery.
q And if the pump delivery pressure goes low, it
increases the pump delivery.
q In this case, relation between the mean dis-
charge pressure of the front and rear pumps
[(PP1) + (PP2)]/2 and the pump delivery (Q)
will becomes as shown in the diagram if the
relation is represented as the parameter the
current value (X) to be given to PC-EPC valve
solenoid.
q The controller continues counting the actual
engine speed.
q If the engine speed is slowed down due to
increased load, the controller reduces the
pump delivery to recover the speed.
PC300, 350-8 17
Operation
1) When pump controller is normal
(1) When the load on the actuator is small and pump discharge pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are low
Action of PC-EPC valve solenoid (1)

q Command current (X) is being sent to PC-EPC a Other pump's pressure denotes the pressure
valve solenoid (1) from the pump controller. of the pump situated on the opposite side.
q This command current acts on PC-EPC valve
to output the signal pressure in order to modify For the front pump pressure, the other pump's
the force pushing piston (2). pressure is that of the rear pump.
q Spool (3) stops at a position where the com-
bined spool-pushing force is balanced by the And for the rear pump pressure, the other
setting force of springs (4) and (6) as well as pump's pressure is that of the front pump.
the pump pressures (PP1) (self-pressure) and
(PP2) (another pump's pressure).
q The pressure [port (C) pressure] output from
PC valve is changed depending on the above
position.
q The size of command current (X) is determined
by the nature of the operation (lever opera-
tion), the selected working mode, and the set
value and actual value of the engine speed.
18 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 19
Action of spring
q Load of springs (4) and (6) on the PC valve is q When pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are
determined by the swash plate position. small, spool (3) will be positioned in the left
q As servo piston (9) moves to right, spring (6) is side.
retracted. q Port (C) and (D) are connected, and the pres-
q If the servo piston moves further, it will be con- sure entering the LS valve becomes drain
tacted again seat (5) and spring (6) will be pressure (PT).
fixed. q If port (E) and port (G) of the LS valve are con-
q After that, spring (4) alone will operate. nected, the pressure entering the large diame-
q The spring load is changed by servo piston (9) ter end of the piston from port (J) becomes
as it extends or compresses springs (4) and drain pressure (PT), and servo piston (9)
(6). moves to the left side.
q If the command current (X) to PC-EPC valve q The pump delivery will be set to the increasing
solenoid (1) changes, so does the force push- trend.
ing piston (2). q Accompanied with move of servo piston (9),
q Spring load of springs (4) and (6) is also springs (4) and (6) will be expanded and the
affected by the command current (X) to PC- spring force becomes weaker.
EPC valve solenoid. q As the spring force is weakened, spool (3)
q Port (C) of the PC valve is connected to port moves to the right, the connecting between
(E) of the LS valve. port (C) and port (D) is shut off and the pump
q Self pressure (PP1) enters port (B) and the discharge pressure ports (B) and (C) are con-
small diameter end of servo piston (9), and nected.
other pump pressure (PP2) enters port (A).
20 PC300, 350-8
q As a result, the pressure on port (C) rises and

the pressure on the large diameter end of the
piston also rises. Thus, the leftward move of
servo piston (9) is stopped.
q Servo piston (9) stop position (= Pump deliv-
ery) is decided by the position where the push-
ing force generated from the pressures (PP1)
and (PP2) applied to spool (3), the pushing
force of the solenoid in PC-EPC valve gener-
ates and the pushing force of springs (4) and
(6) are balanced.
PC300, 350-8 21
(2) When load on actuator is large and pump discharge pressure is high
Outline Operation
q When the load is large and pump discharge q When port (E) and port (G) of the LS valve are
pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are high, the force connected, this pressure from port (J) enters
pushing spool (3) to the right becomes larger the large diameter end of servo piston (9),
and spool (3) will be moved to the position stopping servo piston (9).
shown in above figure. q If main pump pressure (PP2) increases further
q Part of the pressure to be conducted from port and spool (3) moves further to the right, main
(C) to LS valve flows from port (B) to port (C) pump pressure (PP1) flows to port (C) and acts
and (D) via LS valve. At the end this flow, level to make the pump delivery the minimum.
of this pressure becomes approximately half of q When servo piston (9) moves to the right,
the main pump pressure (PP2). springs (4) and (6) are compressed and push
back spool (3).
q When spool (3) moves to the left, the opening
of port (C) and port (D) becomes larger.
q As a result, the pressure on port (C) (= J) is
decreased and the rightward move servo pis-
ton (9) is stopped.
q The position in which servo piston (9) stops at
this time is further to the right than the position
when pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are
low.
22 PC300, 350-8
q The relationship between the average pump

pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and servo piston (9) in
terms of their positions can be represented by
the broken line in the figure springs (4) and (6)
form the double springs.
q The relationship between the average pump
pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and average pump
delivery (Q) becomes as shown below.
q If command voltage (X) sent to PC-EPC valve

solenoid (1) increases further, the relationship
between average pump pressure (PP1 + PP2)/
2, and pump delivery (Q) is proportional to the
force of the PC-EPC valve solenoid and moves
in parallel.
q Namely, the force of PC-EPC valve solenoid
(1) is added to the pushing force to the right
because of the pump pressure applied to the
spool (3), so the relationship between the aver-
age pump pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and the
pump delivery (Q) moves from (A) to (B) as the
command current (X) is increased.
PC300, 350-8 23
2) As the emergency pump drive switch is turned on due to failure on the pump controller
(1) When the main pump is under light load
q If there is a failure in the pump controller, the q Since the pressure on the small diameter end
emergency pump drive switch is turned on to of the piston large, servo piston (9) moves in
hand the control to the resistor side. the direction to make the discharge amount
q In this case, the power is directly supplied from larger.
the battery. The current, however, is too large
as is, so the resistor is set in between to con-
trol the current flowing to PC-EPC valve sole-
noid (1).
q The current becomes constant, so the force
pushing piston (2) is also constant.
q If the main pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2)
are low, the combined force of the pump pres-
sure and the PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) is
weaker than the spring set force, so spool (3)
is balanced at a position to the left.
q At this point, port (C) is connected to the drain
pressure of port (D), and the large diameter
end of the piston of servo piston (9) also
becomes the drain pressure (PT) through the
LS valve.
24 PC300, 350-8
(2) When the main pump is under heavy load
q If the emergency pump drive switch is turned q The curve resulting when the emergency pump
on In the same way as in above, the command drive switch is ON is situated further to the left
current (X) sent to PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) (B) than when the pump controller is normal
becomes constant. (A).
q For this reason, the force of piston (2) pushing
spool (3) is constant.
q If main pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2)
increase, spool (3) moves further to the right
than when the main pump load is light, and is
balanced at the position in the diagram above.
q In this case, the pressure from port (B) flows to
port (C), so servo piston (9) moves to the right
(smaller pump delivery) and stops at a position
to the further to the right then when the load on
the pump is light.
q When the emergency pump drive switch is
turned on, too, the pump pressure (PP) and
pump delivery (Q) have a relationship as
shown with the curve in the figure correspond-
ing to the current sent to the PC-EPC valve
solenoid through the resistor.
PC300, 350-8 25
3. LS(PC)-EPC Valve
C: To LS(PC) valve
P: From self pressure reducing valve
T: To tank
1. Connector
2. Coil
3. Body
4. Spring
5. Spool
6. Rod
7. Plunger
26 PC300, 350-8
Function Operation
q The EPC valve consists of the proportional
solenoid portion and the hydraulic valve por- 1) When signal current is 0 (coil is deener-
tion. gized)
q When it receives signal current (i) from the q When there is no signal current flowing from
controller, it generates the EPC output pres- the controller to coil (2), coil (2) is deenergized.
sure in proportion to the size of the signal, and q Spool (5) is pushed to the left by spring (4).
outputs it to the LS (PC) valve. q Port (P) closes and the pressurized oil from the
self pressure reducing valve does not flow to
the LS (PC) valve.
q The pressurized oil from the LS (PC) valve is
drained to the tank via port (C) and port (T).
PC300, 350-8 27
2) When signal current is very small (coil is 3) When signal current is maximum (coil is
energized) energized)
q When a very small signal current flows to coil q As the signal current flows to coil (2), coil (2) is
(2), coil (2) is energized, and a propulsion force energized.
is generated on the right side of plunger (7). q When this happens, the signal current is at its
q Rod (6) pushes spool (5) to the right, and pres- maximum, so the propulsion force of plunger
surized oil flows from port (P) to port (C). (7) is also at its maximum.
q Pressures on port (C) increases and the force q Spool (5) is pushed toward right side by rod
to act on spool (5) surface and the spring load (6).
on spring (4) become larger than the propul- q The maximum volume of pressurized oil is
sion force of plunger (7). conducted from port (P) to port (C), increasing
q Spool (5) is pushed to the left, and port (P) is the circuit pressure across EPC valve and LS
shut off from port (C). (PC) valve to the maximum level.
q Port (C) and port (T) are connected. q Since port (T) is closed, pressurized oil does
q Spool (5) moves up and down so that the pro- not flow to the tank.
pulsion force of plunger (7) may be balance
with pressure of port (C) + spring load of spring
(4).
q The circuit pressure between the EPC valve
and the LS (PC) valve is controlled in propor-
tion to the size of the signal current.
28 PC300, 350-8
4. Variable Volume Valve
C1: To PC valve 1. Plug

P1: From self pressure reducing valve 2. Block
T1: To tank 3. Piston
4. Spring
Function
q The variable volume valve stabilizes the EPC
valve's output pressure.
Operation
q Output pressure from EPC valve is conducted
to port (C) and as the result propulsion force of
piston (3) is increased by the load of spring (4).
q Piston (3) is pushed to the left, and volume of
port (C) is increased.
q The propulsion force of piston (3) becomes
smaller than the load of spring (4).
q Piston (3) is pushed toward right, and volume
of port (C) is decreased.
PC300, 350-8 29
SEN01993-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
30
SEN01994-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Control valve................................................................................................................................................... 2
CLSS ............................................................................................................................................................ 14
Functions and operation by valve ................................................................................................................. 18
Merge-divider valve ...................................................................................................................................... 33
Attachment circuit selector valve .................................................................................................................. 58
Hydraulic drift prevention valve..................................................................................................................... 60
PC300, 350-8 1
Control valve 1
Outline
q The control valve consists of a 7-spool valve
(6-spool valve + boom Hi, arm Hi valve) and a
set of service valves. A merge-divider valve, a
back pressure valve, a boom drift prevention
valve are installed to it.
q Since all the valves are assembled together
with connecting bolts and their passes are con-
nected to each other inside the assembly, the
assembly is compact and easy to maintain.
A1: To bucket cylinder bottom PLS1: To front pump control

A2: To L.H. travel motor PLS2: To rear pump control
A3: To boom cylinder bottom PP1: From front pump
A4: To swing motor PP2: From rear pump
A5: To R.H. travel motor PP1S: Pressure sensor mounting port
A6: To arm cylinder head PP2S: Pressure sensor mounting port
A-1: To boom cylinder bottom PPS1: To front pump control
A-2: To Attachment 1 PPS2: To rear pump control
A-3: To Attachment 2 PR: To solenoid valve, PPC valve, and EPC valve
B1: To bucket cylinder head PS: From merge-divide solenoid valve
B2: To L.H. travel motor PST: From travel junction valve solenoid valve
B3: To boom cylinder head PX1: From 2-stage relief solenoid valve
B4: To swing motor PX2: From 2-stage relief solenoid valve
B5: To R.H. travel motor T: To tank
B6: To arm cylinder bottom T1: To tank
B-1: To arm cylinder bottom TS: To tank
B-2: To Attachment 1 TSW: To swing motor S-port (suction side)
B-3: To Attachment 2
BP1: Boom raising PPC output pressure 1. 6-spool valve
BP5: From 2-stage safety valve solenoid valve 2. Cover A
BP6: From attachment select solenoid valve 3. Cover B
P1: From bucket PPC and EPC valves 4. Boom Hi and arm Hi valve
P2: From bucket PPC and EPC valves 5. Service valve 1
P3: From L.H. Travel PPC valve 6. Service valve 2
P4: From L.H. Travel PPC valve 7. Merge-divider valve
P5: From boom PPC and EPC valves 8. Boom drift prevention valve
P6: From boom PPC and EPC valves 9. Quick return valve
P7: From swing PPC and EPC valves 10. Boom Hi valve check valve
P8: From swing PPC and EPC valves
P9: From R.H. Travel PPC valve
P10: From R.H. Travel PPC valve
P11: From arm PPC and EPC valves
P12: From arm PPC and EPC valves
P-3: From Service 1 and PPC valves
2 PC300, 350-8
General view
PC300, 350-8 3
Sectional view
(1/5)
4 PC300, 350-8
1. Pressure compensation valve (Arm out)

2. Pressure compensation valve (R.H. travel
reverse)
3. Pressure compensation valve (Left swing)
4. Pressure compensation valve (Boom raise)
5. Pressure compensation valve (L.H. travel
reverse)
6. Pressure compensation valve (Bucket dump)
7. Pressure compensation valve (Boom Hi raise)
8. Variable pressure compensation valve (Ser-
vice 1)
9. Variable pressure compensation valve (Ser-
vice 2)
10. Pressure compensation valve (Arm Hi in)
11. Pressure compensation valve (Bucket curl)
12. Pressure compensation valve (L.H. travel for-
ward)
13. Pressure compensation valve (Boom lower)
14. Pressure compensation valve (Right swing)
15. Pressure compensation valve (R.H. travel for-
ward)
16. Pressure compensation valve (Arm in)
17. Main relief valve
18. Unload valve
19. Unload valve
21. Spool (Service 2)
22. Spool (Service 1)
23. Spool (Boom Hi)
24. Spool (Bucket)
25. Spool (L.H. travel)
26. Spool (Boom)
27. Spool (Swing)
28. Spool (R.H. travel)
29. Spool (Arm)
30. Spool (Arm Hi)
Unit: mm
No. Check item Criteria Remedy

Free length x Installed Installed Installed
Free length
31 Spool return spring Outside diameter length load load
417 N 333 N
54.2 x 34.8 51.2
{42.5 kg}
— {34.0 kg} If damaged or
393 N 315 N deformed, replace
32 Spool return spring 54.5 x 34.8 51.2
{40.1 kg}
— {32.1 kg} spring.
421 N 336 N
{42.9 kg}
— {34.3 kg}
251 N 201 N
{25.6 kg}
— {20.5 kg}
PC300, 350-8 5
(2/5)
6 PC300, 350-8
1. Safety-suction valve (Arm out)

2. Suction valve (R.H. travel reverse)
3. Suction valve (Boom raise)
4. Suction valve (L.H. travel reverse)
5. Safety-suction valve (Service 1)
6. Safety-suction valve (Service 2)
7. 2-stage safety-suction valve (Service 1)
8. Safety-suction valve (Arm Hi in)
9. Safety-suction valve (Bucket curl)
10. Suction valve (L.H. travel forward)
11. 2-stage safety-suction valve (Boom lower)
12. Suction valve (R.H. travel forward)
13. Safety-suction valve (Arm in)
14. LS shuttle valve (Arm)
15. LS shuttle valve (R.H. travel)
16. LS select valve
17. LS shuttle valve (Boom)
18. LS shuttle valve (L.H. travel)
19. LS shuttle valve (Bucket)
20. LS shuttle valve (Service 1)
21. LS shuttle valve (Service 2)
22. LS check valve
23. Pressure relief plug
Unit: mm

Free length
24 Suction valve spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
5.5 N 4.4 N deformed, replace
46.8 x 7.5 40.6
{0.56 kg}
1.5 N 1.2 N
25 Check valve spring 11.5 x 4.6 8.5
{0.15 kg}
— {0.12 kg}
PC300, 350-8 7
(3/5)
8 PC300, 350-8
1. Unload valve
2. Safety valve (Boom raise)
4. Lift check valve
Arm valve
5. LS shuttle valve
6. Pressure compensation valve (IN)
7. Spool
8. Safety-suction valve (IN)
9. Regeneration circuit check valve
10. Safety-suction valve (OUT)
11. Pressure compensation valve (OUT)
R.H. travel valve

12. LS shuttle valve
13. Pressure compensation valve (Forward)
14. Spool
15. Suction valve (Forward)
16. Suction valve (Reverse)
17. Pressure compensation valve (Reverse)
Swing valve
18. LS select valve
19. Pressure compensation valve (R.H.)
20. Spool
21. Pressure compensation valve (L.H.)
Unit: mm

Free length
22 Spool return spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
50.0 x 14.4 42.0
{2.0 kg}
5.9 N 4.71 N
{0.6 kg}
— {0.48 kg}
PC300, 350-8 9
(4/5)
10 PC300, 350-8
1. Return spring
2. Merge-divide valve (for LS)
3. Valve (Sequence valve)
4. Spring (Sequence valve)
5. Merge-divide valve (Main)
6. Return spring
Boom valve
7. Drift prevention valve
8. LS shuttle valve
9. Pressure compensation valve (Lower)
10. Spool
11. 2-stage safety-suction valve (Lower)
12. Regeneration circuit check valve
13. Suction valve (Raise)
14. Pressure compensation valve (Raise)
L.H. travel valve

15. Merge-divider valve (travel junction valve)
16. Return spring
18. Pressure compensation valve (Forward)
19. Spool
20. Suction valve (Forward)
21. Suction valve (Reverse)
22. Pressure compensation valve (Reverse)
Bucket valve
24. Pressure compensation valve (Curl)
25. Spool
26. Safety-suction valve (Curl)
27. Safety-suction valve (Dump)
28. Pressure compensation valve (Dump)
Unit: mm

Free length
157 N 126 N
46.6 x 21.8 33.0
{16.0 kg}
— {12.8 kg}
250 N 200 N
{25.5 kg}
— {20.4 kg}
178 N 142 N If damaged or
{18.1 kg}
— {14.5 kg} deformed, replace
35.3 N 28.2 N spring.
{3.6 kg}
— {2.88 kg}
13.7 N 11.0 N
{1.4 kg}
— {1.12 kg}
5.9 N 4.71 N
{0.6 kg}
— {0.48 kg}
50.0 N 40.0 N
35 Piston return spring 30.7 x 20.5 23.0
{5.1 kg}
— {4.08 kg}
PC300, 350-8 11
(5/5)
12 PC300, 350-8
Boom Hi and arm Hi valve
1. Boom Hi check valve

2. Quick return valve
3. Pressure compensation valve (Arm Hi in)
4. Arm Hi spool
5. Safety-suction valve (Arm Hi in)
6. Boom Hi spool
7. Pressure compensation valve (Boom Hi raise)
Service valve 1
8. LS shuttle valve
9. Pressure compensation valve
10. Spool
11. 2-stage safety-suction valve
12. Safety-suction valve
Service valve 2
15. Spool
17. Unload valve
19. LS bypass plug
PC300, 350-8 13
CLSS 1
Outline of CLSS
Features Configuration
CLSS stands for Closed center Load Sensing Sys- q CLSS is configured with variable capacity pis-
tem, which has the following characteristics: ton pumps, control valves, and respective
actuators.
q Fine control not influenced by load q The hydraulic pump is configured with pump
q Controllability enabling digging even with fine body, PC valve and LS valve.
control
q Ease of compound operation ensured by flow
divider function using area of opening of spool
during compound operations
q Energy saving using variable pump control
14 PC300, 350-8
Basic principle
1. Pump swash plate angle control
q The pump swash plate angle (pump delivery) q The pump swash plate angle shifts toward the
is controlled so that LS differential pressure maximum position if LS differential pressure
(EPLS) (the difference between pump pres- (EPLS) is lower than the set pressure of the
sure PP and control valve outlet port LS pres- LS valve (when the actuator load pressure is
sure PLS) (load pressure of actuator) is high).
constant. q If it becomes higher than the set pressure
q [LS differential pressure (EPLS) = Pump dis- (when the actuator load pressure is low), the
charge pressure (PP) – LS pressure (PLS)] pump swash plate angle shifts toward the mini-
mum position.
LS differential pressure ( E PLS) and pump

swash plate angle
a For details of functions, see the “Hydraulic

pump” paragraph.
PC300, 350-8 15
2. Pressure compensation control
q A pressure compensation valve is installed to

the outlet port side of the control valve to bal-
ance the load.
q When actuators are operated together, the
p r e s s u r e d i ff e r e n c e ( E P ) b e t w e e n t h e
upstream (inlet port) and downstream (outlet
port) of the spool of each valve becomes the
same regardless the size of the load (pres-
sure).
q The flow of oil from the pump is divided (com-
pensated) in proportion to the area of opening
(S1) and (S2) of each valve.
16 PC300, 350-8
3. System diagram
a The illustration shows actuator (7) in the merge 1. Front pump

mode with stroke end at the time of relief. 2. Rear pump
4. Unload valve
5. Merge-divider valve
6. Control valve
7. Actuator
8. Pump circuit
9. LS circuit
10. Tank circuit
11. Valve
12. Spring
13. LS bypass valve
14. LS valve
15. PC valve
PC300, 350-8 17
Functions and operation by valve 1

Hydraulic circuit diagram and the name of valves
18 PC300, 350-8
1. Arm valve 36. Main relief valve (arm side)

2. R.H. travel valve Set pressure:
3. Swing valve 36.1 ± 0.25 MPa {367.5 ± 2.5 kg/cm2}
4. Boom valve (112 l/min)
5. L.H. travel valve
6. Bucket valve When digging force increased:
7. Boom Hi valve 38.2.1 ± 0.25 MPa {389.5.5 ± 2.5 kg/cm2}
8. Arm Hi valve (110 l/min)
9. Service valve 1
10. Service valve 2 37. Unload valve (bucket side)
11. Arm spool Cracking pressure:
12. R.H. travel spool 3.1 ± 0.5 MPa {32 ± 5 kg/cm2}
13. Swing spool
14. Boom spool 38. Unload valve (arm side)
15. L.H. travel spool Cracking pressure:
16. Bucket spool 3.1 ± 0.5 MPa {32 ± 5 kg/cm2}
17. Boom Hi spool
18. Arm Hi spool 39. Safety-suction valve
19. Service spool 1 Set pressure:
20. Service spool 2 17.2 ± 0.5 MPa {175 ± 5 kg/cm2}
22. Variable pressure compensation valve 40. Safety-suction valve
23. Suction valve Set pressure:
24. Check valve (for boom regeneration circuit) 38.2 ± 0.5 MPa {390 ± 5 kg/cm2}
25. Check valve (for arm regeneration circuit)
26. LS shuttle valve 41. 2-stage safety-suction valve
27. LS select valve Set pressure:
28. Merge-divider valve 1 stage: 21.1 ± 0.5 MPa {205 ± 5 kg/cm2}
29. Arm quick return valve 2 stage: 17.2 ± 0.5 MPa {175 ± 5 kg/cm2}
30. Self pressure reducing valve
31. Travel junction valve 42. 2-stage safety-suction valve
32. Back pressure valve Set pressure:
33. Boom drift prevention valve 1 stage: 28.4 ± 0.5 MPa {290 ± 5 kg/cm2}
34. Boom Hi check valve 2 stage: 14.7 ± 0.5 MPa {150 ± 5 kg/cm2}
35. Main relief valve (bucket side)
Set pressure: 43. Safety valve
36.1 ± 0.25 MPa {367.5 ± 2.5 kg/cm2} Set pressure:
(112 l/min) 38.2 ± 0.5 MPa {390 ± 5 kg/cm2}
When digging force increased:

38.2 ± 0.25 MPa {389.5.5 ± 2.5 kg/cm2}
(110 l/min)
PC300, 350-8 19
Unload valve
1. When the unload valve is actuating
1. LS circuit 4. Tank circuit

2. Valve 5. Spring
3. Pump circuit
Function Operation
q Drains an oil discharge for the portion of the q Pressure of pump circuit (3) is received by the
minimum pump swash plate angle while all end of valve (2).
control valves are in the holding. q Since the control valve is in neutral position,
q The pump pressure will correspond to a set pressure of LS circuit (1) is 0 MPa{0 kg/cm2}.
load of spring (5) inside the valve (this pres- q Pressurized oil of pump circuit (3) stops at
sure will be P1). valve (2), and the pressure rises as no relief is
q Since LS pressure is drained from the LS available.
bypass valve, LS pressure C tank pressure C 0 q When this pressure becomes larger than the
MPa{0 kg/cm2}. force of spring (5), valve (2) moves to the left.
q Ports (b) and (c) are interconnected and the
pump pressure flows to tank circuit (4).
q The pressurized oil of LS circuit (1) passes
from orifice (a) via port (c) and is drained to the
tank circuit (4).
q When actuated, LS pressure C tank pressure.
q Since the pump discharge pressure - LS circuit
pressure during unloading is larger than the
pump LS control pressure, the signal is output
to minimize the pump swash plate angle.
20 PC300, 350-8
2. Operation of relief valve

q During operation (a work within a scope of dis- q When the cylinder reaches the stroke end, the
charge by a minimum swash plate angle), the main relief valve opens.
discharge pressure for the portion of minimum q The pump delivery (Q) is relieved to the
pump swash plate angle is set to LS pressure tank.(See the system diagram)
+ P1 pressure. q The pump discharge pressure (PP) and LS
q LS control differential pressure (EPLS) of dis- pressure (PLS) become approximately the
charge for the portion of minimum swash plate same as each has not flow at the upstream
angle will be equal to P1 pressure. and downstream of the spool, and LS differen-
tial pressure (EPLS) becomes 0 kg/cm2.
q As LS differential pressure (EPLS) is lower
than the LS set pressure of LS valve, LS valve
is actuated to maximize the pump swash plate
angle.
q Mechanically, operation of PC valve have the
prevalence to that of LS valve.
q The pump is held at a minimum swash plate
angle by the cut-off function of PC valve.
PC300, 350-8 21
Introduction of LS pressure
1. Hydraulic pump
2. Main spool
4. Valve
5. Check valve
6. LS circuit
7. LS shuttle valve
Function
q Introduces the upstream pressure (down-
stream pressure of the spool meter-in) of pres-
sure compensation valve (3) and leads to LS
shuttle valve (7) as the LS pressure.
q Connected to actuator port (B) via valve (4),
and makes LS pressure C actuator load pres-
sure.
q Inlet pore (a) inside main spool (2) has a small
diameter concurrently serving as a throttle.
Operation
q When main spool (2) is operated, the pump
pressure enters port (c) via inlet pore (a) and is
led to the LS circuit.
q When the pump pressures rises to reach the
load pressure of port (B), check valve (5)
opens.
22 PC300, 350-8
LS bypass plug
1. Hydraulic pump
2. Main spool
4. LS shuttle valve
5. LS bypass plug
6. LS circuit
Function
q Releases the residual pressure in LS pressure
circuit (6) from orifices (a) and (b).
q Slows down the rising rate of LS pressure to
prevent a sudden change of hydraulic pres-
sure.
q Bypass flow from LS bypass plug (5) causes a
pressure loss to be generated due to the circuit
resistance between throttle (c) of main spool
(2) and LS shuttle valve (4).
q Effective LS differential pressure drops to
improve a dynamic stability of the actuator.
PC300, 350-8 23
Pressure compensation valve

1. During independent operation and under maximum load pressure
(If the load pressure is higher than other work equipment during a combined operation)
1. Hydraulic pump 4. Piston

2. Valve 5. Spring
3. Shuttle valve 6. LS shuttle valve
Function q As principle, port (C) and spring chamber (E)

q Pressure compensation valve works as the are not interconnected in an integrated pres-
load check valve. sure compensation valve.
q If the pump pressure (LS pressure) is lower q If high peak pressure is generated at port (C),
than the load at port (c), shuttle valve (3) in valve (7) does not collide with the valve cham-
pressure compensation valve piston (4) inter- ber.
connects spring chamber (E) and port (C). q With a bucket valve, etc., port (C) and spring
q The force of spring (5) operates piston (4) and chamber (E) are designed to interconnect
valve (2) to the closing direction. before valve (7) is seated.
Integrated pressure compensation valve

q High stress may occur when valve (2) collides
with valve chamber seat portion (C) if a high
peak pressure is generated in the actuator cir-
cuit or repetitive peak pressure occurs continu-
ously (example: when using the breaker).
q To prevent this, a pressure compensation
valve with integrated valve (2) and piston (4) is
used.
q With the present machine, this device is
adopted for the bucket valve (cylinder bottom)
and the service valve.
24 PC300, 350-8
2. When compensated
(If the load pressure is lower than other work equipment during a combined operation)
Function
q The pressure compensation valve closes
under LS pressure of port (D), and the spool
meter-in downstream pressure of port (B)
becomes equivalent to the maximum pressure
of other work equipment.
q Since the spool meter-in upstream pressure of
port (A) is the pump pressure, the spool meter-
in differential pressure [upstream pressure port
(A) pressure] - downstream pressure [port (B)
pressure] becomes equivalent to all the spools
in operation.
q Pump flow is divided according to the ratio of
the meter-in opening area.
Operation
q Spring chamber (E) is interconnected to port
(D).
q Piston (4) and valve (2) operate in the closing
direction (to the right) under the LS circuit pres-
sure from other work equipment of port (F).
q Valve upstream pressure (= spool meter-in
downstream pressure) of port (B) is controlled
with LS pressure.
PC300, 350-8 25
3. Pressure compensation valve area ratio
Function
q The state of division changes according to the
area ratio of pressure compensation portion
(A1) and (A2). Area ratio = (A2)/(A1)
q If area ratio = 1 : the spool meter-in down-
stream pressure will be equal to the maximum
load pressure, and the pressure will be divided
according to the opening area ratio.
q If area ratio = 1 or over : the spool meter-in
downstream pressure will be greater than the
maximum load pressure, and the pressure will
be divided smaller than the opening area ratio.
q If area ratio = 1 or under : the spool meter-in
downstream pressure will be smaller than the
maximum load pressure, and the pressure will
be divided greater than the opening area ratio.
26 PC300, 350-8
Pressure compensation valve inner shuttle valve

1. If holding pressure at port (A) is larger than LS pressure in the springing chamber (B)
1. Hydraulic pump
2. Valve
3. Pressure compensation valve inner shuttle
valve
4. Piston
Function
q Shuttle valve (3) is pushed to the right by port
(A) pressure and cuts off interconnection
between ports (A) and (C).
q Holding pressure at port (A) is led to the spring
chamber (B) to push piston (4) to the left so
that piston (4) and valve (2) will not be sepa-
rated.
PC300, 350-8 27
2. In the case of travel
Outline
q Since no holding pressure is generated at port
(A) of the travel circuit, a pressure compensa-
tion valve without shuttle valve (3) is adopted.
28 PC300, 350-8
Boom regeneration circuit

1. If the cylinder head pressure is lower than the bottom pressure (free fall, etc.)
1. Hydraulic pump
2. Boom spool
5. Suction valve
6. Check valve
7. LS shuttle valve
Function Operation
q Provides the regeneration circuit from the cyl- q If the cylinder head pressure is lower than the
inder bottom to the cylinder head when the bottom pressure, pressurized oil (A) from the
boom is lowered and increases flow to the cyl- cylinder bottom flows to drain circuit (B) from
inder bottom. the notch of boom spool (2).
q On the other hand, remaining oil flows to
regeneration circuit (C), opens check valve (6)
and flows to the cylinder head via circuit (D).
q Flow from regeneration circuit (C) and pump
(1) merges in circuit (E).
PC300, 350-8 29
2. If the cylinder head pressure is higher than the bottom pressure (digging work, etc.)
Function
q Check valve (6) provided to regeneration cir-
cuit (C) closes to shut off the flow from the cyl-
inder bottom to the head.
30 PC300, 350-8
Arm regeneration circuit

1. If the cylinder head pressure is higher than the bottom pressure
1. Hydraulic pump
2. Arm spool
5. Suction valve
6. Check valve
7. LS shuttle valve
Function Operation
q During arm digging, regeneration circuit pro- q If the cylinder head pressure is lower than the
vided from the cylinder head to the bottom bottom pressure, pressurized oil (A) from the
increases the cylinder speed as the cylinder cylinder bottom flows to drain circuit (B) from
flow involves the pump delivery plus regener- the notch of arm spool (2).
ated flow. q On the other hand, remaining oil flows to
regeneration circuit (C), opens check valve (6)
and flows to the cylinder head via circuit (D).
q Flow from regeneration circuit (C) and pump
(1) merges in circuit (E).
PC300, 350-8 31
2. If the cylinder head pressure is lower than the bottom pressure
Function
q Check valve (6) provided to regeneration cir-
cuit (C) closes to shut off the flow from the cyl-
inder bottom to the head.
32 PC300, 350-8
Merge-divider valve 1
1. When flows from the pumps merge [if pilot pressure (PS) is OFF]
1. Main spool 5. LS circuit (bucket side)

2. Spring 6. LS circuit (bucket side)
3. LS spool 7. LS circuit (arm side)
4. Spring 8. LS circuit (arm side)
Function Operation
q Merges pressurized oil (P1) and (P2) dis- q Since pilot pressure (PS) is OFF, output pres-
charged from the two pumps or divides (to sure from PPC valve is 0 kg/cm2.
respective control valve group). q Main spool (1) is pressed to the right by spring
q Merges and divides LS circuit pressure. (2) and ports (E) and (F) are interconnected.
q Merges pressurized oil (P1) and (P2) dis-
charged from the two pumps at ports (E) and
(F) and sends to necessary control valve.
q Since pilot pressure (PS) is OFF for LS spool
(3), it is pressed to the right by spring (4), and
ports (A) - (D) and ports (B) - (C) are intercon-
nected.
q Forwards LS pressure led from respective con-
trol valve spools to LS circuits (5), (6), (7) and
(8) to all the pressure compensation valves.
PC300, 350-8 33
2. When flows from the pumps are divided [if pilot pressure (PS) is ON]
Operation
q Pilot pressure (PS) turns ON, and output pres-
sure from the PPC valve shifts main spool (1)
to the left, and ports (E) and (F) are divided.
q Pressurized oil discharged from the two pumps
are sent to respective control valves.
P1 pressure: To bucket, L.H. travel, and boom

P2 pressure: To swing, R.H. travel, and arm
q LS spool (3) too shifts to the left under the out-

put pressure from the PPC valve, intercon-
nects ports (A) and (C) and divides other ports.
q Forwards LS pressure led from each control
valve spool to LS circuits (5), (6), (7) and (8) to
respective control valves.
34 PC300, 350-8
LS select valve
Function Operation
q Prevents high LS pressure from the swinging 1. If pilot pressure (BP) is OFF
from entering the LS circuit of work valves q Since pilot pressure (BP) is OFF, piston (3) is
while the swinging and work equipment are in pressed to the left by spring (2).
combined operation. q When swing-operated, swing LS pressure (P1)
q Prevents high pressure generated during enters port (A) after passing swing spool (5).
swing drive and improves operability of work q Valve (1) is pressed to the left and ports (A)
equipment. and (B) are interconnected.
q Swing LS pressure (P1) flows to LS shuttle
valve (8).
2. If pilot pressure (BP) is ON

q If pilot pressure (BP) is ON, BP pressure con-
tracts spring (2), and piston (3) shifts to the
right.
q Valve (1) is pressed to the right and intercon-
nection between ports (A) and (B) is closed.
q Swing LS pressure (P1) stops flowing to LS
shuttle valve (8).
q If swing LS pressure (P1) rises, other LS cir-
cuits are not affected.
a The illustration shows the state of simulta-

neous operation of swinging and R.H. travel.
[(BP) pressure ON]
1. Valve
2. Spring
3. Piston
4. Piston
5. Swing spool
6. L.H. travel spool
7. Arm spool
8. LS shuttle valve
9. LS circuit
PC300, 350-8 35
Self pressure reducing valve
Function
q Reduces the discharge pressure of the main
pump and supplies it as control pressure for
the solenoid valves, EPC valves, etc.
Operation
1. While engine is stopped
q Poppet (11) is pressed by spring (12) against
the seat and port (PR) is not connected to
(TS).
q Valve (14) is pressed by spring (13) against the
left side and port (P2) is connected to (TS).
q Valve (7) is pressed by spring (8) against the
left side and port (P2) is closed to (A2).
36 PC300, 350-8
2. During neutral and when load pressure (P2) 3. When load pressure (P2) is high
is low q Load pressure (A2) increases with the opera-
a When load pressure (A2) is lower than self tion of digging, etc., and the pump discharge
pressure reducing valve output pressure (PR) increases accordingly.
q Pressure (P2) increases to [(φd area x P2 pres-
q Valve (7) is pressed to the closing direction of sure) = force of spring (8) + ( φ d area x PR
circuit between ports (P2) and (A2) by spring pressure)]., and valve (7) moves to the right to
(8) and under pressure (PR) (which is 0 MPa the stroke end.
{0 kg/cm2}). q As a result, opening between ports (P2) and
q When pressurized oil flows in from port (P2), a (A2) increases, and the pass resistance
balance is reached due to [(φd area x P2 pres- reduces, reducing the engine horsepower loss.
sure) = force of spring (8) + ( φ d area x PR q When pressure (PR) rises above the set pres-
pressure)]. sure, poppet (11) opens.
q Adjusts valve (7) opening to keep pressure q Pressurized oil flows from port (PR) to orifice
(P2) at a constant level over pressure (PR). (a) in spool (14), then flows to seal drain port
q When pressure (PR) rises above the set pres- (TS) from poppet (11) opening.
sure, poppet (11) opens. q Differential pressure is generated before and
q Pressurized oil flows from port (PR) to orifice after orifice (a) in spool (14) and then spool
(a) in spool (14), then flows to seal drain port (14) moves to close the pass between ports
(TS) from poppet (11) opening. (P2) and (PR).
q Differential pressure is generated before and q Pressure (P2) is reduced by the opening at this
after orifice (a) in spool (14) and then spool time and adjusted to a constant pressure (the
(14) moves to close the pass between ports set pressure) and supplied as pressure (PR).
(P2) and (PR).
q Pressure (P2) is reduced by the opening at this
time and adjusted to a constant pressure (the
set pressure) and supplied as pressure (PR).
PC300, 350-8 37
4. When abnormally high pressure is gener-

ated
q If pressure (PR) of self pressure reducing
valve becomes abnormally high, ball (16) con-
tracts spring (15) and becomes separated from
the seat.
q Allows the pressurized oil to (TS) from port
(PR) and lowers pressure (PR).
q Protects PPC valve, solenoid valve and other
devices from abnormal pressure.
38 PC300, 350-8
Travel junction valve

1. When pilot pressure is turned ON
Function Operation
q This valve connects the L.H. and R.H. travel q Pilot pressure from the travel junction solenoid
circuits via travel junction valve so that the valve contracts spring (1), and travel junction
hydraulic oil will be supplied evenly to both spool (2) moves to the left to the stroke end.
travel motors to improve machine's straight q Junction circuit between port (PTL) (L.H. travel
travel performance. circuit) and port (PTR) (R.H. travel circuit) is
q When the machine is steered, outside pilot closed.
pressure (PST) closes the travel junction valve
to improve steering performance.
PC300, 350-8 39
2. When pilot pressure is turned OFF
Operation
q If pilot pressure (PST) from the solenoid valve q If the oil flow rates to the L.H. and R.H. travel
is 0, travel junction spool (2) is pressed by the motors become different from each other, the
force of spring (1) against the right side and oil flows through the route between port (PTL),
the pass between ports (PTL) and (PTR) is travel junction spool (2), and port (PTR) so that
open. the oil flow rates to both motors will be equal-
ized again.
40 PC300, 350-8
Travel PPC shuttle valve

1. When travel lever is in neutral
Function Operation
q Regulates flow to each cylinder by controlling q The oil in stroke regulation signal chamber (a)
the stroke of each spool of the boom, arm, and is drained through orifices (5) and (6) of pis-
bucket using the pilot pressure of travel PPC tons (3) and (4) in the travel spring case and
valve while climbing a steep grade, raising the the travel PPC valve.
boom, digging with arm, dumping, bucket-dig- q When operated for boom raising (or arm dig-
ging or operating dump. ging, dumping, bucket digging, dumping),
q When controlling the stroke of the boom, arm spool (1) moves to the left until it makes con-
and/or bucket, pilot pressure of travel PPC tact with the end face of spring casing (2) (st0).
valve passes through the circuit inside the con-
trol valves to actuate the system.
PC300, 350-8 41
2. When traveling
Operation
q If the right travel lever is set in the reverse (or q Maximum stroke of the spool is limited to (st1)
forward) direction, pilot pressure from the PPC for the amount of movement (st2) of piston (8)
valve presses spool (7) to the left (or right). to the right.
q Spool (7) pushes piston (3) to close orifice (5)
and shut off stroke regulation signal chamber
(a) and the drain circuit of the travel PPC
valve.
q At this time, the right travel reverse (or forward)
lever is set, PPC pressure is applied through
orifice (6) of piston (4) to the left end of piston
(8) to push piston (8) to the right.
q When operated for boom raising (or arm IN,
OUT, bucket CURL, DUMP), spool (1) moves
to the left.
42 PC300, 350-8
Boom drift prevention valve

1. When raising boom
Function
q This valve prevents the oil in the boom cylinder
bottom from leaking through spool (1) and the
boom from lowering under its weight while the
boom lever is not operated.
Operation
q When the boom is raised, pressurized oil from
the control valve works on the ring-shaped
area (S)[= φ(d1) area – φ(d2) area] caused by
the difference between outside diameter (d1)
of poppet (5) and seat diameter (d2) to move it
to the left.
q Contracts spring (4) and poppet (5) moves to
the left.
q As a result, pressurized oil from the control
valve passes through the opening of poppet
(5) and flows to the bottom end of the boom
cylinder.
PC300, 350-8 43
2. When the boom is in neutral
Operation
q Moves the lever to neutral with the boom
raised.
q Pressurized oil flown inside poppet (5) from
orifice (a) of poppet (5) is closed by pilot piston
(2).
q Pressurized oil from the control valve and the
holding pressure of the boom cylinder bottom
are shut off.
q The holding pressure of boom cylinder bottom
works on the ring-shaped area (S) caused by
the difference between outside diameter (d1)
of poppet (5) and seat diameter (d2) to move it
to the right.
q The sum of this force and the force of spring
(4) closes poppet (5).
holding pressure of the boom cylinder bottom
are shut off.
44 PC300, 350-8
3. When lowering boom
Operation
q When the boom is lowered, pilot pressure from
the PPC valve presses pilot spool (2).
q Pressurized oil in chamber (b) inside the pop-
pet is drained via orifice (c).
q Pressurized oil of the boom bottom flows to ori-
fice (a) o chamber (b) o orifice (c) o drain (T),
and the pressurized oil in chamber (b) lowers.
q As the pressure of chamber (b) lowers under
the pressure of port (B), poppet (5) opens.
q Pressurized oil from port (B) is led to port (A)
and then flows to the control valve.
PC300, 350-8 45
Arm drift prevention valve

(if equipped)
1. When arm OUT
Function
q This valve prevents the oil in the arm head
from leaking through spool (1) and the boom
from lowering under its weight while the arm
lever is not operated.
Operation
q When the arm OUT is operated, pressurized
oil from the control valve works on the ring-
shaped area (S)[= φ (d1) area – φ (d2) area]
caused by the difference between the outside
diameter (d1) of poppet (5) and the seat diam-
eter (d2) to move it to the left.
q Contracts spring (4) and poppet (5) moves to
the left.
q As a result, pressurized oil from the control
valve passes through the opening of poppet
(5) and flows to the arm cylinder head.
46 PC300, 350-8
2. When the arm is in neutral
Operation
q Moves the lever to neutral with the arm
dumped.
q Pressurized oil flown inside poppet (5) from
orifice (a) of poppet (5) is closed by pilot piston
(2).
holding pressure of the arm cylinder head are
shut off.
q The holding pressure of arm cylinder head
works on ring-shaped area (S) caused by the
difference between outside diameter (d1) of
poppet (5) and seat diameter (d2) to move it to
the right.
q The sum of this force and the force of spring
(4) closes poppet (5).
holding pressure of the arm cylinder head are
shut off.
PC300, 350-8 47
3. When arm IN
Operation
q When the arm IN is operated, pilot spool (2) is
pushed under the pilot pressure from the PPC
valve.
q Pressurized oil in chamber (b) inside the pop-
pet is drained via orifice (c).
q Pressurized oil of the arm head flows to orifice
(a) o chamber (b) o orifice (c) o drain (T), and
the pressurized oil in chamber (b) lowers.
q As the pressure of chamber (b) lowers under
the pressure of port (B), poppet (5) opens.
q Pressurized oil from port (B) is led to port (A)
and then flows to the control valve.
48 PC300, 350-8
4. When abnormally high pressure is generated
q If abnormally high pressure is generated in the q If arm drift prevention valve (optional) is
boom cylinder bottom circuit, the pressurized installed to the arm cylinder head circuit, the
oil in port (B) pushes check valve (6) open, boom cylinder bottom circuit pressure force or
then safety valve (3) operates. arm cylinder head circuit pressure force,
whichever having higher pressurized oil,
pushes check valve (6) or (6A) open to actuate
safety valve (3).
PC300, 350-8 49
Quick return valve

1. When arm OUT
Function
q When arm OUT, large volume of oil returns
from the cylinder bottom.
q Reduces this pressure loss.
Operation
q When the arm OUT is operated, pilot spool (1) increases by the sum of the pressure receiving
is pushed under the pilot pressure from the force of pressure receiving portion[φ d1 area
PPC valve. (S1)] on the chamber (b) side of valve (2) and
q Pressurized oil in chamber (b) inside the valve the spring force.
is drained via orifice (c). q Or (φd2 pressure receiving force > φd1 pres-
q Pressurized oil of the arm bottom side flows to sure receiving force + spring force)
orifice (a) o chamber (b) o orifice (c) o drain q Valve (2) is pressed to the left and pressurized
(T), and the pressure in chamber (b) lowers. oil is led from port (A) to (B).
q If the pressure of chamber (b) drops lower than q From port (B), pressurized oil is drained
that of port (A), pressure receiving force of the directly to the tank.
pressure receiving portion [φd2 area (S2) (seat
d i am e te r a r ea ) ] o n th e s i d e o f po r t ( A )
50 PC300, 350-8
2. When the arm is in neutral
Operation
q Returning the lever to neutral reduces the pilot
pressure from the PPC valve to 0 kg/cm2.
q The pressurized oil that has flowed and been
drained through orifice (a) in valve (2) is closed
by pilot piston (1).
q The holding pressure on the arm bottom side
works on the difference between areas (S2)
and (S1) of valve (2) to the right.
q Valve (2) is closed by the total of this force and
the force of spring (3), so ports (A) and (B) are
shut off.
PC300, 350-8 51
Lift check valve

Function 2. While engine is running
q This valve applies back pressure to the drain q Output pressure (PR) of the self pressure
circuit to prevent generation of negative pres- reducing valve is applied via the control valve
sure on each actuator (motors, cylinders, etc.). to spring chamber (c) of back pressure valve
(3).
Operation q Output pressure (PR) applied to spring cham-
1. While engine is stopped ber (c) is applied to the left end of valve (1)
q Pressurized oil is not fed to the self pressure (area of φd) to push valve (1) to the right.
reducing valve from the pump, and valve (1) is q At this time, pressure (PA) of drain circuit (a) of
pressed to the right by the force of spring (2). the control valve is applied to the right end of
q Drain circuit (a) of the control valve is con- valve (1) (area of φd1) to push valve (1) to the
nected with port (T) through orifice (b) of valve left.
(1). q Valve (1) strikes balance to make the back
pressure equal to (PA) in the equation below.
(Area of φd) x PR + force of spring (2)

PA =
Area of φd1
52 PC300, 350-8
Main relief valve
1. Spring
2. Poppet
Function
q Set pressure of the relief valve is in two stages.
q When power is needed, pilot pressure (P) is
turned ON and the set pressure becomes
higher.
Operation
q The set pressure of relief valve is determined
by spring (1) installed load. (1st stage)
q Respective setting is not required for both the
1st and 2nd stages. Setting the 1st stage com-
pletes the setting of the 2nd stage.
1. If pilot pressure (P) is OFF: Low-pressure

setting
Set pressure is determined by spring (1)
installed load.
2. If pilot pressure (P) is ON: High-pressure

setting
Spring (1) installed load is added with pilot
pressure (P) applied to the area of poppet
diameter (d1), raising the set pressure to
higher level.
PC300, 350-8 53
2-stage safety-suction valve

[Installed to port (B) on the boom cylinder head side and port (B) of the service valve]
1. Spring
2. Piston
3. Spring
4. Holder
Function Operation
q Enables to provide the safety valve set pres- q The safety set pressure is determined by
sure in two stages, and make the low-pressure spring (1) installed load.
setting smaller.
q Enables to relieve a load without lever opera- 1. If pilot pressure is OFF (high-pressure set-
tion if high load is applied to the cylinder. ting)
q Improves work efficiency and reduces machine q Since pilot pressure (P) is OFF, piston (2) is
body vibration. pressed to the left by spring (3). [Spring (1)
installed load < spring (3) installed load]
q Spring (1) installed load becomes maximum
and the set pressure rises.
q Passage (B) is interconnected to the drain cir-
cuit via passage (C) and chamber (D).
54 PC300, 350-8
2. If pilot pressure is ON (low-pressure set-

ting)
q If the pilot pressure (P) is ON, the pilot pres-
sure is led to section (A) via passage (B).
q Piston (2) works on the pressure-receiving
bore portion [(d2) – (d1)] of section A.
q This pilot pressure contracts spring (3), and
piston (2) moves to the right until making con-
tact with holder (4).
q Spring (1) stretches, installed load is reduced,
and the set pressure lowers.
q Pressurized oil proportionate to the piston
stroke is drained via passage (C) and chamber
(D).
PC300, 350-8 55
Variable pressure compensation valve

(Installed to the service valve)
A. Pump discharge pressure (P) (From service Function

valve spool) q Regulates flow distribution to the service valve
B. Cylinder port when the service valve (attachment) and the
C. Load pressure of other work equipment work equipment valve (boom raising, etc.) are
operated together. (Equivalent surface area
1. Valve ratio variable)
2. Spring q Pressurized oil from the service valve spool is
3. Sleeve applied to the left side of valve (1) and is led to
4. Poppet chamber (g) via orifice (a).
5. Spring q LS pressure is led to chamber (e) via orifice
6. Screw (d).
7. Locknut q Pressurized oil of cylinder port is led to cham-
8. Cap ber (h) via passage (c) and orifice (f).
q The force of spring (2) acts on valve (1), and
the force of spring (5) acts on poppet (4).
q The force of spring (5) can be adjusted with
screw (6).
56 PC300, 350-8
Operation when jointly operated with a high- q If the difference between the pump discharge
load work equipment (such as the boom rais- pressure (P) and cylinder port pressure (B) is
ing) larger than the force of spring (5), poppet (4) is
pressed to the right.
q Both of the pump discharge pressure (P) and
q Pump discharge pressure (P) flows to orifice
LS pressures are determined by other equip-
(a) and chamber (g) and is interconnected to
ment's pressure, while cylinder port pressure
cylinder port via passages (b) and (c).
causes the attachment to operate.
q Differential pressure is generated between the
q If the difference between the pump discharge
upstream and downstream of orifice (a), which
pressure (P) and cylinder pressure is smaller
reduces the pressure force in chamber (g).
than the force of spring (5), the balance of
q Force that presses valve (1) to the left is
forces applying to valve (1) may be expressed
reduced.
with the following equation:
q A state is reached where the area ratio has
become smaller.
P x A1 = P x A2 + LS(A2 – 1) + F
q Valve (1) moves to the right, and the flow
increases from the pump to the cylinder.
A1: Area of φD1
A2: Area of φD2
F: Force of spring
P: Pump discharge oil pressure
PC300, 350-8 57
Attachment circuit selector valve 1
ACC: To accumulator 1. Spool

ATT: To attachment 2. Spring
P1: From attachment selector solenoid valve
T: To hydraulic oil tank
TS: To hydraulic oil tank
V: To control valve
Unit: mm

Free length x Installed Installed Installed If damaged or
Free length
3 Spool return spring Outside diameter length load load deformed, replace
834 N 667 N spring.
132 x 29 114.5
{85.0 kg}
— {68.0 kg}
58 PC300, 350-8
Function
q When a breaker is installed, the return oil from
the breaker does not pass through the main
valve, but returns directly to the hydraulic tank.
q When other attachments (crusher, etc.) are
installed, the attachment and the main valve
are interconnected.
Operation
1. When attachment other than breaker is 2. When breaker is installed
installed q Pilot pressure from the attachment circuit
q Spool (1) is pressed to the left by the force of selector solenoid valve contracts spring (2),
spring (2). and spool (1) moves to the right to the stroke
q Ports (ATT) and (V) are interconnected and end.
ports (ATT) and (T) are shut off. Attachment is q Ports (ATT) and (V) are shut off and ports
thus interconnected to the control valve. (ATT) and (T) are interconnected.
q Pressurized oil returning from the breaker
returns directly to the hydraulic tank via port (T)
without passing through the control valve.
PC300, 350-8 59
Hydraulic drift prevention valve 1

(For the boom and arm)
60 PC300, 350-8
CY: To work equipment cylinder

PCY: For pressure pickup port and equalizer circuit
PI: From PPC valve
T: To tank
V: From control valve
1. Pilot spool
2. Spring (1st stage spool)
3. Spring (2nd stage spool)
4. Safety valve
5. Check valve
6. Spring
Unit: mm
Free length
7 Check valve spring Outside diameter length load load
12.7 N 10.2 N
20.8 x 12.2 13.5
{1.3 kg}
— {1.04 kg} If damaged or
{6.0 kg}
78.5 N 62.8 N
{8.0 kg}
— {6.4 kg}
181 N 145 N
{18.5 kg}
— {14.8 kg}
PC300, 350-8 61
Function
q Prevents the pressurized oil from reversing
from the work equipment cylinder and the latter
from a sudden drop if the piping bur sts
between the control valve and the work equip-
ment cylinder.
Operation
1. When the work equipment lever is in neutral
When the piping is free of burst If the piping is bursted

q Check valve (5) is closed under the holding q If piping (A) bursts between the control valve
pressure of the cylinder led from port (CY) to and the work equipment cylinder, chambers (a)
chamber (b). and (b) are shut off same as when the piping
q Pilot pressure led to port (PI) from the PPC has no burst.
valve when in neutral is 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}. q Pressure for the work equipment cylinder is
q Spool (1) is pressed to the left by the force of held to prevent a sudden drop of the work
springs (2) and (3) equipment.
q Chambers (a) and (b) are shut off.
q No pressurized oil flows between the control
valve and the work equipment cylinder.
q Accordingly, the work equipment is held in
position.
q If the work equipment cylinder has abnormally
high pressure, safety valve (4) is actuated by
the holding pressure of the work equipment
cylinder.
q Chambers (b) of L.H. and R.H. hydraulic drift
prevention valve for the boom are intercon-
nected by port (PCY).
q Chambers (b) will have the same pressure if
the L.H. and R.H. hydraulic drift prevention
valves have a difference in leakage.
62 PC300, 350-8
2. When pressurized oil flows from the main valve to the cylinder
When the piping is free of burst

q Pressurized oil led to chamber (a) from the
control valve becomes higher than the com-
bined force of pressure from work equipment
cylinder circuit chamber (b) and spring (6).
q Check valve (5) opens and chambers (a) and
(b) are interconnected.
q Pressurized oil flows from the control valve to
the work equipment cylinder.
If the piping is bursted

q If piping (A) bursts between the control valve
and the work equipment cylinder, pressurized
oil in chamber (a) flows outside from the
bursted portion.
q Pressure force in chamber (a) drops.
q Pressure force in chamber (a) drops lower than
the combined pressure force of chamber (b)
and spring (6).
q Check valve (5) closes and chambers (a) and
(b) are cut off.
q Pressure for the work equipment cylinder is
held to prevent a sudden drop of the work
equipment.
PC300, 350-8 63
3. When returning pressurized oil to the main valve from the work equipment cylinder
When the piping is free of burst If the piping is bursted

q Holding pressure of the work equipment cylin- q If piping (A) bursts between the control valve
der is led to chamber (b) and check valve (5) and the work equipment cylinder.
closes. q Pressurized oil in chamber (a) flows out to the
q Pilot pressure from the PPC valve is led to port bursted portion but resupplied from chamber
(PI) and reaches [Pilot Pressure > Force of (b).
Spring (3)] (area of d). q Since pressurized oil flows via opening (c) of
q Spool (1) moves to the right to the standby spool (1), a sudden drop of the cylinder is pre-
position. (1st stage stroke) vented.
q At this point, chambers (a) and (b) are not
interconnected.
q Pilot pressure further rises, and reaches [Pilot
pressure > Force of spring (2)] (area of d).
q Spool (1) moves further to the right, and cham-
bers (a) and (b) are interconnected. (2nd stage
stroke)
q Pressurized oil returns to the control valve
from the work equipment cylinder.
64 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 65
SEN01994-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
66
SEN01995-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Valve control................................................................................................................................................... 2
PPC valve ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
Solenoid valve.............................................................................................................................................. 26
PPC accumulator ......................................................................................................................................... 28
Return oil filter .............................................................................................................................................. 29
Center swivel joint ........................................................................................................................................ 30
Travel motor ................................................................................................................................................. 31
Swing motor ................................................................................................................................................. 43
Hydraulic cylinder......................................................................................................................................... 52
PC300, 350-8 1
Valve control 1
2 PC300, 350-8
1. Travel PPC valve Lever positions

2. Service PPC valve A. Hold
3. Service pedal B. Boom (RAISE)
4. L.H. travel lever C. Boom (LOWER)
5. R.H travel lever D. Bucket (DUMP)
6. R.H. PPC valve E. Bucket (CURL)
7. R.H. work equipment control lever F. Hold
8. Solenoid block G. Arm (IN)
9. Accumulator H. Arm (OUT)
10. Control valve J. Swing (RIGHT)
11. Hydraulic pump K. Swing (LEFT)
12. Junction box L. Neutral
13. L.H. work equipment control lever M. Travel (REVERSE)
14. L.H. PPC valve N. Travel (FORWARD)
PC300, 350-8 3
PPC valve 1
Work equipment and swing PPC valve

P1: L.H. PPC: Arm out/R.H. PPC: Boom lower
P2: L.H. PPC: Arm in/R.H. PPC: Boom raise
P3: L.H. PPC: Swing left/R.H. PPC: Bucket curl
P4: L.H. PPC: Swing right/R.H. PPC: Bucket dump
T: To tank
4 PC300, 350-8
1. Spool 7. Joint
2. Metering spring 8. Plate
3. Centering spring 9. Retainer
4. Piston 10. Body
5. Disc 11. Filter
6. Nut (for lever connection)
Unit: mm

Centering spring Free length
12 (for ports P3 and P4)
Outside diameter length load load
17.7 N 13.7 N If damaged or
42.5 x 15.5 34.0
{1.80 kg}
Centering spring 29.4 N 23.5 N spring.
13 (for ports P1 and P2)
44.5 x 15.5 34.0
{3.0 kg}
— {2.40 kg}
16.7 N 13.7 N
14 Metering spring 26.5 x 8.15 24.9
{1.70 kg}
— {1.40 kg}
PC300, 350-8 5
Operation
1. When in neutral q The relationship of the position of spool (1) and
q Ports (A) and (B) of the control valve and ports body (10) [fine control hole (f) is in the middle
(P1) and (P2) of the PPC valve are connected between drain chamber (D) and pump pres-
to drain chamber (D) via fine control hole (f) in sure chamber (PP)] does not change until
spool (1). retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
q Metering spring (2) contracts in proportion to
the stroke of the control lever.
q Pressure at port (P1) also rises in proportion to
q In this way, the control valve spool moves to a
position where the pressure of chamber (A)
(same as pressure at port (P1)) and the force
of the return spring of the control valve spool
are balanced.
2. During fine control

(Neutral o fine control)
q When piston (4) is pushed by disc (5), retainer
(9) is pushed, spool (1) is also pushed by
metering spring (2), and moves down.
q When fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
chamber (D), it is almost simultaneously inter-
connected to pump pressure chamber (PP).
q Pilot pressurized oil of the control pump is led
to port (A) from port (P1) via fine control hole
(f).
q When the pressure at port (P1) becomes
higher, spool (1) is pushed back and fine con-
trol hole (f) is shut off from pump pressure
chamber (PP). At almost the same time, it is
connected to drain chamber (D) to release the
pressure at port (P1).
q As a result, spool (1) moves up and down until
the force of metering spool (2) is balanced with
the pressure at port (P1).
6 PC300, 350-8
3. During fine control 4. At full stroke

(When control lever is returned) q Disc (5) pushes down piston (4), and retainer
q When disc (5) starts to be returned, spool (1) is (9) pushes down spool (1).
pushed up by the force of centering spring (3) q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
and the pressure at port (P1). chamber (D), and is interconnected to pump
q Because of this, fine control hole (f) is con- pressure chamber (PP).
nected to drain chamber (D), and the pressur- q Therefore, the pilot pressure oil from the self
ized oil at port (P1) is released. pressure reducing valve passes through fine
q If the pressure of port (P1) is lowered exces- control hole (f) and flows to chamber (A) from
sively, spool (1) is pushed down by metering port (P1) to push the control valve spool.
spring (2). q The oil returning from chamber (B) passes
q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain from port (P2) through fine control hole (f') and
chamber (D), and it is almost simultaneously flows to drain chamber (D).
interconnected to pump pressure chamber
(PP).
q Pump pressure is supplied until the pressure at
port (P1) recovers to the level equivalent to the
lever position.
q When the spool of the control valve returns,
the oil in drain chamber (D) flows in from fine
control hole (f') in the valve on the side that is
not working. The oil passes through port (P2)
and enters chamber (B) to replenish the cham-
ber with pressurized oil.
PC300, 350-8 7
Travel PPC valve

P1: L.H. reverse
P2: L.H. forward
P3: R.H. reverse
P4: R.H. forward
P5: Travel signal
P6: Steering signal
T: To tank
8 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 9
10 PC300, 350-8
1. Plate
2. Body
3. Piston
4. Collar
5. Centering spring
6. Metering spring
7. Valve
8. Dumper
9. Steering signal spool
10. Steering signal spool spring
Unit: mm

Free length
11 Centering spring Outside diameter length load load
108 N 86.3 N If damaged or
47.6 x 15.5 32.5
{11.0 kg}
16.7 N 13.7 N spring.
{1.7 kg}
— {1.4 kg}
8.8 N 7.1 N
13 Steering signal spring 12.8 x 7.3 8.5
{0.9 kg}
— {0.72 kg}
PC300, 350-8 11
1. Pressure reducing valve
Operation q The relationship of the position of spool (1) and

1) When in neutral body (10) [fine control hole (f) is in the middle
q Ports (A) and (B) of the control valve and ports between drain chamber (D) and pump pres-
(P1) and (P2) of the PPC valve are connected sure chamber (PP)] does not change until
to drain chamber (D) via fine control hole (f) in retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
spool (1). q Metering spring (2) contracts in proportion to
q Pressure at port (P1) also rises in proportion to
q In this way, the control valve spool moves to a
position where the pressure of chamber (A)
(same as pressure at port (P1)) and the force
of the return spring of the control valve spool
are balanced.
2) During fine control

(Neutral o fine control)
q When piston (4) is pushed by disc (5), retainer
(9) is pushed, spool (1) is also pushed by
metering spring (2), and moves down.
q When fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
chamber (D), it is almost simultaneously inter-
connected to pump pressure chamber (PP).
q Pilot pressurized oil of the control pump is led
to port (A) from port (P1) via fine control hole
(f).
q When the pressure at port (P1) becomes
higher, spool (1) is pushed back and fine con-
trol hole (f) is shut off from pump pressure
chamber (PP). At almost the same time, it is
connected to drain chamber (D) to release the
pressure at port (P1).
q As a result, spool (1) moves up and down until
the force of metering spool (2) is balanced with
the pressure at port (P1).
12 PC300, 350-8
3) During fine control q Therefore, the pilot pressure oil from the self
(When control lever is returned) pressure reducing valve passes through fine
q When lever (5) starts to be returned, spool (1) control hole (f) and flows to chamber (A) from
is pushed up by the force of centering spring port (P1) to push the control valve spool.
(3) and pressure at port (P1). q The oil returning from chamber (B) passes
q Because of this, fine control hole (f) is con- from port (P2) through fine control hole (f') and
nected to drain chamber (D), and the pressur- flows to drain chamber (D).
ized oil at port (P1) is released.
q If the pressure of port (P1) is lowered exces-
sively, spool (1) is pushed down by metering
spring (2).
q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
chamber (D), and it is almost simultaneously
interconnected to pump pressure chamber
(PP).
q Pump pressure is supplied until the pressure at
port (P1) recovers to the level equivalent to the
lever position.
q When the spool of the control valve returns,
the oil in drain chamber (D) flows in from fine
control hole (f') in the valve on the side that is
not working. The oil passes through port (P2)
and enters chamber (B) to replenish the cham-
ber with pressurized oil.
2. Travel signal/Steering function

Travel signal
q Travel signal if either of the L.H. or R.H. travel
levers is operated, the higher PPC output pres-
sure of both sides is output as the travel signal.
q Accordingly, whether the machine is travelling
is judged by the signal of port (P5).
Steering signal
q If the operation quantities of both levers are dif-
ferent from each other as in the steering opera-
ti o n , t h e hi g h e r o ne o f t h e P P C o u tp u t
pressures of both sides is output as the steer-
ing signal.
q Any signal is not output from port (P6) while
the machine is travelling straight (forward or
reverse) or in neutral.
4) At full stroke
q Accordingly, whether the machine is being
q Lever (5) pushes down piston (4), and retainer
steered is judged by the signal of port (P6).
(9) pushes down spool (1).
q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
chamber (D), and is interconnected to pump
pressure chamber (PP).
PC300, 350-8 13
Operation
1) When in neutral
q No output is made from respective output ports

[from port (P1) to (P4)], travel signal [port (P5)]
and steering signal [port (P6)].
14 PC300, 350-8
2) During straight travel
a The Illustration shows the circuit for travelling straight forward.
q When operating L.H. motor forward [port (P2)

output] and R.H. motor forward [port (P4) out-
put], pressure of both L.H. spring chamber (k)
and R.H. spring chamber (l) rises high.
q Steering signal spool (j) remains at neutral
position and does not output a steering signal
to port (P6).
PC300, 350-8 15
3) When steered or pivot-turned
a The Illustration shows the circuit for left forward (slow) and right forward (fast) operation.
q If the operation quantities of both levers are dif- q Port (P4) pressure of the L.H. or R.H. PPC
ferent from each other as in the steering opera- valves, whichever having a higher output pres-
tion (if the difference of the pilot pressure sure, is output to port (P6) as the steering sig-
between both sides is higher than a certain nal.
level), the pilot pressure is output as the steer-
ing signal.
q The pressure in left spring chamber (k) of
steering signal spool (j) is (P2).
q The pressure in right spring chamber (l) is
(P4).
q When the pressure state reaches [(P4 - P2) x
(Spool section) > Spring set load], the spool is
switched to the direction of the arrow.
16 PC300, 350-8
4) When counter-rotated
a The illustration shows the circuit for travelling left reverse and right forward.
q When operating L.H. motor reverse [port (P1)

output] and R.H. motor forward [port (P4) out-
put], pressure of the R.H. spring chamber (l)
only rises high.
q Steering signal spool (j) strokes to the left to
output the steering signal to port (P6).
PC300, 350-8 17
Service PPC valve (with EPC valve) 1
a For the details of operation, see the paragraph of “Work equipment swing PPC valve.”
18 PC300, 350-8

P1: To service valve
T: To tank
1. Spool
2. Piston
3. Lever
4. Plate
5. Retainer
6. Block
7. Body
8. EPC valve
Unit: mm

Free length
9 Centering spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
33.9 x 15.3 28.4 — spring.
{12.7 kg} {10.2 kg}
16.7 N 13.3 N
{1.70 kg}
—
{1.36 kg}
PC300, 350-8 19
1. EPC valve
C: To control valve 3. Spool

P: From self pressure reducing valve 4. Push pin
T: To hydraulic tank 5. Coil
6. Plunger
1. Body 7. Connector
2. Plug
Unit: mm

If damaged or
Installation Installation Installation
Free length Free length deformed, replace
8 Return spring length load load
EPC valve assem-
3.1 N bly.
9.0 8.4 — —
{0.32 kg}
20 PC300, 350-8
Function Operation
q The EPC valve consists of the proportional
solenoid portion and the hydraulic valve por- 1) When signal current is 0
tion. (coil is de-energized)
q When it receives signal current (i) from the q When there is no signal current flowing from
pump controller, it generates the EPC output the controller to coil (14), coil (14) is deener-
pressure in proportion to the size of the signal, gized.
and outputs it to the control valve. q Spool (11) is pushed to the right by spring (12).
q Port (P) closes and the pressurized oil from the
front pump does not flow to the control valve.
q The pressurized oil from the control valve is
drained to the tank via port (C) and port (T).
PC300, 350-8 21
2) When signal current is very small 3) When signal current is maximum

(coil is energized) (coil is energized)
q When a very small signal current flows to coil q As the signal current flows to coil (5), coil (5) is
(5), coil (5) is energized, and a propulsion force energized.
is generated on the left side of plunger (6). q When this happens, the signal current is at its
q Push pin (4) pushes spool (2) to the left, and maximum, so the propulsion force of plunger
pressurized oil flows from port (P) to port (C). (6) is also at its maximum.
q Pressures on port (C) increases and the force q Spool (2) is pushed to the left by push pin (4).
to act on surface (a) of spool (2) and the spring q The maximum volume of pressurized oil is
load on spring (3) become larger than the pro- conducted from port (P) to port (C), increasing
pulsion force of plunger (6). the circuit pressure across EPC valve and the
q Spool (2) is pushed to the right, port (P) is shut control valve to the maximum level.
off from port (C) and ports (C) and (T) are con- q Since port (T) is closed, pressurized oil does
nected. not flow to the hydraulic tank.
q Spool (2) moves up and down so that the pro-
pulsion force of plunger (6) may be balance
with pressure of port (C) + spring load of spring
(3).
q The circuit pressure between the EPC valve
and the control valve is controlled in proportion
to the size of the signal current.
22 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 23
Service PPC valve (with EPC valve) 1
a For the details of operation, see the paragraph of “Work equipment swing PPC valve.”
24 PC300, 350-8

T: To tank
1. Spool
2. Piston
3. Lever
4. Plate
5. Retainer
6. Block
7. Body
8. EPC valve
Unit: mm
Free length
9 Centering spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
33.9 x 15.3 28.4 — spring.
{12.7 kg} {10.2 kg}
16.7 N 13.3 N
{1.70 kg}
—
{1.36 kg}
PC300, 350-8 25
Solenoid valve 1
PPC lock, travel junction, merge-divider, travel speed, swing brake, machine push-up and 2-stage
relief solenoid valves
1. PPC lock solenoid valve T: To tank

2. Travel junction solenoid valve A1: To PPC valve
3. Merge-divider solenoid valve A2: To main valve (Travel junction valve)
4. Travel speed solenoid valve A3: To main valve (Merge-divider valve)
5. Swing brake solenoid valve A4: To both travel motors
6. Machine push-up solenoid valve A5: To swing motor
7. 2-stage relief solenoid valve A6: To main valve (2-stage safety valve at boom
cylinder head)
A8: To main valve (2-stage relief valve)
P1: From main pump
ACC: To accumulator
26 PC300, 350-8
1. Connector 4. Spool
2. Moving core 5. Block
3. Coil 6. Spring
Operation
When solenoid is deenergized When solenoid is energized
q Since the signal current does not flow from the q The signal current flows from the controller to
controller, solenoid (3) is deenergized. For this solenoid (3), and the latter is energized.
reason, spool (4) is pushed to the left by spring Accordingly, spool (4) is pressed against to the
(6). By this operation, the pass from port (P) to right side. By this operation, the pressurized oil
port (A) is closed and the pressurized oil from from the main pump flows through port (P) and
the main pump does not flow into the actuator. spool (4) to port (A), then flows into the actua-
At this time, the oil from the actuator is drained tor. At the same time, port (T) closes and stops
through ports (A) and (T) into the tank. the oil from flowing to the tank.
PC300, 350-8 27
PPC accumulator 1
1. Gas plug
2. Shell
3. Poppet
4. Holder
5. Bladder
6. Oil port
Specifications
Gas capacity: 300 cc (for PPC)
28 PC300, 350-8
Return oil filter 1
For breaker
1. Drain plug Specifications

2. Filter Rated pressure: 6.9 MPa {70 kg/cm2}
3. Case Flow: 200 l/min
4. Head cover Relief valve cracking pressure:
5. Relief valve 0.34 ± 0.05 MPa {3.5 ± 0.5 kg/cm2}
Filter mesh size: 6 µm
Filtering area: 4,570 cm2
PC300, 350-8 29
Center swivel joint 1
1. Cover A1: To L.H. travel motor port PB

2. Body A2: From control valve port A2
3. Slipper seal B1: To L.H. travel motor port PA
4. O-ring B2: From control valve port B2
5. Shaft C1: To R.H. travel motor port PA
C2: From control valve port A5
D1: To R.H. travel motor port PB
D2: From control valve port B5
E: To L.H. and R.H. travel motors port P
T1: From L.H. and R.H. travel motors port T
T2: To tank
Unit: mm
Clearance between rotor and Standard size Standard clearance Clearance limit
6 shaft
Replace
80 — —
30 PC300, 350-8
Travel motor 1
Type: HMV160ADT-2
MA: MA pressure detection port Specifications

MB: MB pressure detection port Type :HMV160ADT-2
P: From travel speed solenoid valve Theoretical displacement
PA: From control valve (Min.) :103.5 cm3/rev
PB: From control valve (Max.) :160.8 cm3/rev
T: To tank Rated pressure : 37.3 MPa {380 kg/cm2}
Rated speed
(Capacity min.) :2,638 rpm
(Capacity max.) :1,590 rpm
Brake release pressure :1.18 MPa {12 kg/cm2}
Travel speed selector pressure
(differential pressure) :0.78 MPa {8 kg/cm2}
PC300, 350-8 31
32 PC300, 350-8
1. Output shaft
2. Motor case
3. Rocker cam
4. Piston
5. Cylinder block
6. Valve plate
7. End cover
8. Slow return valve
9. Brake spring
10. Brake piston
11. Plate
12. Disc
13. Regulator piston
14. Check valve
15. Counterbalance valve
16. Safety valve
17. Ball
18. Regulator valve
19. Spring
Unit: mm
Free length x Installation Installed Installed
Free length
427 N 341 N
58.43 x 30.0 42.0 —
{43.5 kg} {34.8 kg} If damaged or
{0.13 kg}
—
{0.10 kg} spring.
Regulator piston 221 N 177 N
22 spring
61.1 x 23.2 43.9
{22.5 kg}
—
{18.0 kg}
Regulator valve 98.1 N 78.5 N
23 spring
29.6 x 9.0 26.0
{10.0 kg}
—
{8.0 kg}
PC300, 350-8 33
Operation of motor
1) At slow speed (motor swash plate angle at maximum)
q As the solenoid valve is deenergized, the pilot q The combined force of the piston propulsion
pressurized oil from the self pressure reducing forces works as the moment of inclining rocker
valve does not flow to port (P). cam (3) toward the maximum swash plate
q Regulator valve (21) is pushed to the right by angle.
spring (22). q The pressurized oil at regulator piston (13)
q Pressurized oil being conducted from the con- passes through orifice (c) of regulator valve
trol valve to end cover (7) by pressing slow (21) and is drained to the motor case.
return valve (8) is shut off by regulator valve q Rocker cam (3) is inclined in the maximum
(21). swash plate angle direction. The motor capac-
q Fulcrum (a) of rocker cam (3) is eccentric to ity becomes maximum, turning on the low
the working point (b) of the combined force of speed travel.
the propulsion force of cylinder (5).
34 PC300, 350-8
2) At high peed (motor swash plate angle at minimum)
q As the solenoid valve is energized, the pilot

pressurized oil from the self pressure reducing
valve flows to port (P).
q Regulator valve (21) is pushed to the left.
q The pressurized oil from the control valve
passes through passage (d) in regulator valve
(21) and enters regulator piston (13).
q Regulator piston (13) is pushed to the right.
q Rocker cam (3) is inclined in the minimum
swash plate angle direction. The motor capac-
ity becomes minimum, turning on the high
speed travel.
PC300, 350-8 35
Operation of parking brake

1) When starting travel
q As the travel lever is operated, pressurized oil

from the pump activates counterbalance valve
spool (17), opening the parking brake circuit.
q The pressurized oil is conducted to chamber
(a) of brake piston (10) and compresses spring
(9), pushing piston (10) toward right.
q Since the pushing force to plate (11) and disc
(12) disappears, plate (11) is separated from
disc (12) and the brake is released.
36 PC300, 350-8
2) When travel is stopped
q As the travel lever is placed in neutral, counter-

balance valve spool (17) returns to the neutral
position and closing the parking brake circuit.
q The pressurized oil in chamber (a) of brake
piston (10) passes through orifice (f) of brake
piston (10) and is drained to the motor case.
q Brake piston (10) is pushed to the right by
spring (9).
q Plate (11) and disc (12) are pushed together,
and the brake is applied.
q As brake piston (10) returns, flow of pressur-
ized oil is reduced with slow return valve (8).
q The time delay will be set to activate the brake
only after the machine has stopped.
PC300, 350-8 37
Brake valve Operation when pressurized oil is supplied

q The brake valve consists of check valves (14), q Operating the travel lever conducts the pres-
counterbalance valve (15) and safety valve surized oil from the control valve to port (PA).
(16). q The pressurized oil push-opens check valve
q Functions and operations of respective compo- (14A) and then flows to motor outlet port (MB)
nents shall conform to the following. via motor inlet port (MA).
q The motor outlet side is closed by check valve
1. Counterbalance valve and check valve (14B) and spool (24), so the pressure at the
supply side rises.
Function
q When traveling downhill, the machine travel
speed tends to get faster than the motor
(engine) speed because of the downward force
generated from its own weight.
q If the machine travels with the engine at low
speed, the motor may rotate without load,
causing the machine to run away, resulting in a
very dangerous situation.
q These valves are used to prevent above by
controlling the machine to travel according to
the engine speed (pump delivery).
38 PC300, 350-8
Operation of brake during travelling downhill

q The pressurized oil on the supply side flows to q If indication of the machine runaway is sensed
chamber (S1) via orifice (E1) and orifice (E2) of while travelling downhill, the motor will be
the spool (24). caused to rotate without load to decrease the
q As the pressure in chamber (S1) goes above inlet side oil pressure.
the spool selector pressure, spool (24) is q Pressure in chamber (S1) is released via ori-
pushed toward right. fices (E1) and (E2).
q Port (MB) and port (PB) are connected, open- q As the pressure in chamber (S1) goes below
ing the motor outlet port side and starting the the spool selector pressure, spool (24) is
motor rotating. returned to the left by spring (20) and outlet
port (MB) is throttled.
q The pressure at the outlet port side rises, gen-
erating rotation resistance on the motor to pre-
vent the machine from running away.
q The spool moves to a position where the pres-
sure on outlet port (MB) can be balanced
against the machine's own weight and the inlet
port pressure.
q Oil flow from the outlet circuit is reduced to
ensure the travel speed corresponded to the
pump delivery.
PC300, 350-8 39
2. Safety valve
(bidirectional 2-stage set safety valve)
Function q As the pressure goes above the set pressure,

q As long as the machine travel is stopped (or it [Difference in areas of circles (D1) and (D2) x
is travelling downhill), the counterbalance Pressure] compresses spring (2).
valve closes the inlet and outlet circuits of the q Poppet (1) is moved leftward and the pressur-
motor. ized oil flows into chamber (MA) of the oppo-
q Since the motor is rotated by inertial force, site circuit.
pressure in the motor outlet port side is abnor-
mally increased, potentially resulting in dam-
ages on the motor and piping.
q The safety valve releases this abnormal pres-
sure to the inlet port side of the motor in order
to prevent damages to the equipment.
Bidirectional action
1) When pressure in chamber (MB) has
become high (when rotating clockwise)
q As long as the machine travel is stopped (or it
is travelling downhill), the check valve of coun-
terbalance valve closes chamber (MB) of the
outlet port circuit.
q The motor tries to continue rotation resorting to
inertial force, thus pressure on the outlet port
(MB) is increased.
40 PC300, 350-8
2) When pressure in chamber (MA) has Operation of mechanism for varying set pres-
become high (when rotating counterclock- sure
wise) 1) When starting travel (high-pressure setting)
q As long as the machine travel is stopped (or it q As the travel lever is operated, the pressurized
is travelling downhill), the check valve of coun- oil from the pump moves spool (19) toward
terbalance valve closes chamber (MA) of the right.
outlet port circuit. q Above opens the pilot circuit to the safety
q The motor tries to continue rotation resorting to valve, conducting the pressurized oil to cham-
inertial force, thus pressure on the outlet port ber (J) via chamber (G) and passage (H).
(MA) is increased. q Piston (3) is pushed rightward, spring (2) is
compressed and the set load is increased.
q High pressure is turned on the safety valve,
providing a large tractional force to the valve.
q As the pressure goes above the set pressure,

[Difference in areas of circles (D1) and (D3) x
Pressure] compresses spring (2).
q Poppet (1) is moved leftward and the pressur-
ized oil flows into chamber (MB) of the oppo-
site circuit.
PC300, 350-8 41
2) When travel is stopped (low-pressure set-

ting)
q When the travel lever is placed in neutral, the
pressure in chamber (PA) drops and spool (24)
returns to the neutral position.
q When spool (24) is in the process of returning
to the neutral position, the pressurized oil in
chamber (J) flows to chamber (PA) via pas-
sage (H) and chamber (G).
q Piston (3) moves to the left side, decreasing
the set load.
q The safety valve is caused to the low pressure
setting, thereby attenuating the shocks when
the speed is reduced.
Set pressure of safety valve

High pressure setting:
40.2 MPa {410 kg/cm2}
(at start of travel and during travel)
Low pressure setting:
27.5 MPa {280 kg/cm2} (during stop)
42 PC300, 350-8
Swing motor 1
Type: KMF230ABE-5
B: From swing holding brake solenoid Specifications

MA: From control valve Type : KMF230ABE-5
MB: From control valve Theoretical displacement : 229.4 cm3/rev
S: From control valve Safety valve set pressure : 27.9 MPa {285 kg/cm2}
T: To tank Rated engine speed : 1,130 rpm
Brake release pressure : 1.9 MPa {19 kg/cm2}
1. Reverse prevention valve
2. Safety valve
PC300, 350-8 43
44 PC300, 350-8
1. Brake spring
2. Drive shaft
3. Spacer
4. Case
5. Disc
6. Plate
7. Brake piston
8. Housing
9. Piston
10. Cylinder block
11. Valve plate
12. Center shaft
13. Center spring
14. Check valve
15. Check valve spring
16. Shuttle valve
17. Shuttle valve spring
Unit: mm
Free length
18 Check valve spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
66.5 x 25.6 45.0 — spring.
{0.71 kg} {0.57 kg}
7.45 N 5.98 N
19 Shuttle valve spring 24.5 x 11.6 14.5
{0.76 kg}
—
{0.61 kg}
PC300, 350-8 45
Swing holding brake

1. When solenoid valve is deenergized 2. When solenoid valve is energized
Operation Operation
q As the swing holding brake is deenergized, the q As the swing brake solenoid valve is ener-
pressurized oil from the self pressure reducing gized, the valve is switched.
valve is shut off. q The pressurized oil from the self pressure
q Port (B) is connected to tank circuit (T). reducing valve is conducted brake chamber (a)
q Brake piston (7) is pushed down by brake via port (B).
spring (1). q After entering chamber (a), the pressurized oil
q Disc (5) and plate (6) are pushed together, and compresses brake spring (1) and pushes
the brake is applied. brake piston (7) up.
q Disc (5) is separated from plate (6), releasing
the brake.
46 PC300, 350-8
Relief valve portion 2. When swing is stopped

q When the swing control lever is returned to
Outline neutral, the supply of pressurized oil from the
q The relief valve portion consists of check pump to port (MA) is stopped.
valves (2) and (3), shuttle valves (4) and (5), q The pressurized oil from the motor outlet can't
and relief valve (1). return to the tank since the returning circuit to
the tank is closed from control valve (6). Thus,
Function pressure on port (MB) increases.
q Rotation resistance is generated on the motor
q When the machine is in the swing holding
and hence the brake starts working.
mode, control valve (6) closes the motor outlet
q Shuttle valve (4) is pressed as pressure on
circuit, but the motor rotation is continued by
port (MB) goes above port (MA).
inertial force.
q The pressure on chamber (C) is increased to
q The motor output, therefore, is abnormally
the se t pr es sure of relief va lv e (1) an d
increased, resulting in damaging the motor.
becomes the same as that of port (MB).
q In order to prevent the motor damages, the
q A high braking torque works on the motor,
relief valve relieves the abnormally high pres-
thereby stopping the motor.
sure to port (S) from the motor outlet side
q When relief valve (1) is being actuated, the
(high-pressure side) of the motor.
relieved pressurized oil and the pressurized oil
from port (S) are fed to port (MA) via check
Operation
valve (3).
1. When starting swing q Above prevents cavitation on port (MA).
q When the swing control lever is operated to the
right- swing, the pressurized oil from the pump
is supplied to port (MA) via control valve (6).
q The pressure on port (MA) rises, the starting
torque is generated in the motor, and the motor
starts to rotate.
q The pressurized oil from the outlet port of the
motor passes from port (MB) through the con-
trol valve (6) and returns to the tank.
PC300, 350-8 47
SEN01995-00
Reverse prevention valve
48
MA: From control valve

MB: From control valve
T1: To tank
T2: To tank
1. Valve body
2. Spool (MA side)
3. Spring (MA side)
4. Plug (MA side)
5. Spool (MB side)
6. Spring (MB side)
7. Plug (MB side)
Explanatory drawing of effects
PC300, 350-8 49
Function 2. When motor is stopped temporarily

q This valve reduces the swing back generation q The motor rotation is reversed by the closing
in the swing body by the inertia of the swing pressure generated at port (MB). (1st time:
body, the backlash and rigidity of the machin- reverse rotation)
ery system, and the compression of the q Reversing pressure is generated on port (MA).
hydraulic oil when the swing is stopped. Pressure (MA) is conducted to chamber (a).
q The valve contributes in preventing collapsing q The pressure compresses spring (3) by use of
of load when the swing is stopped and also the difference in areas of circles (φD3 > φD4) of
contributes in reducing cycle time (enhances spool (2) and moves spool (2) to the right side.
the positioning performance, enabling you to q Port (MA) o chamber (b) will be intercon-
proceed to the next work quicker than ever). nected.
q Then ports (b) and (f) will be interconnected
Operation through the drilled hole (h) on spool (5). This
1. When port (MB) brake pressure is gener- interconnection bypasses the reversing pres-
ated sure on port (MA) to port (T), thereby prevent-
q Pressure (MB) is conducted to chamber (d) via ing the reverse rotation of the 2nd time.
notch (g).
q The pressure compresses spring (6) by use of
the difference in areas of circles (φD1 > φD2) of
spool (5) and moves spool (5) to the left side.
q Port (MB)o chamber (e) will be intercon-
nected.
q Since pressure (MA) is lower than the set pres-
sure of spring (3), spool (2) does not move and
the pressurized oil is kept in. Thus the braking
force is ensured.
50 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 51
Hydraulic cylinder 1
Boom cylinder
Arm cylinder
52 PC300, 350-8
Bucket cylinder
Unit: mm
Cylinder
size Shaft Hole clearance limit
-0.036 +0.035 0.041 –
Boom 100 0.412
Clearance between -0.090 +0.005 0.125
1 piston rod and bushing
Replace bushing
-0.036 +0.261 0.083 –
Arm 110 0.412
-0.090 +0.047 0.351
-0.030 +0.257 0.083 –
Bucket 100 0.447
-0.076 +0.047 0.347
-0.030 +0.190 0.100 –
Boom 100 —
-0.060 +0.070 0.250
Clearance between
-0.030 +0.190 0.105 –
2 piston rod support Arm 100
-0.076 +0.070 0.251
—
shaft and bushing
-0.030 +0.190 0.100 –
Bucket 90 —
-0.076 +0.070 0.246 Replace pin or
-0.030 +0.190 0.075 – bushing
Boom 90 —
-0.060 +0.070 0.225
Clearance between
-0.030 +0.190 0.105 –
3 cylinder bottom support Arm 100
-0.076 +0.070 0.251
—
shaft and bushing
-0.030 +0.190 0.100 –
Bucket 90 —
-0.060 +0.070 0.230
PC300, 350-8 53
SEN01995-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
54
SEN01996-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Work equipment
Work equipment............................................................................................................................................. 2
Dimensions of components............................................................................................................................ 4
PC300, 350-8 1
Work equipment 1
2 PC300, 350-8
Unit: mm
Clearance between pin connecting size clearance limit
Shaft Hole
1 boom and revolving frame and
bushing –0.036 +0.157 0.115 –
110 1.0
–0.090 +0.079 0.247
Clearance between pin connecting –0.036 +0.179 0.117 –
2 boom and arm and bushing 110
–0.090 +0.081 0.269
1.0
Clearance between pin connecting –0.036 +0.165 0.108 – Replace

3 arm and link and bushing 90
–0.090 +0.072 0.255
1.0

4 arm and bucket and bushing 90
–0.090 +0.083 0.235
1.0

5 link and bucket and bushing 90
–0.090 +0.072 0.255
1.0

6 links and bushing 90
–0.090 +0.069 0.253
1.0
7 Bucket clearance (a) 0.5 – 1.0

Adjust shims
9 Bucket clearance (b) 2.0
PC300, 350-8 3
Dimensions of components 1
1. Dimension of arm
4 PC300, 350-8
Unit: mm
PC300-8 PC350-8
No. Measuring position Standard Tolerance Standard Tolerance
size Shaft Hole size Shaft Hole
–0.036 +0.1 –0.036 +0.1
1 – φ100
–0.071 0
φ100
–0.071 0
+1.5 +1.5
Arm side 119.3 119.3
2 0 0
Cylinder head side 116 ±1.2 116 ±1.2
+0.5 +0.5
Boom side 320 320
0 0
3
–0.3 –0.3
Arm side 316 316
–0.8 –0.8
–0.036 +0.1 –0.036 +0.1
4 – φ110
–0.090 +0.1
φ110
–0.090 +0.1
5 – 470.6 ±1 470.6 ±1
6 – 236.5 ±0.5 236.5 ±0.5
7 – 1022.4 ±1 1022.4 ±1
8 – 3178 ±3 3178 ±3
9 – 2975.6 ±1 2975.6 ±1
10 – 472.5 – 472.5 ±1.0
11 – 731.0 ±0.2 731.0 ±0.2
12 – 728.0 ±0.5 728.0 ±0.5
13 – 513.6 – 513.6 –
14 – 1670 – 1670 –
–0.036 +0.2 –0.036 +0.2
15 – φ90
–0.090 0
φ90
–0.090 0
16 – 345.0 ±0.5 345.0 ±0.5
–0.036 +0.054 –0.036 +0.054
17 – φ90
–0.090 +0.054
φ90
–0.090 +0.054
0 0
Arm itself 330 330
18 –0.5 –0.5
When press fitting bushing 345 – 345 –
Min. 1870 – 1870 –
19
Max. 3155 – 3155 –
PC300, 350-8 5
2. Dimension of bucket
6 PC300, 350-8
Unit: mm
PC300-8 PC350-8
No. Measuring position Standard Standard
Tolerance Tolerance
size size
1 – 512.2 ±0.5 512.2 ±0.5
2 – 37.9 ±0.5 37.9 ±0.5
3 – 94°19' – 94°14' –
4 – 513.6 – 513.6 –
5 – 1658 – 1666 –
6 – 193 – 208 –
7 – 50° – 42° –
+0.2 +0.2
8 – φ90
+0.0
φ90
+0.0
+0.054 +0.054
9 – φ120
+0.054
φ120
+0.054
+0.1 +0.1
10 – φ125
+0.1
φ125
+0.1
+1 +1
11 – 346
0
346
0
12 – 68 – 68 –
13 – 138 – 138 –
+0.5 +0.5
14 – 525.5
–0.25
525.5
–0.25
15 – φ26 – φ26 –
16 – φ165 – φ165 –
17 – φ150 – φ150 –
18 – φ200 – φ200 –
19 – 145.8 – 137.9 –
20 – 138.2 – 140.4 –
21 – R115 – R115 –
22 – R100 – R100 –
+2 +2
23 – 382
0
382
0
24 – 60 – 60 –
25 – 56 – 56 –
PC300, 350-8 7
SEN01996-01
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
8
SEN01997-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Cab and its attachments
Air conditioner piping ...................................................................................................................................... 2
PC300, 350-8 1
Air conditioner piping 1
1. Hot water pickup piping A: Fresh air

2. Receiver tank B: Recirculated air
3. Hot water return piping C: Hot/cool air
4. Condenser
5. Air conditioner compressor
6. Refrigerant piping
7. Air conditioner unit
8. Duct
2 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 3
SEN01997-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
4
SEN01998-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Electrical system
Engine control ................................................................................................................................................ 2
Electronic control system ..............................................................................................................................11
Monitor system ............................................................................................................................................. 36
Sensor .......................................................................................................................................................... 63
KOMTRAX terminal system ......................................................................................................................... 66
PC300, 350-8 1
Engine control 1
1. Battery relay Outline

2. Battery q The engine can be started and stopped with
3. Starting switch only starting switch (3).
4. Fuel control dial
5. Starting motor
6. Engine throttle controller
7. Pump controller
2 PC300, 350-8
Operation of system
Starting engine Stopping engine
q When the starting switch is turned to the q When detecting that the starting switch is set to
START position, the starting signal flows to the the “STOP” position, the engine controller cuts
starting motor. Then, the starting motor turns to the fuel injection to stop the engine.
start the engine.
When it happens, the engine controller checks

the signal voltage from the fuel control dial and
sets the engine speed to the speed set by the
fuel control dial.
Engine speed control

q The fuel control dial sends a signal voltage cor-
responding to the rotation angle to the engine
controller.
q The pump controller receives the fuel dial posi-
tion information from the engine controller
through the network.
q The pump controller calculates the engine
speed in accordance with the working mode,
the decelerate, and the like, and sends an
instruction to the engine controller.
q The engine controller determines the fuel injec-
tion quantity based on the instruction received
from the pump controller.
PC300, 350-8 3
Component
Fuel control dial
1. Knob 4. Ball
2. Dial 5. Potentiometer
3. Spring 6. Connector
Function
q A potentiometer is installed under the knob. As
the knob is turned, the potentiometer shaft is
turned.
q As the potentiometer shaft is turned, the resis-
tance of the variable resistor in potentiometer
(5) changes and a throttle signal is sent to the
engine controller.
q The hatched area in the graph shown at right is
the abnormality detection area.
4 PC300, 350-8
Engine controller
q Meanings of signal classes in the terminal CN-CE01

table shown below are as follows. Input/
A: Power Supply Pin No. Signal name
output
B: Input 11 Fuel feed pump return C
C: Ground/Shield/Return 12 NC(*) –
D: Output 13 NC(*) B
E: Communication 14 WATER-IN-FUEL sensor B
CN-CE01 15 Coolant temperature sensor B
Input/ 16 5V electric power supply for sensor A
Pin No. Signal name
output 17 Oil pressure switch B
1 Electric power supply for fuel feed pump D 18 NC(*) –
2 Electric power supply for IMA D 19 NC(*) –
3 Atmosphere sensor B 20 NC(*) –
4 NC(*) – 21 NC(*) –
5 NC(*) – 22 NC(*) D
6 CAN(–) E 23 Boost temperature sensor B
7 NC(*) – 24 NC(*) –
8 CAN(+) E 25 Common rail pressure sensor B
9 NC(*) – 26 Buckup sensor B
10 NC(*) – 27 NE sensor (+) B
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will *: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
occur. occur.
PC300, 350-8 5
CN-CE01 CN-CE02
Input/ Input/
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
output output
28 NC(*) – 13 NC(*) B
29 NC(*) – 14 NC(*) B
30 NC(*) – 15 NC(*) B
31 NC(*) D 16 NC(*) B
32 NC(*) C 17 NC(*) B
33 GND A 18 NC(*) B
34 NC(*) – 19 NC(*) B
35 NC(*) A 20 NC(*) E
36 NC(*) – 21 NC(*) A
37 NC(*) A 22 Fuel control dial (+5V) A
38 NC(*) C 23 Fuel control dial (–) C
39 Key switch (ACC) – 24 NC(*) B
40 Electrical intake air heater relay drive – 25 NC(*) B
41 NC(*) – 26 NC(*) B
42 Electrical intake air heater relay return C 27 NC(*) B
43 NC(*) – 28 NC(*) B
44 Boost pressure sensor B 29 NC(*) C
45 Injector #1 (+) D 30 NC(*) B
46 Injector #5 (+) D 31 NC(*) B
47 Sensor GND C 32 NC(*) C
48 Ne sensor (–) C 33 GND C
49 NC(*) – 34 NC(*) C
50 NC(*) – 35 NC(*) B
51 Injector #2 (–) C 36 NC(*) B
52 Injector #3 (–) C 37 NC(*) C
53 Injector #1 (–) C 38 NC(*) D
54 Injector #2 (+) D 39 Key switch (ACC) A
55 Injector #3 (+) D 40 Electrical intake air heater relay drive D
56 Injector #4 (+) D 41 NC(*) D
57 Injector #6 (+) D 42 Electrical intake air heater relay return C
58 Injector #4 (–) C 43 NC(*) D
59 Injector #6 (–) C 44 NC(*) D
60 Injector #5 (–) C 45 NC(*) –
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will 46 CAN(+) E
occur. 47 CAN(–) E
48 NC(*) D
CN-CE02 49 PWM OUTPUT D
Input/ 50 NC(*) D
Pin No. Signal name
output *: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
1 NC(*) B occur.
2 NC(*) B
3 NC(*) B CN-CE03
4 NC(*) B Input/
Pin No. Signal name
5 NC(*) B output
6 NC(*) B 1 GND C
7 NC(*) B 2 NC(*) C
8 NC(*) B Electric power supply (+24V con-
3 A
9 Fuel control dial (+) B stantly)
10 NC(*) B 4 NC(*) A
11 NC(*) B *: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
12 NC(*) B occur.
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
occur.
6 PC300, 350-8
Coolant temperature sensor
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
Oil pressure switch
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
PC300, 350-8 7
Rotation sensor
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
Boost pressure and temperature sensor
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
8 PC300, 350-8
WIF (water-in-fuel detection) sensor
1. Connector
2. Tube
3. Sensor
4. O-ring
Engine oil level sensor
1. Connector
2. Bracket
3. Float
4. Switch
PC300, 350-8 9
10 PC300, 350-8
Electronic control system 1
Control function
1
Engine and pump composite control function
Pump and valve control function
Power maximizing function
Machine push-up function
Auto-deceleration function
Auto-warm-up and overheat prevention function
Electronic control system

6
Swing control function
Travel control function
8
Attachment flow control and circuit selector function
(if equipped)
Self-diagnosis function
a For the self-diagnosis function, see “Troubleshooting“.
PC300, 350-8 11
Machine control system diagram
12 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 13
1. Engine and pump composite control function
14 PC300, 350-8
Function 1) Control method in each mode

q This function allows the operator to select P and E modes
proper engine torque and pump absorption q Matching point in P mode: Rated speed
torque according to the type of work. Four
modes are provided: P, E, B and L. Using the Mode Matching point
work mode switch on the monitor panel, the 183.9 kW/1,950 rpm
operator is required to select one of them. P
{247 HP/1,950 rpm}
q The pump controller detects the speed of the
154.4 kW/1,750 rpm
engine governor set with the fuel control dial E
{207 HP/1,750 rpm}
and the actual engine speed (N) and controls
them so that the pump will absorb all the
torque at each output point of the engine, q If the pump load increases and the pres-
according to the pump absorption torque set in sure rises, engine speed (N) lowers. At
each mode. this time, the controller lowers the pump
discharge so that the engine speed will be
near the maximum output point.
If the pressure lowers, the controller
increases pump discharge (Q) so that the
engine speed will be near the maximum
output point.
By repeating these operations, the con-
troller constantly uses the engine near the
maximum output point.
PC300, 350-8 15
B and L modes
Mode B mode L mode

Partial output point 82% 61%
Mode Matching point

147.1 kW/1,800 rpm
B
{197 HP/1,800 rpm}
110.3 kW/1,550 rpm
L
{148 HP/1,550 rpm}
q In B or L mode, the controller controls the

pump absorption torque through the pump
and engine compound control function to
decrease engine speed (N) while main-
taining engine torque (T) constant along
the constant horsepower curve. This
ensures reduced fuel consumption.
16 PC300, 350-8
2) Function to control pump during travel 3) Function to control when emergency pump
q Traveling the machine in E or B mode drive switch is turned on
leaves the working mode unchanged, but q Even if any abnormality occurs in the controller
raises the pump absorption torque and or sensor, setting emergency pump drive
engine speed (N) to values same as those switch (1) to the “ON” position activates the
in P mode. machine with an absorption torque approxi-
q If the machine travels in L mode, the work- mately equivalent to that in E mode.
ing mode and engine speed (N) do not In this case, a constant current flows from the
change, but the pump absorption torque is battery to the EPC valve for PC and therefore,
increased. the oil pressure is sensed by only the EPC
valve for PC.
PC300, 350-8 17
2. Pump and valve control function
Function
q The machine is matched to various types of
work properly with the 2-stage relief function to
increase the digging force, etc.
18 PC300, 350-8
1) LS control function 3) 2-stage relief function

q Depending on the operation condition of q The relief pressure in the normal work is
the actuator, this function changes the 34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm 2 }. If the 2-stage
pressure output from the LS-EPC valve to relief function is turned on, however, the
LS valve to change the change point (LS relief pressure rises to about 37.2 MPa
set differential pressure (DLS)) of the {380 kg/cm 2 }. By this operation, the
pump discharge in the LS valve. hydraulic force is increased further.
q By this operation, the start-up time of the
pump discharge is optimized and the com- Operating condition for turning on
Relief pressure
posite operation and fine control perfor- 2-stage relief function
mance is improved. • During travel
• When swing lock switch is turned to 34.8 MPa
the ON position {355 kg/cm2}
• When boom is lowered O
• When power maximizing function is 37.2 MPa
turned on {380 kg/cm2}
• When L mode is operated
2) Cut-off function
q This function increases PC-EPC current
(J) to reduce the flow rate in the relief
state, improving fuel consumption.
Operating condition for turning on cut-off function

When the average value of the front and rear pressure
sensors is above 27.9 MPa {285 kg/cm2} with the power
maximizing function off.
The cut-off function does not work, however, while the
machine is travelling in P mode, swing lock switch is in
the “ON” position.
PC300, 350-8 19
3. Power maximizing and machine push-up function
Function
q The power maximizing function allows the
operator to increase power for a certain time
by operating the left knob switch.
q The machine push-up function allows the oper-
ator to increase the boom pushing force by
operating the machine push-up switch.
20 PC300, 350-8
1) Power maximizing function 2) Machine push-up function

q This function is used to increase digging q The machine push-up function allows the
force for a certain period of time (e.g., operator to increase the boom pushing
when digging up a large rock). force that is required for ditching or mass
q If the left knob switch is pressed in P or E excavation in hard ground by operating
mode, the hydraulic force is increased machine push-up switch (1).
about 7% to increase the digging force.
Each function is set automatically as 2-stage safety valve
Switch
shown below. function
Setting of safety valve at
Function Setting boom cylinder head
OFF
Engine and pump Matching at rated output 14.7 MPa
control point {150 kg/cm2}
34.8 MPa Setting of safety valve at
{355 kg/cm2} boom cylinder head
ON
2-stage relief function O 28.4 MPa
37.2 MPa {290 kg/cm2}
{380 kg/cm2}
Software cut-off function Cancel
q These settings are automatically reset

after 8.5 seconds when the switch is
pressed.
PC300, 350-8 21
4. Auto-deceleration function
Function 7
q The auto-deceleration function automatically

reduces the engine speed to its medium speed
range when the all control levers are set in
NEUTRAL while waiting for a dump truck or
work to reduce the fuel consumption and
noise.
q If any lever is operated, the engine speed
instantly returns to the speed set with the fuel
control dial.
Operation
When control levers are set in neutral
q If all the control levers are kept to NEUTRAL
for 4 sec. during operation at a engine speed
above a decelerator operation level (approxi-
mately 1,300 rpm), this function lowers the
engine speed to the deceleration operation
level (approximately 1,300 rpm) and keeps it
until you operate any lever.
When any control lever is operated
q If you operate any control lever while the
engine speed is kept at the deceleration opera-
tion level, the engine speed instantly rises to
the level set with the fuel control dial.
22 PC300, 350-8
5. Auto-warm-up and overheat prevention function
Function
q The engine automatic warm-up function
increases the engine speed to warm up the
engine if coolant temperature is too low after
the engine starts.
q The overheat prevention function reduces the
pump load when coolant or hydraulic oil tem-
perature is too high during operation to protect
the engine from overheating.
PC300, 350-8 23
1) Auto-warm-up function
q After the engine is started, if the engine coolant temperature is low, the engine speed is raised auto-
matically to warm up the engine.
Operating condition (All) Operated

Coolant temperature: Below 30°C.
Engine speed: Max. 1,200 rpm ⇒ Engine speed: Max. 1,200 rpm
⇓
Resetting condition (Any one) Reset
⇒
Coolant temperature: Above 30°C
Auto
Auto-warm-up operation time: Min. 10 minutes
Engine speed: Any level
Fuel control dial: Kept at 70% of full level for 3
Manual
sec. or longer
2) Overheat prevention function

q If the engine coolant temperature rises too high during work, the pump load and engine speed are
reduced to protect the engine from overheating.
q This function is turned on when the coolant temperature rises above 95°C.
Operating condition Operation/Remedy Resetting condition

Hydraulic oil temperature: Below
Hydraulic oil tempera-
ture: Above 95°C ⇒ Work mode: Travel
Engine speed: Keep as is.
Lower travel speed.
⇒ 95°C
• Under above condition, controller
is set to condition before opera-
tion of function. (Automatic reset)

Hydraulic oil or coolant tempera-
⇒ ⇒
Hydraulic oil or cool- Work mode: P or E mode ture: Below 100°C
ant temperature: Engine speed: Keep as is. • Under above condition, controller
Above 100°C Lower pump discharge. is set to condition before opera-

Work mode: P, E, B or L mode
⇒ ⇒
Hydraulic oil or cool- ture: Below 102°C
Engine speed: Keep as is.
ant temperature: • Under above condition, controller
Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up.
Above 102°C is set to condition before opera-
Lower pump discharge.

ture: Below 105°C
Work mode: Any mode
⇒ ⇒
Hydraulic oil or cool- Fuel control dial: Return to low idle
Engine speed: Low idle
ant temperature: position once.
Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up
Above 105°C • Under above condition, controller
Alarm buzzer: Sounds
is set to condition before opera-
tion of function. (Manual reset)
24 PC300, 350-8
6. Swing control function
Function
The swing lock and swing holding brake function
are provided as a swing control function.
PC300, 350-8 25
1) Swing lock and swing holding brake func- 2) Quick hydraulic oil warm-up function when
tion swing lock switch is turned on
q The swing lock function (manual) is used q If swing lock switch (1) is turned on, the
to lock machine from swinging at any posi- pump cut-off function is cancelled and the
tion. The swing holding brake function relief pressure rises from 34.8 MPa {355
(automatic) is used to prevent hydraulic kg/cm2} to 37.2 MPa {380 kg/cm2}. If the
drift after the machine stops swinging. work equipment is relieved under this con-
q Operation of swing lock switch and swing dition, the hydraulic oil temperature rises
lock/holding brake quickly and the warm-up time can be
shortened.
Lock Lock Func-
Operation
switch lamp tion
If swing lever is set in
neutral, swing brake
Swing operates in about 7 sec.
OFF OFF holding If swing lever is oper-
brake ated, brake is released
and machine can swing
freely.
Swing lock operates and
machine is locked from
swinging.
Swing
ON ON Even if swing lever is
lock
operated, swing lock is
not reset and machine
does not swing.
Swing holding brake release switch

q If the controller, etc. has a problem, the
swing holding brake does not work nor-
mally, and the machine cannot swing, the
swing lock can be reset with the swing
holding brake release switch.
q Even if the swing holding brake release
switch is turned on, if the swing lock
switch is turned on, the swing brake is not
released.
q If the swing lock is reset, only the hydrau-
lic brake is applied by the safety valve.
Note that if swinging is stopped on a
slope, the upper structure may swing by
its gravity.
Swing
holding ON OFF
brake (when controller has (when controller is nor-
release trouble) maly)
switch
Swing lock
ON OFF ON OFF
switch
Swing
Swing lock Swing lock Swing lock
Swing holding
is turned is can- is turned
brake brake is
on. celed. on.
turned on.
26 PC300, 350-8
7. Travel control function
Function
q The machine is provided with a function that
ensures travel performance best fit to the type
of work and jobsite by controlling pumps during
travel or allowing operator to change travel
speed automatically or manually.
PC300, 350-8 27
1) Pump control function during travel 2) Travel speed change function

q If the machine travels in a work mode 1] Manual change with travel speed switch
other than P mode, the work mode and If one of Lo, Mi and Hi is selected with the
the engine speed are kept as they are and travel speed switch, the pump controller
the pump absorption torque is increased. controls the pump capacity and motor
q For details, see "Engine and pump com- capacity at each gear speed as shown
posite control function." below to change the travel speed.
Lo (Low Mi (Midium Hi (High

Travel speed switch
speed) speed) speed)
Pump capacity (%) 90 82 100
Motor capacity Max. Max. Min.
Travel speed (km/h) 3.2 4.5 5.5
2] Automatic change by engine speed

If the fuel control dial is used to set the
engine speed to less than 1,200 rpm, the
travel speed changes to Lo when the
machine is travelling in Mi or Hi, and the
travel speed will not change to Mi or Hi.
3] Automatic change by pump discharge

pressure
When traveling with the travel speed
switch set to Hi or Mi, if the load
increases, such as when travelling uphill,
and the travel pressure goes above 32.3
MPa {330 kg/cm2} for more than 0.5 sec,
the travel motor capacity will automatically
change to low speed (equivalent to Lo).
(The travel speed switch will stay at Hi or
Mi.)
If the load decreases, such as when trav-
elling on level ground or travelling down-
hill, and the travel pressure goes below
18.6 MPa {190 kg/cm2} for more than 0.5
sec, the travel motor capacity will auto-
matically change and will return to Hi or
Mi.
28 PC300, 350-8
8. Attachment flow control and circuit selector function (if equipped)
Function
q This function is available only with the attach-
ment specification.
q The function acts as follows according to the
flow command and working mode from the
monitor.
1) It throttles the attachment PPC pressure
and controls the flow when the pedal is
depressed fully.
2) In B mode and the other modes, it
switches to attachment single acting (B) or
double acting (other modes).
PC300, 350-8 29
9. System component parts

1) PPC oil pressure switch
1. Plug
2. Switch
3. Connector
Specifications
Type of contacts: Normally open contacts
Operating (ON) pressure:
0.5 ± 0.1 MPa {5.0 ± 1.0 kg/cm2}
Resetting (OFF) pressure:
0.3 ± 0.05 MPa {3.0 ± 0.5 kg/cm2}
Function
q The junction block has 6 PPC oil pressure
switches.
q This sensor detects the operating condition of
each actuator by the PPC pressure and trans-
mit it to the pump controller.
30 PC300, 350-8
2) Oil pressure sensor
1. Sensor
2. Connector
Function q The relationship between the pressure applied

q The pump pressure sensor is installed to the to sensors (P) and output voltage (E) is shown
input circuit of the control valve. in the figure below.
q It converts the pump discharge pressure into a
voltage and transmits it to the pump controller.
Operation
q The oil pressure is applied to the diaphragm of
the oil pressure sensor from the pressure
intake part, the diaphragm is deformed.
q The deformation in the diaphragm causes the
resistance of the gauge to change. This
causes a change in the output voltage, which
is transmitted to the amplifier (voltage ampli-
fier).
q The amplifier magnifies output voltage (E) and

transmits it to the pump controller.
PC300, 350-8 31
3) Pump pressure sensor (high pressure)
1. Sensor
2. Connector
Operation
q The relationship between the pressure applied
to sensors (P) and output voltage (E) is shown
in the figure below.
32 PC300, 350-8
4) Pump controller
PC300, 350-8 33
CN-C01
CN-C01 Input/
Input/ Pin No. Signal name
Pin No. Signal name output
output 52 Service switch Input
1 PWR_IN_BATT Input 53 Boom raise pressure switch Input
2 GND_PWR Input 54 NC(*) —
3 Washer motor output 55 Travel switch Input
4 PWR_IN_BATT Input 56 Wiper limit switch Input
5 GND_PWR Input 57 Window limit switch Input
6 NC(*) — 58 Machin select 4 Input
7 NC(*) — 59 NC(*) —
8 NC(*) — 60 Start switch Input
9 PWR_OUT_5V_0 output 61 NC(*) —
10 NC(*) Input 62 NC(*) Input
11 NC(*) — 63 NC(*) —
12 NC(*) — Input/
13 NC(*) — 64 COMM_CAN_L_0
output
14 Boom lower switch Input 65 GND_SIG_A —
15 Arm dump switch Input 66 NC(*) —
16 Swing pressure switch Input 67 NC(*) —
17 Arm curl pilot sensor Input 68 R pump pressure sensor Input
18 GND_SIG_A Input 69 NC(*) —
19 Swing lock switch Input 70 NC(*) —
20 NC(*) — 71 NC(*) Input
21 Machin select 2 Input 72 NC(*) —
22 NC(*) — 73 Bucket curl pilot sensor Input
23 NC(*) — 74 Overload pressure sensor —
24 PWR_CTR_KEY Input 75 Wiper limit switch (P) Input
25 NC(*) — 76 NC(*) —
26 NC(*) — 77 Machin select 3 Input
27 NC(*) — 78 Overload caution enable switch —
28 NC(*) — 79 Start switch (ACC) Input
29 Hydraulic–oil temperature Input 80 NC(*) —
30 NC(*) — 81 GND_SIG_D —
31 NC(*) — *: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
32 NC(*) — occur.
33 NC(*) —
34 Bucket dump pressure switch Input
35 NC(*) —
36 Travel steering switch Input
37 GND_SIG_D —
38 Swing prolix switch Input
39 Machin select 5 Input
40 Machin select 1 Input
41 Knob switch Input
42 NC(*) —
43 PWR_CTR_KEY Input
44 GND_SIG_P Input
Input/
45 COMM_CAN_H_0
output
46 GND_SIG_A Input
47 GND_SIG_A —
48 NC(*) —
49 F pump pressure sensor Input
50 NC(*) —
51 NC(*) —
34 PC300, 350-8
CN-C02
Input/
Pin No. Signal name
output
82 NC(*) —
83 NC(*) —
84 NC(*) —
85 NC(*) —
86 Att circuit change solenoid output
87 Travel speed solenoid output
88 NC(*) output
89 NC(*) —
90 NC(*) —
91 NC(*) —
92 NC(*) —
93 NC(*) —
94 NC(*) —
95 NC(*) output
96 PCQ–EPC (F) output
97 Att flux limit EPC output
98 NC(*) —
99 NC(*) —
100 NC(*) —
101 Swing brake solenoid output
102 NC(*) —
103 NC(*) —
104 NC(*) —
105 NC(*) —
106 NC(*) —
107 NC(*) —
108 Battery relay output
109 2-stage relief solenoid output
110 Travel valve solenoid output
111 NC(*) —
112 Merge-divider solenoid (Main) output
113 NC(*) —
114 Wiper motor (–) output
115 GND_ACT Input
116 Solenoid power supply Input
117 GND_ACT Input
119 Wiper motor (+) output
120 GND_ACT Input
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
occur.
PC300, 350-8 35
Monitor system 1
q The monitor system notifies the operator of

machine status. It monitors the condition of the
machine with sensors installed on various
parts of the machine, processes and immedi-
ately displays the obtained information on the
panel. The information that appears on the
panel is roughly divided as follows.
1. Alarms that are issued when the machine
has troubles
2. Machine status, including coolant temper-
ature, hydraulic oil temperature and fuel
level
q The machine monitor also has various mode
selector switches and functions to operate the
machine control system.
36 PC300, 350-8
Machine monitor 1
Outline
q The machine monitor has the functions to dis-
play various items and the functions to select
modes and electric parts.
q The machine monitor has a CPU (Central Pro-
cessing Unit) in it to process, display, and out-
put the information.
q The monitor display employs an LCD (Liquid
Crystal Display). The switches are flat sheet
switches.
PC300, 350-8 37
Input and output signals CN-CM03

Input/
CN-CM01 Pin No. Signal name
output
Input/ RS232C CD for communica-
Pin No. Signal name 1 Input
output tion terminal
Battery power (+24V con- RS232C RXD for communica-
1 Input 2 Input
stantly) tion terminal
Battery power (+24V con- RS232C SG for communica-
2 Input 3 —
stantly) tion terminal
3 Battery power GND — Signal GND for communication
4 Battery power GND — 4 —
terminal control
Input/ Communication terminal selec-
5 Wake-up 5 Input
Output tion signal
6 Relay output Output RS232C RTS for communica-
6 Output
7 — — tion terminal
8 NC(*) — RS232C TXD for communica-
7 Output
9 Fuel level Input tion terminal
10 NC(*) — RS232C DTR for communica-
8 Output
11 Charge amount Input tion terminal
12 Chassis analog signal GND — RS232C DSR for communica-
9 Input
13 Light switch Input tion terminal
14 Key switch (ACC) Input RS232C CTS for communica-
10 Input
tion terminal
15 Key switch (C) Input
RS232C RI for communication
16 Preheating Input 11 Input
terminal
17 NC(*) —
Power GND for communication
18 NC(*) — 12 —
terminal
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures Input CH1 for communication
will occur. 13 Input
terminal status
Output for communication ter-
14 Output
CN-CM02 minal power control
Input/ Output CH1 for communication
Pin No. Signal name 15 Output
output terminal control
1 NC(*) — Output CH2 for communication
16 Output
2 Engine oil level sensor Input terminal control
3 Coolant level sensor Input Input CH2 for communication
17 Input
4 Air cleaner clogging sensor Input terminal status
5 Swing lock Input Electric power supply for com-
18 Output
6 NC(*) — munication terminal
7 NC(*) —
8 CAN terminating resistance —
Input/ CN-CM04
9 CAN_H
Output Input/
Pin No. Signal name
Input/ output
10 CAN_L
Output 1 NC(*) —
Input/ 2 NC(*) —
11 NC(*)
Output 3 NC(*) —
Input/ 4 NC(*) —
12 NC(*)
Output 5 NC(*) —
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures 6 NC(*) —
will occur. 7 NC(*) —
8 NC(*) —
9 NC(*) —
10 NC(*) —
11 NC(*) —
12 NC(*) —
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures
will occur.
38 PC300, 350-8
CN-CM05
Input/
Pin No. Signal name
output
Electric power supply for cam-
1 Output
era
2 Camera NTSC signal input 1 Input
Electric power supply GND for
5 —
camera
6 Camera signal GND1 —
PC300, 350-8 39
Monitor control, display portion 1
40 PC300, 350-8
1. Hydraulic oil temperature monitor

2. Hydraulic oil temperature gauge
3. Engine coolant temperature monitor
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge
5. KOMTRAX message monitor
6. Air conditioner monitor
7. Wiper monitor
8. Swing lock monitor
9. Engine pre-heating monitor/power maximizing
monitor
10. Time/service meter
11. Auto-deceleration monitor
12. Working mode monitor
13. Travel speed monitor
14. ECO indicator
15. Fuel gauge
16. Fuel level monitor
17. Maintenance interval monitor
18. Engine oil pressure monitor
19. Charge level monitor
20. Radiator coolant level monitor
21. Engine oil level monitor
22. Air cleaner clogging monitor
23. Water separator monitor
Precautions on the machine monitor display

q The liquid crystal display panel may have black
spots (which do not light up) or bright spots
(which stay on).
Products having 10 or less black or bright
spots conform the product specification; such
the condition is quite normal.
q Battery voltage may suddenly drop at engine-
start due to ambient temperature or the condi-
tion of the battery. The machine monitor dis-
play may temporarily disappear if it happens; it
is quite normal.
q Continuous operation of the machine monitor
may display blue bright spots on the screen
having a black background; it is quite normal.
The screen normally displayed on the monitor
has a blue or white background. For this rea-
son, blue spots will not cause any problem
(since the liquid crystal lights up red, blue, and
green spots when displaying white).
PC300, 350-8 41
Monitor items and display
Symbol Display item Display method
Swing holding brake

Swing lock switch Display of symbol
release switch
OFF OFF OFF
Swing lock
ON OFF ON
OFF ON Flashes
ON ON Flashes
Preheater operates at low temperature and

Automatic preheating symbol keeps lighting up for up to about 30
seconds and then goes off after engine starts.
Preheating Time after setting Display of symbol
Manual preheating 0 – 30 sec ON

30 – 40 sec Flashes
After 40 sec OFF
Power Max. switch Display of symbol

Keeps lighting up.
Power Max. While pressed Goes off after about 9 sec. if switch
is kept pressed.
While released Kept turned OFF.
Engine coolant
temperature
Hydraulic oil See gauge display on next page.
temperature
Fuel level
42 PC300, 350-8
The gauge pointer disappears when information on coolant temperature or hydraulic oil temperature cannot
be obtained due to disconnection of CAN.
Temperature or vol-
Gauge Range Indicator Buzzer sound
ume
A1 105 Red Q
A2 102 Red
Engine coolant tem- A3 100 Off
perature
(°C) A4 80 Off
A5 60 Off
A6 30 White
B1 105 Red
B2 102 Red
Hydraulic oil tempera- B3 100 Off
ture
(°C) B4 85 Off
B5 40 Off
B6 20 White
C1 417 Off
C2 347.5 Off
C3 277.5 Off
Fuel level (l)
C4 199 Off
C5 100 Off
C6 62 Red
PC300, 350-8 43
Checks before starting (all symbols light up), when maintenance interval is exceeded.
If the checks before starting or maintenance interval is exceeded items light up, the display of the hydraulic
oil temperature gauge and the hydraulic oil temperature monitor disappear and the following symbols are
displayed.
Check before starting While engine is While engine is

Symbol Display item
item stopped running
Lights up and buzzer

Engine oil pressure q —
sounds when abnormal.
Lights up when
Battery charge q —
abnormal.
Lights up and buzzer Lights up and buzzer

Radiator coolant level q sounds when abnormal. sounds when abnormal.
Lights up when
Engine oil level q abnormal.
—
Lights up when
Air cleaner clogging q —
abnormal.
Lights up when Lights up when

Water separator q abnormal. abnormal.
Notice lamp (yellow)/Warning lamp (red).

Maintenance Lights up for only 30 seconds after starting
switch is turned ON.
Symbols appear in the order in which they occur

from the upper left. When symbols are displayed, if
the hydraulic oil temperature is high or low, only its
symbol is displayed.
Condition of hydraulic oil Color of symbol

Low temperature (below B6 or Black on white back-
equivalent) ground
Normal (B6 – B2) No display
White on red back-
High temperature (above B2)
ground
44 PC300, 350-8
Display
Symbol Display item Display range Display method
category
Green:
Displays state of message
KOMTRAX There is unread message.
(for only machine equipped
message Blue:
with KOMTRAX).
There is unreturned message.
Air conditioner/
ON OFF Displays operating condition.
Heater
Wiper INT ON OFF Displays set condition.
Monitor
Working mode P, E, L, B, ATT Displays set mode.
Lo Mi Hi
Travel speed Displays set speed.
Auto-deceleration ON OFF Displays operating condition.
Displays average work load in

Green:
1 minute on 10 levels.
ECO Work load is light – medium.
ECO indicator (Does not display if ECO
indicator Orange:
display is set OFF in service
Work load is heavy.
menu.)
Displays operating time.

Service Service meter
While service meter is working (Changes to clock if F4 is
meter indicator
depressed.)
Displays time.
12-hour display
Clock Clock (Changes to service meter if
24-hour display F4 is depressed.)
PC300, 350-8 45
Switches 1
1. Buzzer cancel switch Auto-deceleration switch

2. Auto-deceleration switch The auto-deceleration switch toggles the auto-
3. Guidance icon deceleration function on and off. When the working
4. Function switch mode is switched, it is automatically set to ON.
5. Working mode selector switch When it is set to ON, the auto-deceleration monitor
6. Travel speed selector switch appears.
7. Window washer switch a The auto-deceleration function does not work
8. Wiper switch in L mode.
9. Air conditioner control switch
Guidance icon and function switch
Buzzer cancel switch The function switches differ depending on the
Pressing this switch when the alarm buzzer is mak- screen display. Each guidance icon shows the func-
ing sound stops the alarm buzzer. tion of the switch below it.
If a new abnormality is detected, the alarm buzzer Switches with no guidance icon are disabled.
sounds. The functions shown by the guidance icons are as
Depending on the alarm buzzer type, it does not shown in the table below.
stop even if you press the buzzer cancel switch.
46 PC300, 350-8
Symbol Switch Item Function
F6 Enter Enters selected/set item.
F5 Return Returns to previous screen.
F3 Select camera screen Selects camera screen.
F4 Select service meter/clock Selects service meter and clock alternately.
F5 Select maintenance screen Selects maintenance screen.
F6 Select user mode screen Selects user mode screen.
Selects item on left side (Selects right end item after left
F3 Select item
end item).
Selects item on right side (Selects left end item after right
F4 Select item
end item).
Selects item on lower side (Selects top item after bottom
F3 Select item
item)/Resets holding of monitoring.
Selects item on upper side (Selects bottom item after top
F4 Select item
item)/Holds monitoring.
Selects page on lower side (Selects top page after bottom
F1 Select item
page).
Selects page on upper side (Selects bottom page after top
F2 Select item
page).
F1 Display No. 1 camera screen Selects No. 1 camera screen.
Display No. 1 and No. 2

F4 Displays No. 1 and No. 2 camera screens simultaneously.
camera screens
Returns selected item to default setting. (Used for
F2 Return to default setting
adjustment of screen.)
Starts operation. (Used to start measurement of split fuel
F1 Start
consumption on fuel consumption display screen.)
Stops operation. (Used to stop measurement of split fuel
F1 Stop
consumption on fuel consumption display screen.)
F1/F2 Clear Clears selected/displayed item
F1 Set Executes setting.
PC300, 350-8 47
Working mode selector switch Travel speed selector switch

Pressing working mode selector switch (5) switches Each time you press the travel speed selector
among working modes. switch, the travel speed setting switches as shown
Check the working mode on the working mode below.
monitor. Lo o Mi o Hi o Lo ….
The travel speed setting is confirmable on the travel
speed monitor.
The relationship between the speed setting and the
monitor display is shown in the table below.
Display Setting
Crawler symbol + Lo Low speed (default)
Crawler symbol + Mi Medium speed
Crawler symbol + Hi High speed
Window washer switch

About B mode While the switch is being pressed, window washer
q When you try specifying B mode as a working liquid is sprayed out. There is a time delay before
mode, the buzzer sounds for safety's sake and the wiper starts.
the following confirmation message appears.
Wiper switch
Each time you press the wiper switch, the wiper
settings switch as follows.
OFF o INT o ON o OFF o ….
The wiper operation setting is confirmable on the
wiper monitor.
The relationship between the wiper setting and the
monitor display is shown in the table below.
Display Setting Wiper actuation status

Stowing stopped or now
None OFF
stowing
Wiper symbol +
F5 : Returns to the working mode selector screen. INT Intermittent actuation
INT
F6 : Specifies the breaker mode. Wiper symbol +
ON Continuous actuation
ON
q If B mode is specified as a working mode when
you start the monitor, the buzzer sounds and
the following message appears. Air conditioner control switch
To operate the air conditioner, use the air condi-
tioner control switches.
F5 : Starts up in E mode.
F6 : Starts up in B mode.
48 PC300, 350-8
9a : Specifies airflow Camera screen display function 1

9b : Specifies temperature q For an optional-camera-equipped machine,
9c : AUTO pressing the F3 on the normal screen switches
9d : A/C to the camera image.
9e : Switches among air blowing modes q For a machine with no camera equipped, the
9f : Switches between inside air and outside air guidance icon for switching to the camera
9g : OFF screen does not appear; even if you press the
9a to 9c : Enables entered information simulta- switch, the screen does not switch to the cam-
neously with switching to the air condi- era image.
tioner control screen below. q Up to three cameras are mountable.
9d to 9f : Switches to the air conditioner control
screen below. Another pressing switches
among modes.
9g : Turns OFF the air conditioner function without
switching to the air conditioner screen.
F1 : Displays the image of No. 1 camera full-screen.

F4 : Displays the images of No. 1 and No. 2 cam-
eras at the same time.
If you do no operation at least 5 sec. with the air F5 : Returns to the normal screen.
conditioner control screen displayed, the window
returns to the normal window. q Making operation of air conditioner button (1)
a When communication with the air conditioner with the camera screen displayed may switch
is disconnected, or “spurting-out damper”, to the air conditioner operation screen.
“A/M damper”, or “refrigerant” has a problem,
the following screen appears.
PC300, 350-8 49
F6, or no operation for 5 sec.: Returns to the cam-

era screen.
q Even when the camera screen is displayed,

the working mode selector switch, travel speed
selector switch, auto-deceleration switch,
buzzer cancel switch, wiper switch, and win-
dow washer switch are enabled.
q Changing the working mode or travel speed
returns to the normal screen.
q If an abnormality corresponding to an alarm
item with the camera screen displayed, the
alarm monitor appears on the upper left of the
screen. If it appears, return to the normal
screen with F5 to check the alarm display.
q If an abnormality corresponding to an error
item with the camera screen displayed, the
error monitor appears on the upper left of the
screen. If it appears, you must move the
machine to safe posture immediately and
make inspections.
q If you do not operate the lever at least 10 sec.
after the error monitor starts to blink, the
screen switches to the normal screen.
50 PC300, 350-8
Service meter/time selector function 1

q Pressing F4 on the normal screen when the
service meter is displayed in the top center of
the screen switches the display to the time,
and doing so when the time is displayed
switches the display to the service meter.
PC300, 350-8 51
Maintenance function 1
q Pressing F5 on the normal screen switches to
the maintenance screen.
F5 : Cancels the reset to return to the maintenance

table screen.
F6 : Resets the remaining time to return to the nor-
mal screen.
No operation at least 30 sec. : Returns to the nor-
mal screen.
q The table below shows the maintenance items

and replacement intervals. The time remaining
to maintenance is reduced as the machine is
operated.
Replacement interval
No. Item
(Hours)
01 Engine oil 500
02 Engine oil filter 500
03 Fuel main filter 1000
41 Fuel prefilter 500
F1 : Displays the next page.
04 Hydraulic filter 1000
Displays the top page when the last page is
05 Hydraulic tank breather 500
displayed.
06 Corrosion resistor 1000(*)
F2 : Displays the previous page.
07 Damper case oil 1000
Displays the last page when the top page is
displayed. 08 Final case oil 2000
F3 : Selects (highlights) an item one down. 09 Machinery case oil 1000
F4 : Selects (highlights) an item one up. 10 Hydraulic oil 5000
F5 : Returns to the normal screen. *: If equipped (To be determined)
F6 : Switches to the maintenance time reset screen.
No operation at least 30 sec. : Returns to the nor- q The content of the caution display differs
mal screen. according to the remaining time. The relation-
ship is as shown in the table below.
q If the remaining time on the maintenance table
screen is less than 30 hours, the relevant items Display Condition
are highlighted in yellow, and if 0 hours, they Remaining time for mainte-
are done in red. None nance for all items is more
q On the maintenance time reset screen, reset than 30 hours.
the remaining time for the selected item to There is one or more items
Notice display (black sym-
return to the default. with less than 30-hour
bol displayed on yellow
remaining time for mainte-
background)
nance.
There is one or more items
Warning display (white
with less than 0-hour
symbol displayed on red
remaining time for mainte-
background)
nance.
52 PC300, 350-8
q You can lock the maintenance time by a pass-

word to prevent it from carelessly being reset.
q The default password is “000000”.

q Enabling the password lock on an attachment-
equipped machine locks the breaker/attach-
ment setting screen at the same time.
a For information on changing the attachment/
maintenance password, see “Attachment/
maintenance password change function” in the
Testing and adjusting section.
PC300, 350-8 53
User mode 1 F3 : Selects (highlights) an item one down.

q Pressing F6 on the normal screen enters the F4 : Selects (highlights) an item one up.
user mode, switching to the user menu screen. F5 : Cancels changes you made before confirming
q In user mode, you can specify items relating to them with F6 to return to the menu screen.
the machine monitor and machine shown F6 : Moves to the setup items of the selected (high-
below. lighted) item.
Breaker/attachment setting
Message display q Selecting B switches to the breaker setting
Screen adjustment menu, and selecting ATT switches to the
Time adjustment attachment setting menu.
Language setting q You can lock this menu with a password.
Economy mode adjustment Enabling the password lock locks the mainte-
nance reset screen at the same time.
F3 : Selects (highlights) an item one down.

F4 : Selects (highlights) an item one up.
F5 : Returns to the normal screen. Changing breaker mode setting
F6 : Switches to the setting screen for the selected q Selecting B on the breaker/attachment setting
item. screen switches to the breaker setting screen.
No operation at least 30 sec. : Returns to the nor- On this screen, select the breaker setting
mal screen. selection screen or breaker flow rate setting
(In user mode, no switch operation at least 30 sec. screen.
returns to the previous screen.)
Breaker/attachment setting
q For an attachment-equipped machine, this
menu allows you to adjust a flow rate in B
mode and ATT mode.
q For a machine with no attachment, this menu
does not appear.

F5 : Returns to the breaker/attachment setting
screen.
F6 : Switches to the setting screen for the selected
(highlighted) item.
54 PC300, 350-8
1. Breaker setting selection screen. q On the flow rate level setting screen,
q On this screen, you can allocate one of change the set flow rate.
two set flow rates as a flow rate in breaker
mode.
q The B symbol is displayed before items
specified to breaker mode.
a The defaults of both flow rates are 230 l/
min.
F3 : Decreases the flow rate.

F4 : Increases the flow rate.
F5 : Returns to the flow rate setting screen
without changing the flow rate.
after specifying the flow rate.
Flow level Flow rate (l/min) Remarks
F5 : Returns to the breaker setting menu
screen. 15 273
F6 : Specifies the selected (highlighted) item 14 250
as a flow rate in breaker mode. 13 240
12 230 Default
2. Breaker flow rate setting screen
q On this screen, you can specify a flow 11 220
rate. 10 210
q The B symbol is displayed before items 9 200
specified to breaker mode.
8 190
7 180
6 170
5 160
4 150
3 140
2 130
1 120
Changing attachment mode setting

q Selecting ATT on the breaker/attachment set-
F3 : Selects (highlights) an item one down. ting screen switches to the 2-way attachment
F4 : Selects (highlights) an item one up. setting menu. On this screen, select the
F5 : Returns to the breaker setting menu attachment setting screen or breaker flow rate
screen. setting screen.
F6 : Switches to the flow rate level setting
screen for the selected (highlighted) item.
PC300, 350-8 55
F3 : Selects (highlights) an item one down. F3 : Selects (highlights) an item one down.
F4 : Selects (highlights) an item one up. F4 : Selects (highlights) an item one up.
F5 : Returns to the breaker/attachment setting F5 : Returns to the breaker setting menu
screen. screen.
F6 : Switches to the setting screen for the selected F6 : Switches to the flow rate level setting
(highlighted) item. screen for the selected (highlighted) item.
1. Attachment setting selection screen q On the flow rate level setting screen,
q On this screen, you can allocate one of change the set flow rate.
two set flow rates as a flow rate in attach-
ment mode.
q The ATT symbol is displayed before items
specified to attachment mode.
a The defaults of both flow rates are 530 l/
min.
F3 : Decreases the flow rate.

F4 : Increases the flow rate.
without changing the flow rate.
after specifying the flow rate.
F4 : Selects (highlights) an item one up. Flow level Flow (l/min) Remarks
F5 : Returns to the attachment setting menu.
8 530 Default
F6 : Specifies the selected (highlighted) item
as a flow rate in attachment mode. 7 430
q Selecting “No attachment” disables selec- 6 370
tion of attachment mode on the working 5 300
mode selection screen.
4 230
2. Attachment flow rate setting screen 3 165
q On this screen, you can specify a flow 2 100
rate. 1 30
q The ATT symbol is displayed before items
specified to attachment mode.
56 PC300, 350-8
Message display
q For a KOMTRAX-equipped machine, you can
view notification from the sales representative.
When there is a message, the message moni-
tor appears on the upper left of the normal
screen.
q The lighting green monitor indicates that there
are messages to be read.
q The lighting blue monitor appears when you
have not sent replies yet after opening mes-
sages which accept replies.
q Messages will be deleted when their validity

expire or a new message is received.
q When no message has not been received, “No
message” appears at the blue part of the top of
the screen.
q Separately from the message display for users
above, the service menu is provided with mes-
sage display for service.
Screen adjustment
q Selecting the Screen adjustment from the user
q Press F6 to enter user mode and select “Mes- menu and pressing F6 switches to the screen
sage display” and you can view (open) the adjustment screen.
messages. q From this menu, you can adjust the brightness,
contrast, and luminance of the machine moni-
tor screen.
q When the light switch is in Night mode ON, the
night mode screen is adjustable.
q When the light switch is in Daytime mode ON
or OFF, the daytime mode screen is adjust-
able.
F6 : Returns to the user mode screen.
q Under messages that accept replies, “Value to

be entered with 10-key: [ ]” appears.If it
appears, enter the selected item number pro-
vided in the message using the switches of the
machine monitor, and press F6.
q “Do you want to transmit the entered value?” F2 : Returns all adjusted values to the defaults.
appears under the message. Press F6 and the F3 : Decreases the value indicated by the indicator
entered value will be sent. one graduation left.
F4 : Increases the value indicated by the indicator
one graduation right.
F5 : Cancels changes you made before confirming
them with F6 to return to the menu screen.
F6 : Confirms the changes and moves to the next
item.
PC300, 350-8 57
q For a camera-equipped machine, the bright- Clock adjustment

ness, contrast, and illuminance of the camera q Selecting the Clock adjustment from the user
screen are also adjustable. menu and pressing F6 switches to the clock
q For a camera-equipped machine, selecting adjustment screen.
Sc reen adjus tment fro m the us er menu q On this screen, you can change the setting of
switches to the screen for selecting a screen the time displayed on the normal screen.
you want to adjust.
1) Time setting
F3 : Selects (highlights) an item one down. Set the clock time. If the time setting item
F4 : Selects (highlights) an item one up. is not highlighted, press F6 to highlight it.
F5 : Cancels changes you made before confirming
them with F6 to return to the menu screen. The time display part is highlighted.
F6 : Moves to the setup items of the selected (high- F3 : Advances the clock one hour.
lighted) item. F4 : Sets the clock back one hour.
F5 : Cancels changes you made before
q The adjustment methods for the camera confirming them with F6 to return to
screen and normal screen are the same. the user menu.
q The background when adjusting the camera F6 : Confirms the changes and moves to
screen is the No. 1 camera image. minute setting.
The minute display part is highlighted.

F3 : Advances the clock one min.
F4 : Set the clock back one min.
F5 : Cancels changes you made before
confirming them with F6 to return to
the use menu.
F6 : Confirms the changes and moves to
the 12/24 display mode.
2) 12/24 display mode

Specify time display to 12-hour display
(AM/PM) or 24-hour display. If the item of
F3 : Selects (highlights) an item one down. 12/24 display mode is not highlighted,
F4 : Selects (highlights) an item one up. press F6 to highlight it.
F5 : Cancels changes you made before confirming F3 : Moves to the item one right.
them with F6 to return to the menu screen. F4 : Moves to the item one left.
F6 : Moves to the setup items of the selected (high- F5 : Cancels the changes to return to the
lighted) item. user menu.
F6 : Confirms the changes and moves to
summer time.
58 PC300, 350-8
3) Summer time Economy mode adjustment

Selecting ON for this sets the time forward q Selecting the Economy mode adjustment from
one hour. Setting OFF returns to the ordi- the user menu and pressing F6 switches to the
nary time. Economy mode setting screen.
F3 : Moves to the item one right. q From this menu, you can adjust engine output
F4 : Moves to the item one left. to improve fuel consumption in E mode.
F5 : Cancels changes you made before q The fuel consumption level is specified to one
confirming them with F6 to return to of four levels from E0 to E3. The larger the
the user menu screen. value, the better the fuel consumption, but the
F6 : Confirms the changes and moves to smaller the work rate.
the time setting.
a Summer time (daylight saving time) is

a system to lead a life according to
the one-hour advanced time in order
to make efficient use of daylight time.
Language setting
q Selecting the Language from the user menu
screen and pressing F6 switches to the lan-
guage setting screen.
q From this menu, you can change the language
to be displayed on the monitor. Available lan-
guages are as follows.
English, Japanese, Chinese, French, Spanish, F3 : Selects (highlights) an item one down.
Portuguese, Italian, German, Russian, Turkish, F4 : Selects (highlights) an item one up.
Indonesian, and Thai. F5 : Cancels the changes to return to the user menu.
F6 : Cancels the changes to return to the user menu.

PC300, 350-8 59
Idle stop guidance function 1

This function displays guidance to control unneces-
sary fuel consumption. It is displayed only when all
the following conditions are met.
q Energy saving guidance display of the service
menu is specified to ON.
q No operation is made at least 5 min. and the
engine is running at idle.
q No error or caution (excluding low hydraulic oil
temperature) is occurring.
This screen switches to the normal screen if one of

the following conditions occurs.
q When the lever is operated
q When F5 is pressed
q When an error or caution occurs
When you switch to the normal screen by pressing
F5, this screen does not appear even if the engine
continues to run at idle. If the engine continues to
run at least five min. after operating the lever, this
screen appears again.
60 PC300, 350-8
Service meter check function 1 Display LCD check function 1

q If you continuously pressing auto-deceleration q Continuously pressing the buzzer cancel
switch (1) and buzzer cancel switch (2) at the switch (1) and F2 at the same time on the
same time when setting the starting switch to password input screen or normal screen
the OFF position, the service meter will appear causes the entire LCD to light in white.
on the screen in 3 to 5 sec. Release F2 and buzzer cancel switch in order.
If any part of the display is black, the LCD is
broken.
q When these switches are released, the LCD

goes out.
a Continuous operation of the machine monitor q Pressing any function switch returns to the pre-
may display blue bright spots on this screen; it vious screen.
is quite normal.
PC300, 350-8 61
User code/failure code display func-

tion 1
q If there is any problem in machine operation,
the user code and failure code are displayed
on the monitor to advise the operator of the
steps to take.
q These codes appear on the normal screen.
q On the normal screen, user code (1) and fail-
ure code (2) are displayed on the portion for
the hydraulic oil temperature gauge.
q If multiple user codes or failure codes are

issued, they are displayed alternately every 2
sec. The drawing below shows the case two
types of user codes and failure codes are dis-
played.
q If the telephone number has been set in the

service menu, the screen shows the telephone
symbol and telephone number simultaneously
with the user code/failure code. (For informa-
tion on how to input and set the telephone
number, see “Special functions of monitor
panel” in the Testing and adjusting section.)
62 PC300, 350-8
Sensor 1
q The signals from the sensors are input to the
monitor panel directly.
q Either side of a sensor of contact type is
always connected to the chassis ground.
Type of When When
Sensor name
sensor normal abnormal
ON OFF
Hydraulic oil level Contact
(Closed) (Open)
Hydraulic oil Resis-
– –
temperature tance
Resis-
Coolant temperature – –
tance
Resis-
Fuel level – –
tance
OFF ON
Air cleaner clogging Contact
(Closed) (Open)
Hydraulic oil level sensor
1. Connector
2. Bracket
3. Float
4. Switch
PC300, 350-8 63
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor, coolant temperature sensor 1
1. Thermistor 4. Tube
2. Body 5. Wire
3. Tube 6. Connector
Fuel level sensor 1
1. Float 3. Cover
2. Connector 4. Variable resistor
64 PC300, 350-8
Air cleaner clogging sensor 1
PC300, 350-8 65
KOMTRAX terminal system 1
q The KOMTRAX terminal system consists of a

KOMTRAX communication modem, communi-
cation antenna, machine monitor, and GPS
antenna.
q This system transmits various kinds of
machine information wirelessly. Persons to
operate the KOMTRAX can refer to the infor-
mation at office to provide various kinds of ser-
vices for customers.
q Information transmittable from the KOMTRAX
terminal system includes the following.
1. Operation map
2. Service meter
3. Position information
4. Error history
and others.
a To provide the services, you need to make an
arrangement for starting the KOMTRAX ser-
vice separately.
66 PC300, 350-8
KOMTRAX communication modem 1

TH300
1. Communication antenna connection Outline

2. Connector A (14 poles) q The KOMTRAX communication modem is a
3. Connector B (10 poles) wireless communication device to transmit var-
ious kinds of machine information or GPS posi-
tion information the monitor obtains from
n e tw o r k s i gn a l s o r i n pu t s i g n a l s i n t h e
machine. The communication modem can
transmit information via the communication
antenna.
q The modem is provided with a LED lamp as a
display unit. The LED is used for maintenance.
Input and output signals

Connector A Connector B
Input/ Input/
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
output output
A-1 Electric power supply Input B-1 Serial signal DCD Output
A-2 NC(*1) — B-2 Serial signal RXD Output
A-3 NC(*1) — B-3 Serial signal TXD Input
A-4 Electric power supply switching Output B-4 Serial signal DTR Input
A-5 NC(*1) — B-5 Serial signal SGND Input
A-6 NC(*1) — B-6 Serial signal DSR Output
A-7 GND Input B-7 Serial signal RTS (*2) Input
A-8 GND Input B-8 Serial signal CTS (*2) Output
A-9 Modem power control 1 (*2) Input B-9 Serial signal RI (*2) Output
A-10 Modem power control 2 (*2) Input B-10 NC(*1) —
A-11 Modem serial control (*2) Input *1: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures
A-12 Electric field intensity 1 (*2) Output will occur.
A-13 Electric field intensity 2 (*2) Output *2: Signal used by TH200
A-14 NC(*1) —
*1: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
occur.
*2: Signal used by TH200
PC300, 350-8 67
SEN01998-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
68
SEN02624-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
20 Standard value table 1

Standard service value table
Standard value table for engine related parts ................................................................................................. 2
Standard value table for chassis related parts ................................................................................................ 3
PC300, 350-8 1
SEN02624-01 20 Standard value table
Standard value table for engine related parts 1
PC300, 300LC-8
Applicable model
PC350, 350LC-8
Engine SAA6D114E-3
Cate- Standard value Judgement

Item Measurement condition Unit
gory for new machine criteria
High idle rpm 2,050 ± 50 2,050 ± 50
• Coolant temperature:
Engine speed Low idle rpm 1,000 ± 25 1,000 ± 25
operating range
Rated speed rpm 1,950 1,950
• Coolant temperature: Inlet of 147 – 187 120

Intake pressure operating range aftercooler kPa {1,100 – 1,400} {900}
(boost pressure) • Arm IN relief + Power Outlet of {mmHg} 135 – 175 100
Max. aftercooler {1,010 – 1,310} {750}
At sudden
% Max. 25 Max. 35
• Coolant temperature: acceleration
Exhaust gas color
operating range
At high idle % Max. 1.0 Max. 2.0
Intake valve mm 0.305 0.152 – 0.559

Valve clearance • Normal temperature
Exhaust valve mm 0.559 0.381 – 0.813
• Oil temperature: 40 –
Engine
Compression pres- 60°C Compression MPa Min. 2.6 2.1

sure • Engine speed: Min. pressure {kg/cm2} {Min. 26.5} {21.4}
170 rpm
• Coolant temperature: operating range kPa Max. 1.57 2.25
Blow-by pressure
• Arm IN relief + power max. {mmH2O} {Max. 160} {260}
• SAE0W30E0S, kPa 0.34 – 0.59 0.21

SAE5W40E0S, High idle
{kg/cm2} {3.5 – 6.0} {2.1}
SAE10W30DH,
Oil pressure SAE15W40DH,
SAE30DH engine oil
kPa Min. 0.15 0.08
• Coolant temperature: Low idle
operating range {kg/cm2} {Min. 1.5} {0.8}
Oil temperature • Whole speed range (inside oil pan) °C 80 – 110 120
• Between fan pulley and alternator pulley

Fan belt tension • Deflection when pressed with finger force mm Auto-tensioner Auto-tensioner
of approx. 98 N{10 kg}
• Between fan pulley and compressor
Air conditioner com- pulley
mm 5–8 5–8
pressor belt tension • Deflection when pressed with finger force
of approx. 98 N{10 kg}
2 PC300, 350-8
Standard value table for chassis related parts 1
PC300, 300LC-8
Applicable model
PC350, 350LC-8
Cate- Standard value Judgement
gory for new machine criteria
• Engine coolant temperature: Within
operating range
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within
2 pumps at relief rpm 2,030 ± 100 2,030 ± 100
operating range
• Engine at high idle
• Arm IN relief condition
Engine speed
• Engine coolant temperature: Within

operating range
At 2-pump relief + • Hydraulic oil temperature: Within
rpm 1,930 ± 100 1,930 ± 100
power max. operating range
• Arm IN relief + Power max. switch ON
Speed when auto- • Engine at high idle
deceleration is oper- • Auto-deceleration switch in ON condition rpm 1,400 ± 100 1,400 ± 100
ated • All control levers in NEUTRAL condition
Boom control valve
Arm control valve

Spool stroke
• Engine stopped
Bucket control valve • For measuring point, see Control valve. mm 9.5 ± 0.5 9.5 ± 0.5
Swing control valve
Travel control valve
Boom control lever 85 ± 10 85 ± 10

Travel of control levers
Arm control lever 85 ± 10 85 ± 10
Bucket control lever • Engine stopped 85 ± 10 85 ± 10

• Control lever grip at center
mm
• Max. reading up to stroke end (except
Swing control lever 85 ± 10 85 ± 10
lever play in NEUTRAL position)
Travel control lever 115 ± 12 115 ± 12
Play of control lever Max. 10 Max. 15
N 15.7 ± 3.9 Max. 24.5

Boom control lever
Operating force of control levers
{kg} {1.6 ± 0.4} {Max. 2.5}

N 15.7 ± 3.9 Max. 24.5
Arm control lever
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within {kg} {1.6 ± 0.4} {Max. 2.5}
operating range N 12.7 ± 2.9 Max. 21.6
and pedal
Bucket control lever

• Engine at high idle {kg} {1.3 ± 0.3} {Max. 2.2}
• Control lever grip at center N 12.7 ± 2.9 Max. 21.6
Swing control lever • Pedal at tip {kg} {1.3 ± 0.3} {Max. 2.2}
• Max. reading up to stroke end N 24.5 ± 5.9 Max. 39.2
Travel control lever
{kg} {2.5 ± 0.6} {Max. 4.0}
N 74.5 ± 18.6 Max. 107.6
Travel control pedal
{kg} {7.6 ± 1.9} {Max. 11}
PC300, 350-8 3
PC300, 300LC-8
Applicable model
PC350, 350LC-8
Cate- Standard value for Judgement
gory new machine criteria
operating range
Unload pres- • Engine at high idle MPa 3.9 ± 1.0 3.9 ± 1.0
sure • Working mode: P mode {kg/cm2} {40 ± 10} {40 ± 10}
• Hydraulic pump output pressure with all
control levers in NEUTRAL position
34.81(+1.47/–0.98) 33.34 – 37.23
{355(+15/–10)} {340 – 375}
Raise
*37.26(+1.47/–0.98) *35.80 – 39.23
{380(+15/–10)} {365 – 400}
Boom relief
Lower (at low 18.13 ± 0.98 16.66 – 19.6
pressure setting) {185 ± 10} {170 – 200}
Lower (at high 31.36 ± 1.47 29.4 – 33.32
pressure setting) MPa {320 ± 15} {300 – 340}
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within {kg/cm2} 34.81(+1.47/–0.98) 33.34 – 37.23
Arm relief
operating range {355(+15/–10)} {340 – 375}
• Engine at high idle *37.26(+1.47/–0.98) *35.80 – 39.23
Bucket relief • Working mode: P mode
Hydraulic pressure
{380(+15/–10)} {365 – 400}

• Hydraulic pump output pressure with all
30.87(+1.47/–2.45) 28.42 – 32.85
Swing relief measurement circuits relieved
{315(+15/–25)} {285 – 335}
• Values marked *:
Hydraulic oil pressure with power max. 37.27(+2.94/–0.98) 35.80 – 40.70
Travel relief
switch in ON (reference only) {380(+30/–10)} {365 – 415}
operating range
Control circuit
• Engine at high idle MPa 3.23 ± 0.2 2.84 – 3.43
source pres-
• Self pressure reducing valve output {kg/cm2} {33 ± 2} {29 – 35}
sure
pressure with all control levers in
NEUTRAL position
• Hydraulic oil When all control
temperature: Within MPa 3.9 ± 1.0 3.9 ± 1.0
levers in NEU-
operating range {kg/cm2} {40 ± 10} {40 ± 10}
TRAL position
LS differential • Engine at high idle
pressure • Working mode: P mode
• Traveling speed: Hi When traveling MPa 2.45 ± 0.1 2.45 ± 0.1
• Hydraulic oil pump at half stroke {kg/cm2} {25 ± 1} {25 ± 1}
pressure – LS pressure
PPC valve out- operating range MPa 2.9(+0.6/–0.2) 2.9(+0.6/–0.2)
put pressure • Engine at high idle {kg/cm2} {30(+5.5/–1.5)} {30(+5.5/–1.5)}
• Control lever in full stroke
4 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 300LC-8
Applicable model
PC350, 350LC-8
operating range
• Engine running at high idle
Swing brake deg. PC300: Max. 110 PC300: Max. 140
• Working mode: P mode
angle (mm) PC350: Max. 120 PC350: Max. 150
• Swing circle misalignment amount when
stopping after one turn
• For measuring posture, see Swing 1
• Hydraulic oil temperature: 90° sec. 3.3 ± 0.4 Max. 4.2

Within operating range
Time taken to
• Time required for passing
start swing
points 90° and 180° from
starting point
• For measuring posture, see
Swing 1 180° sec. 4.7 ± 0.5 Max. 5.7
Swing

operating range
Time taken to
• Working mode: P mode sec. 31.6 ± 2.9 Max. 38
swing
• Time required for 5 more turns after
making initial one turn
operating range
• Engine stopped
• Keeping upper structure transverse on
Hydraulic drift slope of 15°
mm 0 0
of swing • Notching a mating mark on inner and
outer races of swing circle
• Mating mark misalignment amount during
5 minutes
operating range
Leakage from • Engine running at high idle
l/min Max. 5.5 Max. 11
swing motor • Swing lock switch: ON
• Leakage amount for one minute during
swing relief
PC300, 350-8 5
PC300, 300LC-8
Applicable model
PC350, 350LC-8
• Hydraulic oil temperature: STD: 55.0 ± 11.0 STD: 42.0 – 70.0
Within operating range Lo
LC: 58.0 ± 11.5 LC: 45.0 – 74.5
Travel speed STD: 39.0 ± 5.5 STD: 31.5 – 48.5
• Time required for track shoes Mi sec.
(without load) LC: 41.5 ± 6.0 LC: 34.0 – 51.5
to make 5 turns after making
one initial idle turn
• For measuring posture, see STD: 32.0 ± 2.0 STD: 28.0 – 39.0
Hi
Travel 1 LC: 34.0 ± 2.0 LC: 32.0 – 41.5
• Hydraulic oil temperature:

Within operating range Lo 23.3 ± 4.4 18.9 – 31.0
Travel speed
• Flat ground Mi sec. 16.7 ± 2.2 14.4 – 21.0
(actual run)
• Time required for traveling 20
m after 10 m trial run
• For measuring posture, see Hi 13.1 ± 0.7 12.1 – 15.1
Travel 2
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operating
Travel
range
Travel devia-
• Travel speed: Lo mm Max. 200 Max. 300
tion
• Solid and flat ground
• Swerving amount while traveling 20 m (X)
after initial 10 m trial run
• For measuring posture, see Travel 2 and 3
range
• Engine stopped
Hydraulic drift
• Parking machine on slope of 12° with mm 0 0
of travel
sprocket facing upslope
• Sliding distance for 5 minutes
• For measuring posture, see Travel 4
range
Leakage of • Engine at high idle
l/min Max. 15 Max. 30
travel motor • Traveling with sprocket locked
• Oil leakage amount for one minute with
traveling in relief condition
6 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 300LC-8
Applicable model
PC350, 350LC-8
Whole work operating range PC300: Max. 450 PC300: Max. 675
equipment • Flat and level ground PC350: Max. 550 PC350: Max. 825
• Bucket load: 2,160 kg
• Engine stopped
Hydraulic drift of work equipment
• Work equipment control lever in

NEUTRAL position PC300: Max. 25 PC300: Max. 38
Boom cylinder • Fall amount for 15 minutes as
PC350: Max. 30 PC350: Max. 45
measured every 5 minutes starting
immediately after initial setting
mm
• Whole work equipment: Lowering
distance of tooth tip
• Boom cylinder: Retraction distance of PC300: Max. 135 PC300: Max. 203
Arm cylinder
cylinder PC350: Max. 165 PC350: Max. 248
• Arm cylinder: Extraction distance of
cylinder
• Bucket cylinder: Retraction distance
of cylinder PC300: Max. 20 PC300: Max. 30
Bucket cylinder
• For measuring posture, see Work PC350: Max. 25 PC350: Max. 38
equipment 1
Work equipment
Within operating range PC300: 3.7 ± 0.4 PC300: Max.4.5

RAISE
• Engine running at high idle PC350: 3.8 ± 0.4 PC350: Max.4.6
Boom • Time required from raise sec.
stroke end till bucket PC300:
touches ground 2.9(+0.4/–0.1)
LOWER Max. 3.0
• For measuring posture, see PC350:
Work equipment 2 2.8(+0.4/–0.1)
Work equipment speed

IN 3.8 ± 0.4 Max. 4.5
Arm • Time required from sec.
dumping stroke end to
digging stroke end PC300: 2.9 ± 0.3 PC300: Max. 3.5
OUT
• For measuring posture, see PC350: 3.1 ± 0.4 PC350: Max. 3.7
Work equipment 3
CURL 3.2 ± 0.3 Max. 3.8
Bucket • Time required from sec.
dumping stroke end to
digging stroke end DUMP 2.3 ± 0.3 Max. 2.9
• For measuring posture, see
Work equipment 4
PC300, 350-8 7
PC300, 300LC-8
Applicable model
PC350, 350LC-8
operating range
• Engine at low idle
Boom • Time required from raise stroke end sec. Max. 3.0 Max. 3.6
till bucket touches ground and
pushes up machine front
• For measuring posture, see Work
equipment 5
operating range
Time lag
• Time required from dumping stroke PC300: Max. 3.0 PC300: Max. 3.6
Arm sec.
end till bucket stops momentarily PC350: Max. 4.0 PC350: Max. 4.6
after control lever is tilted to digging
Work equipment
and starts to move again

equipment 6
operating range
• Time required from dumping stroke
Bucket sec. Max. 3.0 Max. 5.0
end till bucket stops momentarily
after control lever is tilted to digging
and starts to move again
equipment 7

Internal leakage
Cylinders operating range 4.5 20

• Working mode: P mode cc/min
• Leakage amount for one minute
Center swivel with cylinder or travel to be 10 50
joint measured in relief condition

operating range
compound operation

Performance in

Swerving amount in
• Traveling speed: Lo
simultaneous opera-
• On hard and flat ground, make mm Max. 400 Max. 440
tion of work equip-
approach run of 10 m and then
ment and travel
measure deviation (X) in the travel
of 20 m
• For measuring posture, see Travel
2 and 3
Discharge amount of See performance of hydraulic pump See performance of hydraulic pump
— l/min
hydraulic pump (next page) (next page)
8 PC300, 350-8
Discharge amount of hydraulic pump (P mode)
q Pump speed: At 1,950 rpm, PC current 280 mA
Test pump Discharge Standard value Judgement

Average
discharge pressure of for discharge standard lower
Check point pressure
pressure other pump amount Q limit Q
(MPa {kg/cm2}) (MPa {kg/cm2}) (MPa {kg/cm2}) (l/min) (l/min)
As desired P1 P2 P1+P2 See graph See graph

2
a As far as possible, bring pump discharge pressure P1 and P2 as close as possible to the average pres-
sure when measuring.
The error is large near the point where the graph curves, so avoid measuring at this point.
a When measuring with the pump mounted on the machine, if it is impossible to set the engine speed to
the specified speed with the fuel control dial, take the pump discharge amount and the engine speed at
the point of measurement, and use them as a base for calculating the pump discharge amount at the
specified speed.
PC300, 350-8 9
For all models (Posture of machine for measuring performance and measurement procedure)
Contorol valve: Spool stroke Travel 1: Travel speed (without load)
Swing 1: Swing brake angle, time taken to start Travel 2: Travel speed (actual run), travel deviation
swing, time taken to swing
Swing 2: Hydraulic drift of swing Travel 3: Travel deviation
10 PC300, 350-8
Travel 4: Hydraulic drift of travel Work equipment 3: Arm speed
Work equipment 1: Hydraulic drift of work Work equipment 4: Bucket speed

equipment
Work equipment 2: Boom speed Work equipment 5: Boom time lag
PC300, 350-8 11
Work equipment 6: Arm time lag
Work equipment 7: Bucket time lag
12 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 13
SEN02624-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
14
SEN02625-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
30 Testing and adjusting 1

Testing and adjusting, Part 1
Tools for testing, adjusting and troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 3
Testing engine speed ...................................................................................................................................... 7
Testing air boost pressure............................................................................................................................... 8
Testing exhaust gas color ............................................................................................................................... 9
Adjusting valve clearance ..............................................................................................................................11
Testing compression pressure ...................................................................................................................... 13
Testing blow-by pressure .............................................................................................................................. 17
Testing engine oil pressure ........................................................................................................................... 18
Testing fuel pressure..................................................................................................................................... 19
Handling during cylinder cut-out operation ................................................................................................... 23
Handling during no injection cranking operation ........................................................................................... 23
Testing fuel return rate and leakage.............................................................................................................. 24
Bleeding air from fuel circuit.......................................................................................................................... 26
Checking fuel circuit for leakage ................................................................................................................... 27
Testing and adjusting air compressor belt tension ........................................................................................ 28
Replacing fan belt ......................................................................................................................................... 29
PC300, 350-8 1
SEN02625-01 30 Testing and adjusting
Replacing alternator belt ............................................................................................................................... 30

Testing clearance in swing circle bearings .................................................................................................... 31
Testing and adjusting track shoe tension ...................................................................................................... 32
Testing and adjusting oil pressure in work equipment, swing and travel circuit ............................................ 33
Testing and adjusting control circuit oil pressure........................................................................................... 37
Testing and adjusting pump PC control circuit oil pressure........................................................................... 38
Testing and adjusting pump LS control circuit oil pressure ........................................................................... 41
Testing solenoid valve output pressure ......................................................................................................... 46
Testing PPC valve output pressure ............................................................................................................... 50
Adjusting play of work equipment and swing PPC valves............................................................................. 51
Inspecting locations of hydraulic drift of work equipment.............................................................................. 52
Releasing remaining pressure in hydraulic circuit......................................................................................... 54
Testing oil leakage amount............................................................................................................................ 54
Bleeding air from various parts ..................................................................................................................... 57
Diode inspection procedures......................................................................................................................... 59
2 PC300, 350-8
Tools for testing, adjusting and troubleshooting 1

Sym-
Testing and adjusting item Part No. Part name Q'ty Remarks
bol
Intake air pressure 1 799-201-2202 Boost gauge kit 1 –101 – 200 kPa
A
(boost pressure) 2 799-401-2220 Hose 1 {–760 – 1,500 mmHg}
1 799-201-9001 Handy smoke checker 1 Degree of contamination 0 to 70%
(with the standard color)
Checking exhaust gas color B Commercially
2 Smoke meter 1 (Degree of contamination x 1/10 C
available Bosch index)
1 795-799-1131 Gear 1
Adjusting valve clearance C Commercially
2 Clearance gauge 1
available
1 795-799-6700 Puller 1
Testing compression pres- 2 795-502-1590 Compression gauge 1 0 – 7.0 MPa {0 – 70 kg/cm2}
D
sure 3 795-790-6110 Adapter 1
4 6754-11-3130 Gasket 1
0 – 5.0 kPa
1 799-201-1504 Blow-by checker 1
Testing blow-by pressure E {0 – 500mm H2O}
2 795-790-3300 Tool (nozzle) 1
Pressure gauge:
799-101-5002 Hydraulic tester 1 2.5, 6.0, 40, 60 MPa
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Pressure gauge:
799-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester 1
Testing engine oil pressure F 60 MPa {600 kg/cm2}
Pressure gauge:
2 799-401-2320 Gauge 1
1.0 MPa {10 kg/cm2}
6732-81-3170 Adapter 1 Size: 10 x 1.0 mm
3
6215-81-9710 O-ring 1
Pressure gauge:
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Pressure gauge:
60 MPa {600 kg/cm2}
6732-81-3170 Adapter 1 Size: 10 x 1.0 mm
2
Testing fuel pressure G 6215-81-9710 O-ring 1
Pressure gauge:
3 799-401-2320 Gauge 1
1.0 MPa {10 kg/cm2}
795-790-1500 1 Male: 7/8 – 14UNF

Female: 7/8 – 14UNF
4 Fuel vacuum gauge
Male: 3/4 – 16UNF
799-201-1201 1
Female: 3/4 – 16UNF
1 795-790-4800 Hose kit 1
Testing fuel return rate 2 795-790-6700 Adapter 1
H
and leakage Commercially
3 Measuring cylinder 1
available
Testing swing circle Commercially
J Dial gauge 1
bearing clearance available
PC300, 350-8 3
Sym-
bol
Pressure gauge:
Oil pressure in work equip- 799-101-5002 Hydraulic tester 1 2.5, 6.0, 40, 60 MPa
ment, swing and travel cir- 1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
cuits, basic pressure of Pressure gauge:
L 790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester 1
control circuit and oil pres-
60 MPa {600 kg/cm2}
sure of pump PC control cir-
cuit 799-101-5220 Nipple 1 Size: 10 x 1.0 mm
2
07002-11023 O-ring 1
Pressure gauge:
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Pressure gauge:
Oil pressure of pump LS 799-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester 1
M 60 MPa {600 kg/cm2}
control circuit
799-101-5220 Nipple 1 Size: 10 x 1.25 mm
2
07002-11023 O-ring 1
Differential pressure
3 799-401-1340 1
gauge
Pressure gauge:
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Pressure gauge:
Testing solenoid valve 60 MPa {600 kg/cm2}
N
output pressure
799-401-3100 Adapter 1 Size: 02
2
02896-11008 O-ring 1
799-401-3200 Adapter 1 Size: 03
3
02896-11009 O-ring 1
Pressure gauge:
PPC valve output pressure P {25, 60, 400, 600kg/cm2}
Pressure gauge:
60 MPa {600 kg/cm2}
Oil leakage in work equip- Commercially
Q Measuring cylinder 1
ment cylinder available
799-601-4100
or T-adapter assembly 1
799-601-4200
799-601-4130 • T-adapter 1 Ne sensor
799-601-4150 • T-adapter 1 For oil pressure sensor
Troubleshooting for 799-601-4211 • T-adapter 1 Engine controller
engine controller/sensors/ R 799-601-4220 • T-adapter 1 Engine controller
actuators
799-601-4240 • Socket 1 For ambient pressure sensor
799-601-4250 • Socket 1 For boost pressure sensor
799-601-4260 • T-adapter 1 Engine controller
799-601-9420 • T-adapter 1 For injector
799-601-9430 • Socket 1 For supply pump PCV
4 PC300, 350-8
Sym-
bol
799-601-2500
or
799-601-2700
or
799-601-2800
or
799-601-2900 T-adapter assembly 1
or
799-601-7100
or
799-601-7400
or
799-601-8000
799-601-2600 • T-adapter box 1 For Econo
799-601-2740 • MIC adapter 1 For MIC-5P
799-601-4100
or
799-601-4200
or T-adapter assembly 1
799-601-9000
or
799-601-9200
799-601-9020 • Adapter for DT 1 For DT2P
799-601-9030 • Adapter for DT 1 For DT3P
799-601-7000
or
799-601-7100
Troubleshooting for chassis or T-adapter assembly 1
S
sensors/wiring harnesses 799-601-7400
or
799-601-8000
799-601-7010 • Adapter for X 1
799-601-7020 • Adapter for X 1 For X2P
799-601-7040 • Adapter for X 1 For X4P
For SW6P (Does not include 799-
799-601-7050 • Adapter for SWP 1
601-8000)
601-8000)
601-8000)
For M1P (Does not include 799-
799-601-7080 • Adapter for M 1
601-7000 and 799-601-7100)
799-601-7090 • Adapter for M 1 For M2P
799-601-7140 • Adapter for S 1 For S8P
799-601-7210 • Adapter for AMP040 1 For A16P
799-601-7220 • Adapter for AMP040 1 For A20P
799-601-7320 • Adapter for SWP 1 For SW16P
PC300, 350-8 5
Sym-
bol
799-601-7360 • Adapter for relay 1 For REL-5P
799-601-7370 • Adapter for relay 1 For REL-6P
799-601-7500 T-adapter assembly 1
799-601-7520 • Adapter for 070 1 For 070-12P
Troubleshooting for chassis 799-601-9000
S
sensors/wiring harnesses or T-adapter assembly 1
799-601-9200
799-601-9030 • Adapter for DT 1
799-601-9110 • Adapter for DT(GR) 1 For DT12PGR
799-601-9350 • Adapter for DRC 1 For DRC-40
799-601-9360 • Adapter for DRC 1 For DRC-24
Water and oil temperature — 799-101-1502 Digital thermometer 1 –99.9 – 1,299°C
Operating effort and 79A-264-0021 Push-pull scale 1 0 – 294 N {0 – 30 kg}
—
depressing force 79A-264-0091 Push-pull scale 1 0 – 490 N {0 – 50 kg}
Commercially
Stroke and hydraulic drift — Ruler 1
available
Commercially
Work equipment speed — Stopwatch 1
available
Voltage and resistance Commercially
— Circuit tester 1
value available
6 PC300, 350-8
Testing engine speed 1 3. Measuring high idle speed

1) Start the engine and set the fuel control
a Measure the engine speed with the monitoring dial to the high idle (MAX) position.
function of the machine monitor. 2) Set the working mode in the power mode
a Measure the engine speed under the following (P) and turn the auto-decelerator OFF.
condition. 3) Set all the control levers and pedals for
q Engine coolant temperature: Within oper- work equipment, swing and travel to the
ating range neutral and measure the engine speed.
q Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operat-
ing range 4. Measuring the engine speed when 2-pumps
are relieved
1. Preparation work 1) Start the engine and move the arm cylin-
Operate the machine monitor so that the der to the IN stroke end.
engine speed can be monitored. 2) Set the fuel control dial in the high idle
a For the operating method of the machine (MAX) position and set the working mode
monitor, see “Special functions of machine in the power mode (P).
monitor”. 3) Operate the left work equipment control
a Monitoring code: 01002 Engine speed lever to relieve the arm circuit at the IN
stroke end and measure the engine
speed.
5. Measuring the engine speed when 2-pumps

relief and power maximizing (near rated
speed)
1) Start the engine and move the arm cylin-
der to the IN stroke end.
2) Set the fuel control dial in the high idle
(MAX) position and set the working mode
in the power mode (P).
3) While operating the left work equipment
control lever to relieve the arm at the IN
stroke end and depressing the power
2. Measuring low idle speed maximizing switch, measure the engine
1) Start the engine and set the fuel control speed.
dial to the low idle (MIN) position. a The power maximizing function is
2) Set all the control levers and pedals for reset automatically in about 8.5 sec-
work equipment, swing and travel to the onds even if the switch is being
neutral and measure the engine speed. depressed. Thus measurement of the
engine speed must be completed
within that period.
6. Measuring the speed when auto-decelera-

tion speed is in operation
1) Start the engine, set the fuel control dial in
the high idle position (MAX), and turn the
auto-decelerator ON.
2) Set all the control levers and pedals for
work equipment, swing and travel to neu-
tral and measure the engine speed when
the auto-decelerator is operated.
a The engine speed is slowed down to
a certain level in about 5 seconds
from setting all the control levers and
pedals to the neutral. This level is the
engine speed when operation of the
auto-deceleration is turned on.
PC300, 350-8 7
Testing air boost pressure 1 5. Run the engine at middle or higher speed and
drain oil from the hose.
a Air boost pressure measuring tools a When draining the oil, open the self seal of
the hose by insert approximately half of
Symbol Part No. Part name the gauge and hose connection. Repeat
A 1 799-201-2202 Boost gauge kit operation until the oil is drained out.
a If Pm kit (A) is available, you may use the
1. Open the engine hood. air bleeding coupling (790-261-1130) in
that kit.
2. Remove intake air pressure pickup plug (1) (R a If oil is left in the hose, the gauge does not
1/8). work. Accordingly, be sure to drain the oil.
6. Measure the air boost pressure at high idle

under the following conditions.
q Working mode: P-mode
q Swing lock switch: ON (high pressure
relief)
q Work equipment, swing and travel: Arm IN
relief position
3. Install nipple [1] of boost gauge kit A and con-

nect them to gauge [3].
7. Remove the measurement tools after the mea-

surement, and make sure that the machine is
back to normal condition.
4. Start the engine and keep it running until tem-

perature of the engine coolant and hydraulic oil
rise to the operating range.
8 PC300, 350-8
Testing exhaust gas color 1 2. Measuring with smoke meter B2

1) Insert probe [1] of smoke meter B2 to the
a Exhaust gas color measurement tools outlet of the exhaust pipe and fix it to the
Symbol Part No. Part name exhaust pipe with a clip.
1 799-201-9001 Handy smoke checker
B Commercially
2 Smoke meter
available
k Be careful not to touch any hot part when

removing or in stalling the measuring
instruments.
a If an air source and an electric power source
are not available in the field, use handy smoke
checker B1. When recording official data, use
smoke meter B2.
1. Measuring with handy smoke checker B1

1) Fit a sheet of filter paper to smoke checker
B1. 2) Connect the probe hose, receptacle of the
2) Insert the exhaust gas intake pipe into the accelerator switch and air hose to smoke
exhaust pipe. meter B2.
3) Start the engine and keep it running until a Limit the supplied air pressure to 1.5
the engine coolant temperature rises to MPa {15 kg/cm2}.
the operating range. 3) Connect the power cable to an AC recep-
4) Start the engine and accelerate it suddenly tacle.
or run it at high idle and then operate the a Confirm that the smoke meter power
handle of smoke checker B1 in order to switch is in the OFF position, before
suction exhaust gas to the filter paper. connecting the power cable to an out-
let.
4) Loosen the cap nut of the suction pump
and fit in the filter paper.
a Fit in the filter paper securely so that
the exhaust gas may not leak.
5) Turn on the power switch of smoke meter
B2.
5) Take out the filtering paper and compare it

with the attached scale for judgement.
6) Remove the measurement tool after the
measurement, and make sure that the
machine is back to normal condition.
6) Start the engine and keep it running until

the engine coolant temperature rises to
the operating range.
PC300, 350-8 9
7) Start the engine and accelerate it sud-

denly or run it at high idle and then
depress the accelerator pedal of smoke
meter B2 to collect the exhaust gas into
the filter paper.
8) Put the polluted filtering paper on non-pol-
luted filtering paper (more than 10 sheets)
in the filtering paper holder, and read the
indicated value.
9) Remove the measurement tools after the
10 PC300, 350-8
Adjusting valve clearance 1 4. Remove cap (6), set gear C1 and rotate the
crank shaft forward to set No.1 cylinder to the
a Valve clearance adjustment tools compression top dead center.
Symbol Part No. Part name
1 795-799-1131 Gear
C Commercially
2 Clearance gauge
available
1. Remove air intake tube (1).
2. Disconnect blow-by tube (2) and breather tube

(3) and remove cylinder head cover (4).
a Aligning TDC stamp line (a) of gear cover

(7) and supply pump gear stamp line (b),
set No.1 cylinder to the compression top
dead center.
3. Remove cap (5).
5. After setting No.1 cylinder to the compression

top dead center, apply counter mark C to the
damper and then install pointer [1] of the mag-
net base.
PC300, 350-8 11
6. Adjust the valve clearance in the following pro- 4) Turn the crankshaft forward by 360° and
cedure. align the counter mark applied in step 5
a When No.1 cylinder is at the compression above accurately to the pointer.
top dead center, adjust the valve clear- a This alignment moves the supply
ance indicated with q mark in the valve pump gear stamp line (b) to the posi-
arrangement drawing. tion of stamp line (c) situated directly
below.
5) Adjust the valve clearance indicated with
Q mark in the above valve arrangement
drawing.
a Firing order: 1 – 5 – 3 – 6 – 2 – 4
a The adjustment procedure is the
same as that employed for adjust-
ment of q mark.
1) Insert clearance gauge C2 to the clear-

ance between rocker lever (8) and cross
head (9).
2) Loosen locknut (10) and adjust the valve
clearance using adjustment screw (11).
a With the clearance gauge being
inserted, turn the adjustment screw
until it allows clearance gauge C2 to
move slightly.
7. After finishing adjustment, return the removed
3) Fix adjustment screw (11) and tighten
parts.
3 Cylinder head cover mounting bolt:
locknut (10).
3 Locknut:
11.8 ± 1.96 Nm {1.2 ± 0.2 kgm}
24 ± 4 Nm {2.45 ± 0.41 kgm}
a After tightening the locknut, check the
valve clearance again.
12 PC300, 350-8
Testing compression pressure 1 5. Move fuel filter and corrosion resistor assem-
bly (8) to the control valve side along with the
a Testing tools for compression pressure hose being connected to it.
1 795-799-6700 Puller
2 795-502-1590 Compression gauge
D
3 795-790-6110 Adapter
4 6754-11-3130 Gasket
k Care must be exercised in measuring the

compression pressure in order to avoid
burn injury from touching the exhaust man-
ifold or muffler, or pinching by rotating part.
a Measure the compression pressure after the
engine is warmed up.
(Engine oil temperature: 40 – 60°C).
1. Open the engine hood. 6. Remove bracket (9).
2. Remove air intake connector (1).
3. Disconnect harness (2) and remove bracket

(3) and air heater (4).
7. Disconnect air intake connector (10) and wiring

harness connectors (11) and (12).
8. Remove blow-by hose (13) and breather hose

(14) to remove cylinder head cover (15).
4. Disconnect wiring harness connectors (5), (6)
and (7).
PC300, 350-8 13
9. Disconnect high-pressure fuel tube (16).
10. Loosen injector terminal nuts (17) and remove

the terminal from the injector.
11. Move the cylinder to be tested to the compres-

sion top dead center.
a For the adjustment, refer to the section,
“Adjusting valve clearance”.
12. Remove rocker arm assemblies (18).
16. Install gasket D4 to the tip of adapter D3 and

connect it to the injector mount.
13. Remove retainer (19) and remove fuel inlet

connector (20).
14. Remove holder (21).
15. Remove injector (22).

a Remove the injector by use of impacts of 17. Fix adapter D3 with the injector holder.
the tool, slide hammer D1. 3 Holder mounting bolt:
a Do not unclench the upper part of the
injector. 1st time: 9.8 ± 2.0 Nm {1.0 ± 0.2 kgm}
2nd time: 40.2 ± 3.9 Nm {4.1 ± 0.4 kgm}
14 PC300, 350-8
18. Connect compression gauge D2 to adapter

D3.
a Apply a little amount of engine oil to the
connecting parts of the adapter and gauge
so that air will not leak easily.
19. Install rocker arm assembly.

3 Rocker arm assembly mounting bolt:
64.7 ± 4.9 Nm {6.6 ± 0.5 kgm}
20. Adjust the valve clearance.

a For the adjustment, refer to the section,
“Adjusting valve clearance”.
2) Tighten the injector holder mounting bolt

by 3 or 4 threads.
3) Set fuel inlet connector (20).
a Press it in until you feel the O-ring
clicks in.
a Install it in place temporarily using
retainer (19).
3 Retainer:
14.7 ± 5.0 Nm {1.5 ± 0.51 kgm}
4) Tighten the injector holder mounting bolt.
3 Holder mounting bolt:
1st time:
9.8 ± 2.0 Nm {1.0 ± 0.2 kgm}
21. Select the no-injection cranking operation from
2nd time:
the machine monitor.
40.2 ± 3.9 Nm {4.1 ± 0.4 kgm}
a See the section of “Special functions of
5) Tighten retainer (19) of the fuel inlet con-
machine monitor”.
k Be sure to select the no-injection
nector.
3 Retainer:
cranking operation. Otherwise, the
40.2 ± 3.9 Nm {4.1 ± 0.4 kgm}
en g i n e c a n b e s ta r t e d d u ri n g t h e
inspection, potentially inducing risks
to the inspecting personnel.
22. Rotate the engine with cranking the starting

motor and measure the compression pressure.
a Read the pressure gauge pointer when it
is stabilized.
23. After finishing testing, remove the testing tools

and return the removed parts.
a Install the injector and fuel high-pressure
tube according to the following procedure.
1) Mate the injector's projection (a) to notch
(b) of the holder and then set them to the
cylinder head.
a Set the injector with the above mating
position toward the fuel inlet connec-
tor insertion side.
PC300, 350-8 15
6) Tighten the sleeve nut of high-pressure

fuel hose (16) sequentially in the order of
head side and common rail side.
3 Sleeve nut:
37.3 ± 4 Nm {3.8 ± 0.4 kgm}
a After installing the rocker arm assembly, adjust

the valve clearance. For details, see “Adjusting
valve clearance”.
3 Rocker arm assembly mounting bolt:
64.7 ± 4.9 Nm {6.6 ± 0.5 kgm}
a Tighten the injector terminal nut with the follow-
ing torque.
3 Terminal nut:
1.25 ± 0.25 Nm {0.13 ± 0.03 kgm}
a Tighten the head cover with the following
torque.
3 Head cover mounting nut:
11.8 ± 1.96 Nm {1.2 ± 0.2 kgm}
16 PC300, 350-8
Testing blow-by pressure 1

a Blow-by pressure measurement tools

1 799-201-1504 Blow-by checker
E
2 795-790-3300 Tool (Nozzle)
1. Remove the under cover of the engine block.
2. Install tool E2 to blow-by hose (1) and connect

gauge [1] of blow-by checker E1.
3. Start the engine and keep it running until tem-

perature of the engine coolant and hydraulic oil
rise to the operating range.
4. Measure the blow-by pressure at high idle and

under the following conditions.
q Swing lock switch: ON (high pressure
relief)
q Work equipment: Arm IN relief position
a Read off the blow-by pressure value,
when the needle of the gauge steadies
itself.

PC300, 350-8 17
Testing engine oil pressure 1 5. Run the engine at the rated output and low idle
and test the oil pressure.
a Measuring tools for engine oil pressure

799-101-5002 Hydraulic tester
1
790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester
F 2 799-401-2320 Gauge
6732-81-3170 Adapter
3
6215-81-9710 O-ring
a The test point is subject to machine models.
1. Open the engine hood.
2. Remove oil pressure pickup plug (1).

6. After finishing testing, remove the measuring
tools and return the removed parts.
3. Install adapter F3 and nipple (R1/8) [1] of

hydraulic tester F1 to the plug installation posi-
tion.
4. Connect hose of hydraulic tester F1 to nipple

[1] and gauge F2.
18 PC300, 350-8
Testing fuel pressure 1

1
Adapter
6732-81-3170
2 (10 x 1.0 mm o R1/8)
G 6215-81-9710 O-ring
Gauge: 1.0 MPa
3 799-401-2320
{10 kg/cm2}
795-790-1500
4 Fuel vacuum gauge
799-201-1201
3) Run the engine at high idle and measure
the pressure in the fuel negative pressure
a Fuel pressure shall be checked only in the fol- circuit.
lowing 2 circuits. Negative pressure circuit a If the pressure in the fuel negative
between the fuel supply connector and feed pressure circuit is in the following
pump inlet and the low pressure circuit from range, it is normal.
the feed pump through the fuel main filter and q Standard pressure value in the fuel
up to the supply pump. negative pressure circuit (fuel supply
k Measurement in the high-pressure circuit is connector) Max. 27.1 kPa {Max. 203
not available because of very high pressure mmHg}
generated in this circuit covering the sup-
ply pump through the common rail to the 4) After finishing measurement, remove the
fuel injector. measuring tools and return the removed
parts.
1. Measuring pressure in the fuel negative q Fuel pressure pickup plug:
pressure circuit (fuel supply connector) 20 – 22 Nm {2.0 – 2.2 kgm}
1) Remove fuel pressure pickup plug (1) of
the fuel supply connector. 2. Measuring pressure in the fuel negative
pressure circuit (supply pump)
1) Remove fuel pressure pickup plug (2) of
the supply pump.
2) Connect adapter G2 and fuel vacuum

gauge G4.
2) Connect adapter G2 and fuel vacuum

gauge G4.
PC300, 350-8 19
3) Run the engine at high idle and measure 3) Measure pressure in the fuel low-pressure
the pressure in the fuel negative pressure circuit when the engine is cranked.
circuit. a If the pressure in the fuel low-pres-
a If the pressure in the fuel negative sure circuit (at the fuel filter inlet side)
pressure circuit is in the following is in the following range, it is normal.
range, it is normal. q Standard pressure values of the fuel
q Standard pressure value in the fuel low-pressure circuit (fuel filter inlet
negative pressure circuit (supply side) Min. 0.14 MPa {Min. 1.4 kg/
pump) Max. 33.9 kPa {Max. 254 cm2}
mmHg} k In order to protect the starting
4) After finishing measurement, remove the motor, it is prohibited to continue
measuring tools and return the removed cranking for more than 20 sec-
parts. onds.
q Fuel pressure pickup plug:
20 – 22 Nm {2.0 – 2.2 kgm}
3. Measuring pressure in the fuel low-pres-

sure circuit (fuel filter inlet side)
1) Remove fuel pressure pickup plug (3) situ-
ated at the fuel main filter inlet side.
4) After finishing measurement, remove the

measuring tools and return the removed
parts.
20 – 22 Nm {2.0 – 2.2 kgm}
2) Install adapter G2 and nipple [1] of

hydraulic tester G1and connect them to
gauge G3.
20 PC300, 350-8
4. Measuring pressure in the fuel low-pres-

sure circuit (fuel filter outlet side)
1) Remove fuel pressure pickup plug (4) situ-
ated at the fuel main filter outlet side.

parts.
2) Install adapter G2 and nipple [1] of 20 – 22 Nm {2.0 – 2.2 kgm}
hydraulic tester G1 and connect them to
gauge G3. 5. Measuring drop of pressure in fuel low-
pressure circuit
1) Remove fuel pressure pickup plug (3) at
the fuel main filter inlet side and fuel pres-
sure pickup plug (4) at the outlet side.

the pressure of the fuel low-pressure cir-
cuit.
a If the pressure in the fuel low-pres-
sure circuit (at the fuel filter outlet
2) Install adapter G2 and nipple [1] of
side) is in the following range, it is
hydraulic tester G1 and connect them to
normal.
gauge G3.
q Standard pressure values of the fuel
low-pressure circuit (fuel filter outlet
side) Min. 0.48 MPa {Min. 4.9 kg/
cm2}
PC300, 350-8 21

drop of the pressure of the fuel low-pres-
sure circuit.
q Pressure drop in the fuel low-pres-
sure circuit =
Fuel filter inlet pressure – Fuel pres-
sure outlet pressure
a If the pressure drop in the fuel low-
pressure circuit is in the following
range, it is normal.
q Standard pressure drop values for the
fuel low-pressure circuit:
Max. 0.14 MPa {Max. 1.4 kg/cm2}
a When the measured pressure drop
exceeded the standard value, clog-
ging of the fuel filter should be sus-
pected.

parts.
20 – 22 Nm {2.0 – 2.2 kgm}
22 PC300, 350-8
Handling during cylinder cut-out Handling during no injection

operation 1 cranking operation 1
a Reduced cylinder mode operation means to a The no injection cranking operation denotes to
run the engine with the fuel injectors of 1 or crank the engine from the starting motor after
more cylinders disabled electrically to reduce setting all cylinders to no injection mode. Fol-
the number of effective cylinders. The pur- lowing describes the objective and effects of
poses and effects of this operation are as fol- this operation.
lows.
1. This operation is used to find out a cylinder When a machine or engine has been stored for
which does not output power normally (or, a long period of time, implementing the no
combustion in it is abnormal). injection cranking operation before restarting
2. If the engine speed and output remain the the engine lubricates the engine respective
same as the normal operation (full-cylinder parts and thus helps preventing seizure of the
mode operation) when a cylinder is set to no- engine.
injection in the cylinder cut-out operation, exist- a See the section of “Special functions of
ence of a failure on the subject cylinder should machine monitor” when turning on the no injec-
be suspected. tion cranking operation.
Followings are the potential causes.
Leakage from the cylinder head gasket
Defective injection from the injector
Failure on the piston, piston ring or cylin-
der liner
Failure on the valve mechanism (valve
operating system)
Failure in the electrical system
3. Since the common rail fuel injection system
controls the injector of each cylinder electroni-
cally, the operator can perform the reduced cyl-
inder mode operation easily with switches to
find out a defective cylinder.
a See the section of “Special functions of
machine monitor” when turning on the cyl-
inder cut-out operation.
PC300, 350-8 23
Testing fuel return rate and k If the engine cannot be started, you
leakage 1 may measure the fuel return rate
while rotating the engine with the
a Testing tools for leakage from pressure limiter starting motor. Do not rotate for
and return rate from injector more than 30 seconds continu-
ously, however, for protection of
Symbol Part No. Part name the starting motor.
1 795-790-4800 Hose KIT
2 795-790-6700 Adapter
H
Commercially
3 Measuring cylinder
available
k Park the machine in a level ground and

lower the work equipment to the ground.
1. Testing supply pump return rate
1) Disconnect return tube (1) of the supply
pump.
a Before starting the work, remove the
return hose from the aftercooler so
that it may not interfere with the
inspection.
5) After finishing testing, remove the testing
3 Joint bolt (M14):
36 ± 5 Nm {3.67 ± 0.51 kgm}
2. Testing leakage from pressure limiter

a Before displaying failure code [CA449], its
troubleshooting must be done beforehand.
1) Disconnect return tube (2) of the pressure
limiter.
2) Connect testing tool H1 to the supply

pump side, and insert its tip into measur-
ing cylinder H3.
3) Connect blocking tool H2 to the fuel return
connector side to prevent leakage of the
fuel.
4) Install the aftercooler hose, run the engine
at low idle and then measure the return
rate from the supply pump.
a If the return rate from the supply
pump is in the following range, it is 2) Connect testing tool H1 to the pressure
normal. limiter side, and insert its tip into measur-
ing cylinder H3.
3) Connect blocking tool H2 to the return
At low idle Max. 300 cc/30 sec.
tube joint connection of the cylinder block
At cranking Max. 200 cc/30 sec. side to prevent leakage of the fuel.
24 PC300, 350-8
4) Run the engine at low idle and test the 4) Run the engine at low idle and test the
return rate from the pressure limiter. return rate from the injector.
a If the leakage from the pressure lim- a If the return rate from the injector is in
iter is in the following range, it is nor- the following range, it is normal.
mal.
At low idle Max. 300 cc/45 sec.
At low idle Below 30 droppings/min. At cranking Max. 100 cc/30 sec.
k If the engine cannot be started, you

may measure the fuel return rate
while rotating the engine with the
starting motor. Do not rotate for
more than 30 seconds continu-
ously, however, for protection of
the starting motor.

3 Joint bolt (M12):
24 ± 4 Nm {2.45 ± 0.41 kgm}
3. Testing return rate from injector

1) Disconnect return tube (3) of the injector.
3 Joint bolt (M12):
24 ± 4 Nm {2.45 ± 0.41 kgm}
2) Connect testing tool H1 to the cylinder

head side, and insert its tip into measuring
cylinder H3.
3) Connect blocking tool H2 to the return
tube joint connection of the cylinder block
side to prevent leakage of the fuel.
PC300, 350-8 25
Bleeding air from fuel circuit 1 3. Fill up the fuel tank with fuel.
a If fuel is used up or if a fuel circuit part is 4. Keep the starting switch at the ON position for
removed and installed, bleed air from the fuel 30 seconds and keep it at the OFF position for
circuit using the electric priming pump accord- 10 seconds.
ing to the following procedure.
5. Repeat Step 3 above four times.
1. If fuel main filter (1) is removed and installed or
replaced, install it back without filling fuel into 6. Start the engine with the starting motor.
the fuel main filter. a The air in the high-pressure circuit is bled
automatically if the engine is cranked.
a If the engine does not start, there may be
still air in the low-pressure circuit. In this
case, repeat the above procedure from
step 2.
a Operating the machine with air left in the
fuel circuit may cause a fuel system error
(CA449, CA559). If either error occurs, run
the engine at low idle after performing the
above steps, and continue engine opera-
tion approximately 3 minutes. When air is
bled from the fuel circuit, engine speed
becomes stable and the error indication
disappears.
2. Remove fuel pre-filter (on the machine) and fill
it with fuel.
a Fill the fuel filter with clean fuel and take
care that dirt will not enter it.
a Check that the cap is fitted to part (a)
(central hole) of the fuel pre-filter, and then
add fuel through part (b) (holes around the
central hole).
a After filling the fuel pre-filter with fuel,
remove the cap from part (a).
a If clean fuel is not available, do not
remove the fuel pre-filter but fill it with the
fuel by operating priming pump.
a Do not add fuel to fuel main filter (1) from
outside.
26 PC300, 350-8
Checking fuel circuit for leakage 1 8. Run the engine at high idle and load it.
a When checking while the components to
k Very high pressure is generated in the high- be checked are mounted on the machine,
pressure circuit of the fuel system. If fuel stall the torque converter or relieve the
leaks while the engine is running, it is dan- hydraulic pump.
gerous since it can catch fire.
After testing the fuel system or removing 9. Inspect the fuel piping and devices for fuel
its parts, test it for fuel leakage according leakage.
to the following procedure. a Check mainly around the high-pressure
a Clean and degrease the engine and the parts circuit parts coated with the color checker
around it in advance so that you can test it eas- for fuel leakage.
ily for fuel leakage. a If any fuel leakage is detected, repair it
and check again from step 1.
1. Spray color checker (developer) over the fuel a If no fuel leakage is detected, check is
supply pump, common rail, fuel injector, and completed.
joints of the high-pressure piping.
2. Run the engine at speed below 1,000 rpm and

stop it after its speed is stabilized.
3. Inspect the fuel piping and devices for fuel

leakage.
a Check mainly around the high-pressure
circuit parts coated with the color checker
for fuel leakage.
a If any fuel leakage is detected, repair it
4. Run the engine at low idle.

leakage.
for fuel leakage.
6. Run the engine at high idle.

leakage.
for fuel leakage.
PC300, 350-8 27
Testing and adjusting air

compressor belt tension 1
Inspection
Test belt deflection amount (a) when depressing
the mid point between the fan pulley and the com-
pressor pulley with your finger.
q Belt depressing force:
98 N {10 kg} or equivalent
Adjustment
a If the belt deflection amount is not proper,
adjust it in the following manner.
1. Loosen mounting bolt (2) and fixing bolt (3) of

compressor bracket (1).
2. Slide compressor bracket (1) using the bar,

adjust the belt tension and then tighten fixing
bolt (3).
3. Tighten mounting bolt (2) of compressor

bracket (1).
a Check the belt tension again after the
adjustment.
28 PC300, 350-8
Replacing fan belt 1 3. Replace the fan belt (4).

q Check each pulley for breakage and
a The auto-tensioner is provided for the fan belt. crack.
Thus, testing and adjusting of the belt is usu-
ally not necessary.
a Disconnect air conditioner compressor belt
before replacing the fan belt.
k Parking the machine in a level ground and

1. Open engine hood and remove fan belt cover

(1) and fan guard (2).
2. Insert a wrench to the portion (A) (width across

flats T 12.7 mm) of the tensioner assembly (3),
and rotate it to the opposite to the winding-up
direction to decrease the fan belt (4) tension.
k Make sure that the wrench is secured
at the portion (A) of the tensioner
assembly (3) before rotating it. (The
spring of the tensioner assembly (3) is
strong. If the wrench is loosely
inserted, the wrench may accidentally
come off while being rotated and it is
extremely dangerous.)
k After removing the fan belt (4), return
the tensioner assembly (3) slowly with
care.
k Be careful not to get your fingers
caught between the pulley and fan belt
(4) during work.
PC300, 350-8 29
Replacing alternator belt 1 3. Replace the alternator belt (6).

q Check each pulley for breakage and crack.
a The auto-tensioner is provided for the alterna-
tor belt. Thus, testing and adjustment of the
belt is usually no necessary.
a Disconnect air conditioner compressor belt
before replacing the alternator belt.
k Parking the machine in a level ground and

1. Open engine hood and remove fan belt cover

(1) and fan guard (2).
2. Insert a wrench to the portion (B) (width across

flats T 12.7 mm) of the tensioner assembly (2),
and rotate it to the opposite to the winding-up
direction to decrease the alternator belt (1) ten-
sion.
k Make sure that the wrench is secured
at the portion (B) before rotating it.
(The spring of the tensioner assembly
(5) is strong. If the wrench is loosely
inserted, the wrench may accidentally
come off while being rotated and it is
extremely dangerous.)
k After removing the alternator belt (1),
return the tensioner assembly (5)
slowly with care.
k Be careful not to get your fingers
caught between the pulley and alterna-
tor belt (6) during work.
30 PC300, 350-8
Testing clearance in swing circle 4. Hold the arm nearly perpendicular to the
bearings 1 ground, and lower the boom until the track
shoes will be lifted at the machine front.
a Swing circle bearing clearance measurement a The upper structure is raised at the front
tool and lowered at the rear at that time.
Mark Part No. Part Name 5. Read the value indicated by dial gauge J in
J Commercially available Dial gauge this condition.
a The value indicated by dial gauge J repre-
a Follow the steps explained below when mea- sents the clearance in the bearings.
suring clearance in the swing circle bearing on
the actual machine.
k Be careful not to put a hand or foot under
the undercarriage, while taking measure-
ment.
1. Fasten dial gauge J to swing circle outer race

(1) or inner race (2), and contact the probe
against the end surface of inner race (2) or
outer race (1) on the opposite side.
a Set dial gauge J at the machine front or
rear side.
6. Return the machine to the posture in Item 2

above, and confirm dial gauge J reading
returns to zero.
a If zero value is not indicated, repeat the
steps in Items 3 through 5.
2. Keep the work equipment in the max. reach

posture and keep the height of the bucket teeth
tip level with the lower height of the revolving
frame.
a The upper structure is lowered at the front
and raised at the rear at that time.
3. Set dial gauge to the zero point.
PC300, 350-8 31
Testing and adjusting track shoe Adjustment

tension 1 a If the track shoe tension is not proper, adjust it
in the following manner.
Inspection
1. Travel the machine forward by the length of 1. When the tension is too strong
track on ground with the engine at low idle and Loosen valve (1) to discharge the grease.
then stop the machine slowly. k Do not loosen the valve more than 1
turn. Otherwise, the valve may jump
2. Place straight bar [1] on the track shoe out because of th e high- pressure
between the idler and the 1st carrier roller. grease inside.
a L beam is recommended for bar [1]
because of its deflection-free nature. 2. When the tension is too weak
Push in grease through grease fitting (2).
3. Measure maximum clearance (a) between bar a If the normal track shoe tension is not
[1] and the track shoe. restored even after greasing, move the
q Standard clearance (a): 10 – 30 mm machine slowly back and forth.
32 PC300, 350-8
Testing and adjusting oil pressure 2) Fit nipple L2 and connect it to oil pressure
in work equipment, swing and gauge [1] of hydraulic tester L1.
a Use the oil pressure gauge with
travel circuit 1 capacity 60 MPa {600 kg/cm2}.
a Testing and adjusting tools for hydraulic oil
pressure in hydraulic circuit for work equip-
ment, swing and travel

1
L
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring
a Checkup of the oil pressure in the work equip-

ment, swing, and travel circuits (pump dis-
charge pressure) is also available from the
monitoring function of the machine monitor 3) Start the engine and keep it running until
(Special functions of machine monitor). the hydraulic oil temperature rises to the
operating range.
Measurement
1. Preparation work
k Lower the work equipment to the
ground and, after stopping the engine,
release residual pressure in the piping
by operating the control lever several
times. Then loosen the oil filler cap
gradually to release pressure inside
the tank.
1) Remove hydraulic oil pressure measuring
plugs (1) and (2).
q Plug (1): For the front pump circuit
( si tuated in th e r ear si de of the
machine)
q Plug (2): For the rear pump circuit
2. Combination of pump, actuator, and valve
(situated in the front side of the
a Care must be exercised when the oil from
machine)
the pump is diverted since, at this time,
the actuators of the front pump and rear
pump work independently, relieving differ-
ent valves.
a When the work equipment circuit or swing
circuit is relieved singly, the oil of the
pumps is diverted.
a The actuators in the table are arranged in
the order when the control valve is seen
from the front of the machine.
PC300, 350-8 33
a When the boom LOWER is selected,

Pump Actuator Valve to be relieved the relief pressure is lower than the
main relief pressure.
(Unload) R unload valve
Service Safety valve turning off the machine push-up
Boom Arm switch introduces the low-pressure
R main relief valve
Front Hi Hi relief pressure and turning it on intro-
pump Bucket R main relief valve duces the high-pressure relief pres-
sure.
L.H travel R main relief valve
RAISE: R main relief valve 5. Measurement of swing relief pressure
Boom Lo
LOWER: Safety valve
1) Start the engine and move the swing lock
Swing Swing motor safety valve switch to the ON position.
Rear R.H travel F main relief valve 2) Measure hydraulic oil pressure when the
pump Arm Lo F main relief valve engine is running at high idle and the
swing circuit is relieved.
(Unload) F unload valve
a Hydraulic oil pressure when the swing
motor safety valve is relieved is dis-
played.
3. Measurement of unload pressure
a The relief pressure of the swing motor
1) Start the engine.
is lower than the main relief pressure.
2) Measure hydraulic oil pressure, when the
engine is running at high idle and all the
6. Measurement of travel circuit relief pres-
control levers are moved to the NEUTRAL
sure
position.
1) Start the engine, and lock the travel.
k Insert pin [2] between the sprocket
a Hydraulic oil pressure when the
unload valve unloads is displayed.
and the track frame to positively
lock the travel circuit.
4. Measurement of work equipment relief
pressure
1) Start the engine and move the cylinder to
be measured to its stroke end.
2) Measure hydraulic oil pressure when the
cylinder is relieved while the engine is run-
ning at high idle.
a Except when the boom LOWER is
selected, the pressure at which the
main relief valve was relieved is dis-
played.
a Except when the boom LOWER is
selected, releasing the power max.
switch introduces the low-pressure
relief pressure and pushing this
switch introduces the high-pressure 2) Measure the pressure when the engine is
relief pressure. set to high idle and the travel circuit is
a Except when the boom LOWER is relieved.
selected, keep the swing lock switch a Hydraulic oil pressure with the main
in the OFF position during the inspec- relief valve in relief condition is dis-
tion. If it is moved to the ON position, played. In the travel circuit relief, the
hydraulic oil pressure is turned to high pressure is high pressure relief all the
relief pressure, as the constant 2- time.
stage relief valve is moved to the ON
position.
the pressure at which the safety valve
was relieved is displayed.
34 PC300, 350-8
Adjustment
a Adjustment of the unload valve is not available. 3) Check the pressure again after the adjust-
ment, following the aforementioned steps
1. Adjustment of main relief pressure for measurement.
a When the relief pressure of the work a Connect the pilot hose when measur-
equipment circuit or travel circuit is abnor- ing the oil pressure.
mal, adjust main relief valves (3) and (4)
according to the following procedure. 2. Adjustment of boom LOWER relief pres-
q (3): For the front pump circuit sure (on the side where high pressure is
q (4): For the rear pump circuit set)
a As for the main relief valve, be sure to a When the high-pressure relief pressure for
adjust its low-pressure relief pressure the boom LOWER is not normal, adjust
alone (adjusting the low-pressure relief the high pressure side of the safety and
pressure automatically sets the high-pres- suction valve (7) for the boom LOWER in
sure relief pressure, too.). the following procedure.
a When the low-pressure relief pressure is a The high-pressure relief pressure mode
turned on, the 2-stage relief valve is OFF denotes the state in which the machine
and thus the pilot pressure is not applica- push-up switch is turned on, disabling to
ble to the switching port. apply the pilot pressure to the switching
port.
1) Disconnect the pilot hose. 1)

Disconnect the pilot hose.
2) Loosen locknut (5) and turn holder (6) to 2)
Loosen locknut (8) and turn holder (9) to
adjust the relief pressure. adjust the relief pressure.
a Turning the holder clockwise increases a Turning the holder clockwise increases
the pressure. Turning it counterclock- the pressure. Turning it counterclock-
wise decreases the pressure. wise decreases the pressure.
a Quantity of adjustment per turn of a Pressure adjustable from a single turn of the
holder: holder:
Approx. 20.5 MPa {Approx. 209 kg/cm2} Approx. 21.8 MPa {Approx. 222 kg/cm2}
3 Locknut:
3 Locknut: 93 – 123 Nm {9.5 – 12.5 kgm}
49.0 – 58.8 Nm {5 – 6 kgm}
PC300, 350-8 35
4. Adjustment of swing relief pressure

3) Check the pressure again after the adjust- a If the swing relief pressure is not normal,
ment, following the aforementioned steps adjust the swing motor safety valve (12) in
for measurement. the following manner.
a Connect the pilot hose when measur-
ing the oil pressure.
3. Adjustment of boom LOWER relief pres-

sure (on the side where low pressure is set)
a When low-pressure relief pressure of the
boom LOWER is not normal or when
adjustment is made of the high pressure
setting side, adjust the low pressure side
of the safety and suction valve for the
boom LOWER in the following procedure.
a The low-pressure relief pressure mode
denotes the state in which the machine
push-up switch is turned off, disabling to
apply the pilot pressure to the switching
port. 1) Loosen locknut (13) and turn adjustment
1) Disconnect the pilot hose. screw (14) to adjust the relief pressure.
2) Loosen locknut (10) and turn holder (11) to a Turning the holder clockwise
adjust the relief pressure. increases the pressure. Turning it
a Turning the holder clockwise increases counterclockwise decreases the pres-
the pressure. Turning it counterclock- sure.
wise decreases the pressure. a Quantity of adjustment per turn of
a Pressure adjustable from a single adjusting screw:
turn of the holder: Approx. 4.70 MPa {Approx. 47.9 kg/cm2}
Approx. 21.8 MPa {Approx. 222 kg/cm2} 3 Locknut:
3 Locknut: 147 – 196 Nm {15 – 20 kgm}
78 – 93 Nm {8.0 – 9.5 kgm}
2) Check the pressure again after the adjust-

3) Check the pressure again after the adjust- for measurement.
for measurement.
a Connect the pilot hose when measur-
ing the oil pressure.
36 PC300, 350-8
Testing and adjusting control 3. Start the engine and keep it running until the
circuit oil pressure 1 hydraulic oil temperature rises to the operating
range.
a Control circuit oil pressure testing and adjust-
ing tools 4. Measure hydraulic oil pressure, when the
engine is running at high idle and all the control
Symbol Part No. Part name levers are moved to the NEUTRAL position.
1
L
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring
Measurement
k Lower the work equipment to the ground
and, after stopping the engine, release
residual pressure in the piping by operating
the control lever several times. Then loosen
the oil filler cap gradually to release pres-
sure inside the tank.
1. Remove oil pressure measurement plug (1). 5. Remove the measurement tool after the mea-
a It is not allowed to adjust the relief valve of
the control circuit source pressure.
2. Fit nipple L2 and connect it to oil pressure

gauge [1] of hydraulic tester L1.
a Use the oil pressure gauge with capacity
6.0 MPa {60 kg/cm2}.
PC300, 350-8 37
Testing and adjusting pump PC

control circuit oil pressure 1
a Pump PC control circuit oil pressure testing
and adjusting tools

1
L
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring
Measurement
a Measurement of the oil pressure in the pump
2) Fit nipple L2 and connect it to oil pressure
PC control circuit shall be conducted after
gauge [1] of hydraulic tester L1.
making sure that oil pressure of the work
a Use the oil pressure gauge with
equipment, swing, and travel circuits as well as
capacity 60 MPa {600 kg/cm2}.
basic pressure of the control circuit is normal.
1. Measurement of PC valve output pressure

(servo piston inlet pressure)
a PC valve output pressure (servo piston
inlet pressure) is measured along with that
of the pump discharge pressure and the
result of the two is compared to each
other.
1) Remove oil pressure measurement plugs
(1), (2), (3) and (4).
q (1): For the front pump discharge
pressure (situated in the rear side of
the machine)
q (2): For the rear pump discharge
pressure (situated in the front side of
the machine)
q (3): For the front pump PC valve out-
put pressure
q (4): For the rear pump PC valve out-
put pressure
38 PC300, 350-8
3) Start the engine and keep it running until 2. Measurement of PC-EPC valve output pres-
the hydraulic oil temperature rises to the sure
operating range. 1) Remove oil pressure measurement plug
(5).
a The plug is installed in the front side
of the machine.
4) Measure the pump discharge pressure

and PC valve output pressure (pressure at
servo piston inlet) at the same time after
setting following conditions with the 2) Fit nipple L2 and connect it to oil pressure
engine running at high idle. gauge [1] of hydraulic tester L1.
q Working mode: P-mode a Use the oil pressure gauge with
q Swing lock switch: ON capacity 6.0 MPa {60 kg/cm2}.
(Turning 2-stage relief ON induces
high-pressure relief)
q Work equipment, swing and travel:
Arm IN relief
a Judgement method: When the ratio
between the pump discharge pres-
sure and PC valve output pressure
(servo piston input pressure) reaches
the following values, both pressures
are judged normal.
Measured oil pres- Ratio between oil

sure pressures
Pump discharge
1
pressure
PC Valve output
Approx. 3/5 the hydraulic oil temperature rises to the
pressure
operating range.
a If there is any abnormality with PC
valve or servo piston, the PC valve
output pressure (servo piston input
pressure) becomes identical with the
pump discharge pressure or comes to
neighborhood of 0 pressure.
PC300, 350-8 39
4) Measure the hydraulic oil pressure with all

the control levers kept in the NEUTRAL
position and the engine running at high
idle and at low idle.
a You can assume that the PC-EPC
valve output pressure is normal when
the following changes are observed.
Control Hydraulic oil

Engine speed
lever pressure
2.9 MPa
Low idle
{30 kg/cm2}
Neutral
0 MPa
High idle
{0 kg/cm2}
4. After the adjustment, make sure that the PC
valve output pressure (servo piston inlet pres-
Adjustment sure) is normal using the measurement steps
a When a trouble on the PC valve is suspected explained earlier.
because of the following phenomena, adjust
PC valves (6) and (7) in the following manner.
q As workload increases, the engine rpm
sharply drops.
q The engine rpm is normal but the work
equipment speed is low.
3. Loosen locknut (8) and turn holder (9) to adjust

the pump absorption torque.
a Turning the holder clockwise increases
the pump absorption torque. Turning the
holder counterclockwise decreases the
pump absorption torque.
a Following indicates the range of adjust-
ment available from the adjusting screw.
Counterclockwise: Within 1 turn
Clockwise: Within 1/2 turn (Within 180°)

3 Locknut: 27 – 34 Nm {2.8 – 3.5 kgm}
40 PC300, 350-8
Testing and adjusting pump LS

control circuit oil pressure 1
a Pump LS control circuit oil pressure testing
and adjusting tools

1
M 799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring
3 799-401-1340 Differential pressure gauge
Measurement
a Measurement of the oil pressure in the pump
LS control circuit shall be conducted after mak-
ing sure that oil pressure of the work equip-
ment, swing, and travel circuits as well as
basic pressure of the control circuit is normal.
1. Measurement of LS valve output pressure 2) Fit nipple M2 and connect it to oil pressure
(servo piston inlet pressure) gauge [1] of hydraulic tester L1.
a LS valve output pressure (servo piston a Use the oil pressure gauge with
inlet pressure) is measured along with that capacity 60 MPa {600 kg/cm2}.
of the pump discharge pressure and the
result of the two is compared to each
other.
1) Remove oil pressure measurement plugs
(1), (2), (3) and (4).
q (1): For the front pump discharge
pressure (situated in the rear side of
the machine)
q (2): For the rear pump discharge
pressure (situated in the front side of
the machine)
q (3): For the front pump LS valve out-
put pressure
q (4): For the rear pump LS valve out-
put pressure
PC300, 350-8 41
a Judgement method:
When the ratio between the pump
discharge pressure and LS valve out-
put pressure (servo piston input pres-
sure) reaches the following values,
both pressures are judged normal.
Ratio between oil

Measured oil pressures
pressure Travel lever
All at neutral
at half stroke
Pump
discharge 1
pressure Almost the
3) Start the engine and push up the track same pres-
shoe on the measurement side using work LS valve sure
output pres- Approx. 3/5
equipment.
sure
q When measuring the front circuit:
Left track shoe
q When measuring the rear circuit:
Right track shoe
k Provide a working area of suffi-
cient space, as the raised track
shoe will be idly rotated.
4) Increase the hydraulic oil temperature to
the operating range.

and LS valve output pressure (pressure at
servo piston inlet) at the same time after
setting following conditions with the
engine running at high idle.

q Work equipment, swing and travel:
When all levers are at neutral and
when travel lever is at half stroke (one
side of travel is at idle)
a Let the raised track shoe idly rotate,
paying enough attention to the sur-
roundings for safety.
42 PC300, 350-8
2. Measurement of LS differential pressure 2) Fit nipple M2 and connect it to oil pressure

a LS differential pressure can be obtained gauge [1] or differential pressure gauge
by measuring the pump discharge pres- M3 of hydraulic tester M1.
sure and LS pressure (actuator load pres- a When using a differential pressure
sure) at the same time and computing the gauge:
difference between the 2 pressures. Connect pump discharge pressure to
1) Remove oil pressure measurement plugs the high pressure side and LS pres-
(1), (2), (5) and (6). sure to the low pressure side. A differ-
q (1): For the front pump discharge ential pressure gauge requires DC
pressure (situated in the rear side of 12V power. Connect it with 1 battery.
the machine) a When using an oil pressure gauge:
q (2): For the rear pump discharge Use the oil pressure gauge with
pressure (situated in the front side of capacity 60 MPa {600 kg/cm2 }. The
the machine) max. differential pressure is no more
q (5): For the front pump LS pressure than approx. 3.9 MPa {40 kg/cm2}. So
( si tuated in th e r ear si de of the the same gauge may be used
machine) throughout the measurement.
q (6): For the rear pump LS pressure
( si tuated in th e r ear si de of the
machine)
3) Start the engine and push up the track

shoe on the measurement side using work
equipment.
q When measuring the front circuit:
Left track shoe
q When measuring the rear circuit:
Right track shoe
k Provide a working area of suffi-
cient space, as the raised track
shoe will be idly rotated.
PC300, 350-8 43
4) Increase the hydraulic oil temperature to 3. Measurement of LS-EPC valve output pres-
the operating range. sure
1) Remove oil pressure measurement plug
(7).
a The plug is installed on the rear
pump.

and LS pressure (actuator load pressure)
at the same time after setting the following
conditions with the engine running at high
idle. 2) Fit nipple M2 and connect it to oil pressure
q Working mode: P-mode gauge [1] of hydraulic tester M1.
q Travel speed: Hi a Use the oil pressure gauge with
q Work equipment, swing and travel: capacity 6.0 MPa {60 kg/cm2}.
When all levers are at neutral and
when travel lever is at half stroke (one
side of travel is at idle)
a Let the raised track shoe idly rotate,
paying enough attention to the sur-
roundings for safety.
a Calculation of LS differential pres-
sure: LS differential pressure = Pump
discharge pressure – LS pressure
a If LS differential pressure is in the fol-
lowing conditions, it is judged normal.
Lever operation LS differential pressure

When all levers Unload pressure (Refer
are set to neu- to the standard value
tral table) 3) Start the engine and keep it running until
the hydraulic oil temperature rises to the
Maximum LS differential
Travel lever set operating range.
pressure (Refer to the
at half stroke
standard value table)

44 PC300, 350-8
4) Measure the oil pressure when the engine Adjustment

is running at high idle and the travel speed a When the LS differential pressure is not nor-
switch and travel control lever are oper- mal, adjust LS valves (8) and (9) in the follow-
ated. ing procedure.
a If LS-EPC valve output pressure
changes to the following values, the
pressure is normal.
Travel Travel con-

Oil pressure
speed trol lever
Approx. 1.4 MPa
Lo Neutral
{approx. 14 kg/cm2}
Fine opera-
Hi 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
tion (Note)
Note: Operate the travel control lever

slightly to the extent that the
P P C o il p r e s s ur e s w i tc h is
turned ON (Stop the operation
short of starting the machine). 1. Loosen locknut (10) and turn adjustment screw
(11) to adjust the differential pressure.
5) Remove the measurement tool after the a Adjustment screw
measurement, and make sure that the q Turned to the right, the differential
machine is back to normal condition. pressure is increased.
q Turned to the left, the differential
pressure is decreased.
a Quantity of adjustment per turn of adjust-
ing screw:
Quantity of pressure adjustment (LS differ-

ential pressure) 1.3 MPa {13.3 kg/cm2}
3 Lock nut: 49 – 64 Nm {5 – 7 kgm}
2. After the adjustment, confirm that LS differen-

tial pressure is normal, following the steps for
measurement explained earlier.
PC300, 350-8 45
Testing solenoid valve output

pressure 1
a Solenoid valve output pressure measurement
tools

1
799-401-3100 Nipple (02 size)
N 2
02896-11008 O-ring
799-401-3200 Nipple (03 size)
3
02896-11009 O-ring
2. Fit adapter N2 or N3 and then connect hose
a Measure the solenoid valve output pressure currently disconnected.
after confirming that the control circuit source
pressure is normal. 3. Fit nipple [1] of hydraulic tester N1 and then
k Lower the work equipment to the ground connect it to oil pressure gauge [2].
and, after stopping the engine, release a Use the oil pressure gauge with capacity
residual pressure in the piping by operating 6.0 MPa {60 kg/cm2}.
1. Disconnect the hoses of solenoid valve to be

measured at the outlet side.
No. Target solenoid valves of measurement

1 PPC lock solenoid valve
2 Travel junction solenoid valve
3 Merge-divider solenoid valve
4 Travel speed switching solenoid valve
5 Swing holding brake solenoid valve
6 Machine push up solenoid valve
4. Start the engine and keep it running until the
7 2-stage relief solenoid valve hydraulic oil temperature rises to the operating
range.
a Hose (1) is installed in the back side of
operator's cab, and hoses (2) through (7)
are installed at the center of revolving
frame.
46 PC300, 350-8
5. Run the engine at full throttle, then turn each

solenoid valve ON or OFF by operating the
control levers and switches, and measure the
pressure.
a For conditions for turning each solenoid
valve ON or OFF, refer to the ensuing
“Table for functioning conditions” for each
solenoid valve.
a You can check operation of the solenoid
valves from the monitoring function of the
m o n i t o r pa n e l ( Sp e c i a l F u n c t i o n o f
Machine Monitor).
a When each output pressure shows the fol-
lowing values, it is judged normal.
Solenoid valve Output pressure

OFF
0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
(De-energized)
ON
3 MPa {30 kg/cm2}
(Energized)

Table for functioning conditions – PPC lock solenoid valve
Func-
Functioning conditions
tion
Lock OFF
Lock lever
Released ON
Table for functioning conditions – Machine push up solenoid valve
Opera-
Operating condition
tion
ON ON
Machine push-up switch
OFF OFF
Table for functioning conditions – Swing holding brake solenoid valve
Func-
tion
When all signals are turned
OFF
OFF
Signal of work equipment, swing and travel
When one of the signals is
ON
turned ON
PC300, 350-8 47
Table for functioning conditions – Travel junction solenoid valve
Func-
tion
When the travel steering signal is ON
When travel steer- ON
When the travel steering signal is ing independently When F or R pump pressure is 34.3 MPa {350 kg/cm2}
OFF operated
Any other condition than above OFF
Table for functioning conditions – Travel speed shifting solenoid valve
Func-
tion
When the overheat 2nd setting is ON
When the fuel dial is at 1,200 rpm or lower
When the travel speed switch is at Lo OFF
When signal of the travel is OFF
When the travel speed switch is
When signal of the When F or R pump pressure is 32.3 MPa {330 kg/cm2}
at Mi or Hi
travel is ON When F or R pump pressure is 18.6 MPa {190 kg/cm2}
ON
Any other condition than above
Table for functioning conditions – 2-stage relief solenoid valve
Opera-
Operating condition
tion
Overheat 1st setting is ON
OFF
All of work equipment, swing, and travel signals are OFF
Swing lock switch is ON
Travel signal is ON
L mode is selected
ON
Boom LOWER signal is ON
Signals other than swing independent signal are
P or E mode is selected Left knob switch is ON ON
Swing independent signal is ON
OFF
Other than above conditions
48 PC300, 350-8
Table for functioning conditions – Merge-divider solenoid valve
Func-
tion
When B mode is turned on When the service signal is ON
When independent signal of the travel is ON
ON
When any When F or R pump pressure is 19.6 MPa
mode other {200 kg/cm2} or above
When sig- than L
nals of the mode is When F or R pump pressure is 14.7 MPa
OFF
work equip- turned on {150 kg/cm2} or lower
When signal of the travel is OFF
ment and
When F or R pump pressure is 16.7 MPa
swing are ON
{170 kg/cm2} or above
ON L mode
When F or R pump pressure is 11.8 MPa
{120 kg/cm2} or lower OFF
Any other condition than above
PC300, 350-8 49
Testing PPC valve output 2. Fit nipple [1] of the hydraulic tester P and then
pressure 1 connect it to oil pressure gauge [2].
a Use the oil pressure gauge with capacity
a PPC valve output pressure measurement tools 6.0 MPa {60 kg/cm2}.

P 1
a Measure PPC valve output pressure after con-

firming that control circuit original pressure is
normal.
1. Remove PPC hydraulic switches (1) to (10) of

the target circuit of measurement.
Circuit to be Circuit to be
No. No.
measured measured
1 Boom RAISE 6 Bucket DUMP 3. Start the engine and keep it running until the
2 Boom LOWER 7 Swing left hydraulic oil temperature rises to the operating
range.
3 Arm IN 8 Swing right
4 Arm OUT 9 Travel (black)
5 Bucket CURL 10 Steering (red)
a (1) through (8) are installed in the PPC

relay block, and (9) and (10) are installed
in the back side of operator cab.
4. Measure the pressure when the engine is run-

ning at high idle and the control lever of the cir-
cuit to be measured is kept in the NEUTRAL
position and at the full stroke.
a If PPC valve output pressure is at the level
shown below, it is judged normal.
Lever operation Hydraulic oil pressure

When set to
0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
NEUTRAL
Almost the same with
the control circuit source
At full stroke
pressure (refer to the
standard value table)

50 PC300, 350-8
Adjusting play of work equipment

and swing PPC valves 1
a If there is excessive play in the work equip-
ment or swing lever, adjust it in the following
manner.
1. Remove work the equipment and swing PPC

valve assembly.
2. Remove boot (1).
3. Loosen locknut (2) and screw in disc (3) until it

contacts the heads of 4 pistons (4).
a Do not move the piston while doing this
work.
4. Keep disc (3) in place and tighten locknut (2) to

the specified tightening torque.
3 Locknut: 98 – 127 Nm {10 – 13 kgm}
5. Install boot (1).
6. Install the work equipment and swing PPC

valve assembly.
PC300, 350-8 51
Inspecting locations of hydraulic 2. Inspection of arm cylinder

drift of work equipment 1 1) Operate the arm cylinder to move the arm
to the position 100 mm before the digging
a If hydraulic drift occurred on the work equip- stroke end, and stop the engine.
ment (cylinder), check to see if the cause is on
the cylinder packing side or control valve side
according to the following procedure.
1. Inspection of boom and bucket cylinders

1) Set the work equipment in the same pos-
ture as when measuring hydraulic drift,
and stop the engine.
a Fill the bucket with earth or apply the
rated load to the bucket.
2) Shift the arm control lever to IN side.

If, as the result, drifting speed increases,
failure on the cylinder packing should be
suspected.
If the speed remains unchanged, failure
on the control valve should be suspected.
a Operate the control lever with the
engine starting switch in the ON posi-
tion.
a If pressure in the accumulator has
2) When inspecting the boom cylinder, shift dropped, run the engine for approx.
the boom control lever to RAISE side and 10 seconds to charge the accumula-
when inspecting the bucket cylinder, shift tor again.
the bucket control lever to CURL side.
If, as the result, drifting speed increases, [Reference] When the cause of the
failure on the cylinder packing should be hydraulic drift is in the defective packing,
suspected. following explains why such occurred.
If the speed remains unchanged, failure 1) If the work equipment is set to the
on the control valve should be suspected. above posture (holding pressure
a Operate the control lever with the applied to the bottom end), the oil at
engine starting switch in the ON posi- the bottom end leaks to the head end.
tion. However, the volume at the head end
a If pressure in the accumulator has is small than the volume at the bottom
dropped, run the engine for approx. end by the volume of the rod end, so
10 seconds to charge the accumula- the internal pressure at the head end
tor again. increases because of the oil flowing in
from the bottom end.
52 PC300, 350-8
2) If the internal pressure of the head 4. Inspection of PPC valve

end increases, the pressure at the Measure the amount of hydraulic drift of the
bottom end also rises in proportion to work equipment when the accumulator is
this and balanced at certain level (this charged with pressure and the lock lever is put
level depends on the volume of leak- to the LOCK and FREE positions.
age). As the pressure is balanced, the a Operate the control lever with the engine
drifting speed is decreased. starting switch in the ON position.
3) If the lever is then operated according a If pressure in the accumulator has
to the procedure given above, the cir- dropped, run the engine for approx. 10
cuit at the head end is opened to the seconds to charge the accumulator again.
drain circuit (the bottom end is closed a If the lock and free position cause any dif-
by the check valve), so the oil at the ference in the hydraulic drift volume, the
head end flows to the drain circuit and PPC valve is defective (internal failure).
the downward movement becomes
faster.
3. Inspection of boom lock valve

1) Set the work equipment at the maximum
reach and the boom top horizontal. Then
stop the engine.
k Lock the work equipment control
levers and release the pressure
inside the hydraulic tank.
k Do not allow anyone to come
under the work equipment during
the work.
2) Disconnect drain hose (1) of the control
valve, and install an oil stopper plug in the
hose.
q Oil stopper plug: 07376-70210
a Leave the control valve end open.
a If oil leaks out the opened port
accompanying hydraulic drift of the
work equipment, failure on the boom
l ock v alv e s houl d be sus pec ted
(loose contact).
PC300, 350-8 53
Releasing remaining pressure in Testing oil leakage amount 1

hydraulic circuit 1 1. Measurement of oil leakage amount from
k When disconnecting the piping routed from boom cylinder
the hydraulic cylinder and the hydraulic 1) Start the engine and keep it running until
motor to the control valve, release the the hydraulic oil temperature rises to the
residual pressure in the circuit according to operating range. Then extend the boom
the following procedure. cylinder to the stroke end.
a The swing motor circuit and travel motor circuit k Release the pressure remaining in
are free from residual pressure. However, the piping referring to “Releasing
since these circuits are affected by the pres- remaining pressure in hydraulic
sure inside the hydraulic tank, the operation up circuit”.
to opening of the hydraulic tank cap must be 2) Disconnect hose (1) on the cylinder head
implemented. end and block the hose end with a plate.
k Be careful not to disconnect the
1. Stop the engine and then gradually loosen the hose at the cylinder bottom end.
oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank to release the 3) Run the engine at high idle and relieve the
pressure in the tank. boom circuit by raising the boom.
4) Continue this condition for 30 seconds,
2. Turn the engine starting switch to the ON posi- then measure the oil leakage amount for 1
tion and operate the control levers several minute.
times.
a Power must be conducted to PPC lock
valve, thus the starting switch must be set
to ON position prior to the lever operation.
a When the levers are operated 2 – 3 times,
the pressure stored in the accumulator is
removed.
3. Start the engine, run at low idle for approx. 10

seconds to accumulate pressure in the accu-
mulator, then stop the engine.
4. Repeat the steps in Item 2 to 3 above several

times.

2. Measurement of oil leakage amount from

arm cylinder
operating range. Then extend the arm cyl-
inder to the IN stroke end.
k Release the pressure remaining in
the piping referring to “Releasing
remaining pressure in hydraulic
circuit”.
2) Disconnect hose (2) on the cylinder head
end and block the hose end with a plate.
k Be careful not to disconnect the
hose at the cylinder bottom end.
3) Run the engine at high idle and relieve the
arm circuit by moving the arm IN.
54 PC300, 350-8
4) Continue this condition for 30 seconds, 4. Measurement of oil leakage amount from
then measure the oil leakage amount for 1 swing motor
minute. 1) Disconnect drain hoses (4) and install the
oil stopper plug in the hoses.
2) Turn the swing lock switch to the ON posi-
tion.
3) Run the engine at high idle, relieve the
swing circuit, and measure the oil leakage.
a Start measuring the oil leakage 30
seconds after relieving is started and
measure for 1 minute.
a After measuring 1 time, swing 180°,
and then measure again.

3. Measurement of oil leakage amount from

bucket cylinder
operating range. Then extend the bucket
cylinder to the CURL stroke end.
k Release the pressure remaining in 4) After the measurement, make sure that
the piping referring to “Releasing the machine is back to normal condition.
remaining pressure in hydraulic
circuit”. 5. Measurement of oil leakage amount from
2) Disconnect hose (3) on the cylinder head travel motor
end and block the hose end with a plate. 1) Take off the travel motor cover.
k Be careful not to disconnect the 2) Start the engine, and lock the travel.
hose at the cylinder bottom end. k Insert pin [1] between the sprocket
3) Run the engine at high idle and relieve the and the track frame to positively
bucket circuit by moving the bucket CURL. lock the travel circuit.
4) Continue this condition for 30 seconds,
then measure the oil leakage amount for 1
minute.
5) After the measurement, make sure that

the machine is back to normal condition.
PC300, 350-8 55
3) Disconnect drain hose (5) of the travel

motor and fit an oil stopper plug in the
hose end.
4) Run the engine at high idle, relieve the
travel circuit, and measure the oil leakage.
k Wrong operation of the lever can
cause an accident. Accordingly,
make signs and checks securely.
a Start measuring the oil leakage 30
seconds after relieving is started and
measure for 1 minute.
a Measure several times, moving the
motor a little (changing the position of
the valve plate and cylinder and that
of the cylinder and piston) each time.
5) After the measurement, make sure that

the machine is back to normal condition.
56 PC300, 350-8
Bleeding air from various parts 1
Air bleeding items Air bleeding procedure

1 2 3 4 5 6
Bleeding air Bleeding air Bleeding air
Starting Bleeding air
from hydrau- from swing from travel Operation
Contents of work engine from cylinder
lic pump motor motor
• Replacement of hydraulic oil q q
q q q q
• Cleaning of strainer (See note) (See note)
• Replacement of return filter ele-
q o o o q
ment
• Replacement and repair of
hydraulic pump q q q o o q
• Removal of suction piping
• Replacement and repair of con-
q q o o q
trol valve
• Replacement of cylinder
q q o o q
• Removal of cylinder piping
• Replacement of swing motor
q o q o q
• Removal of swing motor pipe
• Replacement of travel motor and
swivel
q o o q q
• Removal of travel motor and
swivel piping
Note: Bleed air from the swing motor and travel motor only when oil in the casing is drained.
1. Bleeding air from hydraulic pump 2. Bleeding air from hydraulic cylinder
1) Loosen air bleeder (1) and check that oil 1) Start the engine and keep running at low
oozes out through the air bleeder. idle for 5 minutes.
2) If the oil seepage is confirmed, tighten air 2) Raise and lower the boom 4 to 5 times
bleeder (1). with the engine running at low idle.
3 Air bleeder: a Stop the piston approximately 100
7.8 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm} mm in front of the stroke end so that it
a Precautions on starting engine: may not be relieved.
When starting the engine after above 3) While running the engine at high idle, per-
operations, be sure to run the engine form step 2).
at low idle for 10 minutes. If the 4) Set the piston rod to the stroke end at low
engine coolant temperature is low idle and allow it to relieve.
and an automatic engine warming-up 5) For bleeding air from the arm cylinder and
function is relied on, use the fuel dial, bucket cylinder, follow the same steps
when it becomes necessary to cancel explained in Item 2) through 4) above.
it. a In case a cylinder is replaced with
new one, it is advised to bleed air
from the new one before mounting
the work equipment. It is especially so
with the boom cylinder, because its
rod does not extend to the stroke end
of LOWER side, after the work equip-
ment is mounted.
PC300, 350-8 57
3. Bleeding air from swing motor

1) Start the engine and run it at low idle.
2) Swing slowly to bleed air.
4. Bleeding air from travel motor

1) Start the engine and run it at low idle.
2) Loosen air bleeder (2) and confirm that oil
seeps out from the plug.
3) If the oil seepage is confirmed, tighten air
bleeder (2).
3 Air bleeder:
27.5 – 35.3 Nm {2.8 – 3.6 kgm}
58 PC300, 350-8
Diode inspection procedures 1

a Check an assembled-type diode (8 pins) and
independent diode (2 pins) in the following
manner.
a The conduction direction of an assembled-type
diode is as shown in the diagram below.
a The conduction direction of an independent
diode is shown on the diode surface.
2. When using analog type circuit tester

a When the diode range is set, the testing
method is the same as that done by use of
the digital type circuit tester.
1) Switch the testing mode to resistance
range.
2) Apply the leads of the tester as explained
below and check the movement of the
pointer.
1] Put the red probe (+) of the test lead
to the anode (P) and the black probe
(–) to the cathode (N) of diode.
2] Put the red probe (+) of the test lead
to the cathode (N) and the black
probe (–) to the anode (P) of diode.
3) Determine if a specific diode is good or no
good by the way the pointer swings.
q With the connection 1] above, the
pointer is not moved. It swings, how-
ev er, when the c onnec tion 2] is
employed. Normal (However, magni-
tude of the pointer's move (indicating
1. When using digital type circuit tester
the resistance value) varies depend-
1) Switch the testing mode to diode range
ing on the given tester model and the
and confirm the indicated value.
measurement range selected).
a Voltage of the battery inside is dis-
q The pointer swings with both the con-
played with conventional cir cuit
nections of 1] and 2]: Defective
testers.
(Internal short circuit)
2) Put the red probe (+) of the test lead to the
q The pointer does not swing with both
anode (P) of and the black probe (–) to the
the connections of 1] and 2]: Defec-
cathode (N) of diode, and confirm the indi-
tive (Internal breaking of wire)
cated value.
3) Determine acceptability of the diode from
the indicated value.
q Indicated value remains unchanged:
Conduction is absent (Failure)
q Indicated value changes: Conduction
is present (Normal) (See Note)
Note: A value between 0.46 V to 0.60
V is indicated for silicon diodes.
a A value between 460 to 600 is indi-
cated for silicon diodes.
PC300, 350-8 59
SEN02625-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
60
SEN02626-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Special functions of machine monitor ............................................................................................................. 2
PC300, 350-8 1
Special functions of machine monitor 1

Air conditioner specification
2 PC300, 350-8
Heater specification Upper section of machine monitor (Display sec-

tion)
(a): Multi-display
a When the engine is started, the battery voltage
may lower suddenly, depending on the ambi-
ent temperature and the condition of the bat-
tery. In this case, the machine monitor goes off
for a moment. This phenomenon is not a fail-
ure, however.
Upper section of machine monitor (Switch sec-

tion)
[F1]: F1 function switch
a The function of each function switch is indi-
cated by graphic mark in the multi-display (a)
above that function switch.
a If the graphic mark of a function switch is not
displayed, that function switch is not working.
Lower section of machine monitor (Switch sec-

tion)
[1]: Numeral 1 input switch/Auto-decelerator
switch
[2]: Numeral 2 input switch/Working mode selector
Heaterless specification switch
[3]: Numeral 3 input switch/Travel speed shifting
switch
[4]: Numeral 4 input switch/Alarm buzzer cancel
switch
[5]: Numeral 5 input switch/Wiper switch
[6]: Numeral 6 input switch/Windshield washer
switch
[7]: Numeral 7 input switch/Air conditioner or
heater switch
heater switch
heater switch
heater switch
Switch having no numerals: Air conditioner or
heater switch
a Each switch has the function indicated by
graphic mark and the function of inputting a
numeral.
a The machine monitor automatically judges
which function of each switch is currently effec-
tive, according to the display condition of multi-
display.
a The difference between the air conditioner
specification, heater specification, and heater-
less specification is only the functions of the
switches in this section.
PC300, 350-8 3
t Ordinary functions and special functions of machine monitor

The machine monitor has the ordinary function and special functions and displays information of various
types on the multi-display.
Some items are displayed automatically according to the internal setting of the machine monitor and the oth-
ers are displayed according to the operation of the switches.
1. Ordinary functions: Operator mode
The items in this mode are displayed ordinarily. The operator can display and set them by operating the
switches (Display and setting of some items need special operations of the switches).
2. Special functions: Service mode
The items in this mode are not displayed ordinarily. Each serviceman can display them by operating the
switches specially. This mode is used for special setting, testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting.
Page Page
t Operator mode (Outline) Service mode
6p 20p
A Display of KOMATSU logo 6p Monitoring 21p
A Display of inputting password 7p Mechanical Systems 26p
Abnormality
A Display of check of breaker mode 7p Electrical Systems 27p
Record
A Display of check before starting 7p Air-conditioning System/Heater System 33p
A Display of warning after check before starting 8p Maintenance Record 34p
A Display of ending of maintenance interval 8p Maintenance Mode Change 35p
A Display of check of working mode and travel speed 8p Phone Number Entry 37p
A Display of ordinary screen 8p Key-on Mode 38p
A Display of end screen 9p Unit 39p
B Selection of auto-deceleration 9p With/Without Attachment 40p
O (Special operation)
B Selection of working mode 9p Default Attachment/Maintenance Password 41p

B Selection of travel speed 10p Camera 42p
B Operation to stop alarm buzzer 10p ECO Display 43p
B Operation of windshield wiper 11p Breaker Detect 44p
B Operation of window washer 11p Pump Absorption Torque 45p
B Operation of air conditioner/heater 11p Adjustment Low Speed 46p
Operation to display camera mode Attachment Flow Adjustment 47p
B 12p
(if camera is installed)
Cylinder Cut-Out 48p
B Operation to display clock and service meter 12p
No Injection 49p
B Check of maintenance information 13p
Fuel Consumption 51p
Setting and display of user mode
B 13p Terminal Status 52p
(Including KOMTRAX messages for user)
C Display of energy-saving guidance 14p KOMTRAX GPS & Communication Status 53p
Settings MODEM S/N (TH300) 54p
C Display of caution monitor 14p
C Display of automatic judgment of breaker 15p MODEM IP Address (TH200) 55p
C Display of user code and failure code 15p Display of KOMTRAX message 56p
Function of checking display of LCD
D 17p
(Liquid Crystal Display)
D Function of checking service meter 17p
Function of changing attachment/maintenance
D 18p
password
4 PC300, 350-8
a Classification of operator mode

A: Display/Function from time when starting switch is turned ON to time when screen changes to ordi-
nary screen and display after starting switch is turned OFF
B: Display/Function when switch of machine monitor is operated
C: Display/Function when certain condition is satisfied
D: Display/Function which needs special operation of switch
PC300, 350-8 5
t Operator mode (Outline) a Display pattern of operator mode

a Only outline of the operator mode is described The contents of display from the time when
in this section. For details of contents/opera- starting switch is turned ON to time when
tion of each function/display, see the Structure, screen changes to ordinary screen depends on
function and maintenance standard, or Opera- the setting and condition of the machine.
tion and Maintenance Manual. A : When engine start lock is set effective
a The following are the displays or functions of B : When engine start lock is set ineffective
the operator mode explained in this section C : When working mode at start is set to
(including some items which need special breaker mode (B)
operations). D : When there is abnormal item in check-
before-starting items
Display pattern E : When there is maintenance item which is
A B C D E not maintained after specified interval
Display of KOMATSU logo 1 1 1 1 1
Display of inputting password 2 — — — —
Display of check of breaker mode — — 2 — —
Display of KOMATSU logo
Display of check before starting 3 2 3 2 2
When the starting switch is turned ON, the
Display of warning after check
before starting
— — — 3 — KOMATSU logo is displayed for 2 seconds.
a After the KOMATSU logo is displayed for 2
Display of ending of maintenance
interval
— — — — 3 seconds, the screen changes to “Display of
inputting password”, “Display of check of
Display of check of working mode
and travel speed
4 3 4 4 4 breaker mode (if B mode is set)”, or “Display of
check before starting”.
Display of ordinary screen 5 4 5 5 5
Display of end screen
Selection of auto-deceleration
Selection of working mode
Selection of travel speed
Operation to stop alarm buzzer
Operation of windshield wiper
Operation of windshield washer
Operation of air conditioner/heater
Operation to display camera mode (if camera is
installed)
Operation to display clock and service meter
Check of maintenance information a The following screen may be displayed instead
Setting and display of user mode (including of the above Display of inputting password
KOMTRAX messages for user) screen.
Display of energy-saving guidance a If this screen is displayed, call the person
Display of caution monitor responsible to operation of KOMTRAX in your
Display of automatic judgment of breaker Komatsu distributor and ask for remedy.
Display of user code and failure code
Function of checking display of LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display)
Function of checking service meter
Function of changing attachment/maintenance pass-
word
6 PC300, 350-8
Display of inputting password

After the KOMATSU logo is displayed, the screen
to input the engine start lock password is displayed.
a This screen is displayed only when the engine
start lock function is set effective.
a If the password is input normally, the screen
changes to “Display of check of breaker mode
(if B mode is set)” or “Display of check before
starting”.
a The machine monitor has some password
functions other than the engine start lock.
Those functions are independent from one
another.
Display of check before starting

When the screen changes to the check-before-
starting screen, the check before starting is carried
out for 2 seconds.
a If any abnormality is detected by the check
before starting, the screen changes to “Display
of warning after check before starting” or “Dis-
play of ending of maintenance interval”.
a If no abnormality is detected by the check
before starting, the screen changes to “Display
of check of working mode and travel speed”.
a The monitors (6 pieces) displayed on the screen
are the items under the check before starting.
Display of check of breaker mode
When the starting switch is turned ON, if the work-
ing mode is set to the breaker mode [B], a message
to inform the operator of starting in the breaker
mode is displayed on the screen.
k If an attachment other than the breaker is
used while the working mode is set to the
breaker mode [B], the machine may move
unexpectedly or may not operate normally
or the hydraulic components may be dam-
aged.
a After operation to check of the breaker mode is
finished, the screen changes to “Display of
check before starting”.
If No is selected: Working mode is set to econ-
omy mode [E]
If Yes is selected: Working mode is set to
breaker mode [B]
PC300, 350-8 7
Display of warning after check before starting Display of check of working mode and travel
If any abnormality is detected by the check before speed
starting, the warning monitor is displayed on the If the check before starting is finished normally, the
screen. screen to check the working mode and travel speed
a The following figure shows that the engine oil is displayed for 2 seconds.
level monitor (a) is warning of low of engine oil a After display of check of the working mode and
level. travel speed is finished, the screen changes to
“Display of ordinary screen”.
Display of ending of maintenance interval

When the check before starting is carried out, if a Display of ordinary screen
maintenance item is near or after the end of the set If the machine monitor starts normally, the ordinary
interval, the maintenance monitor is displayed for screen is displayed.
30 seconds to urge the operator to maintenance. a Service meter (a) or a clock is displayed at the
a This screen is displayed only when the mainte- center upper section of the screen (The ser-
nance function is effective. The color of the vice meter or clock is selected with [F4]).
maintenance monitor (yellow or red) indicates a ECO gauge (b) is displayed at the right end of
the length of the time after the maintenance the screen (It is turned ON and OFF in the ser-
interval. vice mode).
a Set or change the maintenance function in the
service mode.
a After display of this screen is finished, the
screen changes to “Display of check of work-
ing mode and travel speed”.
8 PC300, 350-8
Display of end screen Selection of working mode

When the starting switch is turned OFF, the end Select a working mode according to the following
screen is displayed for 5 seconds. procedure.
a Another message may be displayed on the 1. While the ordinary screen is displayed, press
end screen, depending on the message dis- the working mode selector switch, and the
play function of KOMTRAX. working mode selection screen is displayed.
a The following figure is the working mode
selection screen displayed when "With
attachment" is set (If "With attachment" is
not set in the service mode, the attach-
ment mode [ATT] is not displayed).
Selection of auto-deceleration
While the ordinary screen is displayed, if the auto-
deceleration switch is pressed, large auto-deceler-
ation monitor (a) is displayed for 2 seconds and the
setting of the auto-deceleration is changed. 2. Operate the function switches or working mode
a Each time the auto-deceleration switch is selector switch to select and confirm the work-
pressed, the auto-deceleration is turned ON ing mode which you will use.
and OFF alternately. Function switches
a If the auto-deceleration is turned ON, large q [F3]: Move to lower working mode
monitor (a) and auto-deceleration monitor (b) q [F4]: Move to upper working mode
are displayed simultaneously. q [F5]: Cancel selection and return to ordi-
a If the auto-deceleration is turned OFF, auto- nary screen
deceleration monitor (b) goes off. q [F6]: Confirm selection and return to ordi-
nary screen
Working mode selector switch
q Press: Move to lower working mode
q Hold down:Confirm selection and return to
ordinary screen
a If you do not touch any of the function
switches and working mode selector
switch for 5 seconds, the selection is con-
firmed and the screen changes to the ordi-
nary screen.
PC300, 350-8 9
3. When the ordinary screen is displayed again, Selection of travel speed

large working mode monitor (a) is displayed for While the ordinary screen is displayed, if the travel
2 seconds, and then the setting of the working speed shifting switch is pressed, large travel speed
mode is changed. monitor (a) is displayed for 2 seconds and the set-
a When large monitor (a) is displayed, the ting of the travel speed is changed.
display of working mode monitor (b) is a Each time the travel speed shifting switch is
changed, too. pressed, the travel speed is changed to Lo, Mi,
Hi, and Lo again in order.
a When large monitor (a) is displayed, the dis-
play of travel speed monitor (b) is changed,
too.
<Precautions for selecting breaker mode [B]>

q If breaker mode [B] is selected, both of the
control of the hydraulic pump and the setting of
the hydraulic circuit are changed.
q If an attachment other than the breaker is
used, the machine may move unexpectedly or Operation to stop alarm buzzer
may not operate normally or the hydraulic While the alarm buzzer is sounding, if the alarm
components may be damaged. buzzer cancel switch is pressed, the alarm buzzer
q After the breaker mode is selected, the screen stops.
to confirm the selection of the breaker mode is a Even if the alarm buzzer cancel switch is
displayed (The buzzer sounds intermittently pressed, the screen does not change.
while this screen is displayed).
q If the setting is confirmed on this screen, the
screen changes to the ordinary screen.
If No is selected:
Screen returns to screen to select working
mode.
If Yes is selected:
Working mode is set to breaker mode [B]
10 PC300, 350-8
Operation of windshield wiper Operation of air conditioner/heater

While the ordinary screen is displayed, if the wiper While the ordinary screen is displayed, press the air
switch is pressed, large wiper monitor (a) is dis- conditioner switch or heater switch, and the air con-
played for 2 seconds and the windshield wiper ditioner adjustment screen or heater adjustment
starts or stops. screen is displayed.
a Each time the wiper switch is pressed, the a While the air conditioner adjustment screen or
windshield wiper setting is changed to INT, heater adjustment screen is displayed, if you
ON, OFF, and INT again in order. do not touch any switch for 5 seconds, the
a When large monitor (a) is displayed, the dis- screen changes to the ordinary screen.
play of wiper monitor (b) is changed or turned a Air conditioner specification
OFF, too.
a If the windshield wiper is turned OFF, large
monitor (a) is not displayed.
a Heater specification
Operation of window washer

While the ordinary screen is displayed, if the win-
dow washer switch is pressed, the washing liquid is
splashed only while the switch is held down.
a Even if the window washer switch is pressed,
the screen does not change.
PC300, 350-8 11
Operation to display camera mode (if camera is a When an error that there is a user code occurs
installed) in the camera mode, if you do not touch any
When a camera is installed, if [F3] is pressed, the control lever for 10 seconds, the screen
multi-display changes to the camera image (Set the changes to the ordinary screen and displays
connection of the camera in the service mode). the error information.
a When two or more cameras are connected, the
image of one of them or the images of two of
them can be displayed.
If 2-camera image display [F4] is selected, the
image of camera 1 is displayed on the left side
of the screen and the image of camera 2 is dis-
played on the right side. The image of camera
3 is displayed only singly.
a If the images of 2 cameras are displayed
simultaneously, images are displayed at inter-
vals of 1 second on the right and left screen.
Operation to display clock and service meter

While the ordinary screen is displayed, press [F4],
and section (a) changes to the service meter and
a Up to 3 cameras can be connected. If the cam- clock alternately.
era mode is selected, however, only the image a When the clock is selected, adjust the time, set
of camera 1 is always displayed. 12-hour or 24-hour display, and set the sum-
mer time with the user mode function.
a If a caution is generated in the camera mode,

the caution monitor is displayed at the left
upper of the screen (The low hydraulic oil tem-
perature caution is not displayed there, how-
ever).
12 PC300, 350-8
Check of maintenance information Setting and display of user mode

While the maintenance monitor or ordinary screen (Including KOMTRAX messages for user)
is displayed, press [F5], and the maintenance table While the ordinary screen is displayed, press [F6],
screen is displayed. and the user menu screen is displayed.
a To reset the time left after finishing mainte- a There are following items in the user menu.
nance, more operations are necessary.
Breaker/Attachment Settings
User Message
Screen Adjustment
Clock Adjustment
Language
Economy Mode Adjustment
a The breaker/attachment setting menu is dis-

played only when "With attachment" is set in
the service mode.
PC300, 350-8 13
[KOMTRAX message] Display of energy-saving guidance

q There are 2 types of KOMTRAX message; 1 is When the machine is set in a certain operating con-
for the user and the other is for the service. dition, the energy-saving guidance screen is dis-
q For user: played automatically to urge the operator to the
A message transmitted from the KOMTRAX energy-saving operation.
base station for the user. If it is received, the a The energy-saving guidance is displayed when
message monitor is displayed on the ordinary the following condition is satisfied while the
screen. To see the contents of the message, display setting is set effective in the service
operate "User Message" in the above user mode.
menu. a Condition for display:
q For service: Engine is running + All levers have been in
A message transmitted from the KOMTRAX neutral for 5 minutes + Caution (Note) or user
base station for the service. Even if it is code is not generated (Note)
received, nothing is displayed on the ordinary Note: Excluding hydraulic oil low temperature
screen. To see the contents of the message, caution
operate "KOMTRAX message" display in the a If any lever or pedal is operated, or [F5] is
service menu. pressed, the screen returns to the ordinary
screen.
Display of caution monitor

If an abnormality which displays a caution monitor
occurs on the ordinary screen or camera mode
screen, the caution monitor is displayed large for a
moment and then displayed at (a) in the screen.
a On the camera mode screen, the caution mon-
itor flashes at the left upper of the screen when
the caution is generated.
14 PC300, 350-8
Display of automatic judgment of breaker Display of user code and failure code
If the operator performs breaker work in an If an abnormality which displays a user code and a
improper working mode, the breaker automatic failure code occurs on the ordinary screen or cam-
judgment screen is displayed to urge the operator era mode screen, all the information of the abnor-
to select a proper working mode. mality is displayed.
a The breaker automatic judgment is displayed (a): User code (3 digits)
when the following condition is satisfied while (b): Failure code (5 or 6 digits)
the display setting is set effective in the service (c): Telephone mark
mode. (d): Telephone No.
a Condition for display: a This screen is displayed only when an abnor-
When the pump controller measures the rear mality (failure code) for which a user code is
pump pressure for a certain time, the obtained set occurs.
value is similar to the pulsation wave form of a The telephone mark and telephone No. are
breaker operation which is held in the control- displayed only when the telephone No. is reg-
ler in advance. istered in the service mode.
a The breaker automatic judgment function is set a If multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously,
to Not used (Not displayed) when delivered. all the codes are displayed repeatedly in order.
a If this screen is displayed, check the setting of a Since the information of the displayed failure
the working mode. If the breaker is being code is recorded in the abnormality record in
used, select the breaker mode [B]. the service mode, check the details in the ser-
a To return to the ordinary screen, press [F5]. vice mode.
a When the caution monitor is also displayed,

the telephone mark is not displayed.
PC300, 350-8 15
a Remedies given by displayed user codes to operator to take (The following table is an excerpt from the
Operation and Maintenance Manual)
User code Failure mode Action
When emergency pump drive switch is at the up (emergency)
E02 Pump control system error position, normal operations become possible, but have
inspection carried out immediately.
E03 Swing brake system error Have inspection carried out immediately.
Engine controller power source error
E10 Engine controller drive system circuit error Have inspection carried out immediately.
(engine stopped)
Engine controller system error Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection carried
E11
Output reduced to protect engine out immediately.
Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection carried
E14 Abnormality in throttle system
out immediately.
Engine sensor (coolant temperature, fuel Operations are possible, but have inspection carried out
E15
pressure, oil pressure) system error immediately.
Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection carried
E0E Network error
out immediately.
16 PC300, 350-8
Function of checking display of LCD (Liquid Function of checking service meter

Crystal Display) To check the service meter while the starting switch
While the ordinary screen is displayed, if the follow- is turned OFF, operate the numeral input switches
ing numeral input switch and function switch are as follows. At this time, only the service meter sec-
operated as follows, all the LCD (Liquid Crystal Dis- tion displays.
play) lights up in white. q Operation of switches (simultaneous): [4] + [1]
q Operation of switches (simultaneous): [4] + [F2] a Since there is some time lag in start of the
a When finishing the operation of the switches, LCD, hold down the switches until the LCD dis-
release [F2] first. plays normally.
a If there is a display error in the LCD, only that a After the machine monitor is used continu-
part is indicated in black. ously, blue points (points which do not go off)
a The LCD panel sometimes has black points may be seen on this screen. This phenomenon
(points which are not lighted) and bright points does not indicate a failure or a defect.
(points which do not go off) for the reason of its
characteristics. If the number of the bright
points and black points does not exceed 10,
those points are not a failure or a defect.
a To return to the former screen, press the func-
tion switch.
PC300, 350-8 17
Function of changing attachment/maintenance 3. After the New password input screen is dis-
password played, input a new password with the numeral
When changing the attachment/maintenance pass- input switches and confirm it with the function
word used for the attachment setting function and switch.
maintenance setting function, follow these proce- a Set a new password of 4 – 6 digits (If it
dures. has only 3 or less digits or has 7 or more
1. While the ordinary screen is displayed, perform digits, it is not accepted).
the following operation with the numeral input q [F5]: Reset input numeral/Return to ordi-
switches. nary screen
q Operation of switches (While pressing [4], q [F6]: Confirm input numeral
perform the operation in order):
[4] + [5] o [5] o [5]
a This operation of the switches is not
accepted until 10 minutes pass after the
starting switch is turned on.
4. After the New password input screen is dis-

played again, input a new password again with
the numeral input switches and confirm it with
the function switch.
q [F5]: Reset input numeral/Return to ordi-
2. After the Attachment/Maintenance PASS- nary screen
WORD screen is displayed, input the current q [F6]: Confirm input numeral
password with the numeral input switches and a If a password different from the password
confirm it with the function switch. input before is input, the message to input
q [F5]: Reset input numeral/Return to ordi- again is displayed.
nary screen
q [F6]: Confirm input numeral
a Default password: [000000]
a If the input password is correct, the screen
changes to the next screen.
a If the input password is incorrect, the mes-
sage to input the password again is dis-
played.
18 PC300, 350-8
5. If the screen to notify completion of setting is

displayed and then the ordinary screen is dis-
played, the password is changed successfully.
PC300, 350-8 19
t Service mode a The items which can be selected in the

To change the operator mode to the service mode, service menu are as follows (including
perform the following operation. some items which need special opera-
This operation is always required when you use the tions).
service mode. 01 Monitoring
Mechanical Systems
1. Check of display of screen and operation of
switches 02 Abnormality Electrical Systems
While the ordinary screen is displayed, perform Record
Air-conditioning System/Heater
the following operation with the numeral input System
switches. 03 Maintenance Record
q Operation of switches (While pressing [4],
04 Maintenance Mode Change
perform the operation in order):
[4] + [1] o [2] o [3] 05 Phone Number Entry
a This operation of the switches is accepted Key-on Mode
only while the ordinary screen is displayed. Unit
With/Without Attachment
Attachment/Maintenance
06 Default
Password
Camera
ECO Display
Breaker Detect
Pump Absorption Torque
07 Adjustment Low Speed
Attachment Flow Adjustment
08 Cylinder Cut-Out
09 No Injection
10 Fuel Consumption
2. Selection of service menu
Terminal Status
When the Service menu screen is displayed,
the service mode is selected. Select a service 11 KOMTRAX GPS & Communication Status
menu you use with the function switches or Settings MODEM S/N (TH300)
numeral input switches. MODEM IP Address (TH200)
q [F3]: Move to lower menu
12 Display of KOMTRAX message
q [F4]: Move to upper menu
q [F5]: Return to ordinary screen (operator
mode)
q [F6]: Confirm selection
a You may enter a 2-digit code with the
numeral input switches to select the menu
of that code and confirm it with [F6].
20 PC300, 350-8
Monitoring
The machine monitor can monitor the condition of
the machine in real time by receiving signals from
various switches, sensors, and actuators installed
to many parts of the machine and the information
from the controllers which are controlling switches,
etc.
1. Selecting menu
Select “Monitoring” on the service menu
screen.
3. Deciding monitoring items

After selecting monitoring items, execute moni-
toring with the function switch or numeral input
switch.
a Execution with function switch: Double-
click or hold down [F6] (about 2 seconds).
a Execution with numeral input switch: Input
[99999] and press [F6].
a When monitoring only 2 items, for exam-
ple, select them and confirm with [F6]. If
[F6] is pressed once more at this time,
2. Selecting monitoring items monitoring is executed.
After the “Monitoring selection menu screen” is a If monitoring items are selected up to the
displayed, select items to be monitored with limit number, monitoring is executed auto-
the function switches or numeral input matically.
switches.
q [F1]: Move to next page (screen)
q [F2]: Move to previous page (screen)
q [F3]: Move to lower item
q [F4]: Move to upper item
q [F5]: Reset input numeral/Return to ser-
vice menu screen
a Selection with function switches: Select an
item with [F3] or [F4] and confirm it with
[F6].
a Selection with numeral input switches:
Enter a 5-digit code, and the item of that
code is selected directly. Confirm that item
with [F6].
a If the color of the selected box changes
from yellow to red, selection of the item of
that box is confirmed.
a Up to 6 monitoring items can be selected
at a time. You may not able to set up to 6
items, however, depending on the display
form of those items.
PC300, 350-8 21
4. Executing monitoring 6. Changing machine setting mode

After the “Executing monitoring screen” is dis- To change the setting of the working mode,
played, perform the necessary operation of the travel speed, or auto-deceleration during moni-
machine and check the monitoring information. toring, operate the corresponding switch under
a Monitoring information is indicated by the current condition, and the mode setting
value, ON/OFF, or special display. screen is displayed.
a The unit of display can be set to SI unit, While this screen is displayed, if the corre-
metric unit, or inch unit with the Initializa- sponding switch is operated further, the corre-
tion function in the service mode. sponding mode is changed.
a After finishing changing the setting, press
[F6] to return to the monitoring information
screen.
a If the setting is changed during monitoring,
the new setting is held even after the
screen returns to the ordinary screen after
monitoring is finished.
5. Holding monitoring information

The monitoring information can be held and
reset with the function switches.
q [F3]: Reset holding
q [F4]: Hold information (displayed data)
q [F5]: Return to monitoring selection menu
screen
a If the working mode is changed to breaker
mode [B], the screen to confirm the
change of the setting is displayed as in
changing the working mode on the ordi-
nary screen.
22 PC300, 350-8
Monitoring items table

Unit (Initial setting: ISO) Com-
Code ponent
Monitoring item (Display on screen) Remarks
No. ISO meter inch in
charge
00200 Controller Model Select — PUMP
00201 Machine ID — ENG
01002 Engine speed r/min rpm rpm ENG
01601 2nd Eng. Speed Command r/min rpm rpm PUMP
01100 F Pump Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
01101 R Pump Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
07400 Boom Raise PPC Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
07200 Arm Curl PPC Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
07300 Bucket Curl PPC Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
07301 Bucket Dump PPC Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
09001 Swing left PPC Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
09002 Swing right PPC Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
04107 Coolant Temperature °C °C °F ENG
04401 Hydr. Oil Temperature °C °C °F PUMP
01300 PC-EPC Sol. Curr.(F) mA mA mA PUMP
01302 PC-EPC Sol. Curr.(R) mA mA mA PUMP
01500 LS-EPC Sol. Curr. mA mA mA PUMP
08000 Merge-divider Sol. Curr.(Main) mA mA mA PUMP
08001 Merge-divider Sol. Curr.(LS) mA mA mA PUMP
01700 Service Sol. Curr. mA mA mA PUMP
03200 Battery Voltage V V V PUMP
03203 Battery Power Supply V V V ENG
04300 Battery Charge Vol. V V V MON
36400 Rail Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi ENG
37400 Ambient Pressure kPa kg/cm2 psi ENG
18500 Charge Temperature °C °C °F ENG
Absolute value indication
36500 Boost Pressure kPa kg/cm2 psi ENG (including atmospheric
pressure)
36700 Engine Torque Ratio % % % ENG
18700 Engine Output Torque Nm kgm lbft ENG
03000 Fuel Dial Pos Sens Volt V V V ENG
04200 Fuel Level Sensor Vol. V V V MON
04105 Eng. Water Temp. Vol. Lo V V V ENG
04402 Hydr. Temp. Sensor Vol. V V V PUMP
37401 Ambient Press Sens Volt V V V ENG
18501 Charge Temp Sens Volt V V V ENG
36501 Charge Press Sens Volt V V V ENG
36401 Rail Pressure Sens Volt V V V ENG
17500 Engine Power Mode — ENG
31701 Throttle Position % % % ENG
31706 Final Throttle Position % % % ENG
18600 Inject Fueling Command mg/st mg/st mg/st ENG
36200 Rail Press Command MPa kg/cm2 psi ENG
36300 Injection Timing Command CA CA CA ENG
37300 Fuel Rate l/h l/h gal/h ENG
01602 2nd Eng. Speed Command % % % PUMP
13113 Main Pump Absorb Torque Nm kgm lbft PUMP
15900 Boom Bottom Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
PC300, 350-8 23

Code ponent
charge
Swing ON•OFF PUMP
Travel ON•OFF PUMP
Boom Lower ON•OFF PUMP
01900 Pressure Switch 1
Boom Raise ON•OFF PUMP
Arm Curl ON•OFF PUMP
Arm Dump ON•OFF PUMP
Bucket Curl ON•OFF PUMP
Bucket Dump ON•OFF PUMP
01901 Pressure Switch 2
Service ON•OFF PUMP
Travel Steering ON•OFF PUMP
Travel Junction ON•OFF PUMP
Swing Brake ON•OFF PUMP
02300 Solenoid Valve 1 Merge-divider ON•OFF PUMP
2-Stage Relief ON•OFF PUMP
Travel Speed ON•OFF PUMP
02301 Solenoid Valve 2 Service Return ON•OFF PUMP
Lever Sw. ON•OFF PUMP
02200 Switch Input 1 Swing Release Sw. ON•OFF PUMP
Swing Brake Sw. ON•OFF PUMP
Model Select 1 ON•OFF PUMP
02201 Switch Input 2
Overload Alarm ON•OFF PUMP
02202 Switch Input 3 Key Switch (ACC) ON•OFF PUMP
Window Limit SW. ON•OFF PUMP
02204 Switch Input 5 P Limit SW. ON•OFF PUMP
W Limit SW. ON•OFF PUMP
Key Switch ON•OFF MON
Start ON•OFF MON
04500 Monitor input 1 Preheat ON•OFF MON
Light ON•OFF MON
Rad. Level ON•OFF MON
Air cleaner ON•OFF MON
04501 Monitor Input 2 Eng. Oil Level ON•OFF MON
Battery Charge ON•OFF MON
04502 Monitor Input 3 Swing Brake Sw. ON•OFF MON
F1 ON•OFF MON
F2 ON•OFF MON
Monitor Function F3 ON•OFF MON
04503
Switches F4 ON•OFF MON
F5 ON•OFF MON
F6 ON•OFF MON
SW1 ON•OFF MON
SW2 ON•OFF MON
Monitor 1st & 2nd SW3 ON•OFF MON
04504
Row Switches SW4 ON•OFF MON
SW5 ON•OFF MON
SW6 ON•OFF MON
24 PC300, 350-8

Code ponent
charge
SW7 ON•OFF MON
SW8 ON•OFF MON
Monitor 3rd & 4th SW9 ON•OFF MON
04505
Row Switches SW10 ON•OFF MON
SW11 ON•OFF MON
SW12 ON•OFF MON
SW13 ON•OFF MON
Monitor 5th Row
04506 SW14 ON•OFF MON
Switches
SW15 ON•OFF MON
18800 Water In Fuel ON•OFF ENG WIF: Water In Fuel
20216 ECM Build Version — ENG
20217 ECM CAL Data Ver — ENG
18900 ECM Internal Temp °C °C °F ENG
20400 ECM Serial No — ENG
20227 Monitor Ass'y P/N — MON
20402 Monitor Serial No — MON
20228 Monitor Prog. P/N — MON
20229 Pump Con. Ass'y P/N — PUMP
20403 Pump Con. Serial No — PUMP
20230 Pump Con. Prog. P/N — PUMP
a Entry order of items in table

The items are entered in the order of display on the monitoring selection menu screen.
a Unit
The display unit can be set to ISO, meter, or inch freely (Set it with Unit selecting in Initialization of the
service menu).
"CA" in the display unit is an abbreviation for crankshaft angle.
"mg/st" in the display unit is an abbreviation for milligram/stroke.
a Component in charge
MON: The machine monitor is in charge of detection of monitoring information.
ENG: The engine controller is in charge of detection of monitoring information.
PUMP: The pump controller is in charge of detection of monitoring information.
PC300, 350-8 25
Abnormality Record (Mechanical Systems) 3. Information displayed on “abnormality record”

The machine monitor classifies and records the screen
abnormalities which occurred in the past or which On the “Mechanical Systems” screen, the fol-
are occurring at present into the mechanical sys- lowing information is displayed.
tems, electrical systems, and air-conditioning sys- (a) : Occurrence order of abnormalities from
tem or heater system. latest one/Total number of records
To check the mechanical system abnormality (b) : Failure code
record, perform the following procedures. (c) : Contents of trouble
(d) : Number of occurrence time (Displayable
1. Selecting menu range: 0 – 65,535 times)
Select “Abnormality Record” on the “Service (e) : Service meter reading at first occurrence
Menu” screen. (f) : Service meter reach at last occurrence
q [F1]: Move to next page (screen) (if dis-
played)
q [F2]: Move to previous page (screen) (if
displayed)
q [F5]: Return to abnormality record screen
a If no abnormality record is recorded, "No
abnormality record" is displayed.
a If the number of occurrence time is 1 (first
occurrence), the service meter reading at
the first occurrence and that at the last
occurrence are the same.
a If [E] is displayed on the left of a failure
code, the abnormality is still occurring or
resetting of it has not been confirmed.
a For all the failure codes that the machine
2. Selecting sub menu monitor can record, see the failure codes
After the “Abnormality Record” screen is dis- table in “Abnormality Record (Electrical
played, select “Mechanical Systems” with the Systems)”.
function switches or numeral input switches.
q [F5]: Return to service menu screen
numeral input switches to select the record
a The following figure shows the display of
the air conditioner specification. The
heater specification and heaterless speci-
fication are different from each other in the
display of "03 Air-conditioning System",
which may not be displayed in the heater-
less specification.
26 PC300, 350-8
4. Resetting abnormality record

The contents of the mechanical system
abnormality record cannot be reset.
Abnormality Record (Electrical Systems)

The machine monitor classifies and records the
abnormalities which occurred in the past or which
are occurring at present into the mechanical sys-
tems, electrical systems, and air-conditioning sys-
tem.
To check the electrical system abnormality record,
perform the following procedures.
3. Information displayed on “abnormality record”
1. Selecting menu screen
Select “Abnormality Record” on the “Service On the “Electrical Systems” screen, the follow-
Menu” Screen. ing information is displayed.
(a) : Occurrence order of abnormalities from
latest one/Total number of records
(b) : Failure code
(c) : Contents of trouble
(d) : Number of occurrence time (Displayable
range: 0 – 65,535 times)
(e) : Service meter reading at first occurrence
(f) : Service meter reach at last occurrence
q [F1]: Move to next page (screen) (if dis-
played)
q [F2]: Move to previous page (screen) (if
displayed)
2. Selecting sub menu q [F5]: Return to “abnormality record” screen
After the “Abnormality Record” screen is dis- a If no abnormality record is recorded, "No
played, select “Electrical Systems” with the abnormality record" is displayed.
function switches or numeral input switches. a If the number of occurrence time is 1 (first
q [F3]: Move to lower item occurrence), the service meter reading at
q [F4]: Move to upper item the first occurrence and that at the last
q [F5]: Return to service menu screen occurrence are the same.
q [F6]: Confirm selection a If [E] is displayed on the left of a failure
a You may enter a 2-digit code with the code, the abnormality is still occurring or
numeral input switches to select the resetting of it has not been confirmed.
record of that code and confirm it with a For all the failure codes that the machine
[F6]. monitor can record, see the failure codes
a The following figure shows the display of table.
the air conditioner specification. The
heater specification and heaterless speci-
fication are different from each other in the
display of "03 Air-conditioning System",
which may not be displayed in the heater-
less specification.
PC300, 350-8 27
4. Resetting abnormality record 3) After the “Electrical Sys. Error Reset”

1) While the “Electrical Systems” screen is screen is displayed, operate the function
displayed, perform the following operation switches.
with the numeral input switches. q [F5]: Return to “Electrical systems”
q Operation of switches (While pressing screen (Reset mode)
[4], perform the operation in order): q [F6]: Execute reset
[4] + [1] o [2] o [3] a The following figure shows the screen
displayed when the items are reset
one by one (which is a little different
from the screen displayed when all
the items are reset together).
2) Check that the screen is set in the reset

mode, and then reset the items one by
one or together with the function switches.
a If the screen is set in the reset mode,
[CLEAR] graphic mark is indicated at 4) If the screen to notify completion of reset
[F2]. is displayed and then the “Electrical Sys-
q [F2]: Reset all items tems” (reset mode) screen is displayed,
q [F3]: Move to lower item the reset of the abnormality record is com-
q [F4]: Move to upper item pleted.
q [F5]: Return to abnormality record a After a while, the screen returns to
screen the “Electrical Systems” screen.
q [F6]: Reset selected item
a To reset items one by one: Select the
item to be reset with [F3] or [F4] and
press [F6].
a To reset all items together: Press [F2],
and all the items are reset, regardless
of selection of the items.
a If [E] is displayed on the left of a fail-
ure code, the resetting operation is
accepted but the information is not
reset.
28 PC300, 350-8
Failure codes table
Action Device in Category

Failure code Trouble (Displayed on screen)
code charge of record
Mechanical
— A000N1 Eng. Hi Out of Std MON
system
Mechanical
— AA10NX Air cleaner Clogging MON
system
Mechanical
— AB00KE Charge Voltage Low MON
system
Mechanical
— B@BAZG Eng. Oil Press. Low Speed Derate MON
system
Mechanical
— B@BAZG Eng. Oil Press. Low Torque Derate MON
system
Mechanical
— B@BAZK Eng Oil Level Low MON
system
Mechanical
— B@BCNS Eng. Overheat MON
system
Mechanical
— B@BCZK Eng. Water Lvl Low MON
system
Mechanical
— B@HANS Hydr. Oil Overheat PUMP
system
Electrical
E10 CA111 EMC Critical Internal Failure ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA115 Eng Ne and Bkup Speed Sens Error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA122 Chg Air Press Sensor High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA123 Chg Air Press Sensor Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E14 CA131 Throttle Sensor High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E14 CA132 Throttle Sensor Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA144 Coolant Temp Sens High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA145 Coolant Temp Sens Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA153 Chg Air Temp Sensor High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA154 Chg Air Temp Sensor Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA187 Sens Supply 2 Volt Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA221 Ambient Press Sens High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA222 Ambient Press Sens Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA227 Sens Supply 2 Volt High Error ENG
system
Mechanical
— CA234 Eng Overspeed ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA238 Ne Speed Sens Supply Volt Error ENG
system
PC300, 350-8 29

Electrical
E10 CA271 IMV/PCV1 Short Error ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA272 IMV/PCV1 Open Error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA322 Inj #1 Open/Short Error ENG
system
Electrical
system
Electrical
system
Electrical
system
Electrical
system
Electrical
system
Electrical
E10 CA342 Calibration Code Incompatibility ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA351 Injectors Drive Circuit Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA352 Sens Supply 1 Volt Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA386 Sens Supply 1 Volt High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA428 Water in Fuel Sensor High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA429 Water in Fuel Sensor Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA441 Engine Controller Battery Voltage Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA442 Engine Controller Battery Voltage High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA449 Rail Press Very High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA451 Rail Press Sensor High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA452 Rail Press Sensor Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA553 Rail Press High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA559 Rail Press Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA689 Ne Speed Sensor Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA731 Bkup Speed Sens Phase Error ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA757 All Persistent Data Lost Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA778 Bkup Speed Sensor Error ENG
system
30 PC300, 350-8

Electrical
E0E CA1633 KOMNET Datalink Timeout Error ENG
system
Electrical
E14 CA2185 Throt Sens Sup Volt High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E14 CA2186 Throt Sens Sup Volt Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA2249 Rail Press Very Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA2265 Electric Lift Pump High Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA2266 Electric Lift Pump Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA2555 Grid Htr Relay Volt Low Error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA2556 Grid Htr Relay Volt High Error ENG
system
Electrical
— D110KB Battery Relay Output PUMP
system
Electrical
— D196KA Service Return Relay Disc. PUMP
system
Electrical
— D196KB Service Return Relay S/C PUMP
system
Electrical
E02 DA25KP Press. Sensor Power Volt Low PUMP
system
Electrical
E0E DA2RMC Comm. Error (Pump Controller) PUMP
system
Electrical
— DA2SKQ Model Selection Signal For Model Code Input Mismatch PUMP
system
Electrical
E0E DAFRMC Comm. Error (Machine Monitor) PUMP
system
Electrical
— DHPAMA F Pump P.Sensor Error PUMP
system
Electrical
— DHPBMA R Pump P.Sensor Error PUMP
system
Electrical
— DHS3MA Arm Curl PPC Sen. Error PUMP
system
Electrical
— DHS4MA Bucket Curl PPC Sen. Error PUMP
system
Electrical
— DW43KA Travel Speed Sol. Disc. PUMP
system
Electrical
— DW43KB Travel Speed Sol. S/C PUMP
system
Electrical
E03 DW45KA Swing Brake Sol. Disc. PUMP
system
Electrical
E03 DW45KB Swing Brake Sol. S/C PUMP
system
Electrical
— DW91KA Travel Junction Sol. Disc. PUMP
system
Electrical
— DW91KB Travel Junction Sol. S/C PUMP
system
PC300, 350-8 31

Electrical
— DWJ0KA Merge-divider Sol. Disc. PUMP
system
Electrical
— DWJ0KB Merge-divider Sol. S/C PUMP
system
Electrical
— DWK0KA 2-stage Relief Sol. Disc. PUMP
system
Electrical
— DWK0KB 2-stage Relief Sol. S/C PUMP
system
Electrical
E02 DXA0KA PC-EPC Sol. Disc. PUMP
system
Electrical
E02 DXA0KB PC-EPC Sol. S/C PUMP
system
Electrical
— DXE0KA LS-EPC Sol. Disc. PUMP
system
Electrical
— DXE0KB LS-EPC Sol. S/C PUMP
system
Electrical
— DXE4KA Service Current EPC Solenoid Disc. PUMP
system
Electrical
— DXE4KB Service Current EPC Solenoid S/C PUMP
system
Electrical
— DY20KA Wiper Working Disc. PUMP
system
Electrical
— DY20MA Wiper Parking Error PUMP
system
Electrical
— DY2CKB Washer Drive S/C PUMP
system
Electrical
— DY2DKB Wiper Drive (For) S/C PUMP
system
Electrical
— DY2EKB Wiper Drive (Rev) S/C PUMP
system
a This table lists the failed sections in the order of the failure code.
a Those failure codes to which the corresponding number is not indicated in the action code space are not
displayed on the ordinary screen if a failure is found. They are just recorded in the abnormality record
(electrical system and mechanical system) of the service menu.
a The category of record is used for indicating to which of the electrical and mechanical system of the ser-
vice menu's abnormality record a given failure is classified.
a E of at beginning the action code indicates the following state.
q With E: The failure still remains without being resolved.
q Without E: The failure is already resolved.
32 PC300, 350-8
Abnormality Record (Air-conditioning System/ 3. Information displayed on “abnormality record”

Heater System) screen
The machine monitor classifies and records the On the “Air-conditioning System” or “Heater
abnormalities which occurred in the past or which System” screen, the following information is
are occurring at present into the mechanical sys- displayed.
tems, electrical systems, and air-conditioning (a): System/Component name
abnormalities or heater abnormalities. (b): Number of occurrence time
To check the air-conditioning abnormality record or (c): Condition (Normal or abnormal)
heater abnormality record, perform the following q [F2]: Reset abnormality record
procedures. q [F5]: Return to abnormality record screen
a All the following figures show the air condi- a If [E] is displayed on the left of a condition,
tioner specification. the abnormality is still occurring or reset-
ting of it has not been confirmed.
1. Selecting menu a If CAN disconnection is displayed in Com-
Select “Abnormality Record” on the “Service munication condition, communication can-
Menu” screen. not be carried out normally. Accordingly,
the conditions of other items are turned
OFF.
2. Selecting sub menu

After the “Abnormality Record” screen is dis-
played, select “Air-conditioning System” or 4. Resetting abnormality record
“Heater System” with the function switches or While the “abnormality record” screen is dis-
numeral input switches. played, press [F2], and the number of occur-
q [F3]: Move to lower item rence time of abnormality is reset. If it is
q [F4]: Move to upper item confirmed at this time that the abnormality has
q [F5]: Return to service menu screen been reset, the display changes to Normal.
a You may enter a 2-digit code with the a Heater specification
numeral input switches to select the In the heater specification, the display of “Air-
record of that code and confirm it with conditioning” is replaced with “Heater” and the
[F6]. items which are not related to the heater are
not displayed.
a Heaterless specification
In the heaterless specification, the abnormality
record menu and screen are not displayed.
PC300, 350-8 33
Maintenance Record a The following items can be selected in the

The machine monitor records the maintenance maintenance record.
information of the filters, oils, etc., which the opera- 01 Engine oil change
tor can display and check by the following opera- 02 Engine oil filter change
tions. When maintenance is carried out, if the data
03 Fuel main filter change
are reset in the operator mode, the number of the
41 Fuel pre-filter change
times of maintenance is recorded in this section.
04 Hydraulic oil filter change
05 Hydraulic tank breather change
1. Selecting menu 06 Corrosion resistor change
Select “Maintenance Record” on the “Service 07 Damper case service
Menu” screen. 08 Final drive case oil change
09 Machinery case oil change
10 Hydraulic oil change
3. Items displayed on maintenance record screen

The following items are displayed.
(a) : Maintenance items
(b) : Number of times of replacement up to now
(c) : Service meter reading (SMR) at previous
replacement
2. Selecting maintenance record item

After the “Maintenance Record” screen is dis-
played, select an item to be checked with the
q [F1]: Move to next page (screen)
q [F2]: Move to previous page (screen)
numeral input switches to select the item
of that code.
34 PC300, 350-8
Maintenance Mode Change a The following items can be selected on

The operating condition for maintenance function in the Change of maintenance mode screen.
the operation mode can be set and changed with 00 Maintenance mode on/off
this menu. 01 Engine oil change int.
q Set function effective or ineffective
02 Engine oil filter change int.
q Change set replacement interval (by items)
03 Fuel main filter change int.
q Initialize all set replacement intervals
41 Fuel pre filter change int.
1. Selecting menu 04 Hyd oil filter change int.
Select of “Maintenance Mode Change” on the 05 Hyd tank breather change int.
“Service Menu” screen. 06 Corrosion resistor change int.
07 Damper case service int.
08 Final drive case oil change int.
09 Machinery case change int.
10 Hydraulic oil change int.
99 Initialize all items
3. Contents of setting of Maintenance mode on/

off
After selecting “Maintenance Mode On/Off”, if
the screen is displayed, set ON or OFF with
the function switches.
q ON: Functions of all maintenance items
are set effective in operator mode
2. Selecting sub menu q OFF: Functions of all maintenance items
After the “Maintenance Mode Change” screen are set ineffective in operator mode
is displayed, select an item to change the set- q [F3]: Move to lower item
ting with the function switches or numeral input q [F4]: Move to upper item
switches. q [F5]: Cancel selection and return to Main-
q [F1]: Move to next page (screen) tenance mode change screen
q [F2]: Move to previous page (screen) q [F6]: Confirm selection and return to
q [F3]: Move to lower item Maintenance mode change screen
q [F4]: Move to upper item a Even if ON/OFF of each item has been
q [F5]: Return to service menu screen set, if the above setting is changed, it is
a You may enter a 2-digit code with the applied.
numeral input switches to select the item
PC300, 350-8 35
4. Contents of setting of each maintenance item 5. Function of initializing all items

After selecting each maintenance item, if the After selecting “All Default Value”, if the screen
screen is displayed, set the item with the func- is displayed, set with the function switches.
tion switches. q If this operation is executed, the set val-
q Initial value: Maintenance interval set in ues of all the maintenance items are ini-
machine monitor (Recommended by man- tialized.
ufacturer and not changeable). q [F5]: Return to Maintenance mode change
q Set value: Maintenance interval which can screen
be set freely. Maintenance functions in q [F6]: Execute initialization
operator mode operate on basis of this set a A while after [F6] is pressed, the initializa-
time (which is increased or decreased by tion completion screen is displayed. Then,
50 hours). if the “Maintenance Mode Change” screen
q ON: Maintenance function of this item is is displayed, initialization is completed.
set effective in operator mode.
q OFF: Maintenance function of this item is
set ineffective in operator mode.
q [F3]: Select Reduce set value (Upper) or
OFF (Lower).
q [F4]: Select Increase set value (Upper) or
ON (Lower).
q [F5]: Cancel setting before confirmation
and return to Maintenance mode
change screen.
q [F6]: Confirm setting of upper or lower line.
a After the setting of the upper and lower
lines is confirmed with [F6] and the screen
changes to the Maintenance mode
change screen with [F5], the setting is
effective.
a If the set value of an item set to “ON” is
changed after 1 or more operating hours
since the start of setting, the change is
recognized as a resetting operation.
36 PC300, 350-8
Phone Number Entry a If [F6] is pressed without inputting a digit,

The telephone No. displayed when the user code/ there is not information of telephone No.
failure code is displayed in the operator mode can Accordingly, no telephone No. is displayed
be input and changed according to the following in the operator mode.
procedure.
If a telephone No. is not input with this function, no
telephone No. is displayed in the operator mode.
1. Selecting menu
Select “Phone Number Entry” on the “Service
Menu” screen.
2. Registering and changing telephone No.

After the “Phone Number Entry” screen is dis-
played, register or change the telephone No.
q [F2]: Reset all input No.
q [F3]: Move to left position (if not blank)
q [F4]: Move to right position (if not blank)
q [F5]: Reset input digit/Return to service
menu
q [F6]: Confirm input
a Up to 14 digits can be input from the left.

Input nothing in the surplus positions.
a If one of the input digits is wrong, move to
that digit (orange background) and over-
write it with the correct digit.
PC300, 350-8 37
Default (Key-on Mode) q Mode at Previous Key-off: Final mode in

Check or change various settings related to the previous operation is displayed when key
machine monitor and machine by "Default". is ON
The function of working mode with key ON is used q [F3]: Move to lower item
to set the working mode displayed on the machine q [F4]: Move to upper item
monitor when the starting switch is turned ON. q [F5]: Cancel selection and return to
“Default” screen
1. Selecting menu q [F6]: Confirm selection and return to
Select “Default” on the “Service Menu” screen. “Default” screen
a When the machine is delivered, Mode at
previous key-OFF is set.
a If "With attachment" is not set, the attach-
ment mode cannot be selected.
a While Attachment mode [ATT] is selected,
if "Without attachment" is set, Power
mode [P] is displayed when the key is
turned ON.
a If the engine is stopped while breaker
mode [B] is selected in the operator mode,
Breaker mode [B] is always displayed,
regardless of the above setting.

After the “Default” screen is displayed, select
“Key-on Mode” with the function switches or
numeral input switches.
a Select this item similarly to an item on the
“Service Menu” screen.
3. Selecting mode
After the “Key-on Mode” screen is displayed,
select the mode to be set with the function
switches.
q Power Mode: [P] is displayed when key is
ON
q Economy Mode: [E] is displayed when key
is ON
q Lifting Mode: [L] is displayed when key is
ON
q Breaker Mode: [B] is displayed when key
is ON
q Attachment Mode: [ATT] is displayed
when key is ON
38 PC300, 350-8
Default (Unit) a When the machine is delivered, the SI unit

Check or change various settings related to the system is set.
machine monitor and machine by "Default".
The unit selecting function is used to select the unit
of the data displayed for monitoring, etc.
1. Selecting menu
Select “Default” on the “Service Menu” screen.

“Unit” with the function switches or numeral
input switches.
3. Selecting unit
After the “Unit” screen is displayed, select the
unit to be set with the function switches.
q [F3]: Move to lower unit
q [F4]: Move to upper unit
q [F5]: Cancel selection and return to
q [F6]: Confirm selection and return to
PC300, 350-8 39
Default (With/Without Attachment) a When an attachment is installed, if this

Check or change various settings related to the setting is not carried out normally, the
machine monitor and machine by "Default". attachment cannot be set in the operator
The "With/Without attachment" function is used to mode. As a result, the attachment may not
set an installed or a remove attachment. work normally or the hydraulic compo-
nents may have trouble.
1. Selecting menu
Select "Default" on the “Service Menu” screen.

After the "Default" screen is displayed, select
“With/Without Attachment” with the function
switches or numeral input switches.
3. Selecting With/Without
After the “With/Without Attachment” screen is
displayed, select the setting with the function
switches.
q Without Attachment:
When attachment is not installed
q With Attachment:
When attachment is installed
q [F3] : Move to lower item
q [F4] : Move to upper item
q [F5] : Cancel selection and return to
Default screen
q [F6] : Confirm selection and return to
Default screen
40 PC300, 350-8
Default (Attachment/Maintenance Password) 3. Selecting Disable/Enable

Check or change various settings related to the After the Attachment/Maintenance Password
machine monitor and machine by "Default". screen is displayed, select the setting with the
The function of setting attachment/maintenance function switches.
password is used to set the display of the password q Disable : Password screen is not dis-
screen when the functions related to the attach- played
ment and maintenance are used in the operator q Enable : Password screen is displayed
mode. q [F3] : Move to lower item
q [F4] : Move to upper item
1. Selecting menu q [F5] : Cancel selection and return to
Select “Default” on the “Service Menu” screen. "Default" screen
q [F6] : Confirm selection and return to
"Default" screen

“Attachment/Maintenance Password” with the 4. Displaying attachment/maintenance password
function switches or numeral input switches. screen
a Select this item similarly to an item on the When the following operation is performed, the
“Service Menu” screen. password screen is displayed in the operator
mode.
q Maintenance mode: The Maintenance
table screen is changed to the Mainte-
nance interval reset screen.
q User mode: On the User menu screen, the
Breaker/Attachment setting menu is
selected and the screen is changed to the
Attachment setting menu screen.
5. Changing attachment/maintenance password

The password can be changed by operating
the switches specially in the operator mode.
a See Attachment/Maintenance password
changing function in the operator mode.
a Default password: [000000]
a If the password setting is changed from
Enable to Disable, the password is reset
to the default. When Enable is set again,
be sure to set a new password.
a The attachment/maintenance password is
different from the engine start lock pass-
word.
PC300, 350-8 41
Default (Camera) 3. Selecting camera setting

Check or change various settings related to the After the “Camera” setting screen is displayed,
machine monitor and machine by "Default". select the setting with the function switches.
The camera setting function is used to set installa- q OFF: Camera is not used
tion and removal of a camera. q Original Image: Image of connected cam-
era is displayed in origi-
1. Selecting menu nal position (as in mirror,
Select “Default” on the “Service Menu” screen. used as back monitor)
q Reverse Image: Image of connected cam-
era is displayed in reverse
position (as seen directly,
used as front or side mon-
itor)
q [F3]: Move to left item
q [F4]: Move to right item
q [F5]: Cancel setting before confirmation
and return to “Default” screen
q [F6]: Confirm selection in each line
a After “Camera” screen is displayed, cam-
era 1 can be always set. When 2 or more
cameras are connected, if camera 1 is set,
the screen changes to setting of camera 2
automatically.
2. Selecting sub menu a After confirming the setting of each line
After the “Default” screen is displayed, select with [F6], return to the "Default" screen
“Camera” with the function switches or with [F5], and the setting is effective.
numeral input switches. a If a camera is connected but not set nor-
a Select this item similarly to an item on the mally with this function, the graphic mark
“Service Menu” Screen. of camera is not displayed at [F3] in the
operator mode. Accordingly, the image of
the camera cannot be used.
a If 2 or more cameras are connected, be
sure to set the use of them from camera 1
in order.
a The function of displaying 2 images simul-
taneously is effective when use of camera
1 and camera 2 is set.
a When a camera is installed, check that the
displayed image is not inverted horizon-
tally.
42 PC300, 350-8
Default (ECO Display) a If ECO display is turned ON, ECO is dis-

Check or change various settings related to the played when the screen changes to the
machine monitor and machine by "Default". ordinary screen. Even if the energy saving
The ECO display setting function is used to set the guidance is turned ON, however, it is not
display of the ECO gauge and energy saving guid- displayed if the condition for display is not
ance. satisfied on the ordinary screen.
1. Selecting menu
Select “Default” on the “Service Menu” screen.
a Display of ECO gauge (a)

“ECO Display” with the function switches or
a Display of energy saving guidance
3. Selecting display setting

After the “ECO Display” screen is displayed,
select the setting with the function switches.
q ON : Display ECO
q OFF: Do not display ECO
q [F3] : Move to left item
q [F4] : Move to right item
q [F5] : Cancel setting before confirmation
and return to "Default" screen
q [F6] : Confirm selection in each line
a After confirming the setting of the upper
and lower lines with [F6], return to the
"Default" screen with [F5], and the setting
is effective.
PC300, 350-8 43
Default (Breaker Detect) 3. Selecting display setting

Check or change various settings related to the After the "Breaker Detect" screen is displayed,
machine monitor and machine by "Default". select the setting with the function switches.
The function of setting breaker automatic judgment q [F3]: Move to lower item
is used to set the display to give warning when the q [F4]: Move to upper item
breaker is used in an improper working mode. q [F5]: Cancel selection and return to
Default screen
1. Selecting menu q [F6]: Confirm selection and return to
Select “Default” on the “Service Menu” screen. Default screen
a When the machine is delivered, Disable is
set.

After the “Default” screen is displayed, select a Display of "Breaker Detect"
"Breaker Detect" with the function switches or
“Service menu” screen.
44 PC300, 350-8
Adjustment (Pump Absorption Torque(F)) 3. Selecting absorption torque

The operator can adjust various items related to the After the "Pump Absorption Torque(F)" screen
machine with the machine monitor. is displayed, select a set value on the right side
The pump absorption torque(F) function is used to with the function switches.
finely adjust the absorption torque on the rear side q Set value: For actual torque adjustment
of the hydraulic pump. value, see table
q [F3]: Increase set value
1. Selecting menu q [F4]: Decrease set value
Select “Adjustment” on the “Service Menu” screen. q [F6]: Confirm setting and return to Adjust-
ment menu screen
a The 3 digits on the left side do not vary
since they are the code of this function.

After the “Adjustment” screen is displayed,
select “Pump Absorption Torque(F)” with the
function switches or numeral input switches. a Relationship between set value and torque
a Select this item similarly to an item on the adjustment value
“Service Menu” screen. Set
Code Torque adjustment value
value
000 +78.4 Nm {+8 kgm}
001 +58.8 Nm {+6 kgm}
002 +39.2 Nm {+4 kgm}
003 +19.6 Nm {+2 kgm}
021 004 0 Nm {0 kgm}
005 –19.6 Nm {–2 kgm}
006 –39.2 Nm {–4 kgm}
007 –58.8 Nm {–6 kgm}
008 –78.4 Nm {–8 kgm}
PC300, 350-8 45
Adjustment (Pump Absorption Torque(R)) 3. Selecting absorption torque

The operator can adjust various items related to the After the "Pump Absorption Torque(R)" screen
machine with the machine monitor. is displayed, select a set value on the right side
The pump absorption torque(R) function is used to with the function switches.
finely adjust the absorption torque on the rear side q Set value: For actual torque adjustment
of the hydraulic pump. value, see table
q [F3]: Increase set value
1. Selecting menu q [F4]: Decrease set value
Select “Adjustment” on the “Service Menu” screen. q [F6]: Confirm setting and return to Adjust-
ment menu screen

select “Pump Absorption Torque(R)” with the
a Select this item similarly to an item on the a Relationship between set value and torque
“Service Menu” screen. adjustment value
Set
Code Torque adjustment value
value
000 +78.4 Nm {+8 kgm}
001 +58.8 Nm {+6 kgm}
002 +39.2 Nm {+4 kgm}
003 +19.6 Nm {+2 kgm}
022 004 0 Nm {0 kgm}
005 –19.6 Nm {–2 kgm}
006 –39.2 Nm {–4 kgm}
007 –58.8 Nm {–6 kgm}
008 –78.4 Nm {–8 kgm}
46 PC300, 350-8
Adjustment (Low speed) 3. Selecting travel Low speed

The operator can adjust various items related to the After the "Low Speed" setting screen is dis-
machine with the machine monitor. played, select a set value on the right side with
The travel Low speed setting function is used to the function switches.
finely adjust the travel Low speed. q Set value: For actual travel Low speed
value, see table
1. Selecting menu q [F3]: Increase set value
Select “Adjustment” on the “Service Menu” screen. q [F4]: Decrease set value
q [F6]: Confirm setting and return to Adjust-
ment menu screen

select “Low speed” with the function switches
or numeral input switches.
a Select this item similarly to an item on the a Relationship between set value and travel
“Service Menu” screen. Low speed value
Set
Code Travel Low speed value
value
000 3.2 km/h
001 2.8 km/h
020
002 3.0 km/h
003 3.4 km/h
PC300, 350-8 47
Adjustment (Attachment Flow Adjustment) 3. Selecting distribution of oil flow

The operator can adjust various items related to the After the screen of "Attachment Flow Adjust-
machine with the machine monitor. ment" is displayed, select a set value on the
The function of "Attachment Flow Adjustment" is right side with the function switches.
used to finely adjust the oil flow to the attachment in q Set value: For actual distribution of flow,
compound operation. see table
1. Selecting menu q [F3]: Increase set value
Select “Adjustment” on the “Service Menu” q [F4]: Decrease set value
screen. q [F6]: Confirm setting and return to Adjust-
ment menu screen

select “Attachment Flow Adjustment” with the
function switches or numeral input switches. a Relationship between set value and distri-
a Select this item similarly to an item on the bution of flow to attachment
“Service Menu” screen. Set Distribution of flow to
Code
value attachment
000 50 %
001 70 %
044
002 100 %
003 40 %
48 PC300, 350-8
Cylinder Cut-Out
The operator can perform "Cylinder Cut-Out" oper-
ation with the machine monitor.
"Cylinder Cut-Out" operation means to run the
engine with 1 or more fuel injectors disabled electri-
cally to reduce the number of effective cylinders.
This operation is used to find out a cylinder which
does not output power normally (combustion in it is
abnormal).
1. Selecting menu
Select “Cylinder Cut-Out” on the “Service
Menu” screen.
3. Resetting Cut-Out cylinder

When changing a cylinder to be Cut-Out or
when Cylinder Cut-Out operation is finished,
select a Cut-Out cylinder to be reset with the
function switches.
a This operation may be performed while
the engine is running.
a When [F6] is pressed, if background (a) of
the selected cylinder No. becomes blue,
the cylinder is reset.
a If the machine monitor resets a Cut-Out
cylinder but the engine controller cannot
reset that Cut-Out cylinder, the background
2. Selecting cylinder to be disabled (a) of the cylinder No. becomes red.
After the "Cylinder Cut-Out" screen is dis- a The Cut-Out operation is not automatically
played, select a cylinder to be Cut-Out with the reset after the screen returns to the opera-
function switches. tor mode. Accordingly, be sure to perform
q [F1]: Move selection mark (R) to left the resetting operation after the cylinder
q [F2]: Move selection mark (R) to right cut-out operation is finished.
q [F3]: Reset holding
q [F4]: Hold 4. Function of holding displayed information
q [F5]: Return to service menu screen If [F4] is pressed during the cylinder Cut-Out
q [F6]: Confirm selection operation, the displayed information is newly
a This operation may be performed while held (c) (The real-time information is kept dis-
the engine is running. played on the left side).
a When [F6] is pressed, if background (a) of While the information is held, if [F3] is pressed,
the selected cylinder No. becomes white, the holding function is reset.
the cylinder is Cut-Out. a The holding function is effective, regard-
a If the machine monitor Cut-Out a cylinder less of setting of the reduced cylinder
but the engine controller cannot Cut-Out mode operation.
that cylinder, the background (a) of the
cylinder No. becomes yellow.
a One or more cylinders can be Cut-Out.
a In the cylinder Cut-Out operation, the
auto-deceleration function can be
selected. If the auto-deceleration is turned
ON, auto-deceleration monitor (b) is dis-
played.
PC300, 350-8 49
[Reference] No Injection
q If a normally operating cylinder is Cut-Out, If the engine is operated after long storage of the
the following phenomena occur. machine, it may be worn or damaged because of
1) Lowering of engine speed insufficient lubrication with oil. To prevent this, the
2) Increase of final injection rate com- function to lubricate the engine before starting it by
mand (quantity) cranking it without injecting fuel is installed.
q If the engine is running near the high idle, Set the no-injection cranking while the engine is
however, the engine speed may not lower stopped.
for the reason of engine control.
q In this case, lower the engine speed with 1. Selecting menu
the fuel control dial and judge by increase Select “No Injection” on the “Service Menu”
of the injection rate command. screen.
2. Displaying check screen

If the "No injection" screen is displayed, the
machine monitor asks the operator if no injec-
tion cranking should be performed. Answer
with the function switch.
q [F5]: Do not perform (Return to Service
menu screen)
q [F6]: Perform
a While the screen is changing to the follow-
ing screen, the screen of "Communication
between controllers is being checked" is
displayed.
50 PC300, 350-8
3. Starting no injection cranking 5. Prohibiting no injection cranking

If no injection cranking (Fuel injection in no cyl- If the operator tries to perform the no injection
inders) becomes effective, that is displayed on cranking while the engine is running, the mes-
the screen. Under this condition, crank the sage that the engine is running is displayed
engine with the starting motor. and the no injection cranking is not set effec-
a While the screen is changing to the follow- tive.
ing screen, the screen of "Setting is being a This function can be selected even while
prepared" is displayed. the engine is running. If the no injection
a Limit the cranking time to 20 seconds to cranking is performed, however, the mes-
protect the starting motor. sage of "Engine is running" is displayed
on the screen.
4. Finishing no injection cranking

After completing the no injection cranking
operation, press [F6], and finish of no injection
cranking is displayed and the screen returns to
the “Service Menu” screen automatically.
PC300, 350-8 51
Fuel Consumption 3. Display and function during measurement

This function calculates the hourly fuel consump- Clock mark (a) flashes during measurement.
tion from the actual fuel consumption in a measur- a While the fuel consumption is being mea-
ing period and indicates it. sured, the operator can work with the
1. Selecting menu operator mode and other functions. Mea-
Select “Fuel Consumption” on the “Service surement is not finished until this screen is
Menu” screen. displayed again and [F1] is pressed (Even
if the starting switch is turned OFF, this
function is kept effective, although fuel
consumption is measured only while the
engine is running).
2. Starting measurement
After the screen of “Fuel Consumption” is dis-
played, start measurement with the function
switches.
q [F1]: Start 4. Finishing measurement
q [F2]: Clear Press [F1], and measurement is finished and
q [F5]: Return to Service menu screen the data are displayed on the finishing date
a When the screen of Fuel consumption is and time side.
displayed, if a data is indicated, it is the
data of the previous measurement. This 5. Displaying fuel consumption
data is not an obstacle to new measure- If the measurement is finished, the hourly fuel
ment and can be reset by pressing [F2]. consumption calculated from the fuel con-
a If [F1] is pressed, the data is displayed on sumption calculated by the engine controller
the starting date and time side and mea- and the elapsed time are displayed.
surement starts.
a The display unit of the fuel changes

according to the unit set with the default
(unit setting) function.
SI and meter: l/h
inch: gal/h
52 PC300, 350-8
KOMTRAX Settings (Terminal Status) 3. Contents of display of terminal status

The setting condition and operating condition of On the “Terminal Status” screen, the following
KOM TR AX c an b e c he c k e d wi t h Display of items are displayed.
KOMTRAX setting. q Terminal type: Model name of KOMTRAX
Setting condition of terminal is used to check the communication MODEM
setting condition of the KOMTRAX terminal. q KOMTRAX communication: Executing con-
dition of station opening inspection
1. Selecting menu q GMT time: Greenwich Meant Time
Select “KOMTRAX Settings” on the “Service q [F5]: Return to KOMTRAX settings screen
Menu” screen.

After the “KOMTRAX Settings” screen is dis-
played, select “Terminal Status” with the func-
tion switches or numeral input switches.
Service menu screen.
a The following figure shows the display when
Model TH300 KOMTRAX is installed. When
TH200 is installed, “03 IP Adress” is dis-
played.
PC300, 350-8 53
KOMTRAX Settings (GPS & Communication Sta- 3. Contents of display of GPS & communication
tus) status
The setting condition and operating condition of On the screen of “GPS & Communication Sta-
KOMTRAX can be checked with “KOMTRAX Set- tus”, the following items are displayed.
tings”. q Positioning: Positioning condition of GPS
GPS & communication status is used to check the q Communication: Communication environ-
condition of positioning and communication of the ment of communication MODEM and con-
KOMTRAX terminal. necting condition of communication
MODEM
1. Selecting menu q Number of message not yet sent: Number
Select “KOMTRAX Settings” on the “Service of mails which are saved in machine mon-
Menu” screen. itor and not transmitted yet
q [F5]: Return to KOMTRAX settings screen

played, select GPS & communication status
with the function switches or numeral input
switches.
a The following figure shows the display when
Model TH300 KOMTRAX is installed. When
TH200 is installed, “03 IP Adress” is dis-
played.
54 PC300, 350-8
KOMTRAX Setting (MODEM S/N: TH300) 3. Contents of display of Modem S/N

The setting condition and operating condition of The serial No. of TH300 Modem is displayed.
KOM TR AX c an b e c he c k e d wi t h Display of q [F5]: Return to KOMTRAX settings screen
KOMTRAX setting.
MODEM S/N is used to check the serial No. of the
KOMTRAX communication MODEM.
1. Selecting menu
Select “KOMTRAX Settings” on the “Service
Menu” screen.

played, select “Modem S/N” with the function
PC300, 350-8 55
KOMTRAX Settings (IP Address: TH200) 3. Contents of display of IP address

The setting condition and operating condition of The telephone No. and IP address (2 systems)
KO M TRAX c an b e c h ec ke d w ith Dis pla y of of TH200 MODEM are displayed.
KOMTRAX settings. q [F5]: Return to KOMTRAX setting screen
IP address is used to check the IP address of the a The IP address is a No. specific to each
KOMTRAX communication MODEM. MODEM which is required when commu-
nication is made between the MODEM
1. Selecting menu and the server.
Select "KOMTRAX Settings" on the service
menu screen.

played, select “IP Address” with the function
56 PC300, 350-8
Display of KOMTRAX message 3. Display of message (with return mail function)

Special messages for the serviceman sent from the If a box to enter a value with the numeral keys
KOMTRAX base station (a distributor, etc.) can be is displayed under the message, enter a
checked with this function. proper number with the numeral input switches
If there is setting in a message, a return mail can be and function switches and confirm it, and the
sent by using numeral input switches. information is returned to the KOMTRAX base
station.
1. Operation to display menu q [F5]: Return to service menu screen
Select "Service message" on the service menu q [F6]: Confirm and return input value
screen. a This message is different from a message
transmitted to the operator in the operator
mode.
a Since this message is special for the ser-
viceman, the message monitor is not dis-
played when it is received as in the
operator mode.
2. Display of message (Read-only)

If there is a message, its contents are dis-
played. If there is not a message, "No mes-
sage" is displayed.
a This message is different from a message
transmitted to the operator in the operator
mode.
a Since this message is special for the ser-
viceman, the message monitor is not dis-
played when it is received as in the
operator mode.
PC300, 350-8 57
SEN02626-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
58
SEN02663-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Handling voltage circuit of engine controller ................................................................................................... 2
Preparation work for troubleshooting of electrical system .............................................................................. 3
Procedure for testing diodes ........................................................................................................................... 7
Pm clinic service ............................................................................................................................................. 8
PC300, 350-8 1
Handling voltage circuit of engine

controller 1
1. Before disconnecting or connecting a connec-
tor between the engine controller and engine,
be sure to turn the starting switch OFF.
2. If a T-adapter is inserted in or connected to a

connector between the engine controller and
engine for troubleshooting, do not start the
engine.
a You may turn the starting switch to the
OFF or ON position but must not turn it to
the START position.
2 PC300, 350-8
Preparation work for 4) Insert or connect troubleshooting T-adapt-

troubleshooting of electrical ers in or to connectors CM01, CM02, and
CM03 of machine monitor (4).
system 1 a Connectors CM02 and CM03 are of
a When carrying out troubleshooting of an elec- the same type. When returning them,
tric circuit related to the machine monitor, check the mark plates of the mount-
e n g i n e c o n t r o l l e r, p u m p c o n t r o l l e r, o r ing brackets and take care not to
KOMTRAX communication MODEM, expose make a wrong connection.
the related connectors according to the follow-
ing procedure.
a Disconnect and connect the connectors having
special locking mechanisms according to the
procedure shown below.
1. Machine monitor
1) Remove 2 mounting bolts and cover (1).
a One of the mounting bolts is installed
in the cover on the right of the day-
light sensor.
a While removing the mounting bolts,
disconnect connector P31 of the day-
light sensor.
2) Remove cover (2).
a The cover is fixed with clips. Remove 2. Engine controller
it by pull it up. a The engine controller is installed in the left
a While removing the cover, discon- side of the engine.
nect connector M04 of the cigarette 1) Open the engine hood.
lighter. 2) Insert or connect troubleshooting T-
adapter in or to connectors ENGINE,
CE02 and CE03 of engine controller (3).
a Connectors are fixed with screw.
Loosen the screws before discon-
necting them.
a When returning the connectors back
to their position, tighten them to the
specified torque.
3 Screw: 2.82 Nm {0.288 kgm}
3) Remove 1 mounting bolt and duct (3).
PC300, 350-8 3
3. Pump controller a The connectors of the pump control-

1) Slide the operator's seat and seat stand to ler have a special locking mecha-
the forward end. nism. Disconnect them according to
2) Remove the 5 mounting bolts and cool & steps (a) – (c) and connect them
hot box (6). according to steps (d) – (f) as shown
a While removing the cool & hot box, below.
disconnect the drain hose. Disconnection: (a) Unlock – (b)
3) Remove the 2 mounting bolts, 1 fastener, Slide lever – (c) Disconnect connec-
and magazine box (7). tor.
4) Remove the 3 mounting bolts and cover Connection: (d) Position connector –
(8). (e) Slide lever – (f) Lock.
5) Remove fuse box cover (9) and cover
(10).
a Since the underside of cover (10) is
clamped, pull it up.
6) Remove the 7 mounting bolts and cover
(11).
4. KOMTRAX communication module

1) Slide the operator's seat and seat stand to
the forward end.
2) Remove the 5 mounting bolts and cool &
hot box (6).
a While removing the cool & hot box,
disconnect the drain hose.
7) Connect the troubleshooting adapters to
3) Remove the 2 mounting bolts, 1 fastener,
connectors C01 and C02 of pump control-
and magazine box (7).
ler (12).
a Install the adapters to only the wiring
(8).
harness side.
5) Remove fuse box cover (9) and cover
(10).
a Since the underside of cover (10) is
clamped, pull it up.
(11).
4 PC300, 350-8
7) Connect troubleshooting T-adapters to con- a Removal and installation of sensor

nectors CK01 and CK02 of KOMTRAX A deep socket is necessary for removal
communication module (13). and installation of the engine oil pressure
a Cable (14) is for the communication switch. See "Tools for testing, adjusting,
antenna. and troubleshooting".
6. Boost pressure and temperature sensor

(BOOST PRESS & IMT)
a Disconnection and connection of con-
nector
The connector of the boost pressure and
temperature sensor has a special locking
mechanism. Disconnect it according to
steps (a) – (b) and connect it according to
steps (c) – (d) as shown below.
Disconnection: (a) Unlock – (b) Discon-
nect connector.
Connection: (c) Connect connector – (d)
Lock.
5. Atmospheric pressure sensor (AMBAIR

PRESSURE)
Engine Ne speed sensor (CRANK SENSOR)
Engine Bkup speed sensor (CAM SENSOR)
Engine oil pressure switch (OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH)
nectors
The connectors of the atmospheric pres-
sure sensor, engine Ne speed sensor,
engine Bkup speed sensor, engine oil
pressure switch have a special locking
mechanism. Disconnect them according
to steps (a) – (c) and connect them
a Removal and installation of sensor
according to steps (d) – (f) as shown
A torque wrench is necessary for removal
below.
and installation of the boost pressure and
Disconnection: (a) Slide lever – (b)
temperature sensor. See "Tools for test-
Unlock – (c) Disconnect connector.
ing, adjusting, and troubleshooting".
Connection: (d) Connect connector – (e)
Lock – (f) Slide lever.
PC300, 350-8 5
7. Supply pump IMV solenoid (FUEL REGU- 8. Common rail pressure sensor (FUEL RAIL
LATOR) PRESS)
Electric priming pump (FUEL LIFT PUMP) a Disconnection and connection of connector
Water-in-fuel sensor intermediate connec- The connector of the common rail pres-
tor (WIF) sure sensor has a special locking mecha-
a Disconnection and connection of con- nism. Disconnect it according to steps (a)
nector – (b) and connect it according to steps (c)
The connector of the supply pump IMV – (d) as shown below.
solenoid has a special locking mecha- Disconnection: (a) Unlock – (b) Discon-
nism. Disconnect it according to steps (a) nect connector.
– (b) and connect it according to steps (c) Connection: (c) Connect connector – (d) Lock.
– (d) as shown below.
Disconnection: (a) Unlock – (b) Discon-
nect connector.
Connection: (c) Connect connector – (d)
Lock.
9. Engine coolant temperature sensor (COOL-

ANT TEMP)
nector
The connector of the engine coolant tem-
a Precautions for connecting connector perature sensor has a special locking
Take care not to connect the connector mechanism. Disconnect it according to
reversely. steps (a) – (b) and connect it according to
Engage lock (e) on the wiring harness side steps (c) – (d) as shown below.
with triangular notch (f) on the sensor side Disconnection: (a) Unlock – (b) Discon-
(Do not engage lock (e) with square guide nect connector.
(g) on the opposite side of triangular notch Connection: (c) Connect connector – (d)
(f)). Lock.
a Removal and installation of sensor

A deep socket is necessary for removal
and installation of the engine coolant tem-
perature sensor. See "Tools for testing,
adjusting, and troubleshooting".
6 PC300, 350-8
Procedure for testing diodes 1

a Test the assembled-type diode (8-pin) and the
single diode (2-pin) according to the following
procedure.
a The conductive directions of the assembled-
type diode are as follows.
2. When using analog circuit tester

1) Set the tester in the resistance range.
2) Apply the leads of the tester as explained
below and check the movement of the
pointer.
i) Apply the red (+) lead of the tester to
the anode (P) side of the diode and
a The conductive direction of the single diode is apply the black (–) lead to the cath-
indicated on the surface of the diode. ode (N) side.
ii) Apply the red (+) lead of the tester to
the cathode (N) side of the diode and
apply the black (–) lead to the anode
(P) side.
3) Judge the condition of the diode by the
movement of the pointer.
q The pointer does not move in i) but
moves in ii): The diode is normal (The
moving range (resistance) depends
on the type and selected range of the
tester, however).
q The pointer moves in both i) and ii):
The diode is defective (Internal short
circuit).
1. When using digital circuit tester q The pointer moves in neither of i) and
1) Set the tester in the diode range and ii): The diode is defective (Internal
check the indicated value. disconnection).
a When an ordinary circuit tester is
used, the voltage of the internal bat-
tery is indicated.
2) Apply the red (+) lead of the tester to the
anode (P) side of the diode and apply the
black (–) lead to the cathode (N) side and
check the indicated value.
3) Judge the condition of the diode by the
indicated value.
q The indicated value does not change:
The diode does not have conductivity
(Defective).
q The indicated value changes:
The diode has conductivity (Normal).
Note: In the case of a silicon diode, a
value in the range from 460 to 600 is indi-
cated.
PC300, 350-8 7
Pm clinic service 1
Machine model Model number Service meter
T PC300-8
h
T PC350-8 T LC
User name Date of execution Inspector
/ /
Specifications
Main components Attachments Shoe width
Boom T Standard T ( ) T Breaker T 600 mm
Arm T Standard T ( ) T( ) T 700 mm
Bucket T Standard T ( ) T( ) T( )
Check of oil/coolant level
T Radiator coolant When necessary
T Engine oil T Damper case oil T Machinery case oil
T Hydraulic oil T Final drive case oil T( )
Ambient temperature Altitude
°C m
Operator's opinion
Result of visual inspection
Mechanical systems abnormality record Electrical systems abnormality record

A000N1 Times/1st time h/Latest h Times/1st time h/Latest h
AA10NX Times/1st time h/Latest h Times/1st time h/Latest h
AB00KE Times/1st time h/Latest h Times/1st time h/Latest h
B@BAZG Times/1st time h/Latest h Times/1st time h/Latest h
B@BAZK Times/1st time h/Latest h Times/1st time h/Latest h
B@BCNS Times/1st time h/Latest h Times/1st time h/Latest h
B@BCZK Times/1st time h/Latest h Times/1st time h/Latest h
B@HANS Times/1st time h/Latest h Times/1st time h/Latest h
Max. range of engine coolant temperature Max. range of hydraulic oil temperature gauge
gauge
8 PC300, 350-8
Items related to engine
PC300, 350-8 9
Items related to oil pressure
10 PC300, 350-8
Check sheet (PC300/350-8)

Model Serial No. Service meter User's name Date of execution Inspector
/ /
1. Engine
Checking condition
Standard Mea-
Service limit
Good
Fuel Work- Auto- Operation of
Bad
No. Check item Left knob Unit value for new sured
control ing decel- work value
switch machine value
dial mode eration equipment
1 Engine speed rpm 2,000 – 2,100 2,000 – 2,100
All levers in
Engine oil MAX MPa 0.34 – 0.59 0.21
2 neutral
pressure {kg/cm2} {3.5 – 6.0} {2.1}
OFF
3 Engine speed rpm 975 – 1,025 975 – 1,025
All levers in
Engine oil MIN OFF MPa Min. 0.15 0.08
4 neutral
pressure P {kg/cm2} {Min. 1.5} {0.8}
5 Engine speed rpm 1,830 – 2,030 1,830 – 2,030
Blow-by ON Arm IN relief kPa Max. 1.57 Max. 2.55
6
pressure MAX {mmH2O} {Max. 160} {Max. 260}
Engine oil All levers in
7 ON OFF rpm 1,300 – 1,500 —
pressure neutral
2. Work equipment speed

Checking condition
Standard Mea-
Service limit
Good
Fuel Work-
Bad
No. Check item Unit value for sured
control ing Checking posture, etc. value
new machine value
dial mode
No load, work equipment PC300-8 3.3 – 4.1 Max. 4.5

1 Boom RAISE
extended fully PC350-8 3.4 – 4.2 Max. 4.6
PC300-8 2.6 – 3.2 Max. 3.5
2 Arm IN P
PC350-8 2.9 – 3.5 Max. 3.7
PC300-8 3.4 – 4.2 Max. 4.5
3
PC350-8 3.4 – 4.2 Max. 4.5
Boom top horizontal
PC300-8 3.6 – 4.6 Max. 4.9
4 Arm OUT E
PC350-8 3.5 – 4.5 Max. 4.8
PC300-8 4.4 – 5.4 Max. 5.7
5 L
MAX PC350-8 sec 4.4 – 5.4 Max. 5.7
Boom and arm top horizontal PC300-8 2.9 – 3.5 Max. 3.8
6 Bucket CURL
Arm cylinder retracted fully PC350-8 2.9 – 3.5 Max. 3.8
7 Swing (5 turns) Work equipment extended fully 28.7 – 34.5 Max. 38
STD 44.0 – 66.0 42.0 – 70.0
LO
P LC 46.5 – 69.5 45.0 – 74.5
STD 33.5 – 44.5 31.5 – 48.5
8 Travel (5 turns) One side of track pushed up MI
LC 35.5 – 47.5 34.0 – 51.5
STD 30.0 – 34.0 28.0 – 39.0
HI
LC 32.0 – 36.0 32.0 – 41.5
PC300, 350-8 11
3. Hydraulic drift of work equipment

Checking condition Standard
Mea-
value for Service limit
Good
Fuel Work-
Bad
No. Check item Unit sured
control ing Checking posture, etc. new value
value
dial mode machine
Boom top horizontal PC300-8 Max. 450 Max. 675

Hydraulic drift of
1 Engine stopped Arm cylinder retracted fully mm
bucket tip PC350-8 Max. 550 Max. 825
Bucket loaded
4. Hydraulic circuit
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Checking condition
600K 600K 600K 600K 60K
Good
Bad
No. Checked part
Fuel Work-
Left knob Operation of work F pump R pump F pump R pump
control ing Control
switch equipment main main LS LS
dial mode
Self pressure A
1 All lever in neutral — — — —
reducing valve
OFF
Main relief valve B B B B
2 —
(Low pressure)
Arm out relief
Main relief valve C C C C
3 ON —
(Low pressure)
D D D D
4 Unload valve All levers in neutral —
Right track driven idle E E

— — —
Lever moved halfway
5 LS valve
Left track driven idle E E
— — —
Lever moved halfway
MAX P
Swing lock F F
— — —
Swing motor Right swing relief
6
safety valve Swing lock F F
OFF — — —
Left swing relief
Right travel lock G
— — — —
Right forward relief
Main relief valve Right travel lock G
Travel motor — — — —
Right reverse relief
7 Safety valve
Travel junction Left travel lock G
— — — —
valve Left forward relief
Left travel lock G
— — — —
Left reverse relief
Checked oil pressure Unit Standard value for new machine Service limit value
A (Control circuit basic pressure) 3.03 – 3.43 {31 – 35} 2.84 – 3.43 {29 – 35}
B (Work equipment relief pressure,
33.83 – 36.28 {345 – 370} 33.34 – 36.77 {340 – 375}
Standard value
low)
C (Work equipment relief pressure,
MPa 36.28 – 38.73 {370 – 395} 35.8 – 39.23 {365 – 400}
high)
{kg/cm2}
D (Unload pressure) 2.9 – 4.9 {30 – 50} 2.9 – 4.9 {30 – 50}
E (LS differential pressure) 2.35 – 2.55 {24 – 26} 2.35 – 2.55 {24 – 26}
F (Swing relief pressure) 28.42 – 32.85 {285 – 335} 28.42 – 32.85 {285 – 335}
G (Travel relief pressure) 36.29 – 40.21 {370 – 410} 35.8 – 40.7 {365 – 415}
12 PC300, 350-8
* Gauge changing work: Change hoses of gauges [3] and [4].

[1] [2] [3a] [4a] [5]
Checking condition
600K 600K 600K 600K 60K
Good
Bad
No. Check item
Fuel Work-
control ing Control
switch equipment main main servo servo
dial mode
H1 H1 H2 H2
8 Servo piston MAX P OFF Arm out relief —
Standard value
H1 : H2 = 1 : 0.6
H (Servo control pressure) —
(Oil pressure ratio)
* Gauge changing work: Change [3] and [4] to 60K and change hoses of [3], [4], and [5].
[1] [2] [3b] [4b] [5a]
Checking condition
600K 600K 60K 60K 60K
Good
Bad
No. Check item
Fuel Work-
control ing LS-EPC
switch equipment main main (F) (R)
dial mode
J1 J1
MIN — — —
P
J2 J2
— — —
PC-EPC (F)
valve J3 J3
9 E All levers in neutral — — —
PC-EPC (R)
valve J4 J4
L — — —
OFF J5 J5
B — — —
MAX
Travel speed: Lo K1
— — — —
travel lever in neutral
Travel speed: Mi K2
Travel lever oper- — — — —
10 LS-EPC valve P
ated
Travel speed: Hi K3
Travel lever oper- — — — —
ated
J1 (PC-EPC valve output pressure 1) Approx. 1.1 {Approx. 11}
Standard value

J4 (PC-EPC valve output pressure 4) MPa Approx. 1.1 {Approx. 11}
J5 (PC-EPC valve output pressure 5) {kg/cm2} Approx. 0.9 {Approx. 9}
K1 (LS-EPC valve output pressure 1) Approx. 2.1 {Approx. 21}
K2 (LS-EPC valve output pressure 2) Approx. 2.3 {Approx. 23}
K3 (LS-EPC valve output pressure 3) 0 {0}
PC300, 350-8 13
SEN02663-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
14
SEN02627-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
40 Troubleshooting 1
Failure code table and fuse locations
Failure codes table.......................................................................................................................................... 2
Fuse locations................................................................................................................................................. 5
PC300, 350-8 1
SEN02627-01 40 Troubleshooting
Failure codes table 1
Action Device in Reference

Failure code Trouble (Displayed on screen) Category of record
code charge document No.
— A000N1 Eng. Hi Out of Std MON Mechanical system
— AA10NX Air cleaner Clogging MON Mechanical system
— AB00KE Charge Voltage Low MON Mechanical system
— B@BAZG Eng. Oil Press. Low MON Mechanical system
— B@BAZK Eng Oil Level Low MON Mechanical system
— B@BCNS Eng. Water Overheat MON Mechanical system
— B@BCZK Eng. Water Lvl Low MON Mechanical system
— B@HANS Hydr. Oil Overheat PUMP Mechanical system
E10 CA111 EMC Critical Internal Failure ENG Electrical system
E10 CA115 Eng Ne and Bkup Speed Sens Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA122 Chg Air Press Sensor High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA123 Chg Air Press Sensor Low Error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA131 Throttle Sensor High Error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA132 Throttle Sensor Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA144 Coolant Temp Sens High Error ENG Electrical system
Troubleshooting
E15 CA145 Coolant Temp Sens Low Error ENG Electrical system of failure code,
E15 CA153 Chg Air Temp Sensor High Error ENG Electrical system Part 1
SEN02629-01
E15 CA154 Chg Air Temp Sensor Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA187 Sens Supply 2 Volt Low Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA221 Ambient Press Sens High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA222 Ambient Press Sens Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA227 Sens Supply 2 Volt High Error ENG Electrical system
— CA234 Eng Overspeed ENG Mechanical system
E15 CA238 Ne Speed Sens Supply Volt Error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA271 IMV/PCV1 Short Error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA272 IMV/PCV1 Open Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA322 Inj #1 Open/Short Error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA342 Calibration Code Incompatibility ENG Electrical system
E10 CA351 Injectors Drive Circuit Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA352 Sens Supply 1 Volt Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA386 Sens Supply 1 Volt High Error ENG Electrical system
Troubleshooting
E15 CA428 Water in Fuel Sensor High Error ENG Electrical system of failure code,
E15 CA429 Water in Fuel Sensor Low Error ENG Electrical system Part 2
SEN02630-01
E10 CA441 Battery Voltage Low Error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA442 Battery Voltage High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA449 Rail Press Very High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA451 Rail Press Sensor High Error ENG Electrical system
2 PC300, 350-8

E11 CA452 Rail Press Sensor Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA553 Rail Press High Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA559 Rail Press Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA689 Ne Speed Sensor Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA731 Bkup Speed Sens Phase Error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA757 All Persistent Data Lost Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA778 Bkup Speed Sensor Error ENG Electrical system
E0E CA1633 KOMNET Datalink Timeout Error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA2185 Throt Sens Sup Volt High Error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA2186 Throt Sens Sup Volt Low Error ENG Electrical system Troubleshooting
of failure code,
E11 CA2249 Rail Press Very Low Error ENG Electrical system
Part 2
E15 CA2265 Electric Lift Pump High Error ENG Electrical system SEN02630-01
E15 CA2266 Electric Lift Pump Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA2555 Grid Htr Relay Volt Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA2556 Grid Htr Relay Volt High Error ENG Electrical system
— D110KB Battery Relay Drive S/C PUMP Electrical system
— D196KA Service Return Relay Disc. PUMP Electrical system
— D196KB Service Return Relay S/C PUMP Electrical system
E02 DA25KP Press. Sensor Power Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
E0E DA2RMC Pump Comm. Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
— DA2SKQ Model Selection Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
E0E DAFRMC Monitor Comm. Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
— DHPAMA F Pump Press Sensor Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
— DHPBMA R Pump Press Sensor Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
— DHS3MA Arm Curl PPC Sen. Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
— DHS4MA Bucket Curl PPC Press Sensor Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
— DW43KA Travel Speed Sol. Disc. PUMP Electrical system
— DW43KB Travel Speed Sol. S/C PUMP Electrical system
E03 DW45KA Swing Brake Sol. Disc. PUMP Electrical system
E03 DW45KB Swing Brake Sol. S/C PUMP Electrical system
— DW91KA Travel Junction Sol. Disc. PUMP Electrical system
— DW91KB Travel Junction Sol. S/C PUMP Electrical system Troubleshooting
of failure code,
— DWJ0KA Merge-divider Sol. Disc PUMP Electrical system
Part 3
— DWJ0KB Merge-divider Sol. S/C PUMP Electrical system SEN02631-01
— DWK0KA 2-stage Relief Sol. Disc. PUMP Electrical system
— DWK0KB 2-stage Relief Sol. S/C PUMP Electrical system
E02 DXA0KA PC-EPC Sol. Disc. PUMP Electrical system
E02 DXA0KB PC-EPC Sol. S/C PUMP Electrical system
— DXE0KA LS-EPC Sol. Disc. PUMP Electrical system
— DXE0KB LS-EPC Sol. S/C PUMP Electrical system
— DXE4KA Service Current EPC Disc. PUMP Electrical system
— DXE4KB Service Current EPC S/C PUMP Electrical system
— DY20KA Wiper Working Abnormality MON Electrical system
— DY20MA Wiper Parking Abnormality MON Electrical system
PC300, 350-8 3

— DY2CKB Washer Drive S/C MON Electrical system Troubleshooting
of failure code,
— DY2DKB Wiper Drive (For) S/C MON Electrical system
Part 3
— DY2EKB Wiper Drive (Rev) S/C MON Electrical system SEN02631-01
a This failure codes table is the same as that in Testing and adjusting, Special functions of machine moni-
tor.
4 PC300, 350-8
Fuse locations 1
Connection table of fuse box
a This connection table shows the devices to which each power supply of the fuse box supplies power (A
switch power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is in the ON position and
a constant power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is in the OFF and ON
positions).
a When carrying out troubleshooting related to the electrical system, you should check the fuses and fus-
ible links to see if the power is supplied normally.
Fuse
Type of power supply Fusible link Fuse No. Destination of power
capacity
1 10A Work lamp, relay, emergency switch
2 30A Pump controller (Solenoid power supply)
F04 3 10A PPC oil pressure lock solenoid valve
Switch power supply
(65A) Cigarette lighter
4 10A
Windshield washer motor
5 10A Horn relay, horn
6 10A Auto preheater
7 10A Rotary lamp
F04 8 20A Working lamp (boom), working lamp (rear)
Switch power supply
(65A) Radio, speaker
9 10A
Left knob switch (pump controller input)
10 20A (Spare)
11 20A Air conditioner unit
12 10A (Spare)
13 10A Headlamp
F04
Switch power supply 14 10A Optional power supply (1)
(65A)
Travel alarm, 12 V power supply
15 20A Optional power supply (2), heated seat, air suspension
seat
Radio (backup power supply)
16 10A
Room lamp
Constant power sup- F05 Pump controller
17 20A
ply (30A) Machine monitor
18 10A (Spare)
19 30A Engine controller
Starting switch
Switch power supply 20 5A Engine controller (ACC signal)
ACC
PC300, 350-8 5
Locations of fusible links
Location of fuse box and fuse Nos.
6 PC300, 350-8
Troubles that occur when controller power supply of pump controller is defective
a The controller power supply (F01-1) of the pump controller drives the controller system. Accordingly, if it
is turned off, the controller cannot control the system and the troubles shown below occur simulta-
neously (The following is an example of the troubles).
q The working mode cannot be changed.
q The auto-decelerator does not work or is not reset.
q The travel speed does not change.
q The power maximizing function does not work.
q The swing holding brake cannot be reset automatically.
q The machine deviates during travel.
Troubles that occur when solenoid power supply of pump controller is defective
a The solenoid power supply (F01-2) of the pump controller is used by the controller to drive the solenoids
and relays. Accordingly, if the solenoid power supply is turned off, when the controller outputs the power
to the solenoids or relays, the power is not supplied to any of the solenoids and relays and all or some of
the following failure codes are displayed simultaneously.
q [DW43KA], [DW43KB]: Travel speed solenoid system
q [DW45KA], [DW45KB]: Swing holding brake solenoid system
q [DW91KA], [DW91KB]: Travel junction solenoid system
q [DWA2KA], [DWA2KB]: Service solenoid system
q [DWK0KA], [DWK0KB]: 2-stage relief solenoid system
q [DXA0KA], [DXA0KB]: PC-EPC (F) solenoid system
q [DXE0KA], [DXE0KB]: LS-EPC solenoid system
q [DXE4KA], [DXE4KB]: Service current EPC system (if attachment is installed)
q [DWJ0KA], [DWJ0KB]: Merge-divider main solenoid system
a If the above problems occur, check the related fuse (F01-2) and inlet voltage of the pump controller.
1) Disconnect connector CP03 of the controller and connect a T-adapter to the wiring harness side.
2) Turn the starting switch ON.
3) Measure the voltage between each of pins (2), and (12) and each of pins (27), (32), and (33).
* Pins (2) and (12) are the power supply and pins (27), (32), and (33) are the chassis ground.
* If the voltage is 20 – 30 V, it is normal.
PC300, 350-8 7
a Power supply connector (CP03) of pump controller
8 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 9
SEN02627-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
10
SEN02628-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
General information on troubleshooting
Points to remember when troubleshooting ..................................................................................................... 2
Sequence of events in troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 3
Checks before troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 4
Classification and troubleshooting steps......................................................................................................... 5
Information in troubleshooting table ................................................................................................................ 6
Connection table for connector pin numbers .................................................................................................11
T- branch box and T- branch adapter table ................................................................................................... 47
PC300, 350-8 1
Points to remember when troubleshooting 1

k Stop the machine in a level place, and check that the safety pin, blocks, and parking brake are
securely fitted.
k When carrying out the operation with 2 or more workers, keep strictly to the agreed signals, and
do not allow any unauthorized person to come near.
k If the radiator cap is removed when the engine is hot, hot water may spurt out and cause burns,
so wait for the engine to cool down before starting troubleshooting.
k Be extremely careful not to touch any hot parts or to get caught in any rotating parts.
k When disconnecting wiring, always disconnect the negative (–) terminal of the battery first.
k When removing the plug or cap from a location which is under pressure from oil, water, or air,
always release the internal pressure first. When installing measuring equipment, be sure to con-
nect it properly.
The aim of troubleshooting is to pinpoint the basic cause of the failure, to carry out repairs swiftly, and to pre-
vent reoccurrence of the failure. When carrying out troubleshooting, an important point is of course to under-
stand the structure and function. However, a short cut to effective troubleshooting is to ask the operator
various questions to form some idea of possible causes of the failure that would produce the reported symp-
toms.
1. When carrying out troubleshooting, do not 4) Other maintenance items can be checked
hurry to disassemble the components. externally, so check any item that is con-
If components are disassembled immediately sidered to be necessary.
after any failure occurs:
q Parts that have no connection with the fail- 4. Confirming failure
ure or other unnecessary parts will be dis- Confirm the extent of the failure yourself, and
assembled. judge whether to handle it as a real failure or
q It will become impossible to find the cause as a problem with the method of operation, etc.
of the failure. a When operating the machine to reenact
It will also cause a waste of manhours, parts, the troubleshooting symptoms, do not
or oil or grease, and at the same time, will also carry out any investigation or measure-
lose the confidence of the user or operator. For ment that may make the problem worse.
this reason, when carrying out troubleshooting,
it is necessary to carry out thorough prior 5. Troubleshooting
investigation and to carry out troubleshooting Use the results of the investigation and inspec-
in accordance with the fixed procedure. tion in Items 2 – 4 to narrow down the causes
of failure, then use the troubleshooting table or
2. Points to ask user or operator troubleshooting flowchart to locate the position
1) Have any other problems occurred apart of the failure exactly.
from the problem that has been reported? a The basic procedure for troubleshooting is
2) Was there anything strange about the as follows.
machine before the failure occurred? 1] Start from the simple points.
3) Did the failure occur suddenly, or were 2] Start from the most likely points.
there problems with the machine condition 3] Investigate other related parts or
before this? information.
4) Under what conditions did the failure
occur? 6. Measures to remove root cause of failure
5) Had any repairs been carried out before Even if the failure is repaired, if the root cause
the failure? When were these repairs car- of the failure is not repaired, the same failure
ried out? will occur again.To prevent this, always investi-
6) Has the same kind of failure occurred gate why the problem occurred. Then, remove
before? the root cause.
3. Check before troubleshooting

1) Is there any sign of irregularities of the
machine?
2) Make checks before starting day's work.
3) Make checks of other items.
2 PC300, 350-8
Sequence of events in troubleshooting 1
PC300, 350-8 3
Checks before troubleshooting 1
Item Criterion Remedy

1. Check of level and type of fuel — Add fuel
2. Check of fuel for foreign matter — Clean and drain
3. Check of hydraulic oil level — Add oil
4. Check of hydraulic oil strainer — Clean and drain
Lubricating
5. Check of swing machinery oil level — Add oil
oil/Coolant
6. Check of level and type of engine oil (in oil pan) — Add oil
7. Check of coolant level — Add coolant
8. Check of dust indicator for clogging — Clean or replace
9. Check of hydraulic oil filter — Replace
1. Check of battery terminals and wiring for loose-
— Retighten or replace
ness and corrosion
Electrical 2. Check of alternator terminals and wiring for
equipment looseness and corrosion
3. Check of starting motor terminals and wiring for
looseness and corrosion
Hydraulic/ 1. Check for abnormal noise and smell — Repair

Mechanical 2. Check for oil leakage — Repair
equipment 3. Bleeding air — Bleed air
1. Check of battery voltage (with engine stopped) 20 – 30 V Replace
2. Check of electrolyte level — Add or replace
3. Check of wires for discoloration, burn, and
— Replace
removal of cover
4. Check for released wire clamp and drooping wire — Repair
Electric,
electrical 5. Check of wires for wetness (Check connectors Disconnect the
—
equipment and terminals for wetness, in particular) connectors and dry
6. Check of fuse for disconnection and corrosion — Replace
7. Check of alternator voltage (while engine speed After operating for several
Replace
is at middle or higher) minutes: 27.5 – 29.5 V
8. Check of battery relay for operating sound (when
— Replace
starting switch is turned ON or OFF)
4 PC300, 350-8
Classification and troubleshooting steps 1

Classification of troubleshooting
Mode Contents
Display of code Troubleshooting by failure code
E-mode Troubleshooting of electrical system
H-mode Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system
S-mode Troubleshooting of engine
Troubleshooting steps
If a problem that appears to be a failure occurs on the machine, identify the relevant troubleshooting No. by
performing the following steps and proceed to the main body of troubleshooting.
1. Procedure for troubleshooting to be taken when action code is displayed on machine monitor:
When action code is displayed on machine monitor, press [3] switch at panel switch section to display
failure code.
Carry out the troubleshooting for the corresponding [Display of code] according to the displayed failure
code.
2. Procedure for troubleshooting to be taken when failure code is recorded in abnormality record:
If an action code is not displayed on the machine monitor, check a failure code with the abnormality
record function of the machine monitor.
If a code is recorded, carry out troubleshooting for the corresponding [Display of code] according to the
recorded code.
a If an electrical system failure code is recorded, delete all the codes and reproduce them, and then
see if the trouble is still detected.
a An error code of the mechanical system cannot be deleted.
3. Procedure for troubleshooting to be taken when action code is not displayed and no failure code
is recorded in abnormality record:
If an action code is not displayed on the machine monitor and no failure code is recorded in the abnor-
mality record, a trouble that the machine cannot find out by itself may have occurred in the electrical
system or hydraulic and mechanical system.
In this case, check the phenomenon looking like a trouble again and select the same phenomenon from
the table of “Phenomena looking like troubles and troubleshooting Nos.”, and then carry out trouble-
shooting corresponding to that phenomenon in the “E-mode”, “H-mode”, or “S-mode”.
PC300, 350-8 5
Information in troubleshooting table 1

a The following information is summarized in the troubleshooting table and the related electrical circuit
diagram. Before carrying out troubleshooting, understand that information fully.
Action code Failure code

Display on Trouble name displayed in abnormality record machine moni-
Display on machine Trouble
machine monitor
monitor
tor
Contents of
Contents of trouble detected by machine monitor or controller
trouble
Action of
Action taken by machine monitor or controller to protect system or devices when engine con-
machine moni-
troller detects trouble
tor or controller
Problem that
Problem that appears on machine as result of action taken by machine monitor or controller
appears on
(shown above)
machine
Related infor-
Information related to detected trouble or troubleshooting
mation
Cause Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting
<Contents of description>
• Standard value in normal state to judge possible causes
• Remarks on judgment
1
<Troubles in wiring harness>
• Disconnection
Connector is connected imperfectly or wiring harness is bro-
ken.
• Ground fault
Wiring harness which is not connected to chassis ground
circuit is in contact with chassis ground circuit.
• Hot short
Wiring harness which is not connected to power source (24
V) circuit is in contact with power source (24 V) circuit.
2
• Short circuit
Independent wiring harnesses are in contact with each other
Possible causes abnormally.
and standard Possible causes of trouble
value in normal (Given numbers are refer-
state ence numbers, which do not <Precautions for troubleshooting>
indicate priority) (1) Method of indicating connector No. and handling of T-
adapter
Insert or connect T-adapter as explained below for trouble-
3 shooting, unless otherwise specified.
• If connector No. has no marks of “male” and “female”,
disconnect connector and insert T-adapters in both male
side and female side.
• If connector No. has marks of “male” and “female”, dis-
connect connector and connect T-adapter to only male
side or female side.
(2) Entry order of pin Nos. and handling of tester leads
Connect positive (+) lead and negative (–) lead of tester as
explained below for troubleshooting, unless otherwise
4 specified.
• Connect positive (+) lead to pin No. or wiring harness
entered on front side.
• Connect negative (–) lead to pin No. or harness entered
on rear side.
6 PC300, 350-8
Related circuit diagram
This drawing is a part of the electric circuit diagram related to trouble-

shooting.
q Connector No.: Indicates (Model – Number of pins) and
(Color).
q “Connector No. and pin No.” from each branching/merging
point: Shows the ends of branch or source of merging within
the parts of the same wiring harness.
q Arrow (⇔): Roughly shows the location on the machine.
PC300, 350-8 7
Possible problems and troubleshooting No.
Troubleshooting
No. Phenomena looking like troubles Display of
E-mode H-mode S-mode
code
Phenomena related to action code/failure code
1 An action code is displayed on machine monitor.
According
When abnormality record is checked, failure code is displayed in
2 to
electrical system abnormality record
displayed
When abnormality record is checked, failure code is displayed in code
3
mechanical system abnormality record
Phenomena related to engine
4 Starting performance is poor (it always starts up slowly) S-1
5 Engine does not rotate E-1 S-2 a)
Engine does
6 Engine rotates, but exhaust gas does not come out S-2 b)
not start
7 Engine emits exhaust gas, but it does not start S-2 c)
8 Engine does not pick up smoothly (follow-up performance is poor) S-3
9 Engine stops during operations H-2 S-4
10 Engine rotation is unstable (it hunts). S-5
11 Engine lacks output or power H-1 S-6
12 Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion) S-7
13 Oil consumption is excessive or exhaust smoke is blue S-8
14 Oil becomes contaminated quickly S-9
15 Fuel consumption is excessive S-10
16 Oil is in coolant, coolant spurts back or coolant level goes down S-11
17 Oil pressure drops S-12
18 Oil level rises (Entry of coolant or fuel) S-13
19 Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheating) S-14
20 Abnormal noise is made S-15
21 Vibration is excessive S-16
22 Auto-decelerator does not operate E-2 H-5
23 Automatic warm-up system does not operate E-3
24 Preheater does not operate E-4
Phenomena related to work equipment, swing, and travel
25 Speed or power of whole work equipment, travel, and swing is low H-1 S-6
26 Engine speed lowers extremely or engine stalls H-2 S-4
27 Work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism do not move E-5 H-3
28 Abnormal sound comes out from around hydraulic pump H-4
29 Fine control performance or response is low H-6
Phenomena related to work equipment
30 Speed or power of boom is low E-18,19 H-7
31 Speed or power of arm is low E-20,21 H-8
32 Speed or power of bucket is low E-22,23 H-9
33 Work equipment does not move singly H-10
34 Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large H-11
35 Time lag of work equipment is large H-12
When part of work equipment is relieved singly, other parts of work
36 H-13
equipment move
8 PC300, 350-8
Troubleshooting
code
37 Power maximizing function does not work. E-6, 18 - 23 H-14
Phenomena related to compound operation
In compound operation of work equipment, speed of part loaded
38 H-15
more is low
When machine swings and raises boom simultaneously, boom rising
39 H-16
speed is low
When machine swings and travels simultaneously, travel speed
40 H-17
lowers largely
Phenomena related to travel
41 Machine deviates during travel H-18
42 Travel speed is low E-25 H-19
43 Machine is not steered well or steering power is low E-25,26 H-20
44 Travel speed does not change or travel speed is low or high E-25 H-21
45 Travel system does not move (only one side) H-22
Phenomena related to swing
46 Upper structure does not swing E-24 H-23
47 Swing acceleration or swing speed is low H-24
48 Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging H-25
49 Large shock is made when upper structure stops swinging H-26
50 Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging H-27
51 Hydraulic drift of swing is large H-28
Phenomena related to machine monitor (Operator menu: ordinary screen)
52 Machine monitor does not display any items E-7
53 Machine monitor does not display some items E-8
Contents of display by machine monitor are different from applicable
54 E-9
machine
Radiator coolant level monitor lights up in red during check before
55 B@BCZK
starting
56 Engine oil level monitor lights up in red during check before starting B@BAZK
Maintenance interval monitor lights up in red during check before See the Operation and Maintenance
57
starting Manual.
58 Charge level monitor lights up in red while engine is running AB00KE
59 Fuel level monitor lights up in red while engine is running E-10
60 Air cleaner clogging monitor lights up in red while engine is running AA10NX
Engine coolant temperature monitor lights up in red while engine is
61 B@BCNS
running
Hydraulic oil temperature monitor lights up in red while engine is
62 B@HANS
running
63 Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally E-11
64 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not indicate normally E-12
65 Fuel level gauge does not indicate normally E-13
66 Swing lock monitor does not indicate normally E-14
Machine monitor display anything even when operated on monitor
67 E-15
switch section
68 Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate E-16
69 Machine push-up function does not work normally E-17
PC300, 350-8 9
Troubleshooting
code
Phenomena related to machine monitor (Service menu: special functions screen)
70 Monitoring function does not display “Boom RAISE” normally E-18
71 Monitoring function does not display “Boom LOWER” normally E-19
72 Monitoring function does not display “Arm IN” normally E-20
73 Monitoring function does not display “Arm OUT” normally E-21
74 Monitoring function does not display “Bucket CURL” normally E-22
75 Monitoring function does not display “Bucket DUMP” normally E-23
76 Monitoring function does not display “Swing” normally E-24
77 Monitoring function does not display “Travel” normally E-25
78 Monitoring function does not display “Travel Steering” normally E-26
79 Monitoring function does not display “Service” normally E-27
Phenomena related to KOMTRAX
80 KOMTRAX system does not operate normally E-28
Other phenomena
81 Air conditioner does not operate E-29
82 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding E-30
83 Horn does not sound E-31
10 PC300, 350-8
Connection table for connector pin numbers (Rev. 2007.12)
a The terms of male and female refer to the pins, while the terms of male housing and female housing
refer to the mating portion of the housing.
PC300, 350-8 11
12 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 13
14 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 15
16 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 17
18 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 19
20 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 21
22 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 23
24 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 25
26 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 27
28 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 29
30 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 31
32 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 33
34 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 35
36 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 37
38 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 39
40 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 41
42 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 43
44 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 45
46 PC300, 350-8
T- branch box and T- branch adapter table 1

(Rev. 2008.02)
a The vertical column indicates a part number of T-branch box or T-branch adapter while the horizontal
column indicates a part number of harness checker assembly.
T-adapter kit
Number of pins
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
799-601-4101
799-601-4201
Out of kit
Identification
Part No. Part name
symbol
799-601-2600 T-box (for ECONO) 21 q q q q q

799-601-3100 T-box (for MS) 37 q
799-601-3200 T-box (for MS) 37 q
799-601-3380 Plate for MS (14-pin) q
799-601-3410 Adapter for BENDIX (MS) 24 MS-24P q
799-601-3470 Case q
799-601-2710 Adapter for MIC 5 MIC-5P q q q
799-601-2720 Adapter for MIC 13 MIC-13P q q q
799-601-2730 Adapter for MIC 17 MIC-17P q q q q q q
799-601-2740 Adapter for MIC 21 MIC-21P q q q q q q
799-601-2950 Adapter for MIC 9 MIC-9P q q q q
799-601-2750 Adapter for ECONO 2 ECONO2P q q
799-601-2810 Adapter for DLI 8 DLI-8P q q
799-601-2840 Extension cable (ECONO type) 12 ECONO12P q q q
799-601-2850 Case q
799-601-4350 T-box (for DRC 60, ECONO) 60 q
799-601-4360 Case q
799-601-7010 Adapter for X (T-adapter) 1 q q
799-601-7020 Adapter for X 2 X2P q q q q
799-601-7050 Adapter for SWP 6 SW6P q q q
799-601-7060 Adapter for SWP 8 SW8P q q q
799-601-7310 Adapter for SWP 12 SW12P q
799-601-7070 Adapter for SWP 14 SW14P q q
799-601-7320 Adapter for SWP 16 SW16P q
799-601-7080 Adapter for M (T-adapter) 1 q q
799-601-7090 Adapter for M 2 M2P q q q q
PC300, 350-8 47
T-adapter kit
Number of pins
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
799-601-4101
799-601-4201
Out of kit
Identification
Part No. Part name
symbol

799-601-7340 Adapter for M 8 M8P q
799-601-7140 Adapter for S 8 S8P q q q q
799-601-7150 Adapter for S (White) 10 S10P q q q q
799-601-7160 Adapter for S (Blue) 12 S12P q q q
799-601-7170 Adapter for S (Blue) 16 S16P q q q q
799-601-7330 Adapter for S (White) 16 S16PW q
799-601-7350 Adapter for S (White) 12 S12PW q
799-601-7180 Adapter for AMP040 8 A8P q
799-601-7190 Adapter for AMP040 12 A12P q q
799-601-7210 Adapter for AMP040 16 A16P q q q q
799-601-7220 Adapter for AMP040 20 A20P q q q q
799-601-7230 Short connector for X 2 — q q q q
799-601-7240 Case q q
799-601-7270 Case q
799-601-7510 Adapter for 070 10 07-10 q
799-601-7520 Adapter for 070 12 07-12 q
799-601-7530 Adapter for 070 14 07-14 q
799-601-7540 Adapter for 070 18 07-18 q
799-601-7550 Adapter for 070 20 07-20 q
799-601-7360 Adapter for relay 5 REL-5P q
799-601-7370 Adapter for relay 6 REL-6P q
799-601-7380 Adapter for JFC 2 — q
799-601-9010 Adapter for DTM 2 DTM2 q q
799-601-9020 Adapter for DT 2 DT2 q q q q
799-601-9030 Adapter for DT 3 DT3 q q
799-601-9040 Adapter for DT 4 DT4 q q q q
799-601-9050 Adapter for DT 6 DT6 q q
799-601-9060 Adapter for DT (Gray) 8 DT8GR q q
799-601-9070 Adapter for DT (Black) 8 DT8B q q
799-601-9080 Adapter for DT (Green) 8 DT8G q q
799-601-9090 Adapter for DT (Brown) 8 DT8BR q q
799-601-9110 Adapter for DT (Gray) 12 DT12GR q q
799-601-9120 Adapter for DT (Black) 12 DT12B q q
799-601-9130 Adapter for DT (Green) 12 DT12G q q
799-601-9140 Adapter for DT (Brown) 12 DT12BR q q
799-601-9210 Adapter for HD30-18 8 D18-8 q q
799-601-9310 Plate for HD30 (24-pin) q q q
799-601-9320 T-box (for ECONO) 24 q q q
48 PC300, 350-8
T-adapter kit
Number of pins
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
799-601-4101
799-601-4201
Out of kit
Identification
Part No. Part name
symbol
799-601-9330 Case q
799-601-9340 Case q
799-601-9350 Adapter for DRC 40 DRC-40 q
799-601-9360 Adapter for DRC 24 DRC-24 q
799-601-9410* Socket for engine (CRI-T2) 2 G q
Adapter for engine (CRI-T2)
799-601-9420 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) PFUEL 3 A3 q q
Oil pressure sensor
Socket for engine (CRI-T2)
799-601-9430* 2 P q q
Socket for engine (CRI-T3) PCV
799-601-9440* Socket for engine (CRI-T2) 3 1,2,3 q
795-799-5520* Socket for engine (HPI-T2) 2 S q
Socket for engine (HPI-T2)
795-799-5530* Socket for engine (CRI-T3) 2 C q q
Temperature sensor
Socket for engine (HPI-T2)
795-799-5540* 2 A q q
Socket for engine (CRI-T3) TIM
795-799-5460 Cable for engine (HPI-T2) 3 — q
799-601-4110 Adapter for engine (140-T3) PIM 4 ITT3N q q
799-601-4130 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) NE, CAM 3 FCIN q q
799-601-4140 3 FCIG q q
Atomosphere pressure
799-601-4150 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) POIL 3 FCIB q q
799-601-4160 2 4160 q q
Oil pressure switch
799-601-4180 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) PEVA 3 4180 q q
799-601-4190* 3 1,2,3L q q
Commonrail pressure
799-601-4230* 4 1,2,3,4C q q
Air intake pressure/temperature
799-601-4240* Socket for engine (CRI-T3) PAMB 3 1,2,3A q q
799-601-4250* Socket for engine (CRI-T3) PIM 3 1,2,3B q q
799-601-4330* Socket for engine (CRI-T3) G 3 1,2,3,G q q
799-601-4340* 2 2,PA q q
Pump actuator
Socket for engine (CRI-T3)(95)
799-601-4380* 4 1,2,3,4T q
Air intake pressure/temperature
799-601-4260 Adapter for controller (ENG) 4 DTP4 q q
799-601-4211 Adapter for controller (ENG) 50 DRC50 q
799-601-4220 Adapter for controller (ENG) 60 DRC60 q
799-601-4390* Socket for controller (95 ENG) 60 — q
799-601-4280 Box for controller (PUMP) 121 — q
799-601-9720 Adapter for controller (HST) 16 HST16A q
799-601-9710 Adapter for controller (HST) 16 HST16B q
799-601-9730 Adapter for controller (HST) 26 HST26A q
2,
Multi-adapter for
799-601-9890 3, — q
DT2 – 4 and DTM2
4,
“*” Shows not T-adapter but socket.
PC300, 350-8 49
SEN02628-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
50
SEN02629-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
Troubleshooting by failure code
(Display of code), Part 1
Failure code [A000N1] Eng. Hi Out of Std ...................................................................................................... 3
Failure code [AA10NX] Air cleaner Clogging .................................................................................................. 4
Failure code [AB00KE] Charge Voltage Low .................................................................................................. 6
Failure code [B@BAZG] Eng Oil Press. Low.................................................................................................. 8
Failure code [B@BAZK] Eng Oil Level Low.................................................................................................. 10
Failure code [B@BCNS] Eng. Water Overheat............................................................................................. 12
Failure code [B@BCZK] Eng Water Level Low............................................................................................. 14
Failure code [B@HANS] Hydr Oil Overheat ................................................................................................. 16
Failure code [CA111] EMC Critical Internal Failure....................................................................................... 17
Failure code [CA115] Eng Ne and Bkup Speed Sens Error .......................................................................... 17
Failure code [CA122] Chg Air Press Sensor High Error ............................................................................... 18
Failure code [CA123] Chg Air Press Sensor Low Error ................................................................................ 20
Failure code [CA131] Throttle Sensor High Error ......................................................................................... 22
Failure code [CA132] Throttle Sensor Low Error .......................................................................................... 24
PC300, 350-8 1
Failure code [CA144] Coolant Temp Sens High Error................................................................................... 26

Failure code [CA145] Coolant Temp Sens Low Error ................................................................................... 28
Failure code [CA153] Chg Air Temp Sensor High Error................................................................................ 30
Failure code [CA154] Chg Air Temp Sensor Low Error................................................................................. 32
Failure code [CA187] Sens Supply 2 Volt Low Error..................................................................................... 34
Failure code [CA221] Ambient Press Sens High Error ................................................................................. 36
Failure code [CA222] Ambient Press Sens Low Error .................................................................................. 38
Failure code [CA227] Sens Supply 2 Volt High Error.................................................................................... 40
Failure code [CA234] Eng Overspeed .......................................................................................................... 41
Failure code [CA238] Ne Speed Sens Supply Volt Error .............................................................................. 42
Failure code [CA271] IMV/PCV1 Short Error ................................................................................................ 43
Failure code [CA272] IMV/PCV1 Open Error................................................................................................ 44
Failure code [CA322] Inj #1 Open/Short Error .............................................................................................. 46
2 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [A000N1] Eng. Hi Out of Std 1
Action code Failure code Engine high idle out of standard

Trouble
— A000N1 (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
• While the engine was running, engine speed exceeded 2,350 rpm for more than 10 seconds.
trouble
Action of con- • None in particular.
troller • If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself.
Problem that
appears on • If machine is operated as it is, engine may be damaged.
machine
Related infor- • Input from the engine speed sensor (engine speed) can be checked with monitoring function.
mation (Code 010: Engine speed)

Check for any internal or external factor that might cause the exces-
Possible causes Defective engine mechani-
1 sive engine high idle speed for troubleshooting of engine mechani-
and standard cal system
cal system.
value in normal
state Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out. (If
2 Defective engine controller no visible error appears on the machine, the controller can be con-
tinuously used as it is.)
PC300, 350-8 3
Failure code [AA10NX] Air cleaner Clogging 1
Action code Failure code Air cleaner clogging

Trouble
— AA10NX (Machine monitor system)
Contents of • While engine was running, signal circuit of air cleaner clogging switch detected clogging of air
trouble cleaner (sensor contact opened).
Action of • Displays air cleaner clogging monitor on machine monitor.
machine monitor • If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself.
Problem that
machine
• Condition of air cleaner clogging switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
Related infor-
(Code: 04501 Monitor input 2)
mation
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine.

Clogging of air cleaner a Check the air cleaner for clogging and then clean or replace it if
1
(when system is normal) clogged.
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then start engine and carry
out troubleshooting.
Defective air cleaner clog-
2 ging switch P23 (male) Air cleaner Resistance
(internal disconnection) Value in normal state Max. 1 z
Between (1) – (2)
Value when clogged Min. 1Mz
Possible causes
and standard Disconnection in wiring har- out troubleshooting.
value in normal ness
state Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (4) – Resis-
3 (Disconnection in wiring or Max. 1 z
P23 (female) (1) tance
defective contact in connec-
tor) Wiring harness between P23 (female) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
chassis ground tance
4 Defective machine monitor CM02 Air cleaner Voltage
Between (4) – chas- Value in normal state Max. 1 V
sis ground Value when clogged 20 – 30 V
4 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to air cleaner clogging switch of machine monitor
PC300, 350-8 5
Failure code [AB00KE] Charge Voltage Low 1
Action code Failure code Charge voltage low

Trouble
— AB00KE (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
• While engine is running, signal circuit of alternator detected low charge voltage (below 7.8 V).
trouble
Action of • Displays charge level monitor on machine monitor.
machine monitor • Even if cause of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • If machine is operated as it is, battery may not be charged.
machine
Related infor- • Signal voltage of alternator can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 04300 Charge voltage)
mation • Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine.

Defective alternator
1 Alternator Engine speed Voltage
(Low power generation)
R terminal – chassis
Min. medium speed 27.5 – 29.5 V
ground
Disconnection in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
ness ing without turning starting switch ON.
2 (Disconnection in wiring or
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (11) Resis-
Max. 1 z
Possible causes tor) – J02 – Alternator R terminal tance
and standard
value in normal a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
state and carry out troubleshooting.
Ground fault in wiring har-
ness Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (11)
3 – J02 – Alternator R terminal, between
(Short circuit with GND cir- Resis-
cuit) CM01 (female) (11) – J02 – D01 (female) (6) Min. 1Mz
tance
and between CM01 (female) (11) – J02 –
M17 (female) (2) and chassis ground
4 Defective machine monitor CM01 Engine speed Voltage
Between (11) – chas-
Min. medium speed 27.5 – 29.5 V
sis ground
6 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to starting and charge of machine monitor
PC300, 350-8 7
Failure code [B@BAZG] Eng Oil Press. Low 1
Action code Failure code Engine oil pressure low

Trouble
— B@BAZG (Engine controller system)
Contents of • While engine was running, signal circuit of engine oil pressure switch detected low engine oil pres-
trouble sure (sensor contact opened).
Action of con- • Displays engine oil pressure monitor on machine monitor.
Problem that
machine
• Engine oil pressure switch signal is input to engine controller and then transmitted to machine moni-
Related infor-
tor.
mation
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine

Lowering of engine oil pres-
a Determine the cause and check the damage to the engine and
1 sure
then modify it.
(when system is normal)
Defective engine oil pressure
2 sensor C2 (male) Engine Resistance
(Internal defect) When started Min. 1Mz
sis ground When stopped Max. 1 z
Possible causes ness ing without turning starting switch ON.
and standard 3 (Disconnection in wiring or
value in normal defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (17) Resis-
Max. 1 z
state tor) – C2 (female) (1) tance
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-

Ground fault in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
ness
4 Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (17)
cuit) – C2 (female) (1) and chassis ground (when Min. 1Mz
tance
engine is started)
5 Defective engine controller CE01 Engine Resistance
Between (17) – chas- When started Min. 1Mz
sis ground When stopped Max. 1 z
8 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to engine oil pressure of machine monitor
PC300, 350-8 9
Failure code [B@BAZK] Eng Oil Level Low 1
Action code Failure code Engine oil level low

Trouble
— B@BAZK (Machine monitor system)
Contents of • When starting switch is turned ON (but engine is not started), signal circuit of engine oil level switch
trouble detected low engine oil level (sensor contact opened).
Action of
• Displays engine oil level monitor on machine monitor.
machine moni-
• Even if cause of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
tor
Problem that
machine
• Engine oil level switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
Related infor-
(Code 04501: Monitor Input 2)
mation
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON.

Lowering of engine oil level a Check the engine oil level and add new oil.
1
(when system is normal) (If this phenomenon frequently occurs, investigate the cause.)
ing without turning starting switch ON.
Defective engine oil level P44 (male) Engine oil level Resistance
2 switch
(Internal disconnection) Value in normal state Max. 1 z
sis ground Value when oil level is
Min. 1Mz
Possible causes low
and standard
value in normal
state
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) P44 (female) (1) tance
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON

and carry out troubleshooting.
CM02 Engine oil level Voltage
4 Defective machine monitor
Value in normal state Max. 1 V
sis ground Value when oil level is
20 – 30 V
low
Circuit diagram related to engine oil level switch of machine monitor
10 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 11
Failure code [B@BCNS] Eng. Water Overheat 1

Action code Failure code Engine coolant overheat
Trouble
— B@BCNS (Engine controller system)
Contents of • While engine was running, signal circuit of engine coolant temperature sensor detected overheating
trouble of engine coolant (above about 102°C).
Action of • Displays engine coolant temperature monitor with red on machine monitor.
controller • If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself.
Problem that
appears on • If machine is operated as it is, engine may be seized.
machine
• Engine coolant temperature sensor signal is input to engine controller and then transmitted to
machine monitor.
Related infor-
• Engine coolant temperature can be checked with monitoring function
mation
(Code: 04107 Engine coolant temperature)

Possible Overheating of engine
Engine coolant may be overheating. Check it and remove cause if
causes and 1 coolant (when system is
it is overheating.
standard normal)
value in nor- If cause 1 is not detected, engine coolant temperature gauge sys-
mal state Defective engine coolant
2 tem may be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for "[CA144]
temperature gauge system
[CA145]" in troubleshooting.
12 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to engine coolant temperature sensor of machine monitor
PC300, 350-8 13
Failure code [B@BCZK] Eng Water Level Low 1
Action code Failure code Engine coolant level low

Trouble
— B@BCZK (Machine monitor system)
Contents of • When starting switch is turned ON, signal circuit of radiator coolant level sensor detected low radiator
trouble coolant level (sensor contact opened).
Action of • Displays radiator coolant level monitor on machine monitor.
machine monitor • Even if cause of failure disappers, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • If machine is operated as it is, engine may overheats.
machine
• Condition of radiator coolant level switch can be checked with monitoring function
Related infor-
(Code: 04500 Monitor input 1)
mation

Lowering of radiator coolant
a Check the coolant level and add coolant.
1 level
(If this phenomenon frequently occurs, investigate the cause.)
(when system is normal)
Defective radiator coolant P24 (male) Radiator coolant level Resistance
2 level switch (internal discon-
nection) Value in normal state Max. 1 z
Between (1) – (2) Value when coolant
Min. 1Mz
level is low
Possible causes
and standard Disconnection in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
state Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (3) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
Engine coolant tem-
CM02 Voltage
4 Defective machine monitor perature
Value in normal state Max. 1 V
sis ground Value when coolant
20 – 30 V
level is low
14 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to radiator coolant level switch of machine monitor
PC300, 350-8 15
Failure code [B@HANS] Hydr Oil Overheat 1
Action code Failure code Hydraulic oil overheat

Trouble
— B@HANS (Pump controller system)
Contents of • While engine was running, signal circuit of hydraulic oil temperature sensor detected overheating of
trouble hydraulic oil (above about 102°C).
Action of • Displays hydraulic oil temperature monitor with red on machine monitor.
Problem that
appears on • If machine is operated as it is, engine may be seized.
machine
• Hydraulic oil temperature sensor signal is input to engine controller and then transmitted to machine
monitor.
Related infor-
• Hydraulic oil temperature can be checked with monitoring function
mation
(Code: 04401 Hydraulic oil temperature)

Possible causes Overheating of hydraulic oil Hydraulic oil may be overheating. Check it and remove cause if it is
1
and standard (when system is normal) overheating.
value in normal If cause 1 is not detected, hydraulic oil temperature gauge system
state Defective hydraulic oil tem-
2 may be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for "E-12 Hydraulic oil
perature gauge system
temperature gauge does not work normally" in E-mode.
Circuit diagram related to hydraulic oil temperature sensor of machine monitor
16 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [CA111] EMC Critical Internal Failure 1
Action code Failure code EMC critical internal failure

Trouble
E10 CA111 (Engine controller system)
Contents of
• Memory or power supply circuit in engine controller is defective.
trouble
Action of con-
• None in particular.
troller
Problem that
appears on • Engine does not start.
machine
Related infor-
mation
Possible causes Cause Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting

and standard
value in normal Engine controller may be defective. (Since trouble is in system, trou-
1 Defective engine controller
state bleshooting cannot be carried out.)
Failure code [CA115] Eng Ne and Bkup Speed Sens Error 1
Action code Failure code Engine Ne and Bkup speed sensor error
Trouble
Contents of
• Both signals of engine Ne speed sensor and engine Bkup speed sensor are abnormal.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
• Engine stops.
appears on
• Engine does not start.
machine
Related infor-
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine
mation

and standard Connectors of Ne speed sensor and Bkup speed sensor may be
value in normal Defective connection of sen-
1 connected defectively (or connected to wrong parts). Check them
state sor connector
directly.
PC300, 350-8 17
Failure code [CA122] Chg Air Press Sensor High Error 1
Action code Failure code Charge air pressure sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• Pressure signal circuit of boost pressure, temperature sensor detected high voltage.
trouble
Action of con-
• Fixes charge pressure value and continues operation.
troller
Problem that
appears on • Engine output lowers.
machine
Related infor-
mation

Defective sensor power sup- If failure code [CA227] is also indicated, carry out troubleshooting
1
ply 2 system for it first.
Defective boost pressure, C4 Voltage
2 temperature sensor [pres- Between (1) – (4) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
sure signal system]
Voltage is measured with wiring harness connected. Accordingly, if
voltage is abnormal, check wiring harness and controller, too, for
another cause of trouble, and then judge.
Hot short in wiring harness and carry out troubleshooting.
3 (Short circuit with 5V/24V cir-
Possible causes cuit) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (44)
Voltage Max. 1 V
and standard – C4 (female) (1) and chassis ground
value in normal a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
state Short circuit in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
4 ness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (44)
(with another wiring harness) – C4 (female) (1) and between CE01 Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
(female) (37) – C4 (female) (2)
Connecting parts between boost pressure, temperature sensor –
engine wiring harness – engine controller may be defective. Check
Defective wiring harness them directly.
5
connector • Looseness of connector, breakage of lock, or breakage of seal
• Corrosion, bend, breakage, push-in, or expansion of pin
• Moisture or dirt in connector or defective insulation
CE01 Voltage
Between (37) – (47) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
18 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to boost pressure, temperature sensor (combination sensor)
PC300, 350-8 19
Failure code [CA123] Chg Air Press Sensor Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Charge air pressure sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Pressure signal circuit of boost pressure, temperature sensor detected low voltage.
trouble
Action of con-
• Fixes charge pressure value and continues operation.
troller
Problem that
machine
Related infor-
mation

1
Defective boost pressure, C4 Voltage
2 temperature sensor [pres- Between (1) – (4) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
sure signal system]
Ground fault in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
3
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (44) Resis- Min.
Possible causes
cuit) – C4 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance 100 kz
and standard
tance 100 kz
Connecting parts between boost pressure, temperature sensor –
engine wiring harness – engine controller may be defective. Check
Defective wiring harness them directly.
5
CE01 Voltage
20 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 21
Failure code [CA131] Throttle Sensor High Error 1
Action code Failure code Throttle sensor high error

Trouble
Contents of
• Signal circuit of fuel control dial detected high voltage.
trouble
• If trouble occurs while starting switch is in ON position, controller fixes voltage value to level just
Action of before detection of trouble and continues operation.
controller • If starting switch is turned ON while voltage is abnormally high, controller continues operation with
voltage at 100% value.
Problem that
appears on • Engine speed cannot be controlled with fuel control dial.
machine
• Signal voltage of fuel control dial can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 03000 Fuel con-
Related infor-
trol dial voltage)
mation

Defective throttle sensor If failure code [CA2185] is also indicated, carry out troubleshooting
1
power supply system for it first.
P20 Voltage
2 Defective fuel control dial Between (1) – (3) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
Hot short (Short circuit with 5 and carry out troubleshooting.
3 V/24 V circuit) in wiring har-
Possible causes Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (9) –
ness Voltage Max. 1 V
and standard P20 (female) (2)
value in normal
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting
state
Short circuit in wiring har- without turning starting switch ON.
4 ness (with another wiring Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (9) –
harness) Resis- Min. 100
P20 (female) (2) and between CE02 (female)
tance kz
(22) – P20 (female) (1)
Connecting parts between fuel control dial – machine wiring har-
ness – engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
Defective wiring harness
5 • Looseness of connector, breakage of lock, or breakage of seal
connector
CE02 Voltage
22 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to fuel control dial
PC300, 350-8 23
Failure code [CA132] Throttle Sensor Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Throttle sensor low error

Trouble
Contents of
• Signal circuit of fuel control dial detected low voltage.
trouble
Action of before detection of trouble and continues operation.
controller • If starting switch is turned ON while voltage is abnormally high, controller continues operation with
Problem that
machine
• Signal voltage of fuel control dial can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 03000 Fuel con-
Related infor-
trol dial voltage)
mation

Defective throttle sensor If failure code [CA2186] is also indicated, carry out troubleshooting
1
P20 Voltage
2 Defective fuel control dial Between (1) – (3) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
Ground fault in wiring har- without turning starting switch ON.
3 ness (Short circuit with GND
Possible causes Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (9) – Resis- Min. 100
circuit)
and standard P20 (female) (2) tance kz
value in normal
state
4 ness (with another wiring Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (9) –
harness) Resis- Min. 100
P20 (female) (2) and between CE02 (female)
tance kz
(23) – P20 (female) (3)
Connecting parts between fuel control dial – machine wiring har-
connector
CE02 Voltage
24 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 25
Failure code [CA144] Coolant Temp Sens High Error 1

Trouble Abnormally high level in coolant temperature
E15 CA144
Contents of
• High voltage is detected in coolant temperature sensor signal circuit.
trouble
Action of con-
• Fixes coolant temperature and continues operation.
troller
Problem that
• Exhaust smoke is white
appears on
• Overheat prevention function does not function.
machine
Related infor-
• Method of reproducing failure code: Starting switch ON.
mation
Causes Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting

without turning starting switch ON.
COOLANT TEMP
Coolant temperature Resistance
(male)
Defective coolant tempera- 0°C 30 – 37 kz
1
ture sensor
25°C 9.3 – 10.7 kz
Between (A) – (B) 50°C 3.2 – 3.8 kz
80°C 1.0 – 1.3 kz
95°C 700 – 800 z
Disconnection in wiring har- without turning starting switch ON.
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between J1 (female) (15) – Resis-
2 Max. 10 z
or defective contact in con- COOLANT TEMP (female) (B) tance
nector) Wiring harness between J1 (female) (38) – Resis-
Max. 10 z
Possible causes COOLANT TEMP (female) (A) tance
and standard a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting
value in normal
state
3 ness (With another wiring Wiring harness among all pins between J1
harness) Resis- Min.
(female) (15) – J1 (female) (With all connec-
tance 100 kz
tors of wiring harness disconnected)
Connecting parts among coolant temperature sensor, engine wiring
harness, and engine controller are suspected. Inspect them directly.
4 • Loose connector, broken lock, broken seal
connector
• Corrosive, bent, broken, forced-in, or extended pin
• Humidity in connector, entry of dirt or dust, poor insulation
J1 (female) Coolant temperature Resistance
0°C 30 – 37 kz
25°C 9.3 – 10.7 kz
Between (15) – (38) 50°C 3.2 – 3.8 kz
80°C 1.0 – 1.3 kz
95°C 700 – 800 z
26 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to engine coolant temperature sensor
PC300, 350-8 27
Failure code [CA145] Coolant Temp Sens Low Error 1

Trouble Abnormally low level in coolant temperature
E15 CA145
Contents of
• Low voltage is detected in coolant temperature sensor signal circuit.
trouble
Action of con-
• Fixes coolant temperature and continues operation.
troller
Problem that
appears on
• Overheat prevention function does not function.
machine
Related infor-
mation

COOLANT TEMP
Coolant temperature Resistance
(male)
0°C 30 – 37 kz
Defective coolant tempera- 25°C 9.3 – 10.7 kz
1
ture sensor
Between (A) – (B) 50°C 3.2 – 3.8 kz
80°C 1.0 – 1.3 kz
95°C 700 – 800 z
Between (B) –
All range Min. 100 kz
chassis ground
circuit) Wiring harness between J1 (female) (15) – Resis- Min.
COOLANT TEMP (female) (B) tance 100 kz
Possible causes a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting
and standard without turning starting switch ON.
Short circuit in wiring har-
value in normal
3 ness (With another wiring Wiring harness among all pins between J1
state Resis- Min.
harness) (female) (15) – J1 (female) (With all connec-
tance 100 kz
Connecting parts among coolant temperature sensor, engine wiring
harness, and engine controller are suspected. Inspect them directly.
4 • Loose connector, broken lock, broken seal
connector
J1 (female) Coolant temperature Resistance
0°C 30 – 37 kz
25°C 9.3 – 10.7 kz
Between (15) – (38) 50°C 3.2 – 3.8 kz
80°C 1.0 – 1.3 kz
95°C 700 – 800 z
Between (15) –
chassis ground
28 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 29
Failure code [CA153] Chg Air Temp Sensor High Error 1

Trouble Abnormally high level in charge temperature
E15 CA153
Contents of • High voltage is detected in temperature signal circuit of boost pressure sensor and temperature sen-
trouble sor.
Action of con-
• Fixes charge temperature (46°C) and continues operation.
troller
Problem that
appears on
• Boost temperature-based engine protection function does not function.
machine
Related infor-
mation

BOOST PRESS &
Charge temperature Resistance
Defective [temperature sig- IMT (male)
1 nal circuit] of boost pressure 0°C 29 – 36 kz
sensor, temperature sensor
25°C 9 – 11 kz
Between (A) – (B)
40°C 4.9 – 5.8 kz
100°C 600 – 700 z
Disconnection in wiring har- without turning starting switch ON.
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between J1 (female) (23) – Resis-
2 Max. 10 z
or defective contact in con- BOOST PRESS & IMT (female) (3) tance
nector) Wiring harness between J1 (female) (47) – Resis-
Max. 10 z
BOOST PRESS & IMT (female) (4) tance
Possible causes
and standard a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting
value in normal Short circuit in wiring har- without turning starting switch ON.
state 3 ness (With another wiring Wiring harness among all pins between J1
harness) Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
Connecting parts among boost pressure sensor, temperature sen-
sor, engine wiring harness, and engine controller are suspected.
Defective wiring harness Inspect them directly.
4
connector • Loose connector, broken lock, broken seal
J1 (female) Charge temperature Resistance
5 Defective engine controller 0°C 29 – 36 kz
25°C 9 – 11 kz
Between (23) – (47)
40°C 4.9 – 5.8 kz
100°C 600 – 700 z
30 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 31
Failure code [CA154] Chg Air Temp Sensor Low Error 1

Trouble Abnormally low level in charge temperature
E15 CA154
Contents of • Low voltage is detected in temperature signal circuit of boost pressure sensor and temperature sen-
trouble sor.
Action of con-
• Fixes charge temperature (46°C) and continues operation.
troller
Problem that
appears on
• Boost temperature-based engine protection function does not function.
machine
Related infor-
mation

BOOST PRESS &
Charge temperature Resistance
IMT (male)
Defective [temperature sig- 0°C 29 – 36 kz
1 nal circuit] of boost pressure
25°C 9 – 11 kz
sensor, temperature sensor Between (A) – (B)
40°C 4.9 – 5.8 kz
100°C 600 – 700 z
Between (3) –
chassis ground
circuit) Wiring harness between J1 (female) (23) – Resis- Min.
BOOST PRESS & IMT (female) (3) tance 100 kz
Possible causes a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting
and standard Short circuit in wiring har- without turning starting switch ON.
value in normal 3 ness (With another wiring Wiring harness among all pins between J1
state harness) Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
Connecting parts among boost pressure sensor, temperature sen-
sor, engine wiring harness, and engine controller are suspected.
Defective wiring harness Inspect them directly.
4
connector • Loose connector, broken lock, broken seal
J1 (female) Charge temperature Resistance
0°C 29 – 36 kz
Between (23) – (47)
40°C 4.9 – 5.8 kz
100°C 600 – 700 z
Between (23) –
chassis ground
32 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 33
Failure code [CA187] Sens Supply 2 Volt Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Sensor power supply 2 voltage low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in sensor power supply 2 circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Fixes charge pressure and charge temperature values and continues operation.
troller • Limits output and continues operation.
Problem that
machine
Related infor-
mation

a Disconnect connector with starting switch OFF, then turn start-
ing switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
Disconnect sensor Boost pressure, tem-
and wiring harness at C4
perature sensor
right in order and
Defective sensor or wiring carry out operation to Common rail pres-
1 C8
harness reproduce trouble. If sure sensor
“E” of failure code
Possible causes goes off when sensor
Bkup sensor C13
and standard or wiring harness is
value in normal disconnected, that
state sensor or wiring har- Engine wiring har-
CE01
ness is defective. ness
Connecting parts between each sensor – engine wiring harness –
engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
connector
If causes 1 and 2 are not detected, engine controller may be defec-
3 Defective engine controller tive. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried
out.)
34 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to sensor power supply 2
PC300, 350-8 35
Failure code [CA221] Ambient Press Sens High Error 1
Action code Failure code Ambient pressure sensor high error

Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in signal circuit of ambient pressure sensor.
trouble
Action of con-
• Fixes ambient pressure value and continues operation.
troller
Problem that
• Engine output lowers.
appears on
• Engine starting performance becomes deteriorated.
machine
Related infor-
mation

1
C29 Voltage
Defective ambient pressure
2 Between (1) – (2) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
sensor
Hot short (Short circuit with and carry out troubleshooting.
3 5V/24V circuit) in wiring har-
Possible causes Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (3) –
ness Voltage Max. 1 V
and standard C29 (female) (3) and chassis ground
value in normal
state
Short circuit in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
4 ness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (3) –
(with another wiring harness) C29 (female) (3) and between CE01 Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
Connecting parts between ambient pressure sensor – engine wiring
harness – engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
connector
CE01 Voltage
36 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to atmospheric pressure sensor
PC300, 350-8 37
Failure code [CA222] Ambient Press Sens Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Ambient pressure sensor low error

Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in signal circuit of ambient pressure sensor.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on
• Engine starting performance becomes deteriorated.
machine
Related infor-
mation

1
C29 Voltage
Defective ambient pressure
sensor
3
Possible causes (Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (3) – Resis- Min.
and standard cuit) C29 (female) (3) and chassis ground tance 100 kz
value in normal
state
4 ness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (3) –
(with another wiring harness) C29 (female) (3) and between CE01 Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
(female) (38) – JC03 – C29 (female) (2)
connector
CE01 Voltage
38 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to atmospheric pressure sensor
PC300, 350-8 39
Failure code [CA227] Sens Supply 2 Volt High Error 1
Action code Failure code Sensor power supply 2 voltage high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in sensor power supply 2 circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Fixes charge pressure and charge temperature values and continues operation.
troller • Limits output and continues operation.
Problem that
machine
Related infor-
mation

Possible causes engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
and standard 1 • Looseness of connector, breakage of lock, or breakage of seal
connector
value in normal • Corrosion, bend, breakage, push-in, or expansion of pin
state • Moisture or dirt in connector or defective insulation
If cause 1 is not detected, engine controller may be defective.
(Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
40 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [CA234] Eng Overspeed 1
Action code Failure code Engine overspeed

Trouble
— CA234 (Engine controller system)
Contents of
• Engine speed exceeded control upper speed limit.
trouble
Action of con-
• Stops injection until engine speed lowers to normal level.
troller
Problem that
appears on • Engine speed fluctuates.
machine
Related infor-
• Method of reproducing failure code: Run engine at high idle.
mation

Possible causes 1 Use of improper fuel Fuel used may be improper. Check it directly.
and standard Machine may be used improperly. Teach operator proper using
value in normal 2 Improper use
method.
state
PC300, 350-8 41
Failure code [CA238] Ne Speed Sens Supply Volt Error 1
Action code Failure code Ne speed sensor supply power voltage error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in power supply circuit of engine Ne speed sensor.
trouble
Action of con-
• Controls the engine with signal from engine Bkup speed sensor.
troller
Problem that
• Engine does not start easily.
appears on
• Engine hunts.
machine
Related infor-
mation

Disconnect sensor
and wiring harness at
right in order and Ne speed sensor C15
Defective sensor or wiring carry out operation to
1 reproduce trouble. If
Possible causes harness
and standard “E” of failure code
value in normal goes off when sensor
state or wiring harness is Engine wiring har-
disconnected, that CE01
ness
sensor or wiring har-
ness is defective.
connector
Circuit diagram related to engine Ne speed sensor
42 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [CA271] IMV/PCV1 Short Error 1
Action code Failure code IMV/PCV1 short error

Trouble
Contents of
• Short circuit was detected in drive circuit of supply pump actuator.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that • Engine speed does not rise from low idle.
machine • Common rail fuel pressure rises above command value.
Related infor-
mation

Defective supply pump actu- ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
ator C17 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – chassis ground Min. 100 kz
2
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (2) – Resis- Min.
cuit) C17 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance 100 kz
Possible causes a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
and standard Short circuit in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
value in normal 3 ness Between CE01 (female) (2) – each of CE01
state (with another wiring harness) (female) pins (With all wiring harness con- Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
nectors disconnected)
Connecting parts between supply pump actuator – engine wiring
connector
CE01 (female) Resistance
Circuit diagram related to supply pump actuator (metering unit)
PC300, 350-8 43
Failure code [CA272] IMV/PCV1 Open Error 1
Action code Failure code IMV/PCV1 open error

Trouble
Contents of
• Opening was detected in drive circuit of supply pump actuator.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
• Engine runs but its operation is unstable.
appears on
• Common rail fuel pressure rises above command value.
machine
Related infor-
mation

Defective supply pump actu- ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
ator C17 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) Max. 5 z
Disconnection in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
ness
Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (2) – Resis-
C17 (female) (1) tance
tor) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (32) Resis-
Max. 10 z
– C17 (female) (2) tance
Possible causes 3
and standard (Short circuit with 24V circuit) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (2) –
Voltage Max. 3 V
value in normal C17 (female) (1) and chassis ground
state a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
4 ness Between CE01 (female) (2) – each of CE01
(with another wiring harness) (female) pins (With all wiring harness con- Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
Connecting parts between supply pump actuator – engine wiring
connector
44 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to supply pump actuator (metering unit)
PC300, 350-8 45
Failure code [CA322] Inj #1 Open/Short Error 1
Action code Failure code Injector #1 open/short circuit error

Trouble
Contents of
• Opening or short circuit was detected in drive circuit of No. 1 injector.
trouble
Action of con-
• Turns the centralized warning lamp and alarm buzzer ON.
troller
Problem that
• Combustion becomes irregular or engine hunts.
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

If following failure codes are also displayed, trouble is in engine con-
troller: [CA322], [CA324], [CA331]
2 Defective No. 1 injector C9 (male) Resistance
ness
Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (45) Resis-
Max. 2 z
Possible causes 4
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (45) Resis-
and standard cuit) Max. 2 z
– C9 (female) (3) and chassis ground tance
value in normal
Between CE01 (female) (45) – each of CE01
Short circuit in wiring har- Resis- Min.
(female) pins (With all wiring harness con-
5 ness tance 100 kz
(with another wiring harness)
Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
Connecting parts between No. 1 injector – engine wiring harness –
connector
7 Defective engine controller CE01 (female) Resistance
Between (45) – (53) Max. 2 z
46 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to injector No. 1
PC300, 350-8 47

Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

troller: [CA323], [CA325], [CA332]
ness
Max. 2 z
Possible causes 4
value in normal
5 ness tance 100 kz
Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
connector
Between (46) – (60) Max. 2 z
48 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 49

Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

troller: [CA322], [CA324], [CA331]
ness
Max. 2 z
Possible causes 4
value in normal
5 ness tance 100 kz
Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
connector
Between (55) – (52) Max. 2 z
50 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 51

Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on • Combustion becomes irregular or engine hunts.
machine
Related infor-
mation

troller: [CA323], [CA325], [CA332]
ness
Max. 2 z
Possible causes 4
value in normal
5 ness tance 100 kz
Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
connector
Between (57) – (59) Max. 2 z
52 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 53

Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

If following failure codes are also displayed, trouble is in engine
controller: [CA322], [CA324], [CA331]
ness
Max. 2 z
Possible causes 4
value in normal
5 ness tance 100 kz
Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
connector
Between (54) – (51) Max. 2 z
54 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 55

Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

troller: [CA323], [CA325], [CA332]
ness
Max. 2 z
Possible causes 4
value in normal
5 ness tance 100 kz
Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
connector
Between (56) – (58) Max. 2 z
56 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 57
SEN02629-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
58
SEN02630-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
Failure code [CA342] Calibration Code Incompatibility................................................................................... 3
Failure code [CA351] Injectors Drive Circuit Error .......................................................................................... 4
Failure code [CA352] Sens Supply 1 Volt Low Error ...................................................................................... 6
Failure code [CA386] Sens Supply 1 Volt High Error...................................................................................... 8
Failure code [CA428] Water in Fuel Sensor High Error ................................................................................ 10
Failure code [CA429] Water in Fuel Sensor Low Error ................................................................................. 12
Failure code [CA441] Battery Voltage Low Error .......................................................................................... 14
Failure code [CA442] Battery Voltage High Error ......................................................................................... 16
Failure code [CA449] Rail Press Very High Error ......................................................................................... 18
Failure code [CA451] Rail Press Sensor High Error ..................................................................................... 22
Failure code [CA452] Rail Press Sensor Low Error...................................................................................... 24
Failure code [CA553] Rail Press High Error ................................................................................................. 26
Failure code [CA559] Rail Press Low Error .................................................................................................. 27
Failure code [CA689] Eng Ne Speed Sensor Error....................................................................................... 29
PC300, 350-8 1
Failure code [CA731] Eng Bkup Speed Sens Phase Error ........................................................................... 31
Failure code [CA757] All Persistent Data Lost Error ..................................................................................... 32
Failure code [CA778] Eng Bkup Speed Sensor Error ................................................................................... 34
Failure code [CA1633] KOMNET Datalink Timeout Error ............................................................................. 36
Failure code [CA2185] Throt Sens Sup Volt High Error ................................................................................ 38
Failure code [CA2186] Throt Sens Sup Volt Low Error................................................................................. 39
Failure code [CA2249] Rail Press Very Low Error ........................................................................................ 40
Failure code [CA2265] Electric Lift Pump High Error .................................................................................... 42
Failure code [CA2266] Electric Lift Pump Low Error ..................................................................................... 44
Failure code [CA2555] Grid Htr Relay Volt High Error .................................................................................. 46
Failure code [CA2556] Grid Htr Relay Volt Low Error ................................................................................... 48
Failure code [D110KB] Battery Relay Drive S/C ........................................................................................... 50
Failure code [D196KA] Service Return Relay Disc. ...................................................................................... 52
Failure code [D196KB] Service Return Relay S/C ........................................................................................ 54
Failure code [DA25KP] 5V sensor 1 power abnormality ............................................................................... 56
Failure code [DA2RMC] Pump Comm. Abnormality ..................................................................................... 60
Failure code [DA2SKQ] Model Selection Abnormality .................................................................................. 62
2 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [CA342] Calibration Code Incompatibility 1
Action code Failure code Calibration code incompatibility

Trouble
Contents of
• Incompatibility of data occurred in engine controller.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on • Normal operation, engine stopped, or start disabled
machine
Related infor-
mation

and standard 1 Defect in related system If another failure code is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it.
value in normal Engine controller may be defective. (Troubleshooting cannot be car-
state 2 Defective engine controller
ried out.)
PC300, 350-8 3
Failure code [CA351] Injectors Drive Circuit Error 1
Action code Failure code Injectors drive circuit error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is error in drive power circuit of injector.
trouble
Action of con-
• Limits output and continues operation.
troller
• Exhaust gas becomes black.
Problem that
• Combustion becomes irregular.
appears on
machine
• Engine cannot be started.
Related infor-
mation

If another failure code is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it,
1 Defect in related system
too.
2 Defective fuse No. 19 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault.
Defective relay for engine
3 Replace relay (R23, R24) for engine controller with another relay
controller power supply
and perform reproducing operation. If “E” of failure code goes off at
Possible causes this time, replaced relay is defective.
and standard
state ing without turning starting switch ON.
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between F01-19 – R23, R24 Resis- Max.
ness (female) (3) tance 0.5 z
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between R23, R24 (female) Resis- Max.
tor) (5) – CE03 (female) (3) tance 0.5 z
Wiring harness between CE03 (female) (1) – Resis- Max.
chassis ground (T11) tance 10 z
If causes 1 – 4 are not detected, engine controller may be defective.
4 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to engine controller power supply
PC300, 350-8 5
Failure code [CA352] Sens Supply 1 Volt Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Sensor power supply 1 voltage low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in sensor power supply 1 circuit.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

Disconnect sensor
and wiring harness at
right in order and Ambient pressure
C29
carry out operation to sensor
Defective sensor or wiring
1 reproduce trouble. If
harness
“E” of failure code
Possible causes goes off when sensor
and standard or wiring harness is Engine wiring har-
value in normal disconnected, that CE01
ness
state sensor or wiring har-
ness is defective.
connector
out.)
6 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 7
Failure code [CA386] Sens Supply 1 Volt High Error 1
Action code Failure code Sensor power supply 1 voltage high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in sensor power supply 1 circuit.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

Possible causes harness – engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
and standard 1 • Looseness of connector, breakage of lock, or breakage of seal
connector
value in normal • Corrosion, bend, breakage, push-in, or expansion of pin
state • Moisture or dirt in connector or defective insulation
8 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 9
Failure code [CA428] Water in Fuel Sensor High Error 1
Action code Failure code Water-in-fuel sensor high error

Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in signal circuit of water-in-fuel sensor.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on • Water separator monitor does not display normally.
machine
Related infor-
mation

Defective water-in-fuel sen- ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
sor C28 (male) Resistance
ness
Max. 10 z
Possible causes
and standard a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
value in normal Short circuit in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
state 3 ness Between CE01 (female) (14) – each of CE01
tance 100 kz
Connecting parts between water-in-fuel sensor – engine wiring har-
connector
Between (14) – (47) Max. 10 z
10 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to water-in-fuel sensor
PC300, 350-8 11
Failure code [CA429] Water in Fuel Sensor Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Water-in-fuel sensor low error

Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in signal circuit of water-in-fuel sensor.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on • Water separator monitor does not display normally.
machine
Related infor-
mation

Defective water-in-fuel sen- C28 (male) Resistance
1
sor
2
and standard Short circuit in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
value in normal 3 ness Between CE01 (female) (14) – each of CE01
state (with another wiring harness) (female) pins (With all wiring harness con- Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
Connecting parts between water-in-fuel sensor – engine wiring har-
connector
Between (14) – (47) Max. 10 z
12 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to water-in-fuel sensor
PC300, 350-8 13
Failure code [CA441] Battery Voltage Low Error 1

Action code Failure code Battery voltage low error
Trouble
Contents of trou-
• There is low voltage in controller power supply circuit.
ble
Action of control-
ler
Problem that
• Engine stops.
appears on
machine
Related informa-
tion

Looseness or corrosion of
1 Battery terminal may be loosened or corroded. Check it directly.
battery terminal
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then keep starting switch
OFF and turn it to START and carry out troubleshooting in each
case.
2 Defective battery voltage
Battery (1 piece) Starting switch Voltage
Between (+) – (–) ter- OFF Min. 12 V
minals START Min. 6.2 V
3 Defective fuse No. 19 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault. (See Cause 6)
this time, replaced relay is defective.
Disconnection in wiring har-
Possible causes Wiring harness between F01-19 – R23, R24 Resis-
ness Max. 10 z
and standard (female) (3) tance
value in normal defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between R23, R24 (female) Resis-
Max. 10 z
state tor) (5) – CE03 (female) (3) tance
Max. 10 z
chassis ground (T11) tance
ness Wiring harness between F01-19 – R23, R24 Resis- Min.
6
(Short circuit with GND cir- (female) (3) and chassis ground tance 100 kz
cuit) Wiring harness between R23, R24 (female) Resis- Max.
(5) – CE03 (female) (3) and chassis ground tance 10 z
Between CE03 (female) (3) – CE03 (female) Resis- Min.
(1) pins (With battery terminal disconnected) tance 100 kz
Short circuit in wiring harness Between CE03 (female) (3) – each of CE02
7 Resis- Min.
(with another wiring harness) (female) pins (With battery terminal discon-
tance 100 kz
nected)
Resis- Min.
(female) pins (With battery terminal discon-
tance 100 kz
nected)
14 PC300, 350-8

Connecting parts between fuse No. 19 – machine wiring harness –
Defective wiring harness con-
Possible causes nector
and standard • Moisture or dirt in connector or defective insulation
state
and start engine and carry out troubleshooting in each case.
9 Defective engine controller CE03 (female) Starting switch Voltage
ON Min. 24 V
Between (3) – (1)
START Min. 12 V
PC300, 350-8 15
Failure code [CA442] Battery Voltage High Error 1
Action code Failure code Battery voltage high error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is high voltage (36 V or higher) in controller power supply circuit.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
appears on • Engine may stop.
machine
Related infor-
mation

Battery Voltage
Between (+) – (–) terminals Max. 32 V
Possible causes a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then start engine and carry
and standard out troubleshooting.
value in normal 2 Defective alternator Alternator Engine speed Voltage
state
R terminal – chassis
Medium or higher 27.5 – 29.5 V
ground
CE03 Voltage
Between (3) – (1) Max. 32 V
16 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 17
Failure code [CA449] Rail Press Very High Error 1
Action code Failure code Common rail pressure very high error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is high pressure error (2) in common rail circuit.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
machine
Related infor-
mation

If another failure code is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it,
too.
There may be air in low pressure circuit. Check it directly according
to the following procedure.
1) Remove pressure pickup plug (outlet side) of fuel main filter.
2) Operate feed pump of fuel pre-filter.
3) Check pressure pickup plug for leakage of fuel and air.
2 Air in low pressure circuit
• If this error occurs during air bleeding after the fuel filter was
replaced, air may remain in the fuel circuit. Keep running the
engine at low idle for about three minutes. As air is bled from the
fuel circuit, the engine speed will be stabilized, erasing the error
indication.
a For check of pressure in fuel low pressure circuit, see Testing
and adjusting, Checking fuel pressure.
• Measured in fuel filter outlet side.
During high idle
Pressure in fuel low- Max. 0.48 MPa
(if engine can be
pressure circuit {Max. 4.9 kg/cm2}
started)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal and adjusting, Checking fuel pressure.
state • Measured in fuel filter inlet and outlet sides.
• Pressure drop in fuel low-pressure circuit = Fuel filter inlet pres-
sure – Fuel filter outlet pressure
Defect in fuel low pressure Pressure drop in fuel Max. 0.14 MPa
3 During high idle
circuit parts low-pressure circuit {Max. 1.4 kg/cm2}
a For check of fuel suction pressure, see Testing and adjusting,
Checking fuel pressure.
• Measured in gear pump fuel inlet side of supply pump.
Fuel suction circuit
Max. 33.9 kPa
pressure During high idle
{Max. 254 mmHg}
(gear pump side)
a For check of fuel return circuit pressure, see Testing and
adjusting, Checking fuel pressure.
Max. 27.1 kPa
pressure During high idle
{Max. 203 mmHg}
(fuel connector side)
a Directly check for fuel leakage from fuel tube of fuel cooler, O-
4 Defective fuel cooler ring, seal washer damage, and check valve clogging or dam-
age.
18 PC300, 350-8

Defective common rail pres- Monitoring by
5 Monitoring code: 36400
sure sensor machine monitor
Common rail pres- While engine is 0 ± 0.39 MPa
sure stopped {0 ± 4 kg/cm2}
Defective O-ring of supply a Directly check that O-ring of supply pump actuator is not dam-
6
pump actuator aged.
a Prepare with starting switch OFF (INSITE connection), then
turn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
Monitoring by
Monitoring code: 36400
machine monitor
Common rail pres- While engine is 0 ± 0.39 MPa
Possible causes sure stopped {0 ± 4 kg/cm2}
Defective supply pump actu-
and standard 7 a Prepare with starting switch OFF (INSITE connection), then
ator
value in normal start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
state • Measured after one minute or more lapsed at idle.
Monitoring by
Monitoring code: 36400
machine monitor
Common rail pres- 1.96 MPa
During low idle
sure {20 kg/cm2}
The common rail fuel pressure sensor connector and supply pump
actuator may be defective. Check them directly.
connector
Defective engine controller ing without turning starting switch ON.
9
ground wiring harness CE03 (female) Resistance
Between (1) – chassis ground Max. 10 z
10 Defective supply pump If causes 1 – 9 are not detected, supply pump may be defective.
PC300, 350-8 19
Circuit diagram related to common rail pressure sensor and engine controller ground line
20 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 21
Failure code [CA451] Rail Press Sensor High Error 1
Action code Failure code Common rail pressure sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is high voltage in signal circuit of common rail pressure sensor.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
• Engine speed or output lowers.
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

1
C8 (male) Voltage
Defective common rail pres-
sure sensor
Possible causes ness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (25)
Voltage Max. 1 V
and standard – C8 (female) (2) and chassis ground
4 ness Wiring harnesses between CE01 (female)
(with another wiring harness) (25) – C8 (female) (2) and between CE01 Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
Connecting parts between common rail pressure sensor – engine
wiring harness – engine controller may be defective. Check them
Defective wiring harness directly.
5
CE01 Voltage
22 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to common rail pressure sensor
PC300, 350-8 23
Failure code [CA452] Rail Press Sensor Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Common rail pressure sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is low voltage in signal circuit of common rail pressure sensor.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
• Engine speed or output lowers.
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

1
C8 (male) Voltage
Defective common rail pres-
sure sensor
Ground fault in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
ness and carry out troubleshooting.
3
Possible causes
and standard
tance 100 kz
5
CE01 Voltage
24 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to common rail pressure sensor
PC300, 350-8 25
Failure code [CA553] Rail Press High Error 1
Action code Failure code Common rail pressure high error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is high pressure error (1) in common rail circuit.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
• Engine sound becomes large when no or light load is applied.
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

If another failure code is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it
first.
Possible causes Ground terminal may be connected defectively. Check following ter-
and standard minals directly.
value in normal Defective connection of • Ground terminal of machine ((–) terminal of battery)
2
state ground terminal • Ground terminal of engine
• Ground terminal of engine controller
• Ground terminal of starting motor
Defective O-ring of supply
3 O-ring of supply pump actuator may be broken. Check it directly.
pump actuator
26 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [CA559] Rail Press Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Common rail pressure low error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is low pressure error (1) in common rail circuit.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that • Engine does not start at all or does not start easily.
appears on • Exhaust gas becomes black.
machine • Engine output lowers.
Related infor-
mation

Fuel may be leaking to outside. Check it directly (Check visually
1 Fuel leakage to outside
while running engine at low idle).
• Measured in fuel filter inlet side.
• Cranking speed: Min. 150 rpm
Pressure in fuel low- Min. 0.14 MPa
During cranking
pressure circuit {Min. 1.4 kg/cm2}
• Measured in fuel filter outlet side.
Pressure in fuel low- Min. 0.48 MPa
During high idle
pressure circuit {Min. 4.9 kg/cm2}
Possible causes
and standard and adjusting, Checking fuel pressure.
value in normal • Measured in fuel filter inlet and outlet sides.
state Defect in low pressure cir- • Pressure drop in fuel low-pressure circuit = Fuel filter inlet pres-
2 sure – Fuel filter outlet pressure
cuit parts
Pressure drop in fuel Max. 0.14 MPa
During high idle
low-pressure circuit {Max. 1.4 kg/cm2}
• Measured in gear pump fuel inlet side of supply pump.
Max. 33.9 kPa
pressure (gear pump During high idle
{Max. 254 mmHg}
side)
• Measured in fuel connector side.
Max. 27.1 kPa
pressure (fuel con- During high idle
{Max. 203 mmHg}
nector side)
PC300, 350-8 27

a For check of return rate from injector, see Testing and adjust-
ing, Checking fuel return rate and leakage.
During cranking
Defective injector
(if engine cannot be Max. 100 cc/30 sec.
3 (including high pressure pip-
Return rate from started)
ing in head)
injector During low idle
(if engine can be Max. 300 cc/45 sec.
started)
a For check of return rate from supply pump, see Testing and
adjusting, Checking fuel return rate and leakage.
During cranking
(if engine cannot be Max. 100 cc/30 sec.
4 Defective supply pump
Return rate from sup- started)
Possible causes ply pump During low idle
and standard (if engine can be Max. 300 cc/45 sec.
value in normal started)
state a For check of leakage through pressure limiter, see Testing and
adjusting, Checking fuel return rate and leakage.
5 Defective pressure limiter
Leakage through Below 30 drops/
At low idle
pressure limiter 60 sec.
Defective supply pump a Remove the supply pump head, and directly check that the
6
plunger plunger is not damaged.
There may be air in low pressure circuit. Check it directly according
to the following procedure.
1) Remove pressure pickup plug (outlet side) of fuel main filter.
2) Operate feed pump of fuel pre-filter.
3) Check pressure pickup plug for leakage of fuel and air.
7 Air in low pressure circuit
• If this error occurs during air bleeding after the fuel filter was
replaced, air may remain in the fuel circuit. Keep running the
engine at low idle for about three minutes. As air is bled from the
fuel circuit, the engine speed will be stabilized, erasing the error
indication.
28 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [CA689] Eng Ne Speed Sensor Error 1
Action code Failure code Engine Ne speed sensor error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is error in signal from engine Ne speed sensor.
trouble
Action of con-
• Continues control with signal from engine Bkup speed sensor.
troller
Problem that • Engine hunts.
appears on • Engine does not start easily.
Related infor-
mation

Defective Ne speed sensor If failure code [CA238] is also indicated, carry out troubleshooting
1
C15 Voltage
Defective engine Ne speed
sensor
Breakage or improper clear-
Engine Ne speed sensor may be broken or may have improper
3 ance of engine Ne speed
clearance. Check it directly.
Possible causes sensor
and standard Breakage of rotation sensor
value in normal 4 Rotation sensor wheel may be broken. Check it directly.
wheel
state
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (27) Resis-
Max. 10 z
tor) – C15 (female) (3) tance
6
ness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (27)
Voltage Max. 1 V
– C15 (female) (3) and chassis ground
PC300, 350-8 29

Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (27)
– C15 (female) (3) and between CE01
8 ness tance 100 kz
Resis- Min.
Possible causes – C15 (female) (3) and between CE01
tance 100 kz
and standard (female) (48) – C15 (female) (2)
value in normal Connecting parts between engine Ne speed sensor – engine wiring
state harness – engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
connector
CE01 Voltage
Circuit diagram related to engine Ne speed sensor
30 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [CA731] Eng Bkup Speed Sens Phase Error 1
Action code Failure code Engine Bkup speed sensor phase error
Trouble
Contents of
• Phase error was detected in signals from engine Ne speed sensor and engine Bkup speed sensor
trouble
Action of con- • Controls the engine with signal from engine Ne speed sensor.
troller • Turns the centralized warning lamp and alarm buzzer ON.
Problem that • Engine does not start at all or does not start easily.
appears on • Idle speed is unstable.
machine • Exhaust gas becomes black.
Related infor-
mation

Breakage of engine Ne
1 Engine Ne speed sensor may be broken. Check it directly.
speed sensor
Breakage of engine Bkup
2 Engine Bkup speed sensor may be broken. Check it directly.
speed sensor
Rotation sensor wheel on crankshaft side may be installed defec-
tively or broken. Check it according to the following procedure.
Defective installation or
1) Set No. 1 cylinder at compression top dead center
3 breakage of rotation sensor
(Match stamped mark).
wheel on crankshaft side
2) If center of oblong hole of rotation sensor wheel is at tip of Ne
speed sensor, rotation sensor wheel is installed normally.
Possible causes Rotation sensor ring on camshaft side may be installed defectively
and standard or broken. Check it according to the following procedure.
value in normal Defective installation or 1) Set No. 1 cylinder at compression top dead center
state 4 breakage of rotation sensor (Match stamped mark).
ring on camshaft side 2) Remove Bkup speed sensor.
3) If 2 grooves (1 crest) of rotation sensor ring are seen through
sensor mounting hole, rotation sensor ring is installed normally.
Defective timing of crank- Timing of crankshaft and camshaft may be defective. Check it
5
shaft and camshaft directly.
Ground terminal may be connected defectively. Check following ter-
minals directly.
Defective connection of • Ground terminal of machine ((–) terminal of battery)
6
ground terminal • Ground terminal of engine
• Ground terminal of engine controller
• Ground terminal of starting motor
PC300, 350-8 31
Failure code [CA757] All Persistent Data Lost Error 1
Action code Failure code All persistent data lost error

Trouble
Contents of
• All data in engine controller are lost.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
• Engine may stop and may not be started again.
appears on
• Monitoring function of machine monitor (engine controller system) may not work normally.
machine
Related infor-
mation

If another failure code is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it
first.
Looseness or corrosion of
2 Battery terminal may be loosened or corroded. Check it directly.
battery terminal
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then keep starting switch
OFF and turn it to START and carry out troubleshooting in
each case.
Battery (1 piece) Starting switch Voltage
Between (+) – (–) ter- OFF Min. 12 V
minals START Min. 6.2 V
4 Defective fuse No. 19 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault.
Possible causes
this time, replaced relay is defective.
and standard
state ing without turning starting switch ON.
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between F01-19 – R23, R24 Resis-
ness Max. 10 z
(female) (3) tance
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between R23, R24 (female) Resis-
Max. 10 z
tor) (5) – CE03 (female) (3) tance
Max. 10 z
chassis ground (T11) tance
Connecting parts between fuse No. 19 – machine wiring harness –
connector
and start engine and carry out troubleshooting in each case.
8 Defective engine controller CE03 (female) Starting switch Voltage
ON Min. 24 V
Between (3) – (1)
START Min. 12 V
32 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 33
Failure code [CA778] Eng Bkup Speed Sensor Error 1
Action code Failure code Engine Bkup speed sensor error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is error in signal from engine Bkup speed sensor.
trouble
Action of con-
• Continues control with signal from engine Ne speed sensor.
troller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related infor-
mation

1
C13 (male) Voltage
Defective engine Bkup
speed sensor
Breakage or improper clear-
Engine Bkup speed sensor may be broken or may have improper
3 ance of engine Bkup speed
clearance. Check it directly.
sensor
Breakage of rotation sensor
4 Rotation sensor ring may be broken. Check it directly.
ring
value in normal defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (26) Resis-
Max. 10 z
state tor) – C13 (female) (3) tance
6
ness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (26)
Voltage Max. 1 V
– C13 (female) (3) and chassis ground
8 ness tance 100 kz
Resis- Min.
tance 100 kz
34 PC300, 350-8

Connecting parts between engine Bkup speed sensor – engine wir-
ing harness – engine controller may be defective. Check them
9
Possible causes connector • Looseness of connector, breakage of lock, or breakage of seal
and standard • Corrosion, bend, breakage, push-in, or expansion of pin
value in normal • Moisture or dirt in connector or defective insulation
state
CE01 Voltage
Circuit diagram related to engine Bkup speed sensor
PC300, 350-8 35
Failure code [CA1633] KOMNET Datalink Timeout Error 1
Action code Failure code KOMNET Datalink timeout error

Trouble
E0E CA1633 (Engine controller system)
Contents of • Engine controller detected communication error in KOMNET communication circuit between pump
trouble controller and machine monitor.
Action of • Continues operation in default mode.
Problem that
• Information may not transmitted normally by KOMNET communication and machine may not operate
appears on
normally. (Trouble phenomenon depends on failed section.)
machine
Related infor-
mation

Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (8),
Resis-
ness (Disconnection in wiring (9) – CP01 (female) (45), – CE02 (female) Max. 1 z
1 tance
or defective contact in con- (46), – K02 (female) (A)
nector) Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (10)
Resis-
– CP01 (female) (64), – CE02 (female) (47), Max. 1 z
tance
– K02 (female) (B)
Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (8),
Ground fault in wiring har- Resis-
(9) – CP01 (female) (45), – CE02 (female) Min. 1 Mz
2 ness (Short circuit with GND tance
(46), – K02 (female) (A), – N08 (male) (3)
circuit)
Possible causes Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (10)
Resis-
and standard – CP01 (female) (64), – CE02 (female) (47), Min. 1 Mz
tance
value in normal – K02 (female) (B), – N08 (male) (10)
state a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
Max.
Hot short (Short circuit with (9) – CP01 (female) (45), – CE02 (female) Voltage
3 5.5 V
24V circuit) in wiring harness (46), – K02 (female) (A), – N08 (male) (3)
Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (10)
Max.
– CP01 (female) (64), – CE02 (female) (47), Voltage
5.5 V
– K02 (female) (B), – N08 (male) (10)
Defective CAN terminal without turning starting switch ON.
4 resistance (Internal short cir-
K02 (male) Resistance
cuit or disconnection)
Between (A) – (B) 120 ± 12 z
Defective pump controller, If causes 1 – 4 are not detected, pump controller, engine controller
5 engine controller or machine or machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble is in system,
monitor troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
36 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to KOMNET communication
PC300, 350-8 37
Failure code [CA2185] Throt Sens Sup Volt High Error 1
Action code Failure code Throttle sensor supply voltage high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage (5.25 V or higher) was detected in throttle sensor power supply circuit.
trouble
Action of con- before detection of trouble and continues operation.
troller • If starting switch is turned ON while voltage is abnormally high, controller continues operation with
Problem that
machine
Related infor-
mation

Short circuit in wiring har-
Between CE02 (female) (22) – each of CE02 Resis- Min.
1 ness
(female) pins (With P20 disconnected) tance 100 kz
Possible causes Between CE02 (female) (22) – CE03 Resis- Min.
and standard (female) (3) (With P20 disconnected) tance 100 kz
value in normal Connecting parts between fuel control dial – machine wiring har-
state ness – engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
connector
out.)
38 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [CA2186] Throt Sens Sup Volt Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Throttle sensor supply voltage low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in throttle sensor power supply circuit.
trouble
Action of con- before detection of trouble and continues operation.
troller • If starting switch is turned ON while voltage is abnormally high, controller continues operation with
Problem that
machine
Related infor-
mation

1
cuit) – P20 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance 100 kz
Possible causes 2 ness
and standard (with another wiring harness) Between CE02 (female) (9) – each of CE02 Resis- Min.
value in normal (female) pins (With P20 disconnected) tance 100 kz
state Connecting parts between fuel control dial – machine wiring har-
connector
out.)
PC300, 350-8 39
Failure code [CA2249] Rail Press Very Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Common rail pressure very low error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is low pressure error (2) in common rail circuit.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that • Engine does not start easily.
appears on • Exhaust gas becomes black.
Related infor-
mation

and standard
value in normal 1 Carry out troubleshooting for failure code [CA559].
state
40 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 41
Failure code [CA2265] Electric Lift Pump High Error 1
Action code Failure code Electric lift pump high error

Trouble
Contents of
• Opening was detected in drive circuit of electric lift pump actuator.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
machine
Related infor-
mation

Defective electric lift pump ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 (Internal disconnection or
C18 (male) Resistance
short circuit)
ness
C18 (female) (1) tance
Max. 10 z
Possible causes 3
12V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (1) –
and standard Voltage Max. 6 V
C18 (female) (1) and chassis ground
value in normal
(with another wiring harness) (female) pins (With all wiring harness con- Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
tance
5
Between (1) – (11) Max. 20 z
42 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to electric lift pump actuator
PC300, 350-8 43
Failure code [CA2266] Electric Lift Pump Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Electric lift pump low error

Trouble
Contents of
• Opening was detected in electric lift pump actuator.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
machine
Related infor-
mation

Defective electric lift pump C18 (male) Resistance
1
2
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (1) – Resis- Max. 100
cuit) C18 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance kz
3
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (1) –
Possible causes Voltage Max. 6 V
C18 (female) (1) and chassis ground
and standard
tance 100 kz
5
Between (1) – (11) Max. 20 z
44 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to electric lift pump actuator
PC300, 350-8 45
Failure code [CA2555] Grid Htr Relay Volt High Error 1
Action code Failure code Grid heater relay volt high error
Trouble
Contents of
• Disconnection was detected in drive circuit of intake air heater relay.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
• Intake air heater does not work (Engine does not start easily and exhaust gas becomes white at low
appears on
temperature).
machine
Related infor- • Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON when engine coolant temperature is
mation below –4°C.

ing without turning starting switch ON. (Troubleshooting for
relay unit)
R18 (male) Resistance
Defective automatic pre- Between (1) – (2) 300 – 600 z
1 heater relay a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
(Internal disconnection).
and carry out troubleshooting. (Troubleshooting by replace-
ment)
Replace automatic preheater relay (R18) with another relay and
perform reproducing operation. If “E” of failure code goes off at this
time, replaced relay is defective.
Possible causes ness
and standard
– R18 (female) (1) tance
value in normal
state Max. 10 z
– R18 (female) (2) tance
3 ness
(with another wiring harness) Between CE02 (female) (40) – each of CE02 Resis- Min.
(female) pins (With R18 disconnected) tance 100 kz
Connecting parts between automatic preheater relay – machine wir-
4
Between (40) – (42) 300 – 600 z
46 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to preheating, starting and charging engine
PC300, 350-8 47
Failure code [CA2556] Grid Htr Relay Volt Low Error 1
Action code Failure code Grid heater relay volt low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Short circuit was detected in drive circuit of intake air heater relay.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
• Intake air heater does not work (Engine does not start easily and exhaust gas becomes white at low
appears on
temperature).
machine
Related infor- • Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON when engine coolant temperature is
mation below –4°C.

ing without turning starting switch ON. (Troubleshooting for
relay unit)
R18 (male) Resistance
Defective automatic pre- Between (1) – (2) 300 – 600 z
1 heater relay a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
and carry out troubleshooting. (Troubleshooting by replace-
ment)
Replace automatic preheater relay (R18) with another relay and
perform reproducing operation. If “E” of failure code goes off at this
time, replaced relay is defective.
2
and standard (Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (40) Resis- Min.
value in normal cuit) – R18 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance 100 kz
state
3 ness
(with another wiring harness) Between CE02 (female) (40) – each of CE02 Resis- Min.
(female) pins (With R18 disconnected) tance 100 kz
Connecting parts between automatic preheater relay – machine wir-
4
Between (40) – (42) 300 – 600 z
48 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to preheating, starting and charging engine
PC300, 350-8 49
Failure code [D110KB] Battery Relay Drive S/C 1
Action code Failure code Battery relay drive short

Trouble
— D110KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed at output to battery relay drive circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Turns output to battery relay drive circuit OFF.
troller • Even if cause of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Engine does not stop.
machine
Related infor- • Operating condition of battery relay (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
mation Code 03700: Controller Output)

Battery relay Resistance
Defective battery relay
1 Between R02 (terminal BR) –
(Internal defect) There is continuity
R01 (terminal E)
Between R02 (terminal BR) –
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Possible causes
state 2 Wiring harness between CP02 (female)
cuit) (108) – J01 – R02 (terminal BR) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
Turn starting switch
3 Defective pump controller CP02 (female) Voltage
OFF.
Between (108) – 20 – 30 V
ON o OFF
chassis ground (4 – 7 sec.)
50 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to battery relay drive
PC300, 350-8 51
Failure code [D196KA] Service Return Relay Disc. 1
Action code Failure code Service return relay disconnection

Trouble
— D196KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of • When service return relay circuit was disconnected with GND (when output was turned OFF), 24V
trouble was not generated.
Action of con- • None in particular.
Problem that
appears on • Hydraulic circuit for attachment does not change to single operation circuit.
machine
• Carry out troubleshooting only for setting with ATT. (Confirm settings on machine monitor.)
a This code detects only a trouble in the primary side (coil side) of service return relay.
Related infor- When service return solenoid may be in defective operation, check the power supply, wiring har-
mation ness, and solenoid in the secondary side (Limit SW side) of the relay.
• Operating condition of service return relay (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
(Code 02301: Solenoid 2)

1 Defective fuse No.2 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault. (See cause 4.)
Defective service return relay ing without turning starting switch ON.
2
(Internal disconnection) R20 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 100 – 500 z
ness
Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (8) – Resis-
R20 (female) (2) tance
Possible causes defective contact in connec-
and standard tor) Wiring harness between R20 (female) (1) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
value in normal J03 – F01-2 outlet tance
state a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
4
(Short circuit with 24V circuit) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (8) – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
R20 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
CP02 Working mode Voltage
5 Defective pump controller When B-mode is not
20 – 30 V
Between (8) – chas- selected
sis ground When B-mode is
Max. 1 V
selected
52 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to service return relay and solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 53
Failure code [D196KB] Service Return Relay S/C 1
Action code Failure code Service return relay short

Trouble
— D196KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of • When service return relay circuit was connected to GND (when output was turned ON), abnormal
trouble current flowed.
Action of con- • Turns output to service return relay circuit OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Hydraulic circuit for attachment does not change to single operation circuit.
machine
• Carry out troubleshooting only for setting with ATT. (Confirm settings on machine monitor.)
a This code detects only a trouble in the primary side (coil side) of service return relay.
Related infor- When service return solenoid may be in defective operation, check the power source, wiring har-
mation ness, and solenoid in the secondary side (Limit SW side) of the relay.
• Operating condition of service return relay (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.

Defective service return relay ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
(Internal short circuit) R20 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 100 – 500 z
Possible causes Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (8) – Resis-
2 ness (Short circuit with GND Min. 1 Mz
and standard R20 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
circuit)
value in normal
Wiring harness between R20 (female) (1) – Resis-
state Min. 1 Mz
J03 – F01-2 outlet and chassis ground tance
3 Defective pump controller When B-mode is not
20 – 30 V
Between (8) – chas- selected
sis ground When B-mode is
Max. 1 V
selected
54 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to service return relay and solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 55
Failure code [DA25KP] 5V sensor 1 power abnormality 1
Action code Failure code 5V sensor power supply output 1 abnormality

Trouble
E02 DA25KP (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Voltage of 5V sensor power supply output 1 circuit is below 2.5 V or above 6.0 V.
trouble
Action of • Turns output of 5V sensor power supply output 1 OFF.
controller • Even if cause of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
Problem that • Automatic gear shifting function does not work (pump pressure sensor system).
appears on • Auto-decelerator keeps working and is not reset or fine control performance of work equipment is
machine lowered (PPC pressure sensor system).
Related
• Method of reproducing failure code; Turn starting switch ON.
information

Bucket DUMP PPC
P01
pressure switch
Boom RAISE PPC
P03
pressure switch
Disconnect sensors at right in Bucket CURL PPC
Defective pressure sensor order and carry out operation to P04
1 pressure switch
(Internal short circuit) reproduce trouble. If "E" of failure
Arm IN PPC
code goes off when a sensor is P05
pressure switch
disconnected, that sensor is
defective. Swing RIGHT PPC
P07
pressure switch
Swing LEFT PPC
P08
pressure switch
Pump pressure sensor P25
and standard ing without turning starting switch ON.
value in normal Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (34)
state – P01 (female) (2), P01 (female) (1) – J03 – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
ground (T08) tance
[Bucket DUMP PPC pressure switch system]
Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (53)
– P03 (female) (2), P03 (female) (1) – J03 – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
ground (T08) tance
[Boom RAISE PPC pressure switch system]
2 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (73)
circuit) – P04 (female) (2), P04 (female) (1) – J03 – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
ground (T08) tance
[Bucket CURL PPC pressure switch system]
Min. 1 Mz
ground (T08) tance
[Arm IN PPC pressure switch system]
Min. 1 Mz
ground (T08) tance
[Swig RIGHT PPC pressure switch system]
56 PC300, 350-8

Min. 1 Mz
Ground fault in wiring har- ground (T08) tance
2 ness (Short circuit with GND [Swing LEFT PPC pressure switch system]
circuit) Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (9) –
Resis-
J07 – P25 female (3) Min. 1 Mz
tance
[Pump pressure sensor system]
– P01 (female) (2), P01 (female) (1) – J03 –
Voltage Max. 1 V
ground (T08)
[Bucket CURL PPC pressure sensor system]
Voltage Max. 1 V
ground (T08)
[Swing LEFT PPC pressure sensor system]
Possible causes Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (73)
and standard – P04 (female) (2), P04 (female) (1) – J03 –
value in normal Voltage Max. 1 V
ground (T08)
state [Arm IN PPC pressure sensor system]
Hot short (Short circuit with
3 24 V circuit) in wiring har- Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (17)
ness – P05 (female) (2), P05 (female) (1) – J03 –
ground (T08) Voltage Max. 1 V
[Bucket DUMP PPC pressure sensor sys-
tem]
Voltage Max. 1 V
ground (T08)
[Boom RAISE PPC pressure sensor system]
Voltage Max. 1 V
ground (T08)
[Swing RIGHT PPC pressure sensor system]
Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (9) –
J07 – P25 (female) (3) Voltage Max. 1 V
[Pump pressure sensor system]
If causes 1 – 3 are not detected, pump controller may be defective.
4 Defective pump controller
PC300, 350-8 57
Circuit diagram related to pressure sensor power supply of pump controller
58 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 59
Failure code [DA2RMC] Pump Comm. Abnormality 1
Action code Failure code Pump communication abnormality

Trouble
E0E DA2RMC (Pump controller system)
Contents of • Pump controller detected communication error in CAN communication circuit between machine mon-
trouble itor and engine controller.
Action of con- • Fix engine output to E-mode, and limit pump absorption torque to about 80%.
Problem that
• Output lowers. (Pump absorption torque decreases.)
appears on
• As the working load increases, engine may stall.
machine
Related infor-
mation

ness
Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (10) Resis-
– CE02 (female) (47), – CP01 (female) (64) tance
tor) Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (9) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
CE02 (female) (46), – CP01 (female) (45) tance
Ground fault in wiring har- Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (10)
Resis-
ness – CE02 (female) (47), – CP01 (female) (64), Min. 1 Mz
2 tance
(Short circuit with GND cir- – other related circuit and chassis ground
cuit) Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (9) –
Resis-
Possible causes CE02 (female) (46), – CP01 (female) (45), – Min. 1 Mz
tance
and standard other related circuit and chassis ground
state and carry out troubleshooting.
Hot short (Short circuit with – CE02 (female) (47), – CP01 (female) (64), Voltage Max. 1 V
3
24V circuit) in wiring harness – other related circuit and chassis ground
Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (9) –
CE02 (female) (46), – CP01 (female) (45), – Voltage Max. 1 V
other related circuit and chassis ground
Defective CAN terminal ing without turning starting switch ON.
4
resistance K02 (male) Resistance
Between (A) – (B) 120 ± 12 z
Defective machine monitor, If causes 1 – 4 are not detected, machine monitor, engine controller,
5 engine controller, or pump or pump controller may be defective. (Since trouble is in system,
controller troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
60 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to CAN communication of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 61
Failure code [DA2SKQ] Model Selection Abnormality 1
Action code Failure code Model selection abnormality

Trouble
— DA2SKQ (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Model code signal for model which is not registered in controller is input.
trouble
Action of con- • Changes input model code to code of default model (PC300) and continues control.
Problem that
appears on • None in particular.
machine
• Controller-recognized model name (digits) can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 00200)
Related infor-
• Input of model selection signal (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function. (Code 02200:
mation
Switch Input 2)

Defective model selection
connector ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
(Internal disconnection or S30 (female) Resistance
short circuit) Between (2), (3), (7) – (8) Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (58) Resis-
Max. 1 z
– S30 (male) (4) and chassis ground tance
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (77) Resis-
ness Max. 1 z
– S30 (male) (3) tance
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (21) Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) – S30 (male) (2) tance
Max. 1 z
– S30 (male) (7) tance
Possible causes Wiring harness between S30 (male) (8) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
and standard J05 – T07 – chassis ground tance
state
Min. 1 Mz
Ground fault in wiring har- – S30 (male) (4) and chassis ground tance
ness Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (39) Resis-
3 Min. 1 Mz
(Short circuit with GND cir- – S30 (male) (7) and chassis ground tance
cuit)
Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
CP01 Voltage
4 Defective pump controller Between (58), (39), (21), (40) –
20 – 30 V
chassis ground
Between (39), (77), (21) – chas-
Max. 1 V
sis ground
62 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to model selection connector of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 63
SEN02630-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
64
SEN02631-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
Failure code [DAFRMC] CAN discon (Monitor detected)................................................................................ 4
Failure code [DHPAMA] F Pump Press Sensor Abnormality .......................................................................... 6
Failure code [DHPBMA] R Pump Press Sensor Abnormality ......................................................................... 8
Failure code [DHS3MA] Arm Curl PPC Sen. Abnormality ............................................................................ 10
Failure code [DHS4MA] Bucket Curl PPC Press Sensor Abnormality.......................................................... 12
Failure code [DW43KA] Travel Speed Sol. Disc. .......................................................................................... 14
Failure code [DW43KB] Travel Speed Sol. S/C ............................................................................................ 16
Failure code [DW45KA] Swing Brake Sol. Disc. ........................................................................................... 18
Failure code [DW45KB] Swing Brake Sol. S/C ............................................................................................. 22
Failure code [DW91KA] Travel Junction Sol. Disc. ....................................................................................... 24
Failure code [DW91KB] Travel Junction Sol. S/C ......................................................................................... 26
Failure code [DWJ0KA] Merge-divider Sol. Disc .......................................................................................... 28
Failure code [DWJ0KB] Merge-divider Sol. S/C ........................................................................................... 30
Failure code [DWK0KA] 2-stage Relief Sol. Disc.......................................................................................... 32
PC300, 350-8 1
Failure code [DWK0KB] 2-stage Relief Sol. S/C........................................................................................... 34

Failure code [DXA0KA] PC-EPC Sol. Disc. .................................................................................................. 36
Failure code [DXA0KB] PC-EPC Sol. S/C .................................................................................................... 38
Failure code [DXE0KA] LS-EPC Sol. Disc. ................................................................................................... 40
Failure code [DXE0KB] LS-EPC Sol. S/C ..................................................................................................... 42
Failure code [DXE4KA] Service Current EPC Disc....................................................................................... 44
Failure code [DXE4KB] Service Current EPC S/C........................................................................................ 45
Failure code [DY20KA] Wiper Working Abnormality ..................................................................................... 46
Failure code [DY20MA] Wiper Parking Abnormality ..................................................................................... 48
Failure code [DY2CKB] Washer Drive Short................................................................................................. 50
Failure code [DY2DKB] Wiper Drive (For) Short........................................................................................... 52
Failure code [DY2EKB] Wiper Drive (Rev) Short .......................................................................................... 54
2 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 3
Failure code [DAFRMC] CAN discon (Monitor detected) 1
Action code Failure code CAN disconnection (Monitor detected)

Trouble
E0E DAFRMC (Machine monitor system)
Contents of • Machine monitor detected communication error in CAN communication circuit between pump con-
trouble troller and engine controller.
Action of
machine moni- • If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself.
tor
Problem that
• Information may not transmitted normally by CAN communication and machine may not operate nor-
appears on
mally. (Trouble phenomenon depends on failed section.)
machine
Related
information

Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (8),
Resis-
ness (Disconnection in wiring (9) – CP01 (female) (45), – CE02 (female) Max. 1 z
1 tance
or defective contact in con- (46), – K02 (female) (A)
nector)
Resis-
– CP01 (female) (64), – CE02 (female) (47), Max. 1 z
tance
– K02 (female) (B)
Ground fault in wiring har- Resis-
(9) – CP01 (female) (45), – CE02 (female) Min. 1 Mz
2 ness (Short circuit with GND tance
(46), – K02 (female) (A), – N08 (male) (3)
circuit)
Possible causes Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (10)
and standard Resis-
– CP01 (female) (64), – CE02 (female) (47), Min. 1 Mz
value in normal tance
– K02 (female) (B), – N08 (male) (10)
state
Max.
Hot short (Short circuit with (9) – CP01 (female) (45), – CE02 (female) Voltage
3 5.5 V
24V circuit) in wiring harness (46), – K02 (female) (A), – N08 (male) (3)
Max.
– CP01 (female) (64), – CE02 (female) (47), Voltage
5.5 V
– K02 (female) (B), – N08 (male) (10)
Defective CAN terminal ing without turning starting switch ON.
4 resistance (Internal short cir-
K02 (male) Resistance
cuit or disconnection)
Between (A) – (B) 120 ± 12 z
If causes 1 – 4 are not detected, machine monitor may be defective.
4 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to CAN communication of machine monitor
PC300, 350-8 5
Failure code [DHPAMA] F Pump Press Sensor Abnormality 1
Action code Failure code F pump press sensor abnormality

Trouble
— DHPAMA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Signal voltage from F pump pressure sensor is below 0.3 V or above 4.42 V.
trouble
Action of con- • Fixes F pump pressure at 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} and continues control.
Problem that
appears on • No automatic gear shifting
machine
a If 5V circuit (3) and ground circuit (1) of pressure sensor are connected inversely, pressure sensor
Related infor- will be broken. Accordingly, take extreme care when checking.
mation • Input from F pump pressure sensor (pressure) can be checked with monitoring function.
(Code 01112: F pump pressure

Defective sensor power sup- If failure code [DA25KP] is also displayed, carry out troubleshooting
1
ply system for it first.
Defective F pump pressure
2 sensor P25 Voltage
(Internal defect) Between (3) – (1) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (2) – (1) 0.5 – 4.5 V
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (9) – Resis-
ness Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
tor) – P25 (female) (1) tance
Possible causes
and standard Max. 1 z
– P25 (female) (2) tance
value in normal
state Ground fault in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
4
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (49) Resis-
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
– P25 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
Hot short (Short circuit with Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (9) –
5 Voltage Max. 1 V
24V circuit) in wiring harness P25 (female) (3) and chassis ground
Voltage Max. 1 V
– P25 (female) (2) and chassis ground
6 Defective pump controller CP01 Voltage
Between (19) – (18) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (49) – (18) 0.5 – 4.5 V
6 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to F pump pressure sensor of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 7
Failure code [DHPBMA] R Pump Press Sensor Abnormality 1
Action code Failure code R pump pressure sensor abnormality

Trouble
— DHPBMA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Signal voltage from R pump pressure sensor is below 0.3 V or above 4.42 V.
trouble
Action of con- • Fixes R pump pressure at 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} and continues control.
Problem that
machine
mation • Input from R pump pressure sensor (pressure) can be checked with monitoring function.
(Code 01113: R pump pressure

1
Defective R pump pressure
2 sensor P26 Voltage
(Internal defect) Between (3) – (1) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (2) – (1) 0.5 – 4.5 V
ness Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Possible causes
value in normal
4
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
5 Voltage Max. 1 V
Voltage Max. 1 V
Between (9) – (18) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (68) – (18) 0.5 – 4.5 V
8 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to R pump pressure sensor of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 9
Failure code [DHS3MA] Arm Curl PPC Sen. Abnormality 1
Action code Failure code Arm IN PPC pressure sensor abnormality

Trouble
— DHS3MA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Signal voltage from arm IN PPC pressure sensor is below 0.3 V or above 4.72 V.
trouble
Action of con- • Fixes arm IN PPC pressure at 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} and continues control.
Problem that
machine
mation • Input from arm IN PPC pressure sensor (pressure) can be checked with monitoring function.
(Code 07200: Arm IN PPC pressure

1
Defective arm IN PPC pres- P04 Voltage
2
sure sensor (Internal defect)
Between (3) – (1) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (2) – (1) 0.5 – 4.5 V
ness Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Possible causes
value in normal
4
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
5 Voltage Max. 1 V
Voltage Max. 1 V
Between (9) – (18) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (17) – (18) 0.5 – 4.5 V
10 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to arm IN PPC pressure sensor of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 11
Failure code [DHS4MA] Bucket Curl PPC Press Sensor Abnormality 1
Action code Failure code Bucket CURL PPC press sensor abnormality
Trouble
— DHS4MA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Signal voltage from bucket curl PPC pressure sensor is below 0.3 V or above 4.42 V.
trouble
Action of con- • Fixes bucket curl PPC pressure at 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} and continues control.
Problem that
machine
mation • Input from bucket curl PPC pressure sensor (pressure) can be checked with monitoring function.
(Code 07300: Bucket Curl PPC pressure)

1
Defective bucket curl PPC
2 pressure sensor (Internal P01 Voltage
defect) Between (3) – (1) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (2) – (1) 0.5 – 4.5 V
ness Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Possible causes
value in normal
4
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
5 Voltage Max. 1 V
Voltage Max. 1 V
Between (9) – (18) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (73) – (18) 0.5 – 4.5 V
12 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to bucket curl PPC pressure sensor of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 13
Failure code [DW43KA] Travel Speed Sol. Disc. 1
Action code Failure code Travel speed solenoid disconnection

Trouble
— DW43KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• No current flows at output to travel speed solenoid circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • None in particular. (Since no current flows, solenoid does not operate.)
Problem that
appears on • Travel speed does not change to Hi. (Machine monitor changes to the normal state.)
machine
• Operating condition of travel speed solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
Related infor-
• Solenoid detects disconnection when output is turned on. To confirm the reproduction after repair, be
mation
sure to turn output on. (For more information on how to turn output on/off, see troubleshooting for
failure code [DW43KB].)

Defective travel speed sole- ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
noid (Internal disconnection) V04 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
ness
Possible causes 2 (Disconnection in wiring or Max. 1 z
– V04 (female) (2) tance
and standard defective contact in connec-
value in normal tor) Wiring harness between V04 (female) (1) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
state chassis ground tance
3
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (87)
Voltage Max. 1 V
– V04 (female) (2) and chassis ground
CP02 (female) Resistance
Between (87) – chassis ground 20 – 60 z
14 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to travel speed solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 15
Failure code [DW43KB] Travel Speed Sol. S/C 1
Action code Failure code Travel speed solenoid short

Trouble
— DW43KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed at output to travel speed solenoid circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Turns output to travel speed solenoid circuit OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Travel speed does not change to Hi. (Machine monitor changes to the normal state.)
machine
Related infor- • Operating condition of travel speed solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
mation (Code 02300: Solenoid 1)

Defective travel speed sole-
1 noid (Internal short circuit or V04 (male) Resistance
ground fault) Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Between (2) – chassis ground Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal 2
state (Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (87) Resis-
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
– V04 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
3 Defective pump controller CP02 Travel speed Voltage
Between (87) – chas- Lo Max. 1 V
sis ground Hi + Travel operation 20 – 30 V
16 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to travel speed solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 17
Failure code [DW45KA] Swing Brake Sol. Disc. 1
Action code Failure code Swing holding brake solenoid disconnection

Trouble
E03 DW45KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• No current flows at output to swing holding brake solenoid circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • Machine cannot swing.
machine
• Operating condition of swing holding brake solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring func-
tion. (Code 02300: Solenoid 1)
• If solenoid and wiring harness are normal, operator can swing machine by setting emergency swing
brake release switch in release position (Swing holding brake does not work, however, when
Related infor-
machine stops).
mation
• Turn both of swing lock and emergency swing release switches OFF during troubleshooting.

Defective swing holding ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 brake solenoid (Internal dis-
V05 (male) Resistance
connection)
Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Defective swing lock switch S04 (female) Switch Resistance
2
(Internal disconnection)
OFF Max. 1 z
Between (3) – (4)
LOCK Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes
value in normal Defective assembled-type ing without turning starting switch ON.
state 3 diode D01
D01 (male) Digital circuit tester Continuity
Between (7) – (3) Diode mode There is continuity
Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Disconnection in wiring har- Max. 1 z
(101) – D01 (female) (7) tance
ness
Wiring harness between D01 (female) (3) – Resis-
J02 – S04 (male) (3) tance
tor) Wiring harness between S04 (male) (4) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
V05 (female) (2) tance
Wiring harness between V05 (female) (1) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
CP02 (female) (115), (117), (120) tance
18 PC300, 350-8

Wiring harness between CP02 (female)
5 (101) – D01 – H15 – S04 (male) (3) and Voltage Max. 1 V
24V circuit) in wiring harness
Possible causes chassis ground
and standard Wiring harness between V05 (female) (2) –
value in normal Voltage Max. 1 V
H15 – S04 (male) (4) and chassis ground
state
6 Defective pump controller CP02 (female) Disconnect D01 and Resistance
connect pins (3) and
Between (101) – (7) on female side 20 – 60 z
chassis ground directly.
PC300, 350-8 19
Circuit diagram related to swing holding brake solenoid of pump controller
20 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 21
Failure code [DW45KB] Swing Brake Sol. S/C 1
Action code Failure code Swing holding brake solenoid short

Trouble
E03 DW45KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed at output to swing holding brake solenoid circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Turns output to swing holding brake solenoid circuit OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Machine cannot swing.
machine
• Operating condition of swing holding brake solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring func-
tion. (Code 02300: Solenoid 1)
Related infor-
• If solenoid and wiring harness are normal, operator can swing machine by setting emergency swing
mation
brake release switch in release position (Swing holding brake does not work, however, when
machine stops).

Defective swing holding
1 brake solenoid (Internal short V05 (male) Resistance
circuit or ground fault) Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Defective assembled-type ing without turning starting switch ON.
2 diode D01
D01 (male) Resistance
Possible causes Between (3) – (7) Min. 1 Mz
value in normal
state Ground fault in wiring har-
Wiring harness between CP02 (female)
ness Resis-
3 (101) – D01 – J02 – H15 – S04 (male) (3) Min. 1 Mz
(Short circuit with GND cir- tance
and chassis ground
cuit)
Min. 1 Mz
H15 – S04 (male) (4) and chassis ground tance
4 Defective pump controller CP02 Swing lever Voltage
Between (101) – At neutral Max. 1 V
chassis ground At swing 20 – 30 V
22 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to swing holding brake solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 23
Failure code [DW91KA] Travel Junction Sol. Disc. 1
Action code Failure code Travel junction solenoid disconnection

Trouble
— DW91KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• No current flows at output to travel junction solenoid circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • Hard to turn when operating travel steering.
machine
• Operating condition of travel junction solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
Related infor-
mation

Defective travel junction ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 solenoid
Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
ness Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
2 (Disconnection in wiring or (110) – V02 (female) (2) tance
tor) Resis-
value in normal CP02 (female) (115), (117), (120) and chas- Max. 1 z
tance
state sis ground
3
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CP02 (female)
Voltage Max. 1 V
(110) – V02 (female) (2) and chassis ground
4 Defective pump controller CP02 (female) Resistance
Between (110) –
20 – 60 z
(115), (117), (120)
24 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to travel junction solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 25
Failure code [DW91KB] Travel Junction Sol. S/C 1
Action code Failure code Travel junction solenoid short

Trouble
— DW91KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed at output to travel junction solenoid circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Turns output to travel junction solenoid OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Hard to turn when operating travel steering.
machine
Related infor- • Operating condition of travel junction solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
mation Code 02300: Solenoid 1)

Defective travel junction ing without turning starting switch ON.
solenoid V02 (male) Resistance
1
(Internal short circuit or
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal 2
state (Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
(110) – V02 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
3 Defective pump controller CP02 Travel lever Voltage
Between (110) – At straight-travel Max. 1 V
(115), (117), (120) At steering 20 – 30 V
26 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to travel junction solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 27
Failure code [DWJ0KA] Merge-divider Sol. Disc 1
Action code Failure code Merge-divider solenoid disconnection

Trouble
— DWJ0KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• No current flows at output to merge-divider solenoid circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • Single operation speed of work equipment and swing is high in lifting mode (L).
machine
• Operating condition of merge-divider solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
Related infor-
mation
failure code [DWJ0KB].)

Defective merge-divider ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 solenoid
Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
ness Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
2 (Disconnection in wiring or (112) – V03 (female) (2) tance
tor) Resis-
value in normal CP02 (female) (115), (117), (120) and chas- Max. 1 z
tance
state sis ground
3
Voltage Max. 1 V
Between (112) –
20 – 60 z
(115), (117), (120)
28 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to merge-divider solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 29
Failure code [DWJ0KB] Merge-divider Sol. S/C 1
Action code Failure code Merge-divider solenoid short

Trouble
— DWJ0KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed at output to merge-divider solenoid circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Turns output to merge-divider solenoid circuit OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Single operation speed of work equipment and swing is high in lifting mode (L).
machine
Related infor- • Operating condition of merge-divider solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.

Defective merge-divider ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
Possible causes Ground fault in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
and standard ness ing without turning starting switch ON.
value in normal 2
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
state cuit) Min. 1 Mz
(112) – V03 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
CP02 Travel lever Voltage
At neutral Max. 1 V
Between (112) –
(115), (117), (120) When either side is
20 – 30 V
operated
30 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to merge-divider solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 31
Failure code [DWK0KA] 2-stage Relief Sol. Disc. 1
Action code Failure code 2-stage relief solenoid disconnection

Trouble
— DWK0KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• No current flows at output to 2-stage relief solenoid circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • Power maximizing function does not work.
machine
• Operating condition of 2-stage relief solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
Related infor-
mation
failure code [DWK0KB].)

Defective 2-stage relief sole- ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 noid
Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
ness
Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Possible causes 2 (Disconnection in wiring or Max. 1 z
(109) – V08 (female) (2) tance
and standard defective contact in connec-
value in normal tor) Wiring harness between V08 (female) (1) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
state CP02 (female) (115), (117), (120) tance
3
Voltage Max. 1 V
Between (109) – chassis ground 20 – 60 z
32 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to 2-stage relief solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 33
Failure code [DWK0KB] 2-stage Relief Sol. S/C 1
Action code Failure code 2-stage relief solenoid short

Trouble
— DWK0KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed at output to 2-stage relief solenoid circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Turns output to 2-stage relief solenoid circuit OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Power maximizing function does not work.
machine
Related infor- • Operating condition of 2-stage relief solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.

Defective 2-stage relief sole- ing without turning starting switch ON.
noid V08 (male) Resistance
1
Possible causes
and standard 2
value in normal (Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
state (109) – V08 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
3 Defective pump controller When L-mode is not
Max. 1 V
Between (109) – selected
chassis ground When L-mode is
20 – 30 V
selected
34 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to 2-stage relief solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 35
Failure code [DXA0KA] PC-EPC Sol. Disc. 1
Action code Failure code PC-EPC solenoid disconnection

Trouble
E02 DXA0KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• No current flows to PC-EPC solenoid circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • If pump load increases, engine speed lowers largely and engine may stall.
machine
• Output to PC-EPC solenoid (current value) can be checked with monitoring function.
(Code 01300: PC-EPC solenoid current)
Related infor-
• If solenoid and wiring harness are not defective, turn emergency drive switch on; the operator can
mation
operate the machine with output equivalent to E-mode. (Failure code [DXA0KA] is then displayed,
but it is not defective.)

Defective PC-EPC solenoid ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
(Internal disconnection) V11 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 z
S21 Switch Resistance
Defective emergency pump
2 drive switch (Internal discon- OFF Max. 1 z
Between (2) – (3)
nection) ON Min. 1 Mz
OFF Max. 1 z
Between (5) – (6)
ON Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (96) Resis-
and standard – S21 (3) tance
Wiring harness between S21 (2) – V11 Resis-
state 3 (Disconnection in wiring or Max. 1 z
(female) (1) tance
tor) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
(115), (117), (120) – chassis ground tance
Wiring harness between S21 (5) – V11 Resis-
Max. 1 z
(female) (2) tance
Hot short (Short circuit with Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (96)
4 Voltage Max. 1 V
24V circuit) in wiring harness – S21 (3) and chassis ground
Wiring harness between S21 (2) – V11
Voltage Max. 1 V
(female) (1) and chassis ground
Between (96) –
7 – 14 z
(115), (117), (120)
36 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to LS-EPC and PC-EPC solenoids of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 37
Failure code [DXA0KB] PC-EPC Sol. S/C 1
Action code Failure code PC-EPC solenoid short

Trouble
E02 DXA0KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed to PC-EPC solenoid circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Sets output to PC-EPC solenoid circuit to 0.
Problem that
appears on • If pump load increases, engine speed lowers largely and engine may stall.
machine
• Output to PC-EPC solenoid (current value) can be checked with monitoring function.
(Code 01300: PC-EPC solenoid current)
Related infor- • If solenoid and wiring harness are not defective, turn emergency drive switch on; the operator can
mation operate the machine with output equivalent to E-mode. (Failure code [DXA0KA] is then displayed,
but it is not defective.)
a Turn emergency pump drive switch OFF during troubleshooting.

Defective PC-EPC solenoid
1 (Internal short circuit or V11 (male) Resistance
value in normal 2
– S21 – V11 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
Between (96) –
7 – 14 z
(115), (117), (120)
38 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 39
Failure code [DXE0KA] LS-EPC Sol. Disc. 1
Action code Failure code LS-EPC solenoid disconnection

Trouble
— DXE0KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• No current flows to LS-EPC solenoid circuit.
trouble
Problem that
• Travel speed Mi or Lo is high.
appears on
• Speed of work equipment and swing is high in lifting mode (L).
machine
Related infor- • Output to LS-EPC solenoid (current value) can be checked with monitoring function.
mation (Code 01500: LS-EPC solenoid current)

Defective LS-EPC solenoid ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
(Internal disconnection) V19 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 z
ness Max. 1 z
– V19 (female) (1) tance
Possible causes defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
and standard tor) (115), (117), (120) – J05 and chassis ground tance
value in normal Wiring harness between S21 (6) – V19 Resis-
state Max. 1 z
(female) (2) tance
3
Voltage Max. 1 V
Between (88) –
7 – 14 z
(115), (117), (120)
40 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 41
Failure code [DXE0KB] LS-EPC Sol. S/C 1
Action code Failure code LS-EPC solenoid short

Trouble
— DXE0KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed to LS-EPC solenoid circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Sets output to LS-EPC solenoid circuit to 0.
Problem that
• Travel speed Mi or Lo is high.
appears on
• Work equipment speed and swing speed are high in lifting mode (L).
machine
Related infor- • Output to LS-EPC solenoid (current value) can be checked with monitoring function.
mation (Code 01500: LS-EPC solenoid current)

Defective LS-EPC solenoid
1 (Internal short circuit or V19 (male) Resistance
value in normal 2
Between (88) –
7 – 14 z
(115), (117), (120)
42 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 43
Failure code [DXE4KA] Service Current EPC Disc. 1
Action code Failure code Service current EPC solenoid disconnection

Trouble
— DXE4KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• No current flows to service current EPC solenoid circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • Attachment does not move.
machine
• Carry out troubleshooting only for setting with ATT. (Confirm settings on the monitor panel.)
Related infor-
• Output to service current EPC solenoid (current value) can be checked with monitoring function.
mation
(Code 01700: Service solenoid current)

Defective service current ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 EPC solenoid (Internal dis-
connection)
Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 z
ness
Possible causes – V30 (female) (1) tance
and standard tor) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
value in normal Max. 1 z
(115), (117), (120) – V30 (female) (2) tance
state
2
Voltage Max. 1 V
Between (97) –
7 – 14 z
(115), (117), (120)
Circuit diagram related to service current EPC solenoid of pump controller
44 PC300, 350-8
Failure code [DXE4KB] Service Current EPC S/C 1
Action code Failure code Service current EPC solenoid short

Trouble
— DXE4KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed to service current EPC solenoid circuit.
trouble
Action of con- • Sets output to service current EPC solenoid circuit to 0.
Problem that
appears on • Attachment does not move.
machine
• Carry out troubleshooting only for setting with ATT. (Confirm settings on the monitor panel.)
Related infor-
• Output to service current EPC solenoid (current value) can be checked with monitoring function.
mation
(Code 01700: Service solenoid current)

Defective service current
1 EPC solenoid (Internal short V30 (male) Resistance
circuit or ground fault) Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 z
value in normal 2
Between (97) –
7 – 14 z
(115), (117), (120)
Circuit diagram related to service current EPC solenoid of pump controller
PC300, 350-8 45
Failure code [DY20KA] Wiper Working Abnormality 1
Action code Failure code Wiper working abnormality

Trouble
— DY20KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When windshield wiper works, W signal of working ends is not input.
trouble
Action of • Turns working output to wiper motor OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Wiper motor does not work.
machine
• Condition of W contact signal of wiper working area can be checked with monitoring function.
Related infor-
(Code: 02204 switch 5)
mation
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Set wiper switch to INT or ON.

M05 (female) Wiper blade Resistance
Defective wiper motor (Inter-
1 Operating range top Max. 1 z
nal disconnection)
Between (6) – (5) Other than operating
Min. 1 Mz
range top
Between (1) – (3) All range Max. 20 z
Possible causes Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring har- – M05 (male) (6) tance
and standard
value in normal ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between M05 (female) (5) – Resis-
2 Max. 1 z
state or defective contact in con- J04 – chassis ground (T05, T06) tance
nector) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (114) Resis-
Max. 1 z
– M05 (male) (1) tance
Max. 1 z
CP01 (female) Wiper blade Resistance
3 Defective pump controller Operating range top Max. 1 z
Between (56) –
chassis ground Other than operating
Min. 1 Mz
range top
46 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to wiper motor of machine monitor
PC300, 350-8 47
Failure code [DY20MA] Wiper Parking Abnormality 1
Action code Failure code Wiper parking abnormality

Trouble
— DY20MA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When windshield wiper parks, P signal of storage area is not input.
trouble
Action of • Turns parking output to wiper motor OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Wiper motor does not park.
machine
• Condition of P contact signal of wiper parking area can be checked with monitoring function.
Related infor-
(Code: 02204 switch 5)
mation
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Set wiper switch to INT/ON to OFF.

Defective wiper motor (Inter- M05 (female) Wiper blade Resistance

1
nal disconnection) Storage area Max. 1 z
Between (4) – (5)
Working area Min. 1 Mz
Disconnection in wiring har- – M05 (male) (4) tance
and standard
value in normal ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between M05 (female) (5) – Resis-
2 Max. 1 z
state or defective contact in con- J04 – chassis ground (T05, T06) tance
nector) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (114) Resis-
Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
CP01 (female) Wiper blade Resistance
Between (75) – Storage area Max. 1 z
chassis ground Working area Min. 1 Mz
48 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 49
Failure code [DY2CKB] Washer Drive Short 1
Action code Failure code Window washer drive system short

Trouble
— DY2CKB (Pump controller system)
Contents of • When output to window washer drive system was turned ON (ground circuit was disconnected),
trouble short circuit was detected in circuit.
Action of • Turns output to washer motor OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Window washer does not operate.
machine
Related infor-
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Turn washer switch ON.
mation

Defective washer motor without turning starting switch ON.
1
(Internal short circuit) M06 (male) Resistance
Possible causes Between (1) – (2) 5 – 20 z
and standard a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
value in normal and carry out troubleshooting.
state 2
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (3) –
Voltage Max. 1 V
J04 – M6 (female) (2), – D02 (female) (7)
If causes 1 and 2 are not detected, pump controller may be defec-
3 Defective pump controller tive. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried
out.)
50 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to window washer motor of machine monitor
PC300, 350-8 51
Failure code [DY2DKB] Wiper Drive (For) Short 1
Action code Failure code Wiper motor drive forward system short
Trouble
— DY2DKB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to wiper motor drive forward side was turned ON, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to wiper motor drive forward side OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Windshield wiper does not operate.
machine
Related infor-
mation

1 nal short circuit or ground M05 (female) Resistance
fault) Between (3) – (1) There is continuity
Possible causes
and standard Between (3) – chassis ground Min. 1 Mz
value in normal a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting
state Ground fault in wiring har- without turning starting switch ON.
circuit) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
(119) – M05 (male) (3) tance
out.)
52 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 53
Failure code [DY2EKB] Wiper Drive (Rev) Short 1
Action code Failure code Wiper motor drive reverse system short
Trouble
— DY2EKB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to wiper motor drive reverse side was turned ON, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to wiper motor drive reverse side OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Windshield wiper does not operate.
machine
Related infor-
mation

1 nal short circuit or ground M05 (female) Continuity/Resistance
fault) Between (1) – (3) There is continuity
Possible causes
and standard Between (1) – chassis ground Min. 1 Mz
value in normal a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting
state Ground fault in wiring har- without turning starting switch ON.
circuit) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
(114) – M05 (male) (1) tance
out.)
54 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 55
SEN02631-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
56
SEN02632-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
Troubleshooting of electrical system
(E-mode)
Before carrying out troubleshooting of electrical system ................................................................................ 4
Information contained in troubleshooting table ............................................................................................... 6
E-1 Engine does not start ............................................................................................................................... 7
E-2 Auto-decelerator does not operate......................................................................................................... 10
E-3 Automatic warming-up system does not operate ................................................................................... 12
E-4 Preheater does not operate.................................................................................................................... 14
E-5 All work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism do not move............................................................ 16
E-6 Power maximizing function does not operate......................................................................................... 18
E-7 Machine monitor does not display at all ................................................................................................. 20
E-8 Machine monitor does not display some items ...................................................................................... 22
E-9 Contents of display by machine monitor are different from applicable machine .................................... 22
E-10 Fuel level monitor was lighted in red while engine running .................................................................. 23
E-11 Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally............................................................ 24
E-12 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not indicate normally................................................................ 26
PC300, 350-8 1
E-13 Fuel level gauge does not indicate normally ........................................................................................ 27

E-14 Swing lock monitor does not indicate normally..................................................................................... 28
E-15 When monitor switch is operated, monitor displays nothing................................................................. 30
E-16 Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate.......................................................................... 32
E-17 Machine push-up function does not operate normally.......................................................................... 36
E-18 Monitoring function fails to display “boom raise” normally.................................................................... 38
E-19 Monitoring function fails to display “boom lower” normally ................................................................... 40
E-20 Monitoring function fails to display “arm IN” normally........................................................................... 42
E-21 Monitoring function fails to display “arm OUT” normally....................................................................... 44
E-22 Monitoring function fails to display “bucket CURL” normally ................................................................ 46
E-23 Monitoring function fails to display “bucket DUMP” normally ............................................................... 48
E-24 Monitoring function fails to display “swing” normally ............................................................................ 50
E-25 Monitoring function fails to display “travel” normally............................................................................. 52
E-26 Monitoring function fails to display “travel differential pressure” normally ............................................ 54
E-27 Monitoring function fails to display “service” normally .......................................................................... 56
E-28 KOMTRAX system does not operate normally..................................................................................... 58
E-29 Air conditioner does not operate........................................................................................................... 60
E-30 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding...................................................................... 62
E-31 Horn does not sound ............................................................................................................................ 64
2 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 3
Before carrying out troubleshooting of electrical system 1

Connection table of fuse box
a This connection table shows the devices to which each power supply of the fuse box supplies power (A
switch power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is in the ON position and
a constant power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is in the OFF and ON
positions).
a When carrying out troubleshooting related to the electrical system, you should check the fuses and fus-
ible links to see if the power is supplied normally.
Type of power
Fusible link Fuse No. Fuse capacity Destination of power
supply
1 10A Work lamp, relay, emergency switch
2 30A Pump controller (Solenoid power supply)
Switch power F04 3 10A PPC oil pressure lock solenoid valve
supply (65A) Cigarette lighter
4 10A
Windshield washer motor
5 10A Horn relay, horn
6 10A Auto preheater
7 10A Rotary lamp
Switch power F04 8 20A Working lamp (boom), working lamp (rear)
supply (65A) Radio, speaker
9 10A
Left knob switch (pump controller input)
10 20A (Spare)
11 20A Air conditioner unit
12 10A (Spare)
13 10A Headlamp
Switch power F04
supply (65A) 14 10A Optional power supply (1)
Travel alarm, 12 V power supply
15 20A Optional power supply (2), heated seat, air suspension
seat
Radio (backup power supply)
16 10A
Room lamp
Constant F05 Pump controller
17 20A
power supply (30A) Machine monitor
18 10A (Spare)
19 30A Engine controller
Switch power Starting switch
20 5A Engine controller (ACC signal)
supply ACC
4 PC300, 350-8
Locations of fusible links
Location of fuse box and fuse Nos.
PC300, 350-8 5
Information contained in troubleshooting table 1

a Troubleshooting Table and Related Circuit Diagram collectively carry the following information. Carry out
troubleshooting work after fully grasping their contents.
Failure phe-
Phenomenon occurring on machine
nomenon
Relative infor-
Information on the failure occurred as well as the troubleshooting
mation
<Contents of description>
• Standard value in normal state to judge possible causes
Remarks on judgment
1 <Troubles in wiring harness>
• Disconnection
Connector is connected imperfectly or wiring harness is bro-
ken.
• Ground fault
Wiring harness which is not connected to chassis ground
circuit is in contact with chassis ground circuit.
• Hot short
Wiring harness which is not connected to power source (24
V) circuit is in contact with power source (24 V) circuit.
2
• Short circuit
Independent wiring harnesses are in contact with each other
Possible causes abnormally.
and standard Possible causes of trouble
value in normal (Given numbers are refer-
state ence numbers, which do not <Precautions for troubleshooting>
indicate priority) (1) Method of indicating connector No. and handling of T-
adapter
Insert or connect T-adapter as explained below for trouble-
3 shooting, unless otherwise specified.
• If connector No. has no marks of “male” and “female”,
disconnect connector and insert T-adapters in both male
side and female side.
• If connector No. has marks of “male” and “female”, dis-
connect connector and connect T-adapter to only male
side or female side.
(2) Entry order of pin Nos. and handling of tester leads
Connect positive (+) lead and negative (–) lead of tester as
explained below for troubleshooting, unless otherwise
4 specified.
• Connect positive (+) lead to pin No. or wiring harness
entered on front side.
• Connect negative (–) lead to pin No. or harness entered
on rear side.
Relative Electrical Circuit Diagram
This is part of the electrical circuit diagram

which shows the portion where the failure
occurred.
• Connector No.: Indicates (Type – numbers of a
pin) (color)
• Arrow : Roughly indicates the location in the
machine where it is installed.
6 PC300, 350-8
E-1 Engine does not start 1
Trouble • Engine does not start (Engine does not turn).

• Engine starting circuit has following 2 start lock mechanisms:
Related infor- 1) Start lock by the machine monitor password
mation 2) Start lock by the lock lever
• In the case no error code for the engine controller mechanism is indicated.

Battery voltage Specific gravity of battery
1 Low charge level of battery
Min. 24 V Min. 1.26
If fuse or fusible link is burnt out, the circuit probably has ground
Defective fuse No. 3, No. 17 fault.
2
or fusible link F04 and F05 In the case the machine monitor does not light up, check the power
circuit between the battery and the fuse.
Defective starting switch H15 (male) Position Resistance
3
OFF Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (4)
START Max. 1 z
Defective safety lock switch S14 (female) Lock lever Resistance
4
(internal short circuit)
Free Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (3)
Lock Max. 1 z
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal ing without turning starting switch ON.
Defective starting motor cut-
state out relay R06 or R07 (Inter- R06 (male), R07 (male) Resistance
5
nal short circuit or ground Between (1) – (2) 100 – 500 z
fault) Between (3) – (4) Min. 1 Mz
(If power supply and starting input and output are normal but
starting motor does not turn, starting motor is defective.)
Defective starting motor
Starting
6 (Internal disconnection or Starting motor Voltage
switch
breakage)
Power supply: Between terminal
20 – 30 V
B and chassis ground When
Starting input: Terminal C – chas- started
20 – 30 V
sis ground
Defective alternator or start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
7
(Internal short circuit) Alternator Voltage
Terminal R – chassis ground Max. 1 V
PC300, 350-8 7

Wiring harness between F01-17 – H15 Resis-
Max. 1 z
(female) (1) tance
Wiring harness between H15 (female) (4) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
J01 – R06 (female) (6) tance
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between R06 (female) (3) – Resis-
ness Max. 1 z
M17 (female) (1) tance
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between F01-3 outlet – S14 Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) (female) (1) tance
Wiring harness between S14 (female) (3) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
J04 – chassis ground tance
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal Wiring harness between battery relay termi-
Resis-
state nal B (R04) – F05 – F01-16D and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
Wiring harness between F01-17 – H15 Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
(female) (1) and chassis ground tance
Ground fault in wiring har- Wiring harness between H15 (female) (4) – Resis-
ness Min. 1 Mz
9 J01 – R06 (female) (6) and chassis ground tance
(Short circuit with GND cir-
cuit) Wiring harness between R06 (female) (3) – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
M17 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
Wiring harness between F01-3 – S14 Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
(female) (1) and chassis ground tance
Wiring harness between S14 (female) (3) – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
R06 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
Min. 1 Mz
CM01 (female) (8) and chassis ground tance
10
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (11)
– J02 – M17 (female) (2), – D01 (female) (6), Voltage Max. 1 V
– alternator terminal R and chassis ground
8 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to engine start and battery charging
PC300, 350-8 9
E-2 Auto-decelerator does not operate 1
Trouble • Auto-decelerator does not operate.

• Set speed of auto-decelerator is 1,300 rpm. Accordingly, set the fuel control dial to a higher rpm than
Related infor-
this speed. If set speed is under 1,300 rpm, the auto-decelerator will not operate.
mation
• Check all the monitoring indications after starting the engine.

In the case monitoring is not normally indicated, proceed to trouble-
shooting No. E-21.
Defective boom RAISE sig- Monitoring code Item Normal display
1
nal Operation of lever:
01900 Boom RAISE ON
Lever in neutral: OFF
shooting No. E-22.
Defective boom LOWER sig- Monitoring code Item Normal display
2
01900 Boom LOWER ON
shooting No. E-23.
Monitoring code Item Normal display
3 Defective arm IN signal
Operation of lever:
01900 Arm IN ON
Possible causes shooting No. E-24.
and standard
value in normal Monitoring code Item Normal display
4 Defective arm OUT signal
state Operation of lever:
01900 Arm OUT ON
shooting No. E-26.
Defective bucket CURL sig- Monitoring code Item Normal display
5
01901 Bucket CURL ON
shooting No. E-27.
Defective bucket DUMP sig- Monitoring code Item Normal display
6
01901 Bucket DUMP ON
shooting No. E-28.
7 Defective swing signal
Operation of lever:
01900 Swing ON
10 PC300, 350-8

shooting No. E-29.
8 Defective travel signal
Operation of lever:
01900 Travel ON
Possible causes Lever in neutral: OFF
and standard In the case monitoring is not normally indicated, proceed to trouble-
value in normal shooting No. E-30.
state
9 Defective attachment signal
Operation of lever:
01901 Service ON
Defective pump controller, Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.
10 engine controller or machine (If causes 1 – 9 above are not detected, pump controller, engine
monitor controller or machine monitor may be defective.)
PC300, 350-8 11
E-3 Automatic warming-up system does not operate 1
Trouble • Automatic warming-up system does not operate.

• When engine coolant temperature is below 30°C, automatic warm-up system raises engine speed to
Related infor- 1,250 rpm.
mation • If fuel control dial is opened more than 70% for 3 seconds or longer when starting switch is turned
ON or after engine is started, automatic warm-up system is turned OFF.

shooting No. E-14.
Possible causes Defective engine coolant Monitoring code Item Normal display
1
and standard temperature signal Compare with actual
value in normal Engine coolant tem-
04102 engine coolant tem-
state perature
perature
Defective pump controller, Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out. (If
2 engine controller or machine causes stated above are not detected, pump controller, engine con-
monitor troller or machine monitor may be defective.)
12 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 13
E-4 Preheater does not operate 1
Trouble (1) When starting switch is turned to HEAT position, preheating monitor does not light up.
Related infor- Input of preheating signal (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
mation (Code 04500: Monitor Input 1)

Defective starting switch sys- If preheating fails to operate (the heater does not warm up), refer to
1
tem Trouble (2)
value in normal defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between P02 (female) (18) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) J02 (male) (7) tance
state
a Prepare with starting switch OFF
CM01 Starting switch Voltage
Between (16) – OFF Max. 1 V
chassis ground HEAT 20 – 30 V
Trouble (2) • When starting switch is turned to HEAT position, preheater does not warm up.
Related infor- • During low temperature (coolant temperature below 30°C), pump controller drives the heater relay
mation for 100 sec. after engine start to automatically preheat.

a Prepare with starting switch OFF
Defective starting switch H15 (male) Starting switch Resistance
1
(Internal disconnection) OFF Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (3)
HEAT Max. 1 z
Defective heater relay Heater relay Resistance
2
Possible causes (Internal disconnection)
and standard Coil terminal – chassis ground
value in normal Between contact terminals Min. 1 Mz
Defective intake air heater ing without turning starting switch ON.
3
Between heater terminals Normal if conductive
ness
Wiring harness between H15 (female) (3) – Resis-
J02 – Heater relay terminal R17 tance
tor) Wiring harness between battery relay termi- Resis-
Max. 1 z
nal M (R03) – Heater relay terminal R15 tance
14 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to engine preheater
PC300, 350-8 15
E-5 All work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism do not move 1
Trouble • All travel, swing, and work equipment mechanism do not move.
Related infor-
—
mation

1 Defective fuse No. 3 If fuse is burnt out, the circuit probably has ground fault.
Defective safety lock switch S14 (female) Lock lever Resistance
2
(internal disconnection)
Lock Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Free Max. 1 z
Defective PPC lock solenoid
3 (Internal disconnection or V01 (male) Resistance
short circuit) Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Possible causes
4 diode D01
and standard D01 (male) Resistance
value in normal
Between (8) – (4) Min. 1 Mz
state
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between F01-3 outlet – S14 Resis-
ness Max. 1 z
(male) (1) tance
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between S14 (male) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) J02 – V01 (male) (2) tance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between F01-3 outlet – S14 Resis-
ness Min. 1 Mz
6 (male) (1) and chassis ground tance
(Short circuit with GND cir-
cuit) Wiring harness between S14 (male) (2) –
Resis-
J02 – V01(female) (2), – D01(female) (8) Min. 1 Mz
tance
and chassis ground
16 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to PPC lock solenoid
PC300, 350-8 17
E-6 Power maximizing function does not operate 1
Trouble • Power maximizing function does not work.

• Symbol mark is indicated on the machine monitor when the power maximizing switch is depressed
Related infor- during work equipment operation while the engine is running in P- or E-mode.
mation • Input state of power maximizing switch (left knob switch) can be checked with monitoring function
(Code 02200: Switch Input 1)

Defective power maximizing
2 switch (Internal disconnec- S11(male) Switch Resistance
tion) Released Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Pressed Max. 1 z
ness
Wiring harness between F01-9 outlet – S11 Resis-
Possible causes (female) (1) tance
and standard tor) Wiring harness between S11 (female) (2) – Resis-
value in normal Max. 1 z
CP01 (female) (41) tance
state
ness Wiring harness between F01-9 outlet – S11 Resis-
4 Min. 1 Mz
(Short circuit with GND cir- (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
cuit) Wiring harness between S11 (female) (2) – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
CP01 (female) (41) and chassis ground tance
5 Defective pump controller CP01 Switch Voltage
Between (41) – Released Max. 1 V
chassis ground Pressed 20 – 30 V
Circuit diagram related to power max. switch
18 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 19
E-7 Machine monitor does not display at all 1
Trouble • Machine monitor does not display at all when starting switch is turned ON.
Related infor-
—
mation

ness
Wiring harness between CM01(female) (1) Resis-
(2) – J06 tance
tor) Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (3), Resis-
Max. 1 z
(4) – chassis ground tance
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal 3
state (Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CM01(female) (1), Resis-
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
(2) – J06 and chassis ground tance
CM01 (female) Voltage/Resistance
4 Defective machine monitor Between (1), (2) –
Voltage: 20 – 30 V
chassis ground
Between (3), (4) –
Resistance: Max. 1 z
chassis ground
20 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to power source in monitor panel
PC300, 350-8 21
E-8 Machine monitor does not display some items 1
Trouble • Machine monitor does not display some items when starting switch is turned ON.
Related infor-
—
mation

When following switches are operated, if all LCD panel is lighted up
Possible causes Defective machine monitor
1 (all surface becomes white), LCD panel is normal.
and standard LCD
• Switch operation: [/] + [A] (Simultaneous operation)
value in normal
state Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out. (If
2 Defective machine monitor causes stated above are not detected, machine monitor may be
defective.)
E-9 Contents of display by machine monitor are different from

applicable machine 1
Trouble • Contents of display by machine monitor are different from applicable machine.
Related infor-
—
mation

In the case monitoring display is not normal, proceed to failure code
[DA2SKQ].
Possible causes Defective model code signal Monitoring code Item Normal display
1
and standard (Internal defect) 00200 Controller model
value in normal code 300
state 00201 Select model
Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out. (If
2 Defective machine monitor causes stated above are not detected, machine monitor may be
defective.)
22 PC300, 350-8
E-10 Fuel level monitor was lighted in red while engine running 1
Trouble • Fuel level monitor was lighted in red while the engine running.
• If fuel level gauge on the machine monitor indicates red range, fuel level monitor turns red.
Related infor-
• Input signal (voltage) from the fuel level sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
mation
(Code 04200: Fuel level sensor voltage)

Low fuel level
1 a Add fuel
(When system is normal)
Defective fuel level sensor P21 (male) Fuel level Resistance
2
Between (1) and FULL (Upper limit) Approx. 12 z
Possible causes chassis ground EMPTY (Lower limit) 85 – 110 z
and standard Disconnection in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
value in normal ness ing without turning starting switch ON.
state 3 (Disconnection in wiring or
Max. 1 z

4 Defective machine monitor CM01 (female) Fuel level Resistance
Between (9) and FULL (Upper limit) Approx. 12 z
chassis ground EMPTY (Lower limit) 85 – 110 z
Circuit diagram related to fuel level sensor
PC300, 350-8 23
E-11 Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally 1
• While engine coolant temperature is rising normally, temperature gauge does not rise from white
Trouble range (C).
• While engine coolant temperature is stabilized normally, temperature gauge rises to red range (H).
• Input from the engine coolant temperature sensor (temperature) can be checked with monitoring
Related infor- function. (Code: 04105: Engine coolant temperature)
mation • Check if failure code for abnormal communication (machine monitor) system [DAFRMC] is indicated
(if yes, diagnose that failure first.)

Engine coolant tem-
C5 (male) Resistance
perature
Defective coolant tempera- 0°C 30 – 37 kz
ture sensor 25°C 9.3 – 10.7 kz
1
(Internal disconnection or
short circuit) Between (B) – (A) 50°C 3.2 – 3.8 kz
80°C 1.0 – 1.3 kz
95°C 700 – 800 z
Between (B) – chas-
All range Min. 1 Mz
sis ground
ness
– C5 (female) (B) tance
Possible causes
tor) Wiring harness between C5 (female) (A) – Resis-
value in normal
3
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
– C5 (female) (B) and chassis ground tance
4
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (15)
Voltage Max. 1 V
– C5 (female) (B) and chassis ground
Engine coolant tem-
perature

25°C 9.3 – 10.7 kz
50°C 3.2 – 3.8 kz
sis ground
80°C 1.0 – 1.3 kz
95°C 700 – 800 z
24 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 25
E-12 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not indicate normally 1
• While hydraulic oil temperature is rising normally, temperature gauge does not rise from white range
Trouble (C).
• While hydraulic oil temperature is stabilized normally, temperature gauge rises to red range (H).
Related infor- • Input from the hydraulic oil temperature sensor (temperature) can be checked with monitoring func-
mation tion. (Code 04402: Hydraulic oil temperature)

Defective hydraulic oil tem- Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor P22 (male) Resistance
1 perature
short circuit) Between (1) – (2) 90 – 3.5 kz
Between (2) – chas- 10 – 100°C
Min. 1 Mz
sis ground
ness
tor) Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (46) Resis-
and standard
value in normal Ground fault in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
state ness ing without turning starting switch ON.
3
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
Engine coolant tem-
CP01 Resistance
5 Defective pump controller perature
Between (29) – (46) 90 – 3.5 kz
Between (29) – 10 – 100°C
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Circuit diagram related to hydraulic oil temperature sensor
26 PC300, 350-8
E-13 Fuel level gauge does not indicate normally 1
• While fuel is added, fuel level gauge does not rise from red range (E).
Trouble
• While fuel level is low, fuel level gauge does not lower from green range (F).
Related infor- • Input signal (voltage) from the fuel level sensor can be checked with monitoring function. (Code
mation 04200: Fuel level sensor voltage)

Defective fuel level sensor
1 (Internal disconnection or P21 (male) Fuel level Resistance
short circuit) FULL (Upper limit) Approx. 12 z
sis ground EMPTY (Lower limit) 85 – 110 z
Max. 1 z
Possible causes
and standard Ground fault in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
value in normal ness ing without turning starting switch ON.
3
state (Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (9) – Resis-
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
P21 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
4
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (9) –
Voltage Max. 1 V
P21 (female) (1) and chassis ground
5 Defective machine monitor CM01 Fuel level Resistance
Between (9) – FULL (Upper limit) Approx. 12 z
chassis ground EMPTY (Lower limit) 85 – 110 z
Circuit diagram related to fuel level sensor
PC300, 350-8 27
E-14 Swing lock monitor does not indicate normally 1
• When swing lock switch is turned ON, swing lock monitor does not light up.
Trouble
• When swing lock switch is turned OFF, swing lock monitor lights up.
Related infor- • Input from swing lock switch (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
mation (Code 04502: Monitor Input 3)

Defective swing lock switch
1 (Internal disconnection or S04 (female) Swing lock switch Resistance
short circuit) OFF Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
ON Max. 1 z
ness
Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (5) – Resis-
J02 – S04 (male) (5) tance
tor) Wiring harness between S04 (male) (6) – Resis-
and standard
3
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (5) – Resis-
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
J02 – S04 (male) (5) and chassis ground tance
4
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (5) –
Voltage Max. 1 V
J02 – S04 (male) (5) and chassis ground
5 Defective machine monitor CM02 Swing lock switch Voltage
Between (5) – OFF 20 – 30 V
chassis ground ON Max. 1 V
28 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to swing lock switch
PC300, 350-8 29
E-15 When monitor switch is operated, monitor displays nothing 1
Trouble (1) • Operating the working mode select switch fails to display working mode monitor.
Related infor-
—
mation

and standard
value in normal 1 Defective machine monitor Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.
state
Trouble (2) • When auto-decelerator switch is operated, auto-decelerator monitor is not displayed.
Related infor-
a If auto-decelerator fails to operate, proceed with troubleshooting No. E-2.
mation

and standard
state
Trouble (3) • Operating the travel speed select switch fails to display travel speed monitor.
Related infor-
a If travel speed selection fails, proceed with troubleshooting No. H-21.
mation

and standard
state
Trouble (4) • When wiper switch is operated, wiper monitor is not displayed.
Related infor-
a If wiper fails to operate, proceed with troubleshooting No. E-16.
mation

and standard
state
• When select switch is operated, adjust screen is not displayed.

Trouble (5) • When LCD monitor adjust switch is operated, adjust screen is not displayed.
• When maintenance switch is operated, maintenance item screen is not displayed.
Related infor-
—
mation

and standard
state
30 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 31
E-16 Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate 1
Trouble (1) When wiper switch is operated, wiper monitor does not light up or go off.
Related • Condition of wiper switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code: 04504 Monitor 1st, 2nd line switches)

and standard
value in normal Machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble is in system, trou-
Trouble (2) When wiper switch is operated, wiper does not operate.
Related • Condition of window rear limit switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code: 02204 Switch input 5)

W03 (male) Front window Resistance
Defective window rear limit
1 When installed to
switch (Internal short circuit) Min. 1 Mz
front
Between (1) – (2)
When retracted to
Max. 1 z
rear
Defective wiper motor (Inter- ing without turning starting switch ON.
2
nal disconnection) M05 (female) Continuity
Between (1) – (3) There is continuity
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Possible causes 3 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (119) – M05 (male) (3) tance
and standard nector)
value in normal Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
state (114) – M05 (male) (1) tance
circuit) Resis-
CP01 (female) (57) – W03 (male) (1) Min. 1 Mz
tance
CP01 (female) Front window Resistance
Defective pump controller
(Rear limit switch system) When installed to
Min. 1 Mz
Between (57) – front
5 chassis ground When retracted to
Max. 1 z
rear
Defective pump controller ing without turning starting switch ON.
(Wiper motor system) CP02 (female) Continuity
Between (119) – (114) There is continuity
32 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 33
Trouble (3) When window washer switch is operated, window washer does not operate.
Related • Condition of window washer switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code: 04504 Monitor 1st, 2nd line switches)

and standard
value in normal Machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble is in system, trou-
34 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 35
E-17 Machine push-up function does not operate normally 1
• Machine push-up function does not oper-

Trouble (1) Machine push-up function does not operate.
ate normally.
Related infor-
• When machine push-up function is set to high pressure, solenoid is de-energized.
mation

1 Defective fuse No.2 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault. (See Cause 6)
Defective machine push-up Machine push-up
2 switch (Internal disconnec- S05 (female) Resistance
switch
tion)
Low pressure set Max. 1 z
Between (5) – (6)
High pressure set Min. 1 Mz
Defective machine push-up ing without turning starting switch ON.
3
short circuit or ground fault) Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Possible causes
4 diode D02
and standard D02 (male) Resistance (Continuity)
value in normal
Between (2) – (6) Min. 1 Mz (without continuity)
state
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between F01-2 outlet – S05 Resis-
ness Max. 1 z
(male) (5) tance
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between S05 (male) (6) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) J01 – V06 (female) (2) tance
Max. 1 z
Ground fault in wiring har- Wiring harness between F01-2 outlet – S05
Resis-
ness (male) (5), – other harnesses between Min. 1 Mz
6 tance
(Short circuit with GND cir- related circuits and chassis ground
cuit) Wiring harness between S05 (male) (6) –
Resis-
J01 – V06 (female) (2), – D02 (female) (2) Min. 1 Mz
tance
and chassis ground
36 PC300, 350-8
• Machine push-up function does not oper-

Trouble (2) Machine push-up function does not release.
ate normally.
Related infor-
• When machine push-up function is set to low pressure, solenoid is energized.
mation

Defective machine push-up Machine push-up
1 S05 (female) Resistance
Possible causes switch (Internal short circuit) switch
and standard Low pressure set Max. 1 z
value in normal Between (5) – (6)
High pressure set Min. 1 Mz
state
2
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between S05 (male) (6) –
J01 – V06 (female) (2), – D02 (female) (2) Voltage Max. 1 V
and chassis ground
Circuit diagram related to machine push-up solenoid
PC300, 350-8 37
E-18 Monitoring function fails to display “boom raise” normally 1
Trouble • Boom RAISE operation is not displayed normally by machine monitoring function (Special functions).
Related infor-
• Monitoring code: 01900 (Pressure Switch 1)
mation

Defective boom RAISE PPC out troubleshooting.
oil pressure switch (Internal P06 (male) Boom lever Resistance
1
disconnection or short cir-
cuit) Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Boom RAISE Max. 1 z
ness
and standard
3
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
5 Defective pump controller CP01 Boom lever Voltage
Between (53) – Neutral 20 – 30 V
chassis ground Boom RAISE Max. 1 V
38 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to boom RAISE PPC oil pressure switch
PC300, 350-8 39
E-19 Monitoring function fails to display “boom lower” normally 1
• Boom LOWER operation is not displayed normally by machine monitoring function (Special func-
Trouble
tions).
Related infor-
• Monitoring code: 01900 (Output Switch 1)
mation

Defective boom LOWER out troubleshooting.
PPC oil pressure switch P02 (male) Boom lever Resistance
1
short circuit) Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Boom LOWER Max. 1 z
ness
and standard
3
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
5 Defective pump controller CP01 Boom lever Voltage
chassis ground Boom LOWER Max. 1 V
40 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to boom LOWER PPC oil pressure switch
PC300, 350-8 41
E-20 Monitoring function fails to display “arm IN” normally 1
Trouble • Arm IN operation is not displayed normally by machine monitoring function (Special functions).
Related infor-
mation

Defective arm IN pressure out troubleshooting.
sensor P04 Voltage
1
short circuit) Between (3) – (1) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (2) – (1) 0.5 – 4.5 V
ness
and standard
3
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
Between (9) – (18) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (17) – (18) 0.5 – 4.5 V
Circuit diagram related to arm IN PPC oil pressure switch
42 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 43
E-21 Monitoring function fails to display “arm OUT” normally 1
Trouble • Arm OUT operation is not displayed normally by machine monitoring function (Special functions).
Related infor-
mation

Defective arm OUT PPC oil
1 pressure switch (Internal dis- P08 (male) Arm lever Resistance
connection or short circuit) Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Arm OUT Max. 1 z
ness
and standard
3
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
5 Defective pump controller CP01 Arm lever Voltage
chassis ground Arm OUT Max. 1 V
44 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to arm OUT PPC oil pressure switch
PC300, 350-8 45
E-22 Monitoring function fails to display “bucket CURL” normally 1
Trouble • Bucket CURL is not displayed normally by machine monitoring function (Special functions).
Related infor-
• Monitoring code:01901 (Output Switch 2)
mation

Defective bucket CURL pres-
1 sure sensor (internal discon- P01 Bucket lever Voltage
nection or short circuit) Between (3) – (1) Neutral 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (2) – (1) CURL 0.5 – 4.5V
ness
and standard
3
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
Between (9) – (18) 4.5 – 5.5V
Between (73) – (18) 0.5 – 4.5V
Circuit diagram related to Bucket CURL PPC oil pressure switch
46 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 47
E-23 Monitoring function fails to display “bucket DUMP” normally 1
Trouble • Bucket DUMP operation is not displayed normally by machine monitoring function (Special functions).
Related infor-
mation

Defective bucket DUMP PPC out troubleshooting.
oil pressure switch (Internal P05 (male) Bucket lever Resistance
1
disconnection or short cir-
cuit) Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Bucket DUMP Max. 1 z
ness
and standard
3
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
5 Defective pump controller CP01 Bucket lever Voltage
Between (34) – chas- Neutral 20 – 30 V
sis ground Bucket DUMP Max. 1 V
48 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to bucket DUMP PPC oil pressure switch
PC300, 350-8 49
E-24 Monitoring function fails to display “swing” normally 1
Trouble • Swing is not displayed normally by machine monitoring function (Special function).
Related infor-
mation

Defective swing left PPC oil
1 pressure switch (Internal dis- P07 (male) Swing lever Resistance
Between (1) – (2)
Left Max. 1 z
Defective swing right PPC oil
2 pressure switch (Internal dis- P03 (male) Swing lever Resistance
Between (1) – (2)
Right Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harnesses between CP01 (female) Resis-
ness Max. 1 z
(16) – P03 (male) (2), – P07 (female) (2) tance
Possible causes 3 (Disconnection in wiring or
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between P03 (female) (1) – Resis-
tor) chassis ground tance
value in normal
state Wiring harness between P07 (female) (1) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
ness
4 Wiring harnesses between CP01 (female)
cuit) (16) – P03 (female) (2), – P07 (female) (2) Min. 1 Mz
tance
and chassis ground
5
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harnesses between CP01 (female)
(16) – P03 (female) (2), – P07 (female) (2) Voltage Max. 1 V
and chassis ground
6 Defective pump controller CP01 Bucket lever Voltage
chassis ground Left or Right Max. 1 V
50 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to right and left swing PPC oil pressure switches
PC300, 350-8 51
E-25 Monitoring function fails to display “travel” normally 1
Trouble • Travel is not displayed normally by machine monitoring function (Special functions).
Related infor-
mation

Defective travel PPC oil out troubleshooting.
pressure switch P09 (male) Travel lever Resistance
1
Between (1) – (2)
Forward or reverse Max. 1 z
ness
– J01 – P09 (female) (2) tance
Max. 1 z
Possible causes
state 3 Wiring harness of CP01 (female) (55) – J01
cuit) – P09 (female) (2), – M14 (female) (2) and Min. 1 Mz
tance
chassis ground
4
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness of CP01 (female) (55) – J01
– P09 (female) (2), – M14 (female) (2) and Voltage Max. 1 V
chassis ground
chassis ground Forward or reverse Max. 1 V
52 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to travel PPC oil pressure switch and travel alarm
PC300, 350-8 53
E-26 Monitoring function fails to display “travel differential pressure”

normally 1
• Travel differential pressure is not displayed normally by machine monitoring function (Special func-
Trouble
tions).
• Travel differential pressure is turned on as a pressure difference occurred between the right and left
Related infor-
travel PPC circuits (during steering).
mation

Defective travel steering out troubleshooting.
PPC oil pressure switch P10 (male) Travel lever Resistance
1
Between (1) – (2)
Left or right only Max. 1 z
ness
and standard
3
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
chassis ground Left or right only Max. 1 V
54 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to travel steering PPC oil pressure switch
PC300, 350-8 55
E-27 Monitoring function fails to display “service” normally 1
Trouble • Service is not displayed normally by machine monitoring function (Special functions).
Related infor-
mation

Defective service (front) PPC out troubleshooting.
oil pressure switch P14 (male) Service pedal Resistance
1
Between (1) – (2)
Front Max. 1 z
Defective service (rear) PPC out troubleshooting.
oil pressure switch P15 (male) Service pedal Resistance
2
Between (1) – (2)
Rear Max. 1 z
ness Max. 1 z
– P14 (female) (2), – P15 (female) (2) tance
Possible causes 3 (Disconnection in wiring or
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between P14 (female) (1) – Resis-
tor) chassis ground tance
value in normal
Max. 1 z
ness
4 Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (52)
cuit) – P14 (female) (2), – P15 (female) (2) and Min. 1 Mz
tance
chassis ground
5
– P14 (female) (2), – P15 (female) (2) and Voltage Max. 1 V
chassis ground
6 Defective pump controller CP01 Service pedal Voltage
chassis ground Front or rear Max. 1 V
56 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to service PPC oil pressure switch
PC300, 350-8 57
E-28 KOMTRAX system does not operate normally 1

Trouble • KOMTRAX system does not operate normally.
• If KOMTRAX system administrator makes request for checking system on machine side for trouble,
Related infor- carry out following troubleshooting.
mation • Even if KOMTRAX system has trouble, it does not particularly appear on machine.
• Carry out all troubleshooting on service menu screen of machine monitor.

a Turn starting switch ON and check “Setting condition or termi-
nal” screen.
1 Defective communication 1
Check item Normal display
Communication start check Completion
a Turn starting switch ON and check “Condition of positioning and
communication” screen.
N ###,##,## (Latitude)
2 Defective GPS
Positioning E ###,##,## (Longitude)
Possible causes
In positioning
and standard
value in normal If latitude and longitude are not displayed in 5 minutes on open
state ground, notify KOMTRAX service hot line.
Defective communication Check item Normal display
3
environment Communication Zone level 1 – Zone level 3
If zone level 1 – 3 is not displayed within communication zone of
ORBCOMM, notify KOMTRAX service hot line.
4 Defective communication 2
Number of items not transmitted 0 – 9 (Normally 0)
a Select “Terminal Status” from “12 Display of a Select “GPS & Communication Status” from
KOMTRAX setting” in the service menu of the “12 Display of KOMTRAX setting” in the ser-
machine monitor. vice menu of the machine monitor.
58 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 59
E-29 Air conditioner does not operate 1
Trouble • Air conditioner does not start.

Related infor- • For electrical circuit inside the air conditioner unit, refer to the structure, function and maintenance
mation standard, “Air conditioner system.”

1 Defective fuse No. 11 If fuse is burnt, circuit probably has ground fault.
Defective A/C Hi/Lo pressure a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
switch ing without turning starting switch ON.
2
(Internal disconnection or P17 (male) Resistance
defective contact)
Wiring harness between F01-11 outlet – Resis-
AC01 (male) (4) tance
ness
Wiring harness between M26 (male) (7) – Resis-
and standard tor) Wiring harness between AC01 (male) (5) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
value in normal chassis ground tance
Max. 1 z
ness Wiring harness between F01-11 outlet – Resis-
4 Min. 1 Mz
(Short circuit with GND cir- AC01 (male) (4) and chassis ground tance
cuit) Wiring harness between AC01 (male) (7) – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
P17 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
5 Defective air conditioner unit (The table indicates internal defect of an air conditioner)
AC01 Voltage
Between (1) – (3) 20 – 30 V
60 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to air conditioner
PC300, 350-8 61
E-30 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding 1
• Alarm does not sound during travel.

Trouble
• Alarm sounds in stopped state.
Related infor-
—
mation

shooting No. E-21.
2 Defective travel signal Operation of lever:

019 Travel ON
When the monitoring display is not correct, proceed to diagnosis for
“'Travel is not normally indicated' in the monitoring function”
out troubleshooting (insert T-adapter).
Defective travel alarm M14 Travel lever Voltage

Possible causes 3 (Internal disconnection or Neutral Max. 1 V
and standard short circuit) Between (1) – (2)
Operated 20 – 30 V
value in normal
state If above voltage is normal and travel alarm does not sound, travel
alarm is defective.
ness
Wiring harness between F01-15 outlet – J03 Resis-
– M14 (female) (1) tance
tor) Wiring harness between M14 (female) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
J01 (19) tance
5
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between F01-15 outlet – J03 Resis-
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
– M14 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out. (If
6 Defective pump controller causes 1 – 5 above are not detected, pump controller may be defec-
tive.)
62 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to travel PPC oil pressure switch and travel alarm
PC300, 350-8 63
E-31 Horn does not sound 1
Trouble Horn does not sound.

Related infor-
mation

1 Defective fuse No. 5 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault. (See Cause 6)
2 Defective horn relay If the horn sounds after replacing the relay, the relay was defective
Between M07 (2) – chassis ground (with
Voltage 20 – 30 V
horn switch turned ON)
3 Defective high tone horn a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
Resis-
Between M07 (female) (1) – chassis ground Max. 1 z
tance
If above is normal, the horn is defective
Between M08 (2) – chassis ground (with
Voltage 20 – 30 V
horn switch turned ON)
4 Defective low tone horn a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
Possible causes ing without turning starting switch ON.
and standard Resis-
Between M08 (female) (1) – chassis ground Max. 1 z
value in normal tance
state If above is normal, the horn is defective
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between F01 (5) – S10 Resis-
ness Max. 1 z
(female) – R08 (female) (3) tance
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between S10 (female) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) R08 (female) – M07 (female) (2) tance
Max. 1 z
M08 (female) (2) tance
Wiring harness between F01 (5) – S10
Resis-
Ground fault in wiring har- (female) – R08 (female) (3) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ness ground
6
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between S10 (female) (2) –
cuit) Resis-
R08 (female) – M07 (female) (2) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
Min. 1 Mz
M08 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
64 PC300, 350-8
Circuit diagram related to horn
PC300, 350-8 65
SEN02632-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
66
SEN02633-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
Troubleshooting of hydraulic and
mechanical system (H-mode)
System chart for hydraulic and mechanical system ........................................................................................ 4
Information contained in troubleshooting table ............................................................................................... 6
H-1 All work equipment lack power, or travel and swing speeds are slow...................................................... 8
H-2 Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls.......................................................................................... 10
H-3 No work equipment, swing or travel move ..............................................................................................11
H-4 Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump............................................................................11
H-5 Auto-decelerator does not work ............................................................................................................. 12
H-6 Fine control mode does not function or responds slow.......................................................................... 12
H-7 Boom moves slowly or lacks power ....................................................................................................... 13
H-8 Arm moves slowly or lacks power .......................................................................................................... 14
H-9 Bucket moves slowly or lacks power...................................................................................................... 15
H-10 Work equipment does not move in its single operation........................................................................ 15
H-11 Work equipment has a bit too fast hydraulic drift.................................................................................. 16
H-12 Work equipment has big time lag ......................................................................................................... 18
PC300, 350-8 1
H-13 Other work equipment moves when relieving single circuit.................................................................. 18

H-14 Power max. switch does not operate ................................................................................................... 19
H-15 In compound operation, work equipment with larger load moves slowly ............................................. 19
H-16 In swing + boom RAISE operation, boom moves slowly ...................................................................... 20
H-17 In swing + travel operation, travel speed drops sharply ....................................................................... 20
H-18 Machine swerves in travel .................................................................................................................... 21
H-19 Machine travels slowly ......................................................................................................................... 22
H-20 Machine cannot be easily steered or lacks power................................................................................ 23
H-21 Travel speed does not shift, or it is too slow or fast.............................................................................. 24
H-22 Track shoe does not turn (on one side only) ........................................................................................ 25
H-23 Machine does not swing....................................................................................................................... 26
H-24 Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow.............................................................................. 28
H-25 Excessive overrun when stopping swing.............................................................................................. 30
H-26 There is big shock when stopping swing.............................................................................................. 31
H-27 Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging. ............................................................... 31
H-28 Swing hydraulic drift is too big.............................................................................................................. 32
2 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 3
System chart for hydraulic and mechanical system 1
4 PC300, 350-8
a This is a system chart that has been drawn up by simplifying the whole hydraulic circuit chart. Use it as
a reference material when troubleshooting the hydraulic and mechanical system.
PC300, 350-8 5
Information contained in troubleshooting table 1

a Troubleshooting table and related circuit diagram collectively carry the following information. Carry out
troubleshooting work after fully grasping their contents.
Failure phe-
Phenomenon occurring on machine
nomenon
Relative infor-
Information on the failure occurred as well as the troubleshooting
mation
Cause Standard value in normalcy and references for troubleshooting
2
Presumed Cause for presumed failure
cause and stan- [Contents]
(The attached No. is for fil-
dard value in • The standard values in normalcy by which to judge “Good”
3 ing and reference purpose
normalcy or “No Good” about presumed causes.
only. It does not stand for
• References for making judgement of “good” or “No Good”
any priority.)
4
6 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 7
H-1 All work equipment lack power, or travel and swing speeds are
slow 1
Trouble • Speed or power of whole work equipment, travel, and swing is low.
Related infor-
• Set the working mode in P-mode before start.
mation

a Prepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idle and
carry out troubleshooting.
1 Malfunction of unload valve Control lever Unload pressure
3.9 ± 1.0 MPa
All lever in neutral
{40 ± 10 kg/cm2}
Control lever Main relief pressure
Defective adjustment or mal- 33.34 – 36.77 MPa
2 Arm IN
function of main relief valve {340 – 375 kg/cm2}
If oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, main relief
valve may have malfunction or internal defect. Check main relief
valve directly.
Malfunction of self pressure
Possible causes 3 Control lever Control circuit basic pressure
reducing valve
and standard 2.83 – 3.43 MPa
value in normal All levers in neutral
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
state
Measured oil pres- Measurement condi-
Oil pressure ratio
sure tion
Defective adjustment or mal- Pump discharge
4 1
function of PC valve pressure Swing lock: ON
PC valve output pres- Arm IN relief
Approx. 3/5
sure
If oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, PC valve
may have malfunction or internal defect. Check PC valve directly.
LS-EPC output
Travel speed Travel lever
5 Malfunction of LS-EPC valve pressure
Approx. 1.4 MPa
Lo Neutral
{Approx. 14 kg/cm2}
Hi Lifting operation 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
8 PC300, 350-8

Oil pressure ratio
Measured oil pres- Travel with no load
sure All levers in neutral (Lever operated
Possible causes Defective adjustment or mal- halfway)
6
and standard function of LS valve Pump discharge
1
value in normal pressure Almost same pres-
state sure
LS valve output pres-
Approx. 3/5
sure
If oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, LS valve
may have malfunction or internal defect. Check LS valve directly.
7 Malfunction of servo piston Servo piston may have malfunction. Check it directly.
If any cause above is detected, cause may be lowering of perfor-
8 Defective piston pump
mance, malfunction, or internal defect of piston pump.
PC300, 350-8 9
H-2 Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls 1
Trouble • Engine speed lowers extremely or engine stalls.

Related infor-
mation

Control lever Main relief pressure
Defective adjustment or mal- 33.34 – 36.77 MPa
1 Arm IN
function of main relief valve {340 – 375 kg/cm2}
If oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, main relief
valve may have malfunction or internal defect. Check main relief
valve directly.
Measured oil pres- Measurement condi-
Oil pressure ratio
sure tion
Defective adjustment or mal- Pump discharge
2 1
function of PC valve pressure Swing lock: ON
Possible causes PC valve output pres- Arm IN relief
Approx. 3/5
and standard sure
value in normal If oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, PC valve
state may have malfunction or internal defect. Check PC valve directly.
Oil pressure ratio
sure All lever in neutral (Lever operated
Defective adjustment or mal- halfway)
3
function of LS valve Pump discharge
1
pressure Almost same pres-
LS valve output pressure
Approx. 3/5
sure
Clogging of orifice or filter in Orifices or filters in pump servo devices may be clogged. Check
4
servo devices them directly.
10 PC300, 350-8
H-3 No work equipment, swing or travel move 1
Trouble • All work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism do not move.
Related infor-
mation

Malfunction of PPC lock Lock lever Solenoid output pressure
1
solenoid valve Lock 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Released
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Possible causes a Prepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idle and
and standard carry out troubleshooting.
value in normal Malfunction of self pressure
2 Control lever Control circuit basic pressure
state reducing valve
2.83 – 3.43 MPa
All levers in neutral
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Piston pump may have malfunction or internal defect. Check it by
following method.
3 Defective piston pump
• Crank the engine with oil pressure measurement plug removed.
If oil flows out, the piston pump is normal.
Pump shaft may not revolve because of defect in damper. Check
4 Defective damper
damper directly.
H-4 Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump 1
Failure phe-
• An abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump.
nomenon
Relative infor-
mation

1 Hydraulic oil level lowered Make a visual check.
2 Quality of hydraulic oil bad Air may have get mixed with the oil. Make a visual check.
Presumed It is presumed that the cap of hydraulic tank is clogged, thereby
cause and stan- 3 Hydraulic tank cap clogged
causing negative pressure inside the tank. Make a visual check.
dard value in
It is presumed that the strainer in the hydraulic tank is clogged,
normalcy Hydraulic tank strainer
4 thereby causing negative pressure in the suction circuit. Make a
clogged
visual check.
The piston pump is suspected of an internal failure. Check the pump
5 Piston pump defective
itself.
PC300, 350-8 11
H-5 Auto-decelerator does not work 1
Trouble • Auto-decelerator does not operate.

• Carry out this troubleshooting if auto-decelerator does not operate when travel lever is operated.
Related infor- (Shuttle valve (in PPC valve) is installed between PPC valve and oil pressure switch of only in travel
mation circuit.)

Possible causes carry out troubleshooting.
and standard
Malfunction of travel PPC Travel lever PPC valve output pressure
value in normal 1
state valve (shuttle valve) Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Min. 2.7 MPa
Operated
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
H-6 Fine control mode does not function or responds slow 1
Trouble • Fine control performance or response is low.

Related infor-
mation

LS-EPC output
Approx. 1.4 MPa
Lo Neutral
{Approx. 14 kg/cm2}
2 Clogging of LS circuit orifice Orifice of LS circuit may be clogged. Check it directly.
Possible causes a Prepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idle and
and standard carry out troubleshooting.
value in normal
Oil pressure ratio
state
sure All levers in neutral (Lever operated
Defective adjustment or mal- halfway)
3
function of LS valve Pump discharge
1
pressure Almost same pres-
LS valve output pressure
Approx. 3/5
sure
12 PC300, 350-8
H-7 Boom moves slowly or lacks power 1
Trouble • Speed or power of boom is low.

Related infor-
mation

Malfunction of right PPC Boom lever PPC valve output pressure
1
valve (boom circuit) Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Min. 2.7 MPa
Boom Raise or Boom Lower
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of merge-divider Travel lever Solenoid output pressure
2
solenoid valve Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Either side operated
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of merge-divider Merge-divider valve (main/LS) may have malfunction. Check it
3
valve (main/LS) directly.
Malfunction of boom control Spool of boom control valve (Lo/Hi) may have malfunction. Check it
4
valve (spool) directly.
Malfunction of boom control
Pressure compensation valve of boom control valve (Lo/Hi) may
Possible causes 5 valve (pressure compensa-
have malfunction. Check it directly.
and standard tion valve)
value in normal Malfunction of boom control Regeneration valve of boom control valve (Lo) may have malfunc-
6
state valve (regeneration valve) tion or defective seal. Check it directly.
Malfunction of boom control Lock valve of boom control valve (Lo) may have malfunction. Check
7
valve (lock valve) it directly.
Malfunction of boom control Check valve of boom control valve (Hi) may have malfunction.
8
valve (check valve) Check it directly.
Malfunction or defective seal Safety valve for lock valve may have malfunction or defective seal.
9
of safety valve for lock valve Check it directly.
Malfunction or defective seal
Suction valve of boom control valve (Lo) may have malfunction or
10 of boom control valve (suc-
defective seal. Check it directly.
tion valve)
Safety-suction valve of boom control valve (Lo) may have malfunc-
11 of boom control valve
tion or defective seal. Check it directly.
(safety-suction valve)
Malfunction of LS shuttle
LS shuttle valve of left travel control valve, bucket control valve, or
12 valve (left travel, bucket, or
service control valve may have malfunction. Check it directly.
service)
13 Defective boom cylinder
Boom lever Leakage from cylinder
Raise relief 20 cc/min
PC300, 350-8 13
H-8 Arm moves slowly or lacks power 1
Trouble • Speed or power of arm is low.

Related infor-
mation

Malfunction of left PPC valve Arm lever PPC valve output pressure
1
(arm circuit) Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Min. 2.7 MPa
IN or OUT
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
2
solenoid valve Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of pump merge- Pump merge-divider valve (main/LS) may have malfunction. Check
3
divider valve (main/LS) it directly.
Possible causes Malfunction of arm control Spool of arm control valve (Lo/Hi) may have malfunction. Check it
and standard 4
value in normal
state Malfunction of arm control
Pressure compensation valve of arm control valve (Lo/Hi) may have
5 valve (pressure compensa-
malfunction. Check it directly.
tion valve)
Malfunction of arm control Regeneration valve of arm control valve (Lo) may have malfunction
6
valve (regeneration valve) or defective seal. Check it directly.
Safety-suction valve of arm control valve (Lo/Hi) may have malfunc-
7 of arm control valve (safety-
tion or defective seal. Check it directly.
suction valve)
Malfunction of arm control Quick return valve of arm control valve (Hi) may have malfunction.
8
valve (quick return valve) Check it directly.
Malfunction of LS shuttle LS shuttle valve of right travel control valve, boom control valve, left
9 valve (right travel, boom, left travel control valve, bucket control valve, or service control valve
travel, bucket, or service) may have malfunction. Check it directly.
10 Defective arm cylinder
Arm lever Leakage from cylinder
IN relief 20 cc/min
14 PC300, 350-8
H-9 Bucket moves slowly or lacks power 1
Trouble • Speed or power of bucket is low.

Related infor-
mation

Malfunction of right PPC Bucket lever PPC valve output pressure
1
valve (bucket circuit) Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Min. 2.7 MPa
CURL or DUMP
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of bucket control Spool of bucket control valve may have malfunction. Check it
2
Possible causes
and standard Malfunction of bucket control
Pressure compensation valve of bucket control valve may have mal-
value in normal 3 valve (pressure compensa-
function. Check it directly.
state tion valve)
Safety-suction valve of bucket control valve may have malfunction
4 of bucket control valve
or defective seal. Check it directly.
Malfunction of LS shuttle LS shuttle valve of service control valve may have malfunction.
5
valve (service) Check it directly.
6 Defective bucket cylinder
Bucket lever Leakage from cylinder
CURL relief 20 cc/min
H-10 Work equipment does not move in its single operation 1
• Boom does not move singly.

Trouble • Arm does not move singly.
• Bucket does not move singly.
Related infor-
mation

Possible causes Work equipment lever PPC valve output pressure
and standard 1 Malfunction of PPC valve
value in normal Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
state Min. 2.7 MPa
Operated
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of control valve
2 Spool of control valve may have malfunction. Check it directly.
(spool)
PC300, 350-8 15
H-11 Work equipment has a bit too fast hydraulic drift 1
Trouble (1) • Hydraulic drift of boom is large.

Related infor-
mation

Possible causes 1 Defective boom cylinder
Boom lever Leakage from cylinder
and standard
value in normal RAISE relief 20 cc/min
state Defective seal of boom con- Seal of lock valve of boom control valve (Lo) may be defective.
2
trol valve (lock valve) Check it directly.
Defective seal of safety valve Seal of safety valve for lock valve may be defective. Check it
3
for lock valve directly.
Trouble (2) • Hydraulic drift of arm is large.

Related infor-
mation

1 Defective arm cylinder
Arm lever Leakage from cylinder
IN relief 20 cc/min
Seal of safety-suction valve of arm control valve (Lo/Hi) may be
Possible causes defective. Check it directly.
and standard
Defective seal of arm control a This safety-suction valve may be checked by replacing it with
value in normal 2
valve (safety-suction valve) another one and seeing change of condition. (However, do not
state
use a safety-suction valve for lowering the boom or lock valve
for this purpose because its set pressure is different.)
Defective seal of arm control Seal of spool of arm control valve (Lo/Hi) may be defective. Check it
3
Defective seal of arm control
Seal of pressure compensation valve of arm control valve (Lo/Hi)
may be defective. Check it directly.
tion valve)
16 PC300, 350-8
Trouble (3) • Hydraulic drift of bucket is large.

Related infor-
mation

1 Defective bucket cylinder
Bucket lever Leakage from cylinder
CURL relief 20 cc/min
a Seal of safety-suction valve of bucket control valve may defec-
Possible causes tive. Check it directly.
and standard Defective seal of bucket con-
This safety-suction valve may be checked by replacing it with
value in normal 2 trol valve (safety-suction
another one and seeing change of condition. (However, do not
state valve)
use a safety-suction valve for lowering the boom or lock valve
for this purpose because its set pressure is different.)
Defective seal of bucket con- Seal of bucket control valve spool may be defective. Check it
3
trol valve (spool) directly.
Defective seal of valve con-
Seal of pressure compensation valve of bucket control valve may be
4 trol valve (pressure compen-
defective. Check it directly.
sation valve)
PC300, 350-8 17
H-12 Work equipment has big time lag 1
Trouble Time lag of work equipment is large.

Related infor-
Set the working mode in P-mode before start.
mation

LS-EPC output
Approx. 1.4 MPa
Lo Neutral
{Approx. 14 kg/cm2}
Possible causes Malfunction of control valve
Regeneration valve of control valve may have malfunction. Check it
and standard 2 (regeneration valve)
directly.
value in normal [boom and arm only]
state Safety-suction valve of control valve may have malfunction. Check it
directly.
a The safety-suction valve of the arm or boom may be checked
3 by replacing it with another one and seeing change of condi-
tion. (However, do not use a safety-suction valve for lowering
the boom or lock valve for this purpose because its set pres-
sure is different.)
Pressure compensation valve of control valve may have malfunc-
4 (pressure compensation
tion. Check it directly.
valve)
H-13 Other work equipment moves when relieving single circuit 1
Trouble • When part of work equipment is relieved singly, other parts of work equipment move.
Related infor-
mation

and standard Defective seal of control
value in normal Seal of pressure compensation valve of control valve may be defec-
state tive. Check it directly.
tion valve)
18 PC300, 350-8
H-14 Power max. switch does not operate 1
Trouble • The power maximizing function does not work.

Related infor-
mation

Possible causes Swing lock switch Solenoid output pressure
Malfunction of 2-stage relief
and standard 1
solenoid valve OFF 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
value in normal
state 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
ON
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of main relief
2 Main relief valve may have malfunction. Check it directly.
valve
H-15 In compound operation, work equipment with larger load moves

slowly 1
Failure phe-
• In a compound operation, work equipment with larger load tends to move slowly.
nomenon
Relative infor-
—
mation

The pressure compensation valve for the work equipment with
smaller load is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
Combination of compound
Presumed Work equipment with larger load
operation
cause and stan- Malfunctioning of pressure
dard value in 1 compensation valve for work Boom RAISE + arm IN Boom RAISE
normalcy equipment with smaller load Boom RAISE + arm OUT Arm OUT
Boom RAISE + bucket CURL Boom RAISE
Arm OUT + bucket CURL Arm OUT
Boom LOWER + arm OUT Arm OUT
PC300, 350-8 19
H-16 In swing + boom RAISE operation, boom moves slowly 1
Trouble • When machine swings and raises boom simultaneously, boom rising speed is low.
Related infor-
• If speed of single boom raise operation is also low, carry out troubleshooting H-7 first.
mation

and standard
value in normal Malfunction or defective seal LS selector valve may have malfunction or defective seal. Check it
1
state of LS selector valve directly.
H-17 In swing + travel operation, travel speed drops sharply 1
Failure phe-
• In a compound operation of swing + travel, the travel speed drops sharply.
nomenon
Relative infor-
• If the travel speed is slow in the single operation of travel, carry out the H-19 check first.
mation
Presumed Cause Standard value in normalcy and references for troubleshooting

cause and stan-
dard value in Malfunctioning of LS shuttle The LS shuttle valve in the left travel control valve or the swing con-
1
normalcy valve (left travel and swing) trol valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valves themselves.
20 PC300, 350-8
H-18 Machine swerves in travel 1
Trouble • Machine deviates during travel.

Related infor-
mation

Travel lever PPC valve output pressure
Malfunction of travel PPC
1 Min. 2.7 MPa
valve Travel forward or reverse
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
Difference between right and left Within 0.4 MPa
outputs {Within. 4 kg/cm2}
reducing valve
2.83 – 3.43 MPa
All levers at neutral
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Oil pressure ratio
Measured oil Travel with no load
Defective adjustment or mal- pressure All lever in neutral (Lever operated
3
function of LS valve halfway)
Possible causes
and standard Pump discharge
1
value in normal pressure Almost same
state LS valve output pressure
Approx. 3/5
pressure
Malfunction of travel junction Travel lever Solenoid output pressure
4
solenoid valve Either side operated 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Both sides operated
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of travel junction
5 Travel junction valve may have malfunction. Check it directly.
valve
Malfunction of travel control
6 Spool of travel control valve may have malfunction. Check it directly.
valve (spool)
7 Defective travel motor
Travel lever Leakage from travel motor
Travel relief Max. 30 l/min
Final drive may have internal defect. Check it directly.
8 Defective final drive a It may be checked by abnormal sound, abnormal heating,
metal chips in drain oil, etc.
PC300, 350-8 21
H-19 Machine travels slowly 1
Trouble • Travel speed is low.

Related infor-
mation

Travel lever PPC valve output pressure
Malfunction of travel PPC
1 Min. 2.7 MPa
valve Travel forward or reverse
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
Difference between right and left/ Within 0.4 MPa
forward and reverse outputs {Within. 4 kg/cm2}
reducing valve
2.83 – 3.43 MPa
All levers at neutral
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
LS-EPC output pres-
Possible causes 3 Malfunction of LS-EPC valve sure
and standard Approx. 1.4 MPa
value in normal Lo Neutral
{Approx. 14 kg/cm2}
state
valve (spool)
Pressure compensation valve of travel control valve may have mal-
tion valve)
Malfunction of travel control Suction valve of travel control valve may have malfunction. Check it
6
valve (suction valve) directly.
Malfunction of LS shuttle LS shuttle valve of bucket control valve may have malfunction.
7
valve (bucket) Check it directly.
8 Defective travel motor
Travel lever Leakage from travel motor
22 PC300, 350-8
H-20 Machine cannot be easily steered or lacks power 1
Trouble • Machine is not steered well or steering power is low.

Related infor-
mation

PPC valve output pressure
Malfunction of travel PPC Travel lever
1 (steering)
valve (steering spool)
Both sides in neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Min. 2.7 MPa
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of travel junction Travel lever Solenoid output pressure
2
solenoid valve Both sides operated 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of travel junction
3 Travel junction valve may have malfunction. Check it directly.
valve
4
solenoid valve Both sides in neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Possible causes 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
and standard Either side operated
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
value in normal
state Malfunction of merge-divider
5 Merge-divider valve may have malfunction. Check it directly.
valve
valve (spool)
Pressure compensation valve of travel control valve may have mal-
tion valve)
Malfunction of travel control Suction valve of travel control valve may have malfunction. Check it
8
valve (suction valve) directly.
Malfunction of LS shuttle LS shuttle valve of bucket control valve may have malfunction.
9
valve (bucket) Check it directly.
Defective seal of check valve Seal of check valve of LS pressure sensing part may be defective.
10
of LS pressure sensing part Check it directly.
Seal of safety valve of travel motor may have malfunction. Check it
directly.
Malfunction of travel motor
11 a Motors of same type on forward and reverse sides or on right
(safety valve)
and left sides may be checked by replacing them with each
other and seeing change of condition.
Seal of check valve of travel motor may have malfunction. Check it
directly.
Malfunction of travel motor
12 a Motors of same type on forward and reverse sides or on right
(check valve)
and left sides may be checked by replacing them with each
other and seeing change of condition.
PC300, 350-8 23
H-21 Travel speed does not shift, or it is too slow or fast 1
Trouble • Travel speed does not change or travel speed is low or high.
Related infor-
mation

Travel
Travel lever Monitoring [15]
speed
Lo Fine control 690 mA
Mi (such as releasing 740 mA
Hi decelerator) 0 mA
1 Malfunction of LS-EPC valve
Possible causes Travel
Travel lever LS-EPC output pressure
and standard speed
value in normal
Approx. 1.4 MPa
state Lo Neutral
{Approx. 14 kg/cm2}
Travel
Malfunction of travel speed Travel lever Solenoid valve output pressure
2 speed
selector solenoid valve
Lo Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Hi Operated
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of travel motor Speed shifting section of travel motor may have malfunction. Check
3
(speed shifting section) it directly.
24 PC300, 350-8
H-22 Track shoe does not turn (on one side only) 1
Trouble • Travel system does not move (only one side).

Related infor-
mation

Defective seal of travel con- Suction valve of travel control valve may have defective seal. Check
1
trol valve (suction valve) it directly.
Defective seal of travel motor Safety valve of travel motor may have defective seal. Check it
2
(safety valve) directly.
Possible causes Defective seal of travel motor Check valve of travel motor may have defective seal. Check it
3
and standard (check valve) directly.
value in normal a Prepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idle and
state carry out troubleshooting.
Lowering of travel motor out-
4
put Travel lever Leakage from travel motor
PC300, 350-8 25
H-23 Machine does not swing 1
Trouble (1) • Upper structure does not swing in either direction.

Related infor-
mation

Malfunction of swing holding Swing Solenoid valve
1
brake solenoid valve Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Operated
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of swing motor Holding brake section of swing motor may have malfunction. Check
2
(holding brake section) it directly.
Possible causes carry out troubleshooting.
and standard Swing lock switch Swing lever Swing relief pressure
value in normal Defective adjustment or mal-
3 function of swing motor 27.95 – 32.85 MPa
state ON Swing relief
(safety valve) {285 – 335 kg/cm2}
If oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, safety
valve may have malfunction or internal defect. Check safety valve
directly.
4 Defective swing motor
Swing lever Leakage from swing motor
Swing relief Max. 11 l/min
Swing machinery may have internal defect. Check it directly.
5 Defective swing machinery a It may be checked by abnormal sound, abnormal heating,
26 PC300, 350-8
Trouble (2) • Upper structure swings only in one direction.

Related infor-
mation

Malfunction of swing PPC Left lever PPC valve output pressure
1
valve Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Min. 2.7 MPa
Swing
Possible causes {Min. 28 kg/cm2}
and standard Malfunction of swing control
2 Spool of swing control valve may have malfunction. Check it directly.
value in normal valve (spool)
state Seal of suction valve of swing motor may be defective. Check it
Defective seal of swing directly.
3
motor (suction valve) a Suction valves on right side and left side may be checked by
replacing them with each other and seeing change of condition.
Seal of check valve of swing motor may be defective. Check it
Defective seal of swing directly.
4
motor (check valve) a Check valves on right side and left side may be checked by
replacing them with each other and seeing change of condition.
PC300, 350-8 27
H-24 Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow 1
Trouble (1) • Swing acceleration or swing speed is low in both directions.

Related infor-
mation

Malfunction of LS shuttle LS shuttle valves of all control valves may have malfunction. Check
1
valve (all control valves) them directly.
Malfunction of swing motor Holding brake section of swing motor may have malfunction. Check
2
(holding brake) it directly.
Possible causes Swing lock switch Swing lever Swing relief pressure
and standard Defective adjustment or mal-
value in normal 3 function of swing motor 27.95 – 32.85 MPa
ON Swing relief
state (safety valve) {285 – 335 kg/cm2}
If oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, safety
valve may have malfunction or internal defect. Check safety valve
directly.
28 PC300, 350-8
Trouble (2) • Swing acceleration or swing speed is low in only one direction.
Related infor-
mation

Malfunction of swing PPC Swing lever PPC valve output pressure
1
Min. 2.7 MPa
Left or Right
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of swing control
2 Spool of swing control valve may have malfunction. Check it directly.
valve (spool)
Possible causes
and standard Pressure compensation valve of swing control valve may have mal-
value in normal function. Check it directly.
tion valve)
state
Seal of suction valve of swing motor may be defective. Check it
directly.
Defective seal of swing
4 a Suction valves on right side and left side may be checked by
motor (suction valve)
replacing them with each other and seeing change of condi-
tion.
directly.
5 a Check valves on right side and left side may be checked by
motor (check valve)
tion.
PC300, 350-8 29
H-25 Excessive overrun when stopping swing 1
Trouble (1) • Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging in both directions.
Related infor-
mation

Swing lock switch Swing lever Swing relief pressure
Defective adjustment or mal-
1 function of swing motor 27.95 – 32.85 MPa
Possible causes ON Swing relief
(safety valve) {285 – 335 kg/cm2}
and standard
value in normal If oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, safety
state valve may have malfunction or internal defect. Check safety valve
directly.
Trouble (2) • Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging in only one direction.
Related infor-
mation

1
Min. 2.7 MPa
Left or Right
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
Swing PPC slow return valve may be clogged. Check it directly.
Clogging of swing PPC slow a Slow return valves on right side and left side may be checked
2
Possible causes return valve by replacing them with each other and seeing change of condi-
and standard tion.
value in normal Malfunction of swing control
state 3 Swing control valve spool may be malfunctioning. Check it directly.
valve (spool)
Seal of suction valve of swing motor may be defective. Check it
directly.
4 a Suction valves on right side and left side may be checked by
motor (suction valve section)
tion.
directly.
5 a Check valves on right side and left side may be checked by
motor (check valve)
tion.
30 PC300, 350-8
H-26 There is big shock when stopping swing 1
Trouble • Large shock is made when upper structure stops swinging.

Related infor-
mation

1
Possible causes valve Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
and standard
Min. 2.7 MPa
value in normal Left or Right
{Min. 28 kg/cm2}
state
Swing PPC slow return valve may have malfunction. Check it
directly.
Malfunction of swing PPC
2 a Slow return valves on right side and left side may be checked
slow return valve
by replacing them with each other and seeing change of condi-
tion.
H-27 Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging. 1
Trouble • Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging.

Related infor-
mation

Malfunction of back pres- Back pressure valve of control valve may have malfunction. Check it
1
sure valve directly.
Malfunction of swing motor
2 Safety valve of swing motor may have malfunction. Check it directly.
(safety valve)
Possible causes
and standard Suction valve of swing motor may have malfunction. Check it
value in normal directly.
Malfunction of swing motor
state 3 a Suction valves on right side and left side may be checked by
(suction valve)
tion.
Swing machinery may have internal defect. Check it directly.
4 Defective swing machinery a It may be checked by abnormal sound, abnormal heating,
PC300, 350-8 31
H-28 Swing hydraulic drift is too big 1
Trouble (1) • Hydraulic drift of swing is large (when swing holding brake is applied).
Related infor- • When swing emergency reset switch is turned OFF (normal position), swing holding brake operates
mation and upper structure is fixed with disc brake.

Possible causes Swing lever Solenoid valve output pressure
Malfunction of swing holding
and standard 1
brake solenoid valve Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
value in normal
state 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Left or Right
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of swing motor Holding brake section of swing motor may have malfunction or inter-
2
(holding brake) nal defect. Check it directly.
Trouble (2) • Hydraulic drift of swing is large (when swing holding brake is released).
Related infor- • When swing emergency reset switch is turned ON (in an emergency), swing holding brake is
mation released and upper structure is secured by only hydraulic pressure.

Malfunction of swing control Seal of spool of swing control valve may be defective. Check it
1
Seal of pressure compensation valve section of swing control valve
Possible causes 2 valve (pressure compensa-
may be defective. Check it directly.
and standard tion valve)
value in normal Defective seal of swing Seal of safety valve of swing motor may be defective. Check it
state 3
motor (safety valve) directly.
Defective seal of swing Seal of suction valve of swing motor may be defective. Check it
4
motor (suction valve) directly.
Defective seal of swing Seal of check valve of swing motor may be defective. Check it
5
motor (check valve) directly.
32 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 33
SEN02633-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
34
SEN02634-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode)
Method of using troubleshooting chart............................................................................................................ 3
S-1 Starting performance is poor .................................................................................................................... 6
S-2 Engine does not start ............................................................................................................................... 7
S-3 Engine does not pick up smoothly.......................................................................................................... 10
S-4 Engine stops during operations ...............................................................................................................11
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly ............................................................................................................ 12
S-6 Engine lacks output (or lacks power) ..................................................................................................... 13
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion).................................................................................. 14
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) ...................................................................... 15
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly ......................................................................................................... 16
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive............................................................................................................. 17
S-11 Oil is in coolant (or coolant spurts back or coolant level goes down) ................................................... 18
S-12 Oil pressure drops ................................................................................................................................ 19
S-13 Oil level rises (Entry of coolant or fuel)................................................................................................. 20
S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheating) ......................................................................... 21
S-15 Abnormal noise is made....................................................................................................................... 22
PC300, 350-8 1
S-16 Vibration is excessive ........................................................................................................................... 23
2 PC300, 350-8
Method of using troubleshooting chart 1

The troubleshooting chart consists of the “ques-
tions”, “check items”, “causes”, and “troubleshoot-
ing” blocks.
The questions and check items are used to pinpoint
high probability causes by simple inspection or
from phenomena without using troubleshooting
tools.
Next, troubleshooting tools or direct inspection are
applied to check the narrowed causes in order from
the most probable one to make final confirmation
according to the troubleshooting procedure.
[Questions]:
Items to be drawn from the user or operator.
They correspond to A and B in the chart on the
right.
The items in A are basic ones.
The items in B can be drawn from the user or
operator, depending on their level.
[Check items]:
Items to be simply checked by the serviceman
to narrow down causes.
They corresponds to C in the chart on the right.
[Causes]:
Items to be narrowed from the questions and
check items.
The serviceman narrows down the probable
causes from A, B, and C.
[Troubleshooting]:
Items to finally verify whether the narrowed
down causes are undoubtedly the real causes
using the troubleshooting tools and direct
inspections.
Items listed in the [Questions] and [Check items] and related to the [Causes] are marked with E, Q, or w.
E: Causes to be referred to for questions and check items
Q: Causes related to questions and check items
w: Causes highly probable among ones marked with Q
a When narrowing the “causes”, apply the items marked with w before those marked with Q.
When narrowing the causes, do not apply the items marked with E. (If no items have other marks and
the causes cannot be narrowed, however, you may apply them.)
PC300, 350-8 3
<Example of troubleshooting> Exhaust smoke is black

Let us assume that [Clogged air cleaner] is taken to be the cause of black exhaust gas. 3 symptoms have
causal relationship with this problem: [Color of exhaust gas gradually became black], [Power was lost gradu-
ally], and [Air cleaner clogging caution lamp is flashing].
4 PC300, 350-8
If we look from these 3 symptoms to find the causes, we find that there is a relationship with 5 causes. Let us
explain here the method of using this causal relationship to pinpoint the most probable cause.
PC300, 350-8 5
S-1 Starting performance is poor 1

General causes why starting performance is poor Cause
Leaking or clogged fuel piping, entry of air

Clogged air breather hole of fuel tank cap
Defective contact of valve and valve seat
• Defective electrical system
Defective alternator (generator section)

Defective alternator (regulator section)
• Insufficient supply of fuel
Stuck, seized supply pump plunger

• Insufficient intake of air
Defective intake air heater system
Defective or deteriorated battery

• Improper selection of fuel
Clogged air cleaner element
Defective electric lift pump

Clogged fuel filter/strainer
a The common rail fuel injection system (CRI) recognizes the
Worn piston ring, cylinder

fuel injection timing electrically. Accordingly, even if the starting
operation is carried out, the engine may not start until the
Defective injector
crankshaft revolves 2 turns at maximum. This phenomenon
does not indicate a trouble, however.
Confirm recent repair history

Degree of use of
Operated for long period E E E
machine
Starting perfor- Became worse gradually Q w w Q
mance Engine starts easily when warm w w
Questions
Non-specified fuel is being used Q Q Q

Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Mainte- w w Q Q
nance Manual
Engine oil must be added more frequently w
When engine is preheated or when temperature is low, preheating monitor does not
indicate normally w
(if monitor is installed)
During operation, charge level monitor indicates abnormal charge w w
(if monitor is installed)
Dust indicator is red (if indicator is installed) w
Air breather hole of fuel tank cap is clogged w
Fuel is leaking from fuel piping w Q
Starting motor cranks engine slowly w
While engine is If air bleeding plug of fuel filter is removed, fuel does not flow
w Q
cranked with start- out
Check items
ing motor If spill hose from injector is disconnected, little fuel spills w
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of w
some cylinders is low
Engine does not pick up smoothly and combustion is irregular Q Q w
There is hunting from engine (rotation is irregular) Q w Q Q
Blow-by gas is excessive w
Inspect air cleaner directly q
When compression pressure is measured, it is found to be low q q
Inspect fuel filter, strainer directly q
Carry out troubleshooting for “Rail Press (Very) Low Error.” See *1 for failure code. q
Troubleshooting
Carry out troubleshooting for “Power Lift Pump Error.” See *2 for failure code. q
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does q
not change
When starting switch is turned to HEAT, intake air heater mount does not become
warm q
Is voltage 20 – 30 V between alternator terminal B and terminal E with Yes q
engine at low idle? No q
When specific gravity of electrolyte and voltage of battery are measured, they are
q
low
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy
*1: Failure codes [CA559] and [CA2249]

6 PC300, 350-8
S-2 Engine does not start 1

a) Engine does not turn Cause
Defective connection of battery terminal
Defective starting motor (motor section)

General causes why engine does not turn
• Internal parts of engine seized:
Defective or deteriorated battery
Defective starting circuit wiring

See “S-4 Engine stops during operations”
• Defective electrical system
Broken flywheel ring gear
Defective hydraulic pump

Defective starting switch
• Defective hydraulic pump
Defective battery relay
Defective safety relay

Degree of use of Operated for long period E E
machine
Questions
Condition of horn when Horn does not sound Q Q w

starting switch is turned
ON Horn volume is low w
Battery electrolyte is low w
Battery terminal is loose w
When starting switch is turned ON, there is no operating sound from battery relay Q w
When starting switch is turned to START, starting pinion does not move out Q Q w
Speed of rotation is low w
Check items
When starting switch is Makes grating noise w w

turned to START, starting
pinion moves out, but Soon disengages again w
Makes rattling noise and does not turn Q Q Q
Inspect flywheel ring gear directly q
Carry out troubleshooting in H-mode.

Carry out troubleshooting in E-mode.
When specific gravity of electrolyte and voltage of battery are measured, they are low q
There is not voltage (20 – 30 V) between battery relay terminal B and q
terminal E
Troubleshooting
When terminal B and terminal C of starting switch are connected,

q
engine starts
Turn starting switch OFF,
connect cord, and carry When terminal B and terminal C at safety relay outlet are connected,
out troubleshooting at engine starts q
ON
Even if terminal B and terminal C at safety relay outlet are connected, q
engine does not start
When safety switch terminal and terminal B of starting motor are con-
q
nected, engine starts
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Remedy
—
—
PC300, 350-8 7
b) Engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out Cause
Defective operation of overflow valve (Does not close)

General causes why engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out
• Fuel is not being supplied

• Supply of fuel is extremely small

• Improper selection of fuel (particularly in winter)
Defective common rail pressure limiter

Seized, abnormally worn feed pump

Defective supply pump MPROP
Clogged fuel filter element
Broken supply pump shaft

Insufficient fuel in tank
Defective fuel injector

Use of improper fuel
Degree of use of
Operated for long period E E
machine
Questions
Exhaust smoke suddenly stopped coming out (when starting again) w Q w w E

Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Mainte-
w E Q
nance Manual
When fuel tank is inspected, it is found to be empty w
Air breather hole of fuel tank cap is clogged Q w
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained Q E E E
When fuel filter is removed, there is not fuel in it w w Q
Check items
Fuel is leaking from fuel piping w

While engine is If air bleeding plug of fuel filter is removed, fuel does not flow out Q Q w Q Q
cranked with start-
ing motor If spill hose from injector is disconnected, little fuel spills Q w w w Q
Inspect fuel filter directly q

Inspect feed pump directly q
Carry out troubleshooting for “Rail Press (Very) Low Error.” See *1 for failure code. q q
Troubleshooting
Carry out troubleshooting for “IMV/PCV1 Short (Open) Error.” See *2 for failure q
code.
Inspect overflow valve directly q
Engine can be started in reduced cylinder mode. q
If pressure limiter return pipe is disconnected, fuel flows out q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Remedy
Add

8 PC300, 350-8
c) Exhaust smoke comes out but engine does not start Cause
(fuel is being injected)
Worn dynamic valve system (Valve, rocker lever, etc.)
Defective coolant temperature sensor, wiring harness

General causes why exhaust smoke comes out but engine does not
start
Excessive wear of piston ring, cylinder liner
Leaking or clogged fuel system, entry of air

• Lack of rotating force due to defective electrical system
Defective intake air heater system

Clogged injector, defective spray
Defective, deteriorated battery


Use of improper fuel
Clogged fuel filter

Degree of use of
machine
Suddenly failed to start w w Q
Questions
Non-specified fuel is being used w Q Q

Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Mainte- w w
nance Manual
When engine is preheated or when temperature is low, preheating monitor does not
indicate normally (if monitor is installed) w
Air breather hole of fuel tank cap is clogged Q
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained w
When fuel filter is removed, there is not fuel in it w Q
Starting motor cranks engine slowly w
When engine is cranked, abnormal sound is generated around cylinder head w
Check items
While engine is If air bleeding plug of fuel filter is removed, fuel does not flow Q w Q
cranked with starting out
motor If spill hose from injector is disconnected, little fuel spills w
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of
some cylinders is low w

Inspect dynamic valve system directly q
When compression pressure is measured, it is found to be low q
When air is bled from fuel system, air comes out q
Troubleshooting
Inspect fuel filter directly q

Engine can be started in reduced cylinder mode. q
When specific gravity of electrolyte and voltage of battery are measured, they are
low q
Coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally (if coolant temperature
q
gauge is installed)
When starting switch is turned to HEAT, intake air heater mount does not become q
warm
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
Remedy

PC300, 350-8 9
S-3 Engine does not pick up smoothly 1

General causes why engine does not pick up smoothly Cause
Seized turbocharger, interference of turbocharger


• Defective condition of fuel spray

• Controller is controlling in derate mode

Clogged injector, defective spray
(limiting injection rate (output) because of an error in electrical system)
Improper valve clearance
Clogged fuel filter

Degree of use of
machine Operated for long period E E E E
Questions
Engine pick-up suddenly became worse w Q Q Q

Non-specified fuel is being used w w w
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Maintenance Man-
w w
ual
Oil must be added more frequently w
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of some cyl- Q w
inders is low
Color of exhaust Blue under light load w
Check items
gas Black w Q w w
When engine is cranked, interference sound is generated around turbocharger w
High idle speed under no load is normal, but speed suddenly drops when load is applied Q w
There is hunting from engine (rotation is irregular) Q Q Q

Troubleshooting
Inspect valve clearance directly q

When turbocharger is rotated by hand, it is found to be heavy q
When air is bled from fuel system, air comes out q
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does not change q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Adjust
Clean
Clean
Remedy
10 PC300, 350-8
S-4 Engine stops during operations 1

General causes why engine stops during operations Cause
Broken dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever, etc.)

• Seized parts inside engine
• There is overheating
• Defective hydraulic pump

Broken, seized piston, connecting rod

Broken, seized crankshaft bearing
Leaking, clogged fuel piping
Broken, seized feed pump

Broken supply pump shaft
Defective hydraulic pump

Broken, seized gear train
Clogged fuel filter

Degree of use of Operated for long period E
machine
Abnormal noise was heard and engine stopped suddenly w w w w Q w Q w
Questions
Condition when engine Engine overheated and stopped w Q

stopped Engine stopped slowly w Q
There was hunting and engine stopped w Q Q Q
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Mainte-
nance Manual w
Fuel level monitor indicates low level (if monitor is installed) w
Metal particles are found when oil pan is drained w w w Q
Check items
Does not turn at all w w

When engine is cranked Turns in opposite direction w
by hand Moves by amount of gear backlash w
Supply pump shaft does not turn w
Engine turns, but stops when load is applied to machine w

Carry out troubleshooting
Inspect piston, connecting rod directly q

Troubleshooting
Inspect crankshaft bearing directly q

Inspect gear train directly q
in H-mode.

Inspect feed pump directly q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Remedy
—
Add
PC300, 350-8 11
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly 1

General causes why engine does not rotate smoothly Cause
Clogged injector, defective spray (dirt in injector)

• Air in fuel system
Defective Bkup speed sensor, wiring harness

• Defective speed sensor (Error at degree that it is not indicated)
Defective Ne speed sensor, wiring harness

Clogged fuel filter

machine
Questions
Occurs at a certain speed range Q Q

Occurs at low idle Q Q Q Q Q
Condition of hunting
Occurs even when speed is raised Q Q Q
Occurs on slopes w
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Maintenance Manual w
Check items
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained Q


Troubleshooting
Carry out troubleshooting for “Eng Ne Speed Sensor Error.” See *1 for failure code. q
Carry out troubleshooting for “Eng Bkup Speed Sensor Error.” See *2 for failure code. q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Clean
Remedy
Add
*1: Failure code [CA689]

*2: Failure code [CA778]
12 PC300, 350-8
S-6 Engine lacks output (or lacks power) 1

General causes why engine lacks output Cause
Clogged injector, defective spray (dirt in injector)
Defective boost pressure sensor, wiring harness

Defective drive of injector (signal, solenoid)

• Defective condition of fuel spray

Air leakage from air intake piping
• There is over heating
pressure sensor (air leakage)

Defective installation of boost
⇒ See “S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high
Leaking, clogged fuel piping

(Overheating)”.
Clogged spill piping

Clogged fuel filter
(limiting injection rate (output) because of an error in
electrical system)

Degree of use of
Operated for long period E E E E
machine
Suddenly Q w Q Q Q Q
Questions
Power was lost

Gradually Q Q Q Q Q Q
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Maintenance
Manual w w
Engine oil must be added more frequently Q Q

Dust indicator is red (if indicator is installed) w w
Air breather hole of fuel tank cap is clogged w w
Output becomes insufficient after short stop of operation w
Black w w
Color of exhaust gas
Blue under light load w
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of some
w w
cylinders is low
Check items

High idle speed is too low Q
High idle speed under no load is normal, but speed suddenly drops when load is applied Q w Q Q
Engine does not pick up smoothly and combustion is irregular w w Q Q w
There is hunting from engine (rotation is irregular) Q Q Q Q Q
Blow-by gas is excessive w w

Inspect air intake piping directly q
When boost pressure is measured, it is found to be low q q q
Troubleshooting
Inspect fuel piping q

Inspect spill port check valve directly q
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does not
q q
change
Inspect boost pressure sensor mount directly q
Carry out troubleshooting for “Chg Air Press Sensor High (Low) Error.” See *2 for failure
q
code.
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Clean
Clean
Remedy

PC300, 350-8 13
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion) 1

General causes why exhaust smoke is black Cause
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head


• Defective condition of fuel injection

• There is over heating:

See “S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high
(Overheating)”.

Improper fuel injection pressure

(limiting injection rate (output) because of an error in electrical
Improper fuel injection timing

system)
Crushed, clogged muffler
Abnormally worn injector

Clogged, seized injector
Degree of use of
machine Operated for long period E E E E
Suddenly became black w w Q Q

Questions
Color of exhaust gas Gradually became black w Q Q Q

Black during light-load operation w
Non-specified fuel is being used Q Q
Suddenly w Q Q Q
Power was lost
Gradually Q Q Q Q
Muffler is crushed w
Air leaks between turbocharger and cylinder head, clamp is loosened w
Engine is operated in low-temperature mode at normal temperature Q Q Q
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of some cylin-
Q w
ders is low
Check items

Torque converter stall occurred or pump relief speed is high (Fuel is injected excessively) Q
Exhaust noise is abnormal Q w Q
Engine does not pick up smoothly and combustion is irregular Q Q Q Q Q w
If spill hose from injector is disconnected, abnormally much fuel spills w

Troubleshooting

When muffler is removed, exhaust gas color improves q
Carry out troubleshooting for “Coolant Temp Sens High (Low) Error.” See *2 for failure code. q
Confirm with INSITE or monitoring function on applicable machine side q q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Adjust
Clean
Remedy

14 PC300, 350-8
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) 1

General causes why oil consumption is excessive Cause
Turbocharger
• Abnormal consumption of oil
Oil leakage from oil pan, cylinder head, etc.

Worn, damaged valve (stem, guide, seal)
• Long-time operation of engine at low idle or high idle
(Do not run engine at idle for more than 20 minutes continuously)
• External leakage of oil
Dust sucked in from intake system
Clogged breather, breather hose

• Wear of pats in lubrication system
Worn seal at turbocharger end
Oil leakage from oil drain plug

Worn, damaged rear oil seal
Oil leakage from oil cooler
Oil leakage from oil piping

Worn seal at blower end
Oil leakage from oil filter

Broken piston ring
Broken oil cooler

Degree of use of
machine
Oil consumption suddenly increased w Q
Questions
Oil must be added more frequently w Q

Oil becomes contaminated quickly Q Q w
Outside of engine is dirty with oil w w w w w
There are loose piping clamps in intake system w
Inside of turbocharger intake outlet pipe is dirty with oil w
Inside of turbocharger exhaust outlet pipe is dirty with oil Q w
Check items
There is oil in coolant w

Oil level in clutch or damper chamber of applicable machine is high w
Exhaust smoke is blue under light load w w
Excessive Q Q w w
Amount of blow-by gas
None w
When intake manifold is removed, dust is found inside q

When intake manifold is removed, inside is found to be dirty abnormally q
Troubleshooting
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft q q

Check breather and breather hose directly q
Inspect rear oil seal directly q
Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage q q
There is external leakage of oil from engine q q q q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Clean
Remedy
PC300, 350-8 15
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly 1

General causes why oil becomes contaminated quickly Cause
Clogged turbocharger lubrication drain tube

• Entry of exhaust gas into oil due to internal wear
Defective seal at turbocharger turbine end

• Clogging of lubrication passage
• Use of improper fuel
• Use of improper oil
Clogged breather, breather hose

• Operation under excessive load
Defective oil filter safety valve

Worn valve, valve guide
Exhaust smoke is bad

Clogged oil cooler
Clogged oil filter
Questions
Degree of use of machine Operated for long period E E E

Non-specified fuel is being used Q Q
Metal particles are found when oil filter is drained Q Q w
Inside of exhaust pipe is dirty with oil w
Engine oil temperature rises quickly w
Blue under light load w
Check items
Color of exhaust gas

Black w
Excessive Q Q w Q
Amount of blow-by gas
None w
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft q

Troubleshooting
Check breather and breather hose directly q
See S-7
Inspect oil cooler directly q
Inspect oil filter directly q
Spring of oil filter safety valve is hitched or broken q
Inspect turbocharger lubrication drain tube directly q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy
—
16 PC300, 350-8
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive 1

General causes why fuel consumption is excessive Cause

• Leakage of fuel
• Defective condition of fuel injection (fuel pressure, injection timing)
• Excessive injection of fuel
Fuel leakage from fuel filter, piping, etc.
Defective common rail pressure

Fuel leakage inside head cover
Defective supply pump plunger
Defective operation of injector

Improper fuel injection timing
Defective feed pump oil seal
Defective spray by injector

Degree of use of Operated for long period E E E
Questions
machine
More than for other machines of same model Q Q Q Q
Condition of fuel
consumption Gradually increased Q Q
Suddenly increased Q Q
There is external leakage of fuel from engine w
Combustion is irregular w
Engine oil level rises and oil smells of diesel fuel w w
w
ders is low
Check items
Low idle speed is high Q

Torque converter stall occurred or pump relief speed is high Q
Color of exhaust Black Q Q Q Q

gas White Q
Remove and inspect head cover directly q

Inspect feed pump oil seal directly q
Troubleshooting
If spill tube from injector is disconnected, much fuel spills q
Carry out troubleshooting for “Coolant Temp Sens High (Low) Error.” See *2 for failure code. q
Check with monitoring function of the machine monitor. q q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Remedy

PC300, 350-8 17
S-11 Oil is in coolant

(or coolant spurts back or coolant level goes down) 1
General causes why oil is in coolant Cause
Broken hydraulic oil cooler or power train oil cooler

• Internal leakage in lubrication system
• Internal leakage in cooling system
Broken cylinder head, head gasket
Broken oil cooler core, O-ring

Cracks inside cylinder block
Holes caused by pitting
Degree of use of machine Operated for long period E E
Questions
Suddenly occurred Q Q
Increase of oil level
Gradually occurred Q Q
Hard water is being used as coolant Q Q
Oil level has risen, oil is milky Q Q w
w
Check items
There are excessive air bubbles in radiator, coolant spurts back

Hydraulic oil or power train oil is milky w
When hydraulic oil or power train oil is drained, water is found w
Pressure-tightness test of cylinder head shows there is leakage q

Troubleshooting
Inspect cylinder block, liner directly q q

Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage q q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy
18 PC300, 350-8
S-12 Oil pressure drops 1

General causes why oil pressure drops Cause
Leaking, crushed, clogged hydraulic piping

• Leakage, clogging, wear of lubrication system
Defective oil level sensor, wiring harness

• Defective oil pressure control
• Improper selection of fuel (improper viscosity)
• Deterioration of oil due to overheating
Clogged, broken pipe in oil pan

Clogged strainer in oil pan
Defective regulator valve

Worn journal of bearing
Lack of oil in oil pan
Defective oil pump

Coolant, fuel in oil
Clogged oil filter

Degree of use of
machine Operated for long period E E E
Questions
Oil pressure monitor indicates low oil pressure (if monitor is installed) Q w
Non-specified oil is being used Q Q
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Maintenance Man-
w
ual
Indicates pressure drop at low idle w
Oil pressure moni- Indicates pressure drop at low, high idle Q w w w Q
tor
(if installed) Indicates pressure drop on slopes w
Sometimes indicates pressure drop w Q
Oil level monitor indicates oil level drop (if monitor is installed) w w
Oil level in oil pan is low w
External hydraulic piping is leaking, crushed w
Check items
Oil is milky or smells of diesel oil w

Metal particles are found when oil pan is drained w
Metal particles are found when oil filter is drained w Q
Metal particles are found in oil filter q

Troubleshooting
Inspect oil pan strainer, pipe directly q q

See S-13
Oil pump rotation is heavy, there is play in oil pump q

Valve spring of regulator valve is fatigued, damaged q
Inspect oil filter directly q
If oil level sensor is replaced, oil level monitor indicates normally q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Adjust
Clean
Clean
Remedy
—
Add
PC300, 350-8 19
S-13 Oil level rises (Entry of coolant or fuel) 1

General causes why oil level rises Cause

• Coolant in oil (milky)
• Fuel in oil (smells diluted diesel fuel)
Broken oil cooler core, O-ring

Worn, damaged rear oil seal
Cracks inside cylinder block
a If oil is in coolant, carry out troubleshooting for “S-11 Oil is in coolant.”
Defects in supply pump

Broken injector O-ring
Questions
Degree of use of
machine
Fuel must be added more frequently w w
Coolant must be added more frequently Q Q
There is oil in coolant Q Q Q Q w
Oil smells of diesel fuel w w
Oil is milky Q Q
When engine is started, drops of water come from muffler Q
When radiator cap is removed and engine is run at low idle, an abnormal number of bubbles appear, or
Check items
coolant spurts back w Q
Exhaust smoke is white Q

Oil level in clutch or damper chamber of applicable machine is low w

Troubleshooting
Remove injector and inspect O-ring q

Inspect cylinder block, liner directly q q
Inspect rear oil seal directly q
Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage q
Remove and inspect supply pump directly q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Remedy
20 PC300, 350-8
S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheating) 1

General causes why coolant temperature becomes too high Cause
Rise of oil temperature in hydraulic pump system

• Lack of cooling air (deformation, damage of fan)
• Drop in heat dissipation efficiency
• Problem in coolant circulation system
Defective radiator cap (pressure valve)
Defective coolant temperature gauge

Defective operation of thermostat
Slipping fan belt, worn fan pulley

Clogged, crushed radiator fins
Clogged, broken oil cooler
Clogged radiator core

Broken water pump
Lack of coolant
Degree of use of
machine
Questions
Condition of Sudden overheated Q w Q

overheating Always tends to overheat Q w w Q
Coolant tempera- Rises quickly Q w
ture gauge
(if installed) Does not go down from red range w
Radiator coolant level monitor indicates drop of coolant level (if monitor is installed) w
Engine oil level has risen and oil is milky w Q
Fan belt tension is low w
When fan belt is turned, it has play w
Milky oil is floating on coolant w
There are excessive air bubbles in radiator, coolant spurts back w
Check items
When light bulb is held behind radiator core, no light passes through w
Radiator shroud, inside of underguard are clogged with dirt or mud w w
Coolant is leaking because of cracks in hose or loose clamps w
Coolant flows out from radiator overflow hose w
Fan belt whines under sudden acceleration w
Hydraulic oil temperature gauge indicates red range faster than engine coolant tem- w
perature gauge does (if they are installed)
Carry out troubleshooting

Inspect cylinder liner directly q
Inspect oil cooler directly q
Troubleshooting
Temperature difference between upper and lower tanks of radiator is large q

When operation test of thermostat is carried out, it does not open at cracking tem- in H-mode.
perature q
Temperature difference between upper and lower tanks of radiator is slight q
Inspect radiator core directly q
When operation of radiator cap is carried out, its cracking pressure is low q
Inspect fan belt, pulley directly q
When coolant temperature is measured, it is fount to be normal q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Remedy
—
Add
PC300, 350-8 21
S-15 Abnormal noise is made 1

General causes why abnormal noise is made Cause
Deformed cooling fan, loose fan belt, interference of fan belt

• Abnormality due to defective parts
Defective inside of muffler (dividing board out of position)
Improper fuel injection timing (abnormality in coolant low

• Abnormal combustion
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head

• Air sucked in from intake system
Broken dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever)

Interference of turbocharger, seized turbocharger
temperature sensor, boost temperature sensor)

a Judge if the noise is an internal noise or an external noise

before starting troubleshooting.
a The engine is operated in the low-temperature mode while it is
not warmed up sufficiently. Accordingly, the engine sound
becomes a little larger. This does not indicate abnormality, how-
Improper gear train backlash

ever.
Removed, seized bushing

Clogged, seized injector

a When the engine is accelerated, it is operated in the accelera-
Dirt caught in injector

tion mode and its sound becomes a little larger for up to about
3 seconds. This does not indicate abnormality, however.

machine
Questions
Condition of abnor- Gradually occurred Q Q

mal noise Suddenly occurred Q Q Q
Non-specified fuel is being used Q
Metal particles are found when oil filter is drained w w
Air leaks between turbocharger and cylinder head w
When engine is cranked, abnormal sound is generated around cylinder head w w
When engine is cranked, beat noise is generated around muffler w
Check items
w Q
ders is low
Color of exhaust Blue under light load w

gas Black Q w Q
Engine does not pick up smoothly and combustion is irregular w
Abnormal noise is loud when engine is accelerated Q Q Q Q

When muffler is removed, abnormal noise disappears q
Troubleshooting

Inspect gear train directly q q
Inspect fan and fan belt directly q
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does not change q q
Abnormal noise is heard only when engine is started q
Check with monitoring function of the machine monitor. q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Remedy
22 PC300, 350-8
S-16 Vibration is excessive 1

General causes why vibration is excessive Cause
Broken output shaft, parts in damper on applicable machine side

• Defective parts (abnormal wear, breakage)
• Misalignment between engine and chassis
• Abnormal combustion
coolant temperature sensor, boost temperature sensor)

a If abnormal noise is made and vibration is excessive, carry out trouble-
Stuck dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever)

shooting for “S-15 Abnormal noise is made”, too.
Loose engine mounting bolts, broken cushions

Misalignment between engine and devices on
Worn main bearing, connecting rod bearing
Improper injection timing (Abnormality in

Improper gear train backlash
applicable machine side

Worn camshaft bushing
Degree of use of Operated for long period E E E
Questions
machine
Condition of Suddenly increased Q Q

vibration Gradually increased Q Q Q
Non-specified oil is being used Q Q
Metal particles are found when oil filter is drained w w
Metal particles are found when oil pan is drained w w
Oil pressure is low at low idle Q Q
Check items
Vibration occurs at mid-range speed Q Q

Vibration follows engine speed Q Q Q Q
Exhaust smoke is black w Q

Inspect main bearing and connecting rod bearing directly q
Troubleshooting
Inspect gear train directly q

Inspect camshaft bushing directly q
Check with monitoring function of machine monitor q
Inspect engine mounting bolts and cushions directly q
When alignment is checked, radial runout or facial runout is detected q
Inspect output shaft or inside of damper directly q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Adjust
Remedy
PC300, 350-8 23
SEN02634-01
© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
24
SEN02635-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
50 Disassembly and assembly1

General information on disassembly and
assembly
How to read this manual ................................................................................................................................. 2
Coating materials list....................................................................................................................................... 4
Special tools list .............................................................................................................................................. 7
Sketches of special tools ...............................................................................................................................11
PC300, 350-8 1
SEN02635-00 50 Disassembly and assembly
How to read this manual 1
1. Removal and installation of assemblies
Special tools Removal

q Special tools which are deemed neces- q The [Removal] section contains procedures
sary for removal or installation of parts are and precautions for implementing the work,
described as A1,•••X1 etc. and their part know how and the amount of oil or coolant to
names, part numbers and quantities are be drained.
described in the special tool list. q General tools that are necessary for removal
q Also the following information is described are described as [1], [2]•••etc. and their part
in the special tool list. names, part numbers and quantities are not
1) Necessity described.
t : Special tools that cannot be substi- q Various symbols used in the Removal Section
tuted and should always be used are explained and listed below.
(installed). k : This mark indicates safety-related precau-
q : Special tools that will be useful if avail- tions that must be followed when imple-
able and are substitutable with com- menting the work.
mercially available tools. a: Know-how or precautions for work
2) Distinction of new and existing special [*1] : This mark shows that there are instructions or
tools precautions for installing parts.
N: Tools newly developed for this 6 : This mark shows the amount of oil or coolant
model. They respectively have a to be drained.
new part number. 4 : Weight of part or component
R: Tools with upgraded part numbers.
They are remodeled from already
available tools for other models.
Installation
Blank: Tools already available for other
models. They can be used without q Except where otherwise instructed, installation
any modification. of parts is done in the reverse order of
removal.
3) Circle mark Q in sketch column:
q Instructions and precautions for installing parts
q The sketch of the special tool is pre-
are shown with [*1] mark in the Installation
sented in the section of "Sketches of
Section, identifying which step the instructions
special tools".
are intended for.
q This mark means part No. of special
q General tools that are necessary for installa-
* *** ****
tools starting with 79 T- -
and that they can not be supplied
tion are described as [1], [2]•••etc. and their
part names, part numbers and quantities are
from Komatsu in Japan (i.e. locally
not described.
made parts).
q Marks shown in the Installation Section stand
for the following.
k : Precautions related to safety in execution
of work.
a : This mark gives guidance or precautions
when doing the procedure.
2 : Type of coating material
3 : Tightening torque
5 : Quantity of oil or coolant to be added
Sketches of special tools

q Various special tools are illustrated for the con-
venience of local manufacture.
2 PC300, 350-8
2. Disassembly and assembly of assemblies Disassembly

q In Disassembly section, the work procedures,
Special tools precautions and know-how for carrying out
q Special tools which are deemed neces- those procedures, and quantity of the oil and
sary for disassembly or assembly of parts coolant drained are described.
are described as A1,•••X1 etc. and their q General tools that are necessary for disassem-
part names, part numbers and quantities bly are described as [1], [2]•••etc. and their part
are described in the special tool list. names, part numbers and quantities are not
q Also the following information is described described.
in the special tool list. q The meanings of the symbols used in Disas-
1) Necessity sembly section are as follows.
t : Special tools that cannot be substi- k : This mark indicates safety-related precau-
tuted and should always be used tions that must be followed when imple-
(installed). menting the work.
q : Special tools that will be useful if avail- a : Know-how or precautions for work
able and are substitutable with com- 6: Quantity of oil or coolant drained
mercially available tools.
2) Distinction of new and existing special
tools
N : Tools newly developed for this Assembly
model. They respectively have a q In Assembly section, the work procedures, pre-
new part number. cautions and know-how for carrying out those
R : Tools with upgraded part numbers. procedures, and quantity of the oil and coolant
They are remodeled from already added are described.
available tools for other models. q General tools that are necessary for assembly
Blank : Tools already available for other are described as [1], [2]•••etc. and their part
models. They can be used without names, part numbers and quantities are not
any modification. described.
3) Circle mark Q in sketch column: q The meanings of the symbols used in Assem-
q The sketch of the special tool is pre- bly section are as follows.
sented in the section of "Sketches of k : Precautions related to safety in execution
special tools". of work
q This mark means part No. of special a : This mark gives guidance or precautions
* *** ****
tools starting with 79 T- -
and that they can not be supplied
when doing the procedure.
2 : Type of coating material
from Komatsu in Japan (i.e. locally 3 : Tightening torque
made parts). 5 : Quantity of oil or coolant to be added
Sketches of special tools

q Various special tools are illustrated for the con-
venience of local manufacture.
PC300, 350-8 3
Coating materials list 1

(Rev. 2007.06)
a The recommended coating materials such as adhesives, gasket sealants, and greases used for disas-
sembly and assembly are listed below.
a For coating materials not listed below, use the equivalent of products shown in this manual.
Cate- Komatsu
Part number Q'ty Container Main features and applications
gory code
• Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rubber cush-
LT-1A 790-129-9030 150 g Tube
ions, and cork plugs from coming out.
• Used for plastic (except polyethylene,
polypropylene, tetrafluoroethylene and vinyl
20 g Polyethylene
LT-1B 790-129-9050 chloride), rubber, metal, and non-metal parts
(2 pcs.) container
which require immediate and strong adhe-
sion.
Polyethylene • Features: Resistance to heat and chemicals.
LT-2 09940-00030 50 g
container • Used to fix and seal bolts and plugs.
790-129-9060
Adhesive: 1 kg • Used to stick and seal metal, glass, and plas-
LT-3 (Set of adhesive Can
Hardener: 500 g tics.
and hardener)
Adhesive
Polyethylene
LT-4 790-129-9040 250 g • Used to seal plugs.
container
Holtz MH 705 790-129-9120 75 g Tube • Heat-resistant seal used to repair engines.
• Quick-setting adhesive.
ThreeBond Polyethylene • Setting time: Within 5 sec. to 3 min.
790-129-9140 50 g
1735 container • Used mainly to stick metals, rubbers, plastics,
and woods.
• Quick-setting adhesive.
• Quick-setting type.
Aron-alpha Polyethylene
790-129-9130 2g (max. strength is obtained after 30 minutes)
201 container
• Used mainly to stick rubbers, plastics, and
metals.
• Features: Resistance to heat and chemicals.
Loctite Polyethylene
79A-129-9110 50 cc • Used for fitted portions used at high tempera-
648-50 container
tures.
• Used to stick or seal gaskets and packings of
LG-1 790-129-9010 200 g Tube
power train case, etc.
• Used to seal various threaded portions, pipe
Polyethylene joints, and flanges.
LG-5 790-129-9080 1 kg
container • Used to seal tapered plugs, elbows, and nip-
ples of hydraulic piping.
• Features: Silicon-based heat and cold-resis-
Gasket sealant
tant sealant.
LG-6 790-129-9020 200 g Tube • Used to seal flange surfaces and threaded
portions.
• Used to seal oil pan, final drive case, etc.
• Features: Silicon-based quick-setting sealant.
LG-7 790-129-9070 1 kg Tube • Used to seal flywheel housing, intake mani-
fold, oil pan, thermostat housing, etc.
• Features: Silicon-based, heat and cold-resis-
LG-8
tant, vibration-resistant, impact-resistant seal-
ThreeBond 419-15-18131 100 g Tube
ant.
1207B
• Used to seal transfer case, etc.
4 PC300, 350-8
Cate-
Komatsu code Part number Q'ty Container Main features and applications
gory
• Used for rough surfaces such as the circle gear
LG-9 top seal which does not need to be clamped,
ThreeBond 790-129-9310 200 g Tube water resistance of the clearance at the welded
1206D area, etc.
• Can be coated with paint.
Gasket sealant
LG-10 • Used as lubricant/sealant when the radiator

ThreeBond 790-129-9320 200 g Tube hoses are inserted.
1206E • Can be coated with paint.
LG-11 • Feature: Can be used together with gaskets.
ThreeBond 790-129-9330 200 g Tube • Used for covers of the transmission case and
1121 steering case etc.
ThreeBond
790-129-9090 100 g Tube • Gasket sealant used to repair engine.
1211
Molybdenum
• Used to prevent scuffing and seizure of press-fit-

lubricant
disulfide
ted portions, shrink-fitted portions, and threaded

LM-P 09940-00040 200 g Tube
portions.
• Used to lubricate linkages, bearings, etc.
• Feature: Seizure and scuffing prevention com-

compound
prevention
pound with metallic super-fine-grain, etc.

Seizure
LC-G
— — Can • Used for the mounting bolt in the high tempera-
NEVER-SEEZ
ture area of the exhaust manifold and the turbo-
charger, etc.
SYG2-400LI
SYG2-350LI
SYG2-400LI-A
G2-LI • Feature: Lithium grease with extreme pressure
SYG2-160LI
G0-LI Various Various lubrication performance.
SYGA-160CNLI
*: For cold district • General purpose type.
SYG0-400LI-A (*)
SYG0-160CNLI
(*)
• Used for parts under heavy load.
Caution:
Molybdenum SYG2-400M 400 g x 10 Bellows-type • Do not apply grease to rolling bearings like
disulfide grease SYG2-400M-A 400 g x 20 container swing circle bearings, etc. and spline.
LM-G (G2-M) SYGA-16CNM 16 kg Can • The grease should be applied to work equipment
pins at their assembly only, not applied for
greasing afterwards.
• Seizure resistance, heat resistance and water
Hyper White SYG2-400T-A
Grease
400 g Bellows-type resistance higher than molybdenum disulfide

Grease G2-T, SYG2-16CNT
container grease.
G0-T (*) SYG0-400T-A (*)
16 kg Can • Not conspicuous on machine since color is
*: For cold district SYG0-16CNT (*)
white.
Biogrease SYG2-400B
G2-B, G2-BT (*) SYGA-16CNB 400 g Bellows-type • Since this grease is decomposed by natural bac-
*: For use at high SYG2-400BT (*) container teria in short period, it has less effects on micro-
temperature and SYGA-16CNBT 16 kg Can organisms, animals, and plants.
under high load (*)
• Feature: Silicone grease with wide using tem-
G2-S perature range, high resistance to thermal-oxi-
ThreeBond — 200 g Tube dative degradation and performance to prevent
1855 deterioration of rubber and plastic parts.
• Used for oil seals of the transmission, etc.
• Feature: Urea (organic system) grease with heat
G2-U-S resistance and long life. Enclosed type.
427-12-11871 2 kg Can
ENS grease • Used for rubber, bearing and oil seal in damper.
Caution: Do not mix with lithium grease.
PC300, 350-8 5
Cate-
Komatsu code Part number Q'ty Container Main features and applications
gory
SUNSTAR • Used as primer for cab side.
Glass
PAINT PRIMER 20 ml (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
container
580 SUPER facture)
SUNSTAR 417-926-3910
• Used as primer for glass side.
GLASS Glass
20 ml (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
PRIMER 580 container
facture)
Adhesive for cab glass

SUPER
• Used as primer for painted surface on cab
SUNSTAR
Glass side.
Primer
PAINT PRIMER 22M-54-27230 20 ml

container (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
435-95
facture)
• Used as primer for black ceramic-coated
SUNSTAR
surface on glass side and for hard polycar-
GLASS
22M-54-27240 150 ml Can bonate-coated surface.
PRIMER
(Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
435-41
facture)
SUNSTAR • Used as primer for sash (Almite).
Glass
SASH PRIMER 22M-54-27250 20 ml (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
container
GP-402 facture)
SUNSTAR • “S” is used for high-temperature season
PENGUINE and “W” for low-temperature season as
Polyethylene
SEAL 580 417-926-3910 320 ml adhesive for glass.
container
SUPER “S” or (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
“W” facture)
Adhesive
• Used as adhesive for glass.

Sika Japan, Polyethylene
20Y-54-39850 310 ml (Using limit: 6 months after date of manu-
Sikaflex 256HV container
Adhesive for cab glass
facture)
SUNSTAR Ecocart • Used as adhesive for glass.
PENGUINE 22M-54-27210 320 ml (Special (Using limit: 6 months after date of manu-
SUPER 560 container) facture)
SUNSTAR • Used to seal joints of glass parts.
Polyethylene
PENGUINE 417-926-3920 320 ml (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
container
SEAL No. 2505 facture)
Caulking material
SEKISUI • Used to seal front window.

Polyethylene
SILICONE 20Y-54-55130 333 ml (Using limit: 6 months after date of manu-
container
SEALANT facture)
• Used to seal joint of glasses.
GE TOSHIBA
Translucent white seal.
SILICONES 22M-54-27220 333 ml Cartridge
(Using limit: 12 months after date of manu-
TOSSEAL 381
facture)
6 PC300, 350-8
Special tools list 1
a Tools with part number 79QT-QQQ-QQQQ cannot be supplied (they are items to be locally manufac-
tured).
a Necessity: t ........... Cannot be substituted, must always be installed (used)

q ........... Extremely useful if available or can be substituted with commercially available
part
a New/Remodel: N............ Tools with new part numbers, newly developed for this model
R:........... Tools with upgraded part numbers, remodeled from items already available for
other models
Blank: ... Tools already available for other models, can be used without any modification
a Tools marked Q in the Sketch column are tools introduced in the sketches of the special tools (See
Sketches of special tools).
New/remodel
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q'ty
Component Part number Part name Nature of work, remarks
Removal and instal-

Removal of fuel supply pump
lation of fuel supply 1 795-799-1390 Remover q 1
assembly
pump assembly
A
Removal and instal-
lation of engine 2 795-799-8120 Installer q 1 Installation of engine front seal
front seal
1 795-799-8150 Remover q 1 Removal of fuel inlet connector
Removal and instal-
Removal of fuel injector assem-
lation of cylinder B 2 795-799-6700 Puller t 1
bly
head assembly
3 760-331-1110 Wrench q 1 Tightening of cylinder head bolt
Engine and hydrau- 796-460-1210 Oil stopper q 1
C Stopping oil flow
lic pump assembly 796-770-1320 Adapter q 1
796-627-1610 Wrench assembly t 1
796-627-1620 • Wrench 1
1 Removal and installation of nut
796-427-1140 • Pin 3
01314-20612 • Screw 3
796T-627-1630 Push tool t 1 Q
790-101-2510 Block t 1
791-830-1320 Rod t 2
Final drive assem-
D 01580-11613 Nut t 2
bly 2 Installation of bearing
790-101-2570 Washer t 2
01643-31645 Washer t 2
790-105-2100 Jack assembly t 1
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
3 790-580-1510 Installer t 1 Installation of floating seal
Tightening of cover mounting
4 790-331-1110 Wrench t 1
bolt
PC300, 350-8 7
New/remodel
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q'ty
1 796T-626-1110 Push tool q 1 Q Press fitting of bearing

3 790-201-2480 Push tool t 1 Press fitting of bearing
Swing motor and 790-101-5401 Push tool kit q 1

swing machinery E 790-101-5521 • Plate 1
assembly 4 Press fitting of oil seal
790-101-5421 • Grip 1
01010-51240 • Bolt 1
5 793T-815-1110 Push tool t 1 Q Press fitting of bearing
Carrier roller 1 791-430-3230 Installer t 1
F
assembly 2 791-601-1000 Oil pump t 1
Track roller assem- 1 796-670-1010 Installer t 1
G Oil refilling
bly 2 791-601-1000 Oil pump t 1
1 796-570-1020 Installer t 1
Idler assembly H
2 791-601-1000 Oil pump t 1
791-685-8006 Compressor t 1
791-635-3160 Extension t 1
Disassembly and assembly of
1 Cylinder
790-101-1600 t 1 recoil spring assembly
(686 kN {70 t})
Recoil spring 790-101-1102 Pump t 1
J
assembly
790-201-1500 Plate tool kit t 1
790-201-1620 • Plate 1
2 Installation of dust seal
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
791-630-3000 Remover & installer t 1
Track shoe assem- Cylinder
K 790-101-1300 t 1 Pulling out master pin
bly (980 kN {100 t})
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
790-101-2501 Push puller t 1
790-101-2510 • Block 1
790-101-2520 • Screw 1
791-112-1180 • Nut 1
Center swivel joint Disassembly and assembly of
L 790-101-2540 • Washer 1
assembly center swivel joint assembly
790-101-2630 • Leg 2
790-101-2570 • Plate 4
790-101-2560 • Nut 2
790-101-2650 • Adapter 2
8 PC300, 350-8
New/remodel
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q'ty
796-946-1310 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)
796-946-1810 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)
1
796-946-2110 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2210 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1320 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)
796-946-1820 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)
796-946-2120 Guide
2 t 1
Control valve (For 723-46-44100) Replacement of pressure com-
M
assembly 796-946-2220 Guide pensation valve seal
t 1
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1420 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-42800)
796-946-1330 Sleeve
t 1
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)
796-946-1830 Sleeve
t 1
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)
796-946-2130 Sleeve
3 t 1
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2230 Sleeve
t 1
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1430 Sleeve
t 1
(For 723-46-42800)
PC300, 350-8 9
New/remodel
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q'ty

1 790-502-1003 Cylinder repair stand t 1
hydraulic cylinder assembly
790-102-4300 Wrench assembly t 1 Removal and installation of pis-
2
790-102-4310 Pin t 2 ton assembly
3 790-720-1000 Expander q 1
796-720-1680 Ring q 1 Installation of bearing
4
07281-01589 Clamp q 1
790-201-1702 Push tool kit t 1
Push tool
Hydraulic cylinder 790-201-1851 1
N (for bucket and boom)
assembly 5 Press fitting of bushing
790-201-1861 Push tool (for arm) 1
790-101-5021 Grip 1
01010-50816 Bolt 1
790-101-5021 Grip 1
01010-50816 Bolt 1 Press fitting of dust seal
6
Push tool
790-201-1660 1
(for boom and bucket)
790-201-1670 Plate (for arm) 1
796-670-1100 Remover t 1
796-670-1110 • Sleeve 1
796-670-1120 • Plate 1
796-670-1130 • Screw 1
Work equipment 791-775-1150 • Adapter 1 Removal of foot pin
P
assembly 01643-33080 • Washer 1
01803-13034 • Nut 1
Puller
790-101-4000 t 1
(490 kN {50 t} long)
790-101-1102 Pump (294 kN {30 t}) t 1
Operator cab glass 2 793-498-1210 Lifter (Suction cup) t 2 Installation of operator cab
X
(stuck glass) 3 20Y-54-13180 Stopper rubber t 2 glass (stuck glass)
10 PC300, 350-8
Sketches of special tools 1

Note: Komatsu cannot accept any responsibility for special tools manufactured according to these sketches.
D2 push tool
E1 push tool
PC300, 350-8 11
E5 push tool
12 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 13
SEN02635-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
14
SEN02636-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Engine and cooling system
Removal and installation of fuel supply pump assembly ................................................................................ 2
Removal and installation of engine front seal ................................................................................................. 5
Removal and installation of engine rear seal .................................................................................................. 7
Removal and installation of cylinder head assembly .................................................................................... 12
Removal and installation of radiator assembly ............................................................................................. 24
Removal and installation of hydraulic oil cooler assembly ............................................................................ 26
Removal and installation of aftercooler assembly......................................................................................... 28
Removal and installation of engine and hydraulic pump assembly .............................................................. 29
PC300, 350-8 1
Removal and installation of fuel 7. Remove air conditioner compressor (10) and
supply pump assembly 1 bracket together and move them to a place
where they will not be obstacle to the work.
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
Part number Part name
A 1 795-799-1390 Remover q 1
Removal
k Disconnect the cable from the negative (–)

terminal of the battery.
1. Open the engine hood. 8. Remove No. 1 injector high-pressure pipe (11).
[*3]
2. Remove clamps (1) and (2), U-bolt (3), and air 9. Remove bracket (12).
intake tube (4). [*1]
10. Remove overflow tube (13).
11. Remove supply pump outlet high-pressure
4. Remove belt cover (6) and fan guard (7). pipe (14). [*3]
12. Disconnect connector CP3 (15).
13. Disconnect inlet hose (16). [*4]
14. Remove bracket (17).
15. Disconnect feed pump hoses (18) and (19).

[*4]
5. Disconnect connector M34 (8).
6. Loosen air conditioner compressor belt (9) and

remove it. [*2]
2 PC300, 350-8
16. Remove front gear cover cap (20). 20. Remove 4 nuts (24).
21. Push in tool A1 installed in step 19 and remove

fuel supply pump assembly (25).
17. Rotate the crankshaft forward to set stamp (a)

of supply pump drive gear (21) to the top and
set the No. 1 cylinder to the compression top
dead center (TDC).
Installation
18. Remove nut (22) and washer (23).
Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
[*1]
a Tighten the hose clamps before and after the
air intake tube to the following torque.
3 Hose clamp: 9.8 ± 0.5 Nm {1 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*2]
a Adjust the belt tension. For details, see Test-
ing and adjusting, "Testing and adjusting air
conditioner compressor belt".
[*3]
a Before installing the high-pressure pipe, check
19. Install tool A1 with bolts [1] (M8 x 1.25).
it for the following defects. If there are any of
these defects, it can cause fuel leakage.
Accordingly, replace the high-pressure pipe.
q Check the taper seal of the connecting part
(Part (a): Part of 2 mm from the end) for visible
lengthwise slit (b) and dent (c).
q Check part (d) (end of the taper seal: Part at 2
mm from the end) for stepped-type wear
(fatigue) which your nail can feel.
PC300, 350-8 3
a Tighten the No. 1 injector and outlet high-pres- 2) Install fuel supply pump assembly (25)
sure pipe to the following torque. with 4 mounting nuts (24) and bracket
3 Sleeve nut: 37.3 ± 4 Nm {3.8 ± 0.4 kgm} mounting bolts (27).
2 Mounting nut: Adhesive (LT-2)
a When installing the No. 1 injector high-pres- 3 Mounting nut and bolt:
sure pipe and supply pump outlet high-pres- 43 ± 6 Nm {4.4 ± 0.6 kgm}
sure pipe, set the slits of the bellows at both
ends of them in the following directions.
q No. 1 injector high-pressure pipe
(injector side): Down
(Common rail side): Out
q Supply pump outlet high-pressure pipe
(supply pump side
and common rail side): Out
[*4]
a Clean the inside of the hose connector and
insert the connector securely.
[*5]
a Install the fuel supply pump assembly accord- 3) Tighten mounting nut (22)
ing to the following procedure. 3 Mounting nut:
1) Push in supply pump drive shaft (26), 180 ± 12.7 Nm {18.4 ± 1.3 kgm}
matching its pin to key way (b) of supply
pump drive gear (21), and tighten nut (22)
and washer (23) temporarily.
4 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of 6. Remove vibration damper (7). [*1]

engine front seal 1
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
A 2 795-799-8120 Installer q 1
Removal
1. Remove the radiator assembly and hydraulic

oil cooler assembly. For details, see "Removal 7. Remove front seal and carrier assembly (8)
and installation of radiator assembly" and from front cover (9).
"Removal and installation of hydraulic oil
cooler assembly".
2. Remove radiator fan (1).
3. Loosen tensioner (2) to remove fan belt (3).
4. Loosen tensioner (4) to remove alternator belt

(5).
8. Remove front seal (10) from carrier (11).
5. Remove pulley (6).
PC300, 350-8 5
Installation 5. Install front seal and carrier assembly (8) to

front cover (9).
a Since pilot tool [1] inside the front seal is used 1) Apply gasket sealant to the mounting face
to guide the crankshaft, do not remove it from of the carrier.
the front seal. 2 Mounting face of carrier:
a Pilot tool [1] is in the spare front seal. Gasket sealant (LG-7)
2) Apply the pilot tool of the front seal to the
1. Clean the seal inserting part of the crankshaft. crankshaft and push in the whole carrier.
3) Remove the pilot tool.
2. Set front seal (10) to tool A2 with its lip up. 4) Tighten the mounting nuts in the order of
the numbers shown in the figure.
3. Apply neutral detergent to the periphery of the 3 Mounting nut:
front seal. 9.8 ± 2.0 Nm {1.0 ± 0.2 kgm}
4. Using A2, insert front seal (10) in carrier (11) 6. Carry out the following installation in the
from the front cover fitting face. reverse order to removal.
a Insert front seal (10) so that the front cover
fitting face of carrier (11) will be flush with [*1]
the bottom of the front seal. a Tighten the vibration damper to the following
torque.
3 Mounting bolt:
200 ± 10 Nm {20 ± 1.0 kgm}
6 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of 5. Remove 12 mounting bolts (4) and lift off fly-
engine rear seal 1 wheel housing (5). [*3]
Removal
1. Remove the hydraulic pump assembly refer-

ring to the section "Removal and installation of
hydraulic pump assembly".
2. Remove damper assembly (1). [*1]
6. Remove 4 mounting bolts (indicated by the

arrows) of the oil pan, 8 mounting bolts (6), and
rear seal and housing assembly (7).
3. Install the sling to flywheel (2) and lift off the fly-
wheel. [*2]
4 Flywheel: 40 kg
7. Remove rear seal (8) from seal housing (9).
4. Disconnect connector CRANK (3).
PC300, 350-8 7
Installation 3. Check the ends and seal inserting parts of the

crankshaft for burrs and rust and clean them
1. Press fit rear seal (8) to seal housing (9). thoroughly.
4. Apply gasket sealant to the seal housing.

2 Mounting face and oil pan mating face
of housing: Gasket sealant (LG-7)
5. Install guide pin [2] to the cylinder block and

then install gasket (10) and rear seal and hous-
ing assembly (7).
a Cut bottom (A) of gasket (10) at the end of
the seal housing (at both right and left
sides).
6. Install seal ring (11).
2. Using aligning tool [1], insert the rear seal until 7. Remove guide pin [2].
it is flush with the mounting flange of seal
housing (9).
a While lightly hitting the top, bottom, right,
and left of aligning tool [1] to check that
the seal carrier does not slant, push in the
rear seal until the outside of aligning tool
[1] touches the housing.
a Do not remove the pilot tool from the rear
seal.
8 PC300, 350-8
8. Tighten the mounting bolts according to the fol- [*2]

lowing procedure. a Install the flywheel according to the following
1) Tighten the 4 oil pan mounting bolts (indi- procedure.
cated by the arrows) temporarily. 1) Install guide bolt [3] and flywheel (2).
2) Tighten the seal housing mounting bolts in a Apply a string of gasket sealant 1 – 3
the order of the numbers shown in the fig- mm in diameter around the bolt holes
ure. on the crankshaft mounting face (8
3 Mounting bolt: places).
12.7 ± 2.0 Nm {1.3 ± 0.2 kgm} 2 Mounting face of flywheel:
3) Tighten the 4 oil pan mounting bolts (indi- Gasket sealant (LG-7)
cated by the arrows) to the following 4 Flywheel: 40 kg
torque.
3 Mounting bolt:
24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
2) Tighten the mounting bolts in the order of

the numbers shown in the figure.
3 Mounting bolt:
9. Carry out the following installation in the 137 ± 7 Nm {14.0 ± 0.7 kgm}
reverse order to removal.
[*1]
2 Damper assembly mounting bolt:
Adhesive (LT-2)
2 Spline of damper:
Molybdenum disulfide grease (LM-G)
PC300, 350-8 9
3) After installing the flywheel, measure the [*3]

radial runout and facial runout with tool [4]. a Install the flywheel housing according to the
a Radial runout: Max. 0.13 mm following procedure.
a Facial runout: Max. 0.20 mm 1) Sling flywheel housing (5) and install it
with mounting bolts (4).
q Measuring radial runout a Apply a string of gasket sealant 1 – 3
1] Install tool [4] to the flywheel housing. mm in diameter to the housing mount-
2] Set the probe of the dial gauge per- ing flange face and around each
pendicular to spigot joint portion (a) or mounting bolt hole.
periphery of the flywheel.
3] Rotate the flywheel by 1 turn and
measure the difference between the
lowest and highest values indicated
by the dial gauge.
a After the flywheel is rotated by 1 turn,
check that the dial gauge indicates
the value at the start of rotation.
q Measuring facial runout

1] Similarly to measurement of the radial
runout, set the probe of the dial
gauge perpendicular to end face (b)
of the flywheel near the periphery.
a When measuring, bring the 2) Tighten the mounting bolts in the order of
crankshaft to the front or rear the numbers shown in the figure.
side so that an error will not be 3 Mounting bolt:
caused by the end play. 77 ± 12 Nm {7.9 ± 1.2 kgm}
2] Rotate the flywheel by 1 turn, and
measure the difference between the
by the dial gauge.
10 PC300, 350-8
3) After installing the flywheel housing, mea- q Measuring facial runout

sure the radial runout and facial runout 1] Similarly to measurement of the radial
with tool [4]. runout, set the probe of the dial
a Radial runout: Max. 0.20 mm gauge perpendicular to the end face
a Facial runout: Max. 0.20 mm of the flywheel housing.
a When measuring, bring the
q Measuring radial runout crankshaft to the front or rear
1] Install tool [4] to the crankshaft end. side so that an error will not be
2] Set the probe of the dial gauge per- caused by the end play.
pendicular to the spigot joint portion 2] Set the dial gauge reading to "0",
of the flywheel housing. rotate the crankshaft by 1 turn, and
3] Set the dial gauge reading to "0", measure the difference between the
rotate the crankshaft by 1 turn, and lowest and highest values indicated
measure the difference between the by the dial gauge.
by the dial gauge.
a After the crankshaft is rotated by 1
turn, check that the dial gauge indi-
cates the value at the start of rotation.
PC300, 350-8 11
Removal and installation of 8. Remove air conditioner compressor (10) and

cylinder head assembly 1 bracket together and move them to a place
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
1 795-799-8150 Remover q 1
B 2 795-799-6700 Puller t 1
3 760-331-1110 Wrench q 1
Removal
k Disconnect the negative terminal (–) of the

battery before starting with the work. 9. Disconnect hoses (11) and (12) and tubes (13)
and (14). [*3]
1. Drain the engine coolant.
10. Remove the fuel filter and corrosion resistor
6 Coolant: Approx. 36 l head assembly (15).
3. Remove clamps (1) and (2), U-bolt (3), and air

5. Remove belt cover (6) and fan guard (7).
11. Remove brackets (16) and (17). [*4]
12. Remove supply pump outlet high-pressure

pipe (18). [*5] [*6]
13. Disconnect connectors CYL1 and CYL2 (19),

CP3 (20), and FUEL (21).
7. Loosen air conditioner compressor belt (9) and

remove it. [*2]
12 PC300, 350-8
14. Remove air intake connector (22) and air 19. Disconnect drain tube (35).
heater together.
20. Remove common rail (36). [*5]
15. Disconnect connectors AMBAIR (23), BOOST

(24), CLY3 and CYL4 (25), and CYL5 and 21. Remove clamps (37) and (38).
CYL6 (26).
22. Disconnect hoses (39) – (42) and tube (43).
16. Remove bracket (27).
23. Remove block (44).
17. Remove high-pressure pipes (28) – (33).

[*5] [*6] 24. Remove clamp (46). [*7]
18. Remove bracket (34). 25. Remove U-clamp (47) and U-bolts (48) and
(49). [*8]
26. Remove muffler (50) and joint (51). [*9]
PC300, 350-8 13
27. Remove clamp (52). [*10] 34. Remove cap (62) of front gear cover.
28. Loosen clamp (53). [*11]
29. Remove tube (54) and hose together.
30. Remove heat insulation covers (55), (56), and

(57).
31. Disconnect lubrication hoses (58) and lubrica-

tion tube (59). [*12]
35. Rotate the crankshaft forward to set stamp (a)

of supply pump drive gear (63) to the top and
set the No. 1 cylinder to the compression top
dead center (TDC).
32. Sling the turbocharger and exhaust manifold

assembly temporarily.
33. Remove 12 mounting bolts (60) and turbo-

charger and exhaust manifold assembly (61).
[*13]
4 Turbocharger and exhaust manifold
assembly: 35 kg
36. Disconnect hoses (64) and (65) and remove
cylinder head cover (66).
14 PC300, 350-8
37. Remove 12 bolts (67) and rocker arm assem- 39. Remove the fuel injector assembly according
blies (68). [*14] to the following procedure. [*15]
a Loosen the locknut and then loosen the 1) Clean the inlet connector carefully so that
adjustment screw by 2 – 3 turns so that an mud, etc. sticking around it will not enter
excessive force will not be applied to the its hole.
push rod when the rocker arm is installed. 2) Remove retainer (70).
3) Tighten tool B1 into inlet connector (71)
38. Remove crossheads (69). [*14] and remove the inlet connector.
a Record the position of each crosshead a Before removing retainer (71) of the
and the positions of holes (a) and (b) for No. 6 cylinder, remove rear engine
the valve. hanging plate (72).
4) Loosen the upper nut and disconnect

injector wiring harness (73). [*16]
PC300, 350-8 15
5) Remove bolt (74) and holder (75). 41. Remove 7 mounting bolts (78) and rocker
housing assembly (79). [*18]
6) Using tool B2, pull up fuel injector assem-

bly (76). 42. Remove 26 mounting bolts (80) and cylinder
a Do not pry up the injector top. head assembly (81). [*19]
4 Cylinder head assembly: 85 kg
40. Remove 12 push rods (77). [*17]
16 PC300, 350-8
Installation
Carry out installation in the reverse order to

removal.
[*1]
a Tighten the hose clamps before and after the
air intake tube to the following torque.
3 Hose clamp:
9.8 ± 0.5 Nm {1 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*2]
ing and adjusting, "Testing and adjusting air
conditioner compressor belt." 5) Connect the engine wiring harness. At this
time, take care not to connect the wiring
[*3] harness in reverse.
a Clean the inside of the hose connector and 6) Start the engine and check that fuel does
insert the connector securely. not leak.
For the testing procedure, see Testing and
[*4] adjusting, “Testing fuel system for leak-
a Tighten bracket (16) to the following torque. age”.
3 Mounting bolt: a Replace relief valve (36b), if necessary,
43 ± 6 Nm {4.4 ± 0.6 kgm} according to the following procedure.
[*5] 1) Before removing the relief valve (36b),
a Do not remove fuel pressure sensor (36a) from remove mud etc. from around it thoroughly
common rail (36) for a purpose other than and clean it.
replacement. 2) Remove the relief valve (36b).
a Once the fuel pressure sensor is removed from 3) If the leakage from the relief valve
the common rail, be sure to replace it. exceeds the specified value, do not reuse
a Replace fuel pressure sensor (36a), if neces- it.
sary, according to the following procedure. 4) Check that high-pressure seal surfaces
1) Before removing the fuel pressure sensor, (a) of the relief valve and rail are free from
remove mud etc. from around it thoroughly damage.
and clean it. 5) Check that the adapter (36c) is free from
2) Remove the fuel pressure sensor. flaw.
3) Check the fuel pressure sensor connector 6) Install the relief valve.
for crack, breakage, damage of the seal, 2 Threaded part of relief valve:
foreign matter on the pin and corrosion, Gear oil (#90)
bend and breakage of the pin. 3 Relief valve:
4) Install a new fuel pressure sensor. 100 ± 4 Nm {10.2 ± 0.4 kgm}
2 Threaded part of fuel pressure Excessive tightening can cause leak-
sensor: Gear oil (#90) age. Take care not to tighten too
3 Fuel pressure sensor: strongly.
70 ± 5 Nm {7.1 ± 0.5 kgm} 7) If adapter (36c) was removed, use a new
copper washer (36d) and coat the adapter
with gear oil #90 and tighten it.
2 Threaded part of adapter:
Gear oil (#90)
3 Adapter:
37 ± 4 Nm {3.8 ± 0.4 kgm}
8) Start the engine and check that there is no
leakage.
For the testing procedure, see Testing and
adjusting, “Testing fuel system for leak-
age”.
PC300, 350-8 17
6) Tighten drain tube (35) permanently.

3 Joint bolt:
24 ± 4Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
7) Tighten the mounting bolts of common rail
(36) permanently.
3 Mounting bolt:
43.1 ± 4.0 Nm {4.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
8) Tighten clamp (82) permanently.
a Before installing the high-pressure pipe, check

it for the following defects. If there are any of
these defects, it can cause fuel leakage.
Accordingly, replace the high-pressure pipe.
q Check the taper seal of the connecting part
(Part (a): Part of 2 mm from the end) for visible
lengthwise slit (b) and dent (c).
q Check part (d) (end of the taper seal: Part at 2
mm from the end) for stepped-type wear [*6]
(fatigue) which your nail can feel. a When installing the No. 1 – No. 6 injector high-
pressure pipes and supply pump outlet high-
pressure pipe, set the slits of the bellows at
both ends of them in the following directions.
q No. 1 – No. 6 injector high-pressure pipes
(injector side): Down
(Common rail side): Out
q Supply pump outlet high-pressure pipe
(supply pump side and
common rail side): Out
[*7]
a Tighten the clamp to the following torque.
3
1st time: 39.2 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}
a Install the common rail and high-pressure pipe 2nd time: 68.6 – 122.5 Nm {7 – 12.5 kgm}
1) Tighten the mounting bolts of common rail [*8]
(36) temporarily (with the fingers) a Tighten the U-clamp and U-bolt to the following
2) Tighten drain tube (35) temporarily. torque.
3) Install supply pump outlet high-pressure 3
pipe (18). U-clamp: 14.7 – 44.1 Nm {1.5 – 4.5 kgm}

3 Sleeve nut: U-bolt: 9.8 – 14.7 Nm {1.0 – 1.5 kgm}
37.3 ± 4 Nm {3.8 ± 0.4 kgm}
4) Install bracket (17) and tighten clamp (82) [*9]
temporarily. a Tighten the clamp of the turbocharger connect-
5) Install 6 high-pressure pipes (28) between ing part of the joint to the following torque.
the common rail and injectors. 3 Clamp: 6.9 – 8.8 Nm {0.7 – 0.9 kgm}
a Install the high-pressure pipes of the

No. 1, No. 3, and No. 5 cylinders [*10]
while the injector wiring harness con- a Tighten the clamp to the following torque.
nectors are disconnected. 3 Clamp: 7 ± 1.1 Nm {0.7 ± 0.1 kgm}
3 Sleeve nut:
37.3 ± 4 Nm {3.8 ± 0.4 kgm}
18 PC300, 350-8
[*11] [*13]
a Tighten the clamp according to the following a Tighten the exhaust manifold mounting bolts
procedure. according to the following procedure.
1) Set punch mark (a) as shown in the figure 3
and set bridge (83) under band (84). 1st time: Tighten all the bolts to 23.5 ± 4 Nm
2) Tighten the bolt so that dimension (b) will {2.4 ± 0.41 kgm} in the order of the
be 8 – 10 mm. numbers shown in the figure.
3) Tighten the bolt to 16 – 17 Nm {1.6 – 1.7 2nd time: Tighten only bolts 1 – 4 in the figure
kgm}. to 23.5 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.41 kgm}.
3rd time: Tighten all the bolts to 43.1 ± 6 Nm
{4.4 ± 0.61 kgm} in the order of the
numbers shown in the figure.
4th time: Tighten only bolts 1 – 4 in the figure
to 43.1 ± 6 Nm {4.4 ± 0.61 kgm}.
[*12]
a Tighten the lubrication hose and lubrication
tube to the following torque.
3 Lubrication hose flare nut:
19.6 – 28.4 Nm {2.0 – 2.9 kgm}
Lubrication tube mounting bolt: [*14]
7 ± 1.1 Nm {0.7 ± 0.1 kgm} a When installing the crosshead and rocker arm
assembly, observe the following precautions.
a Install the crosshead so that parts (a) and (b)
on its back side will be at the positions
checked when removed.
a When installing a new crosshead, you do not
need to take care of the positions of parts (a)
and (b).
PC300, 350-8 19
a After checking that the ball of adjustment

screw (85) is set in the socket of push rod (77)
securely, tighten mounting bolt (86).
3 Mounting bolt:
64.7 ± 4.9 Nm {6.6 ± 0.5 kgm}
a After tightening the mounting bolt, adjust the
valve clearance. For details, see Testing and
adjusting, “Adjusting valve clearance.”
4) Install holder (75) and tighten bolts (74) by

3 – 4 turns with the fingers.
[*15]
a Install the fuel injector assembly according to
the following procedure.
a Check that the injector sleeve is free from flaw
and dirt.
1) Fit the gasket and O-ring to the injector.
2) Apply engine oil (EO15W-40) to the O-ring
of the injector and cylinder head side.
3) While matching projection (a) of injector 5) Apply engine oil (EO15W-40) to the O-ring
(76) to notch (b) of the holder, insert injec- of inlet connector (71) and cylinder head
tor (76) in the cylinder head. side.
a Direct fuel inlet hole (c) of the injector a When replacing the injector, replace the
toward the air intake manifold. inlet connector, too.
a Check the inlet connector for the following
items. If it is defective, replace it.
a] If there are burrs or deformation at
the inlet or outlet of the connector, do
not use the inlet connector.
b] If the edge filter is clogged or dirty or
there is sediment in it, do not use the
inlet connector.
c] If the O-ring is broken or deteriorated,
do not use the inlet connector.
d] If the sealing surface of the outlet side
is worn, in contact unevenly or has a
trace of leakage, do not use the inlet
connector.
If high-pressure fuel leaks, the seat
surface is eroded and has fine
streaks or flaws. If there are such
streaks or flaws, replace the connec-
tor and injector.
20 PC300, 350-8
[*19]
a Install the cylinder head assembly according to
the following procedure.
1) Measure stem length (a) of each cylinder
head mounting bolt and check that it is
shorter than the using limit.
q Using limit length of bolt: 162.6 mm
a If a bolt is longer than the using
limit, do not reuse it but replace
it.
[*17]
a Check that the push rod end is in the tappet.
2 Push rod: Engine oil (EO15W-40)
[*18]
a Tighten the rocker housing mounting bolts in
the order of the numbers shown in the figure.
3 Mounting bolt:
24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
2) Check that there is no dirt and foreign

matter on the cylinder head mounting sur-
face and in the cylinders and then set cyl-
inder head gasket (87).
a Check that the gasket is set to the
holes of the cylinder block.
22 PC300, 350-8
3) Install cylinder head assembly (81) to the a When not using tool B3 at the 5th time,
cylinder block. make a mark on the cylinder head and
each bolt with paint and then tighten the
bolt by 120° ± 5°.
4) Tighten the mounting bolts at least 2 – 3

turns with the fingers.
2 Threads and head seat of each q Refilling with coolant
bolt: Engine oil (EO15W-40) Add coolant through the coolant filler to the
5) Tighten the bolts in the order of the num- specified level. Run the engine to circulate the
bers shown in the figure. coolant through the system. Then, check the
1st time: 150 ± 9.8 Nm {15.3 ± 1.0 kgm} coolant level again.
5
2nd time: Return all bolts 360°
Coolant: 36 l
3rd time: 115 ± 4.9 Nm {11.7 ± 0.5 kgm}
4th time: Check tightening torque of
115 ± 4.9 Nm {11.7 ± 0.5 kgm}
5th time: 120° ± 5° (Tighten with tool B3)
PC300, 350-8 23
Removal and installation of 8. Remove seal (5).

radiator assembly 1
9. Disconnect hoses (6) – (9) from the top of the
Removal radiator. [*1]
1. Open the engine hood and sling the radiator

temporarily.
2. Pull out pin (1).
3. Remove bolt (2).
4. Set hole (3) to the position of bolt (2) to fix the

engine hood.
10. Remove 2 mounting bolts (10).
5. Remove the bottom cover of the radiator.
6. Drain the coolant.

6 Coolant: 36 l
11. Lift off radiator assembly (11).
4
7. Disconnect hose (4) from the bottom of the Radiator assembly: 30 kg
radiator. [*1]
24 PC300, 350-8
Installation
q Carry out installation in the reverse order to

removal.
[*1]
a Apply ThreeBond 4324 or equivalent to the
adapters of hoses (4), (7), (8), and (9).
q Refilling with coolant

Add coolant through the coolant filler to the
specified level. Run the engine to circulate the
coolant through the system. Then, check the
coolant level again.
5 Coolant: 36 l
PC300, 350-8 25
Removal and installation of 8. Remove drain plug (5) from the bottom of the
hydraulic oil cooler assembly 1 hydraulic oil cooler to drain the oil from the pip-
ing.
Removal
9. Disconnect tube (6).
and stop the engine. Then, loosen the
hydraulic oil filler cap slowly to release the
internal pressure.
1. Drain the hydraulic oil.

6 Hydraulic oil: 248 l
2. Remove the bottom cover of the hydraulic oil

cooler.
3. Open the cover at the front of the hydraulic oil

cooler.
10. Remove seal (7).
4. Open the engine hood and sling the hydraulic
oil cooler temporarily.
5. Remove the mounting bolts of cover (1) and

move the cover down.
6. Pull out pin (2).
7. Set hole (3) to the position of bolt (4) to fix the

engine hood.
11. Disconnect tube (8) from the top of the hydrau-

lic oil cooler.
26 PC300, 350-8
13. Remove mounting bolts (10). Installation

14. Remove 2 wing screws (11) from the screen. q Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
q Refilling with oil

Add oil through the oil filler to the specified
level. Run the engine to circulate the oil
through the system. Then, check the oil level
again.
15. Lift off hydraulic oil cooler assembly (12).

4 Hydraulic oil cooler assembly: 50 kg
PC300, 350-8 27
Removal and installation of Installation

aftercooler assembly 1
Removal removal.
1. Open the front cover of the aftercooler. [*1]

a Apply ThreeBond 2720F or equivalent to the
2. Disconnect connector M06 (1). adapters of hoses (4) and (5).
3. Disconnect hose (2) and remove reservoir tank

(3).
4. Disconnect hoses (4) and (5). [*1]
5. Remove 4 mounting bolts (6) and aftercooler

assembly (7).
28 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of 5. Remove air intake connector (5).

engine and hydraulic pump
6. Remove belt cover (6) and fan guard (7).
assembly 1
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
796-460-1210 Oil stopper q 1

C
796-770-1320 Adapter q 1
Removal

battery. 7. Disconnect hoses (8), (9), and (10) from the
k Lower the work equipment to the ground top of the radiator. [*2]
internal pressure.
a Attach an identification tag to each piping to
avoid a mistake in the position of installation
later.
1. Remove the hydraulic tank strainer and stop

the flow of oil using tool C.
a When not using tool C, remove the drain
plug to drain oil from the hydraulic tank
and piping.
6 Hydraulic tank: Approx. 248 l
9. Loosen bolt (12) and remove air conditioner

compressor belt (13). [*3]
10. Remove air conditioner compressor (14) and

bracket together and move them to a place
11. Disconnect terminal M23 (15).

6 Coolant: Approx. 36 l
4. Remove clamps (1) and (2), U-bolt (3), and air

PC300, 350-8 29
12. Disconnect fuel hoses (16) and (17). 18. Disconnect heater hoses (28) and (29).
19. Disconnect B-terminal M21 (30), R-terminal

M18 (31), and E-terminal M22 (32).
13. Disconnect the following connectors.

q CE02 (18)
q CE03 (19)
q P44 (20) 20. Disconnect B-terminal M20 (33) and connector
q E06/WIF (21) M17 (34).
14. Remove clamps (22) and (23).
15. Disconnect ground wire (24).
21. Remove the bottom cover of the radiator and

disconnect hose (35). [*6]
16. Remove clamp (25). [*4]
17. Loosen clamp (26) and remove tube (27) and

hose together. [*5]
30 PC300, 350-8
22. Open cover (36). 27. Disconnect hoses (45) – (52).
23. Remove the divider board between the engine

and hydraulic pump.
24. Remove covers (37) – (40).
28. Disconnect tube (53).

a Prepare a container to receive hydraulic
oil which will leak.
25. Disconnect hoses (41) and (42) from the

engine oil filter.
29. Remove 4 engine mounting bolts (54).
26. Disconnect connectors V19 (43) and V11 (44).
PC300, 350-8 31
30. Lift off engine and hydraulic pump assembly Installation

(55).
a Check that all the wires and pipes Carry out installation in the reverse order to
between the chassis and the engine and removal.
hydraulic pump assembly are discon-
nected. [*1]
a While removing the assembly, take care a Tighten the hose clamps before and after the
that it will not interfere with the chassis. air intake tube to the following torque.
4 Engine and hydraulic pump assem- 3 Hose clamp:
bly: 1,200 kg 9.8 ± 0.5 Nm {1 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*2] [*6]
a Apply ThreeBond 4324 or equivalent to the
adapter of the hose.
[*3]
ing and adjusting, “Testing and adjusting air
conditioner compressor belt”.
[*4]
a Tighten the clamp to the following torque.
3 Clamp: 7 ± 1.1 Nm {0.7 ± 0.1 kgm}
[*5]
a Tighten the clamp according to the following
procedure.
1) Set bridge (83) under band (84).
2) Tighten the bolt so that dimension (a) will
be 8 – 10 mm.
3) Tighten the bolt to 16 – 17 Nm {1.6 – 1.7
kgm}.
q Refilling with oil and coolant

Add oil and coolant through the oil filler and
coolant filler to the specified level respec-
tively. Run the engine to circulate the oil and
oil and coolant levels again.
Coolant: 36 l
32 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 33
SEN02636-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
34
SEN02637-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Power train
Removal and installation of final drive assembly ............................................................................................ 2
Disassembly and assembly of final drive assembly........................................................................................ 3
Removal and installation of swing motor and swing machinery assembly ....................................................11
Disassembly and assembly of swing motor and swing machinery assembly ............................................... 12
Removal and installation of swing circle assembly ....................................................................................... 19
PC300, 350-8 1
Removal and installation of final

drive assembly 1
Removal
1. Remove the sprocket, referring to the
"Removal and installation of sprocket" section
in this manual.
k Lower the work equipment safely to the
ground. Stop the engine and loosen the
oil filler cap on the hydraulic tank to
release pressure inside.
2. Remove cover (1).
Installation
q Installation is done in the reverse order of
removal.
[*1]
3 Mounting bolt: 490 – 608 Nm {50 – 62 kgm}
q Refilling with oil

Refill hydraulic oil through the oil filler port to
the specified level. Let the oil circulate in the
hydraulic system by starting the engine. Then
3. Disconnect drain hose (2), travel speed shifting check the oil level again.
hose (3) and motor hoses (4) and (5).
q Air bleeding
Refer to the "Bleeding air from various parts"
section in the Testing and adjusting chapter of
this manual.
4. Remove 21 mounting bolts and then lift off final

drive assembly (6). [*1]
a Be careful so that the nipple sealing sur-
face on the hose mounting block may not
be damaged.
a When lifting off the final drive assembly,
do not use a tapped hole for lifting the
cover.
4 Final drive assembly: 500 kg
2 PC300, 350-8
Disassembly and assembly of 2) Remove cover (1) using eyebolt [2].

final drive assembly 1
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R

796-627-1620 Wrench 1
1
796-427-1140 Pin 3
01314-20612 Screw 3
796T-627-1630 Push tool t 1 Q
790-101-2510 Block t 1 3. Spacer
791-830-1320 Rod t 2 Remove spacer (2).
D
01580-11613 Nut t 2
2
790-101-2570 Washer t 2
01643-31645 Washer t 2
790-101-2570 Jack assembly t 1
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
3 791-508-1510 Installer t 1
4 790-331-1110 Wrench q 1
Disassembly
1. Oil draining
Remove drain plug and drain oil from final 4. No.1 carrier assembly
drive case. 1) Remove No.1 carrier assembly (3).
6 Final drive case: Approx. 8.5 l
2. Cover
1) Remove the mounting bolts.
Then, using forcing screws [1], separate
cover (1) from the case.
PC300, 350-8 3
2) Disassemble No. 1 carrier assembly as 8. Ring gear

follows. Remove ring gear (14) using eyebolt [3].
1] Insert pin (4) and drive shaft (5) out of
carrier (6).
a After removing the shaft, remove
pin (4).
2] Remove thrust washer (7), gear (8),
bearing (9), and thrust washer (10).
9. No.2 carrier assembly

1) Remove No.2 carrier assembly (15).
5. No.1 sun gear shaft

Remove No. 1 sun gear shaft (11).
6. No.2 sun gear shaft

Remove No. 2 sun gear shaft (12).
2) Disassemble No. 2 carrier assembly as

follows.
1] Insert pin (16) and drive shaft (17) out
of carrier (18).
pin (16).
2] Remove thrust washer (19), gear (20),
bearing (21), and thrust washer (22).
7. Thrust washer
Remove thrust washer (13).
4 PC300, 350-8
10. Nut 2) Disassemble the hub assembly as follows.

1) Remove lockplate (23). 1] Remove floating seal (26).
2) Use tool D1 to remove nut (24). 2] Remove bearings (27) and (28) from
hub (29).
11. Hub assembly

1) Using eyebolts [4], remove hub assembly 3) Remove floating seal (30) from travel
(25) from travel motor. motor (31).
PC300, 350-8 5
Assembly 3) Using tool D3, install floating seal (30)

a Clean all parts and check for dirt or damage. onto travel motor (31).
Coat the sliding surfaces of all parts with a The procedure for installation is the
engine oil before installing. same as in Step 2) above.
1. Hub assembly
1) Using the push tool, press-fit bearings (27)
and (28) to hub (29).
4) Using eyebolts [4], set hub assembly (25)

onto the travel motor. Then tap the bear-
ing using the push tool to press-fit it.
2) Use tool D3 to install floating seal (26).

a Remove all oil and grease from the
O-ring and O-ring contact surface and
dry up these sections before installing
the floating seal.
a After installing the floating seal, check
that the angle of the floating seal is
within 1 mm.
a After installing the floating seal, coat
the sliding surface thinly with engine
oil (EO30).
2. Nut
1) Install nut as follows.
1] Use tool D2 to press the inner lace of
bearing (27).
a Pressing force
12.7 – 16.7 kN {1.3 – 1.7 ton}
a Rotate the hub 2 – 3 turns before
pressing the bearing inner race.
6 PC300, 350-8
2] Under the above condition, measure 7] Install lockplate (23).

dimension (a).
a When installing the lockplate, avoid notch

3] Measure thickness (b) off the inde- (j) of the travel motor and fit it to the spline
pendent nut (24). totally (under the condition of (k))
4] Determine Calculate a – b = c 2 Thread of mounting bolt:
5] Using tool D1, tighten nut (24) until Adhesive (LT-2)
dimension (d) becomes the value of 3 Mounting bolt:
(c) calculated above. 49 – 74 Nm {6 – 7.5 kgm}
a Do not apply the adhesive (LT-2) to the
tapped portion of the nut.
6] Using push-pull scale [5], measure

tangential force of the hub to the
motor case in the rotation direction. 3. No.2 carrier assembly
a Tangential force: 1) Assemble No. 2 carrier assembly as fol-
Max. 490 N {50 kg} lows.
a The tangential force denotes the a Replace thrust washers (19) and (22)
maximum force at start of the as well as pin (16) with new ones.
rotation. a There are traces of expansion on the
end surface of carrier side hole (e)
which were originally caused when
the pin was inserted. Make such the
end surfaces are smooth enough
before reassembly.
1] Assemble bearing (21) to gear (20), fit
top and bottom thrust washers (19)
and (22) and then set the gear
assembly on carrier (18).
PC300, 350-8 7
2] Align the position of pin holes on the 2) Install No.2 carrier assembly (15).
shaft and carrier, then tap with a plas- a Align the position so that the 3 tips of
tic hammer to install shaft (17). the gear shafts of carrier assembly
a Install the shaft, rotating the plan- (15) enter the 3 hollows in the end
etary gear. Take care so that face of the motor case, then install.
thrust washer is not damaged.
3] Insert pin (16).
a When inserting the pin, take care
that the 3 claws (parts (f)) on the
periphery of the pin will not be
placed on the thin parts of the
carrier (parts (g)).
Since the thin parts may be on
the opposite side, confirm them
on each carrier.
If there is a groove, avoid placing
the claws on that groove.
4. Ring gear
Fit the O-ring to the hub. Using eyebolts [3],
sling ring gear (14) and install it to the hub,
matching their bolt holes to each other.
a Remove all grease and oil from the mating
surface of the ring gear and hub.
a Do not put any gasket sealant on the mat-
ing surface of the ring gear and hub under
any circumstances.
a After inserting the pin, caulk the

pin portion of the carrier.
a After assembling the carrier
assembly, check that gear (20)
rotates smoothly.
8 PC300, 350-8
5. Thrust washer 3] Insert pin (4).

Install thrust washer (13). a When inserting the pin, take care
that the 3 claws (parts (f)) on the
6. No.2 sun gear periphery of the pin will not be
Install No. 2 sun gear (12). placed on the thin parts of the
carrier (parts (g)).
Since the thin parts may be on
the opposite side, confirm them
on each carrier.
If there is a groove, avoid placing
the claws on that groove.

1) Assemble No. 1 carrier assembly as fol-
lows.
a Replace thrust washers (7) and (10)
as well as pin (4) with new ones (For
pin (4), see the next page).
a There are remains of caulking when a After inserting the pin, caulk the
the pin is inserted at the end face of pin portion of the carrier.
hole (h) at the side of the carrier. a After assembling the carrier
Remove the caulked metal from the assembly, check that gear (8)
inside diameter of the hole before rotates smoothly.
starting to assemble.
1] Assemble bearing (9) to gear (8), fit
top and bottom thrust washers (7)
and (10) and then set the gear
assembly on carrier (6).
2) Install No.2 carrier assembly (3).
2] Align the position of pin holes on the

shaft and carrier, then tap with a plas-
tic hammer to install shaft (5).
a Install the shaft, rotating the plan-
etary gear. Take care so that
thrust washer is not damaged.
PC300, 350-8 9
8. No.1 sun gear shaft 10. Cover

Assemble No. 1 sun gear shaft (11). 1) Using eyebolts [2], install cover (1).
2 Cover mounting surface:
Gasket sealant (LG-6)
9. Spacer
Install spacer (2).
a After installing the spacer, measure the 2)Tighten the mounting bolts according to
dimension (i). If the dimension (i) is 15 mm the following procedure.
or greater, the assembly is not done cor- 3 Mounting bolt:
rectly. Check the assembly procedure 1st step : 98 Nm {10 kgm}
again. 2nd step: Using tool D4, retighten each
mounting bolt by 100 – 110°.
a If tool D4 is not available, make a
match mark on the cover and the bolt
with paint and then tighten the bolt by
100 – 110°.
11. Refilling with oil

Tighten the drain plug and feed engine oil
through oil filler.
5 Final drive case: 12 l
a Do a final check of the oil level at the
determined position after installing the
final drive assembly to the chassis.
10 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of swing 5. Lift and remove swing motor and swing
motor and swing machinery assembly machinery assembly (7).
a When lifting off the swing motor and swing
Removal machinery assembly for removal, do so
k Release the remaining pressure in the slowly so that the hoses and other parts
hydraulic circuit. For details, see Testing may not be damaged.
and adjusting, "Release of remaining pres- a Take care in the lift until you can pull out
sure in hydraulic circuit". the pilot.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground 4 Swing motor and swing machinery
for safety. After stopping the engine, loosen assembly: 550 kg
the oil filler cap on the hydraulic tank to
release the residual pressure inside the
tank and move the work equipment lock
lever to the LOCK position.
1. Disconnect 5 swing motor hoses (1) through (5).

q (1): Between the swing motor and con-
trol valve (port MA)
q (2): Between the swing motor and con-
trol valve (port MB)
q (3): Suction hose (port S)
q (4): Drain hose (port T)
q (5): Pilot hose for relieving swing brake
(port B)
2. Disconnect arm cylinder hoses (6).

Installation
removal.
[*1]
3 Mounting bolt:
824 – 1,030 Nm {84 – 105 kgm}
q Refilling with oil (hydraulic tank)

check the oil level again.
3. Remove the mounting bolts. q Air bleeding

Bleed the air from the circuit between the valve
4. Tighten a forcing screw in position (a) shown in and the hydraulic cylinder. For details, see
the following figure to separate the swing Testing and adjusting, "Bleeding air from vari-
motor and swing machinery assembly. [*1] ous parts".
PC300, 350-8 11
Disassembly and assembly of 3. No.1 sun gear

swing motor and swing machinery Remove No. 1 sun gear shaft (2).
assembly 1
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
1 796T-626-1110 Push tool q 1 Q

3 790-201-2480 Push tool t 1
790-101-5401 Push tool kit q 1
E 790-101-5521 • Plate 1
4
790-101-5421 • Grip 1
01010-51240 • Bolt 1
5 793T-815-1110 Push tool t Q 1) Remove No.1 carrier assembly (3).
Disassembly
1. Oil drain
Loosen the drain plug and drain oil from the
swing machinery case.
6 Swing machinery: 13.4 l
2. Swing motor assembly

1) Set the swing motor and swing machinery
assembly on block [1].
2) Remove the 6 mounting bolts to remove
swing motor assembly (1).
2) Disassemble No. 1 carrier assembly as
follows. Remove snap ring (4) first, and
then remove shaft (5), gear (6), bearing
(7), thrust washer (8) and plate (9).
12 PC300, 350-8
5. Ring gear 2) Disassemble No. 2 carrier assembly as

Remove the mounting bolts to remove ring follows.
gear (10). 1] Insert pin (14) and drive shaft (15) out
of carrier (16).
pin (14).
2] Remove thrust washer (17), gear
(18), bearing (19), and thrust washer
(20).
3] Remove plate (21).
6. No.2 sun gear

Remove No. 2 sun gear (11).
8. Shaft assembly
1) Remove 12 mounting bolts (23).
2) Set the shaft and case assembly on the
press and then, using push tool [2],
remove shaft assembly (24) from case
assembly (25).

1) Remove mounting bolt (12) and No. 2 car-
rier assembly (13).
PC300, 350-8 13
3) Disassemble the shaft assembly as fol- Assembly

lows. a Clean all related parts and check that there is
i) Using push tool [3], remove cover no dust or damage on the surface. Coat sliding
assembly (26) and bearing (27) from surfaces with engine oil and then assemble the
shaft (28). parts.
ii) Remove oil seal (29) from cover (30).
1. Bearing
Using push tool E3 [4], press fit bearing (27) to
case (32).
a Use a new bearing.
a Press fitting force (Reference value):
0 – 26.4 kN {0 – 2,690 kg}
9. Bearing
Using push tool, take bearing (31) out of case (32).
2. Cover assembly
1) Using push tool E4, press fit oil seal (29)
to cover (30).
a Use a new oil seal.
a When not using push tool E4, use
another push tool to push the frame
around the oil seal evenly.
a Take care that oil seal (29) will not
slant.
2 Periphery of oil seal:
a Take care that the gasket sealant
(LG-6) will not stick to the oil seal lip
and shaft.
14 PC300, 350-8
2) Install cover assembly (26) to case (32) 3) Using push tool E1 [6], press fit bearing
and tighten mounting bolts (23). (31).
a Match the oil passage of cover a Use a new bearing.
assembly (26) to hole (A) of case (32). a Press the bearing inner race and
2 Cover fitting face: outer race simultaneously. Do not
Gasket sealant (LG-6) press only the inner race.
a Take care that the gasket sealant will a After press fitting the bearing, check
not stick to hole (A). that the case rotates smoothly.
3 Mounting bolt: a Press fitting force (Reference value):
59 – 74 Nm {6.0 – 7.5 kgm} Inner race side:
2 Oil seal lip: Grease (G2-LI) 15.3 – 43.2 kN {1,560 – 4,410 kg}
Outer race side:
0 – 16.2 kN {0 – 1,650 kg}
3. Case assembly
1) Reverse case assembly (25) and set it to
shaft (28). 4. No.2 carrier assembly
a Take care extremely not to damage 1) Assemble No. 2 carrier assembly as fol-
the oil seal. lows.
2) Using push tool E5 [5] and guide [7], press a There are traces of expansion on the
fit the bearing inner race. end surface of carrier side hole (h)
a First, using push tool E5 [5], hit the which were originally caused when
bearing inner race with a hammer so the pin was inserted. Make such the
that the shaft will not fall, and then set end surfaces are smooth enough
it to the press to press fit. before reassembly.
a Press fitting force (Reference value): 1] Assemble plate (21) to carrier (16).
39 – 110 kN {3,980 – 11,260 kg} 2] Assemble bearing (19) to gear (18), fit
a Use guide [7] to prevent case assem- top and bottom thrust washers (17)
bly (25) from slanting. and (20) and then set the gear
a Hit the flange of case assembly (25) assembly on carrier (16).
frequently and lightly to correct the
lean of case assembly (25). In partic-
ular, adjust the flange so that oil seal
mating face (B) of the shaft will be at
the center oil seal (29).
PC300, 350-8 15
3] Match the pin hole of shaft (15) to that 5. Set No. 2 carrier assembly (13) and tighten
of the carrier and install the shaft by mounting bolt (12).
hitting it lightly with a plastic hammer, 2 Thread of mounting bolt:
etc. Adhesive (LT-2)
a While rotating the planetary gear, 3 Mounting bolt:
install the shaft and take care not 343 – 427 Nm {34 – 43.5 kgm}
to damage the thrust washer.
4] Insert pin (14).
a When inserting the pin, take care
so that any of the 3 pawls on the
circumference (Portion a) may
not touch the thin-walled portion
on the carrier (Portion b). Take
care, however, that the thin-
walled portion can be on the
opposite side of the carrier,
depending on actual individual
items. Pay attention so that a pin
pawl will not come to the slender
side of the carrier any way.
5] After inserting the pin, caulk 2 places
6. No.2 sun gear
(h) around the pin.
Install No. 2 sun gear (11).
6] Check that all the gears rotate
smoothly.
a Install the No. 2 sun gear with press-fit

plate (P) down.
16 PC300, 350-8
7. Ring gear 8. No.1 carrier assembly

Install the O-ring to ring gear (10) using eyebolt 1) Assemble No. 1 carrier assembly as fol-
attached to case (29). lows.
a Degrease the mating faces of ring gear 1] Press-fit shaft (5) into the carrier in
(10) and case (29). the direction of the arrow until the
snap ring groove becomes visible.
2] After installing snap ring (4), push it
back from the opposite side until it is
fitted to face (P) of the carrier.
a At this time, take care not to push
back the snap ring too much.
aAlign the convex portion on the case

flange (Portion c) and the counter mark on
the ring gear (Portion d) in the position
illustrated in the following figure, and then
install it.
3 Final drive assembly mounting bolt:
3] Install plate (9).
245 – 309 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}
4] Install thrust washer (8), bearing (7),
gear (6), and snap ring (4).
2) Install No.1 carrier assembly (3).
PC300, 350-8 17
9. No.1 sun gear assembly 3) Install ring gear (10) and swing motor
Assemble No. 1 sun gear (2). assembly (1) to the following positions.
2 Swing motor mounting face:

a Install the No. 1 sun gear with press-fit
plate (P) down.
3 Mounting bolt:
98 – 123 Nm {10 – 12.5 kgm}
11. Refilling with oil

Tighten the drain plug and add oil through the
oil filler to the specified level.
5 Swing machinery: 13.4 l
10. Swing motor assembly

1) Set swing machinery assembly (33) to
block [1].
2) Install swing motor assembly (1).
18 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of swing

circle assembly 1
Removal
1. Disassemble the revolving frame assembly refer-
ring to the "Removal and installation of revolving
frame assembly" section in this manual.
2. Sling swing circle assembly (1) at 3 points and

remove the mounting bolt to remove the
assembly. [*1]
4 Swing circle assembly: 500 kg
Installation
removal.
[*1]
2 Threads of swing circle mounting bolt:
Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Swing circle mounting bolt:
926.7 ± 103 Nm {94.5 ± 10.5 kgm}
a Set the soft zone S mark on the inside ring of
the inner race facing the right side as shown in
the diagram. Then install to the track frame.
2 Volume charged to grease bath:
Grease (G2-LI) 33 l
PC300, 350-8 19
SEN02637-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
20
SEN02638-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Undercarriage and frame
Disassembly and assembly of carrier roller .................................................................................................... 2
Disassembly and assembly of track roller assembly ...................................................................................... 3
Disassembly and assembly of idler assembly ................................................................................................ 4
Disassembly and assembly of recoil spring .................................................................................................... 7
Removal and installation of sprocket .............................................................................................................. 9
Expansion and installation of track shoe assembly....................................................................................... 10
Removal and installation of revolving frame assembly ..................................................................................11
Removal and installation of counterweight assembly ................................................................................... 13
PC300, 350-8 1
Disassembly and assembly of a After inserting the floating seal with tool F1,
carrier roller 1 check that its slant is less than 1 mm and its
projection (a) is 5 – 7 mm.
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
1 791-430-3230 Installer t 1
F
2 791-601-1000 Oil pump assembly t 1
Disassembly
a Disassemble according to the following figure.
q Carrier roller
Assembly a Check the amount of air leakage from the seal
a Assemble according to the following figure.
with tool F2 by applying the standard pressure
a Only the precautions for assembly are
to the oil filler port.
described below.
a Check that the gauge needle does not go
down, when the following standard pressure is
applied for 10 seconds.
Standard pressure: 0.1 MPa {1 kg/cm2}
a Fill the carrier roller assembly with oil, using

tool F2, and then tighten the plug.
5 Carrier roller: 145 – 155 cc (EO30)
q Floating seal
a Before installing floating seals (7) and (8),
completely degrease both contact surfaces of
the O-ring and the floating seal (hatched area
in the illustration). Furthermore, take care so
that no dust will stick to the contact surface of
the floating seal.
2 PC300, 350-8
Disassembly and assembly of a After inserting the floating seal with tool F1,
track roller assembly 1 check that its slant is less than 1 mm and its
projection (a) is 5 – 7 mm.
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
1 796-670-1010 Installer t 1
G
Disassembly
Assembly
a Only the precautions for assembly are q Mounting roller cover mounting bolt
described below. 3 Track roller cover mounting bolt:
44.12 – 53.93 Nm {4.5 – 5.5 kgm}
q Track roller
a Check the amount of air leakage from the seal
with tool G2 by applying the standard pressure
to the oil filler port.
a Check that the gauge needle does not go
down, when the following standard pressure is
applied for 10 seconds.
Standard pressure: 0.1 MPa {1 kg/cm2}
aFill the track roller assembly with oil, using tool

G2, and tighten the plug.
5 Track roller: 250 – 280 cc (EO30)
3 Plug: 10 – 20 Nm {1 – 2 kgm}
q Floating seal
a Before installing floating seals (5) and (6),
completely degrease both contact surfaces of
the O-ring and the floating seal (hatched area
in the illustration). Furthermore, take care so
that no dust will stick to the contact surface of
the floating seal.
PC300, 350-8 3
Disassembly and assembly of 4. Remove floating seal (6) on the opposite side
idler assembly 1 from idler (4), shaft (5) and support assembly
(7).
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
1 796-570-1020 Installer t 1
H
Disassembly
5. Remove dowel pin (8) to remove support (7)

from shaft (5).
6. Remove bushings (9) and (10) from idler (4).
1. Remove dowel pin (1) to remove support (2).
2. Remove floating seal (3) from support (2) and

idler (4).
3. Remove idler (4) from shaft (5) and support

assembly (7).
a Oil of 230 ± 10 cc is in the idler. Drain it at
this time or spread cloths to absorb it.
4 PC300, 350-8
Assembly a Before installing the floating seal, com-

1. Press fit bushings (9) and (10) to idler (4). pletely degrease both contact surfaces of
the O-ring and the floating seal (hatched
2. Fit O-ring and install support (7) to shaft (5) area in the illustration). Furthermore, take
using dowel pin (8). care so that no dust will stick to the con-
tact surface of the floating seal.
a After inserting the floating seal, check that
inclination of the seal is less than 1 mm
and that protrusion (a) of the seal remains
within the range of 5 – 7 mm.
a Be sure to assemble shaft (5) with the UP

marking facing upward.
3. Using tool H1, install floating seal (6) to idler

(4), shaft (5) and support (7) assembly.
4. Assemble shaft (5) and support (7) assembly

to idler (4).
PC300, 350-8 5
5. Using tool H1, install floating seal (3) to idler 6. Install O-ring, then install support (2) using
(4), shaft (2) and support (7) assembly. dowel pin (1).
a Caulk the pin of the support after insertion.
7. Using tool H2, fill the idler assembly with oil

and tighten the plug.
5 Idler:
Approximately 230 ± 10 cc (EO30)
3 Plug: 130 – 180 Nm {13 – 18 kgm}
a Coat the sliding surface of the floating seal

with oil, and be careful not to let any dirt or
dust get stuck to it.
a Remove all grease and oil from the con-
tact surfaces of the O-ring and the floating
seal.
6 PC300, 350-8
Disassembly and assembly of 1. Remove piston assembly (2) from recoil spring
recoil spring 1 assembly (1).
Special tools 2. Disassembly of recoil spring assembly

1) Set recoil spring assembly (1) to tool.
k The spring is under large installed
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
Part number Part name load, so be very sure to set the tool
properly. Failure to do this is dan-
gerous.
791-685-8006 Compressor t 1
a Installed load of spring:
791-635-3160 Extension t 1 208.74 kN {21,287 kg}
1 Cylinder
790-101-1600 t 1
(686 kN {70 t})
J 790-101-1102 Pump t 1
790-201-1620 • Plate 1
2
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
Disassembly
2) Apply hydraulic pressure gradually to

remove lockplate (3) then nut (4).
a Compress the spring until the nut
becomes loose.
a Release the hydraulic pressure slowly
and release the tension of the spring.
a Free length of spring: 811.5 mm
3) Remove yoke (6), cylinder (7), collar (8)
and dust seal (9) from spring (5).
3. Disassembly of piston assembly

1) Remove lockplate (11) from piston (10),
then remove valve (12).
2) Remove snap ring (13), then remove U-
packing (14) and ring (15).
PC300, 350-8 7
Assembly 2) Assemble cylinder (7), collar (8) and yoke

(6) to spring (5), and set it on tool J1.
2 Cylinder sliding part:
Grease (G2-LI)
3) Apply hydraulic pressure slowly to com-

press the spring, and then tighten nut (4)
so that the installed length of the spring is
dimension (a) and secure it with lockplate
(3).
a Installed length (a) of spring: 655 mm

1) Assemble ring (15) and U-packing (14) to
piston (10) and secure with snap ring (13).
2) Tighten valve (12) temporarily, and secure
with lockplate (11).
2. Disassembly of recoil spring assembly

1) Using tool J2, install dust seal (9) to cylin-
der (7). 4) Remove recoil spring assembly (1) from
tool J1.
3. Assemble piston assembly (2) to recoil spring

assembly (1).
2 Sliding part of piston: Grease (G2-LI)
2 Wear ring: Grease (G2-LI)
a Install the piston assembly so the valve
installing position is on the outside.
a Fill the inside of the cylinder with 180 cc of
grease (G2-LI), then bleed the air and
c heck that greas e comes out of the
grease hole.
8 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of

sprocket 1
Removal
1. Expand the track shoe assembly referencing
“Expansion and installation of track shoe assem-
bly”.
2. Swing work equipment 90°, push up chassis

with work equipment and place blocks [1]
between track frame and track shoe.
3. Remove the mounting bolt and then lift off

sprocket (1). [*1]
4 Sprocket: 65 kg
Installation
removal.
[*1]
2 Threads of sprocket mounting bolt:
Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Sprocket mounting bolt:
640 – 785 Nm {65 – 80 kgm}
PC300, 350-8 9
Expansion and installation of 4. Use tool K and remove nut (2). [*3]
track shoe assembly 1
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
Remover and
791-630-3000 t 1
installer
K Cylinder
790-101-1300 t 1
(980 kN {100 t})
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
Expansion of track shoe

1. Set the master pin position. 5. Drive the machine gradually reverse to expand
a Start the engine and set the master pin the track shoe.
position in front side of the idler.
a Set block [1] and other necessary parts
previously at bottom of the track shoe situ-
ated in front of the idler. Installation of track shoe
2. Lower the work equipment to the ground, and expansion.
loosen lubricator (1) in order to loosen track
shoe tension. [*1] [*1]
k Inner pressure of the adjustment cylin- a Refer to the “Checking and adjusting track
der is extremely high. Never loosen the shoe tension” section in the Testing and adjust-
lubricator more than one turn. If the ing chapter of this manual.
grease does not come out, move the
machine backwards and forwards.
[*2]
2 Mounting bolt: Seizure prevention agent
(Maruzen Morimax No.2 or equivalent)
3 Mounting bolt: 393 ± 39 Nm {40 ± 4 kgm}
[*3]
a Press-fit the master pin, using tool K in such that
the master pin protrusion becomes (a).
Master pin protrusion amount (a): 4.2 ± 2 mm
3. Remove track shoe (3) on master pin (2). [*2]
10 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of 5. Remove plate (3) and pin (4), and then lift
revolving frame assembly 1 boom cylinder assembly (2) to remove.
a Remove the boom cylinder assembly on
Removal the opposite side in the same manner.
k Extend the arm and bucket fully, lower the 4 Boom cylinder assembly: 260 kg
work equipment to the ground and then
move the work equipment lock lever to the
LOCK position.
1. Remove the work equipment assembly For

details, see “Removal and installation of work
equipment assembly”.
2. Remove the counterweight assembly.

For details, see “Removal and installation of
counterweight assembly”.
3. Disconnect 4 boom cylinder hoses (1).

a Plug the hose to stop oil flow-out.
6. Sling engine hood (5) temporarily.
a When slinging the engine hood, take care
not to damage the rubber seal.
4. Sling boom cylinder assembly (2).
7. Remove the engine hood mounting bolt and

then remove pin (6).
8. Lift off work equipment assembly (5).
PC300, 350-8 11
9. Remove plates (7) and (8). 13. Remove 40 mounting bolts and then lift off
revolving frame assembly (20). [*1]
10. Remove aftercooler tube (9). a Using the lever block, adjust fore and aft
a When other parts can interfere with the lift- as well as right and left balance of the
ing hook in removal of the revolving frame, revolving frame assembly, with only 2
such parts must be removed beforehand. mounting bolts being left in the front and
rear side of the assembly. After the adjust-
ment, remove the remaining two bolts.
k When removing the revolving frame
assembly, take care so that it does not
hit the swivel joint assembly.
4 Revolving frame assembly: 6,000 kg
11. Disconnect 8 hoses (12) through (18).

q (12): Center swivel joint (D port) –
Swing motor (T port)
Hydraulic oil tank
q (14): Center swivel joint (E port) –
Solenoid valve
q (15): Center swivel joint (B port) –
Control valve LH travel (B2 port)
q (16): Center swivel joint (D port) – Installation
Control valve RH travel (B5 port) q Installation is done in the reverse order of
q (17): Center swivel joint (A port) – removal.
Control valve LH travel
(A2 port) [*1]
q (18): Center swivel joint (C port) – 2 Mating face of swing circle:
Control valve RH travel (A5 port) Gasket sealant (LG-6)
2 Threads of revolving frame mounting bolt:
12. Pull out pin (19) on the side of center swivel Adhesive (LT-2)
joint and remove the jam plate from the center 3 Revolving frame mounting bolt:
swivel joint. 926.7 ± 103 Nm {94.5 ± 10.5 kgm}
q Refilling with oil (Hydraulic tank)

q Air bleeding
Bleed air from the travel motor referencing the
“Bleeding air from various parts” section in the
Testing and adjusting chapter of this manual.
12 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of 2. Install eyebolt [1] to counterweight assembly

counterweight assembly 1 (2), and sling.
Removal 3. Remove 4 mounting bolts (9). [*1]

1. Remove the accessories on the counterweight a Record the locations where the shims
according to the following procedure. were used.
(Mirror specification)
1) Remove mirror (1). 4. Lift off counterweight assembly (2) horizontally
2) Sling counterweight assembly (2). using wire or chain block. [*2]
a Be careful not to bump it against the
engine or radiator or cooler assembly.
4 Counterweight assembly: 5,500 kg
(1-rear camera specification)

1) Disconnect connector A40 (3) of camera 1
(RC1).
2) Disconnect connector CN-L09 (5) and wir-
ing harness clamps (6) from rear working
lamp (4). (If equipped)
3) Sling counterweight assembly (2). Installation
q Install in reverse order of removal.
(2-rear camera specification)
1) Disconnect connector A40 (3) of camera 1 [*1]
3 Counterweight mounting bolt:
(RC1).
2) Disconnect connector CN-L09 (5) and wir- 1,715 – 1,911 Nm {175 – 195 kgm}
ing harness clamps (6) from rear working
lamp (4). (If equipped) [*2]
3) Remove cover (7). a Installing and adjusting counterweight
4) Disconnect coaxial cable connector (8) of 1) Adjust the level difference from the exte-
camera 2 (RC2). rior part (vertical clearance) with the shim
between the counterweight and revolving
frame.
q Set shim thickness: 1.0 mm, 2.0 mm
2) Install counterweight in such a way that
clearance between the door and counter-
weight as well as clearance between the
r e v o l v i n g fr a m e a n d c o u n t e r w e i g h t
become 10 ± 5 mm.
PC300, 350-8 13
SEN02638-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
14
SEN02639-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Hydraulic system
Removal and installation of center swivel joint assembly ............................................................................... 2
Disassembly and assembly of center swivel joint assembly ........................................................................... 4
Removal and installation of hydraulic tank assembly...................................................................................... 5
Removal and installation of control valve assembly ....................................................................................... 7
Disassembly and assembly of control valve assembly ................................................................................. 10
Removal and installation of hydraulic pump assembly ................................................................................. 12
Removal and installation of oil seal in hydraulic pump input shaft ................................................................ 14
Disassembly and assembly of work equipment PPC valve assembly .......................................................... 15
Disassembly and assembly of travel PPC valve assembly........................................................................... 16
Disassembly and assembly of hydraulic cylinder assembly ......................................................................... 17
PC300, 350-8 1
Removal and installation of center 2. Disconnect 7 hoses (9) through (15).

swivel joint assembly 1 q (9): Center swivel joint (D port) –
Swing motor (T port)
Removal q (10): Center swivel joint (D port) –
k Release the remaining pressure in the Hydraulic oil tank
hydraulic circuit. For details, see Testing q (11): Center swivel joint (E port) –
and adjusting, “Releasing remaining pres- Solenoid valve
sure in hydraulic circuit”. q (12): Center swivel joint (B port) –
a Attach an identification tag to each piping to Control valve LH travel (B2 port)
avoid a mistake in the position of installation q (13): Center swivel joint (D port) –
later. Control valve RH travel (B5 port)
q (14): Center swivel joint (A port) –
1. Disconnect 8 hoses (1) through (8) of the travel Control valve LH travel (A2 port)
motor center swivel joint. q (15): Center swivel joint (C port) –
q (1): Center swivel joint (T port) – Control valve RH travel (A5 port)
LH travel motor (T port)
q (2): Center swivel joint (T port) – 3. Pull out pin (16) on the side of center swivel
RH travel motor (T port) joint and remove the jam plate from the center
q (3): Center swivel joint (B port) – swivel joint.
LH travel motor (PA port)
RH travel motor (PB port)
q (5): Center swivel joint (A port) –
LH travel motor (PB port)
q (6): Center swivel joint (C port) –
RH travel motor (PA port)
LH travel motor (P port)
RH travel motor (P port)
2 PC300, 350-8
5. Lift and remove center swivel joint assembly Installation

(18). [*1] q Installation is done in the reverse order of
4 Center swivel joint assembly: 40 kg removal.
[*1]
a Install the center swivel joint assembly
(18) with ports (B) and (D) directed to the
front of the machine (in the direction of the
arrow).
(Part (19) in the following figure is the
sprocket.)

q Air bleeding
and the hydraulic cylinder. For details, see
Testing and adjusting, “Bleeding air from vari-
ous parts”.
PC300, 350-8 3
Disassembly and assembly of 1. Remove cover (1).

center swivel joint assembly 1
2. Remove snap ring (2).
Special tools
3. Using tool L, pull out swivel rotor (4) and ring
Necessity
(3) from swivel shaft (5).
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
4. Remove dust seal (6) from cover (7).
790-101-2501 Push puller t 1
5. Remove O-ring (8) and slipper seal (9) from
790-101-2510 Block 1 swivel rotor (4).
790-101-2520 Screw 1
791-112-1180 Nut 1
L 790-101-2540 Washer 1
790-101-2630 Leg 2
790-101-2570 Plate 4
790-101-2560 Nut 2
790-101-2650 Adapter 2
Disassembly
Assembly
1. Assemble slipper seal (9) and O-ring (8) to
swivel rotor (4).
2. Install cover (7) to swivel shaft (5).

2 Inside of cover:
Grease (G2-LI) (Apply 2 – 3 cc)
3. Install dust seal (6) to cover (7).

2 Lip of dust seal:
Grease (G2-LI) (Apply 2 – 3 cc)
4. Set swivel shaft (5) to block, then using push

tool, tap swivel rotor (4) with a plastic hammer
to install.
2 Contact surface of rotor and shaft:
Grease (G2-LI)
a When installing the rotor, take care not to
damage the slipper seal and the O-ring.
5. Install ring (3) and secure it with snap ring (2).
6. Fit O-ring and install cover (1).

3 Mounting bolt:
31.4 ± 2.9 Nm {3.2 ± 0.3 kgm}
4 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of 6. Disconnect hoses (8) and (9).

hydraulic tank assembly 1
Removal
1. Remove covers (1) and (2).
7. Disconnect hoses (10), (11) and (12).
2. Drain oil from the hydraulic tank

6 Hydraulic tank: 248 l
4. Remove control valve top cover (3).
8. Remove 4 mounting bolts to remove suction

tube (13).
5. Disconnect hoses (4), (5), (6) and (7).
PC300, 350-8 5
9. Sling the hydraulic oil tank assembly and Installation

remove 6 mounting bolts (14). q Installation is done in the reverse order of
removal.

q Air bleeding
10. Lift and remove hydraulic oil tank assembly ous parts”.
(15).
4 Hydraulic oil tank assembly: 200 kg
6 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of 3. Disconnect 4 boom hoses (5).

control valve assembly 1
4. Remove boom tube mounting clamps (6) and (7).
Removal
for safety and stop the engine. Unscrew the
oil filler cap on the hydraulic tank slowly to
release pressure inside the tank. Then
move the work equipment lock lever to the
LOCK position.
later.
1. Open up engine hood and remove top control

valve cover (1).
5. Remove plate (8).
2. Remove partition covers (3) and (4) provided

between the engine and control valve.
PC300, 350-8 7
6. Disconnect 8 hoses and 8 tubes on the control 8. Disconnect 2 hoses and 8 tubes on the control
valve. valve.
q (9): TSW port hose (Swing motor S port) q (19): Bucket dump
q (10): T1 port hose (connected to the tank) (Hose band: Yellow -Blue)
q (11): From the top: q (20): PST port hose (Hose band: Brown)
A1 port tube (boom Hi bottom side)
A1 port tube (bucket bottom side), 9. Disconnect drain hoses (21).
A2 port hose (swivel joint A port)
A3 port tube (boom bottom side),
A4 port hose (swing motor MB port)
A5 port hose (swivel joint C port),
A6 port tube (arm head side)
q (12): From the top: B1 port tube (arm Hi
bottom side)
A1 port tube (bucket head side)
A2 port hose (swivel joint B port)
B3 port tube (boom head side)
B4 port hose (swing motor MA port)
B5 port hose (swivel joint D port)
B6 port tube (arm bottom side)
10. Disconnect 7 left side PPC hoses and 5 control

valve hoses.
q (22): PLS2 port hose (Hose band: Red)
q (23): PLS1 port hose
q (24): PLS2 port hose (Hose band: Blue)
q (25): From the top: Bucket digging
(Hose band: White)
LH reverse
Boom RAISE (Hose band: Green)
Swing LS separator valve
BP5 port hose (to solenoid)
Left swing (Hose band: Red)
RH reverse (Hose band: Blue)
7. Disconnect the 6 PPC hoses at right. Arm dump (Hose band: Yellow)
q (13): Bucket dump (Hose band: Black) q (26): PX2 port hose
(14): LH forward (Hose band: Red)
(15): Boom (Hose band: Brown)
(16): Right swing
(17): RH forward (Hose band: Green)
(18): Arm digging (Hose band: Blue)
8 PC300, 350-8
11. Disconnect the 7 hoses and the wiring connec- Installation

tors (2 locations). q Installation is done in the reverse order of
q (27): PPS1 port hose (Front pump) removal.
q (28): PPS2 port hose (Rear pump)
q (29): PR port hose (Solenoid) q Refilling with oil (hydraulic tank)
q (30): PR port hose (Pump) Refill hydraulic oil through the oil filler port to
q (31): PP1 port hose (Front pump) the specified level. Let the oil circulate in the
q (32): PP2 port hose (Rear pump) hydraulic system by starting the engine. Then
q (33): T port hose (Oil cooler) check the oil level again.
q (34): A51 (Front pump pressure sensor)
q Air bleeding
ous parts”.
q (35): A52 (Rear pump pressure sensor)
12. Remove the 3 mounting bolts, and then lift and

remove control valve assembly (36).
4 Control valve assembly: 250 kg
PC300, 350-8 9
Disassembly and assembly of 2. Install the O-ring to piston (1).

control valve assembly 1
3. Set tool M1 to piston (1) and push it in slowly
a This section deals with only precautions to be by hand so that seal (2) may spread out
followed when reassembling the control valve evenly.
assembly.
a The seal may be also fitted by pushing it
Special tools down to the flat surface of the tool and
then pushing it in with the tool fitted to the
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
piston.
Q’ty
N/R
796-946-1310 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-40100 and 723-46-40601)
796-946-1810 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-43100 and 723-46-43400)
1
796-946-2110 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2210 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1320 Guide
t 1
(For 723-46-40100 and 723-46-43601)
796-946-1820 Guide
t 1 4. Likewise, set tool M2 to piston (1) in the same
(For 723-46-43100 and 723-46-43400)
direction and push it slowly by hand so that
796-946-2120 Guide
2 t 1 another seal (3) may be spread out evenly.
(For 723-46-44100) a The seal may be also fitted by pushing it
M
796-946-2220 Guide down to the flat surface of the tool and
t 1
(For 723-46-45100) then pushing it in with the tool fitted to the
796-946-1420 Guide piston.
t 1
(For 723-46-42800)
796-946-1330 Sleeve
t 1
(For 723-46-40100 and 723-46-40601)
796-946-1830 Sleeve
t 1
(For 723-46-43100 and 723-46-43400)
796-946-2130 Sleeve
3 t 1
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2230 Sleeve
t 1
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1430 Sleeve
t 1
(For 723-46-42800)
Procedures for replacing pressure compensa-

tion valve seal
1. Remove the seal from the pressure compensa-
tion valve.
a Clean the pressure compensation valve
thoroughly, and then assemble the seal
using the tool, as indicated in the diagram.
10 PC300, 350-8
5. Set correction tool M3 to piston (1) for about q The filter installed on the valve assembly
one minute in order to make seals (2) and (3) should be assembled in the direction shown in
securely adhered to the piston. the following figure.
a Check that there is no protrusion or cut on
the seal.
q Pump merge-divider valve

2 Mating face of the merge-divider valve:
6. Assemble the piston in the sleeve. Seal End 242 or equivalent
a If it is difficult to install the piston, do not q Tighten the mounting bolts for the merge-
push it in forcibly but install it to correcting divider valve in the same sequence as that for
tool M3 again to fit the seal and then the control valve cover mounting bolts.
install it to the sleeve. 3 Merge-divider valve mounting bolt:
a After the installation, push the piston by 156.9 – 176.5 Nm {16 – 18 kgm}
hand and check that the piston reacts only q Back pressure valve
with spring force. 3 Back pressure valve mounting bolt:
58.8 – 73.8 Nm {6 – 7.5 kgm}
Assembly of control valve assembly q Tighten the mounting bolts for the boom Hi
q Coat the sliding surface with engine oil and check valve, quick return valve, lock valve and
then reassemble the control valve assembly. arm plate in the same sequence as that for the
q Upper and lower control valve covers control valve cover mounting bolts.
2 Mating face of the upper and lower control 3 Boom Hi check valve mounting bolt:
valve cover: 58.8 – 73.8 Nm {6 – 7.5 kgm}
Seal End 242 or equivalent 3 Mounting bolt for quick return valve, lock
q Tighten the mounting bolts for the upper and valve and arm plate:
lower control covers in the sequence of A, D, 58.8 – 73.8 Nm {6 – 7.5 kgm}
C, B below. q Pressure compensation valve
3 Mounting bolt for the upper and lower control a Install each pressure compensation valve, pay-
valve covers: ing attention to the counter mark that was put
156.9 – 176.5 Nm {16 – 18 kgm} when removing it.
Main relief valve assembly

Assemble the main relief valve assembly with the
control valve and install them to the machine. Then,
test and adjust the main relief pressure. For details,
see Testing and adjusting, “Testing and adjusting oil
pressure in work equipment, swing, and travel cir-
cuit”.
PC300, 350-8 11
Removal and installation of 3. Open cover (1) and remove covers (2) – (4).
hydraulic pump assembly 1
Special tools
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
796-460-1210 Oil stopper q 1

C
796-770-1320 Adapter q 1
Removal
terminal of the battery. 4. Remove cover (5).
internal pressure of the hydraulic tank.
later.
1. Remove the hydraulic tank strainer and stop

the flow of oil using tool C.
a When not using tool C, remove the drain
plug to drain oil from the hydraulic tank
and piping.
2. Drain oil from the damper case.

6 Damper case: Approx. 1.07 l
12 PC300, 350-8
6. Disconnect the pump wiring connectors at the 9. Disconnect wiring clamp (22) at two locations.
following two locations.
q (8): V19 (LS-EPC solenoid valve) 10. Remove muffler clamp (23) and two U-bolts
q (9): V11 (PC-EPC solenoid valve) (24) to remove muffler (25).
11. Remove muffler bracket (26).
7. Disconnect 8 hoses and a tube.

q (12): Drain port hose
q (13): Front load pressure input port hose 12. Lift and remove hydraulic pump assembly (27).
q (14): Front load pressure input port hose [*1]
4
(Color band: Red)
Hydraulic pump assembly: 220 kg
q (15): EPC source pressure port hose
(Color band: Yellow)
q (16): Rear pressure input port hose
(Color band: Yellow)
q (17): Front pressure input port hose
q (18): Rear pump delivery port hose
q (19): Front pump delivery port hose
q (20): Pump suction port tube
8. Remove muffler drain tube (21).
PC300, 350-8 13
Installation Removal and installation of oil seal

q Installation is done in the reverse order of in hydraulic pump input shaft 1
removal.
Removal
[*1] 1. Remove the hydraulic pump assembly. For
2 Hydraulic pump involute spline: details, see “Removal and installation of
Molybdenum disulfide grease (LM-G) hydraulic pump”.
2 Mating face of hydraulic pump case:
Gasket sealant (LG-6) 2. Remove snap ring (1) and then remove spacer
(2).
q Refilling with oil (damper case)
Refill hydraulic oil through the oil filler port to 3. Pry off oil seal (3) with a screwdriver. [*1]
the specified level. a Take care in removing the oil seal so that
5 Damper case: 1.07 l the shaft may not be damaged.

5 Hydraulic tank: 2.48 l
q Air bleeding
ous parts”.
Installation
removal.
[*1]
2 Oil seal lip portion and outer circumference:
Grease (G2-LI)
a Coat the oil seal outer circumference thinly
with grease.
a Press-fit oil seal (3), using tool [1].
14 PC300, 350-8
Disassembly and assembly of work a When assembling piston (8), coat the piston
equipment PPC valve assembly 1 outer periphery and body hole inner periphery
with grease.
Disassembly 2 Piston body: Grease (G2-LI)

a Tighten plate (15) with the following torque.
3 Mounting bolt:
Assembly 11.8 – 14.7 Nm {1.2 – 1.5 kgm}

a Assemble according to the following figure. a When installing joint (4), apply a drop (approx.
a Only the precautions for assembly are 0.02 g) of adhesive each to 2 places of the
described below. female threads of its body.
2 Body female screw:
Adhesive (Loctite No. 262)

3 Joint (4): 39 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}
2 Joint (4) sliding part:
Grease 2 – 4 cc (G2-LI)
a Apply grease to the mating faces of piston (8)

and disc (2).
2 Contact surface of piston and disc (2):
Grease 0.3 – 0.8 cc (G2-LI)

a Tighten nut (1) to the following torque.
3 Nut (1): 98 – 127 Nm {10 – 13 kgm}
a After installing the disc, adjust the play of the

lever. For details, see Testing and adjusting,
“Adjusting play of work equipment and swing
q Work equipment PPC valve reassembly PPC valve”.
a When assembling spring (11), be sure to face
its smaller end turn (inner diameter) side
toward shim (12).
a Springs (10) in use differ in the number of turns
according to hydraulic ports as classified in the
table below. Hence take care when installing
one.
a The location of each port is stamped in the
lower part of the valve body.
Port position Spring free length
P1 and P2 44.45 mm
P3 and P4 42.48 mm
PC300, 350-8 15

travel PPC valve assembly 1
Disassembly
Assembly
a Only the precautions for assembly are
described below
a Clean and check the parts so that dirt, rust,
flaws, etc. will not cause a trouble and then
assemble them with extreme care.
a When installing piston (1), apply grease (G2-
LI) to its outside and the inside of the hole of
the body.
a Install spring (2) with the small diameter seat
end on shim (3) side.
q Seat diameters of spring (inside diameter)
Small diameter end: 4.9 mm
Large diameter end: 5.55 mm
a Do not drive in bushing (4) and pin (5) directly
with a hammer, etc.
a Apply grease (G2-LI) to the sliding parts of
shaft (6), contact parts of lever (7) and piston
(1), and pin contact parts of plate (8) and lever
(9).
2 Quantity of grease
Sliding parts of shaft (6):
6 – 8 cc/all periphery
Contact parts of lever (7) and piston (1):
0.3 – 0.8 cc/part
Pin contact parts of plate (8) and lever (9):
0.3 – 0.8 cc/part
a After washer (10) (t = 1.6) is installed, if the dif-
ference between the strokes of the right and
left levers is larger than 0.7°, replace the
washer to reduce the difference to 0.7° or less.
(If the washer thickness is reduced by 0.3 mm,
the stroke angle is increased by 0.39°.)
q Set washer thickness (t) = 1.0, 1.3, 1.6 mm
a Tighten the parts according to the following
torque.
q Plug (11): 6 – 11 Nm {0.6 – 1.1 kgm}
q Bolt (12): 3.9 – 4.9 Nm {0.4 – 0.5 kgm}
(Apply LOCTITE #262)
q Screw (13): 7.8 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm}
q Plug (14): 4 – 9 Nm {0.4 – 0.9 kgm}
q Bolt (15): 25 – 31 Nm {2.5 – 3.2 kgm}
q Bolt (16): 27 – 34 Nm {2.8 – 3.5 kgm}
16 PC300, 350-8
Disassembly and assembly of 4) Disassemble the piston rod assembly as

hydraulic cylinder assembly 1 follows.
1] Set piston rod assembly (2) on tool
Special tools N1.
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
1 790-502-1003 Cylinder repair stand t 1

2
790-102-4310 Pin t 2
3 790-720-1000 Expander q 1
796-720-1680 Ring q 1
4
07281-01589 Clamp q 1
• Push tool
790-201-1851 1
(for bucket and boom)
N 5 • Push tool 2] Remove stopper screw (3) of piston
790-201-1861 1
(for arm) assembly.
790-101-5021 • Grip 1 a Common to the boom, arm and
01010-50816 • Bolt 1 bucket cylinder.
790-201-1500 Push tool kit t 1 Screw size: M12 × Pitch 1.75
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
6
• Plate
790-201-1660 1
(for boom and bucket)
790-201-1670 • Plate (for arm) 1
Disassembly
1. Piston rod assembly
1) Remove piping from the cylinder assem-
bly.
2) Remove the mounting bolts and then dis-
connect head assembly (1). a If the caulking of screw (3) is too strong and it
3) Pull out piston rod assembly (2). cannot be removed, tighten the screw fully,
a Place a container under the cylinder then fit a tap to the thread and remove the
to catch the oil. screw.
PC300, 350-8 17
3] Use tool N2 to remove piston assem- 2. Disassembly of piston assembly

bly (4). 1) Remove ring (11).
q When not using tool N2, use the 2) Remove wear ring (12).
drill holes (φ10 at 4 locations) to 3) Remove piston ring (13).
loosen the piston assembly. 4) Remove O-ring and backup ring (14).
4] Remove plunger. 3. Disassembly of cylinder head assembly

q Boom and arm cylinder only 1) Remove O-ring and backup ring (15).
5] Remove collar (6). 2) Remove snap ring (16) and then remove
q Boom and arm cylinder only dust seal (17).
6] Remove head assembly (7). 3) Remove rod packing (18).
4) Remove buffer ring (19).
5) Remove busing (20).
7] Remove cap (8), pull 12 balls (9) and

then remove plunger (10).
q Arm cylinder only
18 PC300, 350-8
Assembly
a Be careful not to damage the packing, dust
seal and O-ring.
a Clean each part, then cover the piping ports
and pin-inserting hole to prevent dust from
entering them.
a Do not try to force the backup ring into posi-
tion. Warm it in warm water (50 – 60°C) before
installing it.
3) Install backup ring and O-ring (14).

4) Assemble wear ring (12).
5) Assemble ring (11).
a Be careful not to open the end gap of
the ring too wide.
2 Ring groove: Grease (G2-LI)
1. Disassembly of recoil spring assembly

1) Press-fit oil seal (20), using tool N5.
2) Assemble buffer ring (19).
3) Assemble rod packing (18).
4) Using tool N6, install dust seal (17) and
then secure it with snap ring (16).
5) Install backup ring and O-ring (15).
3. Piston rod assembly

1) Set piston rod assembly (2) on tool.

1) Press-fit oil seal (13), using tool N3.
a Set the piston ring on tool N3, and
turn the handle 8 – 10 times to
expand the ring.
2) Tighten piston ring (13) by setting tool N4.
2) Assemble head assembly (7).
3) Assemble collar (6) after installing O-ring
and backup ring to it.
q Boom and arm cylinder only
4) Assemble plunger (5).
q Boom and arm cylinder only
PC300, 350-8 19
2] Tighten screw (3).

5 Screw thread: Loctite No.262
3 Screw:
58.9 – 73.6 Nm {6 – 7.5 kgm}
3] Caulk 4 places of threaded part (a)
with a punch.
5) Set plunger (10) on the piston rod, assem-

ble 12 balls (9) to it and secure with cap (8).
a Check that there is a small amount of
play at the tip of the plunger.
q Arm cylinder only
q When the rod and/or piston assem-

bly (2) is a new part
a For the rod with bottom cushion, mark
the cushion plug position on the end
of the rod.
q Arm cylinder only
1] Screw in piston assembly (4) until rod
(2) is contacted against end face (b)
and then tighten the assembly using
the tool.
3 Piston assembly:
294 ± 29.4 Nm {30 ± 3.0 kgm}
6) Assemble piston assembly (4) as follows. a After tightening the piston, check that
q When using rod and piston assem- there is play in plunger (5).
bly (2) again q Boom and arm cylinder only
a Wash thoroughly to eliminate metal
particles and dirt.
1] Screw in piston assembly (4), then
using tool N2, tighten piston assem-
bly (2) until the position of the screw
thread hole matches.
a Remove all burrs and flashes
using a file.
20 PC300, 350-8
2] Machine one of the holes used to 7) Assemble piston rod assembly (2).
install screw (3). a Set the ring end gap (C) horizontally
a Using a drill, level off V-groove (sideways), and then insert it aligning
between piston (4) and rod (3). the axial center of cylinder tube.
a Machining of the cylinder with bottom a After inserting, make sure that the
cushion (arm cylinder) must not be ring is not broken and is present in its
done at the cushion plug position. place. Then push in the assembly
q Screw machining dimension (mm) fully.
Prepared Depth of
Tapping
hole drilling prepared Tap used
depth
diameter hole
10.3 27 12 x 1.75 20
3] After machining, wash thoroughly to

eliminate metal particles and dust.
8) Tighten head assembly (1) with mounting

bolts.
3 Mounting bolt:
Cylinder
Tightening torque
name
373 ± 54 Nm
Bucket
{38.0 ± 5.5 kgm}
4] Tighten screw (3).
3
Arm 490 ± 49 Nm {50.0 ± 5.0 kg}
Screw:
Boom 373 ± 54 Nm {38.0 ± 5.5 kgm}
58.9 – 73.6 Nm {6 – 7.5 kgm}
5] Caulk thread at 4 places using a
punch.
9) Install piping.
PC300, 350-8 21
SEN02639-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
22
SEN02640-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Work equipment
Removal and installation of work equipment assembly .................................................................................. 2
PC300, 350-8 1
Removal and installation of work 4. Start the engine and then retract the piston rod.
equipment assembly 1 a Fasten the piston rod with wire and place
it on the stand so that it may not slip out,
Special tools or place a support to prevent the cylinder
from hanging toward the bottom.
a In the latter case, remove the bottom side
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
Part number Part name grease nipple.
a Remove the boom cylinder on the other
side in the same manner.
796-670-1100 Remover t 1
a When the work equipment assembly is
796-670-1110 • Sleeve 1 lifted up, if the sling touches the working
796-670-1120 • Plate 1 lamp, remove the working lamp.
796-670-1130 • Screw 1
5. Disconnect intermediate connector A42 (6) for
791-775-1150 • Adapter 1
P the working lamp.
01643-33080 • Washer 1
01803-13034 • Nut 1 6. Disconnect 3 arm cylinder hoses (7) and 2
Puller bucket cylinder hoses (8).
790-101-4000 t 1 a Apply the oil restraining plug and then fix
(490 kN {50 t} long)
Pump the hoses to the valve side by use of ropes.
790-101-1102 t 1
(294 kN {30 t})
Removal
k Extend the arm and bucket fully. Lower the
work equipment to the ground and set the work
equipment lock lever to the lock position.
k Release the residual pressure. For details,
see Testing and adjusting, “Releasing
residual pressure from hydraulic circuit”.
1. Disconnect grease hose (1).
2. Sling boom cylinder assembly (2), and remove 7. Lift the work equipment, and then remove plate
lock bolt and nut (3). [*1] (9).
3. Remove plate (4), then remove head pin (5).[*2] 8. Using tool P, remove foot pin (10) [*3]
a Check the number as well as locations of a Check the number as well as locations of
the shims used. the shims used.
2 PC300, 350-8
Installation
removal.
[*1]
a When tightening the locknut, make sure that
0.5 – 1.5 mm clearance (a) is maintained
between the plate and nut after the tightening.
9. Remove work assembly (11).

4 Work equipment assembly: 5,800 kg
[*2]
2 Inside surface of bushing when assembling pin:
Antifriction agent (LM-P)
2 Feed grease after assembling pin:
Grease (LM-G)
k When aligning the position of the pin hole,
never insert your fingers into the pin hole.
a Adjust the clearance (b) between cylinder rod
(12) and plate (4) to 1.5mm or less using
shims.
Thickness of standard shim: 1.0 and 2.0 mm
PC300, 350-8 3
[*3]
2 Inside surface of bushing when assembling pin:
Antifriction agent (LM-P)
2 Feed grease after assembling pin:
Grease (LM-G)
a Adjust the clearance (c) between the foot's end
face of boom (13) and bracket (14) to 1 mm or
less by use of shims.
Thickness of standard shim:
2.0, 2.5, 3.0 and 3.5 mm
q Air bleeding
and the hydraulic cylinder. For details, see Test-
ing and adjusting, “Bleeding air from various
parts”.

4 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 5
SEN02640-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
6
SEN02641-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Cab and its attachments
Removal and installation of operator's cab assembly ..................................................................................... 2
Removal and installation of operator cab glass (stuck glass) ......................................................................... 5
Removal and installation of front window assembly ..................................................................................... 15
Removal and installation of floor frame assembly ........................................................................................ 22
PC300, 350-8 1
Removal and installation of 9. Remove rear covers (10) to (13).

operator's cab assembly
Removal
battery before starting the work.
1. Remove front window (1).

2. Remove step plate (2).
3. Remove floor mat (3).
4. Refer to “Removal and installation of monitor

assembly”, and remove monitor assembly (4).
5. Remove covers (5) and (6). 10. Remove duct (14).

6. Remove cover duct assembly (7). 11. Remove cover (15).
a Disconnect connector H15 fixed on the
back from the clip.
7. Insert key (8), turn it right, and open the out-

side-air filter cover.
8. Remove outside-air filter (9).

14. Remove lock pin (18) and remove duct (19).
2 PC300, 350-8
15. Remove duct (20). 23. Remove ducts (32) and (33).
16. Disconnect connector (21). a Cut tie-wrap.
17. Remove plates (22) and (23) from the operator 24. Disconnect wiper motor connector M05(34).
cab. 25. Remove harness (35) and antenna (36) from
the cab wall.
a Cut 2 points of tie-wrap.
18. Pass over and disconnect antenna (24) from

KOMTRAX communication modem.
19. Disconnect connectors K01(25) and CK02 26. Remove duct (37).
(26). 27. Remove duct (38) upper and lower.
20. Disconnect connector M10(27) from the opera-
tor's cab. (If equipped)
21. Disconnect cab wiring intermediate connectors

H09(28), H08(29), and H16(30).
a Cut tie-wrap (T),
22. Disconnect radio antenna (31).
a (23) is removed plate.
28. Disconnect window washer hose (39).

29. Disconnect harness clamp (40).
30. Haul in antenna (36).
PC300, 350-8 3
31. Detach harness clamp (41) from the right back 35. Lift off and remove operator's cab assembly
side of cab. (47).
4 Operator's cab assembly: 470 kg
32. Remove bolt (42) under the cab and remove

lock plate (43). [*1]
33. Remove bolt (44). [*2]
Installation
removal.
[*1]
3 Mounting bolt of lock plate (43):
98 – 123 Nm {10 – 12.5 kgm}
[*2]
3 Bolt (44):
245 – 309 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}
34. Dismount 6 mounting bolts (45) and 4 mount-

ing nuts (46).
a Check the bolt length beforehand.
4 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of operator cab glass (stuck glass)
a Among the panes of window glass on the 4 (1) : Right side window glass
sides of the operator's cab, 5 panes (1) to (4) (2) : Left side rear window glass
and (18) are stuck. (3) : Door lower window glass
a In this section, the procedure for replacing the (4) : Front window glass
stuck glasses is explained. (5) : Front window assembly
a When replacing front window glass (4), remove (Front window glass + Front frame)
front window assembly (5). (It is impossible to (6) : Dam rubber
replace only the front window glass while the (17) : Center trim seal
front window assembly is installed to the opera- (18) : Rear glass
tor's cab.)
a For the procedure for replacing the front win-
dow assembly, see “Removal and installation of
front window assembly”.
PC300, 350-8 5
Special tools (The figure shows the operator's cab of a wheel

loader.)
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Q’ty
N/R
2 793-498-1210 Lifter (Suction cup) t 2
X
3 20Y-54-13180 Stopper rubber t 2
Removal
a Remove the window glass to be replaced
1. Using seal cutter [1], cut the adhesive between
broken window glass (7) and operator's cab
(metal sheet)(8).
a If the window glass is broken finely, it may

be removed with a knife [4] and a screw-
driver.
a Widening the cut with a flat blade screw-
driver, cut the dam rubber and adhesive
with knife [4].
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a wheel

loader.)
a If a seal cutter is not available, make holes

on the adhesive and dam rubber with a
drill and pass a fine wire (piano wire, etc.)
[2] through the holes. Then, grip the both
ends of the wire with priors [3], etc. (or
hold them by winding them onto some-
thing) and move the wire to the right and
left to cut the adhesive and dam rubber.
Since the wire may be broken by the fric-
tional heat, apply lubricant to the wire.
2. Remove the window glass.
6 PC300, 350-8
Installation a Even if the primer is packed again just

1. Using a knife and scraper [5], remove the after it is unpacked, use it within 24 hours
remaining adhesive and dam rubber from the after it is unpacked for the first time.
metal sheets (glass sticking surfaces) of the (Discard the primer 24 hours after it is
operator's cab. unpacked.)
a Remove the adhesive and dam rubber to 1) Stir the primers for both of paint and glass
a degree that they will not affect adhesion sufficiently before using them.
of the new adhesive. Take care not to a If the primer has been stored in a refrig-
scratch the painted surfaces. erator, leave it at the room temperature
(If the painted surfaces are scratched, for at least half a day before stirring it.
adhesion will be lowered.) (If the primer is unpacked just after
taken out of the refrigerator, water will
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a wheel be condensed. Accordingly, leave the
loader.) primer at the room temperature for a
sufficient time.)
2) When reusing primer brush (11), wash it in
white gasoline.
a After washing the brush, check it
again for dirt and foreign matter.
a Prepare respective brushes for the
paint primer and glass primer.
2. Remove oil, dust, and dirt, etc. form the stick-

ing surfaces of cab (8) and window glass (9)
with white gasoline.
a If the sticking surfaces are not cleaned
well, the glass may not be stuck perfectly.
a Clean the all black part on the back side of
the window glass.
a After cleaning the sticking surfaces, leave 3) Evenly apply the paint primer to the surfaces
them for at lease 5 minutes to dry. to stick dam rubber and its outside surfaces
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a wheel to apply adhesive on operator's cab (8).
2 Paint primer:
loader.)
Sunstar primer for painting plane
580 super or equivalent
a Do not apply the primer more than 2
times.
(If it is applied more than 2 times, its
performance will be lowered.)
3. Apply primer (10).

a The using limit of primer is 4 months after
the date of manufacture. Do not use the
primer after this limit.
a Use the primer within 2 hours after un-
packing it.
PC300, 350-8 7
a Parts to be coated with primer; Apply the prim- a Never apply the wrong primer.
er all over dimension (a). If the glass primer, etc. is applied by mistake,
q Dimension to apply primer (a): 25 mm wipe it off with white gasoline.
4) Apply the glass primer to the sticking sur-

faces of window glass (9).
2 Glass primer:
Sunstar primer for glass 580
super or equivalent
a Do not apply the primer more than 2
times.
(If it is applied more than 2 times, its
performance will be lowered.)
a In addition to the above parts, additionally

apply the primer to right side window glass (1)
and door lower window glass (3).
q Range to apply primer additionally for right side
window glass (1): (b)
q Range to apply primer additionally for door
lower window glass (3): (c)
a After applying the primer, leave it for at least 5

minutes (within 8 hours) to dry.
a Parts to be coated with primer; Apply
the primer to all around of sticking
surface (d) of window glass (9) for
dam rubber (6) installation position
and operator's cab (8).
a Do not apply the primer to the
boarder about 5mm wide between the
black part and transparent part of the
glass.
a After applying the primer, leave it for
at least 5 minutes (within 8 hours) to
dry.
a Never apply the wrong primer.
If the paint primer, etc. is applied by
mistake, wipe it off with white gaso-
line.
8 PC300, 350-8
4. Stick dam rubber (both-sided adhesive a Stick dam rubber (6a) additionally to
tape)(6) along the inside edge of the glass right side window glass (1).
sticking section. q Positions to stick additional dam rub-
a Do not remove the release tape of dam ber to the right side window glass:
rubber on the glass sticking side before (f): 50 mm
sticking the glass. (g): 90 mm
a When sticking the dam rubber, do not (h): 250 mm
touch the cleaned surface to the utmost.
a Care should be taken not to float the dam
rubber of each sticking corner.
2) Stick dam rubber (6) for left side window

glass (2) to the position as shown in the
figure.
a When sticking dam rubber (6) around a
frame, do not lap its finishing end over the
starting end. Or, make clearance of about
5 mm between them (e).
1) Stick dam rubber (6) for right side window
glass (1) to the position as shown in the
figure.
PC300, 350-8 9
3) Stick dam rubber (6) for door lower win- a Stick dam rubber (6c) of the lower
dow glass (3) to the position as shown in side of the front window glass along
the figure. the outside edge of the lower line, dif-
ferently from other dam rubbers (6).
(If it is stuck along the inside, it will be
seen through the transparent part of
the glass.)
a Stick dam rubber (6b) additionally to

door lower window glass (3).
q Positions to stick additional dam
rubber to the door lower window
class: 5. Position the new window glass.
(j) : 110 mm 1) Check the clearance between the window
(k) : 90 mm glass and the operator's cab on the right,
(m) : 200 mm left, upper, and lower sides, and then posi-
tion the window glass to be the clearances
evenly.
2) Stick tapes [6] between window glass (9)
and operator's cab (8) and draw position-
ing line (n).
a Stick tapes [6] for positioning to 3
points, that is, right, left and lower
parts of the right side window glass,
left side rear window glass, and door
lower window glass for accurate posi-
tioning.
3) Cut the tape between window glass (9)
and operator's cab (8) with a knife, etc.
and then remove the window glass.
4) Stick dam rubber (6) for front window a Do not remove the tapes left on the
glass (4) to the position as shown in the window glass and the operator's cab
figure. before installing the window glass.
10 PC300, 350-8
a When positioning front window glass

2) Cut the tip of the adhesive nozzle (14) so
(4), set its horizontal position to the
that dimensions (q) and (r) will be as fol-
frame width.
And set its vertical position to make lows.
the height difference (p) between the q Dimension (q): 10 mm
frame top and the front window glass q Dimension (r): 15 mm
3 mm.
3) Set adhesive cartridge (12) to caulking

6. Apply adhesive. gun [7].
a Use either of two types of adhesives a An electric caulking gun is more effi-
according to the season. cient.
2 Adhesive (Apr. to Oct.):
Sunstar penguine seal 580 super “S”
or equivalent
2 Adhesive (Oct. to Apr.):
Sunstar penguine seal 580 super “W”
or equivalent
a The using limit of the adhesive is 4 months
after the date of manufacture. Do not use
the adhesive after this limit.
a Keep the adhesive in a dark place where
the temperature is below 25°C.
a Never heat the adhesive higher than 30°C.
a When reusing the adhesive, remove the
all hardened part form the nozzle tip.
1) Break aluminum seal (13) of the outlet of
adhesive cartridge (12) and install the
nozzle.
PC300, 350-8 11
4) Remove the release tape of dam rubber

on the glass adhesive side.
5) Apply adhesive (15) to the outside of dam
rubber (6) of the operator's cab.
a Apply adhesive (15) with dimensions

(s) and (t) for dam rubber (6) of oper-
ator's cab (8).
q Dimension (s): 10 mm
q Dimension (t): 15 mm
a Apply adhesive (15) higher than dam
rubber (6).
a Apply the adhesive evenly with same
height level.
7. Install the window glass.

1) Install window class (9), matching it to the
lines of the positioning tapes drawn in step
5.
a Since the window glass cannot be
removed and stuck again, stick it with
utmost caution.
a Stick the glass within 5 minutes after
applying the adhesive.
2) After sticking window glass (9), press all
around of it until it sticks to the dam rubber
a Apply adhesive (15) additionally to closely.
additional dam rubber (6a) of right a Press the corners of the window glass
side window glass and additional dam firmly.
rubber (6b) of door lower window
glass.
12 PC300, 350-8
a You can perform this work efficiently

by pulling window glass (9) from
inside of the operator's cab with suc-
tion cup X2.
a After installing front window glass (4),

fill the clearances between it and cen-
ter trim seal (16) with caulking mate-
rial in range (s) with dimensions (t)
and (u).
After applying the primer to glass (4)
of section A-A, apply the adhesive as
caulking material.
q Caulking dimension (t): 2 mm
q Caulking dimension (u): 5 mm
a When caulking, mask the glass side
and form the adhesive with a rubber
spatula as shown in the figure.
a Wipe off the projected adhesive.
2 Glass primer:
Sunstar primer for glass 580
super or equivalent
2 Adhesive:
SUNSTAR penguine seal 580
super “S” or “W” or equivalent
PC300, 350-8 13
8. Fix the window glass. 9. After installing the window glass, remove any
1) After installing right window glass (1) to excess of the primer and adhesive from the
the operator's cab, insert stopper rubbers operator's cab and window glass.
X3 to 2 places (v) at the bottom of the a By using the white gasoline, wipe off the
glass to fix the glass. adhesive before it is dried up.
a When cleaning the glass, do not give an
impact on it.
10. Protect the stuck window glass.

1) Keep the stopper rubbers, styrene foam
blocks, and rubber bands installed for 10
hours.
(at temperature of 20°C and humidity of
60%)
2) After removing the stopper rubbers, sty-
rene foam blokes, and rubber bands, wait
at least 14 hours, that is, at least 24 hours
in total, before operating the machine
actually.
2) By using styrene foam blocks [9] and rub-

ber bands [10], fix the window glass and
the dam rubber to fit them completely.
14 PC300, 350-8
Removal and installation of front

window assembly
k Lower the work equipment completely to
the ground and stop the engine.
a To replace the front window glass, the front win-
dow assembly must be removed from the oper-
ator's cab. The procedure for removing and
installing the front window assembly (front
frame and front window glass) is explained
below.
Removal
1. Raise the front window assembly to the ceiling
and fix it with the rear locks (on both sides).
2. Remove left corner block (1) and right corner

block (2). [*1]
a Mounting bolt (4) and washer (3) for left

corner block are used to hang the pull-up
assist cable in the following step 6.
6. Remove left lower pin (7). [*2]

a By removing left lower pin (7), plate (8) at
the end of pull-up assist cable (9) comes
off.
a Hang plate (8) on the mounting bolt of left
corner block (use washer) and set in
place.
k The return load of 58.8 N {6 kg} is
applied to the rear of the operator's
3. Release the rear lock of the cab. cab. Accordingly, take care when
removing left lower pin (7) to discon-
4. Lower the front window assembly carefully a nect pull-up assist cable (9).
little. Put out rollers (5) and (6) under the both
sides of the front window through the portion
from which the corner blocks were removed in
the above step 2. (the portion where the rail is
open) and hold them.
5. Remove rollers (5) and (6) under the both

sides of the front window.
PC300, 350-8 15
9. Twist front window assembly (10) to the right

and left to remove both upper rollers (11) and
(12) from the rails, and then remove front win-
dow assembly (10).
7. Pull out the bottom of front window assembly

(10) though the rail opening portion and lower
it gradually.
8. Lower front window assembly (10) completely.

a Do not let the front window assembly
touch the monitor.
16 PC300, 350-8
Installation a Install the right corner block so that clear-

q Carry out installation in the reverse order to ance (a) between the rail and right corner
removal. block (2) becomes 0 – 2.0 mm.
a Install the right corner block so that there
[*1] is no level difference at the rolling surface
q Adjust opening and closing of the front window (R) of the roller.
assembly according to the following proce-
dure.
1. Open and close the front window to check that
it does not interfere with the rails and that the
rollers are not hitched.
2. If there is any problem in opening and closing
of the front window, loosen the mounting bolt of
roller adjustment bracket (13) and adjust the
condition of the front window, and then tighten
the mounting bolt again.
a Make sure that bracket (13) is not
mounted on the angle.
3 Mounting bolt: 34.3 Nm {3.5 kgm}
5. Install left corner block (1).

a Fully tighten the block after adjusting the
“Close” position in the following step 6.
a Install the left corner block so that clear-
ance (b) between the rail and left corner
block (1) becomes 0 – 2.0 mm.
a Install the left corner block so that there is
no level difference at the rolling surface
(R) of the roller. (Refer to the above fig-
ure.)
3. Raise the front window assembly and fix it with

the rear locks (on both sides).
a Check that the locks in the rear of the
operator's cab are securely fastened.
4. Install right corner block (2).

a Fully tighten the block after adjusting the
“Close” position in the following step 6.
PC300, 350-8 17
6. Adjust the “Close” position of the front window

assembly lock according to the following pro-
cedure.
1) Tighten left and right corner blocks (1) and
(2) at roughly right positions so that front
window glass (14) is attached firmly to
cab-side trim seal (15).
7. After the adjustment, splash water heavily over

the front window glass and check that the
water does not leak into the cab.
2) Check the working condition of right and

left locks (16) and (17) when opening and
closing the front window assembly.
q If right and left locks (16) and (17) do
not work normally.
1] Loosen lock fitting bolt (18), move
lock (16) forward, and then tighten the
bolt again.
a The same applies to the right
side.
2] After moving the lock, recheck the fit-
ness of front window glass (14) and
cab-side trim seal (15) which was
checked in step 1).
3] Repeat the work in 1] and 2] until the
fitness of the front window glass and
the working condition of locks (16)
and (17) are both acceptable, and
then tighten the mounting bolts of the
right and left corner blocks.
18 PC300, 350-8
8. Adjust the “Open” position of the front window 3) Close front window assembly (10).
assembly lock. 4) Loosen locknut (20) of right and left side of
1) After adjusting the “Close” position of the rubber stoppers (18), and then pull back
front window assembly lock in steps 6 and both rubber stoppers (18) so that they
7, raise the front window assembly to the won't contact with the fr ont window
ceiling. assembly when it is in “Open” position.
2) Set the front window assembly locks at
the both sides of rear of the operator's cab
to the “Open” position, and then check the
following items.
q Check the working condition of right
a nd left l ock s ( 16) and ( 17) ( as
explained above).
q Front window assembly must be in
contact with the right and left rubber
stoppers (18) and furthermore, must
be pushing them backward for 1.5 –
3.0 mm.
q The front window assembly must be
pushing the limit switch backward for
4 – 7 mm. 5) Loosen both sides of locknuts (22), and
a The position of limit switch (19) can- adjust the position of striker bolt (21).
n ot be ad ju st ed. T he re for e , th e a Striker bolt (21): M10
“Open” position of the front window Inner diameter of plate (23): ø 14.5
assembly is decided within the range mm
where this switch works.
a Limit switch (19) is used to prevent
the windshield wiper from moving
when turning the wiper switch on by
m i s ta k e w h e n t h e f r o n t w i n d o w
assembly is in “Open” position. If the
wiper operates when there is no glass
in the front, the wiper falls down
inside the cab and causes trouble.
To check whether limit switch (19) is
working, turn the key switch on and
see that, even if the wiper switch is
turned on, the wiper does not operate
when the front window assembly is in
“Open” position.
1] Front window assembly (10) must be
pushing the limit switch backward for
4 – 7 mm (at “Open” position).
2] Working condition of lock (17).
q After checking the above items, if it

becomes necessary to do the adjust-
ment.
PC300, 350-8 19
6) Adjustment of right and left rubber stop- 4] Tighten locknuts (20) of the both
pers (18). sides of rubber stopper (18).
1] Bring front window assembly (10) (the
lock should be in “Open” position) into
contact with right and left rubber stop-
pers (18).
9. Adjust stopper (24) of the front window assem-

bly.
1) Adjust and lock both sides of stopper (24)
2] Close front window assembly (10). so that when pulling up the front window
3] Turn right and left rubber stoppers assembly, surface (d) of stopper (D) of
(18) to the left for one and a half front window assembly (10) is in contact
rotation. with surface (c) of stopper (24).
a One turn of rubber stopper (18)
to the left is equivalent to
squashing the rubber for approxi-
mately 1.5 mm.
a When the front window assembly
is in “Open” position, the front
window assembly must be push-
ing right and left rubber stoppers
(18) for 1.5 – 3.0 mm.
20 PC300, 350-8
10. Check the operating effort of the lock of the

front window assembly.
1) After finishing the adjustment of steps 6 –
9, check that latching efforts of both right
and left locks (16) and (17) are even.
a Check the latching efforts on both
“Close” side (in the front of the opera-
tor's cab) and “Open” side (in the rear
of the operator's cab).
[*2]
3 Left lower pin:
27 – 34 Nm {2.75 – 3.47 kgm}
2 Mounting bolt: Adhesive (LT-2)
PC300, 350-8 21
Removal and installation of floor 5. Disconnect ground (2).

frame assembly
Removal
k In the case that you do not drain the cool-
ant, if you disconnect the heater hose when
the coolant temperature in the radiator is
high, you may be scalded. In this case, wait
until the coolant temperature lowers and
then disconnect the heater hose.
k Collect the air conditioner refrigerant
(R134a) from air conditioner circuit in
advance.
a Ask professional traders for collecting and fill-
ing operation of refrigerant (R134a). 6. Disconnect the following PPC hoses from the
a Never release the refrigerant (R134a) to the travel PPC valve. The color of the band is;
atmosphere. q (3): Red
q (4): No color
k If refrigerant gas (R134a) gets in your eyes, q (5): Green
you may lose your sight. Accordingly, put q (6): Blue
on protective goggles while you are collect- a Prepare an oil sump.
ing the refrigerant (R134a) or filling the air
conditioner circuit with the refrigerant 7. Disconnect top and bottom of connector (7).
(R134a). Collecting and filling work must be Top: P09
conducted by a qualified person. Bottom: P10
1. Turn the upper structure by 90°.

3. Remove the operator's cab assembly by refer-

ring to “Removal and installation of operator's
cab assembly”.
22 PC300, 350-8
q Step 8 – 10 is optional (for breaker). 20. Remove clamps (24) and (25). [*2]
8. Disconnect the following PPC hoses from the 21. Disconnect clamp (26). (If equipped)
PPC valve. The color of the band is;
q (8): Yellow
q (9): No color
9. Disconnect connectors S11 (10) and S10 (11).
10. Disconnect connectors P13 (12) and V30 (13).
22. Disconnect connectors N10 (27) and AC01

(28).
23. Disconnect connectors ECU10 and ECU11
( 29 ) fr o m t he ai r c on di t io n er c on tr o l l er
(ACCONT).
24. Cut tie-wrap (30) and draw in wiring harness
11. Disconnect ground (14). From the left, (31).
T04, T05, T06, T07, T09, T10 25. Disconnect the clamp of wiring harness (32).
12. Disconnect clamp (15).
13. Disconnect connector A08 (16) from the clip.
14. Disconnect connector P17 (17) from the air
conditioner tube.
15. Remove the clamp and disconnect spacer
(18).
16. Disconnect hose (19).
a Check the connecting point.
a Disconnect the work equipment PPC at
joint box side. (See item 33.)
26. Disconnect connector H15 (33).

27. Remove grommet (34).
28. Move wiring harness (35) to the outside of the
floor frame.
a (SP) is made of sponge.
17. Disconnect hose (20).

18. Disconnect heater hose (21).
19. Remove mounting bolt (22) and disconnect air
conditioner tube (23). [*1]
PC300, 350-8 23
29. Disconnect the clamp of wiring harness (35).

30. Move plates (36) and (37) together with wiring
harness (35) to the boom side.
34. Pull out PPC hose assembly (41) of the work

equipment.
31. Open the engine hood and remove cover (38).
35. Sling floor frame assembly (42) and remove it.

a Make sure that the hoses, connectors,
32. Disconnect clamp (39). clamps, and so on are disconnected with-
33. Disconnect PPC hose (40) of the work equip- out fail.
4 Floor frame assembly: 250 kg
ment. From the top, the color of the band is:
White
Brown
None
Blue
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
a Prepare an oil sump.
24 PC300, 350-8
Installation
removal.
[*1]
a When installing the air conditioner circuit hoses,
take care so that dirt, water, may not enter.
a Make sure before the installation that there is
O-ring at the piping connector of the air condi-
tioner hose.
a Check that there is no defect or deterioration on
the O-ring.
a When connecting the refrigerant piping, coat
the O-ring with compressor oil for new refrig-
erant (R134a) (Denso: ND-OIL8, Zexcel:
ZXL100PG (PAG 46 or equivalent)).
3 Mounting bolt: 8 – 12 Nm {0.8 – 1.2 kgm}
[*2]
a Make sure that the hoses do not lap over.
q Filling air conditioner circuit with refriger-

ant (R134a)
Fill the air conditioner circuit with refrigerant
(R134a).
a Filling quantity: 870 ± 50 g

PC300, 350-8 25
SEN02641-00

© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
26
SEN02642-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up

Electrical system
Removal and installation of air conditioner unit assembly .............................................................................. 2
Removal and installation of KOMTRAX communication modem assembly.................................................... 5
Removal and installation of monitor assembly................................................................................................ 6
Removal and installation of pump controller assembly ................................................................................... 8
Removal and installation of engine controller ............................................................................................... 10
PC300, 350-8 1
Removal and installation of air 7. Pull down opening and closing lever (8) of the
conditioner unit assembly outside air filter cover.
8. Remove outside air filter (9).
Removal
k In the case that you do not drain the cool-
ant, if you disconnect the heater hose
when the coolant temperature in the radia-
tor is high, you may be scalded. In this
case, wait until the coolant temperature
lowers and then disconnect the heater
hose.
k Collect the air conditioner refrigerant
(R134a) from air conditioner circuit in
advance.
a Ask professional traders for collecting and fill-
ing operation of refrigerant (R134a).
a Never release the refrigerant (R134a) to the 9. Remove rear covers (10) to (13).
atmosphere.
k If refrigerant gas (R134a) gets in your

eyes, you may lose your sight. Accord-
ingly, put on protective goggles while you
are collecting the refrigerant (R134a) or
filling the air conditioner circuit with the
refrigerant (R134a). Collecting and filling
work must be conducted by a qualified
person.
1. Turn the upper structure by 90°.

3. Remove front window (1).

4. Remove step plate (2).
5. Remove floor mat (3).
2 PC300, 350-8
10. Remove duct (14).

a Disconnect connector H15 fixed on the
back from the clip.
16. Remove ducts (22) and (23).

a Cut tie-wrap.
17. Remove duct (24) upper and lower.
18. Remove duct (25) upper and lower.
13. Remove plate (17). 19. Disconnect plate (26) from the cab wall.
14. Remove lock pin (18) and remove duct (19).
15. Remove ducts (20) and (21). 20. Disconnect connectors N10 (27) and AC01
a Cut tie-wrap. (28).
21. Disconnect connectors ECU10 and ECU11
( 2 9 ) f r o m t h e a ir c o n d i t i o n e r c o n t r o l l e r
(ACCONT).
22. Loosen tie-wrap (30) and draw in wiring har-

ness (31).
PC300, 350-8 3
23. Remove cover (32). Installation

removal.
[*1]
a When installing the air conditioner circuit hoses,
take care so that dirt, water, may not enter.
a Make sure before the installation that there is
O-ring at the piping connector of the air condi-
tioner hose.
a Check that there is no defect or deterioration on
the O-ring.
a When connecting the refrigerant piping, coat
the O-ring with compressor oil for new refrig-
erant (R134a) (Denso: ND-OIL8, Zexcel:
24. Remove mounting bolt (33) and disconnect air ZXL100PG (PAG 46 or equivalent)).
conditioner tube (34). [*1] 3 Mounting bolt: 8 – 12 Nm {0.8 – 1.2 kgm}
25. Disconnect heater hose (35).

a Check the connecting point. q Filling air conditioner circuit with refriger-
ant (R134a)
Fill the air conditioner circuit with refrigerant
(R134a).
a Filling quantity: 870 ± 50 g

26. Remove the 7 mounting bolts and air condi-

tioner unit assembly (36).
4 PC300, 350-8

KOMTRAX communication
modem assembly
Removal
1. Remove covers (1) – (4).
2. Twist antenna wire (5) and disconnect it.

3. Disconnect connectors K01(6) and CK02 (7).
4. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and KOMTRAX
communication modem assembly (8).
Installation
removal.
PC300, 350-8 5

monitor assembly
Removal
1. Remove cap (1).

2. Remove cover (2) and then disconnect wiring
connector P31 (3) for air conditioner sunlight
sensor (S).
3. Remove duct (4).
4. Remove cover (5) as follows. [*1]
1) Insert flat-head screwdriver inside slit (SL)
and push it upward. 5. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and lift monitor
2) Release lock (L) and remove the cover. assembly (6). [*2]
3) Disconnect wiring connector M04 of the 6. Disconnect connectors CM01 (7), CM02 (8)
cigarette lighter from the back of cover (5). and CM03 (9).
a Since CM02 (8) and CM03 (9) can be
installed reversely, be careful not to mis-
take. CM 03 (9) is a green connector.
7. In the case of rear camera specification, dis-
connect connector CN-5 (11).
8. Disconnect connector (10).
6 PC300, 350-8
Installation
[*1], [*2]
1) Temporarily install monitor assembly (6) with 4
mounting bolts, and then install cover (5).
2) With cover (5) installed, tighten the mounting
bolts of monitor assembly.
q Carry out the rest of installation in the reverse

order to removal.
PC300, 350-8 7
Removal and installation of pump

controller assembly
Removal
Installation
q Installation is done in the reverse order of re-
moval.
a Reference
1. Procedure for removing connector cover (1)
1) Cut and remove cable tie (2).
2. Disconnect relay R08 (4) from the clip.
2) Move lever (3) up.
3. Disconnect bracket (5) and put it to the right
side.
4. Disconnect wiring connectors C01 (6) and C02
(7) as follows.
q Tilt lock (L12) inside while pressing lock
(L1).
a Bar (B) comes out and the lock is re-
leased.
5. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and pump con-
troller assembly (8).
3) Lightly push part (A) of connector cover

(1) from both sides to unfasten claw (B).
4) Remove connector cover (1) around claw
(C).
8 PC300, 350-8
a Connector without connector cover 3) Set claw (C) to the connector and place
(1) connector cover (1).
a Take care that wiring harness (5) will
not be caught.
2. Procedure for installing connector cover

1) Push in right and left sliders (4) as far as
possible. 4) Set claw (B) and install connector cover
(1).
a Right and left sliders (4) pushed in as

far as possible (Left figure) 5) Bind connector cover (1) and wiring har-
2) Move lever (3) of connector cover (1) from ness with a new cable tie. (See 1. 1).)
the upper position to the left position (lock
position) in the figure.
a (B), (C): Claws
a If the sliders and lever are not set as
shown in the following figure, the con-
nector is not disconnected or locked
securely with the lever. Accordingly,
check their positions again.
PC300, 350-8 9

engine controller
Removal
terminal of the battery.
2. Disconnect connectors EC01 (1), ENG (2), and

CE03 (3).
3. Remove engine controller (4).
Installation
removal.
10 PC300, 350-8
PC300, 350-8 11
SEN02642-00

© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
12
SEN02004-00
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
90 Diagrams and drawings 1

Hydraulic diagrams and drawings
Hydraulic circuit diagram................................................................................................................................. 3
PC300, 350-8 1
SEN02004-00 90 Diagrams and drawings
2 PC300, 350-8
Hydraulic circuit diagram
Hydraulic circuit diagram PC300, 300LC-8, PC350, 350LC-8 1 PC300, 300LC-8, PC350, 350LC-8
SEN02004-00
PC300, 350-8 3
PC300, 350-8 5
SEN02004-00
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
6
SEN02005-01
PC300-8
PC300LC-8
PC350-8
PC350LC-8

PC300-8 60001 and up
PC350-8 60001 and up
90 Diagrams and drawings 1

Electrical diagrams and drawings
Electrical circuit diagram ................................................................................................................................. 3
Connector arrangement diagram .................................................................................................................... 5
PC300, 350-8 1
SEN02005-01 90 Diagrams and drawings
2 PC300, 350-8
Electrical circuit diagram
Electrical circuit diagram PC300, 300LC-8, PC350, 350LC-8 PC300, 300LC-8, PC350, 350LC-8
SEN02005-01
PC300,350-8 3
Connector arrangement diagram
Connector arrangement diagram PC300, 300LC-8, PC350, 350LC-8 PC300, 300LC-8, PC350, 350LC-8
Connector Number Arrangement Connector Number Arrangement

Type Component name Type Component name
No. of pins drawing No. of pins drawing
A13 DT 2 Intermediate connector F-1 N10 4 A/C unit T-8
A22 DT 2 Intermediate connector H-9 P01 AMP 3 Bucket DIG pressure sensor L-2
A40 DT 4 Back camera 1 J-9 P02 X 2 Boom down pressure switch L-2
A41 DT 4 Camera 2 H-9 P03 X 2 Swing right pressure switch L-2
A42 DT 4 Camera 3 P04 AMP 3 Arm DIG pressure sensor L-2
A43 S 8 Monitor cable V-1 P05 X 2 Bucket dump pressure switch L-1
AC01 — 8 A/C unit Y-3 P06 X 2 Boom raise pressure switch L-1
C2 2 Engine oil pressure switch AK-6 P07 X 2 Swing left pressure switch L-1
C4 3 Boost pressure sensor AL-9 P08 X 2 Arm dump pressure switch L-1
C5 2 Engine water temperature sensor AK-1 P09 X 2 Travel signal pressure switch T-1
C8 3 Common rail pressure sensor AJ-7 P10 X 2 Travel steering pressure switch T-1
C9 DT 4 Intermediate connector AK-9 P13 X 2 Intermediate connector R-1
C10 DT 4 Intermediate connector AL-9 P14 X 2 Service pressure switch (front) R-2
C11 DT 4 Intermediate connector AM-9 P15 X 2 Service pressure switch (rear) R-1
C12 3 CAN AJ-6 P17 S090 2 A/C HI/LO pressure switch U-1
C13 3 G sensor AI-7 P20 M 3 Fuel dial R-7
C15 3 NE sensor AL-5 P21 X 1 Fuel level sensor D-9
C17 — 2 Intermit metering valve AI-7 P22 DT 2 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor K-3
C18 — 2 Lift pump AM-9 P23 DT 2 Air cleaner clogged sensor G-9
C28 DT 2 Intermediate connector AK-6 P24 X 2 Radiator water level sensor H-9
C29 3 Ambient pressure sensor AL-9 P25 AMP 3 F pump pressure sensor L-4
CE01 DRC 60 Engine controller AJ-6 P26 AMP 3 R pump pressure sensor K-3
CE02 DRC26-50S40 50 Engine controller AK-5 P31 2 Sunshine sensor P-5
CE03 DTP 4 Engine controller AJ-6 P44 DT 2 Engine oil level sensor AK-6
CK01 070 14 KOMTRAX communication module Z-7 P47 DT 2 WATER-IN-FUEL sensor F-9
CK02 070 10 KOMTRAX communication module Z-7 R01 Terminal 1 Battery relay (E terminal) B-6
CM01 070 18 Monitor P-5 R02 Terminal 1 Battery relay (BR terminal) B-7
CM02 070 12 Monitor P-4 R03A Terminal 1 Battery relay (M terminal) D-6
CM03 070 18 Monitor P-3 R03B Terminal 1 Battery relay (M terminal) D-6
CM04 070 12 Monitor (disconnection) P-4 R04 Terminal 1 Battery relay (B terminal) D-7
CM05 070 8 Monitor (for camera) Q-6 R05 Relay 5 Lamp relay U-9
CP01 AMP 81 Controller U-8 R06 Relay 5 Relay for starter cut (PPC LOCK) P-9
CP02 AMP 40 Controller U-8 R07 Relay 5 Relay for starter cut (PERSONAL CODE) P-9
D01 SWP 8 Set of diode O-8 R08 Relay 5 Relay for horn W-9
D02 SWP 8 Set of diode O-8 R10 Relay 5 Relay for rear working lamp U-9
D03 SWP 8 Set of diode P-9 R12 Relay 5 Relay for cab head lamp W-9
D10 M 2 Diode X-8 R15 Terminal 1 Ribbon heater relay (coil circuit) C-5
D11 M 2 Diode Y-8 R16 Terminal 1 Robin heater relay (contact circuit) D-5
E06 DT 2 Intermediate connector (pair with C28) AK-6 R17 Terminal 1 Robin heater relay B-6
F01 — — Fuse box V-9 R18 Relay 5 Relay for auto preheater X-9
F04 L 2 Fusible link B-6 R20 Relay 5 Blower relay T-8
F05 M 2 Fusible link E-2 R21 Relay 5 Compressor relay T-8
H08 M 4 Intermediate connector Z-3 R23 Relay 5 Engine controller relay (1) W-9
H09 M 8 Intermediate connector AA-4 R24 Relay 5 Engine controller relay (2) X-9
H14 M 4 Intermediate connector V-1 S02 SWP 6 Lamp switch S-7
H15 S090 22 Intermediate connector V-1 S04 SWP 6 Swing lock switch S-7
H16 S 12 Intermediate connector Z-3 S05 SWP 6 Machine push up switch S-7
J01 J 20 Junction connector (Black) AA-7 S07 SWP 6 Beacon switch S-7
J02 J 20 Junction connector (Black) Y-3 S10 S090 2 Right knob switch R-6
J03 J 20 Junction connector (Green) Y-2 S11 Y090 2 Left knob switch W-1
J04 J 20 Junction connector (Green) Z-7 S14 M 3 PPC hydraulic lock switch W-1
J05 J 20 Junction connector (Orange) Y-8 S15 SWP 6 Heated seat T-7
J06 J 20 Junction connector (Orange) Y-8 S21 — 12 Emergency pump drive switch P-9
K01 M 2 Pump resistor P-6 S22 — 6 Emergency swing parking brake release switch P-9
K02 DT 3 CAN terminal resistance AJ-6 S25 S090 16 Intermediate connector Q-8
L01 DT 2 Working lamp (Boom) E-9 S30 S 8 Model selection connector U-8
L02 DT 2 Working lamp (R.H) C-2 S41 D 2 Switch box G-9
L03 M 2 Room lamp AE-8 SSW Starter switch R-6
L05 SWP 2 Beacon AF-9 T01 Terminal 1 Floor frame Y-3
L09 DT 2 Working lamp (Rear) J-9 T02 Terminal 1 Cab GND AH-3
L15 DT 2 Beacon AG-9 T03 M 1 Intermediate connector X-2
M01 DA 9 Radio X-1 T03A Terminal 1 Radio GND X-2
M02 M 2 Speaker (left) AH-8 T04 Terminal 1 Revolving frame J-2
M03 M 2 Speaker (right) AG-9 T05 Terminal 1 Revolving frame I-2
M04 2 Cigar lighter R-6 T06 Terminal 1 Revolving frame I-2
M05 M 6 Wiper motor P-3, AC-5 T07 Terminal 1 Revolving frame I-2
M06 KES 2 Washer motor L-4 T08 Terminal 1 Revolving frame D-2
M07 X 2 Horn (High tone) F-1 T09 Terminal 1 Revolving frame H-1
M08 X 2 Horn (Low tone) E-1 T10 Terminal 1 Revolving frame H-1
M09 M 2 Power supply (1) Z-3 T11 Terminal 1 Engine body earth AK-5
M10 M 2 Power supply (2) AB-4 T12 Terminal 1 Alternator GND AJ-1
M11 M 4 DC/DC converter AB-5 V01 DT 2 Locking primary press PPC solenoid valve M-5
M12 M 2 Power supply (12V) AA-4 V02 DT 2 Travel junction solenoid valve M-5
M13 M 2 12V socket AB-5 V03 DT 2 Confluence valve solenoid valve M-5
M14 DT 2 Travel alarm J-2 V04 DT 2 Travel speed solenoid valve M-4
M17 DT 2 Starter safety relay AJ-2 V05 DT 2 Swing parking brake solenoid valve M-4
M18 Terminal 1 Alternator (Terminal R) AK-1 V06 DT 2 Machine push up solenoid valve M-4
M20 Terminal 1 Starting motor (Terminal B) AJ-3 V07 DT 2 ATT return change solenoid valve M-3
M21 Terminal 1 Alternator (Terminal B) AK-1 V08 DT 2 2 step relief solenoid valve M-4
M22 Terminal 1 Alternator (Terminal E) AJ-1 V11 DT 2 PC-EPC valve L-6
M23 Terminal 1 Ribbon heater AL-9 V19 DT 2 LS-EPC valve L-7
M24 X 2 Intermediate connector G-9 V30 DT 2 ATT current control EPC S-1
M25 D 2 Refuel pump (OPT) F-9 W03 M 2 Rear limit switch AG-9
M34 X 1 Air conditioner compressor I-9, AJ-9
M35 DT 2 Heated seat W-2
M36 DT 2 Air suspension W-1
M40 X 2 Head lamp (left) (OP) AD-8
M41 X 2 Head lamp (right) (OP) AC-7
N08 DT 12 Service connector V-9
SEN02005-01
PC300,350-8
5
PC300, 350-8 7
SEN02005-01
© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved

Pc350 Manual de Operacion y Mantenimiento - Ing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pc350 Manual de Operacion y Mantenimiento - Ing

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pc350 Manual de Operacion y Mantenimiento - Ing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What equipment is covered in the manual?

What equipment is covered in the manual?

What information is included in the manual?

What information is included in the manual?

SEN01983-04

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

Machine model Serial number

00 Index and foreword 1

Composition of shop manual .......................................................................................................................... 2

Composition of shop manual 1

Section Title Form Number

Shop Manual, contents binder, binder label and tabs SEN01983-04

00 Index and foreword SEN01984-04

10 Structure, function and maintenance standard SEN01989-01

20 Standard value table SEN01999-01

30 Testing and adjusting SEN02000-01

Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode) SEN02634-01 q

50 Disassembly and assembly SEN02002-00

90 Diagrams and drawings SEN02003-01

Foreword and general information SEN01986-01

10 Structure, function and maintenance standard

Introduction of LS pressure ......................................................................................................... 22

20 Standard value table

30 Testing and adjusting

Testing engine oil pressure.......................................................................................................... 18

Failure code [CA131] Throttle Sensor High Error ....................................................................... 22

Failure code [DW43KA] Travel Speed Sol. Disc. ........................................................................ 14

50 Disassembly and assembly

Removal and installation of cylinder head assembly................................................................... 12

90 Diagrams and drawings

PC300, 350(LC)-8 Hydraulic excavator

Form No. SEN01985-04

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

Machine model Serial number

00 Index and foreword 1

1. General precautions 7) If welding repairs are needed, always

2. Preparations for work 6) When removing a cover which is under

4. Precautions for sling work and making

How to read the shop manual 1

1. Composition of shop manual

00. Index and foreword

10. Structure, function and maintenance standard

20. Standard value table

30. Testing and adjusting

50. Disassembly and assembly

2. Revision and distribution

q Revised edition mark

Symbol Item Remarks

k Safety Special safety precautions are necessary when performing work.

Special technical precautions or other precautions for preserving stan-

2 Coat Places to be coated with adhesives, etc. during assembly.

Explanation of terms for maintenance standard 1

1. Standard size and tolerance

a The tolerance may be indicated in the text

q Usually, the size of a hole and the size of

2. Standard clearance and standard value 5. Clearance limit

4. Repair limit and allowable value or allow-

Handling of electric equipment and hydraulic component 1

Points to remember when handling electric

2. Main failures occurring in wiring harness